Omron Machine And Process Safeguarding 2014_2015_Safety_Catalog 104608 Catalog

100584-Attachment 100584-Attachment 100584-Attachment 006085 Batch8 unilog cesco-content

2014-09-27

: Pdf 104608-Catalog 104608-Catalog 006085 Batch8 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 533

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2014-2015

Machine & Process Safeguarding
Solution Selection Guide

»» Expert Area
»» Safety Laser Scanners
»» Perimeter Access Guarding
»» Safety Light Curtains
»» Safety Edges and Bumpers
»» Safety Mats and Area Guarding
»» Safety Interlock Switches
»» Emergency Stop Devices
»» Force-Guided Relays/Power
Contactors with Mirror Contacts
»» Safety Monitoring Relays
»» Programmable Safety
Controllers
»» Two-Hand Control
»» Enabling Switch Devices
»» Safeguard Integration Services

Making Safety Simple—
Omron’s Concept for the Future
Today, forward-thinking manufacturers clearly realize the
new role of increased safety on the factory floor.
• Recently adopted international safety standards have
shifted the way systems are evaluated.
• Safety is a corporate responsibility, not an obstruction
to productivity.
• Safety is essential to increased productivity and
profitability.

“The modern user of safety
products demands a new vision.”
Poised at the leading-edge of safety solutions worldwide,
Omron’s STI safety products focus on making safety work.
We are aware of the many demands of automation safeguarding. Consequently, our automation safety products
meet or exceed local and international safety standards.
Omron is committed to providing safeguarding solutions
that meet your needs for safety and productivity. We design
and engineer our products by listening to and working
closely with our customers and authorized distributors. We
also provide you with:
• Experienced assistance
• Expert guidance in application, integration and
maintenance
• World-class support through Omron’s global network of
250 sales locations in 65 countries

Welcome to OMRON Automation & Safety — STI Safety Solutions
from Components to Consulting for Enhanced Worker Safety
8 Enabling Switches

1 Safety Light Curtains

Provides the additional protection needed
during set-up, programming and servicing of
robotic and automatic equipment.

The MS4800 and F3SJ models are simple to install, and
available in a wide selection of protected heights and
resolutions.

• Has distinct clicks for three easily
discernible positions

See Section D.

See Section M.
F3SJ-A

A4EG

NX-S

7 Safety Programmable Controllers
7 Safety Monitoring Relays
The NX-S series of controller offers Safety over
EtherCAT, our first to offer integrated safety
functionality into the Sysmac platform, suitable for mid
to large sized applications.
The G9SP stand-alone programmable safety controller
for mid-sized applications supports direct connection
to safety mats and non-contact switches. The NE1A
DeviceNet safety network
controller is well-suited for large
complex applications, while
safety monitoring relays are ideal
for ensuring control reliability in
smaller applications.
See Section J and Section K.

G9SX

NE1A

G9SP

6 Perimeter Guarding
PA4600 models are available with single and
multiple-beam models with an operating range to
70 meters. They’re perfect when installing fences
is not practical.
See Section C.

F3SJ-B

MSF4800

MS4800

F3SJ-E

6
2 Safety Laser
Scanners

OS32C

Our OS32C is a very
compact safety laser
scanner. It has 70 zone
configurations for complex
guarding parameters. Safety
coverage up to 4 m at 270
degrees.

8
1

4
5

See Section B.

Industry First!
EtherNet/IP capable of status
and measurement data
reporting.

3
7

See Section E and Section F.

3 Safety Interlock Switches
•
•
•
•
•
•

Guardlocking switches
Hinge pin switches
Non-contact switches
Limit switches
Tongue switches
Explosion-proof versions

See Section G.

5 Safety Edges & Bumpers
5 Safety Mats & Area Guarding
Built tough for tough environments. Combine a mat
with a controller to provide proven reliability.

2
Tamper resistant switches enhance
mechanical guarding methods.

PA4600

4 Emergency Stop Devices
• Enclosed and panel-mounted models available
with key-operated reset.
• Combination rope and push button actuated
emergency stop switches.
• Heavy duty housing offering rope spans to 200 meters
See Section H.

Contents

NEW PRODUCTS!

Expert Area

Safety Laser Scanners

Perimeter Access Guarding

Safety Light Curtains

Safety Edges and Bumpers

Safety Mats and Area Guarding

Safety Interlock Switches

Emergency Stop Devices

What’s new and hot this year? Check out our latest additions!
STI Safety Laser Scanners
OS32C-4M and OS32C-DM-4M
Our Compact Safety Laser Scanner
with EtherNet/IP Capabilities is now
available in 4 m safety range models
Our popular OS32C had integrated
management via EtherNet/IP and the
industry’s best flexible zone configurations.
The new 4 m range models offer even more
application opportunities.
For more information on the OS32C-DM,
turn to page B-3.

New 4 m Safety Range Models!

Safety Zone
4 m Max.

Detection Angle
270° Max.

Force-Guided Relays/
Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts

Warning Zones 1 & 2
15 m Max.

270° detection angle

Safety Monitoring Relays

Programmable Safety Controllers

Two-Hand Control

Enabling Switch Devices

Safeguard Integration Services

Programmable Safety Controllers
NX-S
Safety over EtherCAT Controller
Integrate safety into machine automation with the
new NX-S safety controller. The Sysmac automation
platform combines safety control with one controller,
one connection, and one software concept.
For more information on the NX-S,
turn to page K-4.

The applications described in this catalog are for
informational and instructional purposes only, and may
not represent actual usage. This publication has been
carefully checked for accuracy and is thought to be
fully consistent with the product it describes. However,
OMRON Automation and Safety does not assume
liability for the contents of this publication or the use of
any products described herein. OMRON Automation and
Safety reserves the right to make changes to the products
and/or documentation without further notification.
© 2014 by OMRON Electronics LLC.
All rights reserved.
Omron STI conforms to ISO 9001:2008 requirements,
as certified by TUV America Inc.

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

Why Buy from OMRON Automation and Safety?

The OMRON Automation and Safety Difference
Customer Focused for Continued Success
Adding value beyond the basics means that we are committed to our customers.
Our knowledge and experience adds value. We are focused on their needs. OMRON
Automation and Safety provides innovative engineering and system solutions to our
customer’s evolving application problems. We provide technical assistance in the field,
and by phone.

Instant Information —
Call us or go to www.sti.com
OMRON Automation and Safety is easy to
reach, technical support is easy to contact,
and critical information accessible 24 hours
a day via our website. Support engineers are
also available to answer technical questions
and provide application assistance. For a
complete list of support phone numbers, visit
www.sti.com/info.

Omron’s

Rapid Delivery Program
Our goal is to make selecting the right product easier and faster and to ensure
that your product selection will always be available in the shortest possible time.
What are Rapid Delivery Products?
Rapid Delivery products are the preferred products, and
the ones you should strongly consider for new applications.
What is the benefit of selecting a Rapid Delivery Product?
• Shorter Lead Time
• All Rapid Delivery Products have a delivery window.
Depending on the product line, this window is stock-to3 days or stock-to-5 days. You can be confident that the
product will arrive as needed, no follow-up or expediting.
• The Rapid Delivery Program is available in both the US
and Canada.

How will I be able to identify which products are Rapid
Delivery Products?
Simply go to www.sti.com and select the product series
that’s right for your application. Use our product configuration tool for the US or Canada to determine the specific
models available for Rapid Delivery.
Is there any limit to the quantity I can get of a Rapid
Delivery Product?
Yes, the quantity is restricted to allow us to deliver to every
customer. Larger quantities will be scheduled based on your
actual delivery needs.
So, exactly how does this program benefit me?
You can be confident that the lead time will be consistent
throughout the life of your program. If you stock spares you
may be able to reduce your safety stock level.

Products are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days!

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

Why Buy from OMRON Automation and Safety?

Global Solutions with Local Support
Keeping You Current
on Safety Requirements
In today’s marketplace, it is important to keep our customers
up-to-date on the latest technology advances and safety trends.
Omron offers full-day seminars, on-site workshops, and Safety &
Sandwiches Sessions. These training sessions provide you with
theory, hands-on demonstrations, and examples of real applications
that may be helpful in determining your own safety needs.

Technical Information at
the Expert Area on our
Website, www.sti.com
We call the Engineering Section of our
website the “Expert Area”. Information on
many safety-related topics is presented,
including: regulations, directives, safety
strategies, risk assessment, and protective
measures as well as operating information on Omron’s STI safety products. It is
designed as a guide to aid you in understanding the “ins and outs” of safety as it
applies to industrial solutions.

Authorized Distributors:
Uniquely Qualified to Offer Solutions
We have found that the best way to respond quickly and effectively to our
customers’ needs is through our extensive network of distributors. Through this network,
we are able to offer immediate local service and support.
To be a distributor, an organization must commit to a set of stringent requirements,
including factory training of sales engineers. Sales engineers continue to receive
training throughout the year through in-house seminars and on-line classes. This effort
guarantees that when you have a safety problem, the sales engineer you work with
will have the knowledge to help analyze your situation, aid you in selecting products,
and support you through installation. This commitment to training and safety expertise
ensures the best solution for your application, from start to finish.

Unbiased, Single-Source Solutions
Everything you need for a complete safety system is available through one source —
OMRON Automation and Safety. Supplying an extensive array of safety solutions guarantees that we will give you an unbiased recommendation for what will work best in your
particular situation. Our wide product line means we don’t have to force your application
to fit our products. OMRON Automation and Safety has the correct product for the job.

Globally Approved Products
The majority of our products have been agency approved to a variety of international
standards including UL, CSA, CE, DIN, IEC, and EN. In the U.S., our safety products
meet ANSI and OSHA standards.
R

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

Providing Solutions and Assistance to the EH&S Professional

Services Offered* and What to Expect
Many companies appreciate the value
of outsourcing special services such as
engineering, purchasing and maintenance
to partners who specialize in these areas.
Omron is uniquely equipped to be your
partner when it comes to machine safety
compliance.
We provide all the necessary machine
safeguarding services, including machine
guarding assessment, risk level identification, risk reduction planning, documentation, review of safety system and circuit
designs, and complete safety system
integration.

Turn-key Safety Integration
OMRON Automation and Safety specializes in offering safeguarding systems for
industrial fabrication equipment, manufacturing systems, and robot cells compliant
with all applicable North American safety
standards. Our service includes an on-site
project manager to monitor quality and
ensure that the safety measures are installed properly. Expert installers fabricate
custom guards on-site and our specially

trained electricians ensure that control
reliability requirements of safety circuitry
are met.

Safety Project
Engineering/Design

Safeguarding Assessment/
Risk Level Identification/
Risk Reduction Planning

After complete risk level identification,
any gaps in compliance need to be filled.
If you prefer, we can engineer and design
the required safeguards and provide you
with the materials and components necessary to complete the project yourself.
Our engineers will design control reliable
circuitry as required and custom fabricate
guards to meet your needs.

OMRON Automation and Safety offers
detailed risk level identification including risk reduction recommendations to
bring your equipment into compliance
with applicable OSHA Regulations and/
or ANSI, RIA, NFPA, NEC, CSA, EN, IEC,
and ISO standards. We inspect perimeter
and point of operation guarding in addition
to power isolation, including pneumatic,
hydraulic and electrical lockout. Our
detailed report provides you with the initial
risk level, written recommendations for
compliance, a plan view drawing of the
equipment with recommended safeguards,
the estimated risk level achieved after all
recommended safeguards are properly installed, photos and an estimate to properly
safeguard the machine or process.

Safety Standards Writing
Let us help you create or improve your
corporate safety standard. Our active
participation on OSHA, ANSI, and RIA
standards writing committees provides us
with a wealth of information to share. We
can write your standard for you or review
and edit your existing standards for compliance with the most current regulations
and standards.

Machine Safety Seminars
OMRON Automation and Safety offers
on and off-site training. The seminars vary
from half-day to 2-day sessions and may
include topics such as:
• Risk Level Identification/Risk Reduction
Process
• Introduction to Safeguarding
Technologies
• Control Reliability (circuit requirements)
• Requirements for Barrier Guards
• Stop Time and Safety Distance
Measurement
• Stop/E-Stop/Safety Stop Summary
• Lockout/Tagout & Alternative Methods to
Control Hazardous Energy
• General Requirements for Machine
Tools

These seminars are targeted for EH&S
Managers, Safety Personnel, Single
Point Accountable Person(s) for Machine
Safeguarding, and Safety Engineers.

*Machine Safeguarding Services are available in North America, Europe, South America and
South East Asia.

Locate the
Safeguard Integration Services Section
by turning to page N-1.

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

Providing Solutions and Assistance to the EH&S Professional

Justifying the Cost of Safeguarding Equipment
Machinery safeguarding represents one of the best investments on the plant floor. For
example, in a study conducted by the Liberty Mutual Group for the US, 61 percent of
executives say they save $3 for every dollar invested in safety equipment and programs.
This is just one example of many worldwide studies that show the importance of investing
in machinery safety.
No one discounts the impact that an accident has on plant operations. However, the
cost of an accident can be staggering. In addition to the emotional cost to employees
and managers, the direct and indirect costs of an accident accelerate quickly. Direct
medical expenses and workers’ compensation benefits are just the tip of the iceberg. The
indirect costs of lost production, OSHA fines, replacing damaged goods and machinery,
and paying higher workers’ compensation premiums can represent a larger portion of the
total cost of an accident.
The same survey of executives indicates that executives figure to spend $3 to $5 of
indirect costs for every dollar of direct costs of an accident. For example, an accident
with direct costs of $10,000 has additional indirect costs of $30,000 to $50,000. The
impact of just this one accident becomes even more significant when a company realizes
that the bulk of these costs are not covered by insurance.
OSHA offers a software program, $AFETY PAYS, as part of its eTools and Electronic
Products for Compliance Assistance. This interactive package helps employers
determine the potential impact of occupational injuries by estimating both direct and
indirect costs.
A user supplies information about company profit margins, and the program calculates
the additional sales needed to cover the cost of an injury. The program uses real insurance company claim data and an expert software system. It can be found on the OSHA
web site at: http://www.osha.gov/dcsp/smallbusiness/safetypays/estimator.html.

Why You Should
Partner with Omron
Because..
■ The expertise required in all

phases of the safeguarding
process is not a core competency
of most manufacturers or maintenance personnel.
■ EH&S personnel have to be

involved with every area of
Environmental, Health & Safety.
They are too busy to get involved
with required details of guarding
systems and safety interfaces.
■ It needs to get done right the

first time.
■ We have an established history

of providing companies with safe
work environments.
■ Our employees stay up-to-date

with industry-related trends by
participating with and contributing
to standards committees.
■ Our employees are members

of various industry trade
organizations.

Peace of Mind...
■ Knowing that your machines or

process lines are safeguarded
correctly to the current standards.
■ With 100% compliance – not 90%

or less.
■ Having documented risk level

identification and risk reduction
strategy.

■ Knowing machine operators are

trained on the safety systems
installed.
■ By saving money because it only

needs to be done once.

Perimeter guarding system to guard aluminum coil slitting line.

Locate the
Safeguard Integration Services Section
by turning to page N-1.

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

Omron: Your Technical Resource

Expert Area

Basic and In-Depth Technical Info
Over 200 Pages of Technical Information
is Located at www.sti.com
Do you need to hone your safety terminology or learn the basics
of setting up the safest application? What’s new in regulations and
directives? What’s the difference between a Type 2 and a Type 4
light curtain? If you have questions, you’ll find the answers ... plus
so much more on our website. Just go to www.sti.com and click on
“Expert Area”.
Information on many safety-related topics is presented including:
regulations, directives, safety strategies, risk assessment, and protective measures, as well as operating information on Omron’s STI
safety products. It is designed as a guide to aid you in understanding the “ins and outs” of safety as it applies to industrial solutions.

Rotary Interlock

Magnetic
Interlock

Safety Laser Scanner
Safety Light
Curtain

Safety
Pressure
Mat
Actuatoroperated
Interlock

Actuator-operated
Interlock

Rope Pull
E-Stop
Solenoid-locking
Interlock

Safety Light Curtain

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

10
750+
+
Pages!
What You’ll See in
the Expert Area

Omron: Your Technical Resource

For more information in the
Expert Area
turn to page A-1.

Here’s just a sample of
some of the technical
articles that you’ll find in
the Expert Area

Not only do we convey necessary
safety information to you, but we try to
do it in a way that is interesting and easy
to understand. Charts and diagrams like
the one seen below are abundant in the
Expert Area.

Regulations & Directives
■ OSHA Regulations
■ North American Safety Standards
■ Harmonized European Standards

Safety Strategy & Risk Assessment
■ Safety Strategy —
Hazard Identification & Risk
Evaluation

RISK ASSESSMENT
Identify all machines within the
workplace Then for each machine

Have Questions?

MACHINE LIMITS

Can you foresee all possible
operation and use of the machine

YES
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION

Identify each hazard situation Then for each hazard

Estimate the level of risk due to
the hazard

RISK REDUCTION

RISK EVALUATION

Have any safety measures
been analysed and proven
adequate?

“How does that work?”

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring
Diagrams

“What’s the risk?”

■ Safety-Related Control Systems

“How can I improve our safety?”

RISK ESTIMATION

Is the level of risk
acceptable?

■ Machine Safeguarding Checklist

Consult relevant
information and
expertise

Address the hazard by a
process of re-design or
additional measures
Determine whether the
performance and functional
characteristics of the safety
measure are suitable for the
machine and its type of use

We Have Answers!
• Check out the Expert Area
section of this catalog

Types of Protective Measures
■ Choice of Protective Measures
■ Type 2 vs. Type 4 Light Curtains

• Visit the Expert Area
at www.sti.com

■ Light Curtains —
Installation Requirements &
Calculating the Minimum Safe
Distance

YES

SAFETY STRATEGY
Ds

END OF
PROCESS

■ Common Circuit Examples

■ Sample Checkout Procedure Log
Light Curtain

■ Sample Test Procedure
■ Safety Mats — Theory of
Operation, Selection & Installation
■ Understanding the IP Rating
System
Hazard Zone

POSITIVE MODE
LIMIT SWITCH

Supplemental
Guarding
Example

Mechanical
Barrier

www.sti.com/info

■ Proper Installation of Rope or Wire
Pull Emergency Stop Devices

Many, many more articles
are available online in our
EXPERT AREA section of
www.sti.com.

Introduction

OS32C Safety Laser Scanner

Area Guarding and Detection

OS32C Safety Laser Scanner
B

The Compact OS32C Safety Laser Scanner
Now with EtherNet/IP Connectivity for Status and Measurement Data Reporting
Industry Best!

The STI OS32C-DM safety laser scanner is the industry’s first to feature
Ethernet/IP communications, capable of reporting both status and measurement
data. Additionally, its class-leading small size; Individual Sector Indicators; light
weight and low power consumption; two-hundred seventy degree detection
area; and up to seventy sets of safety and warning zone combinations provide
the versatility to tackle many guarding situations.

Flexible zone configurations

Industry First!

Integrated Monitoring and Analysis via
Ethernet

Lowest Profile

104.5 mm

Small Size

Compact and versatile safety laser scanner

Lightweight

1.3 kg

Lightweight body for easy handling and installation

104.5 mm

142.7 mm
133.0 mm

Low Power
Consumption

Low power consumption reduces battery load on AGVs
(3.75 W in standby mode)

4 m Safety Range Models!

Easy handling and installation
Safety Zone
4 m Max.

SIMPLE and VERSATILE
to solve many applications.
Power consumption savings up to 50%

www.sti.com/info

Warning Zones 1 & 2
15 m Max.

270° detection angle

Detection Angle
270° Max.

Introduction

OS32C Safety Laser Scanner

Low profile allows installation in small spaces
For collision avoidance of AGVs (Automated Guided Vehicles)
For intrusion detection through an entrance
For presence detection within a machine’s hazardous area

Locate the
Safety Laser Scanners Section
by turning to page B-1.

Collision Avoidance
Small, light & compact body provides
for easy installation on an AGV.
Low power consumption
(5 W reduces battery load on the
AGV (3.75 W in standby mode)
Up to 70 zone set combinations
support complex AGV tracks.
Front/Rear Monitoring

All-around Monitoring

Intrusion Detection
Reference Boundary Monitoring
function supports intrusion detection
without physically blocking the
entrance.
Supports various operation patterns
by switching zone sets.

Intrusion detection with vertical installation

Safety zone can be selected

Presence Detection
Compact body allows for use inside
the machine.
Detection angle of 270° provides
coverage of two sides with one scanner.

Presence detection of 270°

www.sti.com/info

Guarding inside the machine

Introduction

OS32C Safety Laser Scanner

Area Guarding and Detection

OS32C Safety Laser Scanner
B

(continued)

Convenient and Easy-to-Use Functions
Industry Best!
Flexible zone configurations
For complex AGV applications, up to 70
combinations can be set – each with one
safety zone and two warning zones. The
two warning zones can be set to support
various purposes such as warning sound
and speed control.

Safety Zone
Warning Zone 1
Warning Zone 2

Industry First!
Integrated monitoring and analysis via Ethernet

Simplified wiring

Industry’s first Ethernet-compliant Safety Laser Scanner allows
the user to check operating state and analyze the cause of an
emergency stop via LAN even in large-scale applications using
multiple scanners.

Omron’s innovative I/O method requires
fewer inputs when configuring multiple
zones. Only 4 inputs are required to select
from 6 zone sets. If all 8 inputs are used, up
to 70 zone sets are available.

Response time can be set from
80 ms to 680 ms

Ethernet

Response time adjustment can filter out
erroneous detections (machine stoppage)
caused by pollutants in the environment.

Operating state can be
determined at a glance
Individual sector indicators*
*US patent No.: US 6, 753, 776

Status Diagnostic Display:
Status/Error Codes, Run, Stop, Interlock and
Warning Output Indicators

www.sti.com/info

Eight sector indicators show the direction
of intrusion. Front display shows operating
state and error codes.

Introduction

OS32C Safety Laser Scanner

I/O Block

Replaceable sensor, no
reprogramming needed
No reprogramming needed, the
configuration is stored in the I/O block.
Replacing a damaged sensor is fast
and easy.

B
Detachable

Locate the
Safety Laser
Scanners Section
by turning to page B-1.

Sensor Block

The OS32C constantly monitors reference points and turns OFF
the safety outputs when a shift in its position is detected.

Model

EIP &
Measurement
Data

Reference boundary monitoring function

To tailor the OS32C to your installation,
eight options are available for the location
of the power and ethernet connections.

Range (m)

Cable access options

(Per international standard IEC 61496-3, area scanners used in applications where
the angle of approach exceeds ±30° with respect to the detection plane, must use
Reference Boundary Monitoring in the detection zone.)

Gap
occurs

Cable
Access

OS32C-BP

Back

OS32C-SP1

Left side

OS32C-BP-DM

Yes

Back

OS32C-SP1-DM

Yes

Left side

OS32C-BP-4M

Back

OS32C-SP1-4M

Left side

OS32C-BP-DM-4M

Yes

Back

OS32C-SP1-DM-4M

Yes

Left side

These can be selected according to the
needs of AGV or facilities design.

Safety Output ON

Safety Output OFF

Free software for
easy configuration

OS32C with cable access on the
back (OS32C-BP)

The configuration of the
safety zone and warning
zones can be done in
real time using a PC.
Configurations can also
be created or modified
offline.

OS32C with cable
access on the left side
(OS32C-SP1)

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

Perimeter Access Guarding & Safety Light Curtains

Our Wide Selection Guarantees You’ll Get Exactly What You Need

Safety Light Curtains

Powerful Solutions for
Today’s Tough Automation Guarding Obstacles

OMRON Automation and Safety provides safety light curtains to solve
your optical guarding needs. From compact models designed for machine
locations where space is tight, to larger, robust light curtains powerful
enough to guard large perimeters. Omron offers you a choice, because
when it comes to automation safeguarding, one size does not fit all.

Optimized Performance
With STI safety light curtains, you can select a system in the size and with
the specifications you need to optimize performance. Our designs allow you
to tailor a system for the lowest possible system cost — you only pay for
what you need.

Unbiased Recommendation
Supplying such an extensive array of light curtains and controls guarantees that Omron will give you an unbiased recommendation for what will
work best in your particular situation. Our wide product line means you don’t
have to struggle to “make one fit.” We don’t force your application to fit our
light curtain. We fit your needs, from point of operation to perimeter guarding. We have the right product for the job.

From tight spaces to perimeter guarding,
when it comes to machine safeguarding,
Omron knows that ...

One size
DOES NOT fit all.
■

F3SJ-A —

This small profile, safety light curtain offers the
greatest number of possible configurations.
The F3SJ-A safety light curtain combines fast
response time with 14, 20, 25, 30 or 55 mm object
resolutions. The protected heights of the F3SJ-A are
impressive, and Omron allows you to buy just what
you need. The F3SJ-A is easy to use for your basic
applications and feature rich for the more advanced.
These features include a warning zone function, partial
muting and position detection muting in addition to fixed
and floating blanking.

www.sti.com/info

■

F3SJ-E and F3SJ-B —

The “EASY” and “BASIC” type light
curtains are ideal for easy, simple and
affordable protection.
The F3SJ-E “EASY type” light curtain
is recommended for those who need
simple and affordable hand protection.
The F3SJ-B “BASIC” type light curtain
offers simple hand protection, series
connection and muting functions.

Introduction

■

Perimeter Access Guarding & Safety Light Curtains

MS4800 Series —

The MS4800 light curtain family
is an all-purpose light curtain
available in three distinct versions.
These versions are identified
as the Advanced (MS4800A),
the Basic (MS4800B) and the
Standard (MS4800S). All versions
can be cascaded, are available
in resolutions of 14, 20, 30 and 40
mm, and have the Omron patented
Individual Beam Indicators. Just
another way we offer the right
solution for your application.

C
Locate the
Perimeter Access
Guarding Section
by turning to page C-1.

Locate the
Safety Light Curtain Section
by turning to page D-1.

“Two-Box” Solution
The F3SJ, MS4800, and PA4600
are several examples of a “two-box”
safety light curtain. Safety output
connections to these models are all
made at the receiver and a separate
control box is not required.

■

PA4600 —

Our perimeter guarding devices
are designed to meet your
integration needs. With a wide
choice of operating ranges,
we’re sure to have the right
beam configuration to fit your
application.
Omron offers the PA4600 series
in single and multiple safety beam
configurations. The PA4600 may be
configured with up to six beams,
meeting the ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999
(R2009) and EN999:1998 optical
configuration requirements.

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

Safety Mats, Area Guarding, Edges and Bumpers

Built Tough for Tough Treatment

Pressure Sensitive Mats & Edges
STI Universal Safety Mats and
MC3, MC4, or MC6 Controllers
Rugged STI Universal Safety Mats guard machine operators against some of the
potential hazards and dangers of a modern manufacturing environment. Compared
with other guarding methods, such as mechanical barriers, sliding gates or pull back
restraints, safety mats offer operators freedom of movement and flexibility that not only
provides enhanced safety, but may also reduce the occurrence of cumulative trauma disorders. When combined with an MC3, MC4, or MC6 controller and trim, the STI Universal
Safety Mats form a mat system which complies with standard ISO 13856-1:2001, ANSI
B11.19-2010, ANSI/RIA 15.06-1999 (R2009), CSA Z432‑04, and EN1760-1: 1998 and is
entitled to display the CE mark.

F
Aluminum

Floor

PVC Trim Cover

Two Safety Mat Trims to Choose From
Omron offers two types of safety mat
trim, the industry standard 6063-T5
aluminum and a safety yellow PVC trim in
an aluminum mounting base with an integrated wiring channel. In addition to the
PVC cover for the 2-part trim, an aluminum
cover is available (see the mat section
for drawings and details on this trim). In
multiple mat applications, our patented
joining trim (also with an integrated wiring
channel) provides a fully active mat area
even at 3 and 4 mat intersections.

Mat Cables

Standard Mat Features:
■

Heavy-duty PVC for impact resistant
construction

■

Available in many standard and metric
sizes

■

Single piece molded construction will
not delaminate

■

Exceptional chemical and abrasion
resistance including excellent resistance
to acids, alkalies and salts

■

Expected life of over one million
actuations

■

Standard with 4-wire quick disconnect
cable

■

Traction dot pattern allows configuration
in any orientation

UMQ Series
Quick-Disconnect Mat
The STI UMQ Series Safety Mats incorporates a design that
features a quick disconnect located on the mat. The cables can
be attached after the mat is in place to minimize damage during
mat installation. The patented connector is designed and tested to
meet IP67 requirements. The quick disconnect has been designed
to be backward compatible with the current mat cable location.

PATENTED
CONNECTOR

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

Safety Mats, Area Guarding, Edges and Bumpers

Safety Mat Controllers
Provide Proven Reliability
STI Safety Mat Controllers are used in
conjunction with four-wire, normally open,
safety mats where perimeter guarding
is required. Their control reliable design
sends a stop signal to the guarded
machine whenever an object with
sufficient weight is detected on the
active mat surface. Also, when the
controller detects any of the mat wires
are missing, broken, or misconnected a
stop signal is generated.
When combined with a four-wire safety
mat these controllers improve productivity
while providing access guarding. Full visibility of and accessibility to the work area
is always maintained.

E
MC4

MC3

MC6

Locate the
Safety Mats Section
by turning to page F-1.

What are Pressure Sensitive Safety Edges?
STI Safety Edges are rubber profiles enclosing a pressure sensitive safety contact.
These products can be used to protect pinch points on scissors lifts, automatic gates,
and other applications. Nine different profiles are available in lengths up to 6100 mm.
When combined with the available controllers, the system complies with standard EN954.

Locate the
Safety Edges & Bumpers Section
by turning to page E-1.

Safety Edges
■

Profile materials EPDM, NBR or
TPE rubber

■

Provides housing for safety contact

■

Available in 9 sizes and two styles
to fit many applications

Safety Bumpers
■

Foam rubber covered in polyurethane,
mounted on an aluminum base

■

Sized to fit your applications

STI SCC Safety Edge Controllers
■

www.sti.com/info

120 VAC or 24 VDC power

Introduction

Mechanical Guarding Systems

Ensuring Operator Safety

Mechanical Guarding Systems
Ideal for 20 x 20 mm
aluminum frame doors

rately)

Tamper Resistant Safety Interlock Switches and
Emergency Stop Devices Enhance Mechanical
Guarding Methods
STI Safety Interlock Switches and Emergency Stop Devices are available in a wide
variety of models to satisfy most machine guarding applications. Models range from
rope-operated emergency stop switches and non-contact magnetic and hinge-pin-operated interlocks, to solenoid-actuated guard-door locking switches that restrict access
until safe conditions exist.
D40Z

G
D4GL-SK10-LK

D4GL (sold separately)

D4NL

H
I

Locate the
Safety Interlock Section
by turning to page G-1.

D4SL-N

Locate the
Emergency Stop Devices Section
by turning to page H-1.

A165E

Force-Guided Relays
Force-guided (or positively-guided) relays have contacts that are mechanically
interlocked such that two contacts on the relays will not contradict each other, even in
the event that the relay welds. Force-guided relays have contacts that are mechanically
linked and conform to IEC60947-1-1 as required for use in safety-related control systems.

Locate the Force-Guided Relay Section by turning to page I-1.

The G7Z multi-pole power contactor with mirror
contacts is capable of carrying and switching
40 A at 440 VAC

www.sti.com/info

Introduction

Mechanical Guarding Systems

Monitoring Safety Relays
Ensure the Highest Level
of Circuit Integrity
Safety Monitoring Relays are designed
to provide higher levels of reliability for any
safety circuit through better diagnostics in
fault detection, longer life expectancy, and
redundancy. Whether designing circuits to
meet European and International Performance Level requirements (ISO 13849-1)
or North American control reliability
requirements (ANSI B11.19), STI safety
monitoring relays offer preconfigured and
tested circuits to meet your most demanding needs. Products range in function from
simple single channel relays to specialty
relays including time-delayed outputs, twohand control, and stop-motion detection.
All safety relays meet North American and,
European requirements and carry one or
more of the following designations: CE,
UL, CSA, C-UL, UR and TUV. In addition,
some relays carry markings and ratings for
specific countries such as China, Korea
and Germany.

G9SA

G9SX

Locate the
Safety Monitoring Relay Section
by turning to page J-1.

J
Without Safety Relay
Short Circuit.
Possible Fault

With Safety Relay

Control Circuit
Supply

Safety Relay Unit:
Monitors Switches,
E-Stops, Contactors,
Safety Circuit Wiring, Etc.
Power
Supply

Contactor
Possible
Fault

Switch
Possible Fault

Switch Wiring:
Safety relay
monitors for any
fault that may
cause a danger.

Contactor Wiring:
Safety relay monitors
for any fault that may
cause a danger.
Contactors:
Safety relay monitors
for any fault that may
cause a danger.

www.sti.com/info

Switches:
Safety relay
monitors for any
fault that may
cause a danger.

Introduction

Programmable Safety Controllers

Making Safety Simple

Programmable Safety Controllers
System Setup Made Simple
Omron’s line-up of Programmable Safety Controllers reshape previous thinking about safety systems. Until now, safety control circuit
design was cumbersome. The process involved tedious wiring and any changes required direct modification of the wiring. Programmable safety circuits simplify the design process. Safety I/O terminals make system modifications easy and allow the safety I/O capacity
to be increased without extensive rewiring.
The new NX Safety System is integrated into the architecture of Omron’s EtherCAT controller platform; this allows direct access to
the status and monitoring of all safety I/O through the PLC making programming and monitoring more simple and powerful than ever
before.

G9SP Programmable Safety Controllers

■

Direct connection to non-contact switches and safety mats

■

Programmable via PC or removable memory cassette

■

Easily monitored by PLCs via Ethernet (FINS), EtherNet I/P,
or serial (RS-232C) connection

■

Ideal for small to mid-size applications

■

EN ISO 13849-1 (PL e)

G9SP CPU Unit

Option Board

Ethernet

Serial

Expansion I/O Unit

I/O

PLC

Transparent diagnosis
Connect to PC/PLC via Ethernet makes
the STI G9SP fully accessible. Diagnosis,
troubleshooting and program modification
is simple, thanks to the USB programming
interface and removable memory card.

Simple Unit Replacement
Because the STI G9SP is a software-based
controller, replacement is effortless. All
settings, parameters and function blocks
can be saved on a PC or stored on the
Memory Cassette for easy transfer from
one unit to another.

www.sti.com/info

H-T40M-P
Status Display
Touchscreen
■

Simple plug-n-play touchscreen for the
G9SP to easily view the status of safety
inputs and outputs

■

Up to four zones can be reset directly
from the touchscreen

Introduction

Programmable Safety Controllers

NX-S Integrated Safety Controller: Safety Over EtherCAT

NJ Controller

NX Safety Controller
• The safety controller variables are part of the NJ controller project
• Flexible and reusability of the programming code

• Up to 8 safety input points per unit
• Flexible connectivity to a wide selection of safety devices
• I/O data monitoring in the NJ controller project

NE1A Safety Network Controllers
■

Eliminates long runs of complicated wiring

■

Compatible with the DeviceNet Open Network

■

Provides individual I/O status and error
indicators

■

Minimizes the need to rewire when
making machine modifications

■

Conforms to global safety
standards

■

Meets IEC 61508 SIL3

Locate the
Programmable Safety
Controllers Section
by turning to page K-1.

Safety Network
Controller
NE1A-SCPU01-V1

Safety Network
Controller with
Ethernet/IP
NE1A-SCPU02-EIP

DeviceNet Safety

Safety I/O Terminal
DST1-MRD08SL-1

Safety I/O Terminal
DST1-ID12SL-1

Contactors
Safety Light
Curtain

Safety I/O Terminal
DST1-MD16SL-1

Contactors
Emergency
Stop Switch

Safety Interlock
Switch

www.sti.com/info

Contactors

Introduction

Safeguarding Products Designed for Hazardous Locations and Special Applications

Maintaining Safety in

Hazardous Environments
Safeguarding a Hazardous Location... No Problem
C
D

The STI line of process safeguarding products extends to hazardous locations, or
flammable environments, as well. An advantage of mechanical trapped key systems
is that they can be designed to isolate all electrical energy sources in and around
hazardous areas. With key exchange system and mechanical locks, the energy
can be isolated in a “safe area” and the key transferred to a mechanical lock in the
“hazardous area.”

Safety Light Curtains for Hazardous Locations

OMRON Automation and Safety offers enclosures for use in hazardous locations
for the MS4800 and PA4600 safety light curtains. These enclosures are rugged
cast-aluminum, designed to contain an ignition of explosive gas. This allows for
the automatic safeguarding of machinery in explosive atmospheres, such as paint
booths, chemical production and distilling.

H
Turn to these sections for detailed information on
hazardous-location products.

The MS4800 and PA4600 safety light
curtains are available with enclosures
for use in hazardous areas.

Safeguarding Machine Operators

Special Safety Devices
L
M

An Ergonomic Alternative to a
Mechanical Palm Button Switch
The STI TouchStart is a capacitive palm button designed
to detect the presence of an operator’s hand and provides a
machine start signal with a mere touch of a button.
Locate the Two-Hand Control
Section by turning to page L-1.

Safety at All Times
The A4EG Enabling Switch Device provides the margin of safety
needed during troubleshooting, set-up, programming, or servicing
of robotic or automated machinery when no other safety devices are
possible or practical. It has distinct clicks for three easily discernible
positions.
Locate the Enabling Switch Devices
Section by turning to page M-1.

www.sti.com/info

Expert Area
Contents
REGULATIONS & DIRECTIVES

TYPES OF PROTECTIVE MEASURES

OSHA Regulations

A-6

Choice of Protective Measures

A-45

North American Safety Standards

A-7

Five Serious Machine Guarding Problems

A-4

Harmonized European Standards

A-10

SISTEMA Data

A-2

Do’s and Don’ts of Fixed and
Movable Machine Guards Part 1

A-4

OSHA Electronic Resources for Small Businesses

A-2

OSHA's Guide for Safeguarding Equipment and
Protecting Employees from Amputations

Do’s and Don’ts of Fixed and Movable
Machine Guards Part 2

A-4

A-2

Safety Light Curtains

The European Machinery Directive

A-2

Type 2 vs. Type 4 Light Curtains

A-49

A-2

Light Curtains — Installation Requirements &
Calculating the Minimum Safe Distance

A-53

A-2

Sample Checkout Procedure Log

A-71

Sample Test Procedure

A-72
A-73

Guide to European Machinery Standards
Guide to Application of
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
EN ISO 13849-1 Emerging as a Key Global
Machine Standard

A-3

Safely Muting an Industrial Process

Update on EN 954-1

A-3

Shedding Light on Light Curtains

A-4

New & Updated Consensus Standards

A-3

Press Brake Guarding

A-4

Order a Copy of NFPA 79

A-3

Safety Laser Scanners

Order ANSI Standards

A-3

Listing of Standards Writing Organizations
and Information Sources

Balancing the Pros and Cons
of Machine Guarding Technologies

A-4

A-3

What is a Safety Laser Scanner?

A-4

Safety Mats
Safety Mats —
Theory of Operation, Selection & Installation

SAFETY STRATEGY & RISK ASSESSMENT

A-75

Safety Strategy —
Hazard Identification & Risk Evaluation

A-12

Safety Interlock Switches & Monitoring Relays

Machine Safeguarding Checklist

A-19

Understanding IP Ratings

A-77

Safeguarding for the Bottom Line

A-3

Interlocking Principles & Devices

A-5

Calculating Safe Mounting Distances for
Safeguards A-3

Emergency Stop Devices
Proper Installation of Rope or Wire Pull
Emergency Stop Devices

A-78

Accident Costs: Rethinking the Ratio of Indirect
to Direct Costs

A-3

Get Proactive for Safety and Efficiency

A-3

APPLICATIONS & SOLUTIONS

The Importance of Risk Assessment

A-3

Practical Approach to
Risk Assessment/Risk Reduction

Basic Requirements & Safety
or Cutting & Turning Machines

A-5

A-3

Bliss Back-geared OBI Press

A-5

Risk Assessment in the
Machine Safeguarding Process

Can Palletizer

A-5

A-3

Cincinnati Hydraulic Press Brake

A-5

Cincinnati Mechanical Press Brake

A-5

Clearing Straight-side Press

A-5

CONTROL RELIABLE CIRCUITS &
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Control Reliable Interlocking

A-5

Safety-Related Control Systems

A-20

Flexible Motion Control with G9SP

A-5

Common Circuit Examples

A-31

Initiating Motion with a Light Curtain

A-5

Manual Lathe

A-5

Interfacing to your PLC
G9SP RS-232 Communication to Omron CJ PLC

A-3

Metal Sawing Machines

A-5

G9SP Ethernet Communications to Omron CJ PLC

A-3

Pick and Place Robot

A-5

G9SP Ethernet/IP Communications to Omron CJ2 PLC

A-3

G9SP Ethernet/IP Communications to Omron NJ5 PLC

A-3

Process Safeguarding —
Overview & Guide to Hazardous Locations

A-5

G9SP Ethernet/IP Communications to
Rockwell CompactLogix PLC

Rail-Bound Production Equipment

A-5

A-4

Strippit Turret Press

A-5

A-1

Web Articles Expert Area

Basic and In-Depth Articles are Available Online

o you need to hone your safety
terminology or learn the basics
of safely guarding a hazardous
machine? If you have questions, you'll find
the answers on our website.
While some technical articles are
included in this catalog, many more
are available on the website. The list of
articles will continue to grow.
To access the articles, just go to our
website at www.sti.com and click on the
"Expert Area" in the top grey menu bar.
You can also quickly access the
articles by using the URLs provided.

below.

Select the
Expert Area on
www.sti.com

Online articles
Regulations & Directives
SISTEMA Data
Get instant access to the SISTEMA
software and Omron SISTEMA product
libraries for help ensuring compliance with
the European Machinery Directive.
www.sti.com/3014

A-2

OSHA Electronic Resources for Small
Businesses
Access links to OSHA web pages and
tools that may be helpful for small
businesses.
www.sti.com/3004
OSHA's Guide for Safeguarding
Equipment and Protecting Employees
from Amputations
Download a free 60 page guide to
Safeguarding Equipment and Protecting
Employees from Amputations.
www.sti.com/3006

www.sti.com/info

The European Machinery Directive
Better understand the basic structure and
standards of European safety legislation to
help ensure conformity and worker safety.
www.sti.com/3009
Guide to European Machinery Standards
Access a summary list of titles and
references of harmonized standards under
Directive 2006/42/EC for Machinery.
www.sti.com/3010
Guide to Application of Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC
Download a free 400+ page Guide to
Application of the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC. The guide helps ensure
uniform interpretation and application
throughout the EU.
www.sti.com/3011

Web Articles Expert Area

A
Online articles (continued)
EN ISO 13849-1 Emerging as a Key
Global Machine Standard
Learn why using EN ISO 13849-1 to demonstrate compliance with the Machinery
Directive is the easiest way to verify the
design of the safety system.
www.sti.com/3013
Update on EN 954-1
Learn what extending EN 954-1 Presumption of Conformity to the New European
Machinery Directive means for machine
builders, users and integrators.
www.sti.com/3012
New & Updated Consensus Standards
Learn more about the risk assessment and
machine guarding aspects of ANSI B11.0
and B11.19 standards. This article posted
with permission of ASSE, publisher of
Professional Safety.
www.sti.com/3002
Order a Copy of NFPA 79
Guard against the risks of fire and shock
by working with one of the benchmark for
industrial machine safety: NFPA 79.
www.sti.com/3007
Order ANSI Standards
Get easy access to the latest ANSI B11
standards in PDF format.
www.sti.com/3008

Listing of Standards Writing
Organizations and Information Sources
Get one-stop contact information for
key standards writing organizations and
information sources, including ANSI, CSA,
DIN, IEC, NEMA, OSHA, RIA, SAE, UL and
others.
www.sti.com/3001

Safety Strategy & Risk
Assessment
Safeguarding for the Bottom Line
Learn about the total cost of an injury,
and how the same equipment that helps
prevent an injury can also positively impact
a company’s bottom line.
www.sti.com/3017
Calculating Safe Mounting Distances for
Safeguard
Learn how to calculate safe mounting
distances for barrier guards and presence sensing devices to help protect
people from dangerous interactions with
machines.
www.sti.com/3015
Accident Costs: Rethinking the Ratio of
Indirect to Direct Costs
Get straight talk on the direct and indirect
costs of an accident, and how this issue
impacts you. This article posted with
permission of ASSE, publisher of Professional Safety.
www.sti.com/3016
Get Proactive for Safety and Efficiency
The primary goal of safety barriers is to
protect people, but their impact on required tasks and material flow into and out
of work areas should also be considered.
www.sti.com/3018
The Importance of Risk Assessment
Learn about the value of machine guarding
risk assessments, what they are and how
they are conducted and more. This article
posted with permission of ASSE, publisher
of Professional Safety.
www.sti.com/3019
Practical Approach to Risk Assessment/
Risk Reduction
This 12-step process provides a thorough
risk assessment process that leads to
safe and efficient operation of industrial
machinery.
www.sti.com/3020

www.sti.com/info

Risk Assessment in the Machine
Safeguarding Process
While risk assessments are designed to
anticipate and reduce hazards that can
result in worker injuries, their systematic
approach also produces other tangible
benefits.
www.sti.com/3021

Control Reliable Circuits &
Wiring Diagrams
Interfacing to your PLC
G9SP RS-232 Communication to Omron
CJ PLC
This document provides a step-by-step
setup for communicating from a G9SP
programmable safety controller to an
Omron CJ PLC using Ladder Logic to do
serial communications.
www.sti.com/3024
G9SP Ethernet Communications to
Omron CJ PLC
This document provides a step-bystep set-up for communicating from a
G9SP programmable safety controller
to an Omron CJ PLC using Ethernet
communications.
www.sti.com/3025
G9SP Ethernet/IP Communications to
Omron CJ2 PLC
This document provides a step-by-step
set-up for communicating from a G9SP
programmable safety controller to an
Omron CJ2 PLC using Ethernet/IP
communications.
www.sti.com/3026
G9SP Ethernet/IP Communications to
Omron NJ5 PLC
This document provides a step-by-step
setup for communicating from a G9SP
programmable safety controller to an
Omron NJ5 PLC using Ethernet/IP
communications.
www.sti.com/3027

A-3

Web Articles Expert Area

A
Online articles (continued)
G9SP Ethernet/IP Communications to
Rockwell CompactLogix PLC
This document provides a step-by-step
setup for communicating from a G9SP
programmable safety controller to an
Allen Bradley CompactLogix PLC using
Ethernet/IP communications.
www.sti.com/3028

Types of Protective Measures

Safety Light Curtains

Five Serious Machine Guarding
Problems
Learn about five of the most rampant
machine guarding problems and how to
overcome them. This article posted with
permission of ASSE, publisher of Professional Safety.
www.sti.com/3048

Shedding Light on Light Curtains
It is not difficult to design effective safeguarding for virtually any type of machine.
The challenge is to provide guarding that
delivers high levels of safety while enabling
high productivity and throughput.
www.sti.com/3051

Do’s and Don’ts of Fixed and Movable
Machine Guards Part 1
Even though machine guarding challenges may be disparate, a common need
is finding an uncompromising method
for protecting workers while optimizing
productivity.
www.sti.com/3049
Do’s and Don’ts of Fixed and Movable
Machine Guards Part 2
Learn how a well-conducted risk assessment can help you decide whether or not
a movable guard is a good choice for your
application.
www.sti.com/3050

Press Brake Guarding
Learn more about the two phases of an effective press brake safeguarding strategy.
First, consider all the jobs that will run on
the machine. Second, select a guarding
system that will work with each.
www.sti.com/3057

Safety Laser Scanners
Balancing the Pros and Cons of
Machine Guarding Technologies
Get a balanced look at safety mat and
safety laser scanner technologies to make
informed decisions on which can best satisfy the safety needs of a given application.
www.sti.com/3058
What is a Safety Laser Scanner?
Learn more about what safety laser scanners are, how they work, what they do and
what they can be used for.
www.sti.com/3059

A-4

www.sti.com/info

Web Articles Expert Area

A
Online articles (continued)
Safety Interlock Switches &
Monitoring Relays
Interlocking Principles & Devices
Learn how to select the correct safety
interlock switch for a given application.
www.sti.com/3061

Applications & Solutions
Basic Requirements & Safety for
Cutting & Turning Machines
Learn the basic safety requirements for
drilling, milling and grinding machines and
lathes, including electrical requirements,
safeguarding, controls, disconnects, starters, covers and other considerations.
www.sti.com/3064
Bliss Back-geared OBI Press
Learn how a Bliss back-geared OBI press
used in an automotive application was
safeguarded to maximize safety and
improve productivity.
www.sti.com/3067
Can Palletizer
Learn how to increase productivity and operator safety in can palletizer operations.
www.sti.com/3066
Cincinnati Hydraulic Press Brake
Learn how safeguards were combined
on a Cincinnati hydraulic press to protect
the operator and improve machine
productivity.
www.sti.com/3068
Cincinnati Mechanical Press Brake
Learn how a Cincinnati mechanical press
brake is guarded to provide access to the
bed of the machine for die changes, without having to open or remove the guards.
www.sti.com/3069

Clearing Straight-side Press
Learn how a challenging 250-ton Clearing
straight-side press is guarded. The solution includes mirrors, but no smoke.
www.sti.com/3070
Control Reliable Interlocking
Sort through commonly used but
frequently misunderstood references,
including control reliable gate interlock vs.
conventional devices, and Safety Integrity
Level (SIL) ratings 3 and 4.
www.sti.com/3071
Flexible Motion Control with G9SP
Learn how one controller can solve a
majority of safety applications, reduce
panel space requirements and eliminate
the need for individual relays to be used
for different functions.
www.sti.com/3072
Initiating Motion with a Light Curtain
Learn about considerations for using Presence Sensing Device Initiation (PSDI) as a
productivity enhancer.
www.sti.com/3075
Manual Lathe
Learn about the guarding requirements,
and types of guards available, for manual
lathes.
www.sti.com/3073
Metal Sawing Machines
Learn about the safety requirements for
metal sawing machines, including considerations for when tools are used in ways
they weren’t designed to operate.
www.sti.com/3074

www.sti.com/info

Pick and Place Robot
Learn how safety light curtains and a
mirror provide a complete safeguarding
system for pick and place robots.
www.sti.com/3076
Process Safeguarding — Overview &
Guide to Hazardous Locations
This guide outlines the causes of explosions and explains the three most popular
methods of protection in North America. It
also details the hazardous location rating
systems for interlock switches.
www.sti.com/3065
Rail-Bound Production Equipment
This overview provides direction on
whether proven technology that operates
on the factory floor is suitable for more
demanding application environments.
www.sti.com/3077
Strippit Turret Press
Learn how a complex Strippit turret press
operation was guarded to maximize safety
and productivity.
www.sti.com/3078

A-5

Regulations & Directives Expert Area

OSHA Regulations

n the United States, machine safeguarding is governed by OSHA, the
Occupational Safety and Health
Administration. OSHA’s mission is to assure safe and healthful working conditions
for working men and women by setting
and enforcing standards and by providing training, outreach, education and
assistance.
While OSHA regulations cover many
aspects of health and safety the area of
machine safeguarding s addressed by
the regulations in Part 1910 Subpart O Machinery and Machine Guarding.

The regulations for
machine guarding are:
1910.211 - Definitions.
1910.212 - General requirements for
all machines. This section
governs the guarding of all
machines that are not called
out specifically in one of the
sections below.
1910.213 - Woodworking machinery requirements. Includes all saws
and other machines used for
woodworking
1910.214 - Reserved
1910.215 - Abrasive wheel machinery.
Includes requirements for
Grinders
1910.216 - Mills and calenders in the
rubber and plastics industries.
1910.217 - Mechanical power presses.
1910.218 - Forging machines.
1910.219 - Mechanical power-transmission apparatus.

A-6

In addition, OSHA specifies regulations
for lockout/tagout In 29 CFR 1910.147
The entire text of these regulations can
be downloaded for free from the OSHA
web site www.osha.gov. This site also
has a wealth of explanatory and training
materials relating to machine safeguarding.
These federal regulations may be
supplanted by state OSHA requirements,
as long as the state has an approved state
plan. In all cases state plans are at least
as stringent as the federal plan but may be
more so, as state plans have a tendency to
be more frequently reviewed and updated.
Because Federal OSHA requirements
are not frequently updated the use of
ANSI B11 Standards are often used to
demonstrate compliance to the OSHA
regulations.

www.sti.com/info

Regulations & Directives Expert Area

North American Safety Standards
Application vs.
Construction Standards
Safety standards fall into two categories: application standards and construction standards.

Application Standards
Application standards reference how to
use a light curtain for machine guarding,
for example, how to calculate the safe
mounting distance. Although some may
give condensed construction information,
often the main thrust of an application
standard is how to apply a light curtain
for the type of machine covered by the
standard. For example, ANSI/RIA R15.06
discusses the use of presence-sensing
devices (light curtains) for robot guarding. ANSI B11.1 provides information on
how to use presence-sensing devices on
mechanical power presses.

Construction Standards
Construction standards provide design,
construction and testing information
on presence sensing devices. In North
America, ANSI/UL 61496 entitled “Safety
of Machinery - Electrosensitive Protective
Equipment” is the construction standard
for light curtains.
ANSI/UL 61496 covers specific items
such as the number of outputs required,
the need for a key-operated switch,
transformer construction, and failure
conditions. Test specifications require that
the equipment be subject to a battery of
tests including moisture and dust intrusion, power supply transients, electrical
interferences, electrostatic discharges,
component failure mode analysis and
object sensing capabilities.

A
Machine Guarding
In the United States, installation and
use of machine guarding is regulated
by the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA). Some states have
their own safety organizations with regulations that must be at least as strict as the
federal OSHA standards.
In addition to OSHA, other organizations
provide information on proper machine
guarding. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) publishes the B11
standards to provide information on the
construction, care and use of machine
tools. Certain standards are developed for
specific types of machine tools.
Standards in the B11 series include:
B11.0 -

Safety of Machinery - applies to
new, modified or rebuilt power driven
machines, not portable by hand,
used to shape and/or form metal or
other materials

B11.1 -

Mechanical Power Presses – applies
to only to those mechanicallypowered machine tools commonly
referred to as mechanical power
presses

B11.2 -

Hydraulic Power Presses - applies
to only to those machine tools,
commonly referred to as hydraulic
power presses

B11.3 -

Power Press Brakes - applies to
those machine tools classified as
power press brakes (hereinafter
referred to simply as press brakes)

B11.4 –

Shears - applies to those
mechanically, hydraulically, hydramechanically, or pneumatically
powered shears used to cut material
by shearing

B11.5 –

Ironworkers - applies to those
combination, multipurpose powered
machines that punch, shear, notch,
cope and form metal

B11.6 -

Safety Requirements for Manual
Turning Machines with or without
Automatic Control - specifies
safety requirements for the design,
construction, operation and
maintenance

www.sti.com/info

A-7

Regulations & Directives Expert Area

A
B11.7 -

B11.8 -

Cold Headers - applies to only those

- provides guidance in understanding

commonly referred to as cold

requirements for the design,

and implementing safety-related

headers and cold formers

construction, installation, operation

Manual Milling, Drilling - specifies

and maintenance of the safeguarding
B11.20 - Integrated Manufacturing Systems

control functions
B11.TR7 - Designing for Safety and Lean
Manufacture - provides guidance

construction, operation and

- specifies the safety requirements

on the practical application and

maintenance

for the design, construction, set-up,

integration of safety and lean

Grinding Machines - applies to all

operation and maintenance

manufacturing principles to

stationary grinding machines

B11.21 - Machine Tools Using Lasers - applies

B11.10 - Metal Sawing Machines - specifies
safety requirements for the design,

for processing materials, and its

construction, modification, operation

associated equipment.

and maintenance

Numerically - specifies the safety
requirements for the design,

design, construction, operation and

construction, operation and

maintenance

Safety Requirements for Machining
Centers and Automatic, Numerically

driven metal-forming machine that

Controlled Milling, Drilling and

changes the shape or the direction,

Boring Machines - specifies the

or both, of materials

safety requirements for the design,

Machines - applies to single and
multiple spindle automatic bar and

construction, operation and
maintenance
B11.24 - Transfer Machines - specifies

chucking machines in which all

the safety requirements for the

tool movement is controlled by the

design, construction, operation and

machine.
B11.15 - Pipe, Tube and Shape Bending

maintenance
B11.TR1 - Ergonomic Guidelines - this guideline

Machines - applies to any power-

provides a uniform approach to

driven machine designed for bending

ergonomic considerations for

pipe, tube, and shapes by means of
dies
B11.16 - Powder/Metal Compacting Presses

machine tools within the workplace.
B11.TR2 - Mist Control Considerations provides guidelines for a uniform

- applies to those mechanically

approach to the control of airborne

or hydraulically powered machine

contaminants generated by stationary

tools that are designed, modified, or
converted for metal compacting
B11.17 - Horizontal Hydraulic Extrusion
Presses - applies to those horizontal
hydraulically powered presses that
extrude metals
B11.18 - Coil Processing and Coil Slitting
Machine - applies to machines, and
groups of machines arranged in
production systems, for processing
strip, sheet, or plate metal from a coil

Integrated Manufacturing
Systems/Cells

maintenance
B11.23 -

Machines - applies to any power-

B11.13 - Automatic Bar and Chucking

These standards may be purchased at
http://www.sti.com/ansi/index.htm

B11.22 - Turning Centers and Automatic

specifies safety requirements for the

B11.12 - Roll Forming and Roll Bending

machinery and manufacturing

to machine tools using a laser

B11.11 - Gear (Spline) Cutting Machines -

machine tools
B11.TR3 - Risk Assessment and Risk Reduction
- provides a means to identify
hazards associated with a particular
machine or system
B11.TR4 - Selection of Programmable Electronic
Systems - provides guidance for the
design or selection, integration, and
validation of PESs
B11.TR5 - Sound (Noise) Level Measurement
Guideline - provides methods
for measuring, evaluating and
documenting sound levels emitted by
a machine

A-8

B11.TR6 - Safety Control Systems for Machines

Safeguarding - provides performance

safety requirements for the design,

B11.9 -

B11.19 - Performance Criteria for

mechanically-powered machines

www.sti.com/info

An integrated manufacturing system
is defined as a group of two or more
industrial machines working together in
a coordinated manner normally interconnected with and operated by a supervisory
controller or controllers capable of being
reprogrammed for the manufacturing of
discrete parts or assemblies. This definition is provided by ISO 11161, Safety of
Integrated Manufacturing Systems, an
international standard covering requirements for the safe installation, programming, operation, maintenance or repair of
these systems. A similar standard is ANSI
B11.20, entitled Manufacturing Systems/
Cells - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care and Use.
Both of these standards cover the safety
of multiple machines under some type of
common control. When machines in an
integrated system operate separately or
individually, or the safeguards are muted
or suspended, the safety standards for the
individual machines should be used as a
supplement.

Regulations & Directives Expert Area

A
Robots and Robot
Systems
Safety guidelines for applications using
industrial robots result from the joint
effort of ANSI and the Robotics Industries
Association (RIA). In standard ANSI/RIA
R15.06, an industrial robot is defined as a
reprogrammable multifunctional manipulator designed to move material, parts, tools,
or other devices. This standard does not
apply to numerically controlled machine
tools.

Ontario Regulation 7
Each Canadian province has created,
or is developing its own specific safety
regulations. The province of Ontario may
have the most complete set. Of particular
interest to users of industrial machinery
is Regulation 7 of the Regulations for
Industrial Establishments.
Regulation 7 outlines the requirements
for a Pre-Start Health and Safety Review
(PHSR). The intent of a PHSR is three-fold:
1. Provide for a timely professional
review to identify specific standards.
2. Ensure hazards are removed or
controlled before start-up.
3. Ensure that worker protection as
required under the applicable provisions of
the Regulations for Industrial Establishments is provided.

What is a Pre-Start Health and
Safety Review?
A PHSR is conducted upon the
construction, addition or installation of
a new machine, structure or protective
element, or the modification of an existing
installation.

The end result of a PHSR is a written report. This report details the actions, steps
or engineering controls required to bring
the subject application into compliance
with the provisions of the Regulations for
Industrial Establishments.
Benefits of a PHSR include:
• Prevention of hazardous incidents
• Assurance of uniform quality inspections
• Reduced cost of protection
• Assurance that high risk areas are
addressed
• Raises standards for OEM
manufacturers
Although specific to the Canadian
province of Ontario, Regulation 7 and the
resulting PHSR report incorporate the risk
assessment principals found elsewhere in
the Expert Area.

Corporate Standards
In order to provide employees with a
safe work environment, many corporations
have authored their own standards for
safety light curtains and personnel protection. These standards are frequently more
stringent than those required by OSHA
and can only be met by the most technically advanced products. Omron listens
closely to industry requirements and has
responded with such patented features as
the FlexSafe and Individual Beam Indicator
lights. The MPCE and MTS feature were
also originally engineered at the request of
a customer.

The Canadian Standards
Association (CSA)
CSA is a Canadian laboratory that tests
and certifies the electrical integrity and
safety of products. CSA is accredited by
OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Test
Laboratory (NRTL) which covers testing of
all products under OSHA’s jurisdiction.
The NRTL/C mark (Canadian/US
certification) on our products indicates
certification for Canada as well as the
United States and is considered to comply
with applicable CSA and UL requirements.
The NRTL/C mark is a counterpart to
the Underwriter’s Laboratory C-UL mark.
Both marks indicate that a product is
in compliance with both CSA and UL
standards.
The NRTL/C mark on our products
precludes the necessity of having both
CSA and UL agency logos. All STI safety
light curtains are CSA listed (file number
LR90200).

www.sti.com/info

A-9

Regulations & Directives Expert Area

Harmonized European Standards

hese standards are common
to all EC and EFTA countries
and are produced by the
European Standardization bodies CEN
and CENELEC. Their use is voluntary but
designing and manufacturing equipment
to them is the most direct way of demonstrating compliance with the EHSRs.
They are divided into 3 groups: A, B and C
standards.

A Standards
Cover aspects applicable to all types of
machines.

B Standards
Subdivided into 2 groups.
• B1 STANDARDS - Cover particular
safety and ergonomic aspects of
machinery.
• B2 STANDARDS - Cover safety components and devices.

C Standards
Cover specific types or groups of
machines.
It is important to note that complying
with a C Standard gives automatic presumption of conformity with the EHSRs.
In the absence of a suitable C Standard,
A and B Standards can be used as part or
full proof of EHSR conformity by pointing
to compliance with relevant sections.
Agreements have been reached
between CEN and CENELEC and with
other world-wide Standardization Bodies.
This should ultimately result in common
world-wide standards.
This section lists some of the relevant A
and B Standards
EN ISO 12100 (EN 292) PARTS 1 & 2 Safety of machinery — Basic concepts,
general principles for design.
This A standard outlines all the basic
principles including risk assessment,

guarding, interlocking, emergency stops,
trip devices, safety distances and much
more. It references other standards and
also includes the essential safety requirements from the Machinery Directive.
EN 60204-1 — Safety of machinery —
Electrical equipment of machines — Pt 1
General requirements.
This standard gives general and specific
recommendations for Safety-Related
aspects of wiring and electrical equipment
on machines.
EN ISO 13857 (EN 294) — Safety of
machinery —Safety distances to prevent
danger zones being reached by the
upper and lower limbs.
Gives data for calculation of safe aperture sizes and positioning for guards etc.
EN 349 — Safety of machinery — Minimum distances to avoid crushing parts of
the human body.
Gives data for calculation of safe gaps
between moving parts etc.

This diagram shows the satellite type
relationship between some of the various
provisional and finalized European
Standards (only a small selection of each
type are shown).
The inner orbits comprise A and B Standards
The outer orbit represents the C Standards.
The content of the C Standards is formed
under the influence of the A and B
Standards.

A-10

www.sti.com/info

Regulations & Directives Expert Area

A
EN 1088 — Safety of machinery —
Interlocking devices associated with
guards — Principles for design and
selection.
Gives principles for the design and
selection of interlocking devices associated with guards.

EN 574 — Safety of machinery —
Two-hand control devices — Functional
aspects — Principles for design.
Provides requirements and guidance
on the design and selection of two-hand
control devices, including the prevention of
defeat and the avoidance of faults.

In order to verify mechanical switches
it refers to EN 60947-5-1 — Electromechanical control circuit devices.
In order to verify non-mechanical
switches it refers to EN 60947-5-3 — Particular requirements for proximity devices
with fault prevention measures or defined
behavior under fault conditions.

EN ISO 13850 (EN 418) — Safety of
machinery — Emergency Stop devices,
functional aspects — Principles for
design.
Gives design principles and
requirements.

EN ISO 13849 — Safety of machinery — Safety-Related parts of control
systems — Pt 1: General principles for
design.
This standard outlines requirements
for safety critical parts of machine control
systems. It is important to achieve a
working knowledge of this document as its
categories are the common “language” for
describing the performance of SafetyRelated control systems.
EN ISO 13855 (EN 999) — Safety of
machinery — The positioning of protective equipment in respect of approach
speeds of parts of the human body.
Provides methods for designers to
calculate the minimum safety distances
from a hazard for specific safety devices.
In particular for electro sensitive devices
(eg: light curtains), pressure sensitive
mats/floors and two-hand controls.

EN 61496-1&2 — Safety of machinery
— Electro sensitive protective equipment
Pt 1: General requirements and tests.
Pt 2: Particular requirements for
equipment using active opto-electronic
protective devices.
Part 1 gives requirements and test
procedures for the control and monitoring
aspects of electro sensitive protective
equipment. Subsequent parts deal with
aspects particular to the sensing side of
the system.
Part 2 gives particular requirements for
safety light curtains.

EN 953 - Safety of machinery — General Requirements for the Design and
Construction of Guards.
Gives definitions, descriptions and
design requirements for fixed and movable
guards.
EN 1037 — Safety of machinery —
Isolation and energy dissipation — Prevention of unexpected start-up.
Defines measures to isolate machines
from power supplies and dissipate stored
energy to prevent unexpected machine
start-up and allow safe intervention in
danger zones.
NOTE: Many of these European Standards are being revised and adopted as
international standards with new number
designations. During the transition period,
the documents may carry an IEC/ISO
number or an EN number or both.

EN 1760-1 — Safety of machinery —
Pressure Sensitive Safety Devices — Pt
1: Mats & Floors.
Gives requirements and test procedures.
EN 1760-2 — Safety of machinery —
Pressure Sensitive Safety Devices — Pt
2: Edges & Bars.
Gives requirements and test procedures.

EN ISO 14121-1 (EN 1050) — Safety
of machinery — Principles for risk
assessment.
Outlines the process of assessing the
risks during the life of the machinery.

www.sti.com/info

A-11

Safety Strategy & Risk Assessment Expert Area

Safety Strategy - Hazard Identification & Risk Evaluation

rom a functional point of view
the more efficiently a machine
performs its task of processing
material the better it is. Life, however, is
not that simple and in order for a machine to be viable it must also be safe.
Safety must be regarded as a prime
consideration.
To achieve a proper safety strategy
there must be:
1. Risk Assessment based on a clear
understanding of the machine limits and
functions which must be analyzed to
identify which ones pose a potential hazard. The degree of risk due to the hazard
is then estimated in order to provide a
basis for judgement at later stages. A risk
evaluation is then required to determine if
existing safety measures are satisfactory or
whether additional measures are required to
reduce the risk.
2. Risk Reduction is then performed
if necessary and safety measures are
selected based on the information derived
from the risk assessment stage.
After the implementation of these
measures the risk assessment is repeated
to determine whether safety has in fact
been achieved.
The manner in which this is done is
the basis of the Safety Strategy for the
machine.
A checklist should be followed to ensure
that all aspects are considered and that
the overriding principle does not become
lost in the detail.

A-12

The first step is to ensure that the whole
process is documented. This ensures a
more thorough job and makes the results
available for review by other parties. In
Europe, the documented risk assessment
is usually included in the technical
file which supports the Declaration of
Conformity for the Machinery Directive.
Because the process is likely to be
repeated, documenting the results means
that needless repetition can be avoided.
If a machine is designed in conformity
with a product standard specific to that
machine, the standard should already incorporate most of the measures necessary
for its safety. It is strongly recommended
however, that a risk assessment is still
performed to ensure that everything is
considered.
Although this section may only seem to
apply to machine manufacturers it is also
relevant to machine users as machines are
often used in circumstances unforeseen by
the manufacturer. The user (or employer)
has a legal requirement to provide a safe
working environment. Regulations make it
clear that the safety of work equipment is
addressed from three aspects :
1. its initial integrity
2. the place where it is used
3. the purpose for which it is used.
For example, a milling machine used
in a school workshop will need additional
considerations compared to one which is
used in an industrial tool room.

www.sti.com/info

Remember that if a user acquires
two or more independent machines and
integrates them into one process they are,
technically speaking, the manufacturer of
the resulting combined machine.
Now let’s consider the essential steps to
a proper safety strategy. The following can
be applied to an existing factory installation or a single new machine.

Risk Assessment
Why is a risk assessment necessary?
One reason is obvious - in the European
Community it is a legal requirement. Most
of the directives and regulations regarding
machinery safety state that a formal risk
assessment should be performed. Most
of the harmonized European standards
refer to it and the subject itself is covered
by standard — ISO 14121-1 “Principles
for Risk Assessment”. Additionally, in
North America ANSI has developed a
technical report B11.TR3-2000. While not
a "standard", this technical report provides
guidance on how to estimate, evaluate
and reduce risks associated with machine
tools. People concerned with the safety of
machinery know that risk assessment is an
integral part of a complete safety strategy.
Risk assessment is a helpful process
which provides vital information and allows
the user or designer to make logical decisions about safeguarding methods.

Safety Strategy & Risk Assessment Expert Area

A
Fig. 1.1

It is important to
consider all stages in
RISK ASSESSMENT
the life of a machine
Identify all machines within the
including installation,
workplace Then for each machine
Consult relevant
commissioning,
information and
expertise
maintenance,
de-commissioning,
MACHINE LIMITS
NO
Can you foresee all possible
correct use and
operation and use of the machine
operation. Also
consider the
YES
consequences of
reasonably foreseeHAZARD IDENTIFICATION
able misuse or
Identify each hazard situation Then for each hazard
malfunction.
All hazards must
RISK ESTIMATION
be
considered
Estimate the level of risk due to
the hazard
including crushing,
RISK REDUCTION
shearing, entangleRISK EVALUATION
Address the hazard by a
ment, part ejection,
process of re-design or
additional measures
Is the level of risk
NO
fumes, radiation,
acceptable?
toxic substances,
Determine whether the
heat, noise etc.
performance and functional
characteristics of the safety
Have any safety measures
If a machine relies
measure are suitable for the
been analysed and proven
NO
machine and its type of use
adequate?
on anything other
than its intrinsic
nature for its safety it
YES
should be indicated
SAFETY STRATEGY
as a hazard source.
END OF
A machine with exPROCESS
posed gears has an
obvious and direct
hazard. But if the gears are protected by
Machine Limit
Determination and Hazard an interlocked access panel they are a
potential hazard which may become an
Identification
actual hazard in the event of failure of the
interlocking system.
A complete list of all machines should
Each machine with a hazard should be
be made. Where separate machines are
identified and marked on the list together
linked together, either mechanically or by
with the types of hazard present. At this
control systems, they should be considstage it is only the identity and type of hazered as a single machine. Each machine
ard that is of concern. It is tempting to start
is then considered to see if it presents
estimating the degree of risk posed by the
any sort of hazard and the list marked
hazard but this is a separate process of
accordingly.
risk estimation.

www.sti.com/info

Risk Estimation
This is a fundamental aspect of machine
safety. There are many ways of tackling
this subject and the following pages
provide a simple, effective approach. The
method should be amended as necessary
to suit individual requirements. An understanding of its importance is absolutely
essential.
All machines that contain hazards
present risk. It is important to be able to
describe at which point the risk lies on a
relative scale from minimum to maximum.
The following pages provide a practical
method for achieving this. First, let us look
at some of the fundamental points.
1. The risk estimation must always be
documented.
It is tempting to make a purely intuitive
judgement. While often based on experience, it almost certainly will not take into
account all the necessary considerations
and cannot be easily checked or passed
on to others.

A-13

Safety Strategy & Risk Assessment Expert Area

A
You must follow a logical work pattern, write down the results and get
other parties to review it. Remember, it is
your evidence that you have shown due
diligence in the task.
2. What is risk?
The term risk is often confused with the
severity of an accident. Both the severity
of potential harm AND the probability of its
occurrence must be considered in order to
estimate the amount of risk present.
3. It must take into account all
foreseeable factors.
As with the Hazard Identification stage
it is important to consider all stages of
the machine's life including installation,
commissioning, maintenance, decommissioning, correct use and operation
as well as the consequences of reasonably
foreseeable misuse or malfunction.
4. It is an iterative process but work
need not be repeated needlessly.
For example: A machine has an
interlock guard door which, during an
earlier risk evaluation, has been shown to
be satisfactory. Provided that there are no
changes which affect it, during subsequent
risk assessments, no further measures will

be required as the risk has been satisfactorily reduced (or eliminated).
But if the machine has never been
subjected to a formal risk assessment or
its usage circumstances have changed
then it cannot be automatically assumed
that the interlocking system is satisfactory
and the risk estimation should be repeated
to verify its suitability.
The suggestion for risk estimation given
on the following pages is not advocated as

the definitive method. Individual circumstances may dictate a different approach.
It is intended only as a general guideline
to encourage a methodical and documented structure.
It is intended to explain and complement the risk estimation section in the
standard ISO 14121-1“Principles for
Risk Assessment”. It uses the same well
established principles as the standard but
has a few minor variations in its approach.

Risk ESTIMATION - Step 1

HOW
BAD

In this example most severe injury
would be "fatal".

In this example the probable most
severe injury would be "serious".
With the possibility of bruising,
breakage, finger amputation or injury
from ejected chuck key etc.

Fig. 1.2 Remember: For this consideration we are presuming that an injury is inevitable and
we are only concerned with its severity.

1. THE SEVERITY OF POTENTIAL INJURY.
For this consideration we are presuming that the accident or incident has
happened. Careful study of the hazard will reveal the most severe
injury that can be reasonably conceived.
The severity of injury should be
assessed as:
FATAL
MAJOR - (Normally irreversible)

1
MINOR

3 3
SERIOUS

66
MAJOR

Permanent disability, loss of sight, limb amputation, respiratory damage etc.
SERIOUS - (Normally reversible) Loss of consciousness, burns, breakages etc.
MINOR - Bruising, cuts, light abrasions etc.

A-14

www.sti.com/info

10 10
FATAL

Safety Strategy & Risk Assessment Expert Area

Risk ESTIMATION- Step 2
Fig. 1.3

HOW
OFTEN

2. FREQUENCY OF EXPOSURE
The frequency of exposure to hazard can be classed as :
FREQUENT - Several times per day.
OCCASIONAL - Daily.

SELDOM - Weekly or less.

1
SELDOM

Risk ESTIMATION - Step 3

2 2

OCCASIONAL

FREQUENT

HOW
LIKELY

In this example the probability of
injury could be rated as "certain"
because of the amount of body in the
hazard area and the speed of
machine operation.

In this example the probability of
injury may be rated as "possible" as
there is minimal contact between the
hazard and the operator. There may
be time to withdraw from the danger.

The following factors are taken into
account:
1. The severity of potential injury.
2. The probability of its occurrence,
which is comprised of two factors:
a. Frequency of exposure.
b. Probability of injury.
Dealing with each factor independently,
values are assigned to these factors.
Make use of any data and expertise
available. You are dealing with all stages of
machine life so base your decisions on the
worst case.
Remember, you should assume that
there is no protective system or that it has
failed to danger. For example, the machine
power may not be isolated when a guard is
opened or the machine may even start up
unexpectedly while the guard is open.
All headings are assigned a value and
they are now added together to give an
initial estimate. For example:
The next step is to adjust the initial
estimate by considering additional factors
such as those shown in Figure 1.6. Often
they can only be properly considered when
the machine is installed in its operating
location.
Depending on the type and usage of
the machine there may be other relevant
factors which should also be listed and
considered at this stage.

Fig. 1.4

3. PROBABILITY OF INJURY
You should assume that the operator is exposed to the hazardous motion or process.
By considering the manner in which the operator is involved with the machine and
other factors such as speed of start up etc., the probability of injury can be
classed as:
CERTAIN
PROBABLE
POSSIBLE
UNLIKELY

2 2

1
UNLIKELY

POSSIBLE

44
PROBABLE

www.sti.com/info

6 6
CERTAIN

6
6
6
Fig. 1.5 (Note: This is not
based on the previous
example pictures)

A-15

Safety Strategy & Risk Assessment Expert Area

A
Risk Reduction and
Evaluation
Consider each machine and its risks
separately and then address all of its
hazards.
There are three basic methods to be
considered and used in the following order:
1. Eliminate or reduce risks as far as
possible by inherently safe
machine design.
2. Take the necessary protective measures in relation to risks that cannot
be eliminated.
3. Inform users of the residual risks due
to the shortcomings of the protective
measures adopted, indicate whether
any particular training is required and
specify the need to provide personal
protective equipment.
If the machine is still at the design stage
it may be possible to eliminate the hazard
by a change of approach.
If design methods cannot provide the
answer other action needs to be taken.
The hierarchy of measures to be considered include:
(a) Fixed enclosing guards.
(b) Movable (interlocked) guards or safeguarding devices e.g. light curtains,
presence sensing mats, etc.
(c) Protection appliances (jigs, holders,
push sticks etc.) used to feed a
workpiece while keeping the operators body clear of the hazard zone.
These are often used in conjunction
with guards.

A-16

Fig. 1.6 The results of any additional factors are then added to the previous total as shown.

Additional Factor
More than one person

Multiply the severity factor by

exposed to the hazard.

the number of people.

Protracted time in the danger

If time spent per access is

zone without complete power

more than 15 minutes, add 1

isolation.

point to the frequency factor.

Operator is unskilled or
untrained.

HIGH

Suggested Action

Add 2 points to the total

6
6
6
1

(d) Provision of information, instruction, training and supervision. It is
important that personnel have the
necessary training in the safe working methods for a machine. This
does not mean that measures (a),
(b) or (c) can be omitted. It is not acceptable merely to tell an personnel
that he must not go near dangerous
parts (as an alternative to guarding
them).

www.sti.com/info

IUM

MED

LOW

Safety Strategy & Risk Assessment Expert Area

A
a little more difficult. It is necessary to
ensure that access can only be gained
while the machine is safe. Protective
measures such as interlocked guard doors
and/or trip systems will be required. The
choice of protective device or system
should be heavily influenced by the operating characteristics of the machine. This
is extremely important as a system which
impairs machine efficiency is likely to be
removed or bypassed.
The safety of the machine in this case
will depend on the proper application and
correct operation of the protective system
even under fault conditions. Once the
proper application has been dealt with by
the appropriate choice of general type of

In addition to the above measures it
may also be necessary for the operator
to use equipment such as special gloves,
goggles, respirators etc. The machinery
designer should specify what sort of
equipment is required. The use of personal
protective equipment is usually not the
primary safeguarding method but complements the measures shown above.
Each measure from the hierarchy should
be considered in turn starting from the top
and used where practical. This may result
in a combination of measures being used.
If access is not required to dangerous
parts the solution is to protect them by
some type of fixed enclosing guarding.
If access is required then life becomes

protective system the correct operation of
the system must now be considered.
In an ideal world every protective
system would be perfect with absolutely
no possibility of failing to a dangerous
condition. In the real world however we are
constrained by the limits of knowledge and
materials. Another constraint is, of course,
cost. Because of these factors, a sense
of proportion is required. Common sense
says that it is ridiculous to insist that the
integrity of a safety system on a machine
that may cause mild bruising to be the
same as that required to keep a jumbo jet
in the air. The consequences of failure are
drastically different and therefore we need
to have some way of relating the extent of

Fig. 1.7

Company - MAYKIT WRIGHT LTD
Facility - Tool room - East Factory.
Date - 29/8/95
Operator profile - Apprentice / Fully skilled.
Equipment
identity & date

Directive Risk
Accident
Conformity Assmnt
history
Report no

Bloggs center
lathe.
Serial no.
8390726
Installed 1978

None
claimed

Bloggs turret
head milling m/c
Serial no
17304294
Manuf 1995
Installed May 95

M/c Dir.
EMC Dir

RA302

RA416

None

Notes

Hazard
identity

Chuck rotation
Electrical equipment
complies with BS EN 60204 with guard
open
E stops fitted (replaced
1989)

Hazard
type

Action
required

Implemented
& inspected reference

Mechanical Fit guard interlock
Entangleswitch
ment
Cutting

25/11/94 J Kershaw
Report no 9567

Cutting fluid

Toxic

Change to non
txic type

30/11/94 J Kershaw
Report no 9714

Swarf
cleaning

Cutting

Supply gloves

30/11/94 J Kershaw
Report no 9715

Move machine to
give enough
clearance

13/4/95 J Kershaw
Report no 10064

Movement of Crushing
bed
(towards wall)

www.sti.com/info

A-17

Safety Strategy & Risk Assessment Expert Area

A
the protective measures to the level of risk
obtained at the risk estimation stage.
Whichever type of protective device
is chosen, it must be remembered that
a “safety-related control system” may
comprise many elements including the
protective device, wiring, power switching device and sometimes parts of the
machine’s operational control system. All
these system elements should have suitable performance characteristics relevant
to their design principle and technology.
The International Standard ISO 13849-1
"Safety-related parts of control systems"
describes a process for determining the
performance level for safety-related control

systems and how to relate risk reduction
to required performance level. Figure 1.8 is
a simplified chart that shows the relationship of risk and required performance
level. Performance levels will be discussed
further in the section on safety-related
control systems.
The table shown in Figure 1.7 is suggested as part of a documented process
to account for all safety aspects of the
machine being used. It acts as a guide
for machine users but the same principle
can be used by machine manufacturers or
suppliers. It can be used to confirm that all
equipment has been considered and it will
act as an index to more detailed reports on
risk assessment.

The table shows that where a machine
carries a mark from a recognized test
lab (e.g. UL), it simplifies the process, as
the machine hazards have already been
considered by the manufacturer and the
necessary measures have been taken. Even
with equipment that has been approved
by a recognized test lab, there may still be
hazards due to the nature of its application
or material being processed which the
manufacturer did not foresee.
After the risk estimate is completed,
implement the required safety related
control system and performance levels
according to the estimated risk level.

How to Determine Required Performance Level (PLr) in
accordance with ISO 13849-1
Fig. 1.8

Low Risk

S: Severity of Injury
-S1: Slight injury
-S2: Serious injury (amputation, death, etc.)
F: Frequency and/or Exposure to Hazard
-F1: Occurs infrequently or lasts for a
short time
-F2: Occurs frequently or lasts for a
long time
P: Possibility of Avoiding Hazard or
Limiting Harm
-P1: Possible under specific conditions
-P2: impossible

A-18

www.sti.com/info

F1
P2
P1

S1
F2
F1
S2

PL r

P2
P1

F2
P2

e
High Risk

Safety Strategy & Risk Assessment Expert Area

Machine Safeguarding Checklist

OMRON STI
Machine Services Division, 4545 East La Palma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92807-1907 USA
The Machine Safeguarding Checklist MUST be performed by qualified personnel.
Company Name:

Machine Type:

Location:

Manufacturer:

Date:

Model #:

Inspector:

Serial #:

Department:

Asset / ID #:
2. Perimeter guards position and/or distance.
❑ Yes - Perimeter guards appear to be compliant at
this time and the safe mounting distance has been
calculated and recorded.
❑ No - Perimeter guards are missing, misapplied, or not
securely fastened. Individuals can reach over, under,
around or through the guards to the point of operation
or the guards are missing or can be easily removed.
❑ May not be compliant - The safety control system
needs to be thoroughly reviewed for compliance with
the required level of reliability.
❑ N/A - Not applicable.

3. Mechanical power transmission apparatus guard(s)
position and/or distance.
❑ Yes - All mechanical power transmission apparatuses
below 8 ft. have guards which appear to be compliant
at this time.
❑ No - Mechanical power transmission guards are
missing, misapplied, or not securely fastened.
Individuals can reach over, under, around or through
the guards to the point of operation or the guards are
missing or can be easily removed.
❑ May not be compliant - The safe mountain distance
and/or position needs to be checked.
❑ N/A - Not applicable.

4. Safety control system meets performance requirements.
❑ Yes - The safety control system has been reviewed
by a trained engineer and has been determined to be
compliant at this time.
❑ No - The existing control system does not use safety
rated components, such as safety monitoring relays,
force guided relays, or a safety rated PLC.
❑ May not be compliant - The safety control system
needs to be thoroughly reviewed for compliance with
the required level of reliability.
❑ N/A - Not applicable.

5. Safeguarding (protective) devices are safety-rated and
properly installed.
❑ Yes - All components of the safety system are rated
for human safety and have been tested and listed for
such use.
❑ No - Safeguarding devices are missing, are not safety
rated, or are misapplied. The effective protected area
is not of adequate height, width, or depth to detect
entry of an individual into the hazardous area.
❑ May not be compliant - The safe mountain distance
and/or position needs to be checked.
❑ N/A - Not applicable.

6. Emergency stop location and compliance with NFPA
79 (when required).
❑ Yes - The emergency stop devices appear to be
compliant at this time.
❑ No - The emergency stop devices:

• are missing

• are not self-latching

• do not use positive guided contacts: or

• are not active in all modes: or

• are not Type 0 or Type 1 stop circuits: or

• are guarded or not readily accessible
AND

• are not mushroom style (for pushbuttons):

• do not have slack detection or are
mounted without springs (for cable pulls).
❑ May not be compliant - The contact blocks need to
be checked for positive guided contacts or the stop
circuit needs to be checked for Type 0 or Type 1.
❑ N/A - Not applicable.

7. Compliant energy isolation device for each source of
hazardous energy.
❑ Yes - All required energy isolation devices appear to
be compliant at this time.
❑ No - All hazardous energy sources are not capable of
being controlled.
❑ May not be compliant - Other potentially hazardous
energy sources may exist.
❑ N/A - Not applicable.

8. Controls have drop-out protection.
❑ Yes - The control system has been tested for the
required drop-out protection.
❑ No - Machine motion starts automatically when power
is restored to the machine.
❑ May not be compliant - Could not test at time of
inspection.
❑ N/A - Not applicable.

www.sti.com/info

Comments

1. Point of operation guard(s) position and/or distance.
❑ Yes - Point of operation guards appear to be compliant at this time and the safe mounting distance has
been calculated and recorded.
❑ No - Point of operation guards are missing, misapplied, or not securely fastened. Individuals can reach
over, under, around or through the guards to the point
of operation or the guards are missing or can be
easily removed.
❑ May not be compliant - The safe mounting distance
and/or position needs to be checked.
❑ N/A - Not applicable.

A-19

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

Safety-Related Control Systems

irst of all, what is a safety-related
control system (often abbreviated
to SRCS)?
It is that part of the machine control
system which prevents a hazardous condition from occurring. It can be a separate
dedicated system or it may be integrated
with the normal machine control system.
Its complexity will vary from a typical
simple system, such as a guard door
interlock switch and emergency stop switch
connected in series to the control coil of
power contactor, to a compound system
comprising both simple and complex
devices communicating through software
and hardware.
In order to reliably provide the safety
function, the system must continue to
operate correctly under all foreseeable
conditions.
The International Standard
ISO 13849-1 “Safety-Related parts of control systems” gives guidance on the design
and analysis of safety-related machine
control systems and defines a system of
five Performance Levels (PL = a to e) that
are quantified in terms of "the average
probability of a dangerous failure per hour".
The table shown here is a summary of
the 5 Performance Levels and the figures
on the next pages show the relationship
of the circuit structure (categories B, 1,
2, 3, and 4), diagnostics and reliability in
determining Performance Level. Previous
versions of ISO 13849-1 considered the
structure of the control circuit (e.g. single
channel, dual channel, test and monitoring
circuits) as sufficient factors to determine
safety performance. The new version of ISO

13849-1 adds (in addition to the previous
requirements for categories) reliability and
diagnostics as factors necessary to determine the safety performance of a control
system. The new version of ISO 13849-1
also includes requirements and guidance
for the development of software.
The safety-related performance of a machine control system can also be defined
in terms of Safety Integrity Levels (SIL = 1,
2 or 3) in accordance with the International
Standard IEC 62061 “Functional safety
of safety-related electrical, electronic and
programmable electronic control systems”.
This standard provides a process which is
most useful for complex control systems
based primarily on programmable electronics. However, IEC 62061 is not applicable to
non-electrical control systems.
ISO 13849-1 will be more useful for
industrial machine control systems because
it has requirements for all kinds of machine
control technologies regardless of energy
used (e.g. electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic,
and mechanical). ISO 13849-1 has the
additional benefit of continuing the use of
the same circuit categories (B, 1, 2, 3 and
4) that machine builders are already familiar
with.

Note—In December 2009 the previous
version of ISO 13849-1 will be cancelled
and the use of categories alone will
no longer be adequate to describe the
performance level of safety-related control
systems.

Control Reliability
Control reliability is defined by ANSI
standard B11.19-2010, as “The capability of the machine control system, the
safeguarding, other control components
and related interfacing to achieve a safe
state in the event of a failure within their
Safety-Related functions.”
The term has been in use for several
years but is rapidly becoming obsolete due
to the wide acceptance of the International
Standards ISO 13849 and IEC 62061 which
provide a more complete and verifiable
means of specifying the safety performance
level of control circuits.
Based on common practice, control
reliability corresponds to a minimum of
performance level PL d in accordance with
ISO 13849-1 or safety integrity level SIL 2
in accordance with IEC 62061.

Performance Levels (PL)
Average probability of dangerous failure per hour (1/h)

PL
a

≥ 10-5 to < 10-4

≥ 10-6 to < 3 x 10-6

≥ 10-7 to < 10-6

≥ 10-8 to < 10-7

≥ 3 x 10-6 to < 10-5

NOTE: Besides the average probability of dangerous failure per hour, other measures are
also necessary to achieve a PL. (e.g. proper installation, maintenance and protection against
environmental influences).

A-20

www.sti.com/info

Fig. 2.1

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

A
Performance Level (PL) is determined from a combination of category, reliability and
diagnostic coverage. For compete details, see ISO 13849-1.

Fig. 2.2

PL
a

MTTFd=Low
MTTFd=Medium

MTTFd=High

c
d
e
Cat.B

Cat.1

DCavg none

Cat.2
DCavg low

Cat.2

DCavg medium

Cat.3

DCavg low

Cat.3

DCavg medium

Cat.4

DCavg high

NOTE: Categories 2, 3, and 4 must also be protected against common cause failures (CCF).

Relationship between SIL and PL
Relationship Between Safety Integrity Levels (SIL) and Performance Levels (PL)
Probability of a dangerous failure per hour

Fig. 2.3

ISO 13 849-1

10 –4

10 –5

SIL
IEC 62061/
IEC 61508

no special
safety
requirements

Safeguard against
lower risks

www.sti.com/info

3 x 10 –6

10 –6

10 –8

10 –7

3
Safeguard against
higher risks

A-21

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

A
Requirements For Categories
Fig. 2.4

Will perform the required safety function.
Designed to withstand expected stresses (for example, electrical load, vibration,
EMC).

Requirements of Category B and
Use well tried safety components and safety principles.

Requirements of Category B and
The safety function is tested or inspected at suitable intervals.
(NOTE: The safety function can fail in between test intervals.)

Requirements of Category B and
Single faults will not prevent the safety function.
Single faults are detected whenever practical.

Requirements of Category 3 and
Single faults are detected when or before performing the safety
function. Accumulated faults will not prevent the safety function.

Quality of
components
Prevention of faults

Safety
Principle

Summery of Requirements

Structure of circuit
Detection of faults

Category

NOTE: For complete descriptions and requirements for categories of circuit structure, see ISO 13849-1.

Mean Time to Dangerous Failure (MTTFd)
Fig. 2.5

Diagnostic Coverage (DC)
Fig. 2.6

• Average time for the system to encounter a
dangerous failure
• Classified into three levels: Low, Medium,
and High

• Diagnostic Coverage is the percentage of all
dangerous faults that are detected.
• Classified into four levels: None, Low, Medium,
and High.

Low

3 years < MTTFd < 10 years

None

DC < 60%

Medium

10 years < MTTFd < 30 years

Low

60% < DC < 90%

High

30 years < MTTFd < 100 years

Medium

90% < DC < 99%

High

99% < DC

NOTE: Results of more than 100 years are classified as High.

NOTE: For safety-related control systems consisting of several
parts, an average value of DC will be used.

A-22

www.sti.com/info

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

A
So how do you decide on which
category to use?
In order to translate these requirements
into a system design specification there
has to be an interpretation of the basic
requirements.
The categories are intended as starting
points which describe the structure of
different types of safety-related control
systems (or their constituent parts).
Categories B and 1 are aimed at the
PREVENTION of faults. It is achieved
by the use of suitable design principles,
components and materials. Simplicity of
principle and design together with the
use of materials with stable and predictable characteristics are the keys to this
category.
Categories 2, 3 and 4 are aimed at the
DETECTION of faults (and appropriate
action taken). Monitoring and checking
are the keys to these categories. The most
common (but not the only) method of
monitoring is to duplicate the safety critical
functions (i.e. redundancy) and compare
their operation.
In the following examples, the reliability of the components used and the
completeness of the fault detection are

critical factors in the final determination of
the safety performance level of the control
circuit.
The example in Figure 2.7 is a simple
system comprising a guard door interlock
switch connected in series to the control
coil of a power contactor.
If the goal is toward complete reliability
with no possibility of a failure to a dangerous condition, which of the categories is
most appropriate?
Figure 2.7 also shows the location and
nature of potential dangerous faults.
For this simple case, which circuit
structure would be most appropriate?
The prevention of faults or the detection
of faults?
The first step is to separate the system
into its major components and consider
their modes of potential failure.
In this example the components are:
• Interlock switch
• Contactor
• Wiring
The interlock switch is a mechanical
device. The task which it performs is
a simple one i.e. opening the contacts
when a guard door is opened. It fulfills
the requirements of category 1 and by

Power
Contactor

the use of correct design principles and
materials it can be demonstrated that,
when used within its stated operating
parameters, it will have no failures to
a dangerous condition. This is made
feasible because the device is relatively
simple and has predictable and provable
characteristics.
The contactor is a slightly more
complex device and may have some
theoretical possibilities for failure. Contactors from reputable manufacturers
are extremely reliable devices. Statistics
show that failures are rare and can
usually be attributed to poor installation
or maintenance.
Contactors should always have their
power contacts protected by an overcurrent cut-out device to prevent welding.
Contactors should be subject to a regular inspection routine to detect excessive
contact pitting or loose connections which
can lead to overheating and distortion.
The contactor should comply with relevant standards which cover the required
characteristics and conditions of use.
By attending to these factors it is
possible to keep the possibilities of failure

Interlock
Switch
Short circuit or
earth fault

Machine
Controls

Contactor
sticking fault
Fig. 2.7

www.sti.com/info

A-23

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

Interlock
Switch

A
to a minimum. But for some situations
even this is unacceptable and in order to
increase the level of safety provision we
need to use redundancy and monitoring.
The wiring which connects the components together must also be considered.
Undetected short circuit and ground faults
could lead to a dangerous condition but if
it is properly designed and installed using
standards such as IEC 60204-1 for guidance then the chances of failure are greatly
reduced.
This system can provide a significant
level of safety which may be adequate
for many situations. However both the
contactor and the wiring are prone to
unlikely, though theoretically foreseeable
faults. In some cases it may be possible,
by taking precautions (e.g. with regard to
cable protection and routing) to eliminate
all fault possibilities. If this is not feasible
then techniques relevant to categories 2, 3
and 4 such as redundancy and monitoring
are usually both more practical and cost
effective.
Figure 2.8 shows a system which fulfills
the requirements of category 3. A G9SA
safety monitoring relay unit is used to
monitor a two-channel control circuit. Any
single fault on the wiring or contactors will
be detected by the safety monitoring relay
at the next demand on the safety function. Although the interlock switch now
has double pole contacts it is still a single
device which fulfills the requirements
of category 1 - forming part of a system
which fulfills the requirements of category 3.
This poses the question of when, and
to what degree, do we need to take such
measures.
The simple answer is that it depends
on the results of the risk assessment.

A-24

Power
Contactors

Machine
Controls

G9SA
SAFETY
RELAY
MONITORING
UNIT

Fig. 2.8

Power
Contactors

SAFETY
LIGHT
CURTAIN
CONTROL
SYSTEM

Safety light curtain

Machine
Controls

Fig. 2.9

This is the correct approach but we must
understand that this includes all factors
and not just the level of risk at the hazard
point. For example, you may assume that
if the risk estimation shows a high level
of risk, the interlock switch should be
doubled up and monitored. But in many
circumstances this device, due to its application, design and simplicity, will not fail
to danger and there will be no undetected
faults to monitor.
Therefore the situation is becoming
clear, the type of category used will depend on both the required performance
level (PL) and the nature and complexity

www.sti.com/info

of the device or system. It is also clear
that where a total system meets the
requirements of category 3, it may include
devices to category 1 if the reliability of the
category 1 device is sufficiently high.
If faults are possible, then the higher the
degree of risk, the greater the justification
for measures to prevent or detect faults
and the circuit category should be chosen
to give the most suitable and efficient
method of doing this. Remember, the
level of risk is one factor but the nature of
the protective device or system and the
machine’s operating characteristics must
also be taken into account.

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

A
Figure 2.9 shows the same basic circuit
but the interlock switch is replaced by a
safety light curtain.
The safety light curtain is a complex
device. Even in its simplest form it will
have a relatively large number of electronic
components including integrated circuits.
More sophisticated types, with more
features, may also depend on programmable devices and software.
To anticipate and eliminate all dangerous
faults in an electronic but non-programmable device would be a huge task and
with a programmable device it would be
virtually impossible. Therefore we must
accept that faults will be possible and the
best answer is to detect them and ensure
that the necessary protective action is
taken (e.g. locking out to a safe state). So
we would need a device that satisfies the
requirements of category 2, 3 or 4. With
a simple circuit such as in Figure 2.9 the
light curtain will also monitor the wiring and
contactors. As all light curtains are relatively
complex, the choice of circuit category and
performance level will depend primarily
on the results of the risk assessment. This
does not preclude the fact that it may be
possible to work to a different category if a
device uses an unconventional but provable
approach.
We can see from the last two examples
that the same level of protection is
provided by two types of systems using
devices satisfying different categories.
Hopefully these examples will encourage a pattern of logic to enable the correct
decision to be made.

Further Considerations
and Examples

Circuits and Monitoring Safety
Relay Units

In this section we will give examples of
Safety-Related control circuits with reference to recommended practices and the
Safety-Related control system categories
where appropriate.

The examples given below are based
on the use of an interlock switch but the
same principle can be applied to other
switching device (e.g. emergency stop or
trip devices).

Category 1 (PL = b or c)

General Requirements
The system must be capable of withstanding all expected influences. These
will include temperature, environment,
power loading, frequency of use, airborne
interference, vibration etc. The standard
IEC 60204-1 “Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Specification
for general requirements” provides detailed
guidance on such things as electric shock
protection, wiring practices, insulation,
equipment, power supplies, control circuits
and functions, etc. A knowledge of this
standard is essential for those concerned
with the design and maintenance of
Safety-Related control systems.

Figure 2.10 shows a simple SafetyRelated control circuit. The interlock
device has positive mode operation and
satisfies the requirements of category 1.
The contactor is correctly selected for its
duty and is designed and manufactured to
specific standards. The part of the system
most prone to a fault is the connecting wiring. In order to overcome this it should be
installed in accordance with the relevant
clauses of standard IEC 60204-1. It should
be routed and protected in a manner which
prevents any foreseeable short circuits or
earth faults. This system will satisfy the
requirements of category 1.

START

STOP

K1
GUARD
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

Fig. 2.10

www.sti.com/info

A-25

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

START

STOP

GUARD
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

G9SA
SAFETY RELAY
MONITORING
UNIT

Fig. 2.11

START

STOP

Category 2 (PL = b, c, or d)

GUARD
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

G9SA (Reset mode)
SAFETY RELAY
MONITORING UNIT
Fig. 2.12

START

STOP

GUARD
INTERLOCK SWITCH

CONTACTORS
K1

G9SA
SAFETY RELAY
MONITORING UNIT

Fig. 2.13

A-26

Figure 2.11 shows a slightly more
complex circuit. In this case there is a
requirement for the interlock switch to
control more than one contactor, each
being on a different power circuit. Its
component parts must be given the same
considerations.
With a non-Safety-Related circuit an
ordinary relay could be used to “split” the
signal but where safety is concerned this
would definitely not be acceptable as they
can (and sometimes do) stick. Therefore
a monitoring safety relay unit such as
the G9SA is used to provide an ensured
switching action. This system will satisfy
the requirements of category 1.

www.sti.com/info

Figure 2.12 shows a system which
satisfies the requirements of category 2
and therefore must undergo a test of the
safety function before the machine can
be started. It must also be tested during
operation at suitable intervals determined
by the risk assessment.
At initial power up the safety monitoring
relay will not allow switching of power to
the contactor until the guard is opened
and closed. This initiates a check for any
single faults in the circuit from the switch
to the safety monitoring relay. Only when
this check is successful will the contactor be energized. At every subsequent
guard operation the circuit will be similarly
checked.

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

A
Category 3 (PL = b to e)
Figure 2.13 shows a system which
satisfies the requirements of category 3
and is often suitable for applications with
higher risk estimations. It is a dual channel
system which is fully monitored including the two contactors. On opening and
closing the guard, any single dangerous
fault will cause the safety monitoring relay
to lock off power to the contactors until the
fault is rectified and the safety monitoring
relay is reset.

Category 4 (PL = e)
Category 4 requires that the safety
function is always provided even with an
accumulation of undetected faults. The
most practical way of achieving this is to
employ continuous testing or monitoring
techniques. This is not feasible with most
mechanical or electro-mechanical components (e.g. mechanical switches, relays,
contactors) which are used in interlocking
and emergency stop systems.
These techniques are viable (and often
used) to monitor solid-state electronic
components because a high frequency
change of state is possible and does
not substantially degrade the life of the
component. Therefore the category 4
approach is often found in self contained
“sub-systems” such as light curtains.

P.E.S. (Programmable Electronic
Systems)
In the Safety-Related circuits shown,
the protective device is directly connected
to the contactor(s) using only wiring and
simple or fully monitored electromechanical devices. This is the normally
recommended “hard wired” method. Its
simplicity means that it is reliable and
relatively easy to monitor.
Increasingly, the operational control
of machinery is handled by programmable equipment. With the advances in
technology, programmable and complex
electronic control systems could be
regarded as the "central nervous system"
of many machines. Whatever happens in
the control system will affect the machine
action and conversely whatever happens
to the machine action will affect the control
system. Stopping one of these machines
by any source other than its control
system may result in severe tool and
machine damage as well as program loss
or damage. It is also possible that, upon
restarting, the machine may behave in an
unpredictable manner due to “scrambling”
of its control command sequence.
Unfortunately most programmable
electronic systems have too many failure
modes (due to their complexity) to allow
their use as the only way of stopping the
machine on command from a guard door
interlock or emergency stop button.

www.sti.com/info

In other words we can stop it without
machine damage or stop it safely but not
both. So what do we do? Three possible
solutions are given below:
1. Safety-Related Programmable
Systems
In theory it is possible to design a
programmable system which has a
safety integrity level high enough for
Safety-Related use. In practice this would
normally be achieved by using special
measures such as duplication and diversity
with cross monitoring. In some situations
this may be possible but it is important
to realize that these special measures will
need to be applied to all aspects including
the writing of software.
The basic question is, can you prove
that there will be no (or sufficiently few)
failures? A full failure mode analysis for
even relatively simple programmable
equipment may, at best, be excessively
time consuming and expensive or, at
worst, impossible.
The standard IEC 61508 deals with this
subject in great detail. Anyone concerned
with Safety-Related programmable
systems is advised to study it.
The development costs of these
systems are justifiable in applications
where they have significant advantages or
no other method will work.

A-27

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

A
2. Monitoring Unit with Time Delayed
Override Command (see Figure 2.14)
This system has the high integrity level
of hard wiring and also allows a correctly
sequenced shut-down which protects the
machine and program.
The G9SA primary outputs are connected to inputs at the programmable
device (e.g. PLC) and the delayed outputs
are connected to the contactor. When the
guard interlock switch is actuated, the
primary outputs on the safety monitoring
relay switch immediately. This signals
the programmable system to carry out a
correctly sequenced stop. After sufficient
time has elapsed to allow this process
the delayed output on the safety monitoring relay switches and isolates the main
contactor.
Note: Any calculations to determine the
overall stopping time must take account
of the safety monitoring relay output delay
period. This is particularly important when
using this factor to determine the positioning of devices in accordance with standard
ISO 13855.

3. Programmable System Controlled
Guard Locking Devices (see Figure 2.15)
This system again provides the high
integrity level of hard wiring combined with
the ability to give a correctly sequenced
shut down but it is only applicable where
the hazard is protected by a guard.
In order to allow opening of the guard
door the D4GL solenoid must receive a
release signal from the PLC. This signal will
only be given after a stop command sequence has been completed. This ensures
there is no tool damage or program loss.

When the solenoid is energized the door
can be opened which causes the control
circuit contacts on the D4GL to isolate the
machine contactor.
To overcome machine run-down or
spurious release signals, it may be necessary to use a G9SX-SM stopped motion
detector in conjunction with the PLC.
(Either a D4GL or D4NL switch can be
used in this application.)

MAIN
CONTACTOR
Timed delay output
G9SA
WITH
DELAYED
OUTPUTS
GUARD
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

PLC

NORMAL
MACHINE CONTROLS
Fig. 2.14

D4GL GUARD INTERLOCK SWITCH
WITH SOLENOID RELEASE LOCKING

PLC
CONTACTOR

Solenoid release signal

Fig. 2.15

A-28

www.sti.com/info

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

Other Considerations

CONTACTOR
CONTROL
CONTACTOR COIL

Machine Restart - Manual/Auto
Reset and Control Guards

AUXILIARY
CONTACTS

If (for example) an interlocked guard
is opened on an operating machine, the
safety interlock switch will send a stop signal to that machine. In most circumstances
the machine must not restart immediately
when the guard is closed. The most common way of achieving this is to rely on a
latching contactor start arrangement as
shown in Figure 2.16 (an interlocked guard
door is used as an example here but the
requirements apply to other protection
devices and emergency stop systems).
Pressing and releasing the start button
momentarily energizes the contactor control coil which closes the power contacts.
As long as power is flowing through the
power contacts the control coil is kept
energized (electrically latched) via the
contactor’s auxiliary contacts which are
mechanically linked to the power contacts.
Any interruption to the main power or
control supply results in the de-energizing
of the coil and opening of the main power
and auxiliary contacts. The guard interlock
is wired into the contactor control circuit.
This means that restart can only be
achieved by closing the guard and then
switching “ON” at the normal start button
which resets the contactor and starts the
machine. For additional information, see
ANSI B11.19-2010, 7.2.6 and ANSI/RIA
R15.06-1999 (R2009), 11.2.2 b) 5-6.
Many machines already have either
single or double contactors which operate

INTERLOCK SWITCH
shown with
guard closed "START" "STOP"
BUTTON BUTTON

DERIVED
CONTACTOR
CONTROL
SUPPLY

POWER
CONTACTS

NEUTRAL
3 PHASE POWER TO MACHINE MOTOR
Fig. 2.16

as described above (or have a system
which achieves the same result). When
fitting an interlock to existing machinery
it is necessary to determine whether the
power control arrangement meets this
requirement and take additional measures
if necessary.

Auto/Manual Reset
On some types of protective devices,
after actuation of the safety function, the
output will remain off until the device has
been reset.
Some devices are available in either
manual reset or auto-reset versions.
A manual reset depends on a manual
switching action after the de-actuation of
the device and may also trigger a system
integrity check before the safety system

www.sti.com/info

is reset to render the machine capable of
being started. It will require the operation
of a button or key-operated switch which
may be either on the device, the control
unit or at a remote location. Wherever it is,
it must provide a good view of the hazard
so that the operator can check that the
area is clear before operation.
In Figure 2.17, after the guard has
been opened and closed again the safety
monitoring relay will not allow the machine
to be restarted until the reset button has
been pressed and released. When this is
done the safety monitoring relay checks
that both contactors are OFF and that both
interlock circuits (and therefore the guard)
are closed. If these checks are successful
the machine can then be restarted from
the normal controls.

A-29

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

A
An auto-reset device does not require
a manual switching action but after deactuation it will always conduct a system
integrity check before resetting the system.
An auto-reset system should not be
confused with a device without reset
facilities. In the latter the safety system will
be enabled immediately after de-actuation
but there will be no system integrity check.

MOMENTARY PUSH
RESET BUTTON

INTERLOCK
SWITCH

G9SA
SAFETY RELAY
MONITORING UNIT

Control Guards
A control guard stops a machine when
the guard is opened and directly starts it
again when the guard is closed.
The use of control guards is only
allowed under certain stringent conditions
because any unexpected start-up or failure
to stop would be extremely dangerous.
The interlocking system must have the
highest possible reliability (it is often advisable to use guard locking).
The use of control guards can ONLY be
considered on machinery where there is
NO POSSIBILITY of an operator or part
of his body staying in or reaching into the
danger zone while the guard is closed.
The control guard must be the only
access to the hazard area.

A-30

MACHINE
CONTROLS
POWER
CONTACTORS

www.sti.com/info

Fig. 2.17

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

Common Circuit Examples

Notes on Circuit Examples..................................................... A-32

Section 1 –
Listing by Product Name

Section 2 –
Listing by Product Type

A22E Series........... A-33, A-36, A-37, A-38, A-39, A-40, A-41, A-42
D4BL, D4JL, D4SL.................................................A-39, A-41, A-42
D4N-R Series............................................................................. A-37
D4NL......................................................................................... A-38
ER6022...................................................................................... A-43
G9SA............................................................................... A-39, A-43
G9SA-TH301............................................................................. A-44
G9SA-321T................................................................................ A-35
MA Series.................................................................................. A-36
SR101A..................................................................................... A-36
SR103AM...............................................................A-34, A-37, A-42
SR125SMS45............................................................................ A-42
SR209AD......................................................................... A-39, A-40
T4012........................................................................................ A-34
T5009.............................................................................. A-33, A-35
TL4019...................................................................................... A-40

Emergency Stop Switches
E-Stop....................................... All (except A-34, A-35, A-43, A-44)
Rope Pull................................................................................... A-43
Interlock Switches
Guard Door Locking.................................................................. A-40
Magnetic.................................................................................... A-36
Mechanical Tongue................................................A-33, A-34, A-35
Limit........................................................................................... A-37
Monitoring Relays & Control Units
Controls for Two-hand Palm Switches...................................... A-44
Relays.................... A-34, A-35, A-36, A-39, A-40, A-42, A-43, A-44
Relay with PLC Interfacing........................................................ A-35
Solenoid Latching Interlock Switches
Mechanical Tongue............................ A-38, A-39, A-40, A-41, A-42
PLC Interfacing.......................................................................... A-35
Two Hand Palm Switches
Mechanical ............................................................................... A-44

www.sti.com/info

A-31

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

A
Notes on Circuit Examples
Note 1
In the following circuits the type of
device is shown as an example to illustrate
the circuit principle. For specific applications the choice of device type should be
based on the suitability of its characteristics for its intended use.

Note 2
In most of the following examples
showing dual channel applications, one
interlock switch, is shown switching both
channels (one contact set per channel). If
it is foreseeable that damage to the guard
(i.e. at the actuator mounting point) could
allow it to be opened without operating the
switch, then two separate switches may
be required. The electrical principle of the
circuit will remain the same as shown.

Note 3
In most cases the circuits are shown
with the guard door closed and ready for
motor starting by operating the normal start
control.
It must be possible to start the machine
only by voluntary actuation of the control
provided for the purpose (see ISO 12100
and IEC 60204-1). For the purposes of
these examples, the use of a conventional contactor latching circuit has been
assumed. If this is not the case, then a
restart interlock will be required to prevent
an automatic or unintended starting of
the motor when the guard is closed. A
safety monitoring relay with a momentary
action push button installed in the output
monitoring circuit can be used to achieve
this.

A-32

If the guard is designated as a Control
Guard (see ISO 12100, 5.3.2.5), these
requirements do not apply. The use of
Control Guards is only allowed under
certain conditions including:
• A Control Guard can only be used where
there is no possibility of an operator or
part of his body staying in or reaching
into the danger zone while the guard is
closed.
• The Control Guard must be the only
access to the hazard area.
• The interlocking system must have the
highest possible reliability. It is often
advisable to use a solenoid locking
switch such as the D4JL, D4GL, D4NL,
TL4024 or TL4019.

Note 4
This note applies to all monitoring
devices which use the technique of comparing the signal at the change of state
of dual channels, safety monitoring relay
units used in dual channel circuits with
infrequent operation, or with more than
one switching device connected.
Certain faults are only detected at a
change of state of the input switching
device (interlock switch or E-stop switch).
If there are long periods (i.e. months as
opposed to days) between switching
actions, it may be possible for multiple
faults to accumulate which could lead to a
dangerous situation. Therefore, a regular
check should be performed on the system
in order to detect single faults before an
accumulation occurs. This check may be
manual or initiated by part of the machine’s
control system.
If, for example, three interlock switches
are connected to the monitoring unit,
certain faults will only be detected at the
switch on the first guard to be opened and
the switch on the last guard to be closed.
This is because any switching between the
first opening/last closing will not change

www.sti.com/info

the state of the monitoring unit input
circuits. Therefore, in some applications, it
may be necessary to use one monitoring
device per switch.
Most of the following examples show
an interlock switch and an emergency
stop switch combined in the circuit. When
a safety monitoring relay is used for fault
detection, it is important to note the
following:
• All safety critical single faults, except for
certain faults over the contact sets at
the E-Stop, will be detected at the next
opening of the guard.
• All safety critical single faults, except for
certain faults over the contact sets at
the interlock switch, will be detected at
the next operation of the E-Stop.
• Because the E-Stop device is not likely
to be operated frequently, it is recommended that its function is checked
(with the guard closed) on a regular
basis (start of shift or daily) to enable the
safety monitoring relay to detect single
faults. If the guard is rarely opened, the
interlock switch should be checked in a
similar manner.

➞

Note 5

Where this symbol is used in
the following example circuits, it indicates
that the component or device indicated
operates in the positive mode. (i.e. where
two or more components are intended
to move together, they are connected
by direct contact or rigid links). Typical
examples of this are mechanical guard
interlock switches and force guided relays.

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC

A
K1 (AUX)

START

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON
AUXILIARY CIRCUIT
(ALARM OR INDICATION)

L1 L2 L3

FUSE

STOP
GUARD
CLOSED

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON
11 21

T5009

A22E SERIES

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

Guard Door Interlock and
E-Stop
- Single Channel
- Non Monitored
Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard door closed
and ready for motor starting.

Operating principle
Opening the guard or operating the
E-Stop device will cause the contactor to
isolate the motor power.
Fault behavior
The integrity of the circuit depends
on the suitability of the components
(conformity with standards, tried and
tested principles, etc.) and the nature of
the wiring installation (use of protective
conduit, short wiring runs, no movement of
wiring, etc.).

www.sti.com/info

Comments
This type of arrangement is widely
used in applications which have low risk
and where the wiring can be properly
protected.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

A-33

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC

K1 (AUX)
GUARDS
CLOSED
11

START
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

T4012
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

K2 (AUX)
STOP
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

CONDUIT
LIGHT

T4012
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON
A1

S11

CONDUIT
LIGHT

S21

S12

S14

Relay control and
fault monitoring

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

L1 L2 L3

RESET

SR103AM
INPUTS
A2

S10

S13

PLC
OUTPUTS
K1

Two Guard Door Interlocks
with PLC Control
- Dual Channel (2 x N/C)
- Single Fault Monitored
- Manual Auto Reset
Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard doors closed
and ready for motor starting after closing
Reset.
Operating principle
This is a dual channel system with
monitoring of the two contactors. It uses
two interlock switches each with four
poles. Three poles are positive mode N/C
and one pole is N/O.
Opening the guard will open the input
circuits (S11-S12 & S10-S13) to the safety
monitoring relay unit. The safety monitoring relay output circuits (13-14 & 23-24)

A-34

FUSE

FUSE
K2

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

AUXILIARY CIRCUIT
(ALARM OR INDICATION)

will open and cause the contactors to
isolate the motor power. After operation of
the guard, the reset button must be closed
before the motor can be restarted. Auto
reset may be implemented by removing
the reset switch.
The PLC is notified of Start and Stop
commands via the Start button, Stop
button, or the safety switches contacts.
The PLC handles the non-safety machine
control functions whereas the safety interlocks and monitoring safety relay handle
the safety functions.

Any single fault detected on the safety
monitoring relay input circuits will result
in the lock-out of the system to a safe
state (OFF) at the next operation of the
respective input device (see Note 4 on
page A-32.).

Fault detection
Any single fault will not cause a loss of
safety function.
If either contactor K1 or K2 sticks ON,
the motor will stop on command due to
the other contactor, but the safety monitoring relay cannot be reset (thus the fault is
revealed to the operator).

Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

www.sti.com/info

Comments
This type of system is widely used on
machines with medium to high risk and
in applications where the wiring cannot
be fully protected against all potential
damage.

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC

L1 L2 L3
RESET

GUARD
CLOSED

A1 A2 T11

12 22

T5009
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

T12

T31

T32

K3
a

3
4

Off Delay
Timer

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

13 23 33 43 53 61

(AUX)

K4
Control
Circuit

2 K1
5
K2

1
2
3
4
5
6

(AUX)

6
PE T21

T23 T22

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

14 24 34 44 54 62

G9SA-321-T
INPUTS

PLC

OUTPUTS

PLC Control with T5009
and G9SA-321-T
- Monitored Manual Reset
Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard door closed,
ready for motor starting (via signals from
the PLC).
Operating principle
The G9SA-321-T immediate action
outputs at 13-14 are connected to inputs
at the PLC and the delayed outputs at 33,
44 are connected to the contactor K1. The
relevant PLC outputs are connected to
contactor K2. If the guard is opened the
safety monitoring relay contacts 13-14
immediately signal the PLC to stop the
motor. The PLC then has a pre-set time

limit (adjustable at the G9SA-321-T) to
execute its shut down sequence and
switch OFF contactor K2. After this time
period has elapsed, the delayed action
outputs 43, 44 will switch off contactor K1,
thus ensuring isolation even if there is a
hardware, program or systematic fault in
the PLC.

Comment
This system has the high integrity of
hard wiring and also allows a correctly
sequenced shut-down which protects the
machine and program.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

Fault detection
If either contactor K1 or K2 sticks ON,
the motor will stop on command but the
safety monitoring relay cannot be reset
(thus the fault is revealed to the operator).
Any single fault detected on the safety
monitoring relay input and output circuits
will result in the lock-out of the system to
a safe state (OFF). All safety critical single
faults will be detected at the next opening
of the guard.

www.sti.com/info

A-35

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24 VAC/DC, 110 VAC or 230 VAC

K1 (AUX)
START

L1 L2 L3

K2 (AUX)

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

L1 L2 L3

STOP

FUSE

GUARD
CLOSED

S21

Relay control and
fault monitoring

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

MA SERIES
BLUE

S11

INTERLOCK
SWITCH

BROWN

A22E SERIES
LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

SR101A
A2

FUSE

FUSE
K1

Guard Door Interlock and
E-Stop
- Single Channel
- Monitored Output
- Auto Reset
Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard door closed
and ready for motor starting.
Operating principle
This is a single channel system with
monitoring of the contactors. It uses
an SR101A monitored safety relay to
distribute the signal from the interlock and
E-Stop switches to two contactors.
Opening the guard or operating the
E-Stop device will open the input circuits
(A1-A2) to the SR101A. The output circuits
(13-14 & 23-24) will open and cause the
contactors to isolate power to the respective motors.
The SR101A requires a 24 V AC/DC
supply.

A-36

Fault behavior and detection
The integrity of the circuit depends on
the suitability of the components (conformity with standards, tried and tested
principles etc.) and the nature of the wiring
installation (use of protective conduit, short
wiring runs, no movement of wiring etc.).
The SR101A provides an ensured
switching action. Contactor monitoring
is provided via terminals S11-S21. When
more than one contactor is used, if one of
the contacts stick ON, the restarting of the
other two will be prevented by the safety
monitoring relay.
The SR101A can be configured with two
contactors in series to control one motor
and if either contactor sticks ON, the motor will stop on command due to the other
contactor but the SR101A will not reset.
All safety critical single faults within the
SR101A itself will be detected. It does not
detect some faults at its input circuit
and therefore it is possible for a single
fault to cause a loss of safety function.

www.sti.com/info

CONTACT PROTECTION e.g. THERMAL CUT OUT

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

Comments
This type of system is widely used
where an intermediate relay is required
between the Interlock switch or E-Stop
device and the contactor(s). An ordinary
relay would not be suitable for this
purpose because of its failure modes. This
is typically the case where multiple motors
are being switched or a higher current
switching capacity is required. It is suitable
in applications which have low to medium
risk and where the wiring can be properly
protected.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC

A
K1 (AUX)
START
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

GUARD
CLOSED
11

STOP
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

D4N-R SERIES
SWITCH

D4N-R
SERIES
SWITCH

S11

S21

L1 L2 L3

K2 (AUX)

S12

S14

RESET

Relay control and
fault monitoring

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

STOP

SR103AM
A2

S10

S13

- Dual Channel
- Single Fault Monitored
- Manual Auto Reset
Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard door closed
and ready for motor starting after closing
Reset.
Operating principle
Opening the guard or operating the
E-Stop device will switch the input circuits
(S11-S12 & S10-S13) to the safety monitoring relay unit. The SR103AM output
circuits (13-14 & 23-24) will open and
cause the contactor to isolate the motor
power.
The reset switch must be closed before
the motor can be restarted. Auto reset may
be implemented by removing the reset
switch.

FUSE

A22E SERIES
LATCHING
E-STOP BUTTON

Guard Door Interlock and
E-Stop

Fault detection
Any single fault will not cause a loss of
safety function.
If either contactor K1 or K2 sticks ON
- The motor will stop on command due to
the other contactor, but the safety monitoring relay cannot be reset.
Any single fault detected on the safety
monitoring relay input circuits will result
in the lock-out of the system to a safe
state (OFF) at the next operation of the
respective input device (see Note 4 on
page A-32).

Comments
This type of system will also detect
simultaneous short circuit faults over
both contact sets of the switches. The
SR103AM is therefore suitable for applications where short circuit or earth faults are
more likely to occur than open circuit faults
(this may be due to hot surfaces, chafing,
etc.).
Because this circuit uses two opposite actuation modes it ensures that
excessive wear at the guard cam or
switch is detected.
It is suitable for some medium to high
risk applications and where the wiring
cannot be fully protected against all
potential damage.
Note – It should not be possible to
remove or lift the guard otherwise the
switches can be easily defeated.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

www.sti.com/info

A-37

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC
START
MOMENTARY K1(AUX)
PUSH
BUTTON

K1(a)
(AUX)

K2(AUX)

K2(a)
(AUX)

STOP
LOCK
RELEASE
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

FUSES

GUARD
CLOSED
E1

D4NL

DOOR INDICATOR CONTACT

K1
53

12
11

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL CUT OUT

A22E
LATCHING
E-STOP BUTTON
K1

PLC OR
INDICATOR
BEACON

D4NL (Solenoid Locking
Switch) and E-Stop
- Dual Channel
(two contactors in series)
- Push Button Lock Release
Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard door closed
and locked (solenoid not energized), ready
for motor starting (push start button) or
lock release (push lock release button).
Operating principle
In this system the guard is locked
closed until the solenoid is energized. The
solenoid can only be energized when the
auxiliary contacts at K1(a) and K2(a) are
closed. Therefore power contacts at K1 &
K2 are open and the lock release button
is pushed. When the locking mechanism
is released, monitoring contacts 41-42 are
opened. These contacts are in series with
the contactor (K1) control circuit and will

A-38

L1 L2 L3

therefore prevent restart while the D4NL
is in the unlocked mode. If the guard is
opened, contacts 11-12 and 31, 32 are
opened and will prevent restart while the
guard is open regardless of the lock status.
Fault detection
If either contactor K1 or K2 sticks ON The motor will stop but the guard cannot
be opened (thus the fault is revealed to the
operator).
A short circuit fault on the solenoid
energization circuit will initiate a STOP via
contacts 41-42. A short circuit fault across
either terminals 11-42 or terminals 31, 32
will not be detected, but the motor cannot
be started while the guard is open. A single
short circuit fault across the E-Stop device
will not be detected but will not prevent
emergency stopping. An open circuit fault
on the solenoid energization circuit will
prevent guard opening (other than by the
emergency release points on the D4NL).

www.sti.com/info

Comments
This system is a practical and effective
method of providing an interlock function
of enhanced integrity. The inclusion of
the lock release push button means
that the solenoid is only energized
when guard opening is required. This
prevents guard doors from swinging
open whenever the control stop button is
pressed. It also means that the solenoid is
not left energized for long periods which
can cause efficiency loss. The solenoids
used in the D4NL is continuously rated
but, as with any solenoid, their action will
be more positive when they are working at
maximum possible efficiency.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC

(AUX)

START

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

(AUX)

STOP

MOMENTARY
AUX. CONTACTS

STOP

L1 L2 L3

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

Reset

FUSE
A1 S52 S11 S12 S21 S22

GUARD
CLOSED
E1

D4SL

SR209AD

(S34-Y1) External
Jumper
A1

S33 S34 13

X4 Y39 Y40 Y2

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

Timer
Override

A22E SERIES
LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

FUSES

LOCK RELEASE
MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

Ground

D1
K1

D1 = Delayed
Output Load

Indicator

MUST PERFORM RESET BEFORE MOTOR MAY BE STARTED

D4SL (Solenoid Locking
Switch) and E-Stop Switch
- SR209AD Dual Channel
(single fault monitored)
- Push Button Lock Release
- Manual Auto Reset
Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard door closed
and locked (solenoid not energized), ready
for motor starting (push start button) after
closing Reset or lock release (momentary
push button).
Operating principle
In this system the guard is locked
closed until the solenoid is energized.
The solenoid can only be energized when
the normally closed Delayed Outputs 55,
56 are closed. This time delay would be set
to allow sufficient time for the load to come
to a stop. Therefore power contacts at K1
& K2 are open and the lock release button

may be pressed. When the solenoid goes
to the unlocking mode and the guard is
opened which opens the input circuit to terminals S11-S12 & S21-S22 at the SR209AD
which isolates the contactor control circuits
between its open terminals 13-14 and
23-24. When the guard is opened, the
guard operated contact sets at 11, 12 and
31, 32 are opened, thus ensuring that the
safety monitoring relay outputs remain in
the OFF state while the guard is open. After
the guard has been closed the Reset button
must then be pressed to close the output
circuit to the contactors which can then be
started by the control start button.

and output circuits will be detected and
will result in the lock-out of the system to
a safe state (OFF) at the next operation of
the respective input device.
An open circuit fault across the solenoid
energization circuit will prevent guard
opening (other than by the emergency
release points on the D4GL).

Fault detection
If either contactor K1 or K2 sticks ON
- the motor will stop on command but the
guard cannot be opened (thus the fault is
revealed to the operator).
Any single fault within the SR209AD will
prevent the closing of its outputs.
Any single fault on the SR209AD input

Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

www.sti.com/info

Comments
This system provides an interlock
function of high integrity and is suitable for
many high risk applications.
The solenoid is only energized when
guard opening is required.

A-39

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC
LOCK RELEASE

K1 (AUX)

STOP

MOMENTARY
AUX. CONTACTS START
MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

K1(a)
(AUX)

GUARD
CLOSED

K2(a)
(AUX)

TL4019
1WD Contacts
LOCKED

K2 (AUX)

STOP

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

A22E Series
LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

L1 L2 L3

Reset

A1 S52 S11 S12 S21 S22

S33 S34 13 23

37 47 55

SR209AD
FUSE

E1
E2
41

(S34-Y1) External
Jumper
A1 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y39 Y40 Y2 Y1 14 24

Indicator
"Unlocked"
Indicator
"Guard Open"

Timer FUSES
Override
K1

38 48 56

D1, D2 = Delayed
Output Load

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

Indicator

Ground
MUST PERFORM RESET BEFORE MOTOR MAY BE STARTED

TL4019 (Solenoid Locking
Switch)

- SR209AD (timed delayed unit)
- Dual Channel
(single fault monitored)
- 2 Contactors
- Push Button Lock Release
- Manual Auto Reset
Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard door closed
and locked (solenoid not energized), ready
for Reset Input Signal (push reset switch)
and Motor Start (push start button), or
Lock Release (push lock release button).
Operating principle
In this system the guard is locked
closed until the solenoid is energized. The
solenoid can only be energized when:
• the auxiliary contacts at K(a)1 and
K2(a) are closed. Therefore power contacts
at K1 & K2 are open.
• the SR209AD control unit has timed
out for a pre-set period. At this stage the

A-40

Delayed Output Indicator Light will show
that the guard can now be opened by
operating the lock release push button.
When the locking mechanism is released,
the guard door may be opened. Unlocking
the guard door opens contacts 21-22 &
41-42 of the TL4019 Interlock Switch,
thus opening the monitoring circuit of the
SR209AD. This assures that the motor
power circuit is disabled while the guard
door is open. In order for the motor circuit
to be started, the guard door must be
shut and the TL4019 must be locked. The
SR209AD must be manually reset just prior
to sending the start signal.
Fault detection
If either contactor K1 or K2 sticks ON the motor will stop and the guard may be
opened, but the SR209AD will not reset.
The External Device Monitoring circuit
Y1-Y2 of the SR209AD must detect the
proper contact state before the reset signal
will be accepted. Any single fault within
the SR209AD will prevent the closing of its
outputs.

www.sti.com/info

Comments
This system is a practical and effective
method of providing an interlock function
of increased integrity. It is suitable for applications where motion overruns after the
stop command and the time taken to run
down to a stop is predictable, consistent
and less than approximately 30 minutes.
The inclusion of the lock release push
button means that the solenoid is only
energized when guard opening is required.
This prevents guard doors from swinging
open whenever the control stop button is
pressed. It also means that the solenoid is
not left energized for long periods which
can cause efficiency loss. The solenoids
used in the TL4019, TL4024, TL5019,
TL8012-S, and TL8018-5 are continuously
rated but, as with any solenoid, their action
will be more positive when they are working at maximum possible efficiency.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC

K1(AUX)
START
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON
K1(a)
(AUX)

LOCK
RELEASE
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

STOP
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

GUARD
CLOSED

L1 L2 L3

AUXILIARY CIRCUIT
(ALARM INDICATION)

FUSE

E1
32
E2

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

D4BL
31

A22E SERIES
LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON
K1

D4BL (Solenoid Locking
Switch) and E-Stop
- Single Channel
- Push Button Lock Release
Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard door closed
and locked (solenoid not energized), ready
for motor starting (push start button) or
lock release (push lock release button).
Operating principle
In this system the guard is locked
closed until the solenoid is energized.
The solenoid can only be energized
when the auxiliary contacts at K1(a) are
closed. Therefore power contacts at K1
are open and the lock release button is
pushed. When the locking mechanism is
released, monitoring contacts D4BL are
opened. These contacts are in series with

PLC OR
INDICATOR
BEACON

the contactor (K1) control circuit and will
therefore prevent restart while the D4BL
is in the unlocked mode. If the guard is
opened, contacts 11, 12 are opened and
will also prevent restart while the guard is
open regardless of the lock status.
Fault detection
If contactor K1 sticks ON the motor
will continue to run but the guard cannot
be opened (thus the fault is revealed to
the operator). A short circuit fault on the
solenoid energization circuit will initiate a
STOP via contacts 31, 12.
A short circuit fault across terminals
31,12 will not be detected. A short
circuit fault across the E-Stop device
will not be detected.
An open circuit fault on the solenoid
energization circuit will prevent guard
opening (other than by the emergency
release points on the D4BL).

www.sti.com/info

Comments
This system is a practical and effective
method of providing an interlock function
of enhanced integrity. The inclusion of
the lock release push button means
that the solenoid is only energized
when guard opening is required. This
prevents guard doors from swinging
open whenever the control stop button is
pressed. It also means that the solenoid is
not left energized for long periods which
can cause efficiency loss. The solenoids
used in the D4BL is continuously rated
but, as with any solenoid, their action will
be more positive when they are working at
maximum possible efficiency.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

A-41

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC

START

L1 L2 L3

FUSE

(AUX)

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

(AUX)

K1(a)

(AUX)

K2(a)

(AUX)

RESET

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

STOP

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

(AUX)

FUSE
LOCK RELEASE

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

S11

D4JL
E1

12 22

11 21

42 52

41 51

S14

S12

SR103AM
A2

S10 S13

Logic
2

Circuit status
Circuit shown with guard door closed
and locked (solenoid not energized) after
closing Reset, ready for motor starting
(push start button) or lock release (push
lock release button).
Operating principle
In this system the guard is locked
closed until the solenoid is energized. The
solenoid can only be energized when:• the auxiliary contacts at K1(a) & K2(a) are
closed (therefore power contacts at K1
& K2 are open).

A-42

• the SR125SMS45 senses stopped
motion and closes its output circuit at
terminals 13-14.
• the lock release button is pressed. The
monitoring contacts 63, 64 isolate power to the contactor control circuits when
the solenoid is in the unlocked mode.
The guard operated contact sets at
11,12 and 21, 22 are opened whenever
the guard is not fully closed. The output
contacts at 13-14 and 23-24 on the
SR103AM will only be closed (allowing
power to the control circuit) when both
input circuits (S10-S13 & S11-S12) are
closed. Therefore the motor can only be
started when the guard is in the closed
and locked position and the reset is
closed. Auto reset may be implemented
by removing the reset switch.
Fault detection
If either contactor K1 or K2 sticks ON The motor will stop on command but the
guard cannot be opened (thus the fault is
revealed to the operator). Any single fault
which causes solenoid energization will

www.sti.com/info

Y33/43

Zero
Speed
Y34

Y44

SR125SMS45

FUSES

LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

A1/A2

A22E Series

13
K1

Logic
1

- SR103AM
- SR125SMS45
(stopped motion detection system)
- Dual Channel
(single fault monitored)
- Push Button Lock Release
- Manual Auto Reset

+24V

D4JL (Solenoid Locking
Switch) and E-Stop Switch

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G.
THERMAL
CUT OUT

Relay control and
fault monitoring
+

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

GUARD
CLOSED

S21

to PLC
INDICATION BULB
Shows Stopped Motion

initiate a STOP via contacts 63, 64. Any
single fault within the SMD125SMS45 will
prevent the closing of its outputs (preventing solenoid energization). Any single
fault detected on the SR103AM input and
output circuits will result in the lock-out
of the system to a safe state (OFF) at the
next operation of the respective input
device. An open circuit fault across the
solenoid energization circuit will prevent
guard opening (other than by the manual
emergency release points on the D4JL).
Comments
This system provides an interlock function of high integrity and will be suitable for
many high risk applications. It is suitable
for applications where motion overruns after the stop command and the time taken
to run down to a stop is not predictable,
consistent or more than approximately 30
minutes.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC

K1(AUX)
START

K2(AUX)

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

L1 L2 L3

STOP

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

A1 A2 T11

21 11

ROPE OPERATED
E-STOP SWITCHES

ROPE

22 12

T31

T32

K1 K2

34
K1
b

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

13 23 33 41
3
4

ER6022

T12

33
PE T21

T23 T22

a
b

Control
Circuit

2
5

RESET

1
2
3
4
5
6

K1
K2
CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

14 24 34 42

FUSES
INDICATION

FOR SWITCH ACTUATED

INDICATION

FOR SWITCH ACTUATED

ER6022 (Rope Operated
E-Stop Devices)
- G9SA-301
- Dual Channel
- Single Fault Monitored
- Monitored Manual Reset
Circuit status
Circuit shown with rope under correct
tension (not pulled) and ready for motor
starting.
Operating principle
When the rope is pulled it will open
the contacts 11-12 and 21-22 on one of
the switches. This opens the G9SA-301
input circuits T11, T12 and T21, T22. The
G9SA-301 output circuits (13, 14 and 23,

24) will open and cause the contactors to
isolate the motor power. After operation,
the ER6022 must be reset. The reset button connected to the G9SA-301 must be
pushed and released before the motor
can be restarted. This is a monitored
manual reset.
Fault behavior
Any single fault will not cause a loss of
safety function. If either contactor K1 or
K2 sticks ON - the motor will stop on command due to the other contactor, but the
G9SA-301 cannot be reset (thus the fault is
revealed to the operator). Any single fault
detected on the safety monitoring relay
input circuits will result in the lock-out of
the system to a safe state (OFF) at the next
operation of the respective switch.

www.sti.com/info

AUXILIARY CIRCUIT
(ALARM OR INDICATION)

G9SA-301

Comments
This type of arrangement is suitable for
many applications which have medium
to high risk or where the wiring cannot
be fully protected against all potential
damage. Because the E-Stop device
is not likely to be operated frequently,
it is recommended that its function is
checked, by operating and resetting
each switch in turn, on a regular basis
(start of shift or daily) to enable the
G9SA-301 to detect single faults.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

A-43

Control Reliable Circuits & Wiring Diagrams Expert Area

Feedback loop
S11

S12
KM2
24 VDC

A1 A2

KM1

Fuse

T13 T11 T12 T31 T32

13 23 33 41
K1
3
4

Control Circuit

K2
2
5
JP

1
2
3
4
5
6

KM1

KM2

6
PE T23 T21 T22 C

G9SA-TH301

14 24 34 42
M
KM1

KM2
N

2 Hand Control with the
G9SA-TH301 2 Hand Unit
Circuit status
The 2 hand control buttons are not
pressed and the motor is OFF.

A-44

Operating principle
This is a dual channel system with
monitoring of the contactors. It uses 2
double pole (N/C + N/O) positive mode
momentary action push switches.
The motor can only be started when
both buttons are pushed synchronously
(within 0.5 sec.). If either or both buttons
are released, the outputs at the safety
monitoring relay are opened.

www.sti.com/info

Fault detection
Any single fault will not cause a loss
of safety function. The single fault will be
detected either immediately or at the next
operation of the control buttons.
Refer to notes starting on page A-32.

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Choice of Protective Measures

hen a risk assessment
shows
that a machine or process
carries a risk of injury the hazard must be
eliminated or contained. How this is done
will depend on the nature of the machine
and the hazard. In basic terms this means
preventing any access to the relevant parts
while they are in a dangerous condition.
The best choice of protective measure
is a device or system that provides the
maximum protection with the minimum
impact on normal machine operation. It is
important that all aspects of machine use
are considered. Experience shows that a
safety system which is difficult to use is
more likely to be removed or by-passed.
To achieve this, choose either:
1. Preventing access during dangerous
motion, or
2. Preventing dangerous motion during
access.
The following pages give a brief
overview of the characteristics of the most
commonly used devices.

Preventing Access
Fixed Enclosing Guards
If the hazard is on a part of the machinery which does not require access it
should be permanently guarded with fixed
enclosing guards.

Movable Guards with
Interlocking Switches
If access is required there needs to
be a movable guard which is interlocked
with the power source of the hazard in a
manner which ensures that whenever the

A
guard door is open the hazard power will
be switched off. This approach involves
the use of an interlock switch fitted to the
guard door. The control of the hazard's
power is routed through the safety
contacts of the switch. The power source
is usually electrical but it could also be
pneumatic or hydraulic. When guard
door movement (opening) is detected the
interlock switch will isolate the hazard
power supply either directly or via a power
contactor (or valve).
Some interlock switches also incorporate a locking device which locks the
guard door closed and will not release it

Fig. 3.1 Fixed enclosing guards.

Fig. 3.2 Movable guards with interlocking switches

www.sti.com/info

A-45

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
until the machine is in a safe condition.
For many applications the combination of
a movable guard and an interlock switch
with or without guard locking is a reliable
and cost effective solution.

Two-Hand Controls
There are other ways of preventing
access while the machine is in a dangerous
condition. The use of two-hand controls
is common on certain types of machinery.
Two start buttons have to be operated at
the same time to run the machine. This
ensures that both hands of the operator
are occupied in a safe position (i.e. at the

controls) and therefore cannot be in the
hazard area.
Note: This type of measure only
protects the operator and does not give
protection to other personnel.
A two-hand control system depends
heavily on the integrity of its control and
monitoring system to detect any faults, so
it is important that this aspect is designed
to the correct specification.
The physical design should prevent
improper operation (e.g. by hand and
elbow). The installation must also meet
the safety distance requirements from the
hazardous location.

The machine should not go from one
cycle to the next without the releasing and
pressing of both buttons. This prevents the
possibility of both buttons being blocked,
leaving the machine running continuously.
Releasing of either button must cause
the machine to stop.
The use of two-hand control should
be considered with caution as it usually
leaves some form of risk exposed.
It is very useful however on applications
such as teach mode pendants and inching
controls because it can give enhanced levels
of protection when used in conjunction with
other protective devices.

Preventing Dangerous
Motion
Fig. 3.3 Two hand controls

Fig. 3.4 Photoelectric light curtains

A-46

www.sti.com/info

When frequent access is required physical guarding at the hazard is sometimes
too restrictive. In this situation a device is
required which prevents dangerous motion
while allowing unrestricted access by
sensing the presence of the operator and
sending a stop signal.

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Infrared Light Curtains
These devices emit a “curtain” of
harmless infrared light beams in front of
the hazard area. When any of the beams
are blocked the light curtain control circuit
sends a stop signal to the guarded machine.
There are many factors which affect the type
and positioning of a light curtain and these
are dealt with in the standard ISO 13855
“The positioning of protective equipment in
respect of approach speeds of parts of the
human body”.
Light curtains are extremely versatile
and can guard areas many meters wide.
By the use of mirrors the light beams can
be diverted round corners to enclose a
machine. They are available with different
light beam spacings making them suitable
for many applications ranging from totally
enclosing perimeter guards for industrial
robots, to point of access guard for certain
types of presses.

Fig. 3.5 Pressure sensitive safety mats

Pressure Sensitive Safety Mats
These devices are used to guard the floor
area around a machine. A matrix of interconnected mats is laid around the hazard
area and the proper amount of pressure
(e.g. an operator’s footstep) will cause the
mat control unit to send a stop signal to the
guarded machine.
Pressure sensitive mats are often used
within an enclosed area containing several
machines e.g. flexible manufacturing or
robotics cells. When access is required into
the cell (for setting or robot “teaching” for
example) they prevent dangerous motion if
the operator strays from the safe area.
The size and positioning of the mats
should be calculated using the formulae
from the standard ISO 13855 “Positioning
of safeguards with respect to the approach
speeds of parts of the human body.”

Fig. 3.6 Pressure sensitive edges

Pressure Sensitive Edges
These devices are flexible edging strips
which can be fixed to the edge of a moving
part such as a machine table or powered
door where there is a risk of a crushing or
shearing hazard.
If the moving part strikes the operator
(or vice versa) the flexible sensitive edge is
depressed and will send a stop signal to

www.sti.com/info

the power source. Sensitive edges can also
be used to guard machinery where there is
a risk of operator entanglement. If an operator becomes caught up and dragged by the
machine he will be pulled onto the sensitive
edge thereby tripping its switching action.

A-47

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Fig. 3.7 Emergency stop buttons

Emergency Stops
For the possibility that an operator
might get into trouble in spite of the
safeguarding, a manual means of stopping
the machine must be readily available. This
is called an Emergency Stop function.

Emergency Stop Buttons
The usual way of providing this is in the
form of a mushroom headed push button
which the operator strikes in the event of
an emergency. They must be strategically
placed in sufficient quantity around the
machine to ensure that there is always one
in reach at a hazard point.

Grabwire Switches
Fig. 3.8 Grabwire switches

Fig. 3.9 Telescopic trip switches

Light curtains, safety mats and pressure
sensitive edges can all be classed as “trip
devices”. They do not restrict access but
only “sense” it. They rely entirely on their
ability to both sense and switch for the
provision of safety therefore it is important that their control circuit be control
reliable. Also they must only be used in
correct applications. In general they are
only suitable on machines which stop
quickly after removal of power. Because an

A-48

operator can walk or reach directly into the
hazard area it is necessary that the time
taken for the motion to stop is less than
that required for the operator to reach the
hazard after tripping the device.

www.sti.com/info

For machinery such as conveyors, it
is often more convenient and effective to
use a grabwire device along the hazard
area. These devices use a steel wire rope
connected to latching pull switches so that
pulling on the rope will operate the switch
and cut off the machine power.

Telescopic Trip Switches
Other variations include telescopic antenna switches where deflection of the antenna
causes the switch to cut off the machine
power. These devices are more commonly
used as trip devices on machinery such as
pillar drills. The switch is mounted on the
drill and the antenna is extended down next
to the drill bit. In the event of the operator
becoming entangled with the drill he will be
pulled onto the antenna which operates the
switch.

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Type 2 vs. Type 4 Light Curtains

As machinery safety standards and safety light curtains evolve to meet new application demands,
users are faced with more choices and responsibilities than ever before.

new breed of light curtain is
gaining recognition in the
United States. Developed in
Europe and classified as “Type 2,” it is a
lower-cost, reduced-capability alternative
to the more robust “Type 4” high safety
performance level light curtains typically
used to safeguard machinery in the United
States. The terms and definitions of the
product “Type” are derived from the
international standard for light curtains,
IEC 61496. Understanding the capabilities
and differences between these two types
of machine safeguarding devices will help
users determine which is right for their
application.

Three Differences
In most instances, Type 2 and Type 4
safety light curtains look much the same.
However, these photoelectric safeguards
are designed to satisfy vastly different
safety requirements. Essentially, Type 2
products are designed to a lower level of
safety integrity and must not be used in
applications where a Type 4 control is the
appropriate choice. Although the differences are technical and based on various
industry standards, these devices differ in
three significant areas:

1. Fault Detection Circuits
Type 2 light curtains lack the redundant
automatic self-checking circuits employed
in Type 4 light curtains. As a result, the
Type 2 light curtain does not meet the
OSHA or ANSI standard for the highest
safety performance level. Type 4 safety
light curtains are designed to immediately
detect the failure of a single component
within a defined response time. This is not
true of Type 2 light curtains.

2. Optical Angle
Traditional Type 4 safety light curtains
have an effective optical angle of ±2.5
degrees, while Type 2 devices have an

Application Examples – Type 2 or Type 4?
Determining when to use a Type 2 or Type 4 safety light
curtain may best be demonstrated by reviewing a couple of
examples. While it is essential to perform a complete risk assessment on all machines, the severity of the potential injury is
the overriding factor when deciding between a Type 2 and Type
4 safety light curtain.
First, a pharmaceutical company’s packaging department
uses index tables, conveyors, filling and labeling equipment
and a multitude of moving parts.
In the assessment process, the user determined that the size
and force of the motors used on the index table and conveyor
was insufficient to cause serious injury. The worst-case injury
was defined as a potential bruise requiring simple first aid.
In this application, a Type 2 light curtain is the light curtain of
choice. It serves as an appropriate safeguarding device, while
doubling as a process control device.

In our second example, the assembly department of a
gas and pneumatic regulator manufacturer requires that an
operator continuously interface with the assembly equipment.
The workstation consists of a small pneumatic press and an
automatic self-feeding screwdriver. The operator must insert a
multitude of parts that need to be compressed while the driver
inserts screws.
The worst-case injury would require off-site medical attention. In this application a Type 2 device is not an appropriate
safeguarding choice, but rather a Type 4 light curtain is
recommended.

www.sti.com/info

A-49

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
effective optical angle of ±5 degrees. The
wider optical angle increases the possibility of reflective surface interference,
where a reflective object near the sensing
field of the light curtain causes an optical
“short circuit.” As a result, an object in the
sensing field may not be detected, as the
light “bends” or reflects around the object.
This possibility demands users take great
care during installation and alignment to
ensure proper operation of the Type 2
device. Fortunately, there are simple tests
to detect this potential hazard. The tests
must be performed during installation and
periodically afterwards for any light curtain.

3. Price
The third difference is price. Type 2
devices are typically 15% to 30% less expensive when compared to an equivalent
Type 4 device. The cost difference stems
from the less precise optical angle and
fewer fault detection circuits. In addition,
Type 2 light curtains typically have fewer
available features, such as exact channel
select, floating blanking, MPCE (Machine
Primary Control Element) monitoring and
MTS (Machine Test Signal).

A-50

Safety Performance
The Occupational Health & Safety
Act (OSHA) and the American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) both require
the highest level of safety performance for
safety-related machine control systems
when serious injuries can occur.
Examples of machines that require the
highest safety performance level include
machine tools, such as power presses,
shears, press brakes, robots, etc.
A Type 4 safety light curtain employs
self-checking circuitry to monitor itself for
internal faults. If it detects an internal fault,
the Type 4 safety light curtain immediately
sends a stop signal to the guarded machine and the light curtain enters a lockout
condition. Only after replacement of the
failed component, and an appropriate
system reset, will the Type 4 light curtain

and the guarded machine be restored to
operating condition.
Because Type 2 light curtains lack the
redundancy of internal fault detection
circuits, they cannot achieve a sufficiently high safety performance level and
therefore are not suitable as a safeguarding option on machinery where OSHA or
ANSI requirements or risk assessments
require control reliability. Remember
also that a Type 2 light curtain is not
protected against dangerous failures when
exposed to extreme levels of electrical
interference sometimes found in industrial
environments.

Don’t Roll the Dice — Perform a Risk Assessment
Conducting a thorough risk assessment requires the user follow a formal procedure
that considers many factors when looking at machinery hazards. A risk assessment
must be applied in a consistent manner across all plant machinery. This will enable the
user to logically evaluate safety hazards and hazard-guarding solutions. The process
considers all hazards and each type of safety hazard on a given machine.
The risk assessment analyzes each hazard and estimates the risk level by breaking it down into three components: Frequency of exposure, Probability of injury, and
Severity of the potential injury.
An operator, for instance, typically has a high level of exposure, while someone performing maintenance does not. Probability considers machinery speed, and compares
it to a person’s typical reaction time - so a fast-cycling machine will have a higher
probability of injury than one that is a relatively slow. The user must also estimate the
type of potential injury in terms of severity, ranging from a simple pinch on the low
end, to loss of a digit or even life at the other extreme.
Severity of injury should always dictate the assessed risk level. If the severity of
potential injury is high, but exposure and probability are low, a Type 2 device is not an
appropriate safeguarding option. Type 2 devices are not intended for use where ANSI
B11.19, OSHA 1910.212 or 217 apply, and should never be used on a mechanical power
press. Type 2 devices are not and cannot be made Control Reliable.

www.sti.com/info

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
A Question of
Interpretation
Because of these differences, Type
2 light curtains are intended for use in
machine-guarding applications where the
worst-case injury resulting from an accident may be remedied by simple first aid.
The social, legal and political cultures of
Europe and the United States are distinct,
resulting in different interpretations of
“simple first aid.” These differing interpretations impact a user’s decision as to
whether to apply a Type 2 or Type 4 device
in a given application.

In Europe, first aid is measured, in
part, on the amount of time an employee misses from work. For example,
if a worker is injured and must go to the
hospital for stitches or other medical
procedures, yet returns to work the same
day or the next day, it would be considered simple first aid.
In the U.S. these injuries would be
considered much more serious due to the
nature of the injury itself, lost machine and
worker productivity (the “gawk” factor, lower
employee morale, investigating the cause
of the injury, etc.), required injury reports,
preparing insurance claims and so on.

In the U.S., first aid is defined in OSHA
1904.12. as any one-time treatment,
and any follow-up visit for the purpose
of observation of minor scratches, cuts,
burns, splinters, and so forth, which do
not ordinarily require medical care. Such
one-time treatments and follow-up visits
are considered first aid, even though they
are provided by a physician or registered
professional personnel.

RISK ASSESSMENT
Identify all machines within the
workplace Then for each machine

Based on the risk assessment results and the type of hazard, the
user can work with a safety expert to determine the most appropriate
machinery safeguards for each application.
Remember that a light curtain, whether Type 2 or Type 4, may
not be right for every machine safety application. Other safety
equipment, such as safety mats, safety switches, hard guards or a
combination of equipment may offer the optimum solution.
Machine users should reference ANSI B11.TR3, ANSI/RIA R15.061999 (R2009), and/or ISO 14121-1 prior to beginning their formal risk
assessment. A comprehensive discussion of safety strategy and risk
assessment, including formal procedure documentation, is available
at www.sti.com/safety/index.htm.

Consult relevant
information and
expertise

MACHINE LIMITS

Can you foresee all possible
operation and use of the machine

YES
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION

Identify each hazard situation Then for each hazard

RISK ESTIMATION

Estimate the level of risk due to
the hazard

RISK REDUCTION

RISK EVALUATION
Is the level of risk
acceptable?

Have any safety measures
been analysed and proven
adequate?

YES

SAFETY STRATEGY
END OF
PROCESS

www.sti.com/info

A-51

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Application
Considerations
Both Type 2 and Type 4 devices have
a role to play in keeping workers and their
machinery safe and productive. But it
is important to review each application,
and its potential for injury, when applying
these, or any other machine safeguard.
Differences in safety performance demand that the decision to use a Type 2 or
Type 4 safeguard be based on a thorough
and complete risk assessment for each
machine. Users must also consider the
interpretation of an injury based on the
type of first aid required and possibilities of
infrequent exposure, as described in The

American National Standard for Industrial
Robots and Robot Systems ANSI/RIA
R15.06 and ANSI Technical Report for
Machine Tools ANSI B11.TR3.
Type 2 light curtains offer an effective,
low-cost safety solution in applications
where a thorough and complete risk assessment determines that injuries can be
remedied by simple first aid and require no
professional medical attention.
After low risk has been assessed, Type
2 light curtains have a number of potential
safety and non-safety applications, including semiconductor equipment, storage
and conveying equipment, small textile
equipment, packaging equipment (with the
exception of palletizers), process protection, parts counting, tooling guarding and
inspection equipment.

As a general rule, if a risk analysis determines that the severity of the potential
injury is high, regardless of its probability,
a Type 2 device is never an appropriate
machine safeguard. In addition, a Type 2
device must not be used where regulations
require the use of control reliability circuits.
Any potential for an accident that will result
in a severe injury should be treated with
the most conservative approach to safety
equipment selection and application.
Finally and simply, when considering
the application of a Type 2 light curtain,
ask “Would I think twice about putting my
hand in this area?” If the answer is yes,
then by U.S. standards any resulting accident would require more than simple first
aid, and should qualify the use of a Type 4
safety light curtain in the application.

Type 2 and Type 4 Comparison
A side-by-side comparison of the MP2100 (Type 2)
protective light curtain and the MiniSafe MS4800 (Type 4)
safety light curtain demonstrates that Type 4 devices deliver
superior performance and additional operating features.
Type 4 devices typically cost 15% to 30% more than Type 2
devices.

Specifications MP2100 MS4800
ESPE* Type

Type 2

Type 4

Resolution

30 mm

14, 20, 30, or 40 mm

147 – 1470 mm

280 - 2040 mm

Coverage Height

15 m

Max. Operating Range

Safety Outputs

7 m (14 mm)
20 m (20, 30, & 40 mm)

2 PNP,

2 PNP

500 mA @ 24 VDC

625 mA @ 24 VDC

Auxiliary Outputs

NONE

1 PNP
100 mA @ 24 VDC

* Electro-sensitive protection equipment
Features

A-52

MP2100 MS4800

Performance Level PL = e

YES

Channel Select

YES

Floating Blanking

YES

MPCE

NO YES

MTS

NO YES

www.sti.com/info

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Light Curtains —
Installation Requirements & Calculating the Minimum Safe Distance

t is important that the user be familiar
with the installation requirements,
safe mounting distance, controls and
features before using a safety light curtain.
Omron has found that light curtain
installation is most easily accomplished if
it broken down into discrete steps. These
steps include:
1. Understanding the usage requirements for a safety light curtain.
2. Calculating the minimum safe
distance.
3. Physically mounting the light curtain.
4. Preparation of the control enclosure.
5. Configuring the features of the light
curtain.
6. Connection of power and termination
of outputs.
7. Application of power and safety light
curtain alignment.
8. Testing of the safety light curtain for
proper operation.

Step 1. Usage
Requirements
A safety light curtain is a safety device,
designed to protect operators and other
personnel working around a potentially
dangerous machine. Before installing or
using a safety light curtain the following
requirements must be met:
• The machine on which a safety light
curtain is installed must be capable
of stopping motion anywhere in its
stroke or cycle. For example, do not
use a light curtain on a power press with
a full-revolution clutch.

• Do not use a light curtain on any
device with an inconsistent stopping
time or inadequate control devices or
mechanisms.
• Do not use a light curtain where the
environment; such as severe smoke,
particulate matter or corrosive chemicals; may degrade the efficiency of the
light curtain.
• Be aware - light curtains do not offer
protection from flying objects.
• In any installation where the light curtain
is used as a safety device, the employer
has the responsibility to ensure that
all applicable federal, state and local
government requirements are satisfied.
In addition, the employer must ensure
that all machine operators, die setters,
maintenance personnel, electricians,
supervisors, foremen, etc. are familiar
with and understand all instructions
regarding the proper use of the light
curtain, the machinery on which it is
installed and the appropriate safety
regulations.
• All safety-related machine control circuit
elements, including pneumatic, electric,
or hydraulic controls must have a high
safety performance level.
• Any power press which uses a light
curtain must meet the requirements and
inspection procedures of OSHA regulation 1910.217, ANSI standards B11.1
and B11.19, plus any other applicable
state and local regulations. All other machinery or equipment must meet OSHA
standard 1910.212 on general machine
guarding plus any other applicable
regulations, codes and standards.

• Do not use a light curtain as a lockout
device to satisfy the US Federal OSHA
lockout/tagout requirements.
• Additional guarding, such as mechanical guards, may be required if the light
curtain does not protect all areas of
entry to the point of operation hazard.
• All brakes and other stopping mechanisms and controls must be inspected
regularly to ensure proper working order.
If the stop mechanisms and associate
controls are not working properly, the
machine may not stop safely even
though the light curtain is functioning
properly.
• The test procedure must be performed at installation and after any
maintenance, adjustment, repair or
modification to the light curtain or the
machine. In addition, the tests must also
be performed after Channel Select or
Floating Blanking is enabled or disabled.
Testing ensures that the light curtain and
the machine control system work properly to stop the machine. A sample test
procedure is included in this section.
• All procedures in the installation and
operating manual must be followed for
proper operation of the light curtain.
The enforcement of these requirements is
beyond Omron’s control. The employer has
the sole responsibility to follow the preceding requirements and any other procedures,
conditions and requirements specific to your
machinery.

! WARNING: The information provided in this section is general in nature and is written to provide an overview of the safety
light curtain installation process. A safety light curtain should only be installed, checked out, and maintained by a qualified person. A
qualified person is defined as “an individual who understands, is trained on, and demonstrates competence with the construction,
operation or maintenance of the machinery and the hazards involved.” (ANSI/PMMI B155.1-2006)

www.sti.com/info

A-53

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Step 2. Calculating
the Safe Distance for
Safeguards
Nearly all industrial equipment,
especially production machinery, requires
some level of human interaction to function, so people need to be protected from
potentially dangerous interactions with
machines.
To be effective, any safeguard must
either prevent an individual from entering
a hazardous area or detect the entry of
individuals into the hazardous area and
eliminate the hazard before it can present
a danger. Guards, devices that provide a
physical barrier to exposure of a hazard,
must be designed to keep individuals from
reaching through them to the hazard. On
the other hand, devices that protect individuals by detecting entry to or presence
within a hazardous area must be mounted
at a sufficient distance from the location
of the hazard(s) such that the machine will
stop before the operator’s hand or other
body part can reach this hazardous point.
Correctly calculating the minimum safe
mounting distance is vital to ensure worker
safety, while excessive mounting distances
use up valuable floor space and can also
increase the time required to service machinery, which in turn reduces throughput.
This article will explain how to calculate
safe mounting distances for a wide range
of safeguards.

Background
Protecting employees against industrial
machinery hazards is required to comply
with regulations and to protect a company’s most valuable assets, its employees.
The same equipment that prevents injuries
also provides an opportunity to make a
positive impact on the bottom line. This is
because the cost of a work-related injury
goes far beyond hospital and medical
costs. Additional costs that commonly
result from an accident include rehabilitating and retaining the injured worker, time
spent by supervision and management
on the incident, machine downtime, and
possible litigation.

A-54

Hazard Zone

Height Hazard Zone

Reference plane

Figure 1: Height of Hazard Zone
Effective safety measures need to
minimize the potential for risk of injury
while providing access for functions, such
as loading and unloading workpieces
and maintaining the machinery. The best
protection is the device or system that
offers the maximum level of safety with
minimal impact on machine operations at
an affordable cost. A key factor to consider
is how often entry is required. For example, with machines that operate at high
production rates, operators will frequently
need to enter the hazardous area to load
and unload parts. On the other hand, low
production rate equipment will usually
require less frequent entry. Applications
that require frequent entry generally require
faster and more convenient access in
order to maintain throughput at high levels.

Safe-location safeguarding
The first question to consider is the
height of the hazard. If the hazard is sufficiently far above the ground or expected
working surface then guarding is not

www.sti.com/info

required. The relevant OSHA standard,
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.219 – Mechanical
Power-Transmission Apparatus, says that
a hazard that is more than 7 feet from
the working surface does not need to
be guarded. ANSI B15.1-2000 (R2006)
– Safety Standard for Mechanical Power
Transmission Apparatus included similar
requirements, although the threshold
was increased to 8 feet, but has since
been withdrawn and replaced in part by
ANSI B11.19-2010 – Performance Criteria
for Safeguarding. This newer standard
requires that a low risk hazard needs to
be safeguarded unless it is 2,500 mm
(98.4 in.) or more from the working surface
and that a high risk standard needs to be
safeguarded unless it is 2,700 mm (106.3
in.) or more from the reference plane as
shown in Figure 1. This portion of ANSI
B11.19-2010 has been harmonized with
CSA Z432-04 – Safeguarding of Machinery
– Occupational Health and Safety and ISO
13857:2008 – Safety of Machinery.

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Barrier guards
Barrier guards, or hard guards, can
provide the maximum amount of protection, not only by keeping people out,
but also protecting people outside the
hazardous area from projected hazards,
such as flashes and flying objects. Barrier
guards cannot normally be used for the
entire perimeter because this would make
it very difficult to access the equipment.
Typically, a gap in the hard guarding is
defined as an entry to the cell and a more
flexible guarding solution is provided here
to enable personnel and/or material to
safely approach the equipment.

One approach to provide access is the
use of movable barrier guards with devices
interlocked with the machine controls
in a manner that controls the hazard(s)
whenever the guard door is open. When
guard door movement is detected, the
interlock device initiates a stop signal to
the guarded equipment. Some interlock
switches also incorporate a solenoid
device that locks the guard door closed
and will not release it until the hazardous
machine is in a safe state.

132 mm
(5.0)
Barrier opening size –
Smallest Dimension
mm (inches)

11
(0.375)
6
(0.250)

16
(0.625)
64
13 (2.5) 89 166
(0.5) (3.5) (6.5)

Hazard

49
(1.875)

32
(1.25)

445
(17.5)

opening

915 mm
(36.0)

Distance from hazard millimeters (inches)

Figure 2: ANSI standard distance for barrier guards

www.sti.com/info

Safe mounting distances for
barrier guards
A guard, whether fixed, adjustable,
or movable and interlocked, must be
designed to ensure individuals cannot
reach the hazard by reaching over, under,
around or through it. To determine the safe
mounting distance for a barrier guard, first
consider the largest opening in the guarding material. The current Occupational
Safety and Health Administrator (OSHA)
standard for safe distance as a function
of opening size is set forth in Table O-10
of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.217 – Mechanical
Power Presses. This table technically only
applies to mechanical power presses operated within OSHA’s jurisdiction, although
some industry consensus standards
also reference this table, such as ANSI
B65.1-2005 – Graphic technology – Safety
standard – Printing press systems.
A more recent study, “A Review of
Machine Guarding Recommendations”
by Donald R. Vaillancourt and Stover H.
Snook of the Liberty Mutual Research
Center for Health and Safety, is the basis
for the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) and Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) standards. This anthropomorphic study, shown in Figure 2, was
published in 1995 and based on the then
current U.S. workforce. These recommendations have not officially been adopted
by OSHA, but they have been adopted by
a number of other consensus standards,
including:
• ANSI B11.19-2010 – Performance
Criteria for Safeguarding
• ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009) – For
Industrial Robots and Robot Systems –
Safety Requirements
• CSA Z142-10 – Code for Power Press
Operation: Health, Safety, and Guarding
Requirements
• CSA Z432-04 – Safeguarding of
Machinery – Occupational Health and
Safety
• CSA Z434-03 – Industrial Robots
and Robot Systems – General Safety
Requirements

A-55

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Furthermore, these values are sited
through reference by other industry consensus standards, including:
• ANSI O1.1-2004 – American National
Standard for Woodworking Machinery –
Safety Requirements
• ANSI/PMMI B155.1-2006 – Safety
Requirements for Packaging Machinery
and Packaging-Related Converting
Machinery

Figure 3 shows different domestic and
international standards overlaid on top of
each other. Note that there are three different charts in the ISO standard, each based
on a different opening shape. Note that the
ANSI O1.1-1992, represented by the green
line above, was withdrawn when the standard was revised in 2004 and the standard
reverted to the Liberty Mutual distances.
The ANSI and CSA standards are equal to

Set Back Distance Comparison
6.5

Maximum Gap Size (inches)

6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Distance from Hazard (inches)
Liberty Mutual
OSHA 1910.217
ANSI 01.1-1992 (subsequently
has been updated)
ISO 13857:2008 (Slot)
ISO 13857:2008 (Square)
ISO 13857:2008 (Round)

Figure 3: Combination of all safety distance standards
Note: ANSI 0.1.1 has been revised, with the latest revision released in 2004. This current release no longer
includes safe mounting distance data for barrier guards, but rather references the Liberty Mutual data.

A-56

www.sti.com/info

or more conservative than OSHA’s Table
O-10 except at distances of 6.5 in. to 7.5
in.; at these distances the OSHA table has
the more stringent requirements.
As previously mentioned, technically the
OSHA requirements of Table 0-10 only apply to barrier guards on mechanical power
presses within OSHA’s jurisdiction; however, users of mechanical power presses in
the U.S. and associated territories should
apply the most restrictive requirements
of all applicable standards, as the OSHA
requirements are typically viewed as the
‘bare minimum’, while ANSI standards
are consensus based and represent more
current requirements. All other types of
equipment in the U.S. are under the scope
of one or more of the ANSI consensus
standards.
Omron’s Gotcha Stick accurately tests
the allowable barrier opening size based
on the ANSI and CSA standards to ensure
that personnel cannot reach through a
barrier. The three segment stick features
English measurements on one side and
Metric measurements on the other. The
Gotcha Stick is the easiest way of verifying
that openings in barrier guards will not
allow the hazards to be accessed by personnel reaching through a barrier guard.

Reach under
To prevent an individual from accessing
the hazard by reaching or crawling below
the barrier guard, perimeter barrier guards
must be designed so that the bottom of
the barrier is no more than 300 mm (12
in.) above the adjacent walking surface
according to ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999
(R2009). The same standard states that
the top of the barrier must be no less than
1,500 mm (60 in.) above the adjacent
walking surface. These measurements
are more restrictive in Canada, however,
with distances of 150 mm (6 in.) and 1,800
mm (71 in.), respectively, according to
CSA Z434-03. The equivalent international
standard, ISO 10218-2:2011, sets the
requirements at 200 mm (7.8 in.) and 1,400
mm (55 in.), respectively.

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Reach over
Figure 4 shows how to determine guard
height to protect against reaching over a
barrier to contact a hazard. In the figure,
a is the height of the danger zone, b is
the height of the protective structure,
and c is the horizontal distance between
the guard and the danger zone. Guards
or other protective structures less than
1,000 mm (39 in.) high are not considered
sufficient on their own for any application
because they do not adequately restrict
movement of the body, and structures less
than 1,400 mm (55 in.) should not be used
in high risk applications without additional
safety measures. The following guidelines
are available to help determine adequate
height of constructed guards in relation to
the hazard height and the distance of the
guard from hazard:
• ANSI B11.19-2010 – Performance
Criteria for Safeguarding
• CSA Z432-04 – Safeguarding of
Machinery – Occupational Health and
Safety
• ISO 13857:2008 – Safety of Machinery
– Safety distances to prevent hazard
zones being reached by upper and
lower limbs
Note that ANSI B15.1-2000 (R2006)
– Safety Standard for Mechanical
Power Transmission Apparatus included
similar requirements, but has since been
withdrawn and replaced in part by ANSI
B11.19-2010.

Presence sensing devices
Safety devices that protect individuals
by detecting their entrance to or presence
within a hazardous area include photoelectric presence sensing devices (including
light curtains, single-beam devices and
laser area scanners) as well as pressure
sensitive devices, such as safety floor
mats. Light curtains are often used in conjunction with hard guards to protect people
when the machinery is operating, while
enabling easy access at other times. Light
curtains control access to the hazardous

Hazard zone

Reference plane
c

Protective structure
a – height of hazard zone
b – height of protective structure
c – horizontal safety distance to
hazard zone
Figure 4: Guard height to protect against reach over

equipment by emitting harmless infrared
light beams across a plane, typically the
entrance to the hazardous area. When
any of the beams are obstructed, the light
curtain control circuit initiates a stop signal
to the guarded machine. Light curtains are
very versatile and can guard areas many
meters wide – sometimes as large as 20
meters. Light curtains can be mounted in
either a horizontal or vertical plane.
Pressure sensitive safety mats provide
another alternative for guarding the
entrance to the equipment, and in certain
applications they can also be installed to
protect the inside of a cell. A matrix of interconnected mats can be laid at the entry
area and an operator’s footstep causes
the mat control unit to initiate a stop signal
to the machine. Trim is used around the
perimeter of the device to hold the mat in
place, protect wiring and either provide a
smooth ramped surface to prevent tripping
hazards at the edge of the mat or allow the
device to be mounted directly against the
equipment or other structures to ensure
that the entire area is safeguarded.

www.sti.com/info

Safe mounting distance for
presence sensing devices
Safeguarding devices that do not
prevent an individual from reaching into
a hazardous area must be located far
enough away from the hazardous area that
the machine will stop before the operator’s hand or other body part can reach
the hazard. The minimum safe distance
is based on the stopping time of the
machine as well as the reaction time of
the safeguarding device and the estimated
approach speed of the individual towards
the hazard.
A formula is outlined in OSHA 1910.217
and applies to the guarding of mechanical
power presses, but also can serve as a
guide for other machine applications. A
newer formula that takes into consideration more factors in calculating the minimum safe distance is included in American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards B11.19-2010 and Robotic Industries
Association (RIA) R15.06-1999 (R2009), as
well as Canadian Standards Association
(CSA) Z142-10, Z432-04, and Z434-03.

A-57

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Omron suggests using this newer formula
and presents it here in the form used by
ANSI and CSA.
DS = K (T) + DPF
where:
DS = the safety distance
K = the maximum speed that an
individual can approach the hazard
T = the total time to stop the hazardous
motion
DPF = the depth penetration factor of the
safeguarding device
There is a different mounting formula for
safeguarding devices used in Europe that
is similar to the ANSI formula given above
but with some subtle differences. This
formula is presented in European Standard
(EN) 999:1998 and International Standards
Organization (ISO) 13855:2010 is:
S = (K x T) + C
where:
S = the safety distance
K = the approach speed of the body or
parts of the body
T = the overall system stopping
performance
C = an additional distance based on
intrusion towards the danger zone prior to
actuation of the protective equipment
The factor K is the speed constant and
includes hand and body movements of an
individual approaching a hazardous area.
The determination of K should consider
all types of motion that could move the
individual towards the hazard, including
hand and arm movement, twisting of the
body or shoulder, bending at the waist and
walking or running.
One of the acceptable values of K is the
hand speed constant which is usually defined as the horizontal motion of the hand
and arm while seated. The hand speed
constant originated in the press industry
using two hand controls in the 1930s.
A common value for the hand speed
constant is 1.6 m/s (63 in/s). The hand
speed constant does not include other

A-58

body movements which can affect the
actual approach speed, and is considered
the minimum acceptable value. Another
acceptable value is 2.0 m/s (78.75 in/s)
which is based on an individual walking toward a hazard. This latter value is defined
in ISO 13855:2010 – Safety of machinery
– Positioning of protective equipment with
respect to the approach speeds of parts of
the human body.
The factor T is the total time necessary
for the hazardous motion to stop or for the
hazardous portion of the machine cycle
to be completed. Factors that affect T
include:
• Reaction time of the safeguarding
device, including its interface
• Reaction time of the machine control
system
• Type of actuator
• Additional time required for degradation
of braking performance

contact the manufacturer of your machine
for guidance in selecting a percentage
increase factor.
The EN and ISO standards use a slightly
different method for calculating T:
T = T1 + T2
where:
T1 = maximum time between the actuation of the sensing function and the output
signal switching devices being in the off
state (i.e., light curtain and monitoring
relay)
T2 = maximum response time of the
machine, i.e. the time required to stop the
machine or remove the risks after receiving
the output signal from the protective
equipment (can be influenced by various
factors, e.g. temperature, switching time of
valves, ageing of components, etc.)

The ANSI and CSA standards use the
following method to calculate T:
T = TR + TC + TS + TSPM
where:
TR = reaction time of the safeguarding
device and its interface (i.e., light curtain
and monitoring relay)
TC = reaction time of the control system
TS = stopping time of the machine
TSPM = additional stopping time allowed
by the stopping performance monitor
before it detects stop time deterioration.
As used in the press industry, a stopping
performance monitor will halt the machine
when the stop time of the machinery
exceeds the set limit. This indicates that
excessive brake wear has occurred.
TC + TS are usually measured together
by a stopping performance monitor. TSPM
is an additional value to allow for braking
system wear and is typically a percentage increase factor of the measured stop
time (TC + TS). For example, stopping
performance monitors usually add an extra
amount from 5% to 20% of the measured
stop time. Omron recommends that you

www.sti.com/info

< 30

Light

Curta

Intrusion
Approach

Ds
Floor
Intrusion angle of approach less than 30 to the
sensing field.

Figure 5: Approach considerations

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Depth penetration factor

Model Series

An additional distance, called the depth
penetration factor (DPF or C), needs to be
added to the safety distance when using
devices that do not detect the presence
of an individual at the plane or within the
field until an amount of penetration into
the field occurs. The expected direction
of approach towards the hazard should
be considered when calculating the depth
penetration factor. If the detection zone is
at an angle of greater than 30° to the direction of approach as in Figure 5, it is treated
as an orthogonal or perpendicular approach. On the other hand, if the detection
zone has been installed so that it is angled
less than 30° to the direction of approach,
it is treated as a parallel approach.

MOS = 14 mm

MOS = 30 mm

RCVR

XMTR

RCVR

S (mm)

S (in.)

DPF (mm)

DPF (in.)

F3SJA-P14

0.6

0.9

F3SJA-P20

0.8

1.8

F3SJA-P25

1.0

2.4

F3SJA-P30

1.2

3.1

F3SJA-P55

2.2

163

6.4

MS 4600-14

0.6

0.9

MS 4600-20

0.8

1.8

MS 4600-30

1.2

3.1

MS 4800-14

0.6

0.9

MS 4800-20

0.8

1.8

MS 4800-30

1.2

3.1

MS 4800-40

1.6

112

4.4

Figure 7: DPF for all Omron STI light curtains

same model and size light curtain with
30 mm (1.18 in.) resolution only requires
38 beams, resulting in a depth penetration factor of 78 mm (3.1 in.) and a 23
millisecond minimum response time.
When these numbers are plugged into the
formula provided earlier for calculating the
safe mounting distance, they show that
the safety distance is 116 mm (4.549 in.)
for the 30 mm resolution light curtain and
97 mm (3.816 in.) for the light curtain with

20 mm resolution. The light curtain with
a larger object resolution (fewer beams)
thus can be almost 19 mm (0.733 in.)
closer to the hazard, proving that minimum
object resolution, and by extension the
corresponding depth penetration factor,
should not be the sole consideration when
selecting a point-of-operation light curtain.
See Figure 7 for depth penetration factors
for various models of safety light curtains
available from Omron.

Figure 6: Minimum object sensitivity for
two different light curtains
mm in
64 (2.5)

Object Sensitivity (S)

It’s also important to address possible
tradeoffs between the depth penetration
factor and reaction time of different light
curtains. In Figure 6, the light curtain on
the left yields a smaller depth penetration
factor because the individual beams are
located closer together as opposed to
the light curtain on the right. Yet the light
curtain on the left also has a longer reaction time because it takes more time to
cycle through the larger number of beams.
As an example, a light curtain with 20 mm
(0.78 in.) resolution requiring 76 beams to
obtain a desired protected height of 760
mm (29.9 in.) results in a depth penetration
factor of 44 mm (1.8 in.) and a minimum
response time of 32 milliseconds. The

(2.0)

(1.5)

(1.0)

(0.5)
0.0
0.0

25
(1.0)

50
(2.0)

76
(3.0)

102
(4.0)

127
(5.0)

153
(6.0)

178
(7.0)

203
(8.0)

mm
(in.)

Depth Penetration Factor (DPF)
DPF = 3.4 (S - 0.7) cm
(DPF = 3.4 (S - 0.275 in.)

Figure 8: Depth penetration factor for presence sensing devices used in a vertical
application with object sensitivity less than 64 mm (2.5 in.)

www.sti.com/info

A-59

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Devices with perpendicular
approach
2
1

Light Curtain

The depth penetration factor compensates for varying object sensitivities of
electro-optical presence sensing devices.
Figure 8 can be used to determine DPF
when applying the ANSI or CSA formula
for presence sensing devices used in
vertical applications with object sensitivity
less than 64 mm (2.5 in.), considered as
point-of-operation safeguarding devices.
When blanking features are used and
when the blanked area is not completely filled by the workpiece or part or
by supplemental mechanical guarding, the
adjusted minimum object sensitivity can
be calculated as:
Adjusted depth penetration factor =
(minimum object sensitivity without blanking) x (number of beams blanked)
Where minimum object sensitivity
without blanking = center-to-center beam
spacing + lens diameter
Once this value is found, then determine
DPF using Figure 8, as long as the adjusted
minimum object sensitivity is still less than
64 mm (2.5 in.). If the entire blanked area
is filled with mechanical guarding or other
fixed material or guards, use the original
object sensitivity of the device to determine the appropriate value for DPF.
Similar to the concept for barrier guards,
guidelines are also available in ISO 138552010 to determine the minimum height to
the top beam of the electro-optical device
to protect against reaching over the sensing field to contact a hazard. In Figure 9, a
is the height of the danger zone, b is the
minimum height of the sensing field, and
DS is the horizontal distance between the
sensing field and the danger zone.
A different method is used to determine
DPF for electro-optical devices with object
sensitivities greater than 64 mm (2.5
in.), considered perimeter safeguarding
devices, as shown in Figure 10. ANSI and
CSA standards set DPF = 900 mm (36 in.)
for reach-through applications where the
individual cannot reach over the top of
the sensing field and the bottom of the
sensing field (“A”) is no more than 300
mm (12 in.) above the working surface;

Key
1
2
3
a
b
Dpf
Ds

Dpf
KxT
electro-sensitive protective equipment
hazard zone
Ds
reference plane
height of hazard zone
height of the upper edge of the detection zone of electro-sensitive protective equipment
additional distance which a part of the body can be moving towards the hazard zone prior
to the actuation of the safegard
minimum distance for reaching over

Figure 9: Reaching over the vertical direction zone of electro-sensitive protective equipment

b
a

Reach-Through
Figure 10: Reach-through and reach-over applications

A-60

www.sti.com/info

Reach-Over

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
ISO 13855 sets DPF = 850 mm (33.5 in.) for
these applications. North American and
International standards require DPF to be
equal to 1,200 mm (48 in.) for reach-over
applications where the top of the sensing
field (“B”) is between 900 and 1,200 mm
(36 and 48 in.) above the reference plane
and the bottom of the sensing field (“A”)
is no more than 300 mm (12 in.) above the
working surface.

C = 1,200 mm – (0.4 x H)

function of their object sensitivity can be
determined by the following formula and is
also shown in Figures 11 and 12.

where:
C = an additional distance based on
intrusion towards the danger zone prior to
actuation of the protective equipment
H = the height of the detection zone
above the reference plane (measured in
mm)

h = 15 (S – 50) mm
h = 15 (S – 2) inches
where:
S = the minimum object sensitivity.

Impact of vertical pointof-operation vs. horizontal
perimeter safeguarding devices
on usage of floor space

Devices with parallel approach
Any device installed with parallel
approach to the hazard is considered a
perimeter safeguarding device. For these
applications, the minimum depth-of-field
or sensing area must hinder an individual
from stepping over the electro-optical
presence sensing device or safety mat. In
ANSI and CSA standards, this distance
is 1,200 mm (48 in.) if an individual can
step over and pass unrestricted or 900
mm (36 in.) if supplemental safeguarding
or physical barriers are used such that an
individual must stand within the sensing
area. ISO standards require that distance
be calculated as follows, but not less than
850 mm (33.5 in.).

Allowable Sensing Field Heights in Inches (mm)
Ground Level Devices that Can Be Reached
Over (30 inches [760 mm] or Less)
Object

Mounting height of devices with
parallel approach
Ground level devices that can be
reached over, such as safety mats, area
scanners and horizontally-mounted light
curtains, are approached by individuals
parallel to the sensing field. The minimum
mounting height (h) for these devices as a

Mounting Height

Sensitivity

Minimum

Maximum

< 2 (50)

39 (990)

2.5 (64)

7.5 (190)

39 (990)

3.0 (76)

15 (380)

39 (990)

3.5 (89)

22.5 (570)

39 (990)

4.0 (102)

30 (760)

39 (990)

4.25 (108)

33.75 (860)

39 (990)

4.6 (117)

39 (990)

Figure 12: Allowable sensing field heights for
ground level devices

K (T total)

Dpf = 3' or 4'

Hazard Zone

Light Curtain

Area Scanner
Safety Mat
Figure 11: Height of sensing field

www.sti.com/info

A-61

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
The orientation of a safety device can
have a major impact on the amount of
floor space required to properly safeguard
a machine or manufacturing cell. For example, if you use a vertical light curtain as
a safeguarding device with a 30 mm (1.18
in.) minimum object sensitivity, the depth
penetration factor is 78 mm (3.08 in.),
resulting in the use of 5.08 m (16.68 sq.
ft.) over a 20 m (65 ft.) range. On the other
hand, if you position the same safeguarding device horizontally, the depth penetration factor increases to 1,200 mm (48 in.)
and the space usage increases to 24.15
m2 (260 sq. ft.) over the same 20 m (65 ft.)
range. This scenario shows that switching
from a horizontal to a vertical orientation in
this application can save 22.6 m2 (243.32
sq. ft). This figure can be multiplied by the
cost of space per square foot in the facility
to calculate the cost savings.

Two-hand control applications
Two-hand control applications use two
operator control devices which are both
monitored and initiate a stop signal to
the machine when the operator removes
one or both hands from the actuating
devices. A two-hand control is used when
it is necessary to ensure that the operator
must be prevented from reaching into
the hazardous area during the hazardous
portion of the equipment cycle. Two-hand
trip applications (such as full revolution
machines) still require two operator control
devices, but activation of both devices
only initiates the hazardous motion; both
control devices and are not required to be
maintained by the operator throughout the
hazardous portion of the cycle. Two-hand
control and two-hand trip applications
have a DPF of 0 in North America, while ISO

Ds = K (T total)

One-hand control applications
A single control device can only be
used when the operator cannot reach
the hazardous area with his/her free
hand. As shown in Figure 14, the safe
mounting distance (DS) for a single control
device includes a large DPF of 2 meters
(6.5 ft) due to the ability of the operator

Ds = K (T total)

Hazard Zone

Figure 13: Two-hand control and two-hand trip applications

A-62

requires the additional factor (C) to be 250
mm (9.8 in). The safe mounting distance
for these control devices is measured by
the closest hand control to the hazard
as shown in Figure 13. It is extremely
important that the two-hand control and
two-hand trip stations are designed,
constructed, and arranged such that the
actuating devices can only be initiated by
the hands of the operator.

www.sti.com/info

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
to stand between the device and reach
towards the hazard, where 2 meters is
the average human wingspan. Because
of the implications on floor space, as well
as the fact that this safeguarding measure
does not provide adequate protection for
other affected individuals, single control
is typically not selected as a sole means
of safeguarding for most equipment.
Furthermore, single control devices are
not accepted as a primary safeguarding
means in International standards.

Radio frequency (RF) /
capacitive devices
The sensing field(s) of radio frequency
devices can vary due to many factors,
including design of the antenna(e), effects
of adjacent equipment, or environmental

factors such as temperature or humidity.
When used for used for safeguarding
applications, determination of the safe
mounting distance cannot be dependent
on the inevitable fluctuations and variations in the field sensitivity. Therefore, to
ensure the sensing field will always prevent
individuals from reaching the hazard(s),
the measured safe mounting distance of
a radio frequency device will unavoidably
render addition floor space around the
machine as unusable as shown in Figure
15. This negative impact on floor space
is the primary reason radio frequency
devices are typically not selected as a sole
means of safeguarding for most equipment. Additionally, radio frequency devices
are not accepted as a primary safeguarding means in International standards.

Interlocked barrier guards
With interlocked barrier guards, it’s necessary to consider three different factors
in determining the safety distance: the gap
size, the height in relation to the distance
to the hazard, and the time required to
stop the hazard. First determine the safety
distance based on the gap size using the
appropriate standard shown in Figure
3. Then determine the safety distance
based on the height of the guard using
the method shown in Figure 4. Finally,
calculate the safety distance based on the
stopping time of the machine using the
formula: DS = K (T) [or S = K (T) according
to the international nomenclature]. Compare the safety distances determined using
these three different methods and use the
largest figure to determine the appropriate
safe mounting distance of the interlocked
guard from the hazard(s).

Ds
K (T total)

Dpf = 6.5’

Hazard Zone

Figure 14: Single control applications

www.sti.com/info

A-63

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Conclusion
This article has provided an overview
of the major considerations involved in
determining the minimum safe mounting
distance for various safeguarding devices.
Accurate calculation of the minimum
safe mounting distance can ensure the
safety of personnel while conserving floor
space and maximizing throughput. In
most manufacturing operations, the two
most important considerations are safety
and productivity. The challenge is that
improving one of these factors often has
a negative impact on the other. Proper
calculation of the required safety distance
is necessary to correctly select appropriate
safeguarding measures to best optimize
both productivity and safety in many manufacturing operations. It should be noted
that space limitations make it impossible
to address every possible situation or to
fully explain every configuration option, so
it’s important to consult your vendor and
the appropriate regulatory and consensus
standards to obtain full details on how to
optimize safety device implementation for
your specific application.

Step 3. Physically
Mounting the Light Curtain
Now that the minimum safe distance
and reflective surface distance are
known, the safety light curtain may now
be mounted accordingly on the machine,
stands or other mounting fixtures.

Installation of Multiple Light
Curtain Units
Installations where two or more light
curtains are mounted on machines in close
proximity and in alignment with each other,
precautions should be taken to avoid one
curtain interfering with another. This can
occur when the receiver of one unit “sees”
the transmitter of another. The first unit
will respond with a Red Machine Stop
condition.

Mounting Considerations
The transmitter and receiver units must
be securely mounted at a distance from
the pinch point greater than minimum safe
distance. Other items to consider when
selecting a mounting location include:

Ds
Variable detection area
K (T total) + variance

Hazard Zone

Antenna(e)
Figure 15: Determination of safety distance for radio frequency devices

A-64

Best practices for installation involve
orienting the light curtains such that the
transmitters or receivers are mounted
back-to-back to each other as shown in
Figure 16. Contact Omron should you
need additional assistance. Additionally,
STI safety light curtains offer multiple scan
codes to decrease the chance of light
curtains interfering with each other.

www.sti.com/info

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
1. If the light curtain does not protect
all access to the danger point, the
unprotected access must be protected by
other approved devices or supplemental
guarding. An operator must not be able to
reach around the light curtain in any way
to gain access to a hazardous location of
the machine or stand between the machine
and the light curtain. A mechanical barrier in
front of the hazardous machine area should
be used to prevent personnel from standing
between the light curtain and the machine.
2. Use caution when installing any light
curtain where the perimeter of the sensing
field is adjacent to a reflective surface,

such as shiny metal, foil, glossy paint,
plastic or other similar material. A reflective
surface can deflect the optical beam and
may cause an obstruction in the sensing
field not to be detected. Failure to correct
this condition can result in a severe operator injury. Perform the Test Procedure to
test for this condition.
3. The sensing field of the light curtain
is marked on the transmitter and receiver
housings (see installation manual for
details). The area between the housing
bottom and beginning of the sensing field
is not protected. Therefore, you should
position the light curtain so access to the

Machine 1

Receiver

Transmitter

Receiver

Transmitter

Figure 16: Multiple Light Curtain Installations

Machine 2

Machine 1

Transmitter

Receiver

Transmitter

Fig. 16a Not Recommended. This arrangement may be subject to interference
between the two light curtains.

pinch point is only through the marked
sensing field or provide an alternative
means to prevent entry to the hazardous
location.
4. The transmitter, receiver and cabling
should be out of the way of feedstock, raw
material, parts, tool and die changes, fork
lifts, etc.
5. Normally the transmitter and receiver
are mounted with the cable end down and
the plastic bezels facing each other. To
install the units "upside down" (cable ends
up), both transmitter and receiver units
must be mounted with their cable connectors in the same orientation. You may also
install the light curtain in a horizontal plane,
provided that both units are oriented the
same. See Figure 17a.
6. If you use a mirror, such as a high
quality STI mirror, in your installation, do
not mount the mirror in a retro-reflective
orientation to the transmitter and receiver
units as depicted in Figure 5.17b. The
transmitter and receiver units must also be
installed parallel to and in line with each
other.
7. All cabling must be installed and
routed in accordance with national and
local electrical codes and good workmanship practices.
Omron offers a variety of mirrors,
stands, mounting kits, and cabling to
simplify special installation requirements.

Step 4. Preparation of the
Light Curtain
Input power, output machine control,
and, if used, remote function control must
be connected to the light curtain by means
of cables protected by conduit.
It is recommended that a clearance of
approximately 4 inches (100 mm) be maintained between the receiver or transmitter
cables and any AC power lines.

Machine 2

Fig. 16b Preferred. The suggested orientation. The receivers are mounted back
to back.

www.sti.com/info

A-65

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Step 5. Configuring the
Features of the Light
Curtain
Some light curtains contain installation
configuration options which allow flexibility for your specific application needs.
Examples of installation selections include
Operation Mode, Auxiliary Relay Selection,
MPCE Monitoring, MTS, Exact Channel
Select, Floating Blanking, Restart Interlock
Mode and Range Selection. See your
installation manual or contact Omron for
further information.

Step 6. Connection of
Power and Termination of
Outputs

Figure 17: Light Curtain Mounting Orientation

Figure
Correct
Figure17a
4.10a
Correct

Figure 17b Incorrect

Figure 4.10b Incorrect

! WARNING: All electrical connections must be made by qualified personnel
only and in accordance with your local and
national electrical codes and regulations.
Input Power Connections
Light curtains are generally powered by
24 VDC. Check the product label to verify
the voltage which may be used. Resource
modules are available which may allow you
to power your light curtain with 115 VAC or
230 VAC.
All light curtains must be connected to a
good electrical ground.
It is recommended that the light curtain
be dedicated to its own source of input
power where possible. Also, do not connect other devices to the internal power
supply of the light curtain.

Mirror

Connecting to the Machine
Control Circuit
Light curtains may be connected to
your machine circuit in several different
configurations, depending on the machine
controller design and the light curtain
model selected. If you are evaluating an
existing light curtain installation, certain
models may not have all of the features or
output connection options outlined in the
following sections. Please contact Omron
should you require assistance.

A-66

WARNING: Unsafe! STI Safety light curtains are not designed to be used in a mirror
bounce back mode. In this configuration, an object may not be reliably detected and may
cause severe operator injury.

www.sti.com/info

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
When deciding which method is best for
your application, keep in mind the following important points:
• The safety light curtain must be wired
to your machine control circuit at a
point where a stop signal from the light
curtain results in an immediate halt
during any point in the machine’s cycle
or stroke. If the machine is a mechanical power press, never connect a light
curtain to the top-stop circuit. The press
will be unable to stop at any other point
in its stroke.
• Light curtains are general purpose
safety devices and are not designed
for any specific type, model or brand of
machine.
• All safety-related machine control circuit
elements, including pneumatic, electric
or hydraulic controls must have a high
level of safety performance.
• Light curtains may not be used as a
tripping means to initiate mechanical
power press motion except when used
and installed in total conformance
with the OSHA PSDI requirements of
1910.217(h).
• You must always use both safety
outputs to connect to your machine.
Should one output fail, the other is used
to stop the machine.
• Omron recommends you contact the
machine manufacturer for advice and
assistance on the connection of any
safety device.
• If a PLC (programmable logic controller) is used as the machine controller,
consult the appropriate STI light
curtain manual for proper connection
information.
The installer must read and understand
all instructions provided in the installation
manual provided with the safety light
curtain.

! WARNING: Contact the protected
machine manufacturer for assistance on
where to wire the light curtain to your
machine control circuit. It is critical that
the light curtain be properly connected or
it will not provide maximum protection to
the machine operators and could result in
serious injury. The machine control circuit

wiring is the sole responsibility of the
employer.

PERIMETER GUARDING
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Perimeter guarding refers to installations where the light curtain is generally
positioned around the outside perimeter
of the machine or robot to be guarded.
This could leave sufficient space for an
operator to stand between the light curtain
and the machine. A horizontal mounting of
the light curtain may prevent this.
For perimeter guarding installation, the
guarded machine or robot must be wired
such that any detected interruption of
the sensing field will cause an immediate stop of the hazardous motion. The
machine or robot must only be restarted
by actuation of a reset switch. This reset
switch must be located outside the area
of hazardous motion and positioned such
that the hazardous area can be observed
by the switch operator. This would prevent
a machine from automatically restarting
once the obstruction is no longer detected
by the light curtain.
The emergency stop circuit may possibly be used to interconnect a perimeter
guard in certain installations where an
external reset pushbutton or keyswitch
is used. Always contact the machine
manufacturer for advice and assistance on
the connection of any safety device.

! WARNING: Perimeter guarding
installations must not allow a machine or
robot to restart automatically. Use a reset
switch placed outside and within view of
the hazard area.
Restart Interlock Mode
Restart Interlock (Guard) Mode allows
the light curtain safety outputs to remain in
a de-energized state (latch condition) after
an object detected by the light curtain is
removed from the sensing field.
It may be desirable to employ Restart
Interlock Mode when a light curtain is used
in perimeter guarding installations.
Restart Interlock and Start Interlock are
two separate programming choices, so

www.sti.com/info

it is possible to set the system to go to
a machine run operating condition when
power is applied and the sensing field
is clear but to latch whenever a beam is
blocked. Omron recommends activating
Start Interlock whenever Restart Interlock
is enabled.

MACHINE PRIMARY CONTROL
ELEMENTS (MPCE)
The monitoring of the machine control
elements is an important part of a safety
system installation. First, a definition of a
machine control element.
Redundant machine control circuits
must have two machine primary control elements (MPCE). These are defined by IEC
Standards as “The electrically powered
element that directly controls the normal
operation of a machine in such a way that
it is the last element (in time) to function
when machine operation is to be initiated
or arrested.” [IEC61496-1].
It is important to note that the methods
to arrest hazardous machine motion will
include hydraulic, pneumatic, clutch and
mechanical braking systems. Thus, there
are several variations of MPCEs. For example, your MPCE may consist of relays,
contactors, solenoids or electromechanical
valves.
The purpose of monitoring the action of
each MPCE is to make sure it is responding correctly to the light curtain’s safety
outputs and to detect any inconsistency
between the two MPCEs. Monitoring of the
light curtain to machine control interface is
necessary to detect a malfunction within
the interface that would prevent a stop
signal from the light curtain from reaching
the machine controller. This is necessary to
achieve the high level of safety performance required by OSHA.
If relays, the MPCE must use force
guided (captive contact) type machine
control relays to be effective for the MPCE
monitoring wiring.

A-67

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
the External Device. Contact the machine
manufacturer for the specifications of the
control components.
External Device monitoring is performed
on the final switching devices. This
consists of a set of NC contacts from ED1
and ED2 connected through the receiver's
EDM line to 0 VDC. If no external devices
are used, the monitoring should be performed on the resource module in use.
For more information, please consult
the appropriate operation and installation
manual.

The RM-1 module provides the user
with two normally open (NO) safety
contacts and two normally closed (NC)
monitoring contacts. The NO contacts
are connected to two force-guided relays
(External Devices), ED1 and ED2. A set of
NO contacts from each External Device
(in series) should be used to control the
machine's hazardous motion. In some
control systems, the RM-1 can be used as

CONNECTING SOLID-STATE
OUTPUTS TO A STI RELAY
MODULE
The following connection scheme shows
an MS4800 light curtain with solid-state
safety outputs interfacing with an RM-1
relay module. The concept is similar for
other safety products with solid-state
safety outputs.

CONNECTING SOLID-STATE OUTPUTS TO A STI
RELAY MODULE

Check unit for proper voltage requirements before powering
up unit.

Power Supply
Earth
Ground

+24VDC

0 VDC

OSSD 1
OSSD 2
5
4
6

RM-1

MS4800 Receiver

Pink

Auxiliary
Output

Yellow

Start

Red

1
ED1

EDM

Black
White

OSSD 2

ED2

Monitor

Pink
42

Brown +24VDC

Green

ED1

0 VDC

ED2

Blue

To Machine Control

OSSD 1

0 VDC

Earth

31
CONTROL VOLTAGE
SUPPRESSOR

MS4800 Transmitter
MTS

Brown

White

MTS
Return

Black

+24VDC

Blue

0 VDC

Green

Earth

ED1

SUPPRESSOR

MTS/Test

ED2

EDM must be used when using the RM1. If the RM1 is the
Final Switching Device connect terminal 5 (red wire) to the MONITOR terminal of the RM1.
If force-guided control relays are used as Final Switching Devices they must be monitored,
connect terminal 5 (red wire) though NC contacts to 0 VDC. (Do not connect both)
For testing prior to installation, the user may select EDM OFF(default factory setting).
2
In this case the EDM line (red wire) must be connected to the system 0 VDC line.
3 User-supplied over-current protection, 6 A max.
4
5

Auxiliary Output PNP 100 mA. max., (default)
User-supplied fuse

Start connections are shown with NC (pulled to 0 VDC). (default)

Verify that the final switching devices are properly suppressed.

MTS requires a NC contact. If MTS is not used, verify that the function
is disabled.

A-68

If EDM select is required the yellow wire should be
tied to +24V to enable it, or 0 V to disable it.

www.sti.com/info

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
CONNECTING SOLID-STATE
OUTPUTS TO TWO FORCEGUIDED RELAYS
The following connection scheme shows
a MS4800 light curtain with solid-state
safety outputs directly driving two forceguided relays (ED). The concept is similar
for other safety products with solid-state
safety outputs.

The MS4800 receiver provides the user
with 2 PNP solid-state safety outputs
capable of sourcing 625 mA @ 24 VDC.
These safety outputs are directly connected to the two force-guided relays
(External Devices), ED1 and ED2. A set of
normally open contacts from each External
Device (in series) should be used to control
the machine's hazardous motion.

External Device monitoring is performed
on the final switching devices. It consists
of a series set of NC contacts from ED1
and ED2 tied through the receiver's EDM
line to 0 VDC.
In some control systems, the PNP
safety outputs can be directly interfaced
into a safety PLC. Contact the machine
manufacturer for the specifications on the
PLC.

CONNECTING SOLID-STATE OUTPUTS TO TWO
FORCE-GUIDED RELAYS

Check unit for proper voltage requirements before powering up unit.

Power Supply
Earth
Ground

+24VDC

SUPPRESSOR

0 VDC

MS4800 Receiver

Black

ED1

OSSD 1

SUPPRESSOR

Start

Pink
Yellow

8
1

Red

White

OSSD 2

ED2

Auxiliary
Output
Start
To Machine Control Contacts
EDM

ED1 ED2

Brown

ED1

+24VDC

EDM (External Device Monitoring) must be used when
force-guided control relays are used as the Final
Switching Devices. Connect the red wire though NC
contacts to 0 VDC.
2 For the purpose of bench testing prior to installation, the
user may select EDM OFF(default factory setting). In this
case the EDM line, terminal 5 (red wire) must be
connected to the 0 VDC line.

Blue
0 VDC

Green

Earth

MS4800 Transmitter
White

MTS

Blue
Green

MTS/Test

Black

MTS
Return

Brown

ED2

Aux. Output PNP 100 mA. max. @ 24VDC, connect
to PLC (default)

User-supplied fuse

Start connections are shown with NC (pulled to 0 VDC).

The EDM coils must be suppressed with the components
provided in the documentation Kit. (TVS, Diode type)

+24VDC

0 VDC

MTS requires a NC contact. If MTS is not used, verify
that the function is disabled.

If EDM select is required the yellow wire should be
tied to +24V to enable it, or 0V to disable it.

Earth

www.sti.com/info

A-69

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Using the External Device
Monitoring (EDM) Function
With the EDM function active, if the
EDM signal does not close within 300
milliseconds after the light curtain enters
a Red Beam Blocked state, or open when
the light curtain returns to a Green Beam
Clear state, then the controller will Fault
into a lockout condition.
The wiring for the External Device
Monitoring feature is explained in your light
curtain Installation Manual.

External Device Monitoring with
an Interposing Relay
In some machine controller designs,
the light curtain outputs are connected to
two interposing or pilot duty relays. These
relays, in turn, drive the External Devices.
The monitoring function must monitor the
External Device and not the interposing
relay.

Figure 18: Using the Test Object

Step 7. Application of
Power and Safety Light
Curtain Alignment
This step examines the procedures
to align the light curtain and adjust the
operating range.
At this point, the transmitter and receiver
units have been loosely installed and are
approximately aligned. All wiring – to the
light curtain transmitter and receiver units,
to primary power, and to the machine control system – have been installed. Power,
both to the light curtain and to the machine
to be controlled, is off.

Alignment
This section is concerned with the physical alignment of the transmitter and receiver
heads. Proper setup and alignment is an
important part of the installation.
To align a safety light curtain, please follow the procedure outlined in the manual
for your model.

! WARNING: Before operating the
machinery, always perform the Test
Procedure shown in Figure 18 after any
maintenance, adjustment or modification
to the light curtain or machine. Testing is
critical to verify the safe installation of the
light curtain. Failure to properly test may
result in serious injury to personnel.

ST
AR
T
ST
OP

Use the test object to
interrupt the sensing field
along the center, bottom, sides
and top of sensing field.

A-70

www.sti.com/info

Mirror Alignment Hints
If difficulty arises when using the light
curtain with mirrors, try using the following
steps:
1. The mirrors must be parallel to the
transmitter and receiver. If not, the beams
will not be reflected evenly to the next
mirror or to the receiver. Most light curtains
are equipped with Individual Beam Indicators, these serve as an alignment aid.
If an indicator is on, that beam is not in
alignment or is blocked.
2. Try looking from behind either the
transmitter or receiver to locate an image
of the corresponding unit reflected in the
mirror(s). Have an assistant adjust the
mirrors until the other unit is reflected fully
in the mirror. Make sure the machinery is
disabled before working in a hazardous
area!

Step 8. Checkout and Test
Procedures
Now your light curtain is mounted,
configured, aligned and connected to your
machinery. The machine power is off.
The following initial checkout procedure
must be performed by qualified personnel.
A copy of the checkout results should be
kept with the machine maintenance and
inspection records.
A typical Checkout Procedure Log form
and Test Procedure form are shown on the
following pages.

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Sample Checkout Procedure Log

The following checkout procedure must be performed by qualified personnel during initial light curtain installation and at least every
three months or more frequently depending on a machine usage and company guidelines. Hint: Make a copy of this blank page and use
the copy as the checkout log to be kept with the machine records. Use caution when working around hazardous voltages which may be
present during these procedures.
Note: This is a sample. Consult your installation manual for instructions specific to your light curtain.

Machine Identification _____________________________________________________________

Date ______________________________

Item

Condition

1. Verify the guarded machine is compatible with the type of machine which may be used with the light
curtain. See Step 1 – Usage Requirements for further information on incompatible machinery.
2.

Verify that the mounting distance of the light curtain is equal to or greater than the minimum safe
distance from the point of hazardous operation. Refer to Step 2 – Calculating the Minimum Safe
Distance.

Determine that all access to the danger point not protected by the light curtain is guarded by other
means, such as gates, fencing, wire screening or other approved methods. Verify that all additional
guarding devices, interlock switches and mechanical barriers are installed and operating properly.

Make sure the operator is not able to stand between the light curtain sensing field and the danger point
of the machine. Verify that the light curtain can only be reset from a position outside and within the view
of the hazardous machine area

Inspect the electrical connections between the guarded machine's control circuitry and the light curtain.
Verify that they are properly connected to the machine such that a stop signal from the light curtain
results in an immediate halt at any point in the machine cycle or stroke.

6.
7.

Inspect the light curtain to ensure that the auxiliary relay is properly configured for your installation.

Comments

❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail

If your control wiring scheme uses the auxiliary relay, press the Test/Store button, if equipped, with
the guarded machine controller energized to verify the proper electrical connection of this relay to
the machine control. Even if your wiring does not use the auxiliary relay, simulate a light curtain fault
condition by pressing the Test/Store button. The light curtain should go into a lockout condition and the

❑ Pass
❑ Fail

output and auxiliary relays de-energize. Press the Reset/Start button to correct from the fault condition.
8.

If the MTS feature is not used, proceed to step 9. To test the MTS feature, turn the machine power on.
While cycling the machine, verify that the MTS only functions during a safe position of the machine
cycle. Without interrupting the sensing field, observe that the Red and Yellow indicators will light and
the output relays de-energize when the MTS circuit is open.

9. If the External Device Monitoring (EDM) feature is not used, proceed to step 10. To test the EDM Monitoring
feature, activate the EDM monitoring as appropriate for your light curtain. Turn the machine power on.
Cycle the machine. Place a temporary jumper wire between the EDM connections. The light curtain should
enter a fault condition. Remove the temporary wire. Reset the light curtain to recover from the fault.
10. Record the test results in the machine log. Next, perform the Test Procedure

❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail

Comments :

Technician Signature_______________

www.sti.com/info

A-71

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Sample Test Procedure
The following tests must be performed at installation and after any maintenance, adjustment, repair or modification to the light curtain
or the machine. In addition, the tests must also be performed after Channel Select is enabled or disabled. Testing ensures that the
light curtain and the machine control system work properly to stop the machine. Failure to test properly could result in serious injury to
personnel.
The following Test Procedure must always be performed by qualified personnel after the mounting, alignment and wiring steps are
completed and before the light curtain is used to control the machine. To test the light curtain, use the supplied test object or opaque
object of the appropriate size.
Note: This is a sample. Consult your installation manual for instructions specific to your light curtain.

Machine Identification _____________________________________________________________

Date ______________________________

Item

Condition

❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail

Disable the machine to be guarded. Turn power on to the light curtain.

Visually inspect the machine to ensure that entry to the hazardous area is only through the light curtain
sensing field. If not, additional guarding including mechanical barriers may be required. Verify that all
additional guarding devices and barriers are installed and operating properly.

Verify that the mounting distance of the light curtain is equal to or greater than the calculated maximum
safe distance from the point of hazardous operation. See Step 2 – Calculating the Minimum Safe
Distance. Ensure that the operator is not able to stand between the safety light curtain sensing field and
the point of hazardous operation.

❑ Pass
❑ Fail

Check for signs of external damage to the light curtain, the machine and the electrical cables and
wiring. If any damage is found, lockout the machine off and report to the supervisor.

❑ Pass
❑ Fail

Interrupt the sensing field with the proper size test object to check the effectiveness of the light curtain.
Move the test object inside the perimeter (along the top, sides and bottom) of the sensing field and
up and down through the center of the sensing field. Verify that the Red indicator is ON and the Green
indicator is OFF while the test object is anywhere in the sensing field. Also, watch for any unprotected
access to the danger point.

Start the machine. While the machine is in motion, interrupt the sensing field with the test object. The
machine should stop immediately. Never insert the test object into the dangerous parts of the machine.
With the machine at rest, interrupt the sensing field with the test object. Verify that the machine will not
start with the test object in the sensing field. Note: Some mechanical power presses may use muting,
which bypasses the light curtain during the nonhazardous movement of the press, such as the upstroke.
Interrupting the sensing field during this portion of the cycle will not stop the machine.

Make sure that the braking system is working properly. If the machine does not stop fast enough, adjust
the braking system or increase the distance from the sensing field to the point of operation hazard.

If the safety devices or the machine fails any of these tests, do not run the machine. Immediately tag
and lockout the machine to prevent its use and notify the supervisor.

If the Channel Select or Floating Blanking is reprogrammed or disabled, repeat these test procedures.

10. If applicable, remove the key from the keyswitch. Close and lock the controller enclosure door after the
testing is completed.

Comments

❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail
❑ Pass
❑ Fail

Comments :

Technician Signature_______________

WARNING: If the light curtain and machinery did not function exactly as described in the Test Procedure, do not operate the machinery. If the
machine safety devices, braking systems and controls do not operate properly, they cannot stop hazardous machine motion. Serious injury to personnel
could result.

A-72

www.sti.com/info

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Safely Muting an Industrial Process
Definition
Muting is a temporary bypassing of the
protective function of a light curtain and is
permitted only during the non-hazardous
portion of the machine cycle. Machine
control systems which initiate muting must
be control reliable.
When used properly, muting can help
accelerate industrial processes while
protecting personnel from potentially
hazardous situations.
Processes where muting applications
can be found include, but are not limited
to, metal forming, conveying, robotic
assembly or palletizing, and automated
assembly lines.
ANSI standard B11.19-2010 clearly
explains the requirements for muting:
“Muting of the device shall be permitted during the non-hazardous portion of
the machine cycle. Muting of the device
shall be accomplished such that a single
failure of a component, a subassembly
or a module of the system/device that
affects the performance of the command
from being initiated, or shall cause an immediate stop command. In the event of a
failure, reinitiation of the machine shall be
prevented until the failure is corrected or
the system or device is manually reset.
In the presence of a failure, repetitive
manual reset of the system or device
shall not be used for production.
If the machine has reversing capability
where a muting hazard is possible, the
control system shall include an automatic
means so muting is only permitted in the
forward direction.
If an individual can pass through a
sensing field when the device is muted,
means shall be provided to ensure that
the individual is outside the hazard area,
or that the machine ceases hazardous
motion when the muting is removed.”
[clause 8.3.2.5]

Requirements for
Use of Muting

The OMRON Automation and
Safety Muting Solution

Many different standards exist which
explain the requirements to consider when
implementing a muting system. The following list, while not complete, was compiled
from a review of ANSI B11.19-2010,
EN692-1994 and IEC 61496-1.
• Muting of a light curtain is permitted
only during the non-hazardous portion
of the machine cycle.
• If the machine tool has reversing
capability where a muting hazard is possible, the control system shall include
an automatic means through which
muting is permitted only in the forward
direction.
• There must be at least two, independent, hard-wired muting signal sources,
of the same level of safety integrity as
the light curtain. A single, simple, camoperated limit switch is inadequate as a
muting signal source since its failure can
remain undetected.
• The position of the muting signal source
must be secured against unauthorized
adjustment.
• The machine control system and associated muting circuitry must be control
reliable.

OMRON Automation and Safety offers
a selection of control-reliable solutions for
muting: the F3SJ-A with built-in muting;
the MS4800 with RM-6; and the RM-3
which works with a variety of safety light
curtains.

The list above is not a complete guide
to muting standards. The employer must
contact the appropriate local safety agencies for specific requirements regarding
their machine and safety-related control
system. Omron has provided the information above for reference only and makes
no claim regarding its accuracy, completeness or effectiveness for a specific
application.

www.sti.com/info

The Real World
So what does the real world look like?
Let’s take a simple application and illustrate some of the muting options available
when using solutions from Omron.
The application involves the safe exit
of a full pallet from a palletizing machine
where it has just been loaded and shrink
wrapped by a fast-moving (and potentially
dangerous) robotic system. The robotic
work cell is typically guarded by interlocked fencing, while a safety light curtain
guards the opening where the full pallet
will exit on a conveyor. The goal is to allow
the pallet to exit the work cell without tripping the light curtain, stopping the system
and slowing the production process.
Figure 7.1a illustrates a system where two
through-beam sensors, arranged in an “x”
pattern, are used as the muting inputs.
This system is bidirectional which means
that the light curtain will be successfully
muted whether the object approaches
from the left or the right. Sensor A must
be a dark-on type sensor with a PNP-type
output or a switch that closes its contacts
to provide +24 VDC when it is OK to mute.
Sensor B must be a light-on type sensor
with a PNP-type output or a switch that
opens its contacts when it is OK to mute.
In this two-sensor system, the sensors
must transition to the on state within 3
seconds of each other for the muting state
to occur. Bidirectional systems can also be
constructed using four mute sensors.

A-73

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Fig. 7.1

Fig. 7.1a

What if you only want the light curtain
to be muted when the pallet approaches
the safety light curtain from one direction
(unidirectional)? Take a look at Figure
7.1b. Although similar in appearance to
the application above, sensor C has been
added to detect the pallet’s direction of
travel. Sensor C must be a dark-on type
sensor with a PNP-type output or a switch
that closes its contacts to provide +24
VDC when it is OK to mute. Sensor C
must transition to the on state at least 0.05
seconds prior to activation of sensors A
and B. Sensors A and B must transition
to the on state within 3 seconds of each
other and sensor C must turn off before
sensors A and B turn off.

A-74

Fig. 7.1b

Bypass-Allowed function
Did a pallet fall off the conveyor? Did
the conveyor unexpectedly stop? Did the
sequence of processing operations not
occur in the correct order to allow an automatic transition to the muted state? When
these types of issues are encountered the
bypass-allowed function is a real lifesaver.
This function allows supervisory personnel
to momentarily override the machine stop
signal and enter the mute state. While
very useful, this feature must be used
with appropriate caution and guidelines
from ANSI B11.19-2010, EN692-1994 and
IEC61496-1

www.sti.com/info

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Safety Mats —
Theory of Operation, Selection & Installation

resence sensing mats combined
with a safety mat controller
improve productivity while
providing access guarding. Less downtime
occurs because it is not necessary to set
up or remove mechanical safety barriers
during operation and maintenance.
Presence sensing mats and controls are
used where perimeter access guarding is required, such as around robots,
manufacturing work cells, food processing
equipment and automated assembly
equipment.
Mats and controllers should be
designed to meet the applicable sections
of ANSI B11.19-2010, OSHA 1910.212,
ISO 13856-1:2001, and RIA 15.06.

Theory of Operation
Multiple safety mats may be wired
in series to form a complete floor-level
guarding system. Each 4-wire safety mat
operates on a low-power DC signal. A
signal is transmitted through the upper
and lower plates separately via the two
wires connected to each plate. The signals
through the safety mats are monitored by
the mat controller.
When the safety mat is not exposed
to sufficient actuating force, the signals
are unimpaired. The output relays in the
controller are energized permitting the
guarded machine to run.
When sufficient pressure is applied to
the active mat area, the conductive plates
touch causing the output relays in the
controller to de-energize and a stop signal
is issued to the machine.
If a wire should break, separate from
a plate, or become disconnected from
the controller, the output relays in the
controller will de-energize and a stop
signal will be sent. Should the safety mat
be punctured and the plates short together
in a similar manner as being stepped
on, the controller will not restart until the
punctured mat is replaced.

Safety Distance
Calculation
The first and by far the most important
consideration is the calculation of the
safety distance. There is a minimum mat
size that should be placed between a
worker and a hazardous motion. Many
users will "eyeball" the application, look at
the area where a machine operator would
stand and say, "that looks like it needs a
24-inch wide mat." It may not be enough.
In standard B11.19 the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) states
that, "The safety mat device shall be fixed
at a location so that the effective sensing
surface prevents individuals from reaching the hazard(s) during the hazardous
portion of the machine cycle."

ANSI Minimum Safe
Distance Formula
The basis for the following information is
ANSI standard B11.19-2010.
The ANSI formula consists of:
Ds = K (Ts + Tc + Tr + Tspm) + Dpf
Where:
Ds = The minimum safe distance, in
inches, between the outside edge of the
safety mat and the nearest point of operation hazard.
K = The maximum speed at which
an individual can approach the hazard,
expressed in inches per second.
To quote ANSI B11.19-2010, “The
factor K is the speed constant and
includes hand and body movements of
an individual approaching a hazard area.
The following factors should be considered when determining K:
a) Hand and arm movement;
b) Twisting of the body or shoulder, or
bending at the waist;
c) Walking or running.
One of the accepted values for K is the
hand speed constant (it is usually considered as the horizontal motion of the
hand and arm while seated). Its common

www.sti.com/info

A
value is 63 in./s although other values
(typically higher) are also used. The hand
speed constant does not include other
body movements, which can affect the
actual approach speed. Consideration
of the above factors should be included
when determining the speed constant for
a given application.”
Ts = The total time that it takes, in seconds, for the hazardous motion to stop, or
for the hazardous portion of the machine
cycle to be completed. Note that different
machine types have different stopping
methods and mechanisms. Informative
Annex D of ANSI B11.19-2010 contains
excellent information on these considerations and factors.
Tc = The response time, in seconds of
the machine control circuit to activate the
machine’s brake.
NOTE: Ts + Tc are usually measured together by a stopping performance monitor.
Tr = The response time, in seconds, of
the safety mat system. This is provided in
the installation manual.
Tspm = The additional stopping time,
in seconds, allowed by the stopping
performance monitor before it detects stop
time deterioration. A stopping performance
monitor will halt the machine when the
stop time of the machinery exceeds the
set limit. This indicates that excessive
brake wear has occurred.
What should you do if your machine
does not have a stopping performance
monitor? Add a percentage increase
factor to the measured stop time (Ts +
Tc) to allow for braking system wear. For
example, stopping performance monitors
usually add an extra 20% to the measured
stop time. Omron recommends that you
contact the manufacturer of your machine
for guidance in selecting a percentage
increase factor.
Dpf = The added distance, in inches,
due to the depth penetration factor from
according to Annex D of ANSI B11.192010, for ground level devices which can
be reached over (safety mats) this distance
is 48 inches.

A-75

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Safe Mounting Distance
Example
Presume a machine has a stopping time
(Ts + Tc) of 0.200 seconds. This includes
the response time of both the brake
mechanism and the control circuits. The
brake monitor is set for 0.240 seconds.
The response time of the safety mat
system is 30 mS.
Determine Tspm and Dpf. From the stopping performance monitor set point:
Tspm = stopping performance

monitor set point (Ts + Tc)
Tspm = 0.240 sec. - 0.200 sec.
Tspm = 0.040 sec.

Installation

Safety Mat Mounting Trim

Surface Preparation

ANSI standard B11.19-2010 also states
that, "The user shall ensure that only
authorized individuals may relocate
the safety mat" [clause 8.5.2.3]. Further
explanatory information for this clause
states that, "Means to prevent inadvertent
movement include, but are not limited to:
• Secured edging;
• Secured trim;
• Fasteners;
• Recesses;
• Size and weight or large mats"

The surface on which the safety mat(s)
will be placed should be flat, smooth and
free of debris. Any debris left under the
mat, in time, may work its way through
the housing and eventually contact the
electrode assembly. This may affect the
mechanical switching of the electrode assembly and will provide a path for moisture
to enter the mat. These conditions may
lead to a mat failure.

Proper Care of the Safety Mat
Cables

As given from ANSI B11.19-2010, Annex
D, Dpf = 48 inches.
Now, everything needed is available.
The formula is:
Ds = K x (Ts + Tc + Tr + Tspm) + Dpf
Substituting our values:
Ds = 63 in./sec. x (0.200 sec. + 0.010
sec. + 0.040 sec.) + 48 in.
Add the values in the parentheses first:
Ds = 63 in./sec. x (0.250 sec.) + 48 in.
Multiply the result in parentheses by 63:
Ds = 15.75 in. + 48 in.
Add the results:
Ds = 63.75 in. (1620 mm)

After the mat is in place, use care in
routing the mat cables to prevent damaging the insulation or breaking the internal
wires. Make sure that the cable passageways are free of burrs and sharp edges.
Where the mat cable is to enter and exit
from under the trim, the trim or mounting
surface must be grooved or notched so
as not to pinch the cable when the trim is
tightened down.
Unless extra precautions are taken to
make a watertight connection, never make
a cable splice at floor level where the presence of moisture is a possibility. Moisture
present at a non-watertight connection will
work through the cable and into the mat
(i.e. capillary action or wicking).

Fig. 8.1 Safe Mounting Distance

Ds
K
(T total)

Dpf

HAZARD AREA

Safety Mat

A-76

www.sti.com/info

Perimeter trim can help with this requirement, but users need to be aware that not
all perimeter trim is the same. Three of
the most optimum types of trim include
two-part perimeter ramp trim, blunt trim,
and two-part joining trim.
Two-part perimeter ramp trim holds mat
in place and simplifies installation by providing an aluminum base with channels for
running cables, and a snap-on PVC cover.
Blunt trim is used where a mat needs to
be secured in place, but the edge being
secured does not present a trip hazard.
Two-part joining trim is used to create an
active area between two adjacent mats.

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Understanding the IP Rating System
How do I judge the enclosure rating
of a STI safety interlock switch?
When OMRON Automation and Safety
customers look at our safety interlock
switches, one of the first questions they
ask is - What is the NEMA rating of the
enclosure. These switches use an international system which assigns an Ingress

First

Protection or IP rating.
While, most of us are familiar with the
NEMA system, we are quick to admit
that the numbers used to differentiate the
different ratings hardly make logical sense.
A summary of the IP system is given
below. (For a complete explanation see
IEC 60529.) As you can see, the IP system

is relative and rational - always two letters
(IP) followed by two digits. The first digit
indicates the enclosure’s degree of protection against solid objects while the second
digit indicates a degree of protection
against liquids.

Degree of Protection
(contact hazard and

Second

Degree of Protection

IP Digit

foreign object protection)

IP Digit

(water protection)

No special protection.

Protection against penetration of solid
objects larger than 50 mm in diameter
(large objects). No protection against
intentional access, e.g. by hand, but
keeping larger body parts at a distance.

1
Protection against dripping water. It must
not have any harmful effect (dripping water).

Protection against entry of solid objects
larger than 12 mm in diameter (mediumsize objects). Keeping out fingers and
other small objects.

Protection against entry of solid objects
larger than 2.5 mm in diameter (small
objects). Keeping out tools, wires and other
objects larger than 2.5 mm in diameter.

Protection against entry of solid objects
larger than 1 mm in diameter (granular
objects). Keeping out tools, wires and
similar objects of a thickness exceeding 1 mm.

Protection against harmful dust deposits.
Ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but
dust does not enter in sufficient quantity to
interfere with operation of the equipment
(dust protected). Full contact protection.

Protection against ingress of dust (dusttight). Full contact protection.

Protection against dripping water. Dripping
water shall have no harmful effect when
the enclosure is tilted at any angle 15° from
its normal position (indirect dripping water).

Spraying water falling at any angle up to
60° from vertical shall have no harmful
effect (spraying water).

4 Water splashed against the enclosure from

any direction shall have no harmful effect

(spraying water).

Water projected by a nozzle against the
enclosure from any direction shall have
no harmful effect (water jets).

Water from heavy seas or water projected
in powerful jets shall not enter the
enclosure in harmful quantities (flooding).

Ingress of water in a harmful quantity shall
not be possible when the enclosure is
immersed in water under defined conditions of pressure and time (submersion).

This equipment suitable for continuous
submersion in water under conditions
which shall be specified by the
manufacturer (submersion).

Conversion of IP and NEMA Enclosure Ratings
(Including but not limited to the following)

IEC
NEMA

IP10 IP11 IP54 IP14 IP54 IP56 IP52 IP67 IP52 IP54
1

www.sti.com/info

4 and 4X

6 and 6P

12 and 12K

A-77

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Proper Installation of Rope or Wire Pull Emergency Stop Devices
Typical Trip Cord Installation
3' to 1'
UA

F/D

AS
AE

AE = Anchor End
SE = Switch End

AS = Anchor Spring
TB = Turnbuckle

rip cords (sometimes called
rope or wire pulls) are typically
cords of braided plastic-coated
wire, installed horizontally across the
points of hazard generated by rotating
machinery, conveyor motion, etc. which,
when pulled or cut (made slack) will
cause the attached switch to generate
an emergency stop. These devices do not
prevent injury, but may limit the extent
of the injury. They are particularly useful
when located at the point of hazard for the
involved operator's use, unlike Emergency
Stop push-buttons which may be located
away from the point of hazard requiring a
non-involved operator for their actuation.
Figure 9.1 details a typical installation.

A-78

C = Cord
UA = Unknown Action

EC = E-Stop Device-Cord
ZP = Zone of Protection

F/D = Force/Deflection

In order to
CORD
SE
achieve comECsps
pliance with
Canadian and
European
standards,
Pull/Slack
the rope pull
switch must cause its safety contacts to
open when either the cord is pulled beyond
a designated force/deflection or made to go
slack. Further, this activation must be maintained until the cord is once again properly
tensioned and manually reset at the switch.
When the cable is properly positioned the
safety contacts are closed. When the cable
moves too far to the left or right, contacts
open and are maintained open until reset.
The
The Turnbuckle
cable can
be properly
TB
positioned
by adjusting
Lock Nuts
the cord
tension
using a
turnbuckle or other tensioning device. STI
rope pull switches provide an indicator to
determine when the proper tension has
been established. Lock nuts should be provided to keep the turnbuckle from releasing
tension and causing nuisance trips.
ER6022

Fig. 9.1

CORD
Pull/Slack

www.sti.com/info

ER6022

EC sps
E-stop Cord
Sustained, Pull/Slack

The cord is typically
Cord
1/8 inch diameter steel
braided cable which
may be plastic coated
to protect the operator
from steel slivers and
provides a better griping
surface. The coated
cable should be red or provided with red
striped flags for rapid identification.
When analyzing the installation for a pull
cord, the linear length of cable providing
protection must be taken into consideration. As shown in Figure 9.2 the zone of
protection from the anchor end (AE) to the
switch end (SE) is not necessarily contiguous; areas of unknown action (UA) may be
present. The first of these UA areas is at
the point of attachment of the cord to the
switch. The switch may or may not operate
if the point of force is located less than
1 to 3 feet from the switch. The UA can
be reduced to 3 inches if the tensioning
device is installed on the opposite side
of the vector eyebolt (VE) to the switch. If
using a tensioner gripper assembly connected directly to the switch, the UA may
be reduced to less than 20 inches.

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

A
Vector Eyebolt Trip Cord Installation

CORD
Pull/Slack

UA can range from 3" to 20" depending
on placement of tensioning device.
F/D

UA
VE

AE = Anchor End
SE = Switch End

Fig. 9.2

AS = Anchor Spring
TB = Turnbuckle

The vector
eyebolt is used to
Vector Eyebolt
resolve a
UA
3-dimensional
force for use
Smooth
with a 1-dimenSurface
VE
sional switch. The
unknown action
zone for a smooth eyebolt is about 1". All
eyebolts should have a smooth inner surface (not notched or dented). The distance
placed between vector eyebolts is typically
6 to 10 feet. A long zone of protection will
be made up of many such spans.
Some trip cords can operate over 410
feet.
A direction eyebolt is used to change the
path of the zone of protection for angles
<90°. This eyebolt also resolves a 3-dimensional force to 1-dimension. All eyebolts
must have a smooth inside surface (not
notched or dented). If braided metal cable

C = Cord
UA = Unknown Action

EC = E-Stop Device-Cord
ZP = Zone of Protection

which is plastic
coated (recomDirection Eyebolt
mended) is used
UA
with direction
eyebolts, the
Smooth
Plastic
plastic may have Surface
has high
DE
friction
to be removed
from the cable
where it passes through the eyebolt as this
may be a high friction point.
A directional pulley is a 2-dimensional
device. If the force applied by the cable is
other than axial to the pulley an unknown
action zone may be created, if the
entrance and egress of the pulley are not
rounded. In extreme friction cases a vector
eyebolt may have to precede both sides
of the direction pulley. The pulley should
rigidly mounted (not swiveled) to avoid
friction from side torque. Gritty, goopy, and
coating substances should be avoided as
they tend to impede pulley action. Open

UA
VE

ER6022

EC sps
E-stop Cord
Sustained, Pull/Slack

F/D = Force/Deflection

When a trip cord is properly
installed, the answer to the
following question will be yes. Does
the switch activate with reasonable
force (5 to 20 lbs.) and reasonable
deflection (3 to 6 inches) over the
zone of protection?

pulleys are not
acceptable unless
provided with
vector eyebolts as
non-axial pulls can
force the cord from
the pulley.

Direction Pulley
UA

Span 10'

VE
Fig. 9.3

3" - 6"

5# - 20#

www.sti.com/info

A-79

Types of Protective Measures Expert Area

Fig. 9.4

Turning the Corner

Operator Zone

Hazard Zone

Machine

Turning The Corner

Zones of Unknown Action (UA)
Normally zones of unknown action are
small with respect to the zones of protection and there is no particular danger that
an operator will pull at a location which
may not trip. However, if due to machine
architecture, the mounting of the cord
between sensor end and anchor end a
larger unknown action area is presented
to an operator, these UA areas should be
guarded from operator access as they
become additional points of hazard.

Using
Directional
Pulleys

Machine

Because of the high tension in a properly installed cord, direction eyebolts and
pulleys are subject to additional friction
(eyebolts more than pulleys). In general,
only one 90° change in direction can be
made with an eyebolt and possibly two 90°
changes using pulleys.
Friction may be reduced when using
eyebolts to round a corner (make 90°
direction change) by mounting a direction
eyebolt on both sides of the corner as
shown in Figure 9.4.

Machine

AS
AS

Machine
Using
Directional
Eyebolts

Machine

U
A

Machine

U
A

Using
Directional
Eyebolt

DE
DE

STI Rope Pull Emergency Stop
Switches
STI Rope Pull Emergency Stop Switches
meet CE mark requirements for use within
the European community. All rope pull
emergency stop switches are UL or cULus

listed. In order to meet the control reliability standards, a safety monitoring relay
or equivalent circuitry may be required.

Reset Button
The blue reset button must be pushed in
order to return to "machine run" condition
following switch actuation by a pulled or
slacked rope.

Indicator Beacon
The indicator beacon can be
wired to flash red to indicate
a tripped switch or glow a
constant green to indicate a
properly reset switch.

Tension Indicator
The tension indicator makes the system
easy to set up and to easy to maintain the
proper rope tension.

Emergency Stop Button
The emergency push button may be
installed or repositioned in the field.

A-80

www.sti.com/info

Safety Laser Scanners
Contents
Selection Guide

B-2

OS32C Overview

B-3

OS32C B-6

B-1

Safety Laser Scanners

Selection Guide

laserscan

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Selecting the Proper Safety Laser Scanner for Your Application

Does your
application need
stationary guarding
or mobile guarding?

Mobile
Guarding

Yes

• OS32C-DM — p. B-6
– Same features as OS32C, plus:
EtherNet IP connectivity
for status monitoring and
measurement data

Do you need
status or
measurement data?

Stationary
Guarding

– Rapid delivery product

No
• OS32C — p. B-6
– Very Compact
– 3 m range
– 70 zone sets
(each: 1 safety & 2 warning)
– Ethernet connectivity
– Individual Sector Indicators
– Easy set-up software tool
– Configuration memory block
– Rapid delivery product

3
What size area do
you need to guard?

Less than
3m

• OS32C — p. B-6
– Very Compact
– 3 m range
– 70 zone sets
(each: 1 safety & 2 warning)

More than
3m

– Ethernet connectivity
– Individual Sector Indicators
– Easy set-up software tool
– Configuration memory block
– Rapid delivery product

Yes

Do you need status
or measurement
data?

– Same features as OS32C-4M plus:
EtherNet/IP connectivity for status
monitoring and measurement data
– Rapid delivery product

• OS32C-4M — p. B-6
– Very Compact
– 4 m range
– 70 zone sets
(each: 1 safety & 2 warning)
– Ethernet connectivity
– Individual Sector Indicators
– Easy set-up software tool
– Configuration memory block
– Rapid delivery product

B-2

• OS32C-DM-4M — p. B-6

www.sti.com/info

Safety Laser Scanners

OS32C Overview

OS32C

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

The OS32C is Now EtherNet/IP Capable

Compact

Safety Laser Scanner

Industry First!
EtherNet/IP Capable for Status and Measurement Data Reporting
Small Size: Low Profile 104.5 mm
Compact and versatile safety laser scanner

Lightweight: 1.3 kg
Lightweight body for easy handling and installation

Low Power Consumption: 5 W
Low power consumption reduces battery load on
the AGV (3.75 W in standby mode)

104.5 mm

4 m Safety Range Models!
142.7 mm
133.0 mm

Safety Zone
4 m Max.

Detection Angle
270° Max.

Warning Zones 1 & 2
15 m Max.

www.sti.com/info

B-3

OS32C Overview

Safety Laser Scanners

Integrated Management via EtherNet/IP
Industry First!

Industry’s first Ethernet-compliant Safety Laser Scanner
allows the user to check operating state and analyze the
cause of an emergency stop
via LAN even in large-scale
applications using multiple
scanners.
Ethernet/IP

Simple and Versatile to Solve Many Application Needs
Collision Avoidance

Intrusion Detection

Small, light & compact body provides for easy installation on an AGV.

Reference Boundary Monitoring function supports intrusion
detection without physically blocking the entrance.

Low power consumption (5 W reduces battery load on the AGV
(3.75 W in standby mode)

Supports various operation patterns by switching zone sets.

Up to 70 zone set combinations support complex AGV tracks.
Intrusion detection
with vertical
installation

Front/Rear Monitoring

Safety zone
can be
selected

All-around Monitoring

Presence Detection
Compact body allows for use inside the
machine.
Detection angle of 270° provides coverage
of two sides with one scanner.

Presence detection of 270°

B-4

www.sti.com/info

Guarding inside the machine

OS32C Overview

Safety Laser Scanners

Unprecedented, Innovative Features
Flexible zone configurations

Industry Best!

Cable access options

For complex AGV applications, up to 70 combinations – each
with one safety zone and two warning zones – can be set. The
two warning zones can be set to support various purposes such
as warning sound and speed control

To tailor the OS32C to your installation, eight options are available
for the location of the power and ethernet connections.
Range

EIP and
Measurement Data

Cable
Access

OS32C-BP

Back

OS32C-SP1

Left side

OS32C-BP-DM

Yes

Back

OS32C-SP1-DM

Yes

Left side

OS32C-BP-4M

Back

OS32C-SP1-4M

Left side

OS32C-BP-DM-4M

Yes

Back

OS32C-SP1-DM-4M

Yes

Left side

Model

Safety Zone
Warning Zone 1
Warning Zone 2

These can be selected according to the needs of AGV or facilities
design.
Simplified wiring
Omron’s innovative I/O method requires fewer inputs when
configuring multiple zones. Only 4 inputs are required to select
from 6 zone sets. If all 8 inputs are used, up to 70 zone sets are
available. This simplified wiring offers the most selection and
flexibility!
OS32C with cable access
on the back (OS32C-BP)

Operating state can be determined at a glance
Eight sector indicators show the direction of intrusion. Front
display shows operating state and error codes. The unit can
also be configured to show selected zone and response time.

OS32C with cable access
on the left side (OS32C-SP1)

Response time can be set from 80 ms to 680 ms

Response time adjustment can filter out erroneous detections
(machine stoppage) caused by pollutants in the environment.

Reference Boundary Monitoring Function

The OS32C constantly monitors reference points and turns OFF
the safety outputs when a shift in its position is detected.

Individual sector indicators*
*US patent No.: US 6, 753, 776

Gap
occurs
Status Diagnostic Display:
Status/Error Codes, Run, Stop, Interlock and
Warning Output Indicators

Convenient and easy-to-use functions
I/O Block

Safety Output ON

Replaceable sensor, no
reprogramming needed

No reprogramming
needed, the configuration
is stored in the I/O block.
Replacing a damaged
sensor is fast and easy.

Detachable

Sensor Block

Safety Output OFF

Free Software for Easy
Configuration

The configuration of the
safety zone and warning
zones can be done in
real time using a PC.
Configurations can also
be created or modified
offline.

www.sti.com/info

B-5

Safety Laser Scanners

OS32C

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Compact Safety Laser Scanner
Industry First!
EtherNet/IP Capable for Status and Measurement
Data Reporting
• New! 4 m safety range models
• New! Pollution tolerance modes provide improved performance
in dusty environments
• Compact size (104.5 mm height), power efficient (5 W) and
light weight (1.3 kg) for longer AGV battery life
• 70 sets of safety zone and warning zone combinations, for
complex changes in zone guarding parameters
• Configuration memory and I/O block, no need to reprogram
after sensor replacement, minimal down time
• Configurable minimum object resolution of 30, 40, 50 or 70 mm,
for hand and arm detection applications
• 8 Individual Sector Indicators and LED indicators, determine
scanner status at a glance
• Easy-to-use Software Tool simplifies creation of complex zone
combinations
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

TUV
Rheinland

4 m Safety Range Models
4 m Safety Zone
15 m Warning Zone
Safety Zone
4 m Max.

Detection Angle
270° Max.

Warning Zones 1 & 2
15 m Max.

EtherNet/IP for Status and Measurement Data
The OS32C with EtherNet/IP can
be monitored by ODVA EtherNet/IP
compliant products such as PLCs
and HMIs. System status, zone
status, and measurement data can
all be monitored over EtherNet/IP.

EtherNet/IP

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

B-6

www.sti.com/info

Scanner Safety Outputs

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Specifications
Sensor Type

Type 3 Safety Laser Scanner

Safety Category

Category 3, Performance Level d (ISO13849-1: 2008)

Detection Capability

Configurable; Non-transparent with a diameter of 30, 40, 50 or 70 mm (1.8% reflectivity or greater)

Monitoring Zone

Monitoring Zone Set Count: (Safety Zone + 2 Warning Zones) x 70 sets

Operating
Range

OS32C-XX

Safety zone: 1.75 m (min. object resolution of 30 mm), 2.5 m (min. object resolution of 40 mm), 3.0 m (min. object
resolution of 50 mm or 70 mm); Warning Zone: 10 m

OS32C-XX-4M

Safety zone: 1.75 m (min. object resolution of 30 mm), 3.0 m (min. object resolution of 50 mm or 70 mm), 4.0 m (min.
object resolution 70 mm); Warning Zone: 15 m

Maximum Measurement Error

100 mm (at less than 3 m distance); 110 mm (at greater than 3 m distance) *1

Detection Angle

270°

Angular Resolution

0.4°

Laser Beam Diameter

6 mm at optics cover, 14 mm at 3 m.

Laser Scan Plane Height

67 mm from the bottom of the scanner (see dimensional drawings for more detail)

Response Time

Response time from ON to OFF: From 80 ms (2 scans) to 680 ms (up to 17 scans) *8
Response time from OFF to ON: Response time from ON to OFF + 100 ms to 60 s (configurable)

Zone Switching Time

20 to 320 ms

Line Voltage

24 VDC +25%/-30% (ripple p-p 2.5 V max.) *2

Power Consumption

Normal operation: 5 W max., 4 W typical (without output load) *3
Standby mode: 3.75 W (without output load)

Emission Source (Wavelength)

Infrared Laser Diode (905 nm)

Laser Protection Class

Class 1: IEC/EN60825-1 (2007); Class 1: JIS6802 (2005); Class I: CFR21 1040.10, 1040.11

Safety Output (OSSD)

PNP transistor x 2, load current of 250 mA max., residual voltage of 2 V max.,
load capacity of 2.2 µf max., leak current of 1 mA max. *3, *4, *5

Auxiliary Output (Non-Safety)

NPN/PNP transistor x 1, load current of 100 mA max., residual voltage of 2 V max., leak current of 1 mA max. *4, *5, *7

Warning Output (Non-Safety)

NPN/PNP transistor x 1, load current of 100 mA max., residual voltage of 2 V max., leak current of 1 mA max. *4, *5, *7

Output Operation Mode

Auto Start, Start Interlock, Start/Restart Interlock

Input

External Device
Monitoring (EDM)

ON: 0 V short (input current of 50 mA), OFF: Open

Start

ON: 0 V short (input current of 20 mA), OFF: Open

Zone Select

ON: 24 V short (input current of 5 mA), OFF: Open

Stand-by

ON: 24 V short (input current of 5 mA), OFF: Open

Connection Type

Power Cable: 18-pin mini-connector (pigtail); Communication Cable: M12, 4-pin connector

Connection with PC *6

Communication: Ethernet
OS Supported: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7

Indicators

RUN indicator: Green, STOP indicator: Red, Interlock Indicator: Yellow, Warning Output Indicator: Orange,
Status/Diagnostic Display: 2 x 7-segment LEDs, Intrusion Indicators: Red LED x 8

Protective Circuit

Protection against output load short and reverse power connection

Ambient Temperature

Operation: -10 to 50°C, Storage: -25 to 70°C

Ambient Humidity

Operation & Storage: 95% RH max., non-condensing

Ambient Operation Illumination

Incandescent lamp: Illumination on receiving surface 1500 lx max. (an angle of laser scanning plane and disturbance
light must be ±5 degrees or more)

Enclosure Rating

IP65 (IEC60529)

Enclosure

Sensor head: Die-cast aluminum, optical cover: Polycarbonate, I/O block: Die-cast aluminum

Dimensions (W x H x D)

133.0 x 104.5 x 142.7 mm (except cable)

Dielectric Withstand Voltage

350 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 minute

Insulation Resistance

20 mega-ohm or higher (500 VDC)

Impact Resistance

98 m/s2 1,000 times for each of X, Y, and Z directions (IEC 60068-2-29)

Vibration

10 to 55 Hz double-amplitude of 0.7 mm, 20 sweepings for X, Y, and Z directions (IEC60068-2-6)

Weight (Main Unit only)

1.3 kg

Power Cable

Up to 30 m

Communication Cable

Up to 100 m for 100 BASE-T Cat 5 cable

Accessories

CD-ROM (User’s Manual and Configuration Tool)

Approvals

EN61496-1 (Type 3 ESPE), EN61496-3 (Type 3 AOPDDR), EN61508 (SIL2),
IEC61496-1 (Type 3 ESPE), IEC61496-3 (Type 3 AOPDDR), IEC61508 (SIL2),
UL508, UL1998, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 14, -CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 0.8

*1. An additional measurement error may need to be added due to
reflective backgrounds.
*2. For power source specification, contact OMRON Automation and Safety.
*3. Rated current of OS32C is 1.025 A max. (OS32C 210 mA + OSSD A load
+ OSSD B load + Auxiliary output load + Warning output load + Functional
Inputs). Where functional inputs are: EDM input – 50 mA, Start input– 20 mA,
Standby input –5 mA, Zone X input – 5 mA x 8 (8 zone set select inputs)

*4. Output voltage is Input voltage - 2.0 VDC.
*5. Total consumption current of 2 OSSDs, auxiliary output, and warning
output must not exceed 700 mA.
*6. An Ethernet cable with an M12, 4-pin connector is required.
*7. Output polarity (NPN/PNP) is configurable via the configuration tool.
*8. Pollution tolerance model will add 6 m/sec. to each scan time.

www.sti.com/info

B-7

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

System Components and Functions

(9)

(10)

(11)

(8)
(7)
(6)

(12)
(13)
(5)

(1)
(2)

Number

(3)

(4)

Component

Function

(1)

RUN indicator (green)

Will turn ON when safety zone is clear and OSSDs are ON.

(2)

Interlock Indicator (yellow)

Will turn ON when in interlock state, blink under lockout, and blink in case of a failure.

(3)

Status/Diagnostic Display

The scanner status, configuration/operation, or failure is displayed.

(4)

Warning Output Indicator (orange)

Will turn ON when the warning output is ON.

(5)

STOP indicator (red)

Will turn ON when safety zone is blocked, OSSDs are OFF or under interlock state.

(6)

Dust Ring

Dust detection cover with reflective surface, for dust accumulation detection

(7)

Individual Sector Indicators

Will turn ON when an intrusion is detected in the safety zone, 8 sectors total. Each sector = 33.75°.

(8)

Scan window

The window where the laser light is emitted and received.

(9)

Ethernet Cable

Used for Ethernet cable connection. *

(10)

Power Connector

18-pin connector (pigtail). *

(11)

I/O Block

Connector module

(12)

Center of rotation

Indicates the location of the axis around which the laser emits.

(13)

Sensor block

Sensor head; field replaceable.

*For OS32C-SP1, each connector is located on the left as viewed from the back of the I/O block.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

B-8

www.sti.com/info

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Wiring
Basic Connection with Single OS32C Unit
Category 3, Performance Level d (ISO13849-1)
PE
0V

Functional Earth (Green)

+24V

24VDC (White)
0VDC (Brown)

Standby input (Violet)

Zone Select 1 (Orange/White)

Zone Select 2 (Orange/Black)

Zone Select 3 (Gray)

Zone Select 4 (Pink)

Zone Select 5 (White/Black)

Zone Select 6 (Tan)

Zone Select 7 (Orange)

Zone Select 8 (Blue/White)

Start (Black)

Auxiliary output (Blue)

S1 : Start Input
S2 : Zone Select Switch
S3 : Standby Switch
ED1, ED2: Forced guided relay
M1 : 3-Phase Motor
E1 : 24 VDC Power

*2 ED1 ED2

Warning output (Red/Black)
EDM (Brown/White)

ED1

Safety output B (Yellow)
*1

Safety output A (Red)

ED1

ED2

*1. External devices (ED1, ED2) are forced guide relays. (G7Z, G7SA, G7S, etc)
*2. If the External Device Monitoring is not used, connect brown/white wires to 0 V, and
then turn OFF the External Device Monitoring with the configuration software.
*3. Use NC-contact for a start input.
*4. For zone select switch setting, refer to OS32C Series User’s Manual. When using
only one zone, no connection is needed for the zone select inputs.
Note: This wiring example is for category 3.

OS32C Configuration
- External Device Monitoring Enabled
- Start/Restart Interlock

Connection to AGV Controls
Category 3, Performance Level d (ISO13849-1)
AGV Controls
Power (24VDC)

Functional Earth (Green)
24VDC (White)
0VDC (Brown)

Zone Control

Standby input (Violet)
Zone Select 1 (Orange/White)
Zone Select 2 (Orange/Black)

+24VDC

Zone Select 3 (Gray)
Zone Select 4 (Pink)
Zone Select 5 (White/Black)
Zone Select 6 (Tan)
Zone Select 7 (Orange)
Zone Select 8 (Blue/White)
Auxiliary Control

Start (Black)

0VDC

Auxiliary output(Blue)
Warning output (Red/Black)
EDM (Brown/White)
Safety output B (Yellow)

Stop/Brake Control

Safety output A (Red)

Note: This wiring example is for category 3.

OS32C Configuration
- External Device Monitoring Disabled
- Automatic Start

www.sti.com/info

B-9

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Wiring (continued)
Connecting to the Controller G9SA-301
Category 3, Performance Level d (ISO13849-1)
E1

+24V

Functional Earth (Green)
24VDC (White)
0VDC (Brown)

Standby input (Violet)
*4

Zone Select 2 (Orange/Balck)

Zone Select 3 (Gray)

Zone Select 4 (Pink)

Zone Select 5 (White/Black)

Zone Select 6 (Tan)

Zone Select 1 (Orange/White)

Zone Select 7 (Orange)

Zone Select 8 (Blue/White)

PLC

S2
S2

IN1

Start (Black)

Auxiliary output (Blue)

IN2

OUT

Warning output (Red/Black)
EDM (Brown/White) *3
Safety output B (Yellow)
Safety output A (Red)
ED3

*1
ED1

ED1
S3

A1 A2 T11

T12

*1
ED2

ED2

T31 T32

3
4
a

K1
K1

K2
a
b

Control
Circuit

2
5

1
2
3
4
5
6

PE T21

T23 T22

B
*1

ED1

ED2 *1

ED1, ED2: Forced guided relay
ED3 : Solid state contactor (G3J)
M : 3-Phase Motor
S1 : Start Input
(use for releasing lockout)
S2 : Zone Select Switch
S4 : Standby Switch
S3 : Reset Switch
E1 : 24 VDC Power
PLC : Programmable Controller
(This is for monitoring only and
unrelated to a safety system)

*1. External devices (ED1, ED2) are forced guide relays. (G7Z, G7SA, G7S, etc)
*2. Use NC-contact for a start input.
*3. If the External Device Monitoring is not used, connect brown/white wires to 0V, and then
turn OFF the External Device Monitoring with the configuration software.
*4. For zone select switch setting, refer to OS32C Series User’s Manual. When using only one
zone, no connection is needed for the zone select inputs.
Note: This wiring example is for category 3.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

B-10

www.sti.com/info

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Dimensions

mm (in.)

OS32C-BP
OS32C with Back Location Cable Entry
Ethernet cable not shown
Ethernet connector
with M12 cap plug

I/O cable

90.4 [3.56]
Window

158.3 [6.24]

Dust
detection

I/O block
Sensor head

104.3 [4.11]

140.4 [5.53]

Top View

100.0 [3.94]

133.0 [5.24]

32.8 [1.29]

M5×0.8 (x4)
41.4 [1.63]
MTG holes

57.0 [2.25]
27.7 [1.09]
50.0 [1.97]

104.5 [4.12]
67.0 [2.64]
Scan plane

Front View

6.0 [0.24]

121.0 [4.77]
MTG holes

Side View

Back View

102.9 [4.05]
142.7
[5.62]

I/O cable assy

88.1
[3.47] 71.5
[2.82]

71.3[2.81]
(min)

Ethernet
cable

50.9 [2.01]

2.0, 3.0, 10.0, 20.0, or 30.0 Meters
ø30.0 [1.18] OD

I/O cable

Bottom View

OS32C-SP1

270 [10.63]

OS32C with Side Location Cable Entry
I/O block
Ethernet
cable

90.4 [3.56]

Ethernet cable
Window

Dust
detection
I/O cable
Sensor head

104.3 [4.11]

Top View
133.0 [5.24]

140.4 [5.53]

M5×0.8(×4)

67.0 [2.64]
Scan plane

Back View

Front View

6.0 [0.24]

32.8 [1.29]

104.5 [4.12]

41.4 [1.63]
MTG holes
121.0 [4.77]
MTG holes

100.0 [3.94]

70.8
[2.79]

57.0 [2.25]

Side View

50.4 [1.99]
I/O cable

142.7
[5.62]

88.2
[3.47]

270 [10.63]

102.9 [4.05]
I/O cable assy

2.0, 3.0, 10.0, 20.0, or 30.0 Meters

ø30.0 [1.18] OD

71.5
[2.82]

Bottom View

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

B-11

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Dimensions (continued)

mm (in.)

OS32C-BP + OS32C-BKT4

150.4 [5.93]
ø107.5 [4.24]

OS32C with Top Guard Kit

93.4 [3.68]

112.4 [4.43]
67.0 [2.64]
Scan Plane

41.4 [1.63] 63.0 [2.48]

27.7 [1.09]

6.0 [0.24]

50.0 [1.97]

145.7 [5.74]

121.0 [4.77]

Side View

Back View

OS32C-BP + OS32C-BKT1

103.7 [4.08]
97.7 [3.85]

OS32C with Bottom/Side Mounting Brackets

69.2
[2.73]

39.9 [1.57]

116.7
[4.60]

12.2 [0.48]

50.0 [1.97]

4.9 [0.19]

79.2 [3.12]
Scan plane

24.5 [0.97]
23.3 [0.92]
41.0 [1.62]

Back View

37. 9 [1.49]

93.7 [3.69]

Side View
155.9 [6.14]
106.0 [4.17]

102.4 [4.03]

66.4
[2.62]

144.4 [5.69]

54.5 [2.15]

Bottom View

OS32C-BP + OS32C-BKT3

23.3 [0.92]

103.4 [4.08]

OS32C with Simple Mounting Brackets
104.5
[4.12]
67.0 [2.64]
Scan plane

52.8
[2.08]

26.8 [1.05]
13.3 [0.52]

(×4) 12.0 [0.47]
SYM

50.0
[1.97]

169.0 [6.66]

155.7 [6.13]

Back View

Side View

(×4) Slots for M5 mounting screws
“hardware user supplied”

185.0 [7.29]

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

B-12

www.sti.com/info

Bottom View

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Dimensions (continued)

mm (in.)

OS32C-BP + OS32C-BKT1 + OS32C-BKT4
OS32C with Bottom/Side Mounting Brackets and Top Guard Kit
154.7 [6.09]

103.7 [4.08]

φ107.5 [4.24]

97.7 [3.85]

75.2
[2.96]

39.9 [1.57]

124.9
[4.92]

12.2 [0.48]

50.0 [1.97]

4.8 [0.19]

Back View

4.9 [0.19]

79.2 [3.12]
Scan plane

24.5 [0.97]
23.3 [0.92]
41.0 [1.62]

37.9 [1.49]

93.7 [3.69]

Side View

155.9 [6.14]
106.0 [4.17]

66.4
[2.62]

144.4 102.4
[5.69] [4.03]

54.5 [2.15]

23.3 [0.92]

Bottom View

OS32C-BP + OS32C-BKT1 + OS32C-BKT2
OS32C with XY Axis Rotation Mounting Kit
111. 4 [4.39]

132.7 [5.23]
95.2 [3.75]
Scan plane
48.0 [1.89]

55.9 [2.20]
50.0 [1.97]

15.0
7.5

28.2 [1.11]
17.0
[0.67]

93.5 [3.68]
150.5 [5.93]

46.0 [1.81]

Back View
(For back mounting)
15.0

43.0
[1.69]

99.2
[3.91]

Side View
163.7 [6.45]
119.7 [4.72]

7.5

Hardware for
Y-adjustment

47.5 [1.87] 166.3
[6.55]

151.1
[5.95]

102.4
[4.03]

163.0
[6.42]

42.2 [1.66]
17.4
[0.69]

139.7 [5.50]

Back View
(For Y-anglular adjustment)

54.5 [2.15]

Bottom View

37.0 [1.46]

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

B-13

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Dimensions (continued)

mm (in.)

OS32C-BP + OS32C-BKT1 + OS32C-BKT2 + OS32C-BKT4
OS32C with Bottom/Side Mounting Brackets and XY Axis Rotation Mounting Kit and Top Guard Kit
168.4 [6.63]
111.4 [4.39]

φ107.5 [4.24]

141.0 [5.55]
48.0 [1.89]

55.9 [2.20]

95.2 [3.75]
Scan plane

99.2 [3.91]
28.2 [1.11]

50.0 [1.97]

17.0 [0.67]

93.5 [3.68]
150.5 [5.93]

4.8 [0.19]

46.0 [1.81]

Side View

Back View
(For back mounting)
15.0

7.5

15.0 43.0 [1.69]

163.7 [6.45]
119.7 [4.72]

7.5

Hardware for
Y-adjustment

47.5 [1.87] 166.3 151.1
[6.55] [5.95]

42.2 [1.66]

102.4 163.0
[4.03] [6.42]

17.4 [0.69]
139.7 [5.50]

Back View
(For Y-angular adjustment)

54.5 [2.15]

Bottom side

37.0 [1.46]

OS32C-SP1 + OS32C-BKT1 + OS32C-BKT2 + OS32C-MT + OS32C-HDT
OS32C with Bottom/Side Mounting Brackets and XY Axis Rotation Mounting Kit and Mounting Stand
and Mounting Stand Hardware Kit
203.2 [8.00]

609.6 [24.00]
637.2 [25.09]
137.2 [5.40]

424.0 [16.69]
355.1 [13.98]
286. 2 [11.27]

209.6 [8.25]

217.3 [8.56]

165.1 [6.50]
190.5 [7.50]

View A

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

B-14

www.sti.com/info

111.7
[4.40]

235.0 [9.25]
250.8 [9.87]

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Dimensions (continued)

(mm)

OS32C-CBL-□□M
Power Cable
L

(56)

(90)

(30)

Sizes are as below
Model Number
OS32C-CBL-03M
OS32C-CBL-10M
OS32C-CBL-20M

Vinyl insulated round cable (diameter max. 10mm) Black
18-core (conductor section area 0.3 mm2,
insulator diameter max. 1.5 mm)
Standard length L (See )

Name plate

OS32C-CBL-30M

L
3m
10m
20m

30m

OS32C-ECBL-□□M
Ethernet Cable
D-coding
3
4

44.7

6.5 dia.

54.7

1
2

Sizes are as below

M12

Model Number
OS32C-ECBL-02M

RJ45 TYPE
Twist tie

OS32C-ECBL-05M
OS32C-ECBL-15M

L
2m

5m
15m

Ordering
OS32C (Power cable is sold separately)
Appearance

Description

Model

OS32C laser scanner with 3 m range and
back location cable entry EtherNet capable
for configuration and monitoring

OS32C-BP

OS32C laser scanner with 4 m range and
back location cable entry EtherNet capable
for configuration and monitoring

OS32C-BP-4M

OS32C laser scanner with 3 m range, back
location cable entry EtherNet/IP capable for
status measurement data reporting

OS32C-BP-DM

OS32C laser scanner with 4 m range, back
location cable entry EtherNet/IP capable for
status measurement data reporting

OS32C-BP-DM-4M

OS32C laser scanner with 3 m range and
side location cable entry*, EtherNet capable
for configuration and monitoring

OS32C-SP1

OS32C laser scanner with 4 m range and
side location cable entry*, EtherNet capable
for configuration and monitoring

OS32C-SP1-4M

OS32C laser scanner with 3 m range, side
location cable entry*, EtherNet/IP capable for
status measurement data reporting

OS32C-SP1-DM

OS32C laser scanner with 4 m range, side
location cable entry*, EtherNet/IP capable for
status measurement data reporting

OS32C-SP1-DM-4M

Remarks

CD-ROM (Configuration software)
OS supported: Windows 2000,

Windows XP,

Windows Vista

Windows 7

*For OS32C-SP1, each connector is located on the left as viewed from the back of the I/O block.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

B-15

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Ordering (continued)
Power Cable
Appearance

Description

Model

Cable length: 3 m

OS32C-CBL-03M

Cable length: 10 m

OS32C-CBL-10M

Cable length: 20 m

OS32C-CBL-20M

Cable length: 30 m

OS32C-CBL-30M

Description

Model

Cable length: 2 m

OS32C-ECBL-02M

Cable length: 5 m

OS32C-ECBL-05M

Cable length: 15 m

OS32C-ECBL-15M

Remarks

One cable is required per sensor.

Ethernet Cable
Appearance

Remarks

Required for configuration and monitoring.

Note: An EtherNet cable with an M12, 4-pin connector is required.

Mounting Brackets
Appearance

Description

Model

Remarks

Bottom/side mounting bracket

OS32C-BKT1

Bottom/side mounting bracket x 1,
unit mounting screws x 4 sets

XY axis rotation mounting bracket

OS32C-BKT2

XY axis rotation mounting bracket x 1,
unit mounting screws x 6 sets,
bracket mounting screws x 1 set
(must be used with OS32C-BKT1)

Simple mounting bracket

OS32C-BKT3

Simple mounting brackets x 2,
unit mounting screws x 4 sets *

Protective cover for window

OS32C-BKT4

Mounting stand

OS32C-MT

When using a mounting stand, use an OS32C
with side location cable entry (OS32C-SP1).
The OS32C with back location cable entry
(OS32C-BP) cannot be mounted.
Use with mounting brackets (OS32C-BKT1
and OS32C-BKT2).

Hardware kit for mounting stand

OS32C-HDT

Mounting screws x 3 sets
Use this when mounting a bracket to the
mounting stand.

*There are eight OS32C mounting screws for singular use, and four screws for protective cover for window.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

B-16

www.sti.com/info

OS32C

Safety Laser Scanners

Ordering (continued)
Accessories
Appearance

Description

Model

Remarks

Scan window

OS32C-WIN-KT

Spare for replacement

Spare sensor with 3 m range, without I/O
block, EtherNet capable for configuration
and monitoring

OS32C-SN

Spare for replacement

Spare sensor with 4 m range, without I/O
block, EtherNet capable for configuration
and monitoring

OS32C-SN-4M

Spare for replacement

Spare sensor with 3 m range, EtherNet/IP,
without I/O block, EtherNet/IP capable for
status and measurement data reporting

OS32C-SN-DM

Spare replacement for EtherNet/IP

Spare sensor with 4 m range, EtherNet/IP,
without I/O block, EtherNet/IP capable for
status and measurement data reporting

OS32C-SN-DM-4M

Spare replacement for EtherNet/IP

I/O block with cable access from the back

OS32C-CBBP

Spare for replacement

I/O block with cable access from the left side

OS32C-CBSP1

Spare for replacement

Window cleaning kit, anti-static cleaner

WIN-CLN-KT

Accessory

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

B-17

Safety Applications

OMRON Automation and Safety offers ...

Application Solutions
B

Area Scanning
Area scanning devices, typically employing laser light,
can be used to guard the area of a robotic work cell.
When properly programmed, an area scanner will detect
an intrusion into the defined area. Area scanning devices
have the advantage of being able to be reprogrammed
should the configuration of the robot welding cell change.
Additionally, area scanning devices frequently include
a programmable “warning zone” which can be set to
warn an intruder from entering into the work cell without
stopping the robot. Intruding farther will block the safety
zone and stop the robot.

Laser
Scanner

Protective Field
Warning Field

Transfer Robot Guarding
This large industrial robot is used to
transfer work in process from one conveyor to another. Moving quickly, it has the
potential to seriously injure personnel. STI
Universal Safety Mats in conjunction with
STI safety mat controllers are designed to
protect workers by sending a stop signal
to the robot to cease hazardous motion.

Silicon Wafer Quality
Control Stand
Full wafer trays are placed in the work cell
by the operator reaching through a safety
light curtain. Access to the hazardous robot
is additionally guarded by hard guarding on
three sides which has been interlocked with
the MC magnetically coded safety switches.
In order to assure that the robot will not start
with someone in the enclosure, STI Universal
Safety Mats are used inside the perimeter.
The hinged guard below the safety light
curtain is interlocked using an D4NH hingepin operated safety switch.

B-18

www.sti.com/info

Test
Machin

Robo

Perimeter Access Guarding
Contents
Selection Guide

C-2

Single-Beam Devices
PA46-1-000 C-3
Multi-Beam Devices
PA4600 C-3
PA4600-BB C-7

C-1

Perimeter Access Guarding

Selection Guide

Perimeter

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Selecting the Proper Perimeter Guarding Device for Your Application

Do you have a
potentially hazardous
explosive environment?

PA46-1-000
Single Beam Applications

yes
• Contact Omron

Long-Range
Perimeter Guarding
Example shown: Two transmitter/
receiver pairs using two mirrors to direct
the beam around a corner.

1 to 176 ft
0.3 to 53 m

Do you need
multiple beams?

yes
• Perimeter Access Device
PA4600 — p. C-3

Transmitter

(2-box system, 70 m range with

36 in
900 mm

solid-state outputs)

Receiver

Rapid delivery product

• Entry/Exit Access Guarding
Device PA4600-BB — p. C-7

Transmitter

16 in
400 mm
Receiver

Floor

(2-box system, power to transceiver
only, solid-state output, 8 m range)
Rapid delivery product

Double Bounce
Example shown: One transmitter/
receiver pair using two mirrors to create a
two-beam pattern.

• Perimeter Access Device
PA46-1-000 — p. C-3
(2-box system, 70 m range with
solid-state outputs)

1 to 75 ft
0.3 to 23

Rapid delivery product

45° Mirror
Transmitter

36 in
900 mm
45° Mirror

Receiver
Floor

Transceiver (Active) Unit

PA4600 and PA4600-BB Applications

PA4400B

PA4600

Mirrors

The cost effective Perimeter Access Guarding Device
PA4600 provides guarding of robot centers and large
automated machinery. The STI corner
mirrors direct the infrared beams to four
sides of a machine.
The PA4600-BB provides the most
cost effective 2-beam guarding
for short range (less than 8 m)
applications.

Mirror

Mirror (Passive) Unit

C-2

www.sti.com/info

16 in
400 mm

Perimeter Access Guarding

PA4600

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Perimeter Access Guarding Device
•
•
•
•
•
•

1 to 6 beams available
Operating range of 70 m
Compact size — 46 x 55 mm (1.81 x 2.17 in.)
Simple “two-box” design — no separate control box required
Individual Beam Indicators
A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Performance
Protective Height:
Operating Range:
Response Time:
Electrical
Input Voltage (Vin):
Input Power:
Safety Output Ratings:
Auxiliary (non-safety) Output
Rating:
Power Supply:

External Device Monitoring:
Start/Restart:
Effective Aperture Angle:
Light Source:
Transmitter Indicator Light:
Receiver Indicator Lights:
Mechanical
Construction:
Cable Length:
Minimum Cable Gauge:
Cable Connections:

Variable
0.8 to 70 m
Transmit Code A: <24 ms; Transmit Code B: <20 ms; Transmit Code C: <16 ms
24 VDC ± 20%
8.4 watts (without load on the outputs)
Two PNP outputs sourcing 625 mA max @ Vin (see note 1). Short circuit protected.
One NPN output sinking 100 mA max @ Vin or one PNP output sourcing 100
mA @ Vin (see notes 1 and 2)
24 VDC ± 20%. The rating depends on the current requirement of the loads
attached to the outputs (see note 3). The power supply must meet the requirements
of IEC 60204-1 and 61496-1. STI part number 42992 or equivalent.
50 mA @ 24 VDC steady state
N.O. input. Momentary contact (10 mA consumption)
± 2.5° maximum, transmitter and receiver at operating range greater than 3 m
per IEC 61496-2
Infrared light emitting diode, 880 nm
Active (yellow)
Machine run (green), machine stop (red), interlock/fault (yellow), individual
beams and two 7-segment displays (red)
Polyester powder-painted aluminum
Available in 10, 15 and 30 m lengths, unshielded.
22 AWG (0.32 mm2) for user-supplied cables
8-pin terminal block
Optional Receiver Connector: M-12, 8-pin connector
Optional Transmitter Connector: M-12, 5-pin connector

Description
The Perimeter Access
PA4600 is a long-range,
multi-beam safeguarding
device. It is suited to detect the
torsos of personnel entering
a hazardous area. Installation
and alignment is simplified with
Individual Beam Indicators,
which glow red when the beam
is out of alignment or blocked.
The separate Scan Codes
allow the installer to select
unique scan frequencies that
eliminate cross-talk with adjacent PA4600 systems. Diagnostics are greatly enhanced
with the LED status indicators
and numeric displays.

Environmental
Enclosure Rating:
Operating Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Vibration:
Shock:
Approvals

IP67
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
95% maximum, non-condensing
5-60 Hz maximum on all 3 axis
10 g of 0.016 seconds; 1,000 shocks for each axis on two axis
ESPE Type 4 (IEC 61496-1/ -2)
Category 4 / PL e (EN ISO 13849-1)
SIL3 / SIL3 CL3 (IEC 61508 / EN 62061)
UL508, UL1998, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 14, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 0.8,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 0, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 205
Specifications subject to change without notification.
Note 1: Voltage available at the outputs is equal to Vin - 2.0 VDC.
Note 2: Total current required by the two solid-state outputs and the aux. output should not exceed 1.35 A.
Note 3: Total system current requirement is the sum of the transmitter 100 mA and receiver 1.6 A max. (receiver
250 mA + OSSD1 load + OSSD2 load + aux. output load)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

C-3

PA4600

Perimeter Access Guarding

Dimensions

(mm/in.)
211.3 [8.32]

MTG SLOTS (6 PLCS)
11.5
6.8
LG X
DIA
0.45
0.27

38.1 [1.50]

DIMENSIONS:

80.9 [3.19]

55.0 [2.17]

mm (+\-.3)
INCHES (+\-.01)
80.0 [3.15]

"G"

130.4 [5.14]

73.5 [2.89]

"J"

"H"

RX FRONT VIEW

"D"

"G"

52.8 [2.08]

"F"

"E"
"D"

"A"

"B"

"C"

52.0 [2.05]
DIP
SWITCH
ACCESS
DOOR
*5 & 6 BEAM
NOT SHOWN

PA46-4,-5,-6-300*

PA46-3-400/500

PA46-2-500/600

PA4600 Dimensions and Shipping Weights
Beam Spacing
mm/in.
PA46-1-000
N/A
PA46-2-500**
A = 500/19.69
PA46-2-600*
A = 600/23.62
PA46-3-400**
D = 400/15.75
PA46-3-500*
D = 500/19.69
PA46-4-300**
G = 300/11.81
PA46-5-300
G = 300/11.81
PA46-6-300
G = 300/11.81
*Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009)
**Meets EN999: 1998

Mounting Holes
mm/in.
211.3/8.32
B = 711.3/28.00
B = 811.3/31.94
E = 1011.3/39.81
E = 1211.3/47.68
H = 1111.3/43.75
H = 1411.3/55.56
H = 1711.3/67.37

Overall Height
mm/in.
231.6/9.12
C = 731.6/28.80
C = 831.6/32.74
F = 1031.6/40.61
F = 1231.6/48.49
J = 1131.6/44.55
J = 1431.6/56.36
J = 1731.6/68.17

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

C-4

www.sti.com/info

System Shipping
Weights kg/lb.
4.5/10
6.3/14
6.7 /15
7.2 /16
8.6/19
8.2 /18
9.5/21
10.4/23

TX FRONT VIEW

PA4600

Perimeter Access Guarding

Wiring
Connecting to Machine Control System Via Two Force-Guided Relays

Connecting to Machine Control System Via Two Force-Guided Relays

Power Supply
Earth
Ground

+24 VDC

0 VDC

PA4600 RCVR

Red

1
OSSD 1
2
OSSD 2
4
3

Start

Blue

4
Start

Pink

5
EDM

ED 1 ED 2

White
Brown
Green

Yellow

ED 2

3
Auxiliary
Output

Grey

Machine Control Contacts

ED 2

ED 1

6
+24 VDC
7
0 VDC
8
Earth

PA4600 XMTR
7

3
4
MTS
5
MTS
Return

ED 1

White

6
+24 VDC

Brown

7
0 VDC

Green

8
Earth

Blue

MTS/Test

Black

External Device Monitoring must be used when force-guided
control relays are used as the Final Switching Devices.
Connect terminal 5 (pink wire) though N.C. contacts to 0 VDC.
For the purpose of bench testing prior to installation, the
user may select EDM OFF(default factory setting). In this
case the EDM line, terminal 5 (pink wire) must be
connected to the 0 VDC line.

Aux. Output NPN or PNP 100 mA. max. @ 24VDC, connect to PLC
(optional)

User-supplied fuse

Start connections are shown with option N01 – normally open
(pulled to 0 VDC)

MTS requires a N.C. contact. If MTS is not used, install a
jumper across terminals 4 & 5. MTS is an option, no
connection is needed if the option is not ordered.

No connection

Note: The conductor colors are reference to the optional cables
available from Omron STI.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

C-5

PA4600

Perimeter Access Guarding

Ordering
Model
Number of Beams
Perimeter Access PA4600
PA46-1-000-Q2-NO1-PN
1
PA46-2-500-Q2-NO1-PN
2
PA46-2-600-Q2-NO1-PN
2
PA46-3-400-Q2-NO1-PN
3
PA46-3-500-Q2-NO1-PN
3
PA46-4-300-Q2-NO1-PN
4
PA46-5-300-Q2-NO1-PN
5
PA46-6-300-Q2-NO1-PN
6

Overall Height
231.6 mm (9.12 in.)
731.6 mm (28.80 in.)
831.6 mm (32.74 in.)
1031.6 mm (40.61 in.)
1231.6 mm (48.49 in.)
1131.6 mm (44.55 in.)
1431.6 mm (56.36 in.)
1731.6 mm (68.17 in.)

Accessories (sold separately)
Part Number
Description
Transmitter Cables
CBL-LCTX-10M
Transmitter Cable, 10 m (32.8 ft)
CBL-LCTX-15M
Transmitter Cable, 15 m (49.3 ft)
CBL-LCTX-30M
Transmitter Cable, 30 m (98.5 ft)
PMC-PA46TX
M12 Transmitter Connector
Receiver Cables
CBL-LCRX-10M
Receiver Cable, 10 m (32.8 ft)
CBL-LCRX-15M
Receiver Cable, 15 m (49.3 ft)
CBL-LCRX-30M
Receiver Cable, 30 m (98.5 ft)
PMC-PA46RX
M12 Receiver Connector
Explosion Proof Enclosures
PA4600-EPKT-0300 350 mm protected height enclosure, each
PA4600-EPKT-0600 520 and 610 mm Protected Height Enclosure,
each
PA4600-EPKT-0900 870 mm Protected Height Enclosure, each
PA4600-EPKT-1200 1215 mm Protected Height Enclosure, each
Resource Modules
RM-1
RM-1 Resource Module
RM-2
RM-2 Resource Module
RM-2AC
RM-2AC Resource Module/Power Supply
RM-2AC-IP
RM-2AC-IP Resource Module/Power Supply
RM-3
RM-3 Resource Mute Module
RM-X
RM-X Safety Relay, 22.5 mm DIN enclosure

Safety Standards and Precautions
The PA4600 is a presence sensing device used only for
perimeter access guarding applications, such as around robots
and workcells. The PA4600 meets ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009)
and EN999:1998 optical configuration requirements for perimeter
access guarding presence-sensing devices. PA4600 systems
have been EC type examined to the requirements of IEC 61496-1,
-2 for a Type 4 ESPE. The PA4600 also meets the control reliability
requirements of ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009).
The optical design and detection capability of the PA4600 are
optimized for torso detection of personnel entering a hazardous
area from the perimeter, also called perimeter access guarding. It
is not intended to be used for the detection of hands and fingers.
It is not designed for, nor should it be used as, a high-resolution
point-of-operation safety light curtain. The safety beams have
been positioned to meet ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009) and
EN999:1998 perimeter guarding requirements. These documents
are an excellent reference for the application of perimeter guarding optical devices such as the PA4600.
The PA4600 should only be used on machinery that can
consistently and immediately stop anywhere in its cycle or stroke.
Never use a PA4600 to guard the perimeter of a full revolution
clutched power press or machine. If the PA4600 does not protect
all access to the hazardous area, other appropriate devices such
as mechanical guards must guard the unprotected access.
The purchaser, installer and employer have the responsibility to
meet all local, state and federal government laws, rules, codes or
regulations relating to the proper use, installation, operation and
maintenance of this control and the guarded machine. See the
Installation and Operation Manual for additional information.
All application examples described are for illustration purposes
only. Actual installations will differ from those indicated.

information on Resource
✎ For
Modules, see page D-63
information on safety light
✎ For
curtain accessories, see page D-68

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

C-6

www.sti.com/info

Perimeter Access Guarding

PA4600-BB

PA4600BB

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Entry/Exit Access Guarding Device
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

2 beams available
Operating range of 8 m
Compact size — 46 x 55 mm (1.81 x 2.17 in.)
Simple “one-box” — active/passive design
Individual Beam Indicators
Simplified wiring - electrical connections only required at transceiver
A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today
or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Performance
Protective Height:
Operating Range:
Response Time:
Safety Output:
Auxiliary (Non-Safety ) Output:
External Device Monitoring:
Start/Restart:
Effective Aperture Angle:
Light Source:
Transceiver Indicator Lights:
Electrical
Power Input:

Mechanical
Construction:
Cable Length:
Minimum Cable Gauge:
Connection Type:
Environmental
Enclosure Rating:
Operating Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Approvals

Description
500 and 600 mm
0.8 to 8 m
Transmit Code A: <24 ms; Transmit Code B: <20 ms; Transmit Code C: <16
ms
Two PNP, each output sourcing 625 mA @ 24 VDC, short circuit protected
(See note 1 below)
One NPN output sinking 100 mA @ 24 VDC or PNP output sourcing 100 mA
@ 24 VDC. Both available in follow or fault operating modes.
50 mA @ 24 VDC steady state (See note 2 below)
N.O. input. Momentary contact (10 mA consumption)
± 2.5° maximum, transmitter and receiver at operating range greater than 3
m per IEC 61496-2
Infrared light emitting diode, 880 nm
Machine run (green), machine stop (red), interlock/fault (yellow), active
(yellow), individual beam and two 7-segment displays (red)
Transceiver: 24 VDC ± 20% 1.6 A max. (transceiver 250 mA +
OSSD1 625 mA max. + OSSD2 625 mA max. + auxiliary 100 mA max.).
(See note 1 below.)
Power Supply must meet requirements of IEC 60204-1 and IEC 61496. STI
part number 42992 or equivalent. (See note 1 below.)
Polyester powder-painted aluminum
Available in 10, 15 and 30 m lengths, unshielded.
22 AWG (0.32 mm2) for user-supplied cables
M-12, 8-pin connector

The Entry Exit
PA4600-BB is a short range,
two-beam safeguarding
device. It is suited to detect the
torsos of personnel entering
a hazardous area. Installation
and alignment is simplified
with Individual Beam Indicators, which glow red when the
beam is out of alignment or
blocked. The separate Scan
Codes allow the installer to
select unique scan frequencies that eliminate cross-talk
with adjacent PA4600
systems. Diagnostics are
greatly enhanced with the LED
status indicators and numeric
displays. The active-passive
design simplifies the electrical
connections, as no connections are needed at the Passive
(mirror) assembly.

IP67
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
95% maximum, non-condensing
ESPE Type 4 (IEC 61496-1/ -2)
Category 4 / PL e (EN ISO 13849-1)
SIL3 / SIL3 CL3 (IEC 61508 / EN 62061)
UL508, UL1998, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 14, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 0.8,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 0, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 205
Specifications subject to change without notification.
Note 1: Total system current requirement is the sum of transceiver (250 mA), OSSD1 (625 mA max.), OSSD2
(625 mA max.) and Aux. output (100 mA max.).
Note 2: 24 VDC is nominal. Actual voltage is dependent upon supply, V = Vsupply - 2V.

www.sti.com/info

C-7

PA4600-BB

Perimeter Access Guarding

Dimensions

(mm/in.)

73.50
2.894
55.0
2.17

50.52
1.989

110
4.33

C
PA4600-BB Dimensions and Shipping Weights

A
B

A
B
C
Beam
Mounting
Overall
Spacing
Holes
Height
mm/in.
mm/in.
mm/in.
PA46-BB-2-500**
500/19.69
760.84/29.95 781.09/30.75
PA46-BB-2-600*
600/23.62
860.84/33.90 881.09/34.70
*Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009)
**Meets EN999: 1998

110
4.33

PASSIVE UNIT

Wiring

Connecting to Machine Control System Via Two Force-Guided Relays

+24 VDC

Transceiver (Active) Unit

0 VDC

PA4600-BB
1
OSSD 1
2
OSSD 2

4
3

Start

Blue

4
Start

Pink

5
EDM

White
Brown
Green

Red

ED 1

Yellow

ED 2

3
Auxiliary
Output

Grey

ED 1 ED 2

Mirrors

Machine Control Contacts

ED 1

6
+24 VDC
7
0 VDC
8
Earth

ED 2

Mirror (Passive) Unit

External Device Monitoring must be used when force-guided
control relays are used as the Final Switching Devices. Connect
terminal 5 (pink wire) though N.C. contacts to 0 VDC.

For the purpose of bench testing prior to installation, the
user may select EDM OFF(default factory setting). In this
case the EDM line, terminal 5 (pink wire) must be
connected to the 0 VDC line.

Aux. Output NPN or PNP 100 mA. max. @ 24VDC, connect to PLC

User-supplied fuse (2 A time lag type)

Start connections are shown with option N01 – normally open
(pulled to 0 VDC)

Note: The conductor colors are reference to the optional cables
available from Omron STI.

C-8

System
Shipping
Weights
kg/lb.
6.3/14
6.7/15

ACTIVE UNIT

Power Supply
Earth
Ground

D
Sensor
Height
mm/in.
720/28.34
820/32.28

www.sti.com/info

PA4600-BB

Perimeter Access Guarding

Ordering
To order a Perimeter Access PA4600-BB system, simply choose
from the selection below.
Model
Part No.
Description
Perimeter Access PA4600-BB
PA46-BB-2-500
40386-1001 2 beams with 500 mm spacing**
PA46-BB-2-600
40386-1009 2 beams with 600 mm spacing*
*Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009)
**Meets EN999: 1998

Accessories (sold separately)
Part Number
Transceiver Cables
CBL-LCRX-10M
CBL-LCRX-15M
CBL-LCRX-30M
Resource Modules
RM-1
RM-2
RM-2AC
RM-2AC-IP
RM-3
RM-X

Description
Receiver Cable, 10 m (32.8 ft)
Receiver Cable, 15 m (49.3 ft)
Receiver Cable, 30 m (98.5 ft)
RM-1 Resource Module
RM-2 Resource Module
RM-2AC Resource Module/Power Supply
RM-2AC-IP Resource Module/Power Supply
RM-3 Resource Mute Module
RM-X Safety Relay, 22.5 mm DIN enclosure

information on Resource
✎ For
Modules, see page D-63
information on safety light
✎ For
curtain accessories, see page D-68

Safety Standards and Precautions
The PA4600-BB is a presence sensing device used only for perimeter access guarding applications, such as around robots and
workcells. The PA4600-BB meets ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009)
and EN999:1998 optical configuration requirements for perimeter
access guarding presence-sensing devices. PA4600‑BB systems
have been EC type examined to the requirements of IEC 61496-1,
-2 for a Type 4 ESPE. The PA4600-BB also meets the control
reliability requirements of ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009).
The optical design and detection capability of the PA4600BB are optimized for torso detection of personnel entering a
hazardous area from the perimeter, also called perimeter access
guarding. It is not intended to be used for the detection of hands
and fingers. It is not designed for, nor should it be used as, a
high-resolution point-of-operation safety light curtain. The safety
beams have been positioned to meet ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999
(R2009) and EN999:1998 perimeter guarding requirements.
These documents are an excellent reference for the application of
perimeter guarding optical devices such as the PA4600-BB.
The PA4600-BB should only be used on machinery that can
consistently and immediately stop anywhere in its cycle or stroke.
Never use a PA4600‑BB to guard the perimeter of a full revolution
clutched power press or machine. If the PA4600-BB does not protect all access to the hazardous area, other appropriate devices
such as mechanical guards must guard the unprotected access.
The purchaser, installer and employer have the responsibility to
meet all local, state and federal government laws, rules, codes or
regulations relating to the proper use, installation, operation and
maintenance of this control and the guarded machine. See the
Installation and Operation Manual for more information.
All application examples described are for illustration purposes
only. Actual installations will differ from those indicated.

www.sti.com/info

C-9

Custom Modifications

OMRON Automation and Safety offers ...

Custom Modifications
for Safety Light Curtains

Custom Modifications

Transmitter

OMRON Automation and Safety offers a wide range of safety
light curtains. The correct curtain for your application is probably
in this engineering guide. If it isn’t, contact our application engineers to discuss your requirements. Omron has an established
reputation for creating custom modifications of standard products.
Some examples are highlighted below.

Receiver

MiniSafe

Certain applications call for safety light curtains to have doubleended quick-disconnect cables. This custom modification is
available from OMRON Automation and Safety. Quick-disconnect
cables are available for transmitter, receiver, input power and
relay output connections.

Quick and Easy Fixed Blanking Function
The MS4800 has been outfitted with a special blanking feature
that is ideal for applications where frequent changes are needed
to accommodate changing tooling/material. This is a common
need in applications related to metal fabrication. Refer to the
MS4800 section for more information.

C-10

www.sti.com/info

LED Indicators
Quick-disconnect
Cables

MiniSafe

Controller Quick-disconnect

Safety Light Curtains
Contents
Selection Guide

D-2

Type 4 Light Curtains
F3SJ Overview

D-5

F3SJ-E D-20
F3SJ-B D-27
F3SJ-A D-37
MS4800 D-46
Light Curtain Resource Modules
Resource Modules Overview

D-63

RM-1 D-65
RM-2, RM-2AC & RM-2AC-IP

D-65

RM-3 D-66
RM-4 D-66
RM-6 D-67
RM-X D-67
Accessories D-68

D-1

Safety Light Curtains

Selection Guide

Lightcurtain

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

We Can Simplify Your Light Curtain Selection Needs

OMRON Automation and Safety provides a variety of safety
light curtains to solve your optical guarding needs. We offer
compact models designed for machine locations where space is
tight, and we offer larger robust light curtains powerful enough to
guard large perimeters. We offer you a choice because when it
comes to automation safeguarding, one size does not fit all.
The following questions will guide you to the appropriate
models.

yes
Do you need a
Light Curtain?

Do you have a
special application?

yes

D-2

www.sti.com/info

Contact Omron

Selection Guide

Safety Light Curtains

Selection Guide (continued)
no

yes
Do you need muting?

The “EASY type” is
recommended for those
who place emphasis on
ease-of-implementation.

F3SJ-E
no

Do you need blanking?

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Easy installation
Less wiring
Simple functions
3 m integrated cables
Detection capability: 25 mm
Operating range: 7 m
Rapid delivery product

See p. D-20
yes
Operating range
less than 9 m

The “BASIC type” is
recommended for those
who place emphasis on
maintainability.

F3SJ-B
• Series-connection: 3 segments
• Muting
• Detection capability: 25 mm
• Operating range: 7 m
• Rapid delivery product

What operating range do
you need?

See p. D-27

Operating range
more than 9 m

The “ADVANCED type” is
recommended for those who place
emphasis on high functionality.

F3SJ-A
•
•
•
•
•

Series-connection: 4 segments
Various muting functions
Various blanking functions
PC settings
Detection capability:
14, 20, 25, 30, 55 mm
• Operating range: 9 m
• Rapid delivery product
See p. D-37

MS4800
•
•
•
•
•

Series-connection: 4 segments
Rugged and robust
Various muting functions
Various blanking functions
Detection capability:
14, 20, 30, 40 mm
• Operating range: 20 m
• Rapid delivery product
See p. D-46

www.sti.com/info

D-3

Selection Guide

Safety Light Curtains

Special Application Light Curtain Products

Protective Enclosures
for Harsh and Wash-Down
Applications

Explosion-Proof for
Safety Light Curtains and
Perimeter Guarding Devices

Omron has enclosures for mounting
selected light curtains in harsh
and wash-down applications. These
reduce down time and increase
the life of the light curtain. They are
resistant to many chemicals and
compounds. See www.sti.com
for more information on these
accessories.

Explosion-proof enclosures
rated for Class I, Group C and
D environments are available for
the following products

• Weld Slag Protective Cover for
Harsh Applications — p. D-74

Once you have narrowed
down your selection, please
go back to the selection
chart on page D-2. From there,
you’ll be able to make a
more precise decision by
specifying whether your
detection object is the size of
a finger or the size of a hand.

• MS4800 — p. D-46
(2-box system, rugged design,
24 VDC with solid-state output)

• PA4600 — p. C-3
(2-box system, 30 m range with
solid-state output)

• PA4600-BB — p. C-7

(Available for F3SJ-A, MS4800 and

(2-box system, power to transceiver

PA4600)

only, solid-state output, 8 m range)

• IP67 Enclosure for
Washdown Applications — p. D-75
(Available for F3SJ-A and MS4800)

Optional Light Curtain Products

Resource Modules
RM Series resource modules
provide the user of STI solid-state
safety light curtains a convenient
and reliable method of enhancing
and extending the capabilities of
these light curtains.

• RM-2AC — p. D-65

• RM-4 — p. D-66

(provides power and outputs, one N.O.

(provides connections for up to four

and one N.O./N.C. force-guided relay

safety devices, and produces a single

output, 150 mm DIN, for use with F3SJ,

pair of solid-state safety outputs, for

MS4800, OS3101, OS32C and PA4600)

use with MS4800, OS3101, OS32C and
PA4600)

• RM-2AC-IP — p. D-65
(provides power and outputs, one N.O.
and one N.O./N.C. force-guided relay

(mute module - provides for the wiring

output, IP65 metal chassis enclosure,

input of two to four muting sensors,

outputs and one pair of N.C. auxiliary

for use with F3SJ-A, MS4800, OS3101,

housed in a 22.5 mm DIN enclosure, for

relay outputs, 55 mm DIN, for use with

OS32C and PA4600)

F3SJ, MS4800, OS3101, OS32C and

the MSF4800A and MSF4800S)

• RM-X — p. D-67

• RM-3 — p. D-66
(mute module - allows for two

(one N.O. and one N.O./N.C.

solid-state-output light curtains to be

force-guided safety relay output, 22.5

(same as the RM-1, but allows for easier

connected and provides for the wiring

mm DIN, for use with F3SJ, MS4800,

Force-Guided Relays — p. I-1

wiring, 100 mm DIN, for use with F3SJ,

input of two to four muting sensors. This

OS3101, OS32C and PA4600)

MS4800, OS32C and PA4600)

unit has solid-state output and is housed

Force-guided relays have contacts
that are force-guided/mechanically
linked, conforming to IEC60947-11 as required for use in safetyrelated control systems.

PA4600)

• RM-2 — p. D-65

in a 100 mm DIN enclosure; for use with
MS4800, OS3101, OS32C and PA4600)

D-4

A variety of mirrors, stands,
brackets, alignment tools and
cables are available to assure
easy and quick installation.

• RM-6 — p. D-67

(one pair N.O. force-guided safety relay

• RM-1 — p. D-65

Accessories — p. D-68

www.sti.com/info

Safety Light Curtains

F3SJ Overview

F3SJ

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Introducing the F3SJ Series

Three Versions available
to meet your exact safety needs

All versions conform to the latest Type 4, PLe and SIL3 requirements.

F3SJ-E: EASY type

F3SJ-B: BASIC type

F3SJ-A: ADVANCED type

Easy, simple and affordable hand
protection

Basic, simple hand protection and
muting functions

Supports finger protection, and complex blanking and muting functions

www.sti.com/info

D-5

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Offering the best selection of safety light
curtains for your guarding needs.
Three F3SJ types allow easy selection for your application.
D

The F3SJ series of safety light curtains offers a tailored approach for a variety of production environments. Conventional
safety light curtains offer full-featured models, even when only
simple intrusion detection is needed. The F3SJ series offers
a product range that allows you to choose the best product
according to your application needs.
The EASY type has been added for simple hand detection,
while the BASIC type adds the potential for series connection
and simple muting functions.
The F3SJ series now allows you to select the best safety
light curtain for your application environment without paying for
unused functions.
• For simple and affordable hand protection:
The EASY type (F3SJ-E)
• For simple hand protection, series connection and muting
functions:
The BASIC type (F3SJ-B)
• For finger protection, series connection, complex blanking
and muting functions:
The ADVANCED type (F3SJ-A)

NEW

EASY type
F3SJ-E
Ease of implementation

NEW

BASIC type
F3SJ-B

ADVANCED type

F3SJ-A

Intrusion detection
(ON/OFF)

D-6

Series connection
& simple muting

www.sti.com/info

Series connection,
ection finger pprotection,
complex blanking & muting

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Applicable Standards
EN ISO 13849-1: Category 4, PLe
IEC 61496-1,-2: Type 4
IEC 61508-1 to 3: SIL3

Series
Connection
Warning
Zone
Global
Support
Series
Connection

Complex
Muting

Global
Support

Blanking

Fast
Installation

Simple
Muting

PC Setting
Tool

Easy-to-View
Diagnostics

Finger
Protection

For stand-alone devices

A new standard of
Safety Light Curtain

For special purposes
including finger protection

BASIC type (F3SJ-B)

ADVANCED type (F3SJ-A)

The muting function allows use of
the safety light curtain in a variety of
manufacturing environments.

The detection capability supports finger
protection through use of 14 mm resolution. The ADVANCED type has a wide
variety of muting and blanking functions to
increase productivity.

EASY type (F3SJ-E)
Can be used for simple hand intrusion
detection. Mounting now takes less than
half the man-hours that conventional
models take.
Despite its simplicity, the EASY type is a
highly reliable safety light curtain.

The flexible mounting supports up to
three sets of series-connected sensors.

www.sti.com/info

D-7

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Implementation cost reduction
with 1/2* the mounting time:
Start with the “EASY type”
D

* Comparison with existing Omron products.

The EASY type safety light curtain is well suited for
straight forward on/off detection applications.
By carefully selecting the available functions, we have
reduced man hours necessary for installation by approximately 1/2 when compared with existing STI models.
Reduced installation time means added savings to your
project's budget, start with the EASY type.

Easy-to-view blue LEDs make
beam adjustment easier!

I only need
simple
functions

mounting time

Mounting Time

Machine safety first, narrowed down to the
simplest functions:
Upon detection of personnel, the machine stops.
Simple yet very optimal.

Existing
models

E type

1/2 the mounting time
Fixed response time makes calculation of the
safety distance easier.
Reduced wiring, quick mount brackets and easy-to-view alignment beams all add up to cost savings.
Additionally, with one fixed response time, it is now easier to
calculate the safety distance.

D-8

www.sti.com/info

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Easy-to-View
Diagnostics

Global
Support

Global Support

Easy-to-view Diagnostics

OMRON Automation and Safety will support you through our
global network.

These indicators enable you to intuitively know the status and
cause of any error allowing faster installation while reducing
machine down time.

www.sti.com/info

D-9

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Fits any site, equipped with muting functions
and series connection:
Use the “BASIC type”
D

D-10

In addition to the simple functions inherited from
the EASY type, such as global support, easy-to-view
indicators, the BASIC type includes series connection
and simple muting functions. This enables the BASIC
type to satisfy installations that require multiple safety
light curtains.

www.sti.com/info

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Global
Support

Series
Connection

Easy-to-View
Diagnostics

Simple
Muting

Up to three sets-connected
in series

Instant visibility of process
trouble during muting

Functions inherited from the
EASY type

It is possible to connect up to three
sets of safety light curtains in series.
These sensors can be placed in a
U-shaped or L-shaped pattern with a
single power line, thus requiring less
wiring.

The BASIC type includes a muting
function which temporarily disables
the safety light curtain when a workpiece passes through. In the event of
any trouble occurring, the error can be
instantly recognized from the pattern
of the LED indicators, allowing for a
fast solution.

Simple functions such as universal
power voltage specification, easy-toview diagnostics, and fixed response
time have been inherited from the
EASY type. As a result, expect
reduced work-hours at each stage of
use, from design and installation to
operation.

www.sti.com/info

D-11

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Multi-functional for special applications
such as finger protection:
Select the “ADVANCED type”
D

The detection capability supports finger protection through use of
14 mm resolution. The ADVANCED type is equipped with various functions such as blanking, muting and the programing of warning zones.
All settings can be done via an easy to use software tool. This tool
simplifies installations that were previously complicated, again our way
of reducing cost and increasing productivity.

• Beam alignment is easier.

PC Setting
Tool

D-12

• Detection capability: 14 mm

Finger
Protection

Tool for setting parameters and
checking the system status

Detection capability supports
finger-protection

With the ADVANCED type (F3SJ-A) “SD
Manager”, all parameters can be set and
the system status can be checked with a
personal computer. Complex settings are
now simple to configure

Even if the distance from the hazard is
short, we have prepared a lineup that includes safety light curtains with a detection
capability of 14 mm.

www.sti.com/info

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Versatile muting function
possible

The blanking function
disables specific beams of
the Safety Light Curtain

Setting up a warning zone
to prevent unnecessary
stoppage

Equipped with partial muting that
disables only the beams where a
workpiece passes through, and position detection muting that disables the
beams while detecting the position of
a machine or robot.

If a part of the mechanical equipment is within the detection zone of
the Safety Light Curtain, the relevant
beams can be disabled. This is possible not only with non-moving parts
but also with moving parts.

Under normal use, if an intrusion
occurs in the safety zone, the machine
will stop immediately. However, use of
a warning zone will only notify the operator that an intrusion has occurred.
This can be used to prevent carelessness resulting in machine stoppage
on the part of the operator.

Simple
Muting

Partial muting

Simple
Muting

Position detection muting

Blanking

Fixed blanking

Blanking

Floating blanking

www.sti.com/info

Warning
Zone

Dividing the zone between seriesconnected sensors

Warning
Zone

A single sensor zone can also be
divided

D-13

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Providing ease-of-use and ease-of-mounting through ingenuity
In pursuit of fast-easy mountable brackets
Omron has developed "quick mount" brackets which speed mounting to aluminum framing and
reduce mounting time in half, when compared with existing models.
This unique design allows for smooth horizontal movement, beam alignment is easy.

Configured to freely rotate the main body of the sensor

k!
ic

Set the main sensor body
into the quick mounting
bracket. Use the clamps to
tightly clamp the upper body
of the sensor while lightly
clasping the lower body.

Fix the circular fixtures to
the surface of the aluminum
frame and set the upper
bracket onto the upper
circular fixture.

Top and bottom blue LEDs
enabling beam alignment

Slide the lower bracket
up towards the lower
circular fixture and tightly
clamp the lower body of
the sensor. Once done,
mounting is concluded.
“TOP” LED lights up when the upper
end is correctly receiving light.

Simple positional alignment can be done using the
blue LEDs at the top (TOP) and bottom (BTM) of the
emitter and receiver. With the blue LEDs ON, you
can see at a glance that the beams' positions are
correctly aligned.

“BTM” LED lights up when the lower
end is correctly receiving light.

D-14

www.sti.com/info

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Easy-to-understand diagnostics
Light curtain status can be immediately determined as the LED will light to indicate the status or possible
error. As a result, there is no need to refer to a manual for the meaning of the diagnostics.
Communication error (EASY/BASIC type)
Emitter

Power indicator
turns ON

Input error (BASIC type)

Lockout indicator
blinks

Power indicator
turns ON

Emitter

Receiver

Stable-state
indicator blinks

Interlock indicator
blinks

Lockout indicator
blinks

Industry First! Error indication while muting is in progress.
The days of searching through user manuals to find the cause of certain muting
errors are long gone. Now these errors and their causes can be well understood.

Emitter

Muting error indicator
blinks two times

Emitter

Muting error indicator
blinks four times

When the workpiece speed is not appropriate

When the workpiece is stopped

When the input sensor is installed incorrectly

When the workpiece speed is too slow

www.sti.com/info

D-15

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Providing multiple functions to cope with various safety requirements
Series connection up to 10 meters. Very convenient.

Series connection cable up to
15 m long
25 mm

Sensors with protective heights of up to nearly 2.5 meters are available for applications that
involve large-sized workpieces. And if you need to make changes in the future, you can
always extend the protective height with series connections. Up to four sets, or 400 beams,
can be series-connected, and with series connection cables up to 15 meters in length,
applications can cover a wide area.
Approx. 2.5 m (100 beams)
For
F3SJ-A

20 mm gap between end beams
when connected side by side

Total length: Approx. 10 m (400 beams)

Tool for setting parameters and checking the system status

"SD Manager" PC Setting Support Software

(For F3SJ-A)

F3SJ-A
To a USB terminal

F39-JCA
Single-end
Connector Cable
or
F39-JCB
Double-end
Connector Cable

Branch Connector
Connection cable
All parameters can be set and the system status can be checked
with a personal computer. In addition to making it easy to monitor
the beam alignment, the ambient incident light intensity can be
displayed in bar graph form for an easy check of the system status.

F39-GWUM
"SD Manager"
PC Setting
Support Software

The "SD Manager" PC Setting Support Software helps reduce the time required for installing and troubleshooting the Safety Light Curtain.

D-16

Beam alignment is easier.

The ambient incident light
intensity can be checked.

The error log can be displayed.

The incident light level can be
displayed in a bar graph for each
beam.

The incident light level when the light
emission of the Safety Light Curtain is
stopped is displayed in a bar graph.

The cause of the errors and
countermeasures are
both displayed.

www.sti.com/info

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)

Achieving muting function
without a controller

Example of a muting key cap for F3SJ-A

The muting function temporarily disables the light curtain
when an object must pass through the detection zone,
such as when supplying a workpiece to your equipment.
In the past, this function required a dedicated muting
controller, but now it is built into the F3SJ. To use the
muting function, purchase the Muting Key Cap (for F3SJ-B:
F39-CN10 and for F3SJ-A: F39-CN6)(sold separately). The
muting function is enabled simply by replacing the Unit's
cap with this Key Cap. In addition, a muting sensor that
determines the muting timing, as well as a muting lamp
that alerts the muting status to other operators, should be
connected to the F3SJ.

No controller required. Simply attach the Key Cap
(sold separately) to the sensor.
Key caps for muting

Built-in muting function

F39-CN6
(for F3SJ-A)

F39-CN10
(for F3SJ-B)

The Safety Light Curtain can be
disabled when an AGV carrying a
workpiece passes through.

Equipped with two muting functions
With F3SJ-A, the muting function temporarily disables the Safety Light Curtain when an object must pass through the detection zone,
such as when supplying a workpiece to your equipment. "Partial muting," which further heightens the level of safety, and "position detection muting," which allows muting when the safety status can be determined by the position of a machine (such as a robot), have been
added to the muting function.

Partial muting

Position detection muting

Partial muting raises safety by muting only the beams of the
Safety Light Curtain in the area where the workpiece passes
through, while preventing muting in all other areas.

This is used in applications where the workpiece is set in position
each time by an operator, and then a turntable or positioning
robot moves the workpiece to the area where the work is done.
A limit switch or other means is used to detect when the robot is
in a safe position, and muting is then applied.

The Safety Light Curtain beams
in all areas other than where
the workpiece passes through
are constantly ON.

Only the beams of the Safety Light Curtain
that would be interrupted by the workpiece are muted.

www.sti.com/info

D-17

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)
Function List
Functions that can be used on F3SJ are shown as follows: For details, refer to the User’s Manual.

D
3: Can be used.
X: Cannot be used.

Basic functions
F3SJ-E

F3SJ-B

F3SJ-A

Self-test function

Function

External test function

External device monitoring function

Interlock function

Auxiliary output function

Muting function

Override function

Partial muting function

Position detection muting function

Fixed blanking function

Floating blanking function

Warning zone function

Use of setting tools

Series connection function

*Cannot be used during muting.

Functions for individual applications

Wiring/mounting related function
Less dead space (single connection)

Less dead space (series connection)

Response time integration (15 ms) *

Simple wiring

Connector cable

Quick mounting

TOP/BOTTOM indicator for beam adjustment

Laser Pointer

External indicator output

Muting error display

*Convenient for calculating safety distance.

Indicator related functions

D-18

www.sti.com/info

F3SJ

Safety Light Curtains

Overview (continued)
Function List (continued)
Self-test Function
A self-test is performed to check for errors when the power is
turned ON. Also, the self-test is regularly performed (within the
response time) while operating.
External Test Function
This function stops the transmitter emissions using an external
signal. It can be used to verify that a safety system should
properly stop when F3SJ is interrupted.
External Device Monitoring Function
This function detects malfunctions, such as welding, in external relays (or contactors) that control the hazardous part of a
machine.
This function constantly monitors that a specified voltage is
applied to the receiver’s external device monitoring input line, and
the system enters lockout state when an error occurs. The relay’s
operational delay can be up to 300 ms without being evaluated as
an error.
For example, if the normally closed N.C. contact does not close
within 0.3 s after the safety outputs turn from ON to OFF, and a
specified voltage is not applied to the external device monitoring
line, it is evaluated as an error and the system enters a lockout
state. To utilize this function properly, use safety relays and
contactors that have force guided or mechanically linked contact
structure.
Interlock Function
The F3SJ turns the safety outputs OFF when its power is turned
on or its beam is interrupted and holds this state until reset input
is applied. This state is called “interlock”.
Two methods can be used to reset the interlock state: “auto reset
that automatically turns control outputs ON when the interrupting
object is removed” and “manual reset mode that keeps control
outputs OFF until a reset signal is provided, if the interrupting
object is removed”.
Auto Reset

When the interrupting object is removed from the detection
zone, the safety outputs automatically turn ON. Auto reset is
used on machines where a worker is not able to enter the area
between the detection zone and the hazardous part of the
machine.
Manual Reset

When a reset input is given while no objects are in a detection
zone, the safety outputs turn ON. This allows the machine to
be manually reset using a reset switch after ensuring safety,
preventing unexpected startup.

Override Function
The override function turns the safety outputs ON when the
muting start condition is not satisfied. If a workpiece stops while
passing through the F3SJ causing a muting error, the normal state
cannot be recovered unless the workpiece is removed from the
muting sensors and the detection field of the F3SJ. However, the
override function will mute the safety outputs of the F3SJ so that
the conveyor can be restarted to move the workpiece out of the
muting sensors and detection zone.
Partial Muting Function
Partial muting function secures safety without enabling muting
except for beams when a workpiece passes.

Position Detection Muting
A limit switch or other means is used to detect when the robot is in
a safe position, and muting is then applied.
Fixed Blanking Function
Fixed blanking function disables a specific beam of the F3SJ. This
function keeps safety output ON even when part of machinery
equipment exists within a detection zone.
Floating Blanking Function
Floating blanking function increases the diameter of the F3SJ’s
detection capability and turns OFF the safety output when multiple
objects are detected. When there is a moving object with a fixed
width in the detection area that we do not want to detect, the
detection function can be disabled.
Warning Zone Function
When an individual enters, a warning lamp lights or buzzer
sounds without stopping the equipment by dividing the detection
zone into the detection zone and a warning zone.
Setting Tool
The following setting tools (sold separately) can be purchased in
order to change or confirm various F3SJ-A parameters.
• F39-MC21 Setting Console
• F39-GWUM SD Manager Setting Support Software for the F3SJ
Series Connection Function
Up to 3 sets of the F3SJ-Bs or up to 4 sets of F3SJ-As can be
series-connected. Series connection allows them to be used as a
safety light curtain, requiring only one set to be wired to a controller and preventing mutual interference.

Auxiliary Output Function
The auxiliary output is used to monitor the status of the F3SJ. This
output can be connected to a device such as a programmable
controller.
Muting Function
Muting function temporarily disables safety function of the F3SJ,
keeping safety output ON even if beams are interrupted.
This makes it possible to install safety light curtains for material
transfer carriers, enabling both safety and productivity.

www.sti.com/info

D-19

Safety Light Curtains

F3SJ-E

F3SJE

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Light Curtains

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Fast and easy installation
Resolution: 25 mm (1.01 in.)
Range: 7 m (23 ft.)
Protected heights: 185 to 1105 mm (7.28 to 43.50 in.)
Very compact size: 30 x 30 mm (1.18 x 1.18 in.)
Cross-talk prevention
3 m integrated cables
A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Description
The EASY type safety light curtain is well suited for straightforward on/off detection applications.
By carefully selecting the available functions, we have reduced
man hours necessary for installation by approximately 1/2 when
compared with existing STI models.
Reduced installation time means added savings to your
project’s budget, start with the EASY type.

Machine safety
first, narrowed
down to the
simplest
functions:

Global Support
Omron will support you through the our global network.

I only need
simple
functions
Global
Support

Upon detection
of personnel, the
machine stops.
Simple yet very
optimal.

Easy-to-view Diagnostics

1/2 the mounting time. Fixed response time
makes calculation of the safety distance easier.

These indicators enable you to intuitively know the status
and cause of any error. This allows faster installation while
reducing machine down time.

Reduced wiring, quick mount brackets and easy-to-view
alignment beams all add up to cost savings. Additionally, with
one fixed response time, it is now easier to calculate the safety
distance.

Easy-to-View
Diagnostics
mounting time

Mounting Time

Existing
models

E type

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-20

www.sti.com/info

F3SJ-E

Safety Light Curtains

Specifications
Main Units
F3SJ-E££££P25
Sensor type

Type 4 safety light curtain

Setting tool connection *1

Parameter settings: Not available

Safety category

Safety purpose of category 4, 3, 2, 1, or B

Detection capability

Opaque objects 25 mm in diameter

Beam gap (P)

20 mm

Number of beams (n)

8 to 54

Protective height (PH)

185 to 1,105 mm

Lens diameter

Diameter 5 mm

Operating range *2

0.2 to 7 m

Response time
(under stable light
incident condition)

ON to OFF

15 ms max.

OFF to ON

70 ms max.

Startup waiting time

2 s max.

Power supply voltage (Vs)
Consumption current
(no load)

Emitter
Receiver

SELV/PELV 24 VDC±20% (ripple p-p 10% max.)
Up to 22 beams: 41 mA max., 26 to 42 beams: 57 mA max., 46 to 54 beams: 63 mA max.
Up to 22 beams: 42 mA max., 26 to 42 beams: 47 mA max., 46 to 54 beams: 51 mA max.

Light source (emitted wavelength)

Infrared LED (870 nm)

Effective aperture angle (EAA)

Based on IEC 61496-2. Within ±2.5° for both emitter and receiver when the detection distance is 3 m or over

Safety outputs (OSSD)

Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 200 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due
to cable extension), Leakage current 1 mA max., load inductance 2.2 H max. *3
Maximum capacity load 1 µF *4

Output operation mode

Safety output: On when receiving light

Input voltage

ON voltage: Vs-3 V to Vs *5
OFF voltage: 0 V to 1/2 Vs or open

Mutual interference prevention function

Mutual interference prevention algorithm prevents interference in up to 3 sets.

Test function

Self test (at power-ON and at power distribution)
External test (emission stop function by test input)

Protection circuit

Output short-circuit protection, and power supply reverse polarity protection

Ambient temperature

Operating: -10 to 55°C (non-freezing), Storage: -25 to 70°C

Ambient humidity

Operating: 35% to 85% (no condensation), Storage: 35% to 95% RH

Operating ambient light intensity

Incandescent lamp: 3,000 lx max., Sunlight: 10,000 lx max.

Insulation resistance

20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)

Dielectric strength

1,000 VAC 50/60 Hz, 1 min

Degree of protection

IP65 (IEC 60529)

Vibration resistance

Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, Multiple amplitude of 0.7 mm, 20 sweeps in X, Y, and Z directions

Shock resistance

Malfunction: 100 m/s2, 1,000 times each in X, Y, and Z directions

Pollution degree

Pollution degree 3 (IEC 60664-1)

Power cable

Connection method: Pull-out type, cable length 3 m
Number of wires: Emitter: 5 wires, receiver: 6 wires
Cable diameter: Dia. 6 mm
Allowable bending radius: R5 mm

Extension cable

30 m max. *6

Material

Case: Aluminum
Cap: ABS resin, PBT
Optical cover: PMMA resin (acrylic)
Cable: Oil resistant PVC

Weight (packed state)

Weight (g) = (protective height) x 2.6 + 800

Accessories

Test rod, User’s Manual (CD-ROM) *7

Applicable standards

IEC 61496-1, EN 61496-1 UL 61496-1, Type 4 ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)
IEC 61496-2, CLC/TS 61496-2, UL 61496-2, Type 4 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices)
IEC 61508-1 to -3, EN 61508-1 to -3 SIL3
IEC 13849-1: 2006, EN ISO 13849-1: 2008 (PLe, Cat.4)
UL 508, UL 1998, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.0.8

*1. Do not use the Support Software and Setting Console for F3SJ-A.
Operation cannot be guaranteed.
*2. Use of the Spatter Protection Cover causes a 10% maximum sensing
distance attenuation.
*3. The load inductance is the maximum value when the safety output
frequently repeats ON and OFF. When you use the safety output at 4 Hz
or less, the usable load inductance becomes larger.

*4. These values must be taken into consideration when connecting
elements including a capacitive load such as capacitor.
*5. The Vs indicates a voltage value in your environment.
*6. To extend a cable of the F3SJ-E, refer to “Chapter 3 Wiring (Extension
Cable)” in the User’s Manual.
*7. Mounting brackets are sold separately.

www.sti.com/info

D-21

F3SJ-E

Wiring
Basic Wiring Diagram

Emitter

Receiver

Wiring when using a test input line

+24 V

KM1
KM2

KM1

0 V (Blue)

Safety output 2 (White)

Safety output 1 (Black)

+24 V (Brown)

Test input (Black)

0 V (Blue)

+24 V (Brown)

(Gray) Communication line (+)
(Pink)
Communication line (−)

KM1

KM2

+24 VDC
0V

Power
supply

S1
: External test/lockout reset switch (connect to 0 V if a switch is not required)
KM1, KM2 : Safety relay with force-guided contact (G7SA) or magnetic contactor

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-22

www.sti.com/info

KM2

Safety Light Curtains

F3SJ-E

Safety Light Curtains

Dimensions

(mm)

F3SJ-E/F3SJ-B Dimensions
The dimensions of the F3SJ-E and F3SJ-B are the same except for connector cables and cable leads.

Main Units
Mounting Top/Bottom and Intermediate Brackets
Backside mounting

Mounting screw holes
6.5

19
2-M8

4-M5

C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
A = C + 69, B = C + 42.2
D = C - 45, E = See table below, P = 20
Protective
height

Number of
intermediate
brackets

185 to 1,105

—

1,185 to 1,345

C/2 max.

1,425 to 2,065

C/3 max.

18.3

dia.9

5.9

30
19

7.5

Top/Bottom Bracket
(F39-LJB1)
43

2-M5
E

2-M5

13.4

5.9

34.5
22.5

Top/Bottom
Bracket
(F39-LJB1)

C (Protective height)
D
53
42
5.5
P (beam gap)

30
22
7

Intermediate
Bracket
(F39-LJB2)

Side mounting

Mounting screw holes
19

46
30

2-M8

4-M5

5.9

6.5

7.5

30
19

C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
A = C + 69, B = C + 42.2
D = C - 45, E = See table below, P = 20
Protective
height

34.5

18.3

Top/Bottom dia.9
Bracket
(F39-LJB1)

185 to 1,105

—

C/2 max.

1,425 to 2,065

C/3 max.

C
42

C (Protective height)

2-M5
E

2-M5

53
42
5.5

B
A

1,185 to 1,345

30
Intermediate
Bracket
(F39-LJB2)

Number of
intermediate
brackets

42
Top/Bottom
Bracket
(F39-LJB1)

13.4

5.9

22.5

Dimensions of top/bottom bracket
for F39-LJB1

dia.9

6.5

4.3

7.5

18.3

34.5

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.
16
30

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

Material : Stainless

D-23

F3SJ-E

Safety Light Curtains

Dimensions (continued)

(mm)

Main Units
When Using Quick Mount Brackets
Backside mounting

Mounting screw holes
43
30

C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
F = See the table below.

32.1
F

Number of
intermediate
brackets

185 to 1,105

555 mm max.

1,185 to 1,585

555 mm max.

1,665 to 2,065

555 mm max.

32.1

Side mounting

Protective
height

32.1
32.1

275 max

2-M8

Quick Mount Bracket
(F39-LJB3-M6 or
F39-LJB3-M8)

F
C (Protective height)

2-M6

275 max

Quick Mount Bracket
(F39-LJB3-M6 or
F39-LJB3-M8)

Mounting screw holes
45
33

2-M6

C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
F = See the table below.

Number of
intermediate
brackets

185 to 1,105

555 mm max.

1,185 to 1,585

555 mm max.

1,665 to 2,065

555 mm max.

32.1

F
C (Protective height)

Protective
height

275 max

Quick Mount Bracket
(F39-LJB3-M6 or
F39-LJB3-M8)

2-M8

32.1

275 max

32.1

Quick Mount Bracket
(F39-LJB3-M6 or
F39-LJB3-M8)

Dimensions of quick mount bracket for F39-LJB3
Backside mounting

Side mounting

80
(32.1)

(32.1)

dia.22

(32.1)

dia.22

(32.1)

dia.22

dia.8.2

D-24

1.5
8

dia.6.2

dia.17
Material : Stainless

1.5
8

Material : Stainless

www.sti.com/info

(16)

Quick mount M8 bracket

Material : Zinc die-cast

Quick mount M6 bracket

dia.13

(46)

8
30
53

(13)

(35.7)

(31.5)

Material : Zinc die-cast

F3SJ-E

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering
Main Units
Safety Light Curtains
Model

Application

Detection capability

Beam gap

Operating range

Protective height
(mm)

PNP output

Hand protection

Dia. 25 mm

20 mm

0.2 to 7 m

185 to 1,105

F3SJ-E££££P25

Safety Light Curtain Model List
Please contact our sales representatives.
F3SJ-E Series (20 mm pitch)
Model

Number of beams

Protective height
[mm] *

Model

Number of beams

Protective height
[mm] *

F3SJ-E0185P25

185

F3SJ-E0705P25

705

F3SJ-E0225P25

225

F3SJ-E0785P25

785

F3SJ-E0305P25

305

F3SJ-E0865P25

865

F3SJ-E0385P25

385

F3SJ-E0945P25

945

F3SJ-E0465P25

465

F3SJ-E1025P25

1,025

F3SJ-E1105P25

1,105

F3SJ-E0545P25

545

F3SJ-E0625P25

625

*Protective height (mm) = Total sensor length

Accessories (sold separately)
Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts
Type

Appearance

G7SA Relays with
Forcibly Guided Contacts

G7S-£-E Relays with
Forcibly Guided Contacts

Specifications

Model

• Nodes: 4
• Contact type: 2A2B
• Rated switch load:
250 VAC 6A, 30 VDC 6A

G7SA-2A2B

• Nodes: 4
• Contact type: 3NO+1NC
• Rated switch load:
250 VAC 6A, 30 VDC 6A

G7SA-3A1B

• Nodes: 6
• Contact type: 4NO+2NC
• Rated switch load:
250 VAC 10 A, 30 VDC 10 A

G7S-4A2B-E

• Nodes: 6
• Contact type: 3NO+3NC
• Rated switch load:
250 VAC 10 A, 30 VDC 10 A

G7S-3A3B-E

Remarks

✎

For information on the
G7SA see page I-3
or visit www.sti.com.

✎

For information on the
G7S-£-E see page
I-9 or visit www.sti.
com.

Laser Pointer
Appearance

Output

Model

Laser Pointer for F3SJ

F39-PTJ

(Continued on next page)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-25

F3SJ-E

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Accessories (sold separately) (continued)
Sensor Mounting Bracket (sold separately)
Appearance

Specifications

Model

Application

Remarks

Top/bottom bracket for F3SJ-E/B

2 for the emitter,
2 for the receiver,
total of 4 per set

F39-LJB2 *1 *2

In combination use with top/bottom
bracket for F3SJ-E/B
Can be used as free-location
bracket.

1 set with 2 pieces

F39-LJB3-M6 *1

Quick mount bracket for F3SJ-E/B
Supports M6 slide nut for aluminum
frame.

Top/bottom bracket

F39-LJB1

Intermediate bracket

Quick mount bracket

1 set with 2 pieces

F39-LJB3-M8 *2

M6 slide nut

Quick mount bracket for F3SJ-E/B
Supports M8 slide nut for aluminum
frame.

F39-LJB3-M6K *1
Spare slide nut for use with Quick
mount bracket.

M8 slide nut

F39-LJB3-M8K *2

Compatible mounting bracket

F39-LJB4

Mounting bracket used when
replacing existing area sensors
(F3SJ-A or F3SN) with the
F3SJ-E/B.

Note: All the sensor mounting brackets for the F3SJ-E are sold separately.
*1. Combining F39-LJB2 and F39-LJB3-M6K makes F39-LJB3-M6.
*2. Combining F39-LJB2 and F39-LJB3-M8K makes F39-LJB3-M8.

information on Resource
✎ For
Modules, see page D-63.

information on safety light
✎ For
curtain accessories, see page D-68.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-26

www.sti.com/info

Hexagon socket head
cap screws (M6 x 10)
are included.
Hexagon socket head
cap screws (M8 x 14)
are included.

2 for the emitter,
2 for the receiver,
total of 4 per set

Safety Light Curtains

F3SJ-B

F3SJB

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Light Curtains
• Fast and easy installation
• Resolution: 25 mm (1.01 in.)
• Range: 7 m (23 ft.)
• Protected heights: 185 to 2065 mm (7.28 to 81.26 in.)
• Very compact size: 30 x 30 mm (1.18 x 1.18 in.)
• Cascaded designs possible – 3 segments
• Simple muting
• Cross-talk prevention
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Description
In addition to the simple functions inherited from the EASY type, such as global support, easy-to-view indicators, the BASIC type
includes series connection and simple muting functions . This enables the BASIC type to satisfy installations that require multiple safety
light curtains.

Up to three sets connected in a series

Functions inherited from the EASY type

It is possible to connect up to three sets of
safety light curtains in series. These sensors can
be placed in a U-shaped
or L-shaped pattern with
a single power line, thus
requiring less wiring.

Simple functions such as universal power voltage specification, easy-to-view diagnostics, a fixed response time have been
inherited from the EASY type, As a result, expect reduced
work-hours at each stage of use, from design and installation to
operation.

Global
Support

Series
Connection

Easy-to-View
Diagnostics

Instant visibility of process trouble during muting
The BASIC type includes a muting function which temporarily disables the safety light curtain when a workpiece passes
through. In the event of
any trouble occurring, the error can be
instantly recognized
from the pattern of the
LED indicators, allowing for a fast solution.

Simple
Muting

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-27

F3SJ-B

Safety Light Curtains

Specifications
Main Units
F3SJ-B££££P25

Sensor type

Type 4 safety light curtain

Setting tool connection *1

Parameter settings: Not available

Safety category

Safety purpose of category 4, 3, 2, 1, or B

Detection capability

Opaque objects 25 mm in diameter

Beam gap (P)

20 mm

Number of beams (n)

8 to 102

Protective height (PH)

185 to 2,065 mm

Lens diameter

Diameter 5 mm

Operating range *2
Response time
(under stable light
incident condition)

0.2 to 7 m
ON to OFF

15 ms max. (response time at 1 set connection, series connection of 2 sets or 3 sets)

OFF to ON

70 ms max. (response time at 1 set connection, series connection of 2 sets or 3 sets)

Startup waiting time

2 s max.

Power supply voltage (Vs)
Consumption current
(no load)

SELV/PELV 24 VDC±20% (ripple p-p 10% max.)

Emitter

Up to 22 beams: 52 mA max., 26 to 42 beams: 68 mA max., 46 to 62 beams: 75 mA max.,
66 to 82 beams: 88 mA max., 86 to 102 beams: 101 mA max.

Receiver

Up to 22 beams: 45 mA max., 26 to 42 beams: 50 mA max., 46 to 62 beams: 46 mA max.,
66 to 82 beams: 61 mA max., 86 to 102 beams: 67 mA max.

Light source (emitted wavelength)

Infrared LED (870 nm)

Effective aperture angle (EAA)

Based on IEC 61496-2. Within ±2.5° for both emitter and receiver when the detection distance is 3 m or over

Safety outputs (OSSD)

Auxiliary output 1

Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 100 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due
to cable extension), leak current 1 mA max.

Output operation mode

Safety output: On when receiving light
Auxiliary output:
– Reverse output of safety output for a basic system
– ON when muting/override for a muting system

Input voltage

ON voltage: Vs-3 V to Vs *5
OFF voltage: 0 V to 1/2 Vs or open

Mutual interference prevention function

Mutual interference prevention algorithm prevents interference in up to 3 sets.

Series connection

Time division emission by series connection
• Number of connections: up to 3 sets (between F3SJ-Bs only) Other models cannot be connected.
• Total number of beams: up to 192 beams
• Maximum cable length for 2 sets: no longer than 7 m

Test function

• Self test (at power-ON and at power distribution)
• External test (emission stop function by test input)

Safety-related functions

• Interlock (basic system)
• External device monitoring (basic system)
• Muting (muting system)
• Override (muting system)

Connection type

Connector method (M12, 8-pin)

Protection circuit

Output short-circuit protection, and power supply reverse polarity protection

Ambient temperature

Operating: -10 to 55°C (non-freezing), Storage: -25 to 70°C

Ambient humidity

Operating: 35% to 85% (no condensation), Storage: 35% to 95% RH

Operating ambient light intensity

Incandescent lamp: 3,000 lx max., Sunlight: 10,000 lx max.

Insulation resistance

20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)

Dielectric strength

1,000 VAC 50/60 Hz, 1 min

Degree of protection

IP65 (IEC 60529)

Vibration resistance

Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, Multiple amplitude of 0.7 mm, 20 sweeps in X, Y, and Z directions

Shock resistance

Malfunction: 100 m/s2, 1,000 times each in X, Y, and Z directions

Pollution degree

Pollution degree 3 (IEC 60664-1)
(Continued on next page)

D-28

www.sti.com/info

F3SJ-B

Safety Light Curtains

Specifications (continued)
Main Units

Accessories

F3SJ-B££££P25 (continued)

Control Unit

Connection method: Prewired connector cable,
cable length 0.3 m, connector type (M12, 8-pin),
connector: IP67 rated (when mated)
Number of wires: Emitter: 8 wires
Cable diameter: Dia. 6 mm
Allowable bending radius: R5 mm

Power cable

Extension cable

30 m max.

Material

Case: Aluminum
Cap: ABS resin, PBT
Optical cover: PMMA resin (acrylic)
Cable: Oil resistant PVC

Weight (packed state)

Weight (g) = (protective height) x 2.7 + 500

Accessories

Test rod, User’s Manual (CD-ROM) *7

Applicable standards

IEC 61496-1, EN 61496-1 UL 61496-1, Type 4
ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)
IEC 61496-2, CLC/TS 61496-2, UL 61496-2,
Type 4 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective
Devices)
IEC 61508-1 to -3, EN 61508-1 to -3 SIL3
IEC 13849-1: 2006, EN ISO 13849-1: 2008 (PLe,
Cat.4)
UL 508, UL 1998, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14, CAN/
CSA C22.2 No.0.8

F3SP-B1P
Applicable sensor

F3SJ-B/A (Only for PNP output type)*

Power supply voltage

24 VDC ±10%

Power supply consumption

DC1.7 W max. (not including sensor’s
current consumption)

Operation time

100 ms max. (not including sensor’s
response time)

Response time

100 ms max. (not including sensor’s
response time)

Relay
output

Number of
contacts

3NO + 1NC

Rated load

250 VAC 5 A (cos = 1), 30 VDC 5 A L/R
= 0 ms

Rated current
Connection Between sensors
type
Others

5A
M12 connector (8-pin)
Terminal block

Weight (packed state)

Approx. 280 g

Accessories

Instruction manual

*NPN output type cannot be connected. Also, the system cannot be used
as a muting system.

Applications
Selecting the Best Configuration
Space Efficient and Low Cost
The built-in external device monitoring function
eliminates the need for a safety relay unit.

No Safety Relay Unit

F39-JD®A
G7SA

Contactor

Motor

Reduced Wiring and Easy Maintenance
Cables with connectors on both ends simplify
connections and prevent wiring errors.

Connector Type

F39-JD®B
F3SP-B1P
Dedicated controller

Contactor

Motor

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-29

F3SJ-B

Safety Light Curtains

Wiring
Basic Wiring Diagram

Emitter

Receiver

Wiring when using manual reset mode, external device monitoring

F39-JD@A-L

Shield

0 V (Blue)

Safety output 2 (White)

KM1

Safety output 1 (Black)

Auxiliary output (Yellow)

External device
monitoring input (Red)

+24 V (Brown)

Reset input (Yellow)

Test input (Black)

Interlock select input (White)

0 V (Blue)

Not Used (Red)

(Gray) Communication line (+)
(Pink)
Communication line (−)
Shield

F39-JD@A-D

KM2

KM1

KM2
+24 VDC
Power
supply
0V

S1
S2
KM1, KM2
K1

: External test switch (connect to 0 V if a switch is not required)
: Interlock/lockout reset switch
: Safety relay with force-guided contact (G7SA) or magnetic contactor
: Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)

Emitter

Receiver

Wiring for auto reset mode and deactivated external device monitoring

F39-JD@A-L

F39-JD@A-D

KM1

Shield

0 V (Blue)

Safety output 2 (White)

Safety output 1 (Black)

Auxiliary
output (Yellow)

External device
monitoring input (Red)

+24 V (Brown)

Reset input (Yellow)

Test input (Black)

Interlock select input (White)

Not Used (Red)

0 V (Blue)

Shield

(Gray) Communication line (+)
(Pink)
Communication line (−)

KM2
+24 VDC
Power
supply
0V

S1
S2
KM1, KM2
K1

D-30

: External test switch (connect to 0 V if a switch is not required)
: Lockout reset switch
: Safety relay with force-guided contact (G7SA) or magnetic contactor
: Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)

www.sti.com/info

F3SJ-B

Safety Light Curtains

Dimensions

(mm)

F3SJ-B/F3SJ-E Dimensions
The dimensions of the F3SJ-B and F3SJ-E are the same except for connector cables and cable leads.

Main Units
Mounting Top/Bottom and Intermediate Brackets
Backside mounting

Mounting screw holes
6.5

19
2-M8

4-M5

C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
A = C + 69, B = C + 42.2
D = C - 45, E = See table below, P = 20
Protective
height

Number of
intermediate
brackets

185 to 1,105

—

1,185 to 1,345

C/2 max.

1,425 to 2,065

C/3 max.

18.3

dia.9

5.9

30
19

7.5

Top/Bottom Bracket
(F39-LJB1)
43

2-M5
E

2-M5

13.4

5.9

34.5
22.5

Top/Bottom
Bracket
(F39-LJB1)

C (Protective height)
D
53
42
5.5
P (beam gap)

30
22
7

Intermediate
Bracket
(F39-LJB2)

Side mounting

Mounting screw holes
19

46
30

2-M8

4-M5

5.9

6.5

7.5

30
19

C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
A = C + 69, B = C + 42.2
D = C - 45, E = See table below, P = 20
Protective
height

34.5

18.3

Top/Bottom dia.9
Bracket
(F39-LJB1)

185 to 1,105

—

C/2 max.

1,425 to 2,065

C/3 max.

C
42

C (Protective height)

2-M5
E

2-M5

53
42
5.5

B
A

1,185 to 1,345

30
Intermediate
Bracket
(F39-LJB2)

Number of
intermediate
brackets

42
Top/Bottom
Bracket
(F39-LJB1)

13.4

5.9

22.5

Dimensions of top/bottom bracket
for F39-LJB1

dia.9

6.5

4.3

7.5

18.3

34.5

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.
16
30

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

Material : Stainless

D-31

F3SJ-B

Safety Light Curtains

Dimensions (continued)

(mm)

Main Units
When Using Quick Mount Brackets
Backside mounting

Mounting screw holes
43
30

C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
F = See the table below.

32.1
F

Number of
intermediate
brackets

185 to 1,105

555 mm max.

1,185 to 1,585

555 mm max.

1,665 to 2,065

555 mm max.

32.1

Side mounting

Protective
height

32.1
32.1

275 max

2-M8

Quick Mount Bracket
(F39-LJB3-M6 or
F39-LJB3-M8)

F
C (Protective height)

2-M6

275 max

Quick Mount Bracket
(F39-LJB3-M6 or
F39-LJB3-M8)

Mounting screw holes
45
33

2-M6

C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
F = See the table below.

Number of
intermediate
brackets

185 to 1,105

555 mm max.

1,185 to 1,585

555 mm max.

1,665 to 2,065

555 mm max.

32.1

F
C (Protective height)

Protective
height

275 max

Quick Mount Bracket
(F39-LJB3-M6 or
F39-LJB3-M8)

2-M8

32.1

275 max

32.1

Quick Mount Bracket
(F39-LJB3-M6 or
F39-LJB3-M8)

Dimensions of quick mount bracket for F39-LJB3
Backside mounting

Side mounting

80
(32.1)

(32.1)

dia.22

(32.1)

dia.22

(32.1)

dia.22

dia.8.2

D-32

1.5
8

dia.6.2

dia.17
Material : Stainless

1.5
8

Material : Stainless

www.sti.com/info

(16)

Quick mount M8 bracket

Material : Zinc die-cast

Quick mount M6 bracket

dia.13

(46)

8
30
53

(13)

(35.7)

(31.5)

Material : Zinc die-cast

F3SJ-B

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering
Main Units
Safety Light Curtains
Model

Application

Detection capability

Beam gap

Operating range

Protective height
(mm)

PNP output

Hand protection

Dia. 25 mm

20 mm

0.2 to 7 m

185 to 2,065

F3SJ-B££££P25

Safety Light Curtain Model List
Please contact our sales representatives.

F3SJ-B Series (20 mm pitch)

Number of beams

Protective height
[mm] *

Number of beams

Protective height
[mm] *

F3SJ-B0185P25

185

F3SJ-B0225P25

225

F3SJ-B1185P25

1,185

F3SJ-B1265P25

F3SJ-B0305P25

1,265

305

F3SJ-B1345P25

F3SJ-B0385P25

1,345

385

F3SJ-B1425P25

1,425

F3SJ-B0465P25

465

F3SJ-B1505P25

1,505

F3SJ-B0545P25

545

F3SJ-B1585P25

1,585

F3SJ-B0625P25

625

F3SJ-B1665P25

1,665

F3SJ-B0705P25

705

F3SJ-B1745P25

1,745

F3SJ-B0785P25

785

F3SJ-B1825P25

1,825

F3SJ-B0865P25

865

F3SJ-B1905P25

1,905

F3SJ-B0945P25

945

F3SJ-B1985P25

1,985

F3SJ-B1025P25

1,025

F3SJ-B2065P25

102

2,065

F3SJ-B1105P25

1,105

Model

*Protective height (mm) = Total sensor length

Accessories (sold separately)
Single-end Connector Cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
For wiring with safety circuit such as single safety relay, safety relay unit, and safety controller.
Appearance

Cable length

Specifications

Model
F39-JD3A

F39-JD7A

10 m

M12 connector (8-pin)

F39-JD10A

15 m

F39-JD15A

20 m

F39-JD20A

Double-end Connector Cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
Control unit for connection with F3SP-B1P, to extend the length under series connection.*
Appearance

Cable length

Specifications

Model

0.5 m

F39-JDR5B

F39-JD1B

F39-JD3B

M12 connector (8-pin)

F39-JD5B
F39-JD7B

10 m

F39-JD10B

15 m

F39-JD15B

20 m

F39-JD20B

*To extend the cable length under series connection, use F39-JBR2W and F39-JD£B in combination. Also, the cable length 10 to 20 m cannot be used.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-33

F3SJ-B

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Accessories (sold separately) (continued)
Series-connection Cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
Type

Appearance

Cable length

Model

Application

0.2 m

F39-JBR2W *1

For series connection *2

0.5 to 7 m

F39-JD£B

To change series connection length in
combination with F39-JBR2W

Series connection
cable for extension

D
Extension cable

*1. This product is for F3SJ-B only.
*2. Total cable length of series connection is 0.5 m to connect to connector cable of the main sensor unit.

Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts
Type

Appearance

G7SA Relays with
Forcibly Guided Contacts

G7S-£-E Relays with
Forcibly Guided Contacts

Specifications

Model

• Nodes: 4
• Contact type: 2A2B
• Rated switch load:
250 VAC 6A, 30 VDC 6A

G7SA-2A2B

• Nodes: 4
• Contact type: 3NO+1NC
• Rated switch load:
250 VAC 6A, 30 VDC 6A

G7SA-3A1B

• Nodes: 6
• Contact type: 4NO+2NC
• Rated switch load:
250 VAC 10 A, 30 VDC 10 A

G7S-4A2B-E

• Nodes: 6
• Contact type: 3NO+3NC
• Rated switch load:
250 VAC 10 A, 30 VDC 10 A

G7S-3A3B-E

Laser Pointer
Appearance

Description

Model

Laser Pointer for F3SJ

F39-PTJ

Description

Model

Muting key cap for F3SJ-B

F39-CN10

Key Cap for Muting
Appearance

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-34

www.sti.com/info

Remarks

✎

For information on the
G7SA see page I-3
or visit www.sti.com.

✎

For information on the
G7S-£-E see page
I-9 or visit www.sti.
com.

F3SJ-B

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Accessories (sold separately) (continued)
Sensor Mounting Bracket (sold separately)
Appearance

Specifications

Model

Top/bottom bracket

F39-LJB1

Application

Remarks

Top/bottom bracket for F3SJ-E/B

2 for the emitter,
2 for the receiver,
total of 4 per set

Intermediate bracket

F39-LJB2 *1 *2

In combination use with top/bottom
bracket for F3SJ-E/B
Can be used as free-location
bracket.

F39-LJB3-M6 *1

Quick mount bracket for F3SJ-E/B
Supports M6 slide nut for aluminum
frame.

Quick mount bracket

1 set with 2 pieces

F39-LJB3-M8 *2

M6 slide nut

Quick mount bracket for F3SJ-E/B
Supports M8 slide nut for aluminum
frame.

F39-LJB3-M6K *1
Spare slide nut for use with Quick
mount bracket.

M8 slide nut

F39-LJB3-M8K *2

Compatible mounting bracket

F39-LJB4

Mounting bracket used when
replacing existing area sensors
(F3SJ-A or F3SN) with the
F3SJ-E/B.

Hexagon socket head
cap screws (M6 x 10)
are included.
Hexagon socket head
cap screws (M8 x 14)
are included.

2 for the emitter,
2 for the receiver,
total of 4 per set

Note: All the sensor mounting brackets for the F3SJ-E are sold separately.
*1. Combining F39-LJB2 and F39-LJB3-M6K makes F39-LJB3-M6.
*2. Combining F39-LJB2 and F39-LJB3-M8K makes F39-LJB3-M8.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-35

F3SJ-B

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Accessories (sold separately) (continued)
Spatter Protection Cover (2 cables per set, common for emitter/receiver)
Appearance

Model

F39-HB££££*1 *2

*1. The same 4-digit numbers as the protective heights (££££ in the light curtain model names) are substituted in the model names.
*2. It cannot be mounted to the models with the suffix “-02TS”.

Protective Bar
Appearance

Model

Remarks

F39-PB££££*1

• 2 light curtain brackets
• 4 mounting brackets
• 0 to 4 intermediate brackets for backside mounting
(quantity required for the sensing width)
• 0 to 4 intermediate brackets for mounting to the sides
(quantity required for the sensing width)

F39-PB££££-S *1 *2

• 1 light curtain bracket
• 2 mounting brackets
• 0 to 2 intermediate brackets for backside mounting
(quantity required for the sensing width)
• 0 to 2 intermediate brackets for mounting to the sides
(quantity required for the sensing width)

Note: The following are not provided with the protective bars: Safety Light Curtain, Safety Light Curtain Top/Bottom Brackets, Wall Mounting Screw Unit
*1. The same 4-digit numbers indicating the protective height that is used in the Sensor model number (££££) are used in the part of the Protector model
number.
*2. Purchase the F39-PB££££ (which contains two sets of brackets) to use Protective Bars for both the Emitter and Receiver.

information on Resource
✎ For
Modules, see page D-63.

D-36

information on safety light
✎ For
curtain accessories, see page D-68.

www.sti.com/info

Safety Light Curtains

F3SJ-A

F3SJA

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Light Curtains
• Resolution: 14 mm (0.55 in.), 20 mm (0.79 in.), 25 mm (1.01 in.)
30 mm (1.18 in.), or 55 mm (2.17 in.)
• Range: 7 m (23 ft.) or 9 m (29.5 ft.) dependent on minimum
object resolution and protected height
• Protected heights: 14 mm protected heights from 245 to 1631
mm (9.6 to 64 in.), 20 mm, 25 mm and 30 mm protected
heights from 245 to 2495 mm (9.6 to 98 in.), 55 mm from 270 to
2470 mm (10.6 to 97 in.)
• Very compact size – 30 x 24 mm (1.18 x 0.94 in.)
• Cascaded designs possible – 4 segments, up to 400 beams
• Partial muting and position detection muting
• Cross-talk prevention
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Description
Position Detection Muting Function

Warning Zone Function

Position Detection
Muting Function is
used in applications
where the workpiece
is set in position
each time by an
operator, and a
turntable or positioning robot then moves
the workpiece to the
area where the work
is performed. A limit switch or other means is used to detect when
the robot is in a safe position and muting is then applied.

With the F3SJ-A, part of the detection zone can be used as
warning zone to generate an alarm when someone approaches
the danger zone. If the person then enters the danger zone the
F3SJ-A will send a stop signal to the guarded machine. In addition, the auxiliary output can be used to activate a flashing lamp
to alert the person in the warning zone.
The detection zone for a single F3SJ-A can be divided into two
zones or set a single warning zone for multiple, cascaded F3SJ-A
units.
Dividing the zone between series-connected sensors
Detection zone

Partial Muting Function
Muting temporarily disables the F3SJ-A when an object must
pass through the detection zone, such as when supplying a
workpiece to your equipment.
The F3SJ-A beams
Partial muting
continue to guard all
increases the level of
areas except for where
safety by only muting
the workpiece passes
through.
the beams of the
safety light curtain
where the workpiece
passes through, while
preventing muting in
all other areas.

Warning zone

Only the beams of the safety
light curtain interrupted by
the workpiece are muted.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-37

F3SJ-A

Safety Light Curtains

SD Manager Software

Using the SD Manager software, all
features of the F3SJ-A can be set and
checked. Features include:
• Display of system specifications:
– Model
– Number of beams
– Minimum object resolution
– Response time
• Settings for:
– Fixed blanking
– Floating blanking
– Warning zone configuration
– Muting – Both partial and position
detection
– External indicator function
– Auxiliary outputs
– EDM parameters
– Operating range
• Monitoring of received and ambient
light intensity
• Maintenance information:
– Power on time
– OSSD switching frequency
• Recovery of settings
• Safety distance calculations based on
parameters for connected system

“SD Manager” PC Setting Software

F39-GWUM
“SD Manager”
PC Setting
Software

F3SJ-A

To a USB terminal
Branch
Connector
Connection Cable
All parameters can be set and the system status can be checked
with a personal computer. In addition to making it easy to monitor
the beam alignment, the ambient incident light intensity can be
displayed in bar graph form for an easy check of the system status.

● Beam alignment is easier.

● The ambient incident light
intensity can be checked.

Beam Alignment is Easier
The incident light level can be displayed
in a bar graph for each beam.

Setting Console
When you don’t want to take a computer into
the field with you the F39-MC21 setting console
is a convenient way to set parameters and
check the system status.

The incident light level can be displayed in a bar
graph for each beam.

Applications
With built-in muting and
blanking functions, the F3SJ-A
can be employed in a wide
variety of applications from
robotic work cells to small
machines. The potential
for cascaded design and a
broad selection of minimum
object resolutions adds to this
versatility.

The incident light level when the light emission of the
Safety Light Curtain is stopped is displayed in a bar
graph.

Selecting the Best Configuration
Space Efficient and Low Cost
The built-in external device monitoring function
eliminates the need for a safety relay unit.

No Safety Relay Unit

F39-JC®A
G7SA

Contactor

Motor

Reduced Wiring and Easy Maintenance
Cables with connectors on both ends simplify
connections and prevent wiring errors.

Connector Type

F39-JC®B
F3SP-B1P
Dedicated controller

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-38

www.sti.com/info

Contactor

Motor

F3SJ-A

Safety Light Curtains

Specifications
Performance
Resolution:
Protected Height:

Operating Range:
Effective Aperture Angle:
Response Time:

Safety Output Rating:
Auxiliary (Non-Safety) Output Ratings:
Light Source:
Indicators:
Mechanical
Enclosure:
Cable Length:
Transmitter and Receiver Cable
Connections:
Electrical
Power Supply:
Environmental
Protection Rating:
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Vibration:
Shock:
Approvals

14 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 55 mm
14 mm – 245 to 1631 mm (9.6 to 64.2 in.)
20 mm, 25 mm and 30 mm – 245 to 2495 mm (9.6 to 98.2 in.)
55 mm – 270 to 2470 mm (10.6 to 97.2 in.)
0.2 to 9 m for all protective heights up to 1640 mm (64.6 in.)
0.2 to 7 m for all protective heights longer than 1640 mm (64.6 in.):
±2.5° maximum, transmitter and receiver at operating range greater than 3 m (9.8 ft.)
For 14 mm resolution systems up to 983 mm (38.7 in.) protected height ≤17.5 ms
For 14 mm resolution systems above 983 mm (38.7 in.) protected height ≤25 ms
For 20 mm resolution systems up to 1205 mm (47.4 in.) protected height ≤15 ms
For 20 mm resolution systems above 1205 mm (47.4 in.) protected height ≤22.5 ms
For 25 mm resolution systems up to 1600 mm (63.0 in.) protected height ≤15 ms
For 25 mm resolution systems above 1600 mm (63.0 in.) protected height ≤20.0 ms
For 30 mm resolution systems, all protected heights ≤17.5 ms
For 55 mm resolution systems, all protected heights ≤13 ms
Two 24 VDC PNP outputs sourcing 300 mA max.
One 24 VDC PNP output sourcing 300 mA max.
Infrared LED, 870 nm
Transmitter: 5 LED Light Level Indicators, 3 LED Error Indicators, Power, Interlock, EDM, Blanking/Test
Receiver: 5 LED Light Level Indicators, 3 LED Error Indicators, Machine Run, Machine Stop

Anodized aluminum housing
Optional cables are available up to 20 m (65.6 ft.) in length
M12, 8-pin

24 VDC ± 20%

IP65
-10 to 55°C (14 to 131°F)
-30 to 70°C (-22 to 158°F)
35 to 85% non-condensing
10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude of 0.7 mm, 20 sweeps in X, Y, and Z directions
100 m/s2, 1000 times each in X, Y and Z directions
ESPE Type 4 (IEC 61496-1/ -2)
Category 4 / PL e (EN ISO 13849-1)
SIL3 / SIL3 CL3 (IEC 61508)UL508, UL1998, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 14, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 0.8
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

F3SP-B1P Control Unit
Power Supply Voltage:
24 VDC ±10%
Power Consumption:
DC1.7 W max (not including sensor’s current consumption)
Operation Time:
100 ms max. (not including the sensor’s response time)
Response Time:
10 ms max. (not including the sensor’s response time)
Relay Output
Number of Contacts:
3 N.O., 1 N.C.
Rated Load:
250 VAC 5 A (cos = 1); 30 VDC 5 A L/R = 0 ms
Rated Current:
5A
Connection Type
Between Sensors:
M12 connector (8-pin)
Others:
Terminal block
Weight:
Approx. 280 g (9.9 oz.)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-39

F3SJ-A

Safety Light Curtains

Wiring
Wiring for Single F3SJ-A Application
Detection of a welded relay contact is possible without a controller relay unit.

Emitter

• Manual reset mode
• Using external device monitoring
function

Receiver

F39-JC@A-L

F39-JC@A-D

KM1

KM2

Shield

0 V (Blue)

Control output 2 (White)

KM1

Control output 1 (Green)

Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)

External device monitoring input (Red)

Communication
line (−) (Pink)

KM4

+24 V (Brown)

Interlock selection input (White)

Reset input (Yellow)

Test input (Green)
S2

Auxiliary output 2 (Red)

0 V (Blue)

Shield

Communication
line (+) (Gray)

KM1

KM2

KM3

+24 VDC
E1

PLC

0V
Light incident
Light interrupted
External test switch (S1)
Reset switch (S2)
Control output
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
KM1,KM2 N.C. contact
PLC input (See note.)
PLC output

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-40

www.sti.com/info

OUT

F3SJ-A

Safety Light Curtains

Dimensions

(mm)

2-Top/bottom mounting brackets
5.5

2-Mounting holes

30
20

Mounting Screw Holes
(13.75)

4-M5

16.5
1

3.75
6.25

30
24

22
7
Intermediate mounting
bracket

22
2-M5

5.5
B
D

A
B

C (Protective
height)
2-Mounting holes

Beam

4-Mounting holes

300
6 dia.

13.75

6.5 dia.
2-Mounting holes

15 dia.

9 dia.

M12 Waterproof connector

How to Calculate Your System Dimensions:
C (protective height) = 4-digit number in the table
A = C + 74
B = C + 46.5
D = C - 20
E = see chart below

26
46

Number of
Protective Height
Intermediate Brackets
245 to 596 mm (9.6 to 23.5 in.)
0
600 to 1130 mm (23.6 to 44.5 in.)
1
1136 to 1658 mm (44.7 to 65.3 in.)
2
1660 to 2180 mm (65.4 to 85.8 in.)
3
2195 to 2500 mm (86.4 to 98.4 in.)
4
*Use E = 530 or less when none of the E values shown above are used.

E*
—
E = B/2
E = B/3
E = B/4
E = B/5

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-41

F3SJ-A

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering
The minimum components required for an F3SJ-A system are a emitter receiver set and a set of
single or double-ended connector cables. See the table below for an overview of the versions available. The pages which follow provide specific part numbers and accessory descriptions.

Safety Light Curtain F3SJ-A

Designator
Protection
Detection
Beam Gap Operating Range
No. of Beams
F3SJ-A££££P141
Finger
14 mm
9 mm
0.2 to 9 m (0.7 to 29.5 ft.)
26 to 197
F3SJ-A££££P201
Finger/Hand 20 mm
15 mm
0.2 to 9 m (0.7 to 29.5 ft.)
16 to 100
F3SJ-A££££P201
Finger/Hand 20 mm
15 mm
0.2 to 7 m (0.7 to 23.0 ft.)
110 to 166
F3SJ-A££££P20-TS2 Finger/Hand 20 mm
15 mm
0.2 to 9 m (0.7 to 29.5 ft.)
16 to 100
F3SJ-A££££P20-TS2 Finger/Hand 20 mm
15 mm
0.2 to 7 m (0.7 to 23.0 ft.)
110 to 166
F3SJ-A££££P251
Hand
25 mm
20 mm
0.2 to 9 m (0.7 to 29.5 ft.)
13 to 79
F3SJ-A££££P251
Hand
25 mm
20 mm
0.2 to 7 m (0.7 to 23.0 ft.)
87 to 125
F3SJ-A££££P25-TS2 Hand
25 mm
20 mm
0.2 to 9 m (0.7 to 29.5 ft.)
13 to 79
F3SJ-A££££P25-TS2 Hand
25 mm
20 mm
0.2 to 7 m (0.7 to 23.0 ft.)
87 to 125
F3SJ-A££££P301
Hand/arm
30 mm
25 mm
0.2 to 9 m (0.7 to 29.5 ft.)
10 to 65
F3SJ-A££££P301
Hand/arm
30 mm
25 mm
0.2 to 7 m (0.7 to 23.0 ft.)
70 to 100
F3SJ-A££££P551
Leg/body
55 mm
50 mm
0.2 to 9 m (0.7 to 29.5 ft.)
6 to 33
F3SJ-A££££P551
Leg/body
55 mm
50 mm
0. 2 to 7 m (0.7 to 23.0 ft.)
36 to 50
Notes: Connection cables are not included with the products and must be purchased separately as needed.

Protective Height
245 to 1784 mm (9.6 to 70.2 in.)
245 to 1505 mm (9.6 to 59.3 in.)
1655 to 2495 mm (65.2 to 98.2 in.)
245 to 1505 mm (9.6 to 59.3 in.)
1655 to 2495 mm (65.2 to 98.2 in.)
260 to 1580 mm (10.2 to 62.2 in.)
1740 to 2500 mm (68.5 to 98.4 in.)
260 to 1580 mm (10.2 to 62.2 in.)
1740 to 2500 mm (68.5 to 98.4 in.)
245 to 1620 mm (9.6 to 63.8 in.)
1745 to 2495 mm (68.7 to 98.2 in.)
270 to 1620 mm (10.6 to 63.8 in.)
1770 to 2470 mm (69.7 to 97.2 in.)

Specific Model Numbers
Model

F3SJ-A14 Series
F3SJ-A0245P14
F3SJ-A0254P14
F3SJ-A0263P14
F3SJ-A0281P14
F3SJ-A0290P14
F3SJ-A0299P14
F3SJ-A0308P14
F3SJ-A0317P14
F3SJ-A0335P14
F3SJ-A0353P14
F3SJ-A0371P14
F3SJ-A0389P14
F3SJ-A0407P14
F3SJ-A0425P14
F3SJ-A0443P14
F3SJ-A0452P14
F3SJ-A0461P14
F3SJ-A0479P14
F3SJ-A0497P14
F3SJ-A0515P14
F3SJ-A0533P14
F3SJ-A0551P14
F3SJ-A0569P14
F3SJ-A0578P14
F3SJ-A0587P14
F3SJ-A0605P14
F3SJ-A0623P14
F3SJ-A0659P14
F3SJ-A0695P14
F3SJ-A0731P14
F3SJ-A0767P14
F3SJ-A0803P14

No. of
Beams

Protective
Height
(mm)

26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
49
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
63
64
66
68
72
76
80
84
88

245
254
263
281
290
299
308
317
335
353
371
389
407
425
443
452
461
479
497
515
533
551
569
578
587
605
623
659
695
731
767
803

No. of
Beams

Protective
Height
(mm)

F3SJ-A0839P14
92
839
F3SJ-A0875P14
96
875
F3SJ-A0911P14
100
911
F3SJ-A0920P14
101
920
F3SJ-A0983P14
108
983
F3SJ-A1055P14
116
1055
F3SJ-A1127P14
124
1127
F3SJ-A1199P14
132
1199
F3SJ-A1235P14
136
1235
F3SJ-A1271P14
140
1271
F3SJ-A1325P14
146
1325
F3SJ-A1343P14
148
1343
F3SJ-A1415P14
156
1415
F3SJ-A1487P14
164
1487
F3SJ-A1559P14
172
1559
F3SJ-A1631P14
180
1631
F3SJ-A1784P14
197
1784
F3SJ-A2117P14
234
2117
F3SJ-A20, F3SJ-A20-TS* Series
F3SJ-A0245P20
16
245
F3SJ-A0260P20
17
260
F3SJ-A0275P20
18
275
F3SJ-A0290P20
19
290
F3SJ-A0305P20
20
305
F3SJ-A0335P20
22
335
F3SJ-A0350P20
23
350
F3SJ-A0365P20
24
365
F3SJ-A0380P20
25
380
F3SJ-A0395P20
26
395
F3SJ-A0410P20
27
410
F3SJ-A0425P20
28
425
F3SJ-A0440P20
29
440
F3SJ-A0455P20
30
455

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-42

Model

F3SJ-A0470P20
F3SJ-A0485P20
F3SJ-A0500P20
F3SJ-A0515P20
F3SJ-A0530P20
F3SJ-A0545P20
F3SJ-A0560P20
F3SJ-A0575P20
F3SJ-A0590P20
F3SJ-A0605P20
F3SJ-A0620P20
F3SJ-A0635P20
F3SJ-A0665P20
F3SJ-A0695P20
F3SJ-A0710P20
F3SJ-A0725P20
F3SJ-A0740P20
F3SJ-A0755P20
F3SJ-A0785P20
F3SJ-A0800P20
F3SJ-A0815P20
F3SJ-A0830P20
F3SJ-A0845P20
F3SJ-A0875P20
F3SJ-A0890P20
F3SJ-A0905P20
F3SJ-A0920P20
F3SJ-A0935P20
F3SJ-A0965P20
F3SJ-A0980P20
F3SJ-A0995P20
F3SJ-A1010P20
F3SJ-A1025P20

No. of
Beams

Protective
Height
(mm)

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
46
47
48
49
50
52
53
54
55
56
58
59
60
61
62
64
65
66
67
68

470
485
500
515
530
545
560
575
590
605
620
635
665
695
710
725
740
755
785
800
815
830
845
875
890
905
920
935
965
980
995
1010
1025

Model

F3SJ-A1040P20
F3SJ-A1055P20
F3SJ-A1070P20
F3SJ-A1085P20
F3SJ-A1100P20
F3SJ-A1115P20
F3SJ-A1145P20
F3SJ-A1175P20
F3SJ-A1205P20
F3SJ-A1220P20
F3SJ-A1235P20
F3SJ-A1250P20
F3SJ-A1265P20
F3SJ-A1310P20
F3SJ-A1325P20
F3SJ-A1355P20
F3SJ-A1385P20
F3SJ-A1445P20
F3SJ-A1460P20
F3SJ-A1475P20
F3SJ-A1490P20
F3SJ-A1505P20
F3SJ-A1595P20
F3SJ-A1655P20
F3SJ-A1715P20
F3SJ-A1790P20
F3SJ-A1805P20
F3SJ-A1955P20
F3SJ-A2105P20
F3SJ-A2255P20
F3SJ-A2405P20
F3SJ-A2495P20

No. of
Beams

Protective
Height
(mm)

69
70
71
72
73
74
76
78
80
81
82
83
84
87
88
90
92
96
97
98
99
100
106
110
114
119
120
130
140
150
160
166

1040
1055
1070
1085
1100
1115
1145
1175
1205
1220
1235
1250
1265
1310
1325
1355
1385
1445
1460
1475
1490
1505
1595
1655
1715
1790
1805
1955
2105
2255
2405
2495

(Continued on next page)

Notes: Connection cables are not
included with the products and must be
purchased separately as needed.

“-S” at the end of the model number. S-mark
certification is for equipment sold in South
Korea. Example: F3SJ-A0245P14-S.

* The suffix “-TS” is attached to the model
number of models with fixed auto reset.

Models with S-mark certification have an

www.sti.com/info

Models with fixed auto reset (-TS).
Parameters cannot be set using the F39MC21 Setting Console or F39-GWUM “SD
Manager” Support Software for F3SJ-A.

F3SJ-A

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Model

No. of
Beams

Protective
Height
(mm)

F3SJ-A25, F3SJ-A25-TS* Series
F3SJ-A0260P25
13
260
F3SJ-A0300P25
15
300
F3SJ-A0340P25
17
340
F3SJ-A0380P25
19
380
F3SJ-A0400P25
20
400
F3SJ-A0460P25
23
460
F3SJ-A0480P25
24
480
F3SJ-A0500P25
25
500
F3SJ-A0540P25
27
540
F3SJ-A0600P25
30
600
F3SJ-A0620P25
31
620
F3SJ-A0660P25
33
660
F3SJ-A0700P25
35
700
F3SJ-A0740P25
37
740
F3SJ-A0760P25
38
760
F3SJ-A0780P25
39
780
F3SJ-A0860P25
43
860
F3SJ-A0880P25
44
880
F3SJ-A0900P25
45
900
F3SJ-A0940P25
47
940
F3SJ-A0960P25
48
960
F3SJ-A0980P25
49
980
F3SJ-A1020P25
51
1020
F3SJ-A1060P25
53
1060
F3SJ-A1100P25
55
1100
F3SJ-A1180P25
59
1180
F3SJ-A1220P25
61
1220
F3SJ-A1260P25
63
1260
F3SJ-A1280P25
64
1280
F3SJ-A1340P25
67
1340
F3SJ-A1420P25
71
1420
F3SJ-A1500P25
75
1500
F3SJ-A1580P25
79
1580
F3SJ-A1740P25
87
1740
F3SJ-A1820P25
91
1820
F3SJ-A1900P25
95
1900
F3SJ-A2060P25
103
2060
F3SJ-A2220P25
111
2220
F3SJ-A2380P25
119
2380
F3SJ-A2420P25
121
2420
F3SJ-A2500P25
125
2500

Model

F3SJ-A30 Series
F3SJ-A0245P30
F3SJ-A0270P30
F3SJ-A0295P30
F3SJ-A0320P30
F3SJ-A0345P30
F3SJ-A0370P30
F3SJ-A0395P30
F3SJ-A0420P30
F3SJ-A0445P30
F3SJ-A0470P30
F3SJ-A0495P30
F3SJ-A0520P30
F3SJ-A0545P30
F3SJ-A0570P30
F3SJ-A0595P30
F3SJ-A0620P30
F3SJ-A0645P30
F3SJ-A0670P30
F3SJ-A0695P30
F3SJ-A0720P30
F3SJ-A0745P30
F3SJ-A0770P30
F3SJ-A0795P30
F3SJ-A0820P30
F3SJ-A0845P30
F3SJ-A0870P30
F3SJ-A0895P30
F3SJ-A0920P30
F3SJ-A0945P30
F3SJ-A0970P30
F3SJ-A0995P30
F3SJ-A1020P30
F3SJ-A1045P30
F3SJ-A1070P30
F3SJ-A1095P30
F3SJ-A1120P30
F3SJ-A1145P30
F3SJ-A1170P30
F3SJ-A1195P30
F3SJ-A1220P30
F3SJ-A1245P30

No. of
Beams

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Protective
Height
(mm)

245
270
295
320
345
370
395
420
445
470
495
520
545
570
595
620
645
670
695
720
745
770
795
820
845
870
895
920
945
970
995
1020
1045
1070
1095
1120
1145
1170
1195
1220
1245

Model

F3SJ-A1270P30
F3SJ-A1295P30
F3SJ-A1320P30
F3SJ-A1345P30
F3SJ-A1395P30
F3SJ-A1420P30
F3SJ-A1445P30
F3SJ-A1470P30
F3SJ-A1495P30
F3SJ-A1520P30
F3SJ-A1545P30
F3SJ-A1570P30
F3SJ-A1620P30
F3SJ-A1695P30
F3SJ-A1745P30
F3SJ-A1770P30
F3SJ-A1795P30
F3SJ-A1820P30
F3SJ-A1870P30
F3SJ-A1895P30
F3SJ-A1920P30
F3SJ-A1995P30
F3SJ-A2120P30
F3SJ-A2245P30
F3SJ-A2370P30
F3SJ-A2495P30
F3SJ-A55 Series
F3SJ-A0270P55
F3SJ-A0320P55
F3SJ-A0370P55
F3SJ-A0420P55
F3SJ-A0470P55
F3SJ-A0520P55
F3SJ-A0570P55
F3SJ-A0620P55
F3SJ-A0670P55
F3SJ-A0720P55
F3SJ-A0770P55
F3SJ-A0820P55
F3SJ-A0870P55
F3SJ-A0920P55
F3SJ-A0970P55

No. of
Beams

Protective
Height
(mm)

51
52
53
54
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
65
68
70
71
72
73
75
76
77
80
85
90
95
100

1270
1295
1320
1345
1395
1420
1445
1470
1495
1520
1545
1570
1620
1695
1745
1770
1795
1820
1870
1895
1920
1995
2120
2245
2370
2495

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

270
320
370
420
470
520
570
620
670
720
770
820
870
920
970

Model

F3SJ-A1020P55
F3SJ-A1070P55
F3SJ-A1120P55
F3SJ-A1170P55
F3SJ-A1220P55
F3SJ-A1270P55
F3SJ-A1320P55
F3SJ-A1370P55
F3SJ-A1420P55
F3SJ-A1470P55
F3SJ-A1520P55
F3SJ-A1570P55
F3SJ-A1620P55
F3SJ-A1670P55
F3SJ-A1720P55
F3SJ-A1770P55
F3SJ-A1820P55
F3SJ-A1870P55
F3SJ-A1920P55
F3SJ-A1970P55
F3SJ-A2020P55
F3SJ-A2070P55
F3SJ-A2120P55
F3SJ-A2170P55
F3SJ-A2220P55
F3SJ-A2270P55
F3SJ-A2320P55
F3SJ-A2370P55
F3SJ-A2420P55
F3SJ-A2470P55

No. of
Beams

Protective
Height
(mm)

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1020
1070
1120
1170
1220
1270
1320
1370
1420
1470
1520
1570
1620
1670
1720
1770
1820
1870
1920
1970
2020
2070
2120
2170
2220
2270
2320
2370
2420
2470

Notes: Connection cables are not included with the products and must be purchased separately as needed.
* The suffix “-TS” is attached to the model number of models with fixed auto reset.
1
Models with S-mark certification have an “-S” at the end of the model number. S-mark certification is for equipment sold in South Korea. Example: F3SJ-A0245P14-S.
2
Models with fixed auto reset (-TS). Parameters cannot be set using the F39-MC21 Setting Console or F39-GWUM “SD Manager” Support Software for F3SJ-A.

information on Resource
✎ For
Modules, see page D-63.
information on safety light
✎ For
curtain accessories, see page D-68.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-43

F3SJ-A

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Accessories
Model
Description
Single-End Connector Cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
For wiring with safety circuit such as single safety relay, safety relay unit, and safety controller
F39-JC3A
M12 connector (8-pin), 3 m (9.8 ft.)
F39-JC7A
M12 connector (8-pin), 7 m (23.0 ft.)
F39-JC10A
M12 connector (8-pin), 10 m (32.8 ft.)
F39-JC15A
M12 connector (8-pin), 15 m (49.2 ft.)
F39-JC20A
M12 connector (8-pin), 20 m (65.6 ft.)
Double-End Connector Cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver) For connection with F3SPB1P control unit, and for extension when series-connected. Note: To extend the cable length under
series connection, use F39-JJR3W and F39-JC£B in combination.
F39-JCR5B
M12 connector (8-pin), 0.5 m (1.6 ft.)
F39-JC1B
M12 connector (8-pin), 1 m (3.3 ft.)
F39-JC3B
M12 connector (8-pin), 3 m (9.8 ft.)
F39-JC5B
M12 connector (8-pin), 5 m (16.4 ft.)
F39-JC7B
M12 connector (8-pin), 7 m (23.0 ft.)
F39-JC10B
M12 connector (8-pin), 10 m (32.8 ft.)
F39-JC15B
M12 connector (8-pin), 15 m (49.2 ft.)
F39-JC20B
M12 connector (8-pin), 20 m (65.6 ft.)
Series Connection Cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
F39-JJR3W
Series connection cable3 or when using water-resistant case4, 0.3 m (1.0 ft.)
F39-JC£B
Extension cable, 0.5 to 15 m (1.6 to 49.2 ft.)
To change series connection length in combination with F39-JJR3W
F39-JJR06L
Side-by-side series connection cable, 0.06 m (2.4 in.) Dedicated series connection
cable with minimum length, used in place of the sensor’s cable with connector
F39-JJR15L
Side-by-side series connection cable, 0.15 m (5.9 in.) Dedicated series connection
cable with minimum length, used in place of the sensor’s cable with connector
Sensor Mounting Brackets (spare parts)
F39-LJ1
Standard mounting bracket (for top/bottom), included with F3SJ system,

2 for emitter and 2 for receiver (total of 4 per set)
Flat side mounting bracket, Use these small-sized brackets when performing side

F39-LJ2

mounting with standard mounting brackets so that they do not protrude from the

F39-JC7A

F39-JC15B

F39-JJR3W

F39-JJR06L
F39-JJR15L

F39-LJ1

F39-LJ2

detection surface, 2 for emitter and 2 for receiver (total of 4 per set)
Free-location mounting bracket (also used as standard intermediate bracket), Use

F39-LJ3

these brackets for mounting any place without using standard bracket, 1 set with 2
pieces
Key Cap for Muting
F39-CN6
Cap attaches to the main unit to enable muting function, attach to either an emitter or
a receiver, orange case
Setting Tools 5
F39-GWUM

SD Manager Software Accessories:
SD Manager CD-ROM, F39-CN1 Branch Connector, Connector Cap, 2 m Dedicated

F39-MC21

Cable, 0.3 m Dedicated Cable with Plug, Instruction Manual
Setting Console Accessories:
F39-CN1 Branch Connector, Connector Cap, 2 m Dedicated Cable,

0.3 m Dedicated Cable with Plug, Instruction Manual
F39-JC2M
Spare cable for F39-GWUM and F39-MC21
3
Total cable length of series connection is 0.6 m to connect to connector cable of the main sensor unit.
For series connection with minimum length, use the F39-JJR06L or F39-JJR15L.
4
When using the F39-EJ££££-L/D water-resistant case in series connection configurations, use the
special series connection cables for the water-resistant case.
(Continued on next page)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-44

www.sti.com/info

F39-LJ3

F39-CN6

F3SJ-A

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Accessories (continued)
Model
Setting Tools 5
F39-GWUM

Description
SD Manager Software Accessories:
SD Manager CD-ROM, F39-CN1 Branch Connector, Connector Cap, 2 m
Dedicated Cable, 0.3 m Dedicated Cable with Plug, Instruction Manual
Setting Console Accessories:

F39-MC21

F39-GWUM

F39-CN1 Branch Connector, Connector Cap, 2 m Dedicated Cable,
F39-JC2M
Control Unit
F3SP-B1P

0.3 m Dedicated Cable with Plug, Instruction Manual
Spare cable for F39-GWUM and F39-MC21

Relay, 3 N.O. + 1 N.C. output, for connection with F3SJ-A, use an F39-

JC£B double-end connector cable
Force-Guided Relays
G7SA-2A2B
4 contacts, 2 N.O. + 2 N.C., Rated switch load: 250 VAC 6 A, 30 VDC 6 A
G7SA-3A1B
4 contacts, 3 N.O. + 1 N.C., Rated switch load: 250 VAC 6 A, 30 VDC 6 A
G7S-4A2B-E
6 contacts, 4 N.O. + 2 N.C., Rated switch load: 250 VAC 10 A, 30 VDC 10 A
G7S-3A3B-E
6 contacts, 3 N.O. + 3 N.O., Rated switch load: 250 VAC 10 A, 30 VDC 10 A
Dedicated External Indicator Set (Can be connected to either an emitter or a receiver)
F39-A01PR-PAC
Indicator (red), mounting bracket (1 set), and dedicated connection cable
F39-A01PG-PAC

(0.1 m)
Indicator (green), mounting bracket (1 set), and dedicated connection cable

F39-A01PY-PAC

(0.1 m)
Indicator (yellow), mounting bracket (1 set), and dedicated connection

cable (0.1 m)
General External Indicator Cable
F39-JJ3N
Cable to connect top of the main unit and an off-the-shelf external indicator

F39-MC21

G7SA

G7S
F3SP-B1P

F39-A01-PR-PAC

(2-wire), 3 m (9.8 ft.)
Spatter Protection Cover
F39-HJ££££
For F3SJ-A series sensor, reduces operating range by 10%, includes two

F39-JJ3N

pieces for emitter and receiver
Water-Resistant Case (Set of 1 tube, packing, and dedicated connector cable)
When using for both emitter and receiver, order two sets.
F39-EJ££££-L
Water-resistant case for emitter, includes gray cable for emitter
F39-EJ££££-D
Water-resistant case for receiver, includes black cable for receiver
F39-EJ-R 6
Rear mounting brackets, top/bottom 1 each, total of 2
F39-EJ-S 6
Side mounting brackets, top/bottom 1 each, total of 2
F39-JJR3WE-L
Series connection cable for emitter, purchase additionally for series
F39-JJR3WE-D

F39-HJ££££

connection when using the water-resistant case
Series connection cable for receiver, purchase additionally for series

connection when using the water-resistant case
Branch Connector for F3SX (F39-JC£T to F39-JC£B)
F39-CN5
Branch connector for F3SX
Wire-Saving Devices
F39-CN8
Short-circuit connector
F39-TC5P01
Connector terminal box with muting sensor output mode (PNP)
F39-TC5P02
Connector terminal box with override mode (PNP)
F39-TC5N01
Connector terminal box with muting sensor output mode (NPN)
F39-TC5N02
Connector terminal box with override mode (NPN)
F3SP-T01
Safety terminal relays for F3SJ-A_-B_
Laser Alignment Tool
F39-PTJ
Laser alignment tool for the F3SJ
The setting tools described above can be connected only to F3SJ-A models with built-in software of
Ver. 2 or later. Note that the setting tools cannot be used with products shipped prior to December 2005.
The setting tools cannot be used for setting parameters on the F3SJ-A£-TS series, but the monitoring
function can be used.
6
Be sure to purchase brackets with the case to match the mounting direction (rear or side).

F39-EJ-R

F39-EJ££££-L/D

F39-EJ-S
F39-CN5

F39-TC5

F3SP-T01

F39-PTJ

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-45

Safety Light Curtains

MS4800

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

MiniSafe® Light Curtains

• Resolutions: 14 mm (0.55 in.), 20 mm (0.79 in.), 30 mm
(1.18 in.), and 40 mm (1.57 in.)
• Ranges: 7 m (23 ft.) for 14 mm resolution systems; and 20 m
(65 ft.) for 20, 30 and 40 mm resolution systems
• Protected Heights: 280 to 2120 mm (11 to 83.5 in.)
• Compact size: 50 x 38 mm (2 x 1.5 in.)
• “Two-box” design — no separate control box; no cable
between transmitter and receiver
• Individual Beam Indicators
• Quick and easy fixed blanking programming option “SB1”
• Simple cascading models
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Feature Set Comparison
The MS4800 light curtain family is an all-purpose light curtain available in three distinct versions.
These versions are identified as the MS4800A, MS4800B and the MS4800S. The MS4800A and
MS4800B feature set (configuration) can be changed through the use of an external device called
the Programming Diagnostic Module (PDM) and on the MS4800S through selector switches.
Feature Set Comparison
MS4800A
MS4800B
■
■
Flex Bus, Multi-Segmented Head Configurations
Scan Code for Cross-Talk Mitigation
■*
■*
EDM External Device Monitoring (MPCE Monitoring)
■**
■**
■
■
PDM (Programming and Diagnostic Module)
■
■
Adjustable Mounting Brackets and T-Slots
■
■
Non-Shielded Main Cables
■
■
2-Box Design
■
■
Two PNP Safety Outputs
Operating Modes
■*
■*
Machine Test Signal (MTS)
■*
■*
Auxiliary Output (PNP or NPN)
■*
■***
Muting Through RM-6 Resource Module (only with
■*
MSF4800)
Floating Blanking
■*
Fixed Blanking
■*
Monitored Blanking
■*
Reduced Resolution
■*
Range Selection
■*
■*
Start Input Type
■*
Response Time Adjustment
■*
Note: The MS4800S can be configured with the quick fixed blanking programming option “SB1”.
*Configured via use of the Programming and Diagnostic Module (PDM)
**Configured via PDM and wiring configuration
***PNP/Follow only
****Simple two-sensor muting

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-46

www.sti.com/info

MS4800S
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■***
■****
■
■

■

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Specifications
Performance
Protected Height:

Object Resolution:
Range:

Effective Aperture Angle:
Safety Output:
Response Time:
Auxiliary (Non-Safety) Output:

EDM Monitor:
Start/Restart Input
(10 mA Consumption):
Light Source:
Transmitter Indicator Light:
Receiver Indicator Light:
Electrical
Power Input Transmitter:
Power Input Receiver:
Muting Option (RM-6):
Power Supply:
Mechanical
Construction:
Cable Length:
Wire Connections:
Environmental
Enclosure Rating:
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Shock:
Approvals

14 & 20 mm — 280 to 1800 mm (11.0 to 70.9 in.)
30 mm — 280 to 2120 mm (11.0 to 83.5 in.)
40 mm — 360 to 2040 mm (14.1 to 80.3 in.)
14, 20, 30 and 40 mm
14 mm Resolution — 0.3 to 7 m (1 to 23 ft.) default; 0.3 to 3 m (1 to 10 ft.)
20, 30 40 mm Resolutions — 0.3 to 20 m (1 to 65 ft.) default; 0.3 to 8 m (1 to
26 ft.)
±2.5° maximum, transmitter and receiver at operating range greater than 3 m
(10 ft.) per IEC 61496-2
Two 24 VDC PNP, each output sourcing 625 mA @ 24 VDC, short circuit
protected (see Note 1)
See response time tables
MS4800A – One 24 VDC PNP sourcing 100 mA (follow mode) default, or one
sinking NPN and alarm modes configured via PDM
MS4800B and MS4800S — One PNP sourcing 100 mA (follow mode)
50 mA @ 24 VDC (See Note 2)
MS4800A — N.C. to 0 VDC default; N.O. and 24 VDC modes configured via PDM
MS4800B and MS4800S — N.C. to 0 VDC only
Infrared light emitting diode, 880 nm
Active (yellow)
Machine Run/Stop (green/red), Interlock/Alarm (yellow), Blanking (amber)
24 VDC ±20% 285 mA max.
24 VDC ± 20%, 1.8 A max. (receiver 450 mA + OSSD1 625 mA max. + OSSD2
625 mA max. + auxiliary 100 mA max.)
24 VDC ± 20%, 115 mA max.
Must meet requirements of IEC 60204-1 and IEC 61496; STI part number
42992 or equivalent (see Note 1)
Polyester powder painted aluminum
Available in 10, 15 and 30 m (33, 49 and 99 ft.) lengths, unshielded
M12 connections; 8-pin receiver & 5-pin transmitter

IP65
-10 to 55°C (14 to 131°F)
-25 to 75°C (-13 to 167°F)
95% maximum, non-condensing
10 g for 0.016 seconds; 1,000 shocks for each of three axis
ESPE Type 4 (IEC 61496-1/ -2)
Category 4 / PL e (EN ISO 13849-1)
SIL3 / SIL3 CL3 (IEC 61508 / EN 62061)
UL508, UL1998, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 14, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 0.8,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 0, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 205
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note 1: Total current required by two solid-state safety outputs and the auxiliary output should not exceed 1.35 A.
Total system current requirements is the sum of transmitter (285 mA), receiver (450 mA), OSSD1 (625 mA), OSSD2
(625 mA) and Aux. Output (100 mA).
Note 2: 24 VDC is nominal. Actual voltage is dependant upon supply, V = Vsupply - 2 V.

Response Time Tables
One Segment System
Response
Time (ms)
Normal Slow*
14
23
23
38
32
53
41
68
50
83
59
99

Beam Count
Min.
Max.
12
16
17
71
72
126
127
180
181
235
236
256

Two Segment System
Response
Time (ms)
Normal Slow*
23
38
32
53
41
68
50
83
59
99

Beam Count
Min.
Max.
24
65
66
120
121
174
175
229
230
256

Three Segment System
Response
Time (ms)
Normal Slow*
23
38
32
53
41
68
50
83
59
99

Beam Count
Min.
Max.
36
59
60
114
115
168
169
223
224
256

Four Segment System
Response
Time (ms)
Normal Slow*
23
38
32
53
41
68
50
83
59
99

Beam Count
Min.
Max.
48
53
54
108
109
162
163
217
218
256

*Response time adjustment is only
available on the MS4800A.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-47

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

PDM Functions

The PDM is used to program, configure and troubleshoot MS4800A and MS4800B
systems.
A qualified person simply
plugs the PDM cable into a
mating connector on either
the transmitter or receiver. The
PDM draws power from the
curtain and allows quick display of the light curtain’s status
for troubleshooting purposes.
After log-in, all configuration
settings can be accessed and
programmed.
The PDM has five function
buttons that allow navigation
through the set-up menus.

MS4800A &
MS4800B PDM Port

MS4800S
Function
Switches

PDM Connected to
Port on MS4800
Programming Diagnostic Module (PDM)

Wiring
System Configuration
ID
1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Components & Indicators
Receiver
Individual Beam Indicators (one for each beam) — Red
Blanking Active — Amber
Interlock or Alarm Indicator — Yellow
Machine Run/Stop Indicator — Green/Red
Receiver Connections M–12
1
+24 VDC — Brown Wire
2
0 VDC — Blue Wire
3
Earth — Green Wire
4
OSSD 2 — White Wire
5
Start or EDM (Mode Select) — Yellow Wire
6
EDM — Red Wire
7
Auxiliary Output — Pink Wire
8
OSSD 1 — Black Wire
Transmitter
Detection Zone
Flip Door, Access to Configuration Switches (on both
receiver and transmitter) — MS4800S version
Programming Port for PDM (on both receiver and
transmitter) — MS4800A and MS4800B versions
Status Indicator — Yellow
Side Mounting T-Slot
Transmitter Connections M–12
1
0 VDC — Blue Wire
2
+24 VDC — Brown Wire
3
MTS — White Wire
4
MTS Return — Black Wire
5
Earth — Green Wire

7
1

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-48

RECEIVER LED
INDICATORS

www.sti.com/info

LED
INDICATOR

2
5

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Wiring (continued)
Using Solid-State Outputs
Connecting Via Two Force-Guided Relays
FGR series relays provide force-guided outputs for machine control.

Power Supply
Earth
Ground

+24 VDC

0 VDC

MS4800 Receiver
Black

ED 1

OSSD 1
OSSD 2
4

3
5

Start

Pink
Yellow

7
1

2
ED 1

Red

White

ED 2

Auxiliary
Output
Start
To Machine Control Contacts
EDM

ED 2

Brown

ED 1

+24 VDC

Blue
0 VDC

Green

Earth
2

MS4800 Transmitter
MTS
MTS
Return

Brown
Blue
Green

White
Black

+24 VDC

0 VDC

MTS/Test
6

ED 2

EDM (External Device Monitoring) must be used when
force-guided control relays are used as the Final
Switching Devices. Connect red wire though NC
contacts to 0 VDC.
For the purpose of bench testing prior to installation,
the user may select EDM OFF. In this case the EDM line,
terminal 5 (red wire) must be connected to the
0 VDC line.

Auxiliary Output PNP 100 mA. max. @ 24 VDC,
connect to PLC (default)

User-supplied fuse

Start connections are shown with NC
(pulled to 0 VDC).

MTS requires a NC contact. If MTS is not used, verify
that the function is disabled.

When the EDM selection is set to “BY WIRE”,
the yellow wire should be tied to +24 V to
enable it, or 0 V to disable it.

Earth

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-49

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Dimensions

(mm/in.)

MS4800
30.1 [1.19]

16.0°
BRACKET
ROTATION

BRKT SLOT
ROTATION

TOP
90.0° VIEWS
59.2 [2.33]

38.1 [1.50]
52.8 [2.08]

62.9 [2.48]

49.1 [1.93]
27.8 [1.09]
58.8 [2.31]

53.6 [2.11]
40.1 [1.58]
dia.6.8 [.27]

23.2 [.91]

37.2 [1.47]

51.0 [2.01]
39.4 [1.55]
50.0 [1.97]

38.0 [1.50]

"D"
"B"

"E"

"C"

"A"

ALTERNATE
T-SLOT
MTG
63.8 [2.51]

ENDCAP
WITH DOOR
(DIP SWITCH)

46.4 [1.82]
69.6 [2.74]
58.0 [2.28]

CABLE
215.4
[8.48]
TYPICAL

18.5
[.73]

77.3
[3.04]

37.2 [1.47]
MOUNTING
BRACKETS
INVERTED

FRONT
VIEW

LEFT SIDE
VIEW

ENDCAP
WITHOUT
DOOR
(PDM)

How to Calculate System Dimensions:

59.3 [2.33]

67.8 [2.67]

Example: MS4800S-30-0720

90.0°

PDM CABLE
49.1 [1.93]
LEFT SIDE
FRONT
VIEW
VIEW

D-50

BACK
VIEW

RIGHT SIDE
VIEW

0720 represents a sensing field of 720 mm
Dimension A = sensing field
Dimension B = A + 136.0 mm
Dimension C = A + 97.3 mm
Dimension D = A + 22.9 mm
Dimension E = A + 86.9 mm
MS4800
Series
MS48-X/R-0280
MS48-X/R-0320
MS48-X/R-0360
MS48-X/R-0400
MS48-X/R-0440
MS48-X/R-0480
MS48-X/R-0520
MS48-X/R-0560
MS48-X/R-0600
MS48-X/R-0640
MS48-X/R-0680
MS48-X/R-0720
MS48-X/R-0760
MS48-X/R-0800
MS48-X/R-0840
MS48-X/R-0880

A
(mm)
284.4
324.8
364.5
404.2
443.9
484.3
523.4
563.7
604.1
643.9
683.6
724.0
763.0
803.5
843.8
882.8

A
(in)
11.19
12.79
14.35
15.91
17.48
19.07
20.61
22.19
23.78
25.35
26.91
28.50
30.04
31.63
33.22
34.76

www.sti.com/info

MS4800
Series
MS48-X/R-0920
MS48-X/R-0960
MS48-X/R-1000
MS48-X/R-1040
MS48-X/R-1080
MS48-X/R-1120
MS48-X/R-1160
MS48-X/R-1200
MS48-X/R-1240
MS48-X/R-1280
MS48-X/R-1320
MS48-X/R-1360
MS48-X/R-1400
MS48-X/R-1440
MS48-X/R-1480
MS48-X/R-1520

A
(mm)
922.5
963.6
1002.6
1042.9
1083.9
1122.3
1162.7
1203.8
1242.1
1281.8
1323.6
1362.0
1401.7
1443.4
1481.8
1521.5

A
(in)
36.32
37.94
39.47
41.06
42.67
44.19
45.78
47.39
48.90
50.47
52.11
53.62
55.18
56.83
58.34
59.90

MS4800
Series
MS48-X/R-1560
MS48-X/R-1600
MS48-X/R-1640
MS48-X/R-1680
MS48-X/R-1720
MS48-X/R-1760
MS48-X/R-1800
MS48-X/R-1840
MS48-X/R-1880
MS48-X/R-1920
MS48-X/R-1960
MS48-X/R-2000
MS48-X/R-2040
MS48-X/R-2080
MS48-X/R-2120

A
(mm)
1563.3
1600.9
1641.3
1683.1
1720.8
1760.5
1802.9
1840.6
1880.3
1922.8
1960.4
2000.1
2042.6
2079.6
2120.0

A
(in)
61.55
63.03
64.62
66.26
67.75
69.31
70.98
72.46
74.03
75.70
77.18
78.75
80.42
81.87
83.46

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Dimensions (continued)

(mm/in.)

MSF4800
CL

30.1 [1.19]
62.9 [2.48]

16.0°

BRACKET
ROTATION

TOP
VIEWS

90.0°

BRKT SLOT
ROTATION

59.2 [2.33]
38.1 [1.50]
52.8 [2.08]

53.6 [2.11]

49.1 [1.93]
27.8 [1.09]
58.8 [2.31]

39.4 [1.55]

MULTIPLE
FLEX
SEGMENTS

40.1 [1.58]
DIA 6.8 [.27]
23.2 [.91]

38.0 [1.50]
50.0 [1.97]

"C2"
"A"

"E2"
MID
SEGMENTS

"B2"

"E1"
LAST
SEGMENT

27.8 [1.09]
18.5 [.73]

58.8 [2.31]

51.0 [2.01]
39.4 [1.55]
27.8 [1.09]

FLEX CABLE
95.1 [3.74]
TYPICAL

37.2 [1.47]

58.8 [2.31]

51.0 [2.01]
39.4 [1.55]
"A"

ENDCAP
WITH DOOR
(DIP SWITCH)

"C1"

63.8 [2.51]

46.4 [1.82]
69.6 [2.74]
58.0 [2.28]
LEFT SIDE
VIEW

CABLE
215.4
[8.48]
TYPICAL

How to Calculate System Dimensions:
Example: MSF4800-S-30-0720
0720 represents a sensing field of 720 mm
Dimension A = sensing field
Dimension B1 = A + 136.0 mm
Dimension B2 = A + 117.5 mm
Dimension C1 = A + 97.3 mm
Dimensions C2 = A + 78.7 mm
Dimension D = A + 155.6 mm
Dimension E1= A + 83.3 mm
Dimension E2 = A + 137.0 mm

ALTERNATE
T-SLOT
MTG

"B1"

77.3 [3.04]
FRONT
VIEW
RIGHT SIDE
VIEW

MSF4800
Series
MSF48-X/R-0240
MSF48-X/R-0280
MSF48-X/R-0320
MSF48-X/R-0360
MSF48-X/R-0400
MSF48-X/R-0440
MSF48-X/R-0480
MSF48-X/R-0520
MSF48-X/R-0560
MSF48-X/R-0600
MSF48-X/R-0640
MSF48-X/R-0680
MSF48-X/R-0720
MSF48-X/R-0760
MSF48-X/R-0800
MSF48-X/R-0840

A
(mm)
244.6
284.4
324.8
364.5
404.2
443.9
484.3
523.4
563.7
604.1
643.9
683.6
724.0
763.0
803.5
843.8

A
(in)
9.63
11.19
12.79
14.35
15.91
17.48
19.07
20.61
22.19
23.78
25.35
26.91
28.50
30.04
31.63
33.22

www.sti.com/info

MSF4800
Series
MSF48-X/R-0880
MSF48-X/R-0920
MSF48-X/R-0960
MSF48-X/R-1000
MSF48-X/R-1040
MSF48-X/R-1080
MSF48-X/R-1120
MSF48-X/R-1160
MSF48-X/R-1200
MSF48-X/R-1240
MSF48-X/R-1280
MSF48-X/R-1320
MSF48-X/R-1360
MSF48-X/R-1400
MSF48-X/R-1440
MSF48-X/R-1480

A
(mm)
882.8
922.5
963.6
1002.6
1042.9
1083.9
1122.3
1162.7
1203.8
1242.1
1281.8
1323.6
1362.0
1401.7
1443.4
1481.8

37.2 [1.47]
MOUNTING
BRACKETS
INVERTED

A
(in)
34.76
36.32
37.94
39.47
41.06
42.67
44.19
45.78
47.39
48.90
50.47
52.11
53.62
55.18
56.83
58.34

BACK
VIEW

MSF4800
Series
MSF48-X/R-1520
MSF48-X/R-1560
MSF48-X/R-1600
MSF48-X/R-1640
MSF48-X/R-1680
MSF48-X/R-1720
MSF48-X/R-1760
MSF48-X/R-1800
MSF48-X/R-1840
MSF48-X/R-1880
MSF48-X/R-1920
MSF48-X/R-1960
MSF48-X/R-2000
MSF48-X/R-2040
MSF48-X/R-2080
MSF48-X/R-2120

A
(mm)
1521.5
1563.3
1600.9
1641.3
1683.1
1720.8
1760.5
1802.9
1840.6
1880.3
1922.8
1960.4
2000.1
2042.6
2079.6
2120.0

A
(in)
59.90
61.55
63.03
64.62
66.26
67.75
69.31
70.98
72.46
74.03
75.70
77.18
78.75
80.42
81.87
83.46

D-51

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Dimensions (continued)

(mm/in.)

MS4800 Explosion-Proof Enclosures
MS4800-EPKT-0320

MS4800-EPKT-0960

(Use with MS48-14/20/30/40-0320)
310.0
12.20
1st & Last Beam

44.5
1.75

(Use with MS48-30-0960)
940.0 1st & Last Beam Ctrs
37.01

129.1
5.08

368.3
121.2
Lid Window Ctrs
14.50
4.77
568.3
Lid & Base Length
22.38
584.2
Mounting Enclosure
23.00

44.5
1.75

40575-0010 (12" Explosion Proof Enclosure)

50.8
2.00

40575-0030 (36" Explosion Proof Enclosure)

Threaded Coupling Accepts
3/4" NPT Pipe Fitting

MS4800-EPKT-0640

MS4800-EPKT-1240

(Use with MS48-30-0640)

(Use with MS48-30-1240)
135.6
5.34

620.0
1st & Last Beam
24.41

673.1
Lid Window Centers
26.50
873.1
Lid & Base Length
34.38
889.0
Mounting Enclosure
35.00

122.5
4.81

937.8
Lid Window Centers
36.92
1177.9
Lid & Base Length
46.37
1193.8
Mounting Enclosure
47.00

127.0
5.00
118.9
4.68

129.1
5.08

148.0
5.83

1220.0
1st & Last Beam
48.03

121.2
4.77

1257.8
Lid Window Centers
49.52
1482.7
Lid & Base Length
58.37

40575-0020 (24" Explosion Proof Enclosure)

1498.6
Mounting Enclosure
59.00

40575-0040 (48" Explosion Proof Enclosure)

Additional Components to Complete Your System
We offer
a

To complete your system, we offer a
complete range of accessories, including:

COMPLE

82
3.22

• Mirrors
• Shock Mount Kits
• Laser Alignment Tool
• Power Supplies
• Reset Switches
• Heavy Duty Floor Stands
• Light Duty Floor Stands
• Test Objects
• Weld Slag Protective Shields
• IP67 Enclosures

52
2.05

CLAMP ASSY INCLUDED

Line of Acc
7 Dia.
0.270
(4 plcs)

32
1.25
24
0.94

L
M

essories

Mirrors and
MIRROR
MOUNTING
Mounting
Brackets
BRACKETS
MODEL MIR-BKT

CLAMP ASSY INCLUDED

13
0.50
34
1.34

Reset
Switches

complete information on
✎ For
light curtain accessories,

IP67
Enclosures

see page D-68.
Floor
Stands

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-52

www.sti.com/info

Laser
Alignment
Tool
Weld Slag Protective
Shields

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering
To order a MiniSafe MS4800
system, simply fill in the fields
in the model number sequence
given. Each field is numbered
and information on completing
a specific field can be found in
the sections which follow.
No new kit configurations will
be created after May 15, 2014.
After May 15, new kit configurations will need to be ordered
by the individual part numbers
as per the De-configured Parts
List examples. Individual model
numbers for all parts are listed
in the tables starting on page
D-55. All pre-existing kits will
continue to be available.

MS4800 Sequence:
____ - ____ - ____ - ____X - ____R - ____- ____

6 7

Example: MS4800A-30-0600-10X-10R-RMX-P
This 4800 has: 30 mm resolution, 600 mm coverage height, 10 m transmitter and receiver cables,
RM-X resource module, and a PDM module.
De-configured Parts List:
MS4800A-30-0600 RM-X
MS4800-CBLTX-10M MS4800-PDM

MS4800-CBLRX-10M

MSF4800 Sequence:
____ -____ -____ - ____ - ____ - ____X - ____R - ____XI - ____RI - ____ - ____

Example: MSF4800A-20-0600-30-0440-10X-10R-010XI-030RI-RM610-P
This 4800 has: 20 mm resolution, 600 mm coverage height on 1st segment, 30 mm resolution, 440
mm coverage height on 2nd segment, 10 m transmitter and receiver cables, one 1 m and one 3 m
interconnect cables, RM-6 muting module with 10 m cable, and a PDM module.
De-configured Parts List:
MSF4800A-20-0600 MS4800-CBLMT-10M
MSF4800-30-0440-XR2 MS4800-RM6
MS4800-CBLTX-10M MS4800-PDM
MS4800-CBLRX-10M
MS4800-CBLTXIC-01M
MS4800-CBLRXIC-03M

1 Information required.

2 Information required. Rep-

Represents the system type.

resents the minimum object
resolution of the system.

Designator Description
MS4800A
Advanced, PDM
configured
MS4800B
Basic, PDM
configured
MS4800S
Standard, switch
configured
MSF4800A AdvancedCascadable, PDM
configured
MSF4800B Basic-Cascadable,
PDM configured
MSF4800S StandardCascadable, switch
configured

Minimum Object
Designator Resolution
14 mm (0.55 in.)
14
20
20 mm (0.79 in)
30
30 mm (1.18 in.)
40
40 mm (1.57 in.)

Note 1: The MSF4800A and
MSF4800S cascaded versions are
required for use with RM-6 muting
modules, a second segment is not
required.
Note 2: MSF4800 cascaded
versions are limited to a maximum
of four segments or 256 beams.
The interconnect cables are limited
to 10 m between segments.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-53

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
4 Information optional.

6 Information optional.

curtain in millimeters. Coverage heights available are a function of
minimum object resolution. Designators are described below and
divided into three sections, those for 12 & 14 mm resolutions, 30
mm resolutions, and 40 mm resolution.

Represents transmitter (X) and
receiver (R) cable lengths.
Cables can be shortened in
the field.

Indicates optional Quick fixed
blanking option (only applicable to MS/MSF4800S versions).

14 mm & 20 mm Minimum
Object Resolution Systems
Desig-
Coverage
No. of
nator Height Beams
0240** 240 mm (9.4 in.) 24
0280 280 mm (11.0 in.) 28
0320 320 mm (12.6 in.) 32
0360 360 mm (14.1 in.) 36
0400 400 mm (15.7 in.) 40
0440 440 mm (17.3 in.) 44
0480 480 mm (18.9 in.) 48
0520 520 mm (20.5 in.) 52
0560 560 mm (22.0 in.) 56
0600 600 mm (23.6 in.) 60
0640 640 mm (25.2 in.) 64
0680 680 mm (26.8 in.) 68
0720 720 mm (28.3 in.) 72
0760 760 mm (29.9 in.) 76
0800 800 mm (31.5 in.) 80
0840 840 mm (33.0 in.) 84
0880 880 mm (34.6 in.) 88
0920 920 mm (36.2 in.) 92
0960 960 mm (37.8 in.) 96
1000 1000 mm (39.4 in.) 100
1040 1040 mm (40.9 in.) 104
1080 1080 mm (42.5 in.) 108
1120 1120 mm (44.1 in.) 112
1160 1160 mm (45.8 in.) 116
1200 1200 mm (47.2 in.) 120
1240 1240 mm (48.8 in.) 124
1280 1280 mm (50.4 in.) 128
1320* 1320 mm (52.0 in.) 132
1360* 1360 mm (53.5 in.) 136
1400* 1400 mm (55.1 in.) 140
1440* 1440 mm (56.7 in.) 144
1480* 1480 mm (58.3 in.) 148
1520* 1520 mm (59.8 in.) 152
1560* 1560 mm (61.4 in.) 156
1600* 1600 mm (63.0 in.) 160
1640* 1640 mm (64.6 in.) 164
1680* 1680 mm (66.1 in.) 168
1720* 1720 mm (67.7 in.) 172
1760* 1760 mm (69.3 in.) 176
1800* 1800 mm (70.9 in.) 180
*Not available for X2/R2 midsegment configurations.
**Only available as an X2/R2
mid-segment.

Designator Description
10 m (33 ft.)
10
15
15 m (49 ft.)
30 m (99 ft.)
30
(Blank)
No cables

3 Information required. Represents coverage heights of the light

30 mm Minimum
Object Resolution Systems
Desig-
Coverage
No. of
nator Height Beams
0240** 240 mm (9.4 in.) 12
0280 280 mm (11.0 in.) 14
0320 320 mm (12.6 in.) 16
0360 360 mm (14.1 in.) 18
0400 400 mm (15.7 in.) 20
0440 440 mm (17.3 in.) 22
0480 480 mm (18.9 in.) 24
0520 520 mm (20.5 in.) 26

0560
0600
0640
0680
0720
0760
0800
0840
0880
0920
0960
1000
1040
1080
1120
1160
1200
1240
1280
1320
1360
1400
1440
1480
1520
1560
1600
1640
1680
1720
1760
1800
1840
1880
1920
1960
2000
2040
2080
2120

560 mm (22.0 in.)
600 mm (23.6 in.)
640 mm (25.2 in.)
680 mm (26.8 in.)
720 mm (28.3 in.)
760 mm (29.9 in.)
800 mm (31.5 in.)
840 mm (33.0 in.)
880 mm (34.6 in.)
920 mm (36.2 in.)
960 mm (37.8 in.)
1000 mm (39.4 in.)
1040 mm (40.9 in.)
1080 mm (42.5 in.)
1120 mm (44.1 in.)
1160 mm (45.8 in.)
1200 mm (47.2 in.)
1240 mm (48.8 in.)
1280 mm (50.4 in.)
1320 mm (52.0 in.)
1360 mm (53.5 in.)
1400 mm (55.1 in.)
1440 mm (56.7 in.)
1480 mm (58.3 in.)
1520 mm (59.8 in.)
1560 mm (61.4 in.)
1600 mm (63.0 in.)
1640 mm (64.6 in.)
1680 mm (66.1 in.)
1720 mm (67.7 in.)
1760 mm (69.3 in.)
1800 mm (70.9 in.)
1840 mm (72.4 in.)
1880 mm (74.0 in.)
1920 mm (75.6 in.)
1960 mm (77.2 in.)
2000 mm (78.7 in.)
2040 mm (80.3 in.)
2080 mm (81.9 in.)
2120 mm (83.5 in.)

28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
102
104
106

7 Information optional.
5 Information optional. Represents transmitter and receiver
interconnect cable length
for MSF4800 systems. Each
segment comes with a 6-inch
“pigtail.” If additional cable
is needed, it can be ordered
in the lengths given below.
MSF4800 transmitters and
receivers use identical quickdisconnect cables. Be sure
to specify the length for each
cable you need. For example,
“-050XI-100RI” specifies one
5 m transmitter and one 10 m
receiver interconnect cable.
Designator Description
003
0.3 m (12 in.)
005
0.5 m (20 in.)
010
1 m (3.3 ft.)
020
2 m (6.6 ft.)
030
3 m (10 ft.)
050
5 m (16 ft.)
100
10 m (33 ft.)
(Blank)
No cables

40 mm Minimum
Object Resolution Systems
Desig-
Coverage
No. of
nator Height Beams
0360 360 mm (14.1 in.) 12
0480 480 mm (18.9 in.) 16
0600 600 mm (23.6 in.) 20
0720 720 mm (28.3 in.) 24
0840 840 mm (33.0 in.) 28
0960 960 mm (37.8 in.) 32
1080 1080 mm (42.5 in.) 36
1200 1200 mm (47.2 in.) 40
1320 1320 mm (52.0 in.) 44
1440 1440 mm (56.7 in.) 48
1560 1560 mm (61.4 in.) 52
1680 1680 mm (66.1 in.) 56
1800 1800 mm (70.9 in.) 60
1920 1920 mm (75.6 in.) 64
2040 2040 mm (80.3 in.) 68

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-54

Designator Description
Quick fixed blanking
SB1
option (for
MS/MSF4800S only)
(Blank)
No option

www.sti.com/info

Indicates optional RM resource
module. (Note: Multiple
modules may be selected.)
Designator Description
Include RM-X
RMX
resource module
Include RM-2AC
RM2A
resource module
Include RM-2AC-IP
RM2AP
resource module
Include RM-2AC-IPRM-2APB

SB1 resource module
(for use with SB1

option)
Include RM-6 muting
RM610
module and 10 m
cable for MSF4800
RM615
Include RM-6 muting
module and 15 m
cable for MSF4800
RM630
Include RM-6 muting
module and 30 m
cable for MSF4800
Include PDM
P
(Programming
Diagnostic Module
only for MS/MSF4800
A and B)
No RM series
(Blank)
resource module

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Model Numbers
ADVANCED PDM (Programming Diagnostic Module) CONFIGURED

Model

No. of Beams

40 mm Object Resolution

No. of Beams

30 mm Object Resolution

No. of Beams

20 mm Object Resolution

No. of Beams

14 mm Object Resolution

MS4800A-14-0280

28 280 (11.0)

MS4800A-20-0280

28 280 (11.0)

MS4800A-30-0280

14 280 (11.0)

MS4800A-40-0360

12 360 (14.1)

MS4800A-14-0320

32 320 (12.6)

MS4800A-20-0320

32 320 (12.6)

MS4800A-30-0320

16 320 (12.6)

MS4800A-40-0480

16 480 (18.9)

MS4800A-14-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MS4800A-20-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MS4800A-30-0360

18 360 (14.1)

MS4800A-40-0600

20 600 (23.6)

MS4800A-14-0400

40 400 (15.7)

MS4800A-20-0400

40 400 (15.7)

MS4800A-30-0400

20 400 (15.7)

MS4800A-40-0720

24 720 (28.3)

MS4800A-14-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MS4800A-20-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MS4800A-30-0440

22 440 (17.3)

MS4800A-40-0840

28 840 (33.0)

MS4800A-14-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MS4800A-20-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MS4800A-30-0480

24 480 (18.9)

MS4800A-40-0960

32 960 (37.8)

MS4800A-14-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MS4800A-20-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MS4800A-30-0520

26 520 (20.5)

MS4800A-40-1080

36 1080 (42.5)

MS4800A-14-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MS4800A-20-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MS4800A-30-0560

28 560 (22.0)

MS4800A-40-1200

40 1200 (47.2)

MS4800A-14-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MS4800A-20-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MS4800A-30-0600

30 600 (23.6)

MS4800A-40-1320

44 1320 (52.0)

MS4800A-14-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MS4800A-20-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MS4800A-30-0640

32 640 (25.2)

MS4800A-40-1440

48 1440 (56.7)

MS4800A-14-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MS4800A-20-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MS4800A-30-0680

34 680 (26.8)

MS4800A-40-1560

52 1560 (61.4)

MS4800A-14-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MS4800A-20-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MS4800A-30-0720

36 720 (28.3)

MS4800A-40-1680

56 1680 (66.1)

MS4800A-14-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MS4800A-20-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MS4800A-30-0760

38 760 (29.9)

MS4800A-40-1800

60 1800 (70.9)

MS4800A-14-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MS4800A-20-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MS4800A-30-0800

40 800 (31.5)

MS4800A-40-1920

64 1920 (75.6)

MS4800A-14-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MS4800A-20-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MS4800A-30-0840

42 840 (33.0)

MS4800A-40-2040

68 2040 (80.3)

MS4800A-14-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MS4800A-20-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MS4800A-30-0880

44 880 (34.6)

MS4800A-14-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MS4800A-20-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MS4800A-30-0920

46 920 (36.2)

MS4800A-14-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MS4800A-20-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MS4800A-30-0960

48 960 (37.8)

MS4800A-14-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MS4800A-20-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MS4800A-30-1000

50 1000 (39.4)

MS4800A-14-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MS4800A-20-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MS4800A-30-1040

52 1040 (40.9)

MS4800A-14-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MS4800A-20-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MS4800A-30-1080

54 1080 (42.5)

MS4800A-14-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MS4800A-20-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MS4800A-30-1120

56 1120 (44.1)

MS4800A-14-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MS4800A-20-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MS4800A-30-1160

58 1160 (45.8)

MS4800A-14-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MS4800A-20-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MS4800A-30-1200

60 1200 (47.2)

MS4800A-14-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MS4800A-20-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MS4800A-30-1240

62 1240 (48.8)

MS4800A-14-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MS4800A-20-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MS4800A-30-1280

64 1280 (50.4)

MS4800A-14-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MS4800A-20-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MS4800A-30-1320

66 1320 (52.0)

MS4800A-14-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MS4800A-20-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MS4800A-30-1360

68 1360 (53.5)

MS4800A-14-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MS4800A-20-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MS4800A-30-1400

70 1400 (55.1)

MS4800A-14-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MS4800A-20-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MS4800A-30-1440

72 1440 (56.7)

MS4800A-14-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MS4800A-20-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MS4800A-30-1480

74 1480 (58.3)

MS4800A-14-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MS4800A-20-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MS4800A-30-1520

76 1520 (59.8)

MS4800A-14-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MS4800A-20-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MS4800A-30-1560

78 1560 (61.4)

MS4800A-14-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MS4800A-20-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MS4800A-30-1600

80 1600 (63.0)

MS4800A-14-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MS4800A-20-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MS4800A-30-1640

82 1640 (64.6)

MS4800A-14-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MS4800A-20-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MS4800A-30-1680

84 1680 (66.1)

MS4800A-14-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MS4800A-20-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MS4800A-30-1720

86 1720 (67.7)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MS4800A-14-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MS4800A-20-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MS4800A-30-1760

88 1760 (69.3)

MS4800A-14-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MS4800A-20-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MS4800A-30-1800

90 1800 (70.9)

MS4800A-30-1840

92 1840 (72.4)

MS4800A-30-1880

94 1880 (74.0)

MS4800A-30-1920

96 1920 (75.6)

MS4800A-30-1960

98 1960 (77.2)

MS4800A-30-2000

100 2000 (78.7)

MS4800A-30-2040

102 2040 (80.3)

MS4800A-30-2080

104 2080 (81.9)

MS4800A-30-2120

106 2120 (83.5)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-55

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Model Numbers (continued)
BASIC PDM (Programming Diagnostic Module) CONFIGURED

Model

No. of Beams

MS4800B-14-0280

28 280 (11.0)

MS4800B-20-0280

28 280 (11.0)

MS4800B-30-0280

14 280 (11.0)

MS4800B-40-0360

12 360 (14.1)

MS4800B-14-0320

32 320 (12.6)

MS4800B-20-0320

32 320 (12.6)

MS4800B-30-0320

16 320 (12.6)

MS4800B-40-0480

16 480 (18.9)

MS4800B-14-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MS4800B-20-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MS4800B-30-0360

18 360 (14.1)

MS4800B-40-0600

20 600 (23.6)

MS4800B-14-0400

40 400 (15.7)

MS4800B-20-0400

40 400 (15.7)

MS4800B-30-0400

20 400 (15.7)

MS4800B-40-0720

24 720 (28.3)

MS4800B-14-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MS4800B-20-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MS4800B-30-0440

22 440 (17.3)

MS4800B-40-0840

28 840 (33.0)

MS4800B-14-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MS4800B-20-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MS4800B-30-0480

24 480 (18.9)

MS4800B-40-0960

32 960 (37.8)

MS4800B-14-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MS4800B-20-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MS4800B-30-0520

26 520 (20.5)

MS4800B-40-1080

36 1080 (42.5)

MS4800B-14-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MS4800B-20-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MS4800B-30-0560

28 560 (22.0)

MS4800B-40-1200

40 1200 (47.2)

MS4800B-14-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MS4800B-20-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MS4800B-30-0600

30 600 (23.6)

MS4800B-40-1320

44 1320 (52.0)

MS4800B-14-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MS4800B-20-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MS4800B-30-0640

32 640 (25.2)

MS4800B-40-1440

48 1440 (56.7)

MS4800B-14-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MS4800B-20-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MS4800B-30-0680

34 680 (26.8)

MS4800B-40-1560

52 1560 (61.4)

MS4800B-14-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MS4800B-20-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MS4800B-30-0720

36 720 (28.3)

MS4800B-40-1680

56 1680 (66.1)

MS4800B-14-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MS4800B-20-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MS4800B-30-0760

38 760 (29.9)

MS4800B-40-1800

60 1800 (70.9)

MS4800B-14-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MS4800B-20-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MS4800B-30-0800

40 800 (31.5)

MS4800B-40-1920

64 1920 (75.6)

MS4800B-14-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MS4800B-20-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MS4800B-30-0840

42 840 (33.0)

MS4800B-40-2040

68 2040 (80.3)

MS4800B-14-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MS4800B-20-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MS4800B-30-0880

44 880 (34.6)

MS4800B-14-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MS4800B-20-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MS4800B-30-0920

46 920 (36.2)

MS4800B-14-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MS4800B-20-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MS4800B-30-0960

48 960 (37.8)

MS4800B-14-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MS4800B-20-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MS4800B-30-1000

50 1000 (39.4)

MS4800B-14-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MS4800B-20-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MS4800B-30-1040

52 1040 (40.9)

MS4800B-14-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MS4800B-20-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MS4800B-30-1080

54 1080 (42.5)

MS4800B-14-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MS4800B-20-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MS4800B-30-1120

56 1120 (44.1)

MS4800B-14-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MS4800B-20-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MS4800B-30-1160

58 1160 (45.8)

MS4800B-14-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MS4800B-20-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MS4800B-30-1200

60 1200 (47.2)

MS4800B-14-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MS4800B-20-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MS4800B-30-1240

62 1240 (48.8)

MS4800B-14-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MS4800B-20-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MS4800B-30-1280

64 1280 (50.4)

MS4800B-14-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MS4800B-20-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MS4800B-30-1320

66 1320 (52.0)

MS4800B-14-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MS4800B-20-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MS4800B-30-1360

68 1360 (53.5)

MS4800B-14-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MS4800B-20-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MS4800B-30-1400

70 1400 (55.1)

MS4800B-14-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MS4800B-20-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MS4800B-30-1440

72 1440 (56.7)

MS4800B-14-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MS4800B-20-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MS4800B-30-1480

74 1480 (58.3)

MS4800B-14-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MS4800B-20-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MS4800B-30-1520

76 1520 (59.8)

MS4800B-14-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MS4800B-20-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MS4800B-30-1560

78 1560 (61.4)

MS4800B-14-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MS4800B-20-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MS4800B-30-1600

80 1600 (63.0)

MS4800B-14-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MS4800B-20-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MS4800B-30-1640

82 1640 (64.6)

MS4800B-14-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MS4800B-20-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MS4800B-30-1680

84 1680 (66.1)

MS4800B-14-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MS4800B-20-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MS4800B-30-1720

86 1720 (67.7)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MS4800B-14-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MS4800B-20-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MS4800B-30-1760

88 1760 (69.3)

MS4800B-14-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MS4800B-20-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MS4800B-30-1800

90 1800 (70.9)

MS4800B-30-1840

92 1840 (72.4)

MS4800B-30-1880

94 1880 (74.0)

MS4800B-30-1920

96 1920 (75.6)

MS4800B-30-1960

98 1960 (77.2)

MS4800B-30-2000

100 2000 (78.7)

MS4800B-30-2040

102 2040 (80.3)

MS4800B-30-2080

104 2080 (81.9)

MS4800B-30-2120

106 2120 (83.5)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-56

40 mm Object Resolution

No. of Beams

30 mm Object Resolution

No. of Beams

20 mm Object Resolution

No. of Beams

14 mm Object Resolution

www.sti.com/info

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Model Numbers (continued)
STANDARD SWITCH CONFIGURED

Model

No. of Beams

40 mm Object Resolution

No. of Beams

30 mm Object Resolution

No. of Beams

20 mm Object Resolution

No. of Beams

14 mm Object Resolution

MS4800S-14-0280

28 280 (11.0)

MS4800S-20-0280

28 280 (11.0)

MS4800S-30-0280

14 280 (11.0)

MS4800S-40-0360

12 360 (14.1)

MS4800S-14-0320

32 320 (12.6)

MS4800S-20-0320

32 320 (12.6)

MS4800S-30-0320

16 320 (12.6)

MS4800S-40-0480

16 480 (18.9)

MS4800S-14-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MS4800S-20-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MS4800S-30-0360

18 360 (14.1)

MS4800S-40-0600

20 600 (23.6)

MS4800S-14-0400

40 400 (15.7)

MS4800S-20-0400

40 400 (15.7)

MS4800S-30-0400

20 400 (15.7)

MS4800S-40-0720

24 720 (28.3)

MS4800S-14-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MS4800S-20-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MS4800S-30-0440

22 440 (17.3)

MS4800S-40-0840

28 840 (33.0)

MS4800S-14-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MS4800S-20-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MS4800S-30-0480

24 480 (18.9)

MS4800S-40-0960

32 960 (37.8)

MS4800S-14-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MS4800S-20-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MS4800S-30-0520

26 520 (20.5)

MS4800S-40-1080

36 1080 (42.5)

MS4800S-14-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MS4800S-20-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MS4800S-30-0560

28 560 (22.0)

MS4800S-40-1200

40 1200 (47.2)

MS4800S-14-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MS4800S-20-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MS4800S-30-0600

30 600 (23.6)

MS4800S-40-1320

44 1320 (52.0)

MS4800S-14-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MS4800S-20-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MS4800S-30-0640

32 640 (25.2)

MS4800S-40-1440

48 1440 (56.7)

MS4800S-14-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MS4800S-20-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MS4800S-30-0680

34 680 (26.8)

MS4800S-40-1560

52 1560 (61.4)

MS4800S-14-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MS4800S-20-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MS4800S-30-0720

36 720 (28.3)

MS4800S-40-1680

56 1680 (66.1)

MS4800S-14-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MS4800S-20-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MS4800S-30-0760

38 760 (29.9)

MS4800S-40-1800

60 1800 (70.9)

MS4800S-14-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MS4800S-20-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MS4800S-30-0800

40 800 (31.5)

MS4800S-40-1920

64 1920 (75.6)

MS4800S-14-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MS4800S-20-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MS4800S-30-0840

42 840 (33.0)

MS4800S-40-2040

68 2040 (80.3)

MS4800S-14-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MS4800S-20-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MS4800S-30-0880

44 880 (34.6)

MS4800S-14-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MS4800S-20-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MS4800S-30-0920

46 920 (36.2)

MS4800S-14-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MS4800S-20-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MS4800S-30-0960

48 960 (37.8)

MS4800S-14-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MS4800S-20-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MS4800S-30-1000

50 1000 (39.4)

MS4800S-14-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MS4800S-20-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MS4800S-30-1040

52 1040 (40.9)

MS4800S-14-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MS4800S-20-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MS4800S-30-1080

54 1080 (42.5)

MS4800S-14-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MS4800S-20-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MS4800S-30-1120

56 1120 (44.1)

MS4800S-14-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MS4800S-20-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MS4800S-30-1160

58 1160 (45.8)

MS4800S-14-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MS4800S-20-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MS4800S-30-1200

60 1200 (47.2)

MS4800S-14-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MS4800S-20-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MS4800S-30-1240

62 1240 (48.8)

MS4800S-14-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MS4800S-20-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MS4800S-30-1280

64 1280 (50.4)

MS4800S-14-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MS4800S-20-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MS4800S-30-1320

66 1320 (52.0)

MS4800S-14-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MS4800S-20-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MS4800S-30-1360

68 1360 (53.5)

MS4800S-14-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MS4800S-20-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MS4800S-30-1400

70 1400 (55.1)

MS4800S-14-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MS4800S-20-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MS4800S-30-1440

72 1440 (56.7)

MS4800S-14-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MS4800S-20-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MS4800S-30-1480

74 1480 (58.3)

MS4800S-14-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MS4800S-20-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MS4800S-30-1520

76 1520 (59.8)

MS4800S-14-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MS4800S-20-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MS4800S-30-1560

78 1560 (61.4)

MS4800S-14-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MS4800S-20-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MS4800S-30-1600

80 1600 (63.0)

MS4800S-14-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MS4800S-20-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MS4800S-30-1640

82 1640 (64.6)

MS4800S-14-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MS4800S-20-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MS4800S-30-1680

84 1680 (66.1)

MS4800S-14-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MS4800S-20-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MS4800S-30-1720

86 1720 (67.7)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MS4800S-14-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MS4800S-20-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MS4800S-30-1760

88 1760 (69.3)

MS4800S-14-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MS4800S-20-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MS4800S-30-1800

90 1800 (70.9)

Quick Fixed Blanking
Add “–SB1” suffix to any MS/MSF4800S version that requires
Quick Fixed Blanking. i.e. MSF4800S-40-2040-SB1.

MS4800S-30-1840

92 1840 (72.4)

MS4800S-30-1880

94 1880 (74.0)

MS4800S-30-1920

96 1920 (75.6)

MS4800S-30-1960

98 1960 (77.2)

MS4800S-30-2000

100 2000 (78.7)

MS4800S-30-2040

102 2040 (80.3)

MS4800S-30-2080

104 2080 (81.9)

MS4800S-30-2120

106 2120 (83.5)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-57

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Model Numbers (continued)
CASCADABLE — ADVANCED 1ST SEGMENT PDM (Programming Diagnostic Module) CONFIGURED
(Maximum of four segments or 256 total beams)

Model

MSF4800A-14-0320

28 280 (11.0)

MSF4800A-20-0280

32 320 (12.6)

MSF4800A-20-0320

28 280 (11.0)

MSF4800A-30-0280

32 320 (12.6)

MSF4800A-30-0320

MSF4800A-14-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MSF4800A-20-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MSF4800A-14-0400

40 400 (15.7)

MSF4800A-20-0400

MSF4800A-14-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MSF4800A-14-0480

Model

14 280 (11.0)

MSF4800A-40-0360

12 360 (14.1)

16 320 (12.6)

MSF4800A-40-0480

16 480 (18.9)

MSF4800A-30-0360

18 360 (14.1)

MSF4800A-40-0600

20 600 (23.6)

40 400 (15.7)

MSF4800A-30-0400

20 400 (15.7)

MSF4800A-40-0720

24 720 (28.3)

MSF4800A-20-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MSF4800A-30-0440

22 440 (17.3)

MSF4800A-40-0840

28 840 (33.0)

48 480 (18.9)

MSF4800A-20-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MSF4800A-30-0480

24 480 (18.9)

MSF4800A-40-0960

32 960 (37.8)

MSF4800A-14-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MSF4800A-20-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MSF4800A-30-0520

26 520 (20.5)

MSF4800A-40-1080

36 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800A-14-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MSF4800A-20-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MSF4800A-30-0560

28 560 (22.0)

MSF4800A-40-1200

40 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800A-14-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MSF4800A-20-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MSF4800A-30-0600

30 600 (23.6)

MSF4800A-40-1320

44 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800A-14-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MSF4800A-20-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MSF4800A-30-0640

32 640 (25.2)

MSF4800A-40-1440

48 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800A-14-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MSF4800A-20-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MSF4800A-30-0680

34 680 (26.8)

MSF4800A-40-1560

52 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800A-14-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MSF4800A-20-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MSF4800A-30-0720

36 720 (28.3)

MSF4800A-40-1680

56 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800A-14-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MSF4800A-20-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MSF4800A-30-0760

38 760 (29.9)

MSF4800A-40-1800

60 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800A-14-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MSF4800A-20-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MSF4800A-30-0800

40 800 (31.5)

MSF4800A-40-1920

64 1920 (75.6)

MSF4800A-14-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MSF4800A-20-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MSF4800A-30-0840

42 840 (33.0)

MSF4800A-40-2040

68 2040 (80.3)

MSF4800A-14-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MSF4800A-20-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MSF4800A-30-0880

44 880 (34.6)

MSF4800A-14-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MSF4800A-20-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MSF4800A-30-0920

46 920 (36.2)

MSF4800A-14-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MSF4800A-20-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MSF4800A-30-0960

48 960 (37.8)

MSF4800A-14-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800A-20-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800A-30-1000

50 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800A-14-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800A-20-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800A-30-1040

52 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800A-14-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800A-20-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800A-30-1080

54 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800A-14-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800A-20-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800A-30-1120

56 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800A-14-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800A-20-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800A-30-1160

58 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800A-14-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800A-20-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800A-30-1200

60 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800A-14-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800A-20-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800A-30-1240

62 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800A-14-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800A-20-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800A-30-1280

64 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800A-14-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800A-20-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800A-30-1320

66 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800A-14-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800A-20-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800A-30-1360

68 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800A-14-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800A-20-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800A-30-1400

70 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800A-14-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800A-20-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800A-30-1440

72 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800A-14-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800A-20-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800A-30-1480

74 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800A-14-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800A-20-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800A-30-1520

76 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800A-14-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800A-20-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800A-30-1560

78 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800A-14-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800A-20-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800A-30-1600

80 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800A-14-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800A-20-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800A-30-1640

82 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800A-14-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800A-20-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800A-30-1680

84 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800A-14-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MSF4800A-20-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MSF4800A-30-1720

86 1720 (67.7)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MSF4800A-14-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800A-20-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800A-30-1760

88 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800A-14-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800A-20-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800A-30-1800

90 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800A-30-1840

92 1840 (72.4)

MSF4800A-30-1880

94 1880 (74.0)

MSF4800A-30-1920

96 1920 (75.6)

MSF4800A-30-1960

98 1960 (77.2)

MSF4800A-30-2000

100 2000 (78.7)

MSF4800A-30-2040

102 2040 (80.3)

MSF4800A-30-2080

104 2080 (81.9)

MSF4800A-30-2120

106 2120 (83.5)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-58

40 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

Model

30 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

MSF4800A-14-0280

20 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

Model

No. of Beams

14 mm Object Resolution

www.sti.com/info

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Model Numbers (continued)
BASIC CASCADABLE PDM (Programming Diagnostic Module) CONFIGURED
(Maximum of four segments or 256 total beams)

Model

MSF4800B-14-0320

28 280 (11.0)

MSF4800B-20-0280

32 320 (12.6)

MSF4800B-20-0320

28 280 (11.0)

MSF4800B-30-0280

32 320 (12.6)

MSF4800B-30-0320

MSF4800B-14-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MSF4800B-20-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MSF4800B-14-0400
MSF4800B-14-0440

40 400 (15.7)

MSF4800B-20-0400

44 440 (17.3)

MSF4800B-20-0440

MSF4800B-14-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MSF4800B-14-0520

40 mm Object Resolution

Model

No. of Beams

Model

30 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

MSF4800B-14-0280

20 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

Model

No. of Beams

14 mm Object Resolution

14 280 (11.0)

MSF4800B-40-0360

12 360 (14.1)

16 320 (12.6)

MSF4800B-40-0480

16 480 (18.9)

MSF4800B-30-0360

18 360 (14.1)

MSF4800B-40-0600

20 600 (23.6)

40 400 (15.7)

MSF4800B-30-0400

20 400 (15.7)

MSF4800B-40-0720

24 720 (28.3)

44 440 (17.3)

MSF4800B-30-0440

22 440 (17.3)

MSF4800B-40-0840

28 840 (33.0)

MSF4800B-20-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MSF4800B-30-0480

24 480 (18.9)

MSF4800B-40-0960

32 960 (37.8)

52 520 (20.5)

MSF4800B-20-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MSF4800B-30-0520

26 520 (20.5)

MSF4800B-40-1080

36 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800B-14-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MSF4800B-20-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MSF4800B-30-0560

28 560 (22.0)

MSF4800B-40-1200

40 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800B-14-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MSF4800B-20-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MSF4800B-30-0600

30 600 (23.6)

MSF4800B-40-1320

44 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800B-14-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MSF4800B-20-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MSF4800B-30-0640

32 640 (25.2)

MSF4800B-40-1440

48 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800B-14-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MSF4800B-20-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MSF4800B-30-0680

34 680 (26.8)

MSF4800B-40-1560

52 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800B-14-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MSF4800B-20-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MSF4800B-30-0720

36 720 (28.3)

MSF4800B-40-1680

56 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800B-14-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MSF4800B-20-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MSF4800B-30-0760

38 760 (29.9)

MSF4800B-40-1800

60 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800B-14-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MSF4800B-20-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MSF4800B-30-0800

40 800 (31.5)

MSF4800B-40-1920

64 1920 (75.6)

MSF4800B-14-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MSF4800B-20-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MSF4800B-30-0840

42 840 (33.0)

MSF4800B-40-2040

68 2040 (80.3)

MSF4800B-14-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MSF4800B-20-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MSF4800B-30-0880

44 880 (34.6)

MSF4800B-14-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MSF4800B-20-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MSF4800B-30-0920

46 920 (36.2)

MSF4800B-14-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MSF4800B-20-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MSF4800B-30-0960

48 960 (37.8)

MSF4800B-14-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800B-20-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800B-30-1000

50 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800B-14-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800B-20-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800B-30-1040

52 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800B-14-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800B-20-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800B-30-1080

54 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800B-14-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800B-20-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800B-30-1120

56 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800B-14-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800B-20-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800B-30-1160

58 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800B-14-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800B-20-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800B-30-1200

60 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800B-14-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800B-20-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800B-30-1240

62 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800B-14-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800B-20-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800B-30-1280

64 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800B-14-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800B-20-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800B-30-1320

66 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800B-14-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800B-20-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800B-30-1360

68 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800B-14-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800B-20-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800B-30-1400

70 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800B-14-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800B-20-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800B-30-1440

72 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800B-14-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800B-20-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800B-30-1480

74 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800B-14-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800B-20-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800B-30-1520

76 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800B-14-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800B-20-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800B-30-1560

78 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800B-14-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800B-20-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800B-30-1600

80 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800B-14-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800B-20-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800B-30-1640

82 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800B-14-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800B-20-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800B-30-1680

84 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800B-14-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MSF4800B-20-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MSF4800B-30-1720

86 1720 (67.7)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MSF4800B-14-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800B-20-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800B-30-1760

88 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800B-14-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800B-20-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800B-30-1800

90 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800B-30-1840

92 1840 (72.4)

MSF4800B-30-1880

94 1880 (74.0)

MSF4800B-30-1920

96 1920 (75.6)

MSF4800B-30-1960

98 1960 (77.2)

MSF4800B-30-2000

100 2000 (78.7)

MSF4800B-30-2040

102 2040 (80.3)

MSF4800B-30-2080

104 2080 (81.9)

MSF4800B-30-2120

106 2120 (83.5)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-59

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Model Numbers (continued)
STANDARD CASCADABLE SWITCH CONFIGURED
(Maximum of four segments or 256 total beams)

Model

MSF4800S-14-0320

28 280 (11.0)

MSF4800S-20-0280

32 320 (12.6)

MSF4800S-20-0320

28 280 (11.0)

MSF4800S-30-0280

32 320 (12.6)

MSF4800S-30-0320

MSF4800S-14-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MSF4800S-20-0360

36 360 (14.1)

MSF4800S-14-0400

40 400 (15.7)

MSF4800S-20-0400

MSF4800S-14-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MSF4800S-14-0480

Model

14 280 (11.0)

MSF4800S-40-0360

12 360 (14.1)

16 320 (12.6)

MSF4800S-40-0480

16 480 (18.9)

MSF4800S-30-0360

18 360 (14.1)

MSF4800S-40-0600

20 600 (23.6)

40 400 (15.7)

MSF4800S-30-0400

20 400 (15.7)

MSF4800S-40-0720

24 720 (28.3)

MSF4800S-20-0440

44 440 (17.3)

MSF4800S-30-0440

22 440 (17.3)

MSF4800S-40-0840

28 840 (33.0)

48 480 (18.9)

MSF4800S-20-0480

48 480 (18.9)

MSF4800S-30-0480

24 480 (18.9)

MSF4800S-40-0960

32 960 (37.8)

MSF4800S-14-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MSF4800S-20-0520

52 520 (20.5)

MSF4800S-30-0520

26 520 (20.5)

MSF4800S-40-1080

36 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800S-14-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MSF4800S-20-0560

56 560 (22.0)

MSF4800S-30-0560

28 560 (22.0)

MSF4800S-40-1200

40 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800S-14-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MSF4800S-20-0600

60 600 (23.6)

MSF4800S-30-0600

30 600 (23.6)

MSF4800S-40-1320

44 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800S-14-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MSF4800S-20-0640

64 640 (25.2)

MSF4800S-30-0640

32 640 (25.2)

MSF4800S-40-1440

48 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800S-14-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MSF4800S-20-0680

68 680 (26.8)

MSF4800S-30-0680

34 680 (26.8)

MSF4800S-40-1560

52 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800S-14-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MSF4800S-20-0720

72 720 (28.3)

MSF4800S-30-0720

36 720 (28.3)

MSF4800S-40-1680

56 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800S-14-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MSF4800S-20-0760

76 760 (29.9)

MSF4800S-30-0760

38 760 (29.9)

MSF4800S-40-1800

60 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800S-14-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MSF4800S-20-0800

80 800 (31.5)

MSF4800S-30-0800

40 800 (31.5)

MSF4800S-40-1920

64 1920 (75.6)

MSF4800S-14-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MSF4800S-20-0840

84 840 (33.0)

MSF4800S-30-0840

42 840 (33.0)

MSF4800S-40-2040

68 2040 (80.3)

MSF4800S-14-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MSF4800S-20-0880

88 880 (34.6)

MSF4800S-30-0880

44 880 (34.6)

MSF4800S-14-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MSF4800S-20-0920

92 920 (36.2)

MSF4800S-30-0920

46 920 (36.2)

MSF4800S-14-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MSF4800S-20-0960

96 960 (37.8)

MSF4800S-30-0960

48 960 (37.8)

MSF4800S-14-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800S-20-1000

100 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800S-30-1000

50 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800S-14-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800S-20-1040

104 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800S-30-1040

52 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800S-14-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800S-20-1080

108 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800S-30-1080

54 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800S-14-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800S-20-1120

112 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800S-30-1120

56 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800S-14-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800S-20-1160

116 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800S-30-1160

58 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800S-14-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800S-20-1200

116 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800S-30-1200

60 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800S-14-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800S-20-1240

120 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800S-30-1240

62 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800S-14-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800S-20-1280

128 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800S-30-1280

64 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800S-14-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800S-20-1320

132 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800S-30-1320

66 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800S-14-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800S-20-1360

136 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800S-30-1360

68 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800S-14-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800S-20-1400

140 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800S-30-1400

70 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800S-14-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800S-20-1440

144 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800S-30-1440

72 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800S-14-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800S-20-1480

148 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800S-30-1480

74 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800S-14-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800S-20-1520

152 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800S-30-1520

76 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800S-14-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800S-20-1560

156 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800S-30-1560

78 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800S-14-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800S-20-1600

160 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800S-30-1600

80 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800S-14-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800S-20-1640

164 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800S-30-1640

82 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800S-14-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800S-20-1680

168 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800S-30-1680

84 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800S-14-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MSF4800S-20-1720

172 1720 (67.7)

MSF4800S-30-1720

86 1720 (67.7)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MSF4800S-14-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800S-20-1760

176 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800S-30-1760

88 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800S-14-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800S-20-1800

180 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800S-30-1800

90 1800 (70.9)

Quick Fixed Blanking
Add “–SB1” suffix to any MS/MSF4800S version that requires
Quick Fixed Blanking. i.e. MSF4800S-40-2040-SB1.

MSF4800S-30-1840

92 1840 (72.4)

MSF4800S-30-1880

94 1880 (74.0)

MSF4800S-30-1920

96 1920 (75.6)

MSF4800S-30-1960

98 1960 (77.2)

MSF4800S-30-2000

100 2000 (78.7)

MSF4800S-30-2040

102 2040 (80.3)

MSF4800S-30-2080

104 2080 (81.9)

MSF4800S-30-2120

106 2120 (83.5)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-60

40 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

Model

30 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

MSF4800S-14-0280

20 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

Model

No. of Beams

14 mm Object Resolution

www.sti.com/info

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Model Numbers (continued)
CASCADABLE SEGMENT EXTENSIONS
(Maximum of four segments or 256 total beams)

Model

MSF4800-14-0280-XR2

24 240 (9.4)

MSF4800-20-0280-XR2

28 280 (11.0)

MSF4800-20-0320-XR2

28 280 (11.0)

MSF4800-30-0280-XR2

32 320 (12.6)

MSF4800-30-0320-XR2

MSF4800-14-0320-XR2

32 320 (12.6)

MSF4800-20-0360-XR2

36 360 (14.1)

MSF4800-14-0360-XR2
MSF4800-14-0400-XR2

36 360 (14.1)

MSF4800-20-0400-XR2

40 400 (15.7)

MSF4800-20-0440-XR2

MSF4800-14-0440-XR2

44 440 (17.3)

MSF4800-14-0480-XR2

40 mm Object Resolution

Model

No. of Beams

Model

30 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

MSF4800-14-0240-XR2

20 mm Object Resolution
No. of Beams

Model

No. of Beams

14 mm Object Resolution

14 280 (11.0)

MSF4800-40-0360-XR2

12 360 (14.1)

16 320 (12.6)

MSF4800-40-0480-XR2

16 480 (18.9)

MSF4800-30-0360-XR2

18 360 (14.1)

MSF4800-40-0600-XR2

20 600 (23.6)

40 400 (15.7)

MSF4800-30-0400-XR2

20 400 (15.7)

MSF4800-40-0720-XR2

24 720 (28.3)

44 440 (17.3)

MSF4800-30-0440-XR2

22 440 (17.3)

MSF4800-40-0840-XR2

28 840 (33.0)

MSF4800-20-0480-XR2

48 480 (18.9)

MSF4800-30-0480-XR2

24 480 (18.9)

MSF4800-40-0960-XR2

32 960 (37.8)

48 480 (18.9)

MSF4800-20-0520-XR2

52 520 (20.5)

MSF4800-30-0520-XR2

26 520 (20.5)

MSF4800-40-1080-XR2

36 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800-14-0520-XR2

52 520 (20.5)

MSF4800-20-0560-XR2

56 560 (22.0)

MSF4800-30-0560-XR2

28 560 (22.0)

MSF4800-40-1200-XR2

40 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800-14-0560-XR2

56 560 (22.0)

MSF4800-20-0600-XR2

60 600 (23.6)

MSF4800-30-0600-XR2

30 600 (23.6)

MSF4800-40-1320-XR2

44 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800-14-0600-XR2

60 600 (23.6)

MSF4800-20-0640-XR2

64 640 (25.2)

MSF4800-30-0640-XR2

32 640 (25.2)

MSF4800-40-1440-XR2

48 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800-14-0640-XR2

64 640 (25.2)

MSF4800-20-0680-XR2

68 680 (26.8)

MSF4800-30-0680-XR2

34 680 (26.8)

MSF4800-40-1560-XR2

52 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800-14-0680-XR2

68 680 (26.8)

MSF4800-20-0720-XR2

72 720 (28.3)

MSF4800-30-0720-XR2

36 720 (28.3)

MSF4800-40-1680-XR2

56 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800-14-0720-XR2

72 720 (28.3)

MSF4800-20-0760-XR2

76 760 (29.9)

MSF4800-30-0760-XR2

38 760 (29.9)

MSF4800-40-1800-XR2

60 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800-14-0760-XR2

76 760 (29.9)

MSF4800-20-0800-XR2

80 800 (31.5)

MSF4800-30-0800-XR2

40 800 (31.5)

MSF4800-40-1920-XR2

64 1920 (75.6)

MSF4800-14-0800-XR2

80 800 (31.5)

MSF4800-20-0840-XR2

84 840 (33.0)

MSF4800-30-0840-XR2

42 840 (33.0)

MSF4800-40-2040-XR2

68 2040 (80.3)

MSF4800-14-0840-XR2

84 840 (33.0)

MSF4800-20-0880-XR2

88 880 (34.6)

MSF4800-30-0880-XR2

44 880 (34.6)

MSF4800-14-0880-XR2

88 880 (34.6)

MSF4800-20-0920-XR2

92 920 (36.2)

MSF4800-30-0920-XR2

46 920 (36.2)

MSF4800-14-0920-XR2

92 920 (36.2)

MSF4800-20-0960-XR2

96 960 (37.8)

MSF4800-30-0960-XR2

48 960 (37.8)

MSF4800-14-0960-XR2

96 960 (37.8)

MSF4800-20-1000-XR2 100 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800-30-1000-XR2

50 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800-14-1000-XR2 100 1000 (39.4)

MSF4800-20-1040-XR2 104 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800-30-1040-XR2

52 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800-14-1040-XR2 104 1040 (40.9)

MSF4800-20-1080-XR2 108 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800-30-1080-XR2

54 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800-14-1080-XR2 108 1080 (42.5)

MSF4800-20-1120-XR2 112 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800-30-1120-XR2

56 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800-14-1120-XR2 112 1120 (44.1)

MSF4800-20-1160-XR2 116 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800-30-1160-XR2

58 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800-14-1160-XR2 116 1160 (45.8)

MSF4800-20-1200-XR2 116 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800-30-1200-XR2

60 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800-14-1200-XR2 116 1200 (47.2)

MSF4800-20-1240-XR2 120 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800-30-1240-XR2

62 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800-14-1240-XR2 120 1240 (48.8)

MSF4800-20-1280-XR2 128 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800-30-1280-XR2

64 1280 (50.4)

MSF4800-30-1320-XR2

66 1320 (52.0)

MSF4800-30-1360-XR2

68 1360 (53.5)

MSF4800-30-1400-XR2

70 1400 (55.1)

MSF4800-30-1440-XR2

72 1440 (56.7)

MSF4800-30-1480-XR2

74 1480 (58.3)

MSF4800-30-1520-XR2

76 1520 (59.8)

MSF4800-30-1560-XR2

78 1560 (61.4)

MSF4800-30-1600-XR2

80 1600 (63.0)

MSF4800-30-1640-XR2

82 1640 (64.6)

MSF4800-30-1680-XR2

84 1680 (66.1)

MSF4800-30-1720-XR2

86 1720 (67.7)

MSF4800-30-1760-XR2

88 1760 (69.3)

MSF4800-30-1800-XR2

90 1800 (70.9)

MSF4800-30-1840-XR2

92 1840 (72.4)

MSF4800-30-1880-XR2

94 1880 (74.0)

MSF4800-30-1920-XR2

96 1920 (75.6)

MSF4800-30-1960-XR2

98 1960 (77.2)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MSF4800-14-1280-XR2 128 1280 (50.4)

Protective
Height,
in. (mm)

MSF4800-30-2000-XR2 100 2000 (78.7)
MSF4800-30-2040-XR2 102 2040 (80.3)
MSF4800-30-2080-XR2 104 2080 (81.9)
MSF4800-30-2120-XR2 106 2120 (83.5)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-61

MS4800

Safety Light Curtains

Ordering (continued)
Accessories
Receiver Cables
MS4800-CBLRX-10M
Receiver cable, 10 m (32.8 ft.)
MS4800-CBLRX-15M
Receiver cable, 15 m (49.2 ft.)
MS4800-CBLRX-30M
Receiver cable, 30 m (98.5 ft.)
Transmitter Cables
MS4800-CBLTX-10M
Transmitter cable, 10 m (32.8 ft.)
MS4800-CBLTX-15M
Transmitter cable, 15 m (49.2 ft.)
MS4800-CBLTX-30M
Transmitter cable, 30 m (98.5 ft.)
Transmitter Interconnect Cables (for Cascading)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-003M Transmitter interconnect cable, 0.3 m (12 in.)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-005M Transmitter interconnect cable, 0.5 m (20 in.)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-01M Transmitter interconnect cable, 1 m (3.3 ft.)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-02M Transmitter interconnect cable, 2 m (6.6 ft.)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-03M Transmitter interconnect cable, 3 m (10 ft.)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-05M Transmitter interconnect cable, 5 m (16 ft.)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-10M Transmitter interconnect cable, 10 m (33 ft.)
Receiver Interconnect Cables (for Cascading)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-003M Receiver interconnect cable, 0.3 m (12 in.)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-005M Receiver interconnect cable, 0.5 m (20 in.)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-01M Receiver interconnect cable, 1 m (3.3 ft.)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-02M Receiver interconnect cable, 2 m (6.6 ft.)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-03M Receiver interconnect cable, 3 m (10 ft.)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-05M Receiver interconnect cable, 5 m (16 ft.)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-10M Receiver interconnect cable, 10 m (33 ft.)
RM-6 (Mute) Cables
MS4800-CBLMT-10M
MSF4800 to RM-6 cable, 10 m (33 ft.)
MS4800-CBLMT-15M
MSF4800 to RM-6 cable, 15 m (49.2 ft.)
MS4800-CBLMT-30M
MSF4800 to RM-6 cable, 30 m (98.5 ft.)
Double-Ended Transmitter Cables
MS4800-CBLTXT-05M
Double-ended, quick disconnect, 5 m (16.4 ft.)
MS4800-CBLTXT-10M
Double-ended, quick disconnect, 10 m (32.8 ft.)
MS4800-CBLTXT-15M
Double-ended, quick disconnect, 15 m (49.2 ft.)
MS4800-CBLTXT-25M
Double-ended, quick disconnect, 25 m (82.0 ft.)
Double-Ended Receiver Cables
MS4800-CBLRXT-05M
Double-ended, quick disconnect, 5 m (16.4 ft.)
MS4800-CBLRXT-10M
Double-ended, quick disconnect, 10 m (32.8 ft.)
MS4800-CBLRXT-15M
Double-ended, quick disconnect, 15 m (49.2 ft.)
MS4800-CBLRXT-25M
Double-ended, quick disconnect, 25 m (82.0 ft.)
Bulkhead Connectors
MS4800-PMCTX-01M
Transmitter bulkhead connector, 1 m (3.28 ft.)
leads
MS4800-PMCTX-05M
Transmitter bulkhead connector, 5 m (16.4 ft.)
leads
MS4800-PMCRX-01M
Receiver bulkhead connector, 1 m (3.28 ft.)
leads
MS4800-PMCRX-05M
Receiver bulkhead connector, 5 m (16.4 ft.)
leads

information on Resource
✎ For
Modules, see page D-63
information on safety light
✎ For
curtain accessories, see page D-68
information weld slag protective
✎ For
shields, see page D-74
information on IP67 enclosures,
✎ For
see page D-75

Adapter Connectors
MS4800-ADPT-TXS
Transmitter (standard) cable adapter MS46 to MS48
MS4800-ADPT-TXM
Transmitter (mts) cable adapter MS46 to MS48
MS4800-ADPT-RX
Receiver cable adapter MS46 to MS48
Mounting Bracket Kits
MS4800-SDM-KT1
MS48 Middle support bracket kit, 2 heads
MS4800-SDM-KT2
MS48 T-slot mounting kit, 2 heads
MS4800-MKT1
End bracket kit, 1 head
MS4800-MKT2
End bracket kit, 2 heads
Resource Modules
RM-1
RM-1 resource module
RM-2
RM-2 resource module
RM-2AC
RM-2AC resource module/power supply
RM-2AC-IP
RM-2AC resource module/power supply, IP65
RM-2AC-IP-SB1
RM-2AC-IP with SB1 quick fixed blanking option
RM-3
RM-3 mute module
RM-X
RM-X safety relay, 22.5 mm DIN enclosure
MS4800-RM6
RM-6 mute module (only for MSF4800)
Mute Lamp Kits
MTLEDC-RM3
LED clear mute lamp kit for RM-3
MTLEDA-RM3
LED amber mute lamp kit for RM-3
SB12-CLED00
LED clear mute lamp for RM-6
SB12-ALED00
LED amber mute lamp for RM-6
Programming and Diagnostics Module
MS4800-PDM
Programming and diagnostic module for the
MS/MSF4800A and B
MS4800-PDM-HDR
Mounting holder for mounting the PDM
Explosion-Proof Enclosures, Aluminum Cast Housing
(sold as singles)
MS4800-EPKT-0320
EP enclosure for MS4800-14/20/30/40-0320
(320 mm)
MS4800-EPKT-0640
EP enclosure for MS4800-30-0640 (640 mm)
MS4800-EPKT-0960
EP enclosure for MS4800-30-0960 (960 mm)
MS4800-EPKT-1240
EP enclosure for MS4800-30-1240 (1240 mm)

Safety Standards and Precautions
All models of the MiniSafe meet ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009)
and ANSI B11.19-2010. When used with mechanical power
presses, OSHA industrial safety standards apply, as stated in
OSHA 1910.217(c). For other applications, the machine guarding
requirements found in OSHA 1910.212 apply. The MiniSafe meets
ANSI and CSA requirements for control reliability requirements for
point-of-operation presence sensing devices. All controllers have
CSA-CUS acceptance and are designed to meet UL508.
MiniSafe MS4800 systems have been EC type examined to the
requirements of category 4, EN 954-1 (type 4, IEC 61496).
The MiniSafe should only be used on machinery that can
consistently and immediately stop anywhere in its cycle or stroke.
Never use a MiniSafe on a full revolution clutched power press
or machine. If the light curtain does not protect all access to the
point of operation, the unprotected access must be guarded by
other appropriate devices such as mechanical guards.
The purchaser, installer and employer have the responsibility to
meet all local, state and federal government laws, rules, codes or
regulations relating to the proper use, installation, operation and
maintenance of this control and the guarded machine. See the
Installation and Operation Manual for additional information.
All application examples described are for illustration purposes
only. Actual installations will differ from those indicated.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

D-62

www.sti.com/info

Safety Light Curtains

Resource Modules Overview

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Overview to the RM Series
STI RM Series resource modules provide the user of STI
solid-state output safety light curtains a convenient and reliable
method for enhancing and extending the capabilities of these light
curtains.

D
Converts Solid-State Outputs
to Force-Guided Relay Outputs

Connects up to Four
Independent Safety Devices

RM-1

RM-2AC

RM-4

This unit accepts the
solid-state outputs from a
single safety light curtain and
provides one pair of N.O.
force-guided safety relay
outputs and one pair of N.C.
auxiliary relay outputs. The
RM-1 operates on 24 VDC
which is supplied from the
light curtain’s safety outputs. A
single connection between the
STI safety light curtain and the
RM-1 provides monitoring of
the RM-1’s output contacts.

The RM-2AC module operates
on 100-240 VAC voltage, it
supplies DC voltage to the
safety light curtain. It provides
one N.O. and one N.O./N.C.
force-guided safety contacts.
In addition it serves as a
centralized point for easy
interfacing, offering removable
terminal blocks and a DIN-rail
mount enclosure.

Up to four STI solid-state output safety devices in any combination
can be connected to the RM-4. It provides two PNP safety outputs
and one user-selectable NPN or PNP non-safety, auxiliary output.
Additionally, connections are provided for the auxiliary output
of each safety device. The RM-4 facilitates installation as all
standard safety device functions are wired through its removable
terminal blocks. All wiring of the safety device transmitters and
receivers, as well as the 24 VDC power supply and MPCE contact
monitoring are connected to the RM-4. Status indicator lights as
well as a two-digit, seven-segment LED diagnostic display make
system monitoring and troubleshooting extremely easy. See the
following page for safety device compatibility.

RM-2
The RM-2 includes all the features of the RM-1 has, but also
serves as a central point for
terminating all signals to and
from a solid-state safety device
including MPCE monitoring
and 24 VDC.

RM-2AC-IP
The RM-2AC-IP module operates on 100-240 VAC voltage; it
supplies DC voltage to the light
curtain. It provides one N.O.
and one N.O./N.C. force-guided safety contacts. In addition,
it serves as a centralized point
for easy interfacing, offering
removable terminal blocks and
an IP65 metal enclosure.
A custom version is also
available for the MS4800SSB1. This “RM-2AC-IP-SB1”
is equipped with key
switches for quick fixed blank
programming.

Mute Module
RM-3
The RM-3 mute module is a microprocessor-controlled “Type 4”
safety device. The purpose of the RM-3 is to furnish a temporary,
automatic suspension of the safety function(s) provided by a
safety light curtain. The RM-3 is a control accessory that provides
this safety muting feature for one or two safety light curtains and is
housed in a DIN box.

RM-6
The RM-6 mute module is for use with the MSF4800A and
MSF4800S only. It provides for the wiring output of two to four
muting sensors, housed in a 22.5 mm DIN enclosure.

RM-X
The RM-X converts the
solid-state safety outputs of
a STI device to relay outputs.
It provides one N.O. and one
N.O./N.C. safety relay output.

✎

www.sti.com/info

For more information about these
Resource Modules, see pages D-65-D-67

D-63

Resource Modules Overview

Safety Light Curtains

Compatibility
The RM Series is compatible with the following products:

OS32C
Safety Laser Scanner
The OS32C is a very compact safety laser scanner. It features small size (104.5
mm profile), lightweight (1.3 kg) and
low power consumption (5 W). It has 70
flexible zone configurations, simplified
wiring and integrated management via
Ethernet.

✎

Perimeter Access
Guarding Device
PA4600
The PA4600 is a long-range,
multiple-beam safeguarding
control system. It differs from
a conventional safety light
curtain in that it provides a
much longer operating range
and a wider beam spacing.
It is an excellent choice for
safeguarding the perimeter of
a hazardous area. It is suited
to detect the torso of personnel
entering into a hazardous area
rather than detection of hands
and fingers.

✎

D-64

For information
on the OS32C,
see page B-3

F3SJ-A

MiniSafe® MS4800

The F3SJ-A Light Curtain is
a compact “two box” light
curtain with available minimum
object resolutions of 14, 20,
25, 30 and 55 mm (0.55, 0.79,
1.01, 1.18 or 2.17 in.), operating range up to 7 m (23 ft.) or
9 m (29.5 ft.), and protective
heights from 245 to 2495 mm
(9.6 to 98 in.) depending on
the protective height.

The MiniSafe MS4800 Light
Curtain is a “two box” light
curtain with available minimum
object resolutions of 14, 20, 30
and 40 mm (0.55, 0.79, 1.18
and 1.57 in.), operating range
up to 20 m (65 ft.) and protective heights from 280 to 2120
mm (11 to 83 in.). It provides
one pair of PNP solid-state
safety outputs and one nonsafety auxiliary output.

✎

For information
on the F3SJ,
see page D-37

For information
on the PA4600,
see page C-3

www.sti.com/info

✎

For information
on the MS4800,
see page D-46

Safety Light Curtains

RM-1

RM1

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Resource Module —
Converts Solid-State Outputs to
Force-Guided Relay Outputs
• Converts the solid-state safety outputs of one STI safety device
to electro-mechanical force-guided safety relay outputs
• Compatible with MS4800, F3SJ, PA4600, OS3101 and OS32C
• CE approved
• 55 mm DIN enclosure
• Removable terminal blocks
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

Safety Light Curtains

RM-2, RM-2AC & RM-2AC-IP

RM2

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Resource Module —
Converts Solid-State Outputs to
Force-Guided Relay Outputs
• Converts the solid-state safety and auxiliary outputs of one STI
safety device to electro-mechanical force-guided safety relay
outputs
• Available for DC or AC input power
• Provides connection points for all safety device functions
including MPCE monitoring and 24 VDC power
• Compatible with MS4800, F3SJ, PA4600, OS3101 and OS32C
• CE approved
• Enclosures —
RM-2: 100 mm DIN, IP20
RM-2AC: 150 mm DIN, IP20
RM-2AC-IP: metal chassis, IP65
• Removable terminal blocks
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-65

Safety Light Curtains

RM-3

RM3

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Resource Module — Mute Module

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Type 4 safety product, when used in combination with a Type 4 safety light curtain
Provides muting controls for up to two light curtains
Diagnostic display
Solid-state safety outputs
100 mm DIN box enclosure
Removable terminal blocks
DeviceNet option
Compatible with MS4800, F3SJ, PA4600, OS3101 and OS32C
A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Input Signals
• Input Power +24 VDC
• Two independent channels,
each channel is comprised
of one light curtain and up to
four mute sensors
• Start
• EDM (MPCE monitoring)
• Mute enable

Output Signals
• Two independent PNP safety
outputs
• NPN & PNP auxiliary outputs
• Mute lamp drivers (2)
• Mute auxiliary (NPN)
• Mute armed (NPN)

Indicators
• Diagnostic display
• Machine Run
• Machine Stop
• Interlock
• OSSD input active (light
curtains)
• Sensor input active
(sensors)
• Mute Enable active

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

Safety Light Curtains

RM-4

RM4

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Resource Module —
Connects up to Four
Independent Safety Devices
• Type 4 safety product when used in combination with a Type 4
safety light curtain
• Provides centralized connections for solid-state safety outputs
from up to four safety devices and produces a single pair of
solid-state safety outputs
• Diagnostic display
• 150 mm DIN enclosure
• Diagnostic display
• Removable terminal blocks
• Compatible with MS4800, F3SJ, PA4600, OS3101 and OS32C

D-66

www.sti.com/info

Safety Light Curtains

RM-6

RM6

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Resource Module —
Mute Module
•
•
•
•

Type 4 safety product when used with the MSF4800 series
Provides muting controls for one MSF4800
22.5 mm DIN box enclosure
Compatible only with the MSF4800A and MSF4800S

Safety Light Curtains

RM-X

RMX

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Resource Module —
Converts Solid-State Outputs to
Force-Guided Relay Outputs
• Converts the solid-state safety outputs of one STI safety device
to electro-mechanical force-guided safety relay outputs
• Compatible with MS4800, F3SJ, PA4600, OS3101 and OS32C
• CE approved
• 22.5 mm DIN enclosure
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

D-67

Safety Light Curtains

Accessories

Lightcurtain

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Accessories and Spare Parts
for Safety Light Curtains

Power Supplies.......................................................page D-68

Shock Mount Kits
These kits are used to isolate light
curtain receivers and transmitters from
possible sources of vibration. They can
also be used to shock-mount controllers/
power supplies and mirrors. Each kit
consists of eight mounts.

Reset Switches.......................................................page D-68

MS/MSF4800 Series

Shock Mount Kits....................................................page D-68
Test Objects............................................................page D-68
Laser Alignment Tool..............................................page D-68
Mirrors....................................................................page D-69
45° Mirror and Bracket...........................................page D-72

PA4600 Series

MS/MSF4800
Lengths 280-960

MS/MSF4800
Lengths 1000-1400

MS/MSF4800
Lengths 1440-2120

Mounting Accessories............................................page D-72
Floor Stands...........................................................page D-73
Weld Slag Protective Shields.................................page D-74
IP67 Enclosures......................................................page D-75

PA46-2-500

PA46-2-600

PA46-3-400

PA46-3-500

PA46-4-300

PA46-5-300

PA46-6-300

Part Number

Description

SHMS-18

Shock mounting kit for weight class 2

SHP4-18

Shock mounting kit for weight class 3 and 4

Test Objects
Power Supplies
For use with the STI safety products such as the F3SJ and the
MS4800, CE marked, DIN-rail mountable, Input: 115 or 230 VAC.
Part Number

Description

S8JX-G05024CD

24 VDC power supply, 50 W, 2.1 A

S8JX-G10024CD

24 VDC power supply, 100 W, 4.2 A

Replacement test objects can be ordered by part number. Make
sure to order the test object for the correct light curtain model.

Reset Switches
These switches can be mounted remotely and used to perform
the reset function on all STI safety light curtains.

Part Number

Description

STI-TO20

Test object, 19.1 mm (0.75 in.) for F3SJ-A_P20 and
MS4800-20

STI-TO30

Test object, 30 mm (1.18 in.) for F3SJ-A_P30 and
MS4800-30

STI-TO14

Test object, 14 mm (0.55 in.) for F3SJ-A_P14 and
MS4800-14

STI-TO40

Test object, 40 mm (1.57 in.) for MS4800-40

STI-TO24

Test object, 24 mm (0.94 in.) for F3SJ-A_P14,
amd MS4800-14 (with floating blanking 1-beam)

STI-TO34

Test object, 34 mm (1.34 in.) for F3SJ-A_P14
and MS4800-14 (with floating blanking 2-beam)

Laser Alignment Tool

Part Number

Description

RK-1

Key Switch Assembly, Panel Mount

RK-2

Push Button Switch Assembly, Panel Mount

RK-1
RK-2

To assist with long-range alignment of installations.
Model Number

Description

46LA

Laser alignment tool for
use with PA4600 and
MS4800

46LA

D-68

www.sti.com/info

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

Mirrors
The correct mirror is important in maintaining the integrity of a
safety light curtain system. Whenever an infrared beam strikes a
mirror a certain percentage of the signal will be lost. In order to
minimize this loss, glass and stainless steel mirrors from Omron
use materials of the highest optical quality.

Mirror Material
Mirror Material

Percentage of range lost per mirror

Front Reflective Surface Glass

12%

Polished Stainless Steel

18%

Glass mirrors are built with front reflective surface glass. This
material provides the minimum possible signal loss. For applications where the possibility of broken glass cannot be tolerated,
wide, polished stainless steel mirrors are available.
STI mirrors are available in both a narrow and a wide package.
If space permits, the wide mirrors are recommended for ease
of alignment. Narrow mirrors have 51 mm (2 in.) wide reflective
surfaces and can be used on applications where space is limited
or the range between the light curtain transmitter and receiver is
short. Wide mirrors have 108 mm (4.25 in.) wide reflective surfaces and ease alignment on applications with a large perimeter
or where there are no space limitations.
NOTE: Mirrors can only be mounted using the MIRS-xx Series
Heavy Duty Floor Stands.

Net Range Using Mirrors
(percentage of maximum range)

No. of Mirrors Used
Material

Glass

88%

77%

68%

60%

Stainless Steel

82%

67%

55%

45%

Model Number
Length

Weight
kg/lb.

Model Number

Narrow Glass

Wide Glass

Weight
kg/lb.

Wide Stainless Steel*

Narrow Stainless Steel*†

MIRN-04FG

0.8/1.74

MIRW-04FG

1.0/2.3

MIRW-04SS

MIR-04SS-ESD

MIRW-06FG

1.3/2.8

MIRW-06SS

102 mm (4 in.)
152 mm (6 in.)

Model Number

203 mm (8 in.)

MIRN-08FG

1.0/2.36

MIRW-08FG

1.5/3.3

MIRW-08SS

MIR-08SS-ESD

305 mm (12 in.)

MIRN-12FG

1.4/2.98

MIRW-12FG

1.9/4.2

MIRW-12SS

MIR-12SS-ESD

406 mm (16 in.)

MIRN-16FG

1.6/3.60

MIRW-16FG

2.4/5.2

MIRW-16SS

MIR-16SS-ESD

MIRW-18FG

2.5/5.6

MIRW-18SS

457 mm (18 in.)
508 mm (20 in.)

MIRN-20FG

1.9/4.22

MIRW-20FG

2.8/6.1

MIRW-20SS

MIR-20SS-ESD

610 mm (24 in.)

MIRN-24FG

2.2/4.84

MIRW-24FG

3.2/7.1

MIRW-24SS

MIR-24SS-ESD

711 mm (28 in.)

MIRN-28FG

2.5/5.46

MIRW-28FG

3.7/8.1

MIRW-28SS

MIR-28SS-ESD

MIRW-30FG

3.8/8.5

MIRW-30SS

762 mm (30 in.)
813 mm (32 in.)

MIRN-32FG

2.8/6.08

MIRW-32FG

4.0/9.0

MIRW-32SS

MIR-32SS-ESD

913 mm (36 in.)

MIRN-36FG

3.0/6.70

MIRW-36FG

4.5/9.9

MIRW-36SS

MIR-36SS-ESD

1016 mm (40 in.)

MIRN-40FG

3.3/7.32

MIRW-40FG

5.0/10.9

MIRW-40SS

MIR-40SS-ESD

MIRW-42FG

5.2/11.4

MIRW-42SS

1067 mm (42 in.)
1118 mm (44 in.)

MIRN-44FG

3.6/7.94

MIRW-44FG

5.4/11.9

MIRW-44SS

MIR-44SS-ESD

1219 mm (48 in.)

MIRN-48FG

3.9/8.56

MIRW-48FG

5.9/12.9

MIRW-48SS

MIR-48SS-ESD

MIRW-52FG

5.3/13.8

MIRW-52SS

1321 mm (52 in.)
1372 mm (54 in.)

MIRW-54FG

6.5/14.3

MIRW-54SS

1422 mm (56 in.)

MIRW-56FG

6.7/14.8

MIRW-56SS

1524 mm (60 in.)

MIRW-60FG

7.2/15.8

MIRW-60SS

1626 mm (64 in.)

MIRW-64FG

7.6/16.8

MIRW-64SS

1830 mm (72 in.)

MIRW-72FG

8.5/18.6

MIRW-72SS

2134 mm (84 in.)

MIRW-84FG

9.8/21.5

MIRW-84SS

2440 mm (96 in.)

MIRW-96FG

11.0/24.3

MIRW-96SS

* Consult factory for weights.
† Use for ESD applications

www.sti.com/info

D-69

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

Mirrors (continued)
Narrow Mirror Package (MIRN)

82
3.22
52
2.05

Narrow Mirror Dimensions—
Front Reflective Surface Glass

Part Number

Dimension L
mm/in.

Dimension M
mm/in.

MIRN-04FG

152/6.0

195/7.68

MIRN-08FG

254/10.0

297/11.68

MIRN-12FG

356/14.0

398/15.68

MIRN-16FG

457/18.0

500/19.68

MIRN-20FG

559/22.0

601/23.68

MIRN-24FG

660/26.0

703/27.68

MIRN-28FG

762/30.0

805/31.68

MIRN-32FG

864/34.0

906/35.68

MIRN-36FG

965/38.0

1008/39.68

MIRN-40FG

1067/42.0

1109/43.68

MIRN-44FG

1168/46.0

1211/47.68

MIRN-48FG

1270/50.0

1313/51.68

CLAMP ASSY INCLUDED

7 Dia.
0.270
(4 plcs)

32
1.25
24
0.94

L
M

CLAMP ASSY INCLUDED

13
0.50
34
1.34

Narrow Mirror Dimensions—
Stainless Steel Reflective Surface
Part Number

Dimension L
mm/in.

Dimension M
mm/in.

MIR-04SS-ESD

203/8.0

236/9.28

MIR-08SS-ESD

305/12.0

337/13.28

MIR-12SS-ESD

406/16.0

439/17.28

MIR-16SS-ESD

508/20.0

541/21.28

MIR-20SS-ESD

610/24.0

642/25.28

MIR-24SS-ESD

711/28.0

744/29.28

MIR-28SS-ESD

813/32.0

845/33.28

MIR-32SS-ESD

914/36.0

947/37.28

MIR-36SS-ESD

1016/40.0

1049/41.28

MIR-40SS-ESD

1118/44.0

1150/45.28

MIR-44SS-ESD

1219/48.0

1252/49.28

MIR-48SS-ESD

1321/52.0

1353/53.28

Notes: Use for ESD applications.
Use mounting kit Model Number 42370 to mount to STI stands.

D-70

www.sti.com/info

CLAMP ASSY
MOUNTING KIT
PART NUMBER 42370
(NOT INCLUDED)

REVERSIBLE
BRACKETS

7 Dia.
0.270
(4 plcs)

22.2
0.874

L
M

15
0.59

IF BRKT IS INVERTED,
12.3
M = L- 109
0.485
4.28

82
3.22
52
2.05

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

Mirrors (continued)
Wide Mirror Package (MIRW)

145
5.72
102
4.0
52
2.05

7 Dia.
0.270
(8 plcs)

32
1.25

CLAMP ASSY INCLUDED

24
0.94

L
M

CLAMP ASSY INCLUDED

13
0.50
0.34
1.34

Wide Mirror Dimensions—
Front Reflective Surface Glass

Wide Mirror Dimensions—
Stainless Steel Reflective Surface

Part Number

Dimension L
mm/in.

Dimension M
mm/in.

Part Number

Dimension L
mm/in.

Dimension M
mm/in.

MIRW-04

140/5.5

182/7.18

MIRW-04SS

140/5.5

182/7.18

MIRW-06

191/7.5

233/9.18

MIRW-06SS

191/7.5

233/9.18

MIRW-08

241/9.5

284/11.18

MIRW-08SS

241/9.5

284/11.18

MIRW-12

343/13.5

386/15.18

MIRW-12SS

343/13.5

386/15.18

MIRW-16

445/17.5

487/19.18

MIRW-16SS

445/17.5

487/19.18

MIRW-18

495/19.5

538/21.18

MIRW-18SS

495/19.5

538/21.18

MIRW-20

546/21.5

589/23.18

MIRW-20SS

546/21.5

589/23.18

MIRW-24

648/25.5

690/27.18

MIRW-24SS

648/25.5

690/27.18

MIRW-28

749/29.5

792/31.18

MIRW-28SS

749/29.5

792/31.18

MIRW-30

800/31.5

843/33.18

MIRW-30SS

800/31.5

843/33.18

MIRW-32

851/33.5

894/35.18

MIRW-32SS

851/33.5

894/35.18

MIRW-36

953/37.5

995/39.18

MIRW-36SS

953/37.5

995/39.18

MIRW-40

1054/41.5

1097/43.18

MIRW-40SS

1054/41.5

1097/43.18

MIRW-42

1105/43.5

1148/45.18

MIRW-42SS

1105/43.5

1148/45.18

MIRW-44

1156/45.5

1198/47.18

MIRW-44SS

1156/45.5

1198/47.18

MIRW-48

1257/49.5

1300/51.18

MIRW-48SS

1257/49.5

1300/51.18

MIRW-52

1359/53.5

1402/55.18

MIRW-52SS

1359/53.5

1402/55.18

MIRW-54

1410/55.5

1452/57.18

MIRW-54SS

1410/355.5

1452/57.18

MIRW-56

1461/57.5

1503/59.18

MIRW-56SS

1461/57.5

1503/59.18

MIRW-60

1562/61.5

1605/63.18

MIRW-60SS

1562/61.5

1605/63.18

MIRW-64

1664/65.5

1706/67.18

MIRW-64SS

1664/65.5

1706/67.18

MIRW-72

1867/73.5

1910/75.18

MIRW-72SS

1867/73.5

1910/75.18

MIRW-84

2172/85.5

2214/87.18

MIRW-84SS

2172/85.5

2214/87.18

MIRW-96

2477/97.5

2519/99.18

MIRW-96SS

2477/97.5

2519/99.18

www.sti.com/info

D-71

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

45° Mirror and Bracket
Use with PA4600 applications using a “double-bounce” arrangement.
Part Number

Description

MIR45-FG

4 in. front reflective surface glass mirror for use with MIR45BKT

MIR45-SS

4 in. polished stainless steel mirror for use with MIR45BKT

MIR45BKT

Bracket for mounting MIR45 to STI stand at 45° angle

MIR45BKT
MIRROR - STAINLESS STEEL
OR GLASS

MIRROR
SUPPORT
BLOCK

MIRROR
STAND
PIPE

MIR45-FG and MIR45-SS
38.1
1.500

MOUNTING TABS
(4 PLACES)
38.35
1.510

Mounting Accessories
Model Number

LCMK-4

Description

LCMK-4

Allows a transmitter/receiver pair of any model STI light curtain to be mounted to STI stands.

MIR-BKT

Mirror mounting brackets, will mount to STI MIRS stands

MIRROR MOUNTING
BRACKETS
MODEL MIR-BKT

D-72

www.sti.com/info

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

Floor Stands
Light Duty Floor Stands
Light curtains and perimeter guards used to detect the torso
of personnel have specific mounting requirements per ANSI/RIA
R15.06 and other standards. These light duty stands are ideal for
mounting the bottom beam of the light curtain or perimeter guard
within the required 0.3 m (12 in.) from the floor. The Light Duty
Floor Stand is a cost effective alternative to our more robust heavy
duty stand, and mounting hardware is included.
NOTE: Mirrors cannot be mounted using the Light Duty Floor
Stands. Use the MIRS-xx Series Heavy Duty Floor Stands when
mounting mirrors.
Model Number

Description

Height m/in.

PA-STAND-40

Light-Duty Floor Stand

1.0/40

PA-STAND-44

Light-Duty Floor Stand

1.1/44

PA-STAND-48

Light-Duty Floor Stand

1.2/48

PA-STAND-52

Light-Duty Floor Stand

1.3/52

PA-STAND-56

Light-Duty Floor Stand

1.4/56

PA-STAND-64

Light Duty Floor Stand

1.6/64

PA-STAND-72

Light Duty Floor Stand

1.8/72
38.1
1.5

T-NUT
(ECONO T-SLOT)
1/4-20

152.4
6.00
95.3
3.75

Ø13.5
0.53

25.4
1.00

BOLT
1/4-20 x 1/2,
FBHSCS

95.3
3.75

Heavy Duty Floor Stands
38.1
1.5

T-BOLT
ASSY
STI 27087
SENSOR MTG
BRACKET
(REF)

STI stands provide a stable, secure method for mounting both
safety light curtains and mirrors. Hardware for mounting stand to
concrete floor is included.
NOTE: Mirrors can only be mounted using the MIRS-xx Series
Heavy Duty Floor Stands.

ENDCAP 27086

127.0
5.00

4.8
0.19

"XX"
INCHES

T-BOLT ASSY
STI 27087 (X2)

19.1
0.75

Model Number

Height m/ft.

MIRS-04

1.2/4

8.8/19.3

MIRS-06

1.8/6

11.2/24.7

MIRS-07

2.1/7

12.5/27.4

MIRS-08

2.4/8

13.7/30.1

MIRS-10

3.1/10

16.1/35.4

REF
SENSOR
SPECS

Weight kg/lb.

OPTICAL
SENSOR
SENSOR MOUNTING
BRACKETS CAN
BE INVERTED
XX" MOUNTING STAND
ASSEMBLY
STI 40306-0XX0

9.5
0.38

O.D.

43
1.675

152
6.0

32
DIA (4PLCS)
1.25

24
0.95

203
8.0

www.sti.com/info

155
6.10

203
8.0

D-73

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

Weld Slag Protective Shields
• Available for the PA4600,
F3SJ, and MS4800 families
• Reduces down time and
increases the life of the
curtain
• Resistant to many chemicals
and compounds
• Easy to install and replace
• Lexan® construction

These protective shields are designed to protect the
light curtains, when used in harsh applications. In many
cases, welding cell applications produce hot weld
slag that over time may damage the lens (filter) and
degrade the light curtain’s performance. These covers
offer the user the ability to easily and inexpensively
reduce machine down time. The covers are available to
fit all sizes.

Chemical Resistance of Lexan®

Chemical Class

KEY:
R - Resistant
LR - Limited Resistance
NR - Not Resistant

Effects

Acids

No significant effect under most typical conditions of
concentration and temperature.

Alcohols

Generally compatible at low concentration and room
temperature. Higher concentrations and elevated
temperatures can result in etching and attack evidenced by
decomposition.

Alkalis

Generally compatible at low concentration and room
temperature. Higher concentrations and elevated
temperatures can result in etching and attack evidenced by
MC4700 Light Curtain (L.C.)
decomposition.

MS4600 Light Curtain (L.C.)

Aliphatic Hydrocarbons

TOP VIEW

39.0
Amines

Generally compatible.

TOP VIEW

Surface crystallization and chemical30.0
attack.

Aromatic Hydrocarbons
35.6

Partial solvents and severe stress cracking agents (i.e.
xylene, toluene).
20.2

Detergents and Cleaners

Mild soap solutions are generally compatible.

Detergents and Cleaners,
with Alkaline Materials

Esters
Weld
Shield (W.S.)
Greases
Length
= L.C. and Oils
D.Z.+ 30
Halogenerated
Hydrocarbons
1.2

Cause severe crystallization.
Partial
solvents.
Shield (W.S.)
L.C.

Pure petroleum

Solvents.

Ketones

Cause severe crystallization and stress cracking. Partial
solvents.

Silicone Oil and Greases

Generally compatible up to 85°C (185°F).

Silicone Oil and Greases,
with Alkaline Materials

1.54

1.40

1.18

Weld

SIDE VIEW

Dimensions—mm/in.
PA4600 Perimeter Access Guarding Device
TOP VIEW

0.80

Length = L.C.
Detection
types
generallyD.Z.compatible.
1.5
Zone (D.Z.)
0.06

Notes:
Lexan® is a registered trademark of G.E.
General Electric Corp.
Certain combinations of chemical environments,
temperature and stress can adversely affect
thermoplastic parts made from LEXAN resin.
For this reason, lubricants, gaskets, O-rings,
cleaning solvents, or any other material which
may come in contact with the finished part must
be carefully evaluated under end-use conditions
for compatibility. You should also follow the
use and compatibility
L.C.recommendations of the
Detection
manufacturer of any
such material.
Zone (D.Z.)

FRONT VIEW

LEXAN resin generally is stable to water, mineral
acids and organic acids. Crazing and/or
embrittlement may occur if a part molded from
LEXAN resin is highly stressed and exposed
to hot water or a moist high-temperature
environment. As a result, a temperature limit
of 60 to 71°C (140 to 160°F) is recommended
under these conditions.
SIDE VIEW

FRONT VIEW

MS4800 Light Curtain (L.C.)
TOP VIEW
39.0
1.54
35.6
1.40

Weld Guard

Weld
Shield (W.S.)
Length = L.C.
D.Z.+ 30
1.2

L.C.
Detection
Zone (D.Z.)

52.6
2.07

9.5°

38.0
1.5
-0.035
52.6 +0.015
2.07 -0.89
+0.38

SIDE VIEW

D-74

www.sti.com/info

FRONT VIEW

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

Weld Slag Protective Shields (continued)
Model Number

Description

Model Number

Description

mm/in.

MS4800WS-1080

1080 mm Kit

1110/43.70

MS4800WS-1120

1120 mm Kit

1150/45.28

MS4800WS-1160

1160 mm Kit

1190/46.85

MS4800WS-1200

1200 mm Kit

1230/48.43

MS4800WS-1240

1240 mm Kit

1270/50.00

MS4800WS-1280

1280 mm Kit

1310/51.57

MS4800WS-1320

1320 mm Kit

1350/53.15

270/10.63

MS4800WS-1360

1360 mm Kit

1390/54.72

1400 mm Kit

1430/56.30

mm/in.

Lexan Weld Shield Kit for PA4600
PA4600WS-1

PA4600-1-000 weld
shield kit (1 pair)

135/5.3

PA4600WS-2

PA4600 weld shield kit
(1 pair)

180/7.1

PA4600 weld shield kit
(2 pairs)

180/7.1

PA4600WS-4

Lexan Weld Shield Kit for MS4800*
MS4800WS-0240

240 mm Kit

MS4800WS-0280

280 mm Kit

310/12.21

MS4800WS-1400

MS4800WS-0320

360 mm Kit

350/13.78

MS4800WS-1440

1440 mm Kit

1470/57.87

MS4800WS-0360

360 mm Kit

390/15.35

MS4800WS-1480

1480 mm Kit

1510/59.45

MS4800WS-0400

400 mm Kit

430/16.93

MS4800WS-1520

1520 mm Kit

1550/61.02

470/18.50

MS4800WS-1560

1560 mm Kit

1590/62.60

510/20.08

MS4800WS-1600

1600 mm Kit

1630/64.17

1640 mm Kit

1670/65.75

MS4800WS-0440
MS4800WS-0480

440 mm Kit
480 mm Kit

MS4800WS-0520

520 mm Kit

550/21.65

MS4800WS-1640

MS4800WS-0560

560 mm Kit

590/23.23

MS4800WS-1680

1680 mm Kit

1710/67.32

MS4800WS-0600

600 mm Kit

630/24.80

MS4800WS-1720

1720 mm Kit

1750/68.90

670/26.38

MS4800WS-1760

1760 mm Kit

1790/70.47

710/27.95

MS4800WS-1800

1800 mm Kit

1830/72.05

1840 mm Kit

1870/73.62

MS4800WS-0640
MS4800WS-0680

640 mm Kit
680 mm Kit

MS4800WS-0720

720 mm Kit

750/29.53

MS4800WS-1840

MS4800WS-0760

760 mm Kit

790/31.10

MS4800WS-1880

1880 mm Kit

1910/75.20

MS4800WS-0800

800 mm Kit

830/32.68

MS4800WS-1920

1920 mm Kit

1950/76.77

MS4800WS-0840

840 mm Kit

870/34.25

MS4800WS-1960

1960 mm Kit

1990/78.35

910/35.83

MS4800WS-2000

2000 mm Kit

2030/79.92

950/37.40

MS4800WS-2040

2040 mm Kit

2070/81.50

2080 mm Kit

2110/83.07

2120 mm Kit

2150/84.65

MS4800WS-0880
MS4800WS-0920

880 mm Kit
920 mm Kit

MS4800WS-0960

960 mm Kit

990/38.98

MS4800WS-2080

MS4800WS-1000

1000 mm Kit

1030/40.55

MS4800WS-2120

MS4800WS-1040

1040 mm Kit

1070/42.13

*MS4800 weld shield kits consists of one pair.

IP67 Enclosures
for Mounting Safety Light Curtains in Wash-down Applications
• Available in the full range of
sizes
• Reduces down time and
increases the life of the light
curtain
• Resistant to many chemicals
and compounds (see tables
on subsequent pages)
• Improved mounting system
• Reinforced stainless steel
brackets

The IP67 Enclosure is
designed for washdown
applications. The enclosure
is constructed with an acrylic
tube. The brackets are made of
stainless steel. The radial seal
prevents fluids from coming
in contact with the safety light
curtain.
Operating characteristics of
the light curtain are affected
by the enclosure. The range is
reduced by 10% and the effective aperture angle changes to
less than ±3°.

www.sti.com/info

D-75

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

IP67 Enclosures (continued)
Dimensions—mm/in.
MS4800 IP67 Enclosure

IP67 Enclosures for MS4800 (non-cascaded versions)
Model Number

D-76

Model Number

MS4800-IP67-0240

Kit for MS4800 240 mm

MS4800-IP67-0880

Kit for MS4800 880 mm

MS4800-IP67-1520

Kit for MS4800 1520 mm

MS4800-IP67-0280

Kit for MS4800 280 mm

MS4800-IP67-0920

Kit for MS4800 920 mm

MS4800-IP67-1560

Kit for MS4800 1560 mm

MS4800-IP67-0320

Kit for MS4800 320 mm

MS4800-IP67-0960

Kit for MS4800 960 mm

MS4800-IP67-1600

Kit for MS4800 1600 mm

MS4800-IP67-0360

Kit for MS4800 360 mm

MS4800-IP67-1000

Kit for MS4800 1000 mm

MS4800-IP67-1640

Kit for MS4800 1640 mm

MS4800-IP67-0400

Kit for MS4800 400 mm

MS4800-IP67-1040

Kit for MS4800 1040 mm

MS4800-IP67-1680

Kit for MS4800 1680 mm

MS4800-IP67-0440

Kit for MS4800 440 mm

MS4800-IP67-1080

Kit for MS4800 1080 mm

MS4800-IP67-1720

Kit for MS4800 1720 mm

MS4800-IP67-0480

Kit for MS4800 480 mm

MS4800-IP67-1120

Kit for MS4800 1120 mm

MS4800-IP67-1760

Kit for MS4800 1760 mm

MS4800-IP67-0520

Kit for MS4800 520 mm

MS4800-IP67-1160

Kit for MS4800 1160 mm

MS4800-IP67-1800

Kit for MS4800 1800 mm

MS4800-IP67-0560

Kit for MS4800 560 mm

MS4800-IP67-1200

Kit for MS4800 1200 mm

MS4800-IP67-1840

Kit for MS4800 1840 mm

MS4800-IP67-0600

Kit for MS4800 600 mm

MS4800-IP67-1240

Kit for MS4800 1240 mm

MS4800-IP67-1880

Kit for MS4800 1880 mm

MS4800-IP67-0640

Kit for MS4800 640 mm

MS4800-IP67-1280

Kit for MS4800 1280 mm

MS4800-IP67-1920

Kit for MS4800 1920 mm

MS4800-IP67-0680

Kit for MS4800 680 mm

MS4800-IP67-1320

Kit for MS4800 1320 mm

MS4800-IP67-1960

Kit for MS4800 1960 mm

MS4800-IP67-0720

Kit for MS4800 720 mm

MS4800-IP67-1360

Kit for MS4800 1360 mm

MS4800-IP67-2000

Kit for MS4800 2000 mm

MS4800-IP67-0760

Kit for MS4800 760 mm

MS4800-IP67-1400

Kit for MS4800 1400 mm

MS4800-IP67-2040

Kit for MS4800 2040 mm

MS4800-IP67-0800

Kit for MS4800 800 mm

MS4800-IP67-1440

Kit for MS4800 1440 mm

MS4800-IP67-2080

Kit for MS4800 2080 mm

MS4800-IP67-0840

Kit for MS4800 840 mm

MS4800-IP67-1480

Kit for MS4800 1480 mm

MS4800-IP67-2120

Kit for MS4800 2120 mm

www.sti.com/info

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

IP67 Enclosures (continued)
Dimensions—mm/in.
MSF4800 IP67 Enclosure

FIRST
SEGMENT

IP67 Enclosures for MSF4800 (cascaded versions)
Model Number

Model Number

MSF4800-IP67-0240 Kit for MSF4800 240 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0880 Kit for MSF4800 880 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1520 Kit for MSF4800 1520 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0280 Kit for MSF4800 280 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0920 Kit for MSF4800 920 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1560 Kit for MSF4800 1560 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0320 Kit for MSF4800 320 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0960 Kit for MSF4800 960 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1600 Kit for MSF4800 1600 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0360 Kit for MSF4800 360 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1000 Kit for MSF4800 1000 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1640 Kit for MSF4800 1640 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0400 Kit for MSF4800 400 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1040 Kit for MSF4800 1040 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1680 Kit for MSF4800 1680 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0440 Kit for MSF4800 440 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1080 Kit for MSF4800 1080 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1720 Kit for MSF4800 1720 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0480 Kit for MSF4800 480 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1120 Kit for MSF4800 1120 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1760 Kit for MSF4800 1760 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0520 Kit for MSF4800 520 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1160 Kit for MSF4800 1160 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1800 Kit for MSF4800 1800 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0560 Kit for MSF4800 560 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1200 Kit for MSF4800 1200 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1840 Kit for MSF4800 1840 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0600 Kit for MSF4800 600 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1240 Kit for MSF4800 1240 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1880 Kit for MSF4800 1880 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0640 Kit for MSF4800 640 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1280 Kit for MSF4800 1280 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1920 Kit for MSF4800 1920 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0680 Kit for MSF4800 680 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1320 Kit for MSF4800 1320 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1960 Kit for MSF4800 1960 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0720 Kit for MSF4800 720 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1360 Kit for MSF4800 1360 mm

MSF4800-IP67-2000 Kit for MSF4800 2000 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0760 Kit for MSF4800 760 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1400 Kit for MSF4800 1400 mm

MSF4800-IP67-2040 Kit for MSF4800 2040 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0800 Kit for MSF4800 800 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1440 Kit for MSF4800 1440 mm

MSF4800-IP67-2080 Kit for MSF4800 2080 mm

MSF4800-IP67-0840 Kit for MSF4800 840 mm

MSF4800-IP67-1480 Kit for MSF4800 1480 mm

MSF4800-IP67-2120 Kit for MSF4800 2120 mm

www.sti.com/info

D-77

Accessories

Safety Light Curtains

IP67 Enclosures (continued)
Chemical Resistance
of Acrylic Tube
KEY:
R - Resistant
LR - Limited Resistance
NR - Not Resistant

D-78

PAINT
Acrylic paints and lacquers
LR
Aromatic-free hydrocarbons
R
Nitrocellulose
NR
Oil paints, pure
R
Thinners, general
NR
CHEMICAL PROCESS BATHS
Electroplating baths
R
Photographic baths
R
BUILDING MATERIALS AND
PROTECTIVE AGENTS FOR
BUILDINGS
Bituminous emulsion
NR
Cement
R
Hot bitumen
LR
Mortar
R
Plaster of paris
R
Red lead
R
CHEMICALS, SOLVENTS, ETC.
Acetic acid, glacial
NR
Acetic acid, to 25%
LR
Acetone
NR
Alum
R
Aluminium chloride
R
Aluminium oxalate
R
Aluminium sulphate
R
Ammonia, aqueous solution
R
Ammonium sulphate
R
Amyl acetate
NR
Aniline
NR
Arsenic
R
Arsenic acid
R
Battery acid
R
Benzaldehyde
NR
Benzene
NR
Bromine
NR
Butanol
LR
Butyl lactate
NR
Butyric acid, to 5%
R
Calcium chloride
R
Calcium hypochlorite
R
Carbon disulfide
NR
Carbon tetrachloride
NR
Chlorinated hydrocarbons
NR
Chlorine, liquid
NR
Chlorine, water
LR
Chloroethyl acetate
NR
Chlorophenol
NR
Chromic acid
LR
Citric acid, to 20%
R
Copper sulphate
R
Cresol
NR
Cyclohexane
R
Diacetone alcohol
NR
Diamyl phthalate
LR
Dibutyl phthalate
NR
Diethylene glycol
R
Dioxan
NR

Ether
Ethyl acetate
Ethyl alcohol, absolute
Ethyl alcohol, to 30%
Ethyl bromide
Ethyl butyrate
Ethylene bromide
Ferric chloride
Ferrous chloride
Ferrous sulphate
Formic acid, to 2%
Formic acid, to 40%
Glycerol
Glycol
Heptane
Hexane
Hydrochloric acid
Hydrogen peroxide, over 40%
Hydrogen peroxide, to 40%
Iodine
Isopropyl alcohol, to 50%
Lactic acid, to 80%
Magnesium chloride
Magnesium sulphate
Manganese sulphate
Mercury
Methanol, absolute
Methanol, to 30%
Methyl ethyl ketone
Methylated spirits
Milk of lime
Monobromonaphthalene
Motor fuel benzene-free
Motor fuel, with benzene
Nickel sulphate
Nitric acid, to 20%
Nitric acid, 20 - 70%
Nitric acid, over 70%
Oxalic acid
Paraffin
Perchloroethylene
Petroleum ether
Phenols
Phosphoric acid, to 10%
Phosphorus trichloride
Phosphorus, yellow
Picric acid, 1% in water
Potassium bichromate
Potassium carbonate
Potassium chloride
Potassium cyanide
Potassium hydroxide
Potassium nitrate
Potassium permanganate
Silicon tetrachloride
Silver nitrate
Soap solution
Soda
Sodium bisulfite
Sodium carbonate
Sodium chlorate
Sodium chloride
Sodium hydroxide
Sodium hypochlorite
Sodium sulphate
Sodium sulphide

NR
NR
NR
LR
NR
NR
NR
R
R
R
R
LR
R
R
R
R
R
LR
R
R
LR
LR
R
R
R
R
NR
LR
NR
NR
R
R
R
NR
R
R
LR
NR
R
LR
NR
R
NR
R
NR
NR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
NR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

www.sti.com/info

Stearic acid
Sulphur
Sulphur dioxide, liquid
Sulfuric acid, to 30%
Sulphurous acid, conc
Sulphurous acid, to 5%
Sulfuryl chloride
Tartaric acid, to 50%
Thionyl chloride
Tin chloride
Toluene
Triethylamine
Trichloroacetic acid
Tricresyl phosphate
Turpentine
Turpentine substitute
Urea, to 20%
Xylene
Zinc sulphate, aqueous
Zinc sulphate, solid
DISINFECTANTS
Bleaching powder
Carbolic acid
Hydrogen peroxide, to 40%
Hydrogen peroxide, over 40%
Iodine tincture, 5%
Lugol solution
Mercuric chloride
Surgical spirit
GREASES, OILS, WAXES
Animal
Mineral
Silicone oil
Vegetable
PLASTICS
Foams
Foams, containing plasticizer
Polyamide
Polyethylene
PVC
PVC, plasticized
Rubber
Rubber, containing
plasticizer
FOODSTUFFS, SPICES
Aniseed, bay, nutmeg
Cloves
Honey, pure
Ice cream
Marinades
Meat and fish
Pepper, cinnamon, onions
Salt
GASES AND VAPORS
Ammonia
Bromine vapor (dry)
Carbon dioxide
Carbon monoxide
Chloride vapor (dry)
Exhaust gases, containing HCI
Exhaust gases, containing HF
Exhaust gases, containing
Sulfuric acid
Hydrogen sulphide
Methane
Nitric oxide

R
R
NR
R
LR
R
R
R
NR
R
NR
R
NR
R
LR
LR
R
NR
R
R
R
NR
R
LR
NR
R
R
NR
R
R
LR
LR
R
NR
R
R
R
NR
R
NR
R
NR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
LR
R
R
LR
R
R
R
R
R
R

Nitrogen peroxide
Oxygen
Ozone
Sulphur dioxide (dry)
Natural Gas (Butane)
FREON TG*
trichlorotrifluoroethane
FREON TF*
trichlorotrifluoroethane
BEVERAGES, etc.
Beer, wine
Camomile extract
Chocolate
Fruit juice, milk, coffee
Spirits, to 30%
Vinegar
Water, mineral waters
Glycerol
Hair setting lotion
Nail varnish
Nail varnish remover
Ointments
Peat water
Sea water
Soaps
Sprays
CLEANING AGENTS
Acids, see under chemicals
Alcohol, absolute
Alcohol, to 30%
Alkalis, see under chemicals
Ammonia
Aqueous hypochlorite
solution
Carbon tetrachloride
Methylated spirits
Paraffin
Perchloroethylene
Petrol, pure
Petrol mixture, containing
benzene
Petroleum ether
Soap solution
Soda solution
Solvent stain removers
Trichloroethylene
Turpentine
Turpentine substitute
PEST CONTROL AGENTS
Aqueous solutions of
pesticides
Stable spray-new
Sprays (for direct spraying)
PROTECTIVE (strippable)
COATINGS
Sign Strip®** strippable
masking
MISCELLANEOUS
Urine
* Trademark of E.I. duPont
deNemours & Company, Inc.
** Trademark of Spraylat Corp.,
Mt. Vernon, NY

R
R
R
R
R
NR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
NR
NR
R
R
R
R
LR

NR
R
R
R
NR
NR
LR
NR
R
NR
R
R
R
NR
NR
LR
LR
LR
R
LR

LR
R

Safety Edges & Bumpers
Contents
Safety Edges

E-2

Safety Bumpers

E-9

Safety Edge Controllers

E-10

E-1

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Safety Edges

Edges

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Edges
(SGE & SCS Series Profiles)
• Profile materials NBR (SCS series only), EPDM or TPE
• Available in six sizes for SGE Series and two sizes for SCS Series
Applicable Controllers
• SCC-1224 Single-Channel Controller
• SCC-1224ND Single-Channel Controller

Description
Safety edges are used on edges of guards and gates at
possible crushing or shearing points. They are used on gates,
machines, and handling equipment to protect people and equipment. Our SGE Series safety edges use the innovative design of
co-extruded safety contact as an integral part of the safety edge.
A complete unit consists of an aluminum mounting channel, the
safety contact, and the safety edge. The special shapes of the
EPDM, TPE, or NBR rubber profiles protect the safety contact from
damage and allows actuation angles to exceed 90 degrees.
The last safety edge in a serial connection is terminated with a
resistor, which is continuously monitored by the controller. This allows the entire circuit to be monitored for shorts and wire breaks.

Aluminum
Mounting
Channel
Molded Wiring Plug
SGE Extruded Profile
with Integrated
Co-Extruded
Safety Contact

The SGE Design
SGE series profiles are patented and offer improved technical
characteristics with fewer components. Inside the safety edge
is the co-extruded switching unit, which consists of two conductive rubber extrusions inside the chamber and a high-isolating
material EPDM or TPE outer. Inside of each conductive rubber
extrusion is a copper wire with low-resistance evaluation. The
molded wiring plug at each end ensures the constant contact of
the two conductive rubber extrusions of the switching unit. The
end caps seal and protect the safety contact from dirt and water
ingression. This innovative design significantly reduces assembly
time, saving both time and money.
Important features of the SGE profile:
• Fast, accurate response even during lateral application of force
• Fewer components required for complete assembly
• Fast and easy assembly
• Integrated water drain (some models)
• Reduced weight
The SGE profile is currently available in six sizes from 8 mm
to 65 mm in height. Profiles are available with sealing lips for
applications such as doors.

E-2

www.sti.com/info

Molded End Cap
with Cable Entry
and Water Drain

The SCS Design
In SCS series safety edges, the safety contact is inserted
into the switching chamber of the safety edge. The two ends
are then sealed with
Conducting
a permanently elastic
Contact Surfaces
adhesive and end
caps to keep the unit
0.24
watertight.
6
All SCS series safety
Insulating
edges are available in
Outer Sleeve
NBR only.
0.71
18

Reinforced
Copper Wire

Safety Edges

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Specifications
SGE-88

SGE-1510

SGE-125

SGE-225

SGE-245/
SGE-245L

SGE-365
(Black)

SGEY-365
(Yellow)

EPDM

TPE

EPDM

TPE

NBR

DBL Side
Tape

Integrated
Angle on
Profile or
SCA-15-9

SCA-15-9

SCA-25/25L

SCA-35/35L

SCA-25/25L

68 Shore A

65 Shore A

68 Shore A

1.10
kg/m

0.37
kg/m

0.48
kg/m

Material:
Mounting:

Material Hardness:
Max. Length of a
Single Safety Edge:
Weight:

0.05
kg/m

0.11
kg/m

0.18/0.20
kg/m

0.51/0.5
kg/m

0.77/0.82
kg/m
IP65

Mechanical Stability*1:
Actuation Distance:

Maximum Deformation
at 400 N:

500 N
2.1 mm

4.23 mm

7.6 mm

4.5 mm

9.4 mm

5.16 mm

5.4 mm

4.1 mm

70 N with
10 mm/s

88 N with
50 mm/s

76 N

87 N

118 N

72.1 N

134 N

70 N

4.4 mm

4.7 mm

8.6 mm

6.7 mm

17.7 mm

33.78 mm

11.8 mm

24 mm

2 x 10°

2 x 20°

2 x 30°

2 x 45°

2 x 30°

+5 to 55°C

0 to 55°C

Switching Cycles:
Switching Angle:

104

Electrical Capacity:

24 V 100 mA

Operating Temperature:

-10 to 55°C

Storage Temperature:

-25 to 75°C

Max. Series Connection
on the Safety Edges:
Inactive End Region:

SCS-2540

6.1 m

Enclosure:

Actuation Force:

SCS-2525

5 Connections
20 mm

25 mm

20 mm

40 mm

Connecting Cable:

20 mm

2 Conductors, 34 mm2

*Actuation forces and distances are tested according to EN 1760-2, Speed 200 mm/s.
*1 Maximum operating force without damaging the edge.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Chemical Resistance
TPE*

EPDM**

NBR***

TPE*

EPDM**

NBR***

Tear Strength (Resistance)

Water Resistance

1-2

Ultimate Tensile Strength

Diluted Acids

Rebound Elasticity at 20°C

Diluted Bases

Non-Oxidizing Acids

Oxidizing Acids

1-2

Features

Resistance Against Permanent
Deformation

Features

3-4

ASTM Oil #3

4-5

Vegetable Oils

Cold Flexibility

Organic Solvents

Heat Stability

Ester Solvents

2-3

Oxidation Stability

Ketone Solvents (Containing Oxygen)

2-3

UV Stability

Aliphatic Hydrocarbons (Gasoline)

Weather/Ozone Resistance

Aromatic Hydrocarbons

2-3

Flame Resistance

Hydrogen Hydrocarbons

Gas Permeability

Hydrocarbons

Abrasion
Elongation at Tear

KEY:
1 = very good
6 = insufficient

Alcohol

*TPE: Thermoplastic Elastomer
Models include: SGE-125, SGEY-365
**EPDM: Ethylene Propylene Rubber: Good resistance to ozone and
weathering. Particularly suitable for aggressive chemicals
Models include: SGE-88, SGE-1510, SGE-225, SGE-245, SGE-365

2-3

5-6

KEY:
1 = No Effects, Permanent Contact
2 = Few Effects, Some Contact
3 = Medium Effects, Some Contact
4 = Noticeable Effects, Reduced Contact
5 = Severe Effects, Very Brief Contact
6 = Extreme Effects, Avoid Contact

***NBR: Nitrile Butadiene Rubber: Good resistance to petroleum oils,
aromatic hydrocarbons, mineral oils, and vegetable oils.
Models include: SCS-2525, SCS-2540

www.sti.com/info

E-3

Safety Edges

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Force Distance
SGE-125:

SGE-125:

Characteristic Values for Test Speed v=10 mm/s

Characteristic Values for Test Speed v=100 mm/s

Test Temperature

+20°C

27.3

Actuating Force Fa (N)

Actuating Distance Sb (mm)

1.8

Actuating Distance Sb (mm)

1.9

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 250N in MM

8.3

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 250N in MM

10.1

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 400N in MM

10.6

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 400N in MM

11.1

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 600N in MM

11.5

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 600N in MM

12.2

Tested according to EN 1760-2, test unit round 80 mm, actuating point C3.

SGE-225:

Characteristic Values for Test Speed v=10 mm/s

Characteristic Values for Test Speed v=100 mm/s

Test Temperature

+20°C

Test Temperature

+20°C

Actuating Force Fa (N)

56.7

Actuating Force Fa (N)

62.7

Actuating Distance Sb (mm)

3.9

Actuating Distance Sb (mm)

4.4

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 250N in MM

2.3

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 250N in MM

2.7

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 400N in MM

6.7

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 400N in MM

7.2

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 600N in MM

12.0

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 600N in MM

12.0

Tested according to EN 1760-2, test unit round 80 mm, actuating point C3.

SGE-245:

Characteristic Values for Test Speed v=10 mm/s

Characteristic Values for Test Speed v=100 mm/s

Test Temperature

+20°C

Test Temperature

+20°C

Actuating Force Fa (N)

67.7

Actuating Force Fa (N)

Actuating Distance Sb (mm)

7.4

Actuating Distance Sb (mm)

7.8

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 250N in MM

15.8

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 250N in MM

15.2

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 400N in MM

18.3

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 400N in MM

17.7

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 600N in MM

21.7

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 600N in MM

82.7

21.9

Tested according to EN 1760-2, test unit round 80 mm, actuating point C3.

SGE-365:

Characteristic Values for Test Speed v=10 mm/s

Characteristic Values for Test Speed v=100 mm/s

Test Temperature

+20°C

Actuating Force Fa (N)

+20°C
78.2

Actuating Force Fa (N)

107.7

Actuating Distance Sb (mm)

5.16

Actuating Distance Sb (mm)

6.23

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 250N in MM

29.82

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 250N in MM

28.37

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 400N in MM

33.78

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 400N in MM

32.76

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 600N in MM

36.51

Overtravel Distance Sv @ 600N in MM

35.34

Tested according to EN 1760-2, test unit round 80 mm, actuating point C3.

E-4

Test Temperature

Actuating Force Fa (N)

Tested according to EN 1760-2, test unit round 80 mm, actuating point C3.

www.sti.com/info

Safety Edges

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Force Distance (continued)
SCS-2525 and SCS-2540
F (N)
525

500
SCS2

450
400

SCS
254

350
300
250
200
150
100
50

S (mm)
0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
SB

SV
SG

SB = Switching Distance (actuating distance)
SV = Deformation Distance (over travel distance)
SG = Total Deformation

Bending Angles and Radii
The flat aluminum mounting channel must be prepared at the
factory if it has to be bent. To order bending safety edges, please
consult OMRON Automation and Safety.

Bending radii for
different assembly arrangements:
Bending Radius (mm)

Bending angles for
different assembly arrangements:

Type

Bending Angle
Type

SGE-88

45°

30°

SGE-125

45°

20°

SGE-1510

45°

20°

15°

SGE-225

45°

20°

30°

SGE-245

45°

10°

20°

SGE-245L

45°

10°

20°

SGE-365

45°

10°

15°

Bending Angle

Fig. 3

SGE-88

200

SGE-125

200

SGE-1510

200

SGE-225

300

400

200

SGE-245

400

500

200

SGE-365

800

500

Fig. 4

Side View

Bend radius based on the lower edge
of the flat aluminum mounting rail
Figure 2

Top View

Fig. 2

Bending Angle

Flat Aluminum
Mounting Channel

Side View

Flat Aluminum
Mounting Channel

Bend radius based on the
lower edge of the profile
Figure 3

Side View

Flat Aluminum
Mounting Channel

Bending Angle
Top View

Figure 1
Notes:
By bending the safety edges, the profiles with sealing lip becomes
compressed and corrugated.
Bending angle and radii are not part of the tests complying with EN1760-2
and EN12978.

www.sti.com/info

Bend radius based on the
middle edge of the profile
Figure 4

E-5

Safety Edges

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Dimensions

(mm/in.)

Safety Edges
SGE-125

SGE-225

25
0.98

5.5
0.22

2.8
0.11

1.3
0.051

7
0.28
15
0.59

2.5
0.098

9
0.35

17
0.67
20
0.79
25
0.98

46
1.81

2.5
0.098

SGE-1510 with
“A” Aluminum Mounting

SGE-1510 with
“L” Mounting
15.5
0.61

15.5
0.61
9.1
0.36

9.1
0.36

(for SGE-1510 and SGE-125)

3.14SCA-15-9
0.12

(for SGE-1510 and SGE-125)

10)

8.00
0.31
8.00
0.31

3.14
0.12

9.0
0.35
15.0
0.59
15.0
0.59

66
2.6

9
0.35

17.6
0.693
35.2
1.386

SCS2525

13.00
SCA-25

15.00
SCA-35

(for SCS/SGE-2xxx)

(for SGE-3xxx)

13.00
0.51

15.00
0.59

9.0
0.35
25.00
0.98

14.00
0.55

25.00
0.98

35.00
1.38

SCA-25L

SCA-35L

(for SCS/SGE-2xxx)

(for SGE-3xxx)

13.00
SCA-25L
0.51
(for SCS/SGE-2xxx)

15.00
SCA-35L
0.59
(for SGE-3xxx)

25.00
0.98
25.00
0.98

14.00
0.55

15.00
0.59

3(–)

1(+)
3-pos.

3-pos.

35.40
1.39

M8x1
12.00
0.47

M8 Male
14.00
0.55

17.91
0.70

35.00
1.38

1(+)

Overall Dimension:

14.00
0.55

35.00
1.38

M8 Female
4

M8 Male
4

14.00
0.55

14.00
0.55
17.91
0.70

www.sti.com/info

43
1.692

Pin Assignment

35.00
1.38

14.00
0.55

20
0.787

Cable Connectors

0.59

14.00
0.55

SCS2540

25
0.984

(for SGE-3xxx)

0.51

15.5
0.61

25
0.984

SCA-35

(for SCS/SGE-2xxx)

10.5
0.413

2.5
0.098

7.4
0.29

13.00
0.51

E-6

17
0.67
20
0.79
25
0.98

SGE-88

SCA-15-9Fastening ProfilesSCA-25
Aluminum

5.5
0.22

8.0
0.31

16.0
0.63

10)

SGE/SGEY-365

SGE-245

33.90
1.33
12.00
0.47

M8 Female

Safety Edges

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Typical Installation
APPLICATION OF 3 EDGES TO FORM 1 SYSTEM
"5" CONFIGURATION
2 Wire Lead

2 Wire Lead with Female QD

SGE365-5-0500 02000C-05000F

Safety Edge 365 Profile, 500 mm long
with two cables, one 2000 mm cable and one with 5000 mm and Female QD cable

"3" CONFIGURATION
2 Wire Lead with Male QD

2 Wire Lead with Female QD

SGE365-3-0500 05000M-02000F

Safety Edge 365 Profile, 500 mm long
with two cables, one with 5000 mm and Male QD and one 2000 mm Female QD

"4" CONFIGURATION
2 Wire Lead with Male QD

Internal Resistor

SGE365-4-1000 05000M

Safety Edge 365 Profile, 1000 mm long
with one cable, with 5000 mm and Male QD and Internal Resistor

APPLICATION OF 2 EDGES TO FORM 1 SYSTEM WITH EXTERNAL RESISTOR
"0" CONFIGURATION
2 Wire Lead

2 Wire Lead

SCS2540-0-0300 02000C-02000C
Safety Edge 2540 Profile, 300 mm long
with two cables each 2000 mm

"1" CONFIGURATION
2 Wire Lead

2 Wire Lead with Resistor

SCS2540-1-0300 02000C

Safety Edge 2540 Profile, 300 mm long
with one cable 2000 mm
and one cable 200 mm u/resistor

Wiring
Available Configurations
2 Wire Lead

2 Wire Lead

"0" CONFIGURATION
2 Wire Lead

Internal Resistor

"2" CONFIGURATION
2 Wire Lead with Male QD

2 Wire Lead with Female QD

"3" CONFIGURATION
2 Wire Lead with Male QD

Internal Resistor

"4" CONFIGURATION
2 Wire Lead

2 Wire Lead with Female QD

"5" CONFIGURATION

www.sti.com/info

E-7

Safety Edges

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Ordering
SGE Series

SCS Series
SGE –

–

Safety Edge Configuration*
88

225

25 mm x 25 mm

245

25 mm x 45 mm

Y365 35 mm x 65 mm, yellow
Wiring Configuration

Two 2-wire connections

One 2-wire connection and
one external resistor connection

One 2- wire connection and
one internal resistor connection

One quick-disconnect male and
one quick-disconnect female connector

Two 2-wire connections

One 2- wire connection and
one internal resistor connection

One quick-disconnect male and
one internal resistor connection

One quick-disconnect male and
one quick-disconnect female connector

One quick-disconnect female
and 2-wire connection

One quick-disconnect male and
one internal resistor connection

One quick-disconnect female
and 2-wire connection

Specify length in increments of
_____ 10 mm up to 6100 mm, use 4-digits
Mounting**
(blank) Standard Mounting

_____ Specify length in increments of
10 mm, from 150 mm up to 6100 mm, use 4-digits
Mounting**
(blank) Standard Mounting (all except 1510)

Rubber lip mounting for ONLY SGE-1510

Aluminum mounting for ONLY SGE 1510

No mounting channel supplied

Angle aluminum mounting channel

No mounting channel supplied

First Cable Length
_____ Specify length in mm from 100 to 10,000 using 5 digits***
Second Cable Length
_____ Specify length in mm from 100 to 10,000 using 5 digits***

First Cable Length
_____ Specify length in mm from 100 to 10,000 using 5 digits***
End with “C” for wiring configurations 0, 2 or 5.
End with “M” for wiring configurations 3 or 4.
Cables exit bottom of profile, except 125 that exits on
right side looking at end.
Second Cable Length
_____ Specify length in mm from 100 to 10,000 using 5 digits***
End with “C” for wiring configuration 0.
End with “F” for wiring configurations 3 or 5.
Cables exit bottom of profile, except 125 that exits on
left side looking at end.
* Standard material for most configurations is EPDM (Exception: Standard material for the
SGE-125 and SGEY-365 are TPE; SCS-2525; and SCS-2540 are available in NBR only).
** Angle mounting channel is available for all profiles except the SGE-125 and SGE-1510
*** Examples: SGE-125-2-0150 05000C

SGE-125-3-0150 05000M-05000F

150 mm cable with Male QD = 00150M
**** For non-standard cable exit contact factory

information on Safety Edge
✎ For
Controllers, see page E-10

E-8

Length

Angle aluminum mounting channel
(all except 1510 and 125)

–

Wiring Configuration

35 mm x 65 mm, black

–

2540 25 mm x 40 mm
(Available in NBR only)

245L 25 mm x 45 mm, with Sealing Lip
365

–

2525 25 mm x 25 mm
(Available in NBR only)

1510 15 mm x 10 mm
15 mm x 25 mm

SCS –

Safety Edge Configuration*

8 mm x 8 mm

125

www.sti.com/info

–

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Safety Bumpers

Bumpers

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Bumpers
• Foam rubber covered in polyurethane, mounted on an
aluminum base
• Available in lengths up to 3000 mm;
Standard sizes:
53 mm x 100 mm
100 mm x 200 mm
150 mm x 300 mm
200 mm x 400 mm

www.sti.com/info

E-9

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Safety Edge Controllers

SCC

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Single-Channel
Safety Edge Controllers
for use with All Safety Edges and Safety Bumpers

• Power requirements
– 120 VAC or 24 VDC is acceptable for the SCC-1224 single channel units
• Input
– Single channel units accept a single two-wire edge or bumper system
• Output
– Single channel units have two safety outputs and one auxiliary output
for signaling
• External Device Monitoring –EDM is provided on all units with a N/C loop
between Z1 and Z2
• Monitored Reset Modes
– Monitored manual reset mode that requires closure of the reset circuit
followed by opening of the circuit is available on all units
– Automatic reset mode that occurs upon closure of the reset circuit is
available on all units
• Delayed Auxiliary Output – Delayed opening of the auxiliary output for
reversal of a door or gate may be selected on all units except SCC1224ND

Specifications
SCC-1224 & SCC-1224ND DIN Mount, 115 VAC or 24 VAC/DC Single Input, Safety Output and Aux.
Performance
Category 3 Safety Device:

Yes

Operating Area:

Up to 5 sensing devices with a total cable length of max. 25 m in series

Response Time:

< 13 msec.

Indications:

Power – Main power supply = Green
Actuate – Edge is depressed = Yellow
Fault – Detect an irregular signal = Red
Aux. Actuate – Activate Aux. output = Orange

Operational Modes (Selectable):

Automatic Start, Start/Restart Interlock

Electrical
Power Input:
Safety Output:
Maximum Switched Current:
Auxiliary Relay Output:
Maximum Switched Current:

115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3 VA or 24 VAC/DC ± 10%, 1.5 W
2 N/O Relay
4 A, 250 VAC / 4 A, 30 VDC
SCC-1224: Activates after approx. 1 s for approx. 3 s if the sensing device is actuated or faulty;
SCC-1224ND: Activates if the sensing device is actuated or if a sensing device fault is detected
4A, 250 VAC / 4A, 30 VDC

Terminal Blocks:

Cage Clamp Terminal Strip, Wire Size 0.75-1.5 mm2

Input Connections:

1-2 wire edge sensor circuit

Input Resistance:

8.2 K ohm

Input Voltage:

6 V ±2%

Input Current:

1 mA

Mechanical
Enclosure:

Polyamide PA6.6, Self-extinguishing in accordance with UL-94-V2

Mounting:

35 mm DIN rail

Environmental
Protection Rating:

IP20

Operating Temperature:

-20 to 55°C (-4 to 131°F)

Shipping Weight:

210 g (7.4 oz.)

Standards Conformity:

CE, TUV

Designed to Meet or Exceed:

Category 3, EN13849-1

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

E-10

www.sti.com/info

Safety Edge Controllers

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Specifications
SCC-1224 & SCC-1224ND DIN Mount, 115 VAC or 24 VAC/DC Single Input, Safety Output and Aux.
Performance
Category 3 Safety Device:

Yes

Operating Area:

Up to 5 sensing devices with a total cable length of max. 25 m in series

Response Time:

< 13 msec.

Indications:

Power – Main power supply = Green
Actuate – Edge is depressed = Yellow
Fault – Detect an irregular signal = Red
Aux. Actuate – Activate Aux. output = Orange

Operational Modes (Selectable):

Automatic Start, Start/Restart Interlock

Electrical
Power Input:
Safety Output:
Maximum Switched Current:
Auxiliary Relay Output:
Maximum Switched Current:

4A, 250 VAC / 4A, 30 VDC

Terminal Blocks:

Cage Clamp Terminal Strip, Wire Size 0.75-1.5 mm2

Input Connections:

1-2 wire edge sensor circuit

Input Resistance:

8.2 K ohm

Input Voltage:

6 V ±2%

Input Current:

1 mA

Mechanical
Enclosure:

Polyamide PA6.6, Self-extinguishing in accordance with UL-94-V2

Mounting:

35 mm DIN rail

Environmental
Protection Rating:

IP20

Operating Temperature:

-20 to 55°C (-4 to 131°F)

Shipping Weight:

210 g (7.4 oz.)

Standards Conformity:

CE, TUV

Designed to Meet or Exceed:

Category 3, EN13849-1

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

www.sti.com/info

E-11

Safety Edge Controllers

Safety Edges & Bumpers

Dimensions
Z1

S11 S12

(mm/in.)

Power
Actuate
Fault

99
3.90

Aux. Relay

99
3.90

SCC-1224

22.5
0.89

114
4.49

Installation
Mounting
The SCC controllers
are DIN rail mounted.

SCC-1224 and SCC-1224ND

SCC-2124 and SCC-2224
Auxiliary
Output 2
(N/O)
41
42

Safety
Edge 2
Connection
Y1 Y2

Manual Reset
Select
S11
S12

Manual Reset
Pushbutton
Z1 Z2

Wiring

S11 S12

Power
24 V Supply On = Green

As with any electrical apparatus, caution
must be used when
installing, connecting
and operating the
SCC controllers and
safety edges. Please
observe all local
electrical codes.

Actuate
Sensing Device Actuated = Yellow

Power
24 V Supply On = Green
Internal Self-Test Error = Red
CH1
Safety Edge Active = Yellow
Safety Circuit Interrupted = Red

Fault
Safety Circuit Interrupted = Red
B2

X2
X1
Connection
to Safety
Contact
Input

Power

Supply
Voltage
24 VDC

Actuate
Fault

Aux. Relay
Alarm Relay Switch = Yellow

X2 X1
Safety
Edge 1
Connection

Power
CH1
CH2

Aux. Relay

Aux. Relay 1
Auxiliary
Relay
Contact

Supply
Voltage
120 VAC
A1

Aux. Relay 2

Supply
Voltage
24 VDC ±10%
0V

SCC-2224

+24

S11 S12

23
Factory Installed
Jumper

Safety
Output 2

S11 S12
Closed for Auto Reset
Open for Manual Reset

Safety Output 2
+24 VDC Internally
Connected
24

CH2
Safety Edge Active = Yellow
Safety Circuit Interrupted = Red
Aux. Relay 1
Aux. Output Active = Orange
Aux. Relay 2
Aux. Output Active = Orange
on SCC-2224 only

Safety Output 1
+24 VDC Internally
Connected
14

+24

SCC-1224

13 14
Safety
Output 1

32
31
Auxiliary
Output 1
(N/O)

Z1
Z2
Manual Reset Pushbutton
Connection (EDM)

Ordering
Description
Single-Channel Safety Edge Din-Mount Controller for use with all safety edges, 120 VAC or 24 VDC;
Auxiliary contact closes on activation of safety edge for 2 to 3 seconds then opens (even if edge remains activated)
Single-Channel Safety Edge Din-Mount Controller for use with all safety edges, 120 VAC or 24 VDC;
Auxiliary contact closes when the edge is activated and remains closed as long as the edge is activated

✎

E-12

For information on
Safety Edges, see page E-2

✎

For information on
Safety Bumpers, see page E-9

www.sti.com/info

Model Number

Part Number

SCC-1224

43872-0020

SCC-1224ND

43872-0021

Safety Mats & Area Guarding
Contents
UMQ Series

F-2

MC Controllers

F-12

F-1

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

UMQ Series

UMQ

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Quick-Disconnect
Universal Safety Mat System
Heavy-Duty Four-Wire Presence Sensing Mats
with Removable Cable, Category 3 Controllers
and Perimeter Trim
Patented Connector

System
• When UMQ series mats are combined with an MC3, MC4 or
MC6 controller (with complete diagnostics), the result is a system that meets the standard EN 1760-1:1998 and is entitled to
display the CE mark. See below for an overview of the various
components.

UMQ Series Mat
• Fork lift traffic of 270 lbs. per square inch
• IP67 rated
• Mat flammability self extinguishing, meets UL94VO
• Single-piece molded construction
• Black or yellow color
• Damage to cables during installation is eliminated by
positioning the cables after mat installation
• Easy cable replacement
• Six cable location options offer the ability to configure where
cable exits
Controllers
• Safety category 3 devices
• DIN-rail mount (MC3)
• NEMA controllers (MC4, MC6)
• 24 VDC or with universal power supply 100 to 240 VAC
Trim
• Two-part perimeter and joining trim simplifies installation and
provides a custom appearance
• Two options for trim kit corners: Mitered and molded

Description
A STI Quick-Disconnect Universal Mat system (UMQ series
mat combined with an MC3, MC4 or MC6) offers a simple
method for guarding personnel around hazardous machines. A
Quick-Disconnect Universal Mat system offers freedom, flexibility,
and reduced operator fatigue when compared with traditional
guarding methods such as interlocked fences, pullback restraints
or perimeter barriers.
Full visibility and access to the work area is maintained. There is
no need to worry about personnel forgetting to replace mechanical
barriers or close gates.
STI UMQ Series safety mat incorporates a design that features
a cable quick disconnect located on the mat. This allows the
cable to be attached after the mat is installed in order to minimize
damage to the cable during installation. The patented connector is
designed and tested to meet IP67 requirements.

How the System Works
The operation of a Quick-Disconnect Universal Mat system is
easy to understand. The mat is a simple, normally open switch.
When a specified minimum weight is applied to the mat the
"switch" closes. This sends a signal to the controller which, in turn,
sends a stop signal to the guarded machine.
Each mat presents four wires to the controller. This provides the
redundancy required to monitor the wiring for open circuits due to
incorrect wiring or physical damage to the wires.
In order to meet many national safety regulations, STI offers trim
to secure the mat to the floor so that it cannot be easily relocated
and therefore become ineffective.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-2

www.sti.com/info

UMQ Series

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Mat Specifications
Mechanical
Mat Cover Material:
Mat Type:
Mode:
Activation Force:
Maximum Load:
Mechanical Life:
Mat Cable:
Mat Weight:
Environmental
Protection:
Operating Temperature:
Mat Flammability:
Operating Humidity:
Mat Chemical Resistance*:

PVC
Normally open SPST, four-wire
Pressure Sensitive
Detects adults > 30 kg (66 lbs) (8.5 lbs/in.2)
Static Load: 122.5 kg/in.2 (270 lbs/in.2)
Rolling Load: 122.5 kg/in.2 (270 lbs/in.2)
1 x 106 operations
18-gauge, 4-conductor, 16-strand, 300 VAC, with MC12DC male single key
connector; 5 m or 10 m long
Approx. 24.4 kg/m2 (5 lbs/ft.2)
IP67
-37 to 66°C (-35 to 150° F)
Self extinguishing, meets UL 94VO
0-100% RH
Water: Excellent
Mineral Acids:
Good/Excellent
Organic Acids:
Good/Excellent
Alcohols: Good
Aldehydes: Good/Excellent
Caustics: Good/Excellent
Petroleum Solvents: Good
Organic Solvents:
Poor
Chlorinated Solvents: Poor
*40 minute exposure at 23°C (74°F)

specifications
✎ For
and dimensions on
the MC Controllers,
see page F-12

Compliance
Conforming to Standards:

ANSI/RIA 15.06-1999 (R2009), ANSI B11.19-2010, OSHA 1910.21(b),
CSA Z432-04
Approvals:
When used with an MC3, MC4 or MC6 controller the UMQ series safety mats
comprise a system which has been EC type examined to the requirements of
category 3, EN 13849-1 and EN1760-1:1998.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Mat Selection
Multiple UMQ series mat sizes are offered. A system can easily
be configured to meet almost any guarding requirement.
Standard Mat Sizes
Widths
12 to 48 in.
Lengths
12 to 72 in.
Metric Mat Sizes
Widths
500 to 1200 mm
Lengths
500 to 1800 mm
Custom Mat Sizes
Widths
From 8 in. up to 48 in.
(0.5 in. increments)
Lengths
From 8 in. up to 72 in.
(0.5 in. increments)

specific mat sizes,
✎ For
see page F-10

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-3

UMQ Series

Trim Selection

Applications

Several choices are available in trim selection and can be
customized to a specific application.

Presence sensing safety mats are used to monitor an entire
hazardous area. They offer flexibility, quick access and may
frequently be the most economic choice. Other options for
perimeter guarding include interlocked barrier guards and safety
light curtains. However, personnel can become trapped inside a
barrier guard and safety light curtains only monitor the perimeter,
not the hazardous area inside.
Additionally, mats can also simplify routine tasks such as
machine setup, maintenance and repair.
Applications can be
found throughout industry
and typically include the
following areas:
• Welding Robots
• Assembly Machinery
• Material Handling
• Packaging Machinery
• Punches
• Presses
• Robotic Work Cells

Two-Part Ramp Trim with Yellow PVC Cover
This trim simplifies routing of cables and replacement of
damaged mats. To position the mats correctly, place all of the
mats in the approximate position, place the joining trim between
the mats, then temporarily place the cover on the joining trim.
Square the mats by sliding the ramp trim under the mats. When
all of the mats are correctly positioned, anchor the perimeter trim
to the floor. After the wires have been routed, a rugged cover of
highly visible, safety yellow PVC is snapped into place. Corners
can either be mitered or be our exclusive molded corners. (See
illustrations on this page.)

Two-Part Ramp Trim with Aluminum Cover

This trim is the same as above except that the PVC cover is
replaced with an aluminum cover that is attached by screws to the
base. (See the Dimensions Section of this datasheet for details.)

Two-Part Active Joining Trim
Similar in concept to the two-part ramp trim, this trim provides
an "active" joint where the perimeters of two mats adjoin each
other. When a person steps on the surface cover of the active
joining trim, the Universal Mat system will detect their presence
and send a stop signal to the guarded machine.

Aluminum Blunt Trim
Used to finish off the edge of a mat installation near a wall or
machine. Helps hold mats in place.

Aluminum Ramp Trim
This single part aluminum ramp trim is available for areas where
the two part ramp trim may not be suitable.

Molded Corners
Eliminates the need to miter the corners of perimeter trim.
Designed to mate with STI two-part ramp trim.

PVC Trim Cover
Mat Cables
Aluminum

Floor

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-4

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

www.sti.com/info

UMQ Series

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Trim Dimensions

(mm/in.)

Outside Molded Corner Trim
Model UMOC

2-Part Joining Trim (Base and Cover)

58.42
2.300

30.58
1.204

1.02
0.040

17.02
0.670

35.81
1.410

14.1
0.555

72.39
2.850
101.6
4.000

58.42
2.300

94.62
3.725

72.39
2.850

30.58
1.204

2-Part Joining Trim: PN 43222-0096
Joining Trim Aluminum Base: PN 32592
Joining Trim Cover Black: PN 32591
Joining Trim Cover Yellow: PN 32591-0010

2-Part Ramp Trim with PVC Cover (TKM)

Molded Outside Corner: PN 25836

Inside Molded Corner Trim
Model UMIC

21.89
0.862

23.1
0.910

F
11.8
0.47

58.9
2.32

57.48
2.263

91.4
3.60

72.39
2.850
94.62
3.725

57.48
2.263

18.4
0.72

Aluminum Base & PVC Cover: PN 43123-0096
Aluminum Base: PN 32667
PVC Cover: PN 32668

2-Part Ramp Trim with Aluminum Cover (TKAT)

94.62
3.725

72.39
2.850

58.9
2.32

21.89
0.862

Molded Inside Corner: PN 25837

Aluminum Base & Aluminum Cover: PN 43123-1096
Aluminum Base: PN 32667
Aluminum Cover: PN 26441

Blunt Trim
10.8
0.425

Aluminum Single Part Ramp Trim (TKA)
13.72
Ref
0.540

25.4
Ref
1.00

10.64
0.419

13.72
0.540

19° Ref

Blunt Trim: PN 43223-0096

13.72
Ref
0.540

19.53
0.769
63.50
Ref
2.500

9.35
0.367
7.59
Ref
0.299

Aluminum Ramp Trim: PN 43224-0096

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-5

UMQ Series

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Mat Dimensions

(mm/in.)

Two-Part Trim with PVC Cover and Mitered Corners (TKM)
Slide Alum Base Under Mat

PVC Trim Cover

MAT FASTENING DETAIL

Safety Mat

Screw

Aluminum Trim Base

12.7
0.50
(Ref)
56.79
2.236

Anchor

50.8
2.00

4-Cond Cable with
MC12DC Male Single Key
4-Term Connector

25.4
1.00

45°

L = Mat Length
(PVC Trim Cvr) A = L +
(Aluminum
137.4
B=L+
Trim Base)
5.41

609.6 Shown
24.0
114.8
4.52

104.5
4.115
(Ref)

724.4 Shown
28.52

Cable
Conduit
Drill Holes
in Groove
on Boss
(#8 x 1.25"
Screw)

746.8 Shown. TOL = - 0.381 / +0
29.41
- 0.015 / +0
STI To Cut Alum Trim "Rib"
25.4 (1.00) Section Here

Two-Part Trim with PVC Cover and Molded Corners (TKC)
Safety Mat

PVC Trim Cover

Corner

Slide Alum Base Under Mat

MAT FASTENING DETAIL
Screw

Aluminum Trim Base

12.7
0.50
(Ref)
56.79
2.236

4-Cond Cable with
MC12DC Male Single Key
4-Term Connector

50.8 TOL = - 0.381 / +0
2.00
- 0.015 / +0
50.8 TOL = - 0.381 / +0
(Alum Base) B = L 2.00
- 0.015 / +0

(PVC Trim Cvr) A = L -

104.5
4.115
(Ref)

L = Mat Length
138.2
(Overall Length) C = L +
5.44

STI To Cut Alum Trim "Rib"
25.4 (1.00) Section Here

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-6

www.sti.com/info

Anchor

50.8
2.00

25.4
1.00

Cable
Conduit
Drill Holes
in Groove
on Boss
(#8 x 1.25"
Screw)

UMQ Series

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Mat Dimensions (continued)

(mm/in.)

Two-Part Trim with Aluminum Cover and Mitered Corners (TKAT)
Slide Alum Base Under Mat

Aluminum Trim Cover

MAT FASTENING DETAIL

Safety Mat
Aluminum Trim Base

12.7
0.50
(Ref)
56.79
2.236

50.8
2.00

4-Cond Cable with
MC12DC Male Single Key
4-Term Connector

609.6 Shown
24.0

L = Mat Length

114.8
4.52

(Alum Trim Cvr) A = L +

25.4
1.00

(Aluminum
137.4 746.8 Shown. TOL = - 0.381 / +0
B=L+
Trim Base)
5.41 29.41
- 0.015 / +0

Cable
Conduit
Note: Use Groove for Hole
Location Guide
Ø7.14
0.281

104.5
4.115
(Ref)

724.4 Shown
28.52

SS Flat Head Phillips
Thrd Cutting 6-32 Thread,
3/8" Long Screw

Ø3.71
0.146

STI To Cut Alum Trim "Rib"
25.4 (1.00) Section Here

Single-Part Trim Aluminum Trim (TKA)
Aluminum Trim Ramp

12.7
0.50
(Ref)

Safety Mat

25.4
1.00

25.4 (1.0) Section
of Rib Removed

101.6
4.00
(Ref)
50.8
2.00

Note 1

4-Cond Cable with
MC12DC Male Single Key
4-Term Connector

45°

56.79
2.236

L = Mat Length
(Alum Trim) A = L +

MAT FASTENING DETAIL
30.2
1.19
(Ref)

Screw
(90705)

27.7
1.09
(Ref)

Anchor
(90706)

Cable
Conduit
Drill and
Countersink
Holes in
Groove for
(8-32 x 1.25"
Screw)

127.3 TOL = - 0.381 / +0
5.01
- 0.015 / +0

STI To Cut Alum Trim "Rib"
25.4 (1.00) Section Here

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-7

UMQ Series

Mat Measurement
Mat Dimension - Base = Top Surface Dimension + 11.2 (0.44 )
i.e. Top Mat Dimension = 305 (12.00), Mat Base = 316 (12.44)
Mat Dimension - Top Surface

50.8
2.00

Mat Cable Exit Location A

Mat Cable exits on the side indicated by the first dimension in the model number
i.e. UM5-1254, Cable exits 12" dimension
i.e. UM5-4824, Cable exits 48" dimension

F
Pin Out Connector
UMQ5, UMQ10, Integral UM Mat Cables

UMPMC

Index/Keyway
#20 Pin Contact
(4 places)
White
Blue
White
Blue

Index/Keyway

2
3
2

1
Brown
#20 Pin Contact
(44places)
Black
1

3 Mating/Face View 4

Brown
Black

Male Connector

Mating/Face View

20
0.79

WireConnector
Diagram
UM-Y-2-1 "Y"
Female B

4 Black
1 Brown

Wire Diagram

3 Red/Black
Female
B
2 Black
Red/White
4
1 Brown
Female
A
3 Red/Black
1
2 Red/White
4
Female
A
3 Blue
2
1 White
4

Male Connector

Male

20
0.79

4
1
Male
3
4
2
1
3
2

49.9
1.96
49.9
1.96
Rear Side

3 Blue
2 White
Rear Side

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-8

www.sti.com/info

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

UMQ Series

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Custom Mats and Trims
Omron makes ordering custom mats and trims easy. Simply
send us a sketch of your layout including dimensions. Make note
of where you want ramp trim or blunt trim. We'll work from your
sketch to create a detailed drawing of your specifications.

Step 1: Customer Sends a Sketch

Step 2: A Quote Drawing
with Dimensions is Created

Example

Molded Outside Corner

UM4234SPCOL

1947.2
76.66

2 Part
Ramp Trim
CUSTOM
MAT

STANDARD
MAT
UM4236

685.8
27.00

2 Part
Joining Trim

1162.1
45.75

362
14.25
209.6
8.25
Molded
Inside Corner

450.9
17.75
292.1
11.50
277.1
10.91

F
106.4
16.00

Blunt Trim

1011.2
39.81

Step 3: When the Order is Placed, A Detailed Layout Showing all
Components of the Trim System is Made
E

1851.9
72.91

57.2
2.25

41.4
1.63
41.4
1.63

25.4
1.00
27.9
1.10

38.1
1.50

673.1
26.50
38.1
1.50

57.2
2.25

108
4.25

1162.1
45.75

M
187.5
7.38
339.6
13.37

69.1
2.72

25.4
1.00
H

56.4
2.22

28.7
1.13

12.7
0.50
Machined
Cut Out
(2 places)

25.4
1.00

23.1
0.91

UM4236

590.6
23.25

Machined
Cut Out
(2 places)

108
4.25

UM4234SPCOL

41.4
1.63
41.4
1.63

25.4
1.00
27.9
1.10

940.6
37.03

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-9

UMQ Series

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Ordering
Ordering a UMQ Mat System

Standard Mat Ordering Code:

A Quick Disconnect Universal Mat System contains at least one
mat, a 5 m or 10 m cable, sufficient perimeter and joining trim and
a controller. For multiple mat installations using the MC3 controller,
the mats are connected in series to the controller. This may be
done using the UMDB-6 wiring accessory. When using the MC4
or MC6 controllers, six mats may be connected directly to the
controller.
Each component of Quick Disconnect Universal Mat system
must be ordered individually
Mats are available in black or yellow. Yellow mats are denoted
by placing a "Y" in the ordering code. The cable location is specified by letter code at the end of the ordering number. Cables must
be ordered separately.
To order a Quick-Disconnect Universal Mat System, simply fill in
the fields in the model number sequence given.

___ - ___ ___- ___

1 2 3 6

Metric Mat Ordering Code:
___ - ___ - ___ - ___

Prior to the development of the UMQ Mat with QuickDisconnect cable, the UM Series Mat was the standard mat
supplied by Omron. The UM Mats are available with integral
cables in 5 m or 10 m lengths. These integral cables are not
removable. UM mats are still available and can be ordered
in black or yellow with required perimeter and joining trim.

4 5

Example: UMMQ-0500-0500-B
This example is a 500 x 500 mm black metric
quick disconnect mat with cable coming out at
location B.

1 Information required. Represents mat type and color.

F
UM Mats vs.
UMQ Mats

Example: UMQ-2460-A
This example is a 24 x 60 in. standard black
mat with cable location A.

Designator

Description

UMQ

Standard black mat

UMYQ

Standard yellow mat*

UMMQ

Metric black mat

UMMYQ

Metric yellow mat*

Notes: *Mats will take the largest dimension as the first
dimension up to the 48 in. width (i.e. a mat ordered as
36 x 48 will be made as 48 x 36).

2345 Information required. Represents the mat size. Dimensions are for active mat area. Mats are an additional 0.5 in. (12
mm) in each dimension. Choose one value from each column.

For detailed specifications
and ordering information
on the Universal Mat System,
please visit our website at
www.sti.com and enter 'UM" in
the SpeedSPEC search box.

2 Standard Mat Widths in

3 Standard Mat Lengths in

Inches Designator

48
54
60
66
72
Special Standard Sizes*

Special inch sizes are available in increments of 0.5 in.,
with a minimum width or length of 8 in.

4 Metric Mat Widths in mm

5 Metric Mat Lengths in mm

Designator

0500 (500 mm/19.7 in.)

0750 (750 mm/29.5 in.)

1000 (1000 mm/39.4 in.)

1200 (1200 mm/47.2 in.)

1250 (1250 mm/49.2 in.)
1500 (1500 mm/59.1 in.)
1750 (1750 mm /68.9 in.)
1800 (1800 mm/70.9 in.)

*Please consult Omron for mat sizes not listed in the above tables.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-10

www.sti.com/info

UMQ Series

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Ordering (continued)
6 Information required. Represents cable location. See
diagram below.
Cable Location

Ordering Perimeter Trim for a Single Mat**
To order Perimeter Trim for a single mat, simply fill in the fields
in the model number sequence given below.

Description

Bottom left corner of first mat dimension, 2 in. from
top surface of the left edge to center of cable exit

Bottom center of first mat dimension

Bottom right corner of first mat dimension, 2 in. from
top surface of the right edge to center of cable exit

Bottom right corner of second mat dimension, 2 in.
from top surface of the bottom edge to center of
cable exit

Center of second mat dimension

Top right corner of second mat dimension, 2 in. from
top surface of the top edge to center of cable exit

Notes: Mats with both dimensions equal will only have "A", "B", and "C"
cable locations available.

Standard Perimeter Trim Ordering Code:
___ - ___ ___- ___
Example: TKM-1266-E
This example is a trim kit with mitered corners
to fit a 12 x 66 in. standard mat with cable
coming out at location E.

7 2 3 6

Metric Perimeter Trim Ordering Code:
___ - ___ - ___ - ___
Example: MTKM-0500-0500-E

4 5

This example is a trim kit with mitered corners
to fit a 500 x 500 mm metric quick disconnect
mat with cable coming out at location E.

7 Information required. Represents the corner style used on the
trim kits.

Designator
TKM

Length
(2nd Dimension)
E

Width
(1st Dimension)
A

Cable locations
shown are for
rectangular
mats only.

Description
Standard trim kit, 2-part mitered corners with PVC top
cover
TKAT
Standard trim kit, 2-part mitered corners with aluminum
top cover
TKC
Standard trim kit, 2-part with molded corners with PVC top
cover
TKA
Standard trim kit, single part aluminum ramp trim (mitered
only)
MTKM
Metric trim kit with mitered corners
MTKC
Metric trim kit with molded corners
MTKAT is available upon request.

Accessories for Standard and Metric Sized Mats
Model Number
UMRT4
UMRT8
UMRT8A
UMJS4
UMJS8
UMJTC8Y
UMBT4
UMBT8
UMAL
UMOC
UMIC
UMDB-6
UMEC-03
UMEC-05
UMEC-10
UMEC-15
UMPMC
UM4PRC
UM-Y-2-1
UMQ5
UMQ10

Description
Weight
Bulk two-part ramp trim with yellow PVC cover 1.22 m (48 in.) length
1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Bulk two-part ramp trim with yellow PVC cover 2.44 m (96 in.) length
3.0 kg (6.6 lb.)
Bulk two-part ramp trim with aluminum top 2.44 m (96 in.) length
3.2 kg (7.0 lb.)
Bulk two-part active joining trim 1.22 m (48 in.) length
1.4 kg (3.0 lb.)
Bulk two-part active joining trim 2.44 m (96 in.) length
2.7 kg (6.0 lb.)
Bulk joining trim cover yellow 2.44 m (96 in.)
0.5 kg (1.0 lb.)
Bulk blunt trim 1.22 m (48 in.) length
1.1 kg (2.5 lb.)
Bulk blunt trim 2.44 m (96 in.) length
2.3 kg (5.0 lb.)
Bulk aluminum ramp trim 2.44 m (96 in.)
2.9 kg (6.5 lb.)
Molded outside corner
Molded inside corner
Universal Safety Mat distribution box with 6 mat input connectors and one output connection
to the controller
3 m (9 ft.) extension cable for mat or UMDB-6
5 m (16 ft.) extension cable for mat or UMDB-6
10 m (32 ft.) extension cable for mat or UMDB-6
15 m (49 ft.) extension cable for mat or UMDB-6
Panel-mount connector. Allows the controller to accept quick disconnect cable from UM
series mats.
4-pin male QD field replacement connector for mat cables
"Y" connector, internally connected to allow 2 mats to 1 input to controller or connector
5 m quick-disconnect cable
10 m quick-disconnect cable

specifications
✎ For
and dimensions on the
MC Controllers,
see page F-12
details on ordering a
✎ For
custom safety mat,
see page F-9
details on ordering
✎ For
a trim kit for a multiple
configuration mat, please
consult Omron.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-11

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

MC Controllers

MC3

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

MC3, MC4 and MC6 Series
Safety Mat Controllers
The MC Series safety mat controllers are used in conjunction
with a four-wire, normally open, safety mat where perimeter guarding is required. These control reliable controllers send a stop
signal to the guarded machine when an object of sufficient weight
is detected on the active mat area.
The MC Series controllers, when combined with a four-wire
UM or UMQ series mat, provide access guarding and improved
productivity. The work area is fully visible and accessible.
The controller meets the requirement of EN 1760-1:1998,
EN 13849-1, ANSI/RIA 15.06-1999 (R2009), ANSI B11.19-2010,
OSHA 1910-217C. CSA and UL508.

• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

MC6

Options

•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

Universal power input
Up to 6 mat zone inputs
Six mat zone status indicator LEDs
Select from Automatic Start, Start/Restart Interlock or Start
Interlock operating modes
MPCE monitoring
Remote access to reset functions
2-digit numeric display for fault diagnostics
Surface mount, lockable metal enclosure

Lid-mounted reset key switch
Quick disconnect for incoming power and relay outputs
Quick disconnects up to 6 mat zone inputs
Solid-state safety output module
Safety relay output module

Description
MC3

Additional Guarding Requirements

The MC3 DIN mount controller may be used in applications
that do not require the feature set of the MC6 controller. The MC3
single zone mat controller has removable terminal blocks and
operates only on 24 VDC.

A safety mat system is often only one part of a machine
guarding solution. If the safety mat does not protect all access to
the point of operation, additional guarding must be used. Safety
mat systems should only be used to detect the presence, not the
absence, of a force.

MC4
The MC4 is a NEMA 4, 12 rated single zone mat controller. This
controller may be used in applications when the diagnostic features of the MC6 may not be required. The MC4 may be ordered
in either 24 VDC or the universal auto-selecting power supply for
100-240 VAC.

MC6
The MC6 is a NEMA 4, 12 controller with six individual mat
zone indicators and is designed to be backward compatible with
the MC4. Both units are dimensionally identical. This is where the
similarities stop: The MC6 has full featured diagnostics with a 24
VDC and an optional universal power supply (100-240 VAC autoselecting). It is a controller that can be used anywhere in the world.

Perimeter Guarding Requirements
For perimeter guarding installations, the guarded machine or
robot controller must be wired such that any stop signal generated by the safety mat system will cause an immediate stop of the
hazardous motion. The machine or robot must only be restarted
by the actuation of a manual reset switch. This reset switch must
be located outside the area of hazardous motion and positioned
such that the hazardous area can be observed by the switch
operator. The purpose of this arrangement is to prevent a machine
or robot from automatically restarting once the sensing weight is
no longer detected by the safety mat sensing area.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-12

www.sti.com/info

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Specifications
Controller Specifications
Performance
Category 3 Safety Device:
Max Input Resistance:
Response Time:
Indications:

MC3

MC4

Yes
8 ohm per input channel
< 30 msec
1 - Green = Run
1 - Red = Stop
1 - Green = Mat Clear

Operational Modes: (Selectable)

Automatic Start, Start/Restart Interlock

Electrical
Power Input:

24 VDC ± 15% < 3 watts

Safety Inputs:

Safety Output Relays:
Maximum Switched Current:
MPCE:
Aux. Output Relay:
Maximum Switched Current:
Relay Life:
Terminal Blocks:
Options
Solid-State Outputs
Solid-State Safety Outputs:
Maximum Switched Current:
Solid-State Aux. Outputs:

n/a
n/a
n/a

n/a

Maximum Switched Current:

Reset Function
Key-switch (factory installed):
Remote:
Mat Input Connectors:
Power Input and Safety Output
Connector:
Enclosure:
Mounting:
Environmental
Protection Rating:
Operating Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Vibration:
Shock:
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD):
Radiated RF Field:
Electrical Fast Transients (EFT):
Surge:
Shipping Wt.:
Standards of Conformity:

1 - 2 Digit Diagnostic Display
1 - Green = Run
1 - Red = Stop
1 - Green = Mat Clear
1 - Yellow = Interlock
6 - Red = Mat Zones
DIP Switch Selected, Automatic
Start, Start/Restart Interlock Start
Interlock

24 VDC ± 10% < 3 watts
or Autoselecting,
100 - 240 VAC ± 10%, 20 watts

24 VDC ± 10% 10 watts (Relay),
24 VDC ± 10% 50 watts (SolidState), or Autoselecting,
100 - 240 VAC ± 10%, 20 watts
Connections for up to six, - 4-wire UM Safety Mats
Approximately 12 multiple mats may be connected to
a single zone in series
Do not exceed 8 ohms per input channel

One - 4-wire UM Safety Mat, or
group series as one input.
Approximately 12 multiple mats
may be connected to a single zone
in series; Do not exceed 8 ohms
per input channel
2 NO and 2 NC
230 VAC, 6 A, 1500 watts 24 VDC - 2 A Inductive, 6 A Resistive
n/a
None ( NC may be used as Aux)
230 VAC, 6 A, 1500 watts
30 VDC, 1.0 A
Mechanical = 10M operations
Removable Pressure point screw

MC6

230 VAC, 6 A, 1500 watts

Cage clamp terminal strip

2 NO and 1 NC
230 VAC, 7 A, 1600 watts 24 VDC 2 A Inductive, 6 A Resistive
DIP Switch ‑
1 NO and 1 NC
125 VAC, 0.5 A

Cage clamp terminal strip &
2-part terminal blocks

2 Current Sourcing 24 VDC (PNP)
0.625 A @ 24 VDC
1 Current Sourcing (PNP) and
1 Current Sinking (NPN)
Current Sourcing Max:
0.5 A @ 24 VDC
Current Sinking Max:
0.1 A @ 24 VDC

n/a
Yes
user supplied, Key-switch, or Pushbutton
n/a
Up to six quick-disconnect connectors
n/a
Yes
Polycarbonate
35 mm DIN rail

Polyurethane-painted 14 ga. steel
Surface Mount

IP20
IP65/NEMA 4, 12
0 to 55°C (32 to 131° F)
0 to 55°C (32 to 131° F)
90%
5-60 Hz at 5 g max on three axis
10-55 Hz at 5 g max on three axis
10 g for 0.016 sec., 1000 shocks for each axis on 3 axis

±8 kV (air discharge), ±6 kV (contact discharge)
10 V/m, 80 to 1,000 MHz
±2 kV (all power and I/O ports)
± 2 kV (all power and I/O ports)
0.22 kg (0.8 lbs.)
Approx 4 kg (9.0 lbs.)
TUV, CE, cCSAus
TUV, CE, cCSAus
TUV, CE, cCSAus
CE Certificate # BB9910347 01
CE Certificate # BB9910347 02
CE Certificate # BB2110242 01
cCSAus Certificate # LR90200-14
cCSAus Certificate # LR90200-14
cCSAus Certificate # LR90200-14
Designed to Meet or Exceed:
EN1760-1998, EN13849, ANSI/RIA15.06-1999 (R2009), ANSI B11.19-2010, OSHA 1910-217C, CSA AND UL508
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

www.sti.com/info

F-13

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Dimensions

(in./mm)

MC4, MC6
1.40
35.6

1.35
34.3

3.50
88.9

1.75
44.5

0.875 KNOCKOUT
22.2 (3 PLCS)
OPTIONAL CONNECTOR
AC POWER INPUT & RELAY OUTPUT
9-PIN FOR MC4
12-PIN FOR MC6

TOP VIEW

3.29
83.6

7.43
188.7

2.81
71.4

0.30 MTG HOLES (8 PLCS)
7.6
4.00
101.6

Scientific Technologies Inc, Fremont CA 94555-3611 USA

9.55
242.6

13.36
339.3
MIN.

LEFT SIDE VIEW

2.05
52.1
BACK VIEW

6.55
166.4
FRONT VIEW

RIGHT SIDE VIEW

0.53 KNOCKOUT
13.5 (6 PLCS)
DIA

1.72
43.6

2.71
68.9
BOTTOM VIEW

0.96
24.4
1.84
46.7

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-14

10.05
255.3

12.97
329.3
MIN.

MAT CONNECTORS

0.97
24.5

10.80
274.3

12.37
314.1
MIN.

www.sti.com/info

MAT CABLE 0.58
OD
CONNECTOR 14.7

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Dimensions (continued)

(mm/in. )

MC3

UMDB-6
75
2.95

15.3
0.6

101.6
4.00

60.5
2.38
Mtg Holes
215.9
8.50
Mtg Holes

38.1
1.50

98
3.9

228.6
9.00

110
4.3

217.4
8.56

35.5
1.4

Mat 4

MAT4

MAT2

Mat 2

Mat 5

MAT5

MAT1

Mat 1

Mat 6

MAT6

Out to
Controller

Side View

7.5
0.3

1.5
0.06

Mat 3

38.1
1.50

61.2
2.4
55
2.2

MAT3

OUT

38.1
1.50

38
1.5

115.8
4.56
78..2 75.7
3.08 2.98
Ref
Ref

F
38.1
1.50
50.8
2.00

Bottom View

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-15

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Wiring
MC6 with Multiple Mats Connected to One Zone
MC6
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS

(BROWN)

(WHITE)

6BRN

6WHT

6BLU

6BLK

5BRN

5WHT

5BLU

5BLK

4BRN

4WHT

ZONE 6
TB4

(WHITE)
MAT 3

(BLUE)

(BLACK)

ZONE 5

(BROWN)

MAT 2

(BLUE)

4BLU

4BLK

ZONE 4
3BRN

3WHT

3BLU

3BLK

ZONE 3
2BRN

2WHT

2BLU

1BRN

(BROWN)

MAT 1

(BLACK)

2BLK

ZONE 2

1WHT

1BLU

TB1

1BLK

ZONE 1

(BLUE)

(BLACK)

(BLUE)

BLACK

(WHITE)

BLUE
WHITE

MULTIPLE MATS MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE CONTROLLER USING THIS METHOD.
THE ABOVE EXAMPLE SHOWS 4 MATS WIRED.
MATS MUST BE CONNECTED IN SEQUENCE, USING ZONE 1, ZONE 2, ZONE 3, etc.
DIP SWITCHES MUST BE SET TO THE NUMBER OF ZONES BEING USED.

Mat Connections for Listed Controllers

MAT 4

BROWN

BLK
WHT

BRN

BLK

BRN

female male

MAT3

BLU

• The MC4 and MC6 controllers may be ordered with up to
6 mat connectors (part #60477) installed.
• When using the MC3 controller, part #60477 may be
ordered for mounting in customer enclosure.

WHT

UMDB-6

MAT4
female

male

(TOP PLATE)

2
WHITE

WHT

M22

3
BLUE

(WHITE)

WHT

BLK
BRN

MAT6
female

(WHITE)

male

female
female

BLU
WHT

BLK

female

MATING/FACE VIEW
MAT CONNECTOR WIRING

OUT

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-16

male

MAT1

(BLUE)

#20 PIN CONTACT
(4 PLCS)

BRN

BLK

female

(BOTTOM)

BRN

(BLUE)

male

WHT

M21

male

www.sti.com/info

WHT

BLU

female

(BLUE)

(BLACK)

BLK

(BLACK)

BLU

M11

BLU

BLK

BRN

BLK

BRN

(BROWN)

BLK

M12

MAT5

BLU

BRN

MAT2

BLK

BRN

(WHITE)
MAT 1

WHT

(BROWN)
INDEX/
KEYWAY
BROWN
BLACK

WHT

BLU

CONTROLLER WIRE COLORS
(MC4) (MC6) (MC3)

male

female

BRN

MALE CONNECTOR
MC12 Male Single Key

Female Terminal Installs
Inside Male Terminal
female

male

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Wiring (continued)
MC4 AC Power, 9-Pin Connector
CONTROL CONNECTIONS FOR MC4
PIN 1

FOR ALL 43815-1X1X
HOOK-UP IN THIS MANNER
WHENEVER OPTIONAL POWER
CONNECTOR ASSY IS INSTALLED

PIN 3
PIN 6

GRN/BLK

RED/BLK
RED

N.O. 2

N.C. 1

N.O. 1

BLUE
GRN/BLK
WHT/BLK

NC 2

PIN 9

NO 2
NC 1
RELAY OUTPUTS

CLEAR

POWER SUPPLY

RUN

MC4

NC 2

+24 VDC

BLACK

24 VDC

24 VDC RET
WHITE

PIN 5

120 VAC POWER CONNECTIONS FOR MC4
PIN 9

AC IN

BLACK

120 VAC

NEUT

WHITE

PIN 5

JMP2

LED1

JMP3

LED3
JMP1

RESET

MATING VIEW

1BRN
1WHT
2BRN
2WHT
3BRN
3WHT
4BRN
4WHT
5BRN
5WHT
6BRN
6WHT

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS
1BLK
1BLU
2BLK
2BLU
3BLK
3BLU
4BLK
4BLU
5BLK
5BLU
6BLK
6BLU

PIN 8

LED2

STOP

PIN 4

GREEN

1
K2

PIN 2

24 VDC POWER CONNECTIONS FOR MC4
NC 2

NC 1

RED/BLK

BLU
NO 2

NO 2

NO 1
SHIELD
START 2
START 1
+ 24 VDC IN
24 V RET

F3
T2A
250V

ORN

WHT/BLK

AC IN NEUT

NO 1

TB2

NO 1

NEUT

RED

WHT

BLK
TB3

AC IN

CONNECT GREEN LEAD TO GROUND LUG

GREEN

PIN 7

ORANGE

N.O. 2

MC4 DC Power, 9-Pin Connector

CONTROL CONNECTIONS FOR MC4

FOR ALL 43815-1X1X
HOOK-UP IN THIS MANNER
WHENEVER OPTIONAL POWER
CONNECTOR ASSY IS INSTALLED

PIN 1
PIN 3

NO 1

RUN
STOP
MC4

GRN/BLK

LED1
LED2

NC 2

PIN 9

N.C. 1

N.O. 1

BLUE
GRN/BLK
WHT/BLK

PIN 2
PIN 4
PIN 8

GREEN

K1
JMP2

+24 VDC

BLACK

24 VDC

24 VDC RET
WHITE

PIN 5

120 VAC POWER CONNECTIONS FOR MC4
PIN 9

AC IN

BLACK

120 VAC

NEUT

WHITE

PIN 5

JMP3

LED3
JMP1

RESET

1BRN
1WHT
2BRN
2WHT
3BRN
3WHT
4BRN
4WHT
5BRN
5WHT
6BRN
6WHT

1BLK
1BLU
2BLK
2BLU
3BLK
3BLU
4BLK
4BLU
5BLK
5BLU
6BLK
6BLU

RED

NC 2

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS

RED/BLK

N.O. 2

N.C. 1

24 VDC POWER CONNECTIONS FOR MC4
NC 2

NC 1

NO 2
NC 1
RELAY OUTPUTS

K2
CLEAR

NC 1

RED/BLK

NO 2

BLU

ORN

NO 1

TB2
BLK
+ 24 VDC
WHT
24 V RET

NO 1

RED

WHT/BLK

PIN 7

TB1

CONNECT GREEN LEAD TO GROUND LUG

GREEN

PIN 6

ORANGE

N.O. 2

MATING VIEW

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-17

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Wiring (continued)

RED/BLK TR

PIN 1
RED

BLU/BLK TR

BLUE

ORN/BLK TR

ORANGE

BLK/WHT TR
GRN/BLK TR
WHT/BLK TR

CONTROL CONNECTIONS FOR MC6

5 4 3 2 1

F1
T2A
250V

PIN 2

MPCE

BLK/WHT
START 1
WH/BLK

PIN 3

1
4

TB1

TB3

J2
TB3

TB3

2
5
NO

COM1

PIN 6

OR/BLK

NO2

BLU/BLK

AUX NO

RED

START 2

GRN/BLK

PIN 7
PIN 10
PIN 5

GREEN

AUX OUTPUTS

24 VDC POWER CONNECTIONS FOR MC6

+ 24 VDC
BLACK

PIN 12
RELAY OUTPUT BOARD

TB3

0 VDC

PIN 11

WHITE

100 - 240 VAC POWER CONNECTIONS FOR MC6

UNIVERSAL
POWER SUPPLY

AUX COM

RED/BLK

PIN 9

NO2

BLUE

PIN 8

NO1

ORANGE

PIN 4

SAFETY
OUTPUTS

MPCE
START 2
START 1
+ 24 VDC
0 VDC

WHITE
NEUT

AC IN

BLACK

MC6 AC Power, 12-Pin Connector

PIN 12

AC IN

BLACK

TB2

NEUT

FOR AC POWER

PIN 11

WHITE

MATING VIEW

PIN 1
RED

RED/BLK TR

BLUE

BLU/BLK TR

CONTROL CONNECTIONS FOR MC6

ORN/BLK TR

ORANGE

BLK/WHT TR
GRN/BLK TR
WHT/BLK TR
BLACK
WHITE

MC6 DC Power, 12-Pin Connector

SAFETY
OUTPUTS

5 4 3 2 1

F1
T2A
250V

PIN 4
PIN 8

PIN 3

MPCE
START 2
START 1
+ 24 VDC
0 VDC

PIN 2

PIN 9
C
K1

NO2

BLUE

AUX COM

RED/BLK

MPCE

BLK/WHT
START 1
WH/BLK

1
4
C
5
3

TB1

J2
TB3

TB3

2
5
NO

COM1

PIN 6

OR/BLK

NO2

BLU/BLK

AUX NO

RED

START 2

GRN/BLK

PIN 7
PIN 10
PIN 5

GREEN

24 VDC POWER CONNECTIONS FOR MC6
PIN 12

+ 24 VDC
BLACK

TB3

0 VDC

WHITE

PIN 11

100 - 240 VAC POWER CONNECTIONS FOR MC6
PIN 12

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-18

ORANGE

AUX OUTPUTS

RELAY OUTPUT BOARD

NO1

www.sti.com/info

BLACK

AC IN

TB2

NEUT

WHITE

MATING VIEW

PIN 11

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Suggested Machine and PLC Connections
MC3, Two Normally Open Safety Relay Outputs
24VDC
POWER TO CONTROLLER
OPTIONAL
KEY SWITCH
OR
PUSH BUTTON
RESET

M12

(WHT) (BRN)
MAT 1

M11

M21
M22

Y2
24
VDC

(BRN)

(BLK)

(WHT) (BRN)
MAT 2

(BLU) (BLK)

(WHT)
MAT 3

(BLU) (BLK)

(BLU)

(BLU)
(WHT)

Y1 X1 X2 M11 M12 M21 M22
+
2.2 START BLK BRN BLU WHT
VA
MAT

STOP RUN

MAT CLEAR

MACHINE MOTOR VOLTAGE

CUSTOMER
SUPPLIED FUSE
5 AMPS OR LESS

13 14 23 24 31 32 41 42

FUSE

OUTPUTS
250 VAC 6 A 1500 VA MAX

NC
NC

T0 PLC FOR MONITORING

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-19

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Suggested Machine and PLC Connections (continued)
MC4, Two Normally Open Safety Relay Outputs, 100 to 240 VAC Power
100 TO 240 VAC
POWER TO CONTROLLER

MACHINE MOTOR VOLTAGE

FUSE

CUSTOMER
SUPPLIED FUSE
7 AMPS OR LESS

OPTIONAL
KEY SWITCH
OR
PUSH BUTTON
RESET
CONNECTS TO
TERMINAL
INSIDE
ENCLOSURE

F
NO 2

NC 1

NC 2

NEUT

RELAY OUTPUTS
SHIELD
START 2
START 1
+ 24 VDC IN
24 V RET

F3
T2A
250V

UNIVERSAL
POWER SUPPLY

(OPTIONAL)
FOR AC POWER

CLEAR
RUN
STOP

LED1
LED2

K1
JMP2
JMP3

LED3
JMP1

RESET

MC4

1BLK
1BLU
2BLK
2BLU
3BLK
3BLU
4BLK
4BLU
5BLK
5BLU
6BLK
6BLU

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS

BLACK
BLUE

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS
1BRN
1WHT
2BRN
2WHT
3BRN
3WHT
4BRN
4WHT
5BRN
5WHT
6BRN
6WHT

AC IN

NO 1

NC1
NC1
TO PLC
CONTROL

JUMPER

BROWN
UP TO 6 MATS MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE
CONTROLLER USING THIS METHOD.
AS EACH MAT IS CONNECTED, THE JUMPER IS
MOVED TO THE LAST UNUSED TERMINAL.
THE ABOVE EXAMPLE SHOWS TWO MATS WIRED,
JUMPERS WOULD BE PLACED AS SHOWN.
(3 BLK) IS JUMPERED TO TERMINAL LABELED 6 BLU &
(3 BRN) IS JUMPERED TO TERMINAL LABELED 6 WHT.
WHEN ALL 6 MATS ARE CONNECTED,
JUMPERS ARE NOT REQUIRED.

MAT 1
WHITE
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
MAT 2
WHITE

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-20

www.sti.com/info

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Suggested Machine and PLC Connections (continued)
MC4, Two Normally Open Safety Relay Outputs, 24 VDC Power
24 VDC
POWER TO CONTROLLER

MACHINE MOTOR VOLTAGE

FUSE

CUSTOMER
SUPPLIED FUSE
7 AMPS OR LESS

OPTIONAL
KEY SWITCH
OR
PUSH BUTTON
RESET
CONNECTS TO
TERMINAL
INSIDE
ENCLOSURE

NO 2

NO 1

NC 1

NC 2

NC1
NC1
TO PLC
CONTROL

RELAY OUTPUTS

SHIELD
START 2
START 1
+ 24 VDC IN
24 V RET

F3
T2A
250V

K2
CLEAR
RUN
STOP
MC4

LED1
LED2

K1
JMP2
JMP3

LED3
JMP1

RESET

BLACK
BLUE

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS

1BRN
1WHT
2BRN
2WHT
3BRN
3WHT
4BRN
4WHT
5BRN
5WHT
6BRN
6WHT

1BLK
1BLU
2BLK
2BLU
3BLK
3BLU
4BLK
4BLU
5BLK
5BLU
6BLK
6BLU

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS

JUMPER

MAT 1
WHITE
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
MAT 2
WHITE

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-21

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Suggested Machine and PLC Connections (continued)
MC6, Two Normally Open Safety Relay Outputs, 100 to 240 VAC Power
OPTIONAL
KEY SWITCH
OR
PUSH BUTTON
RESET

100 TO 240 VAC
POWER TO CONTROLLER

N(-)

(+) MACHINE CONTROL VOLTAGE

SNUBBER
MPCE1
FACTORY
INSTALLED JUMPER
REMOVE WHEN
MPCE IS USED

CR
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
FUSE
7 AMPS OR LESS

MPCE1

SNUBBER
MPCE2
CR

FUSE

MPCE2

FUSE

CONNECTS
INSIDE
ENCLOSURE

MPCE1
MC6

TB1

START 1

0 VDC

MPCE

TB2

+ 24 VDC

4
START 2

GND

NEUT

AC IN

1
5

TO
MACHINE
MPCE2 CONTROL

SAFETY OUTPUTS

AUX OUTPUTS

TB3
F1
T2A
250V

TO PLC
CONTROL

NO
K1

UNIVERSAL
POWER SUPPLY

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

(OPTIONAL)
FOR AC POWER

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

SAFETY RELAY OUTPUT BOARD

SW2

SW1

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS
6BRN

6WHT

6BLU

6BLK

ZONE 6
5BRN

5WHT

5BLU

5BLK

ZONE 5
4BRN

4WHT

4BLU

4BLK

ZONE 4
3BRN

3WHT

3BLK

2BRN

2WHT

2BLU

2BLK

3BLU

ZONE 3

ZONE 2
1BRN

1WHT

1BLU

TB1

1BLK

ZONE 1

TB4

BLACK
BLUE
WHT
MAT 1
BOTTOM
PLATE

BRN

BLACK
BLUE

TOP
PLATE

WHITE
MAT 2

BROWN

UP TO 6 MATS MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE CONTROLLER USING THIS METHOD.
THE ABOVE EXAMPLE SHOWS TWO - 4 WIRE SAFETY MATS CONNECTED.
MATS MUST BE CONNECTED IN SEQUENCE, USING ZONE 1, ZONE 2, ZONE 3, ETC.
DIP SWITCHES MUST BE SET TO THE NUMBER OF ZONES BEING USED.
IN MOST CASES SHIELDING IS NOT REQUIRED FOR “MPCE” AND REMOTE START WIRING.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-22

www.sti.com/info

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Suggested Machine and PLC Connections (continued)
MC6, Two Solid-State Safety Outputs, 24 VDC Power
24 VDC
POWER TO CONTROLLER

OPTIONAL
KEY SWITCH
OR
PUSH BUTTON
RESET

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSORS
ARE OPTIONAL
TVS
MPCE1

FACTORY
INSTALLED JUMPER
REMOVE WHEN
MPCE IS USED

TVS
MPCE2
CONNECTS
INSIDE
ENCLOSURE

MPCE1

AUX INPUTS TO PLC

MPCE2

F
MC6

J2
3

6
AUX NPN

AUX PNP

0 VDC

OSSD B

0 VDC

MPCE1
OSSD A

0 VDC

START 1

MPCE

TB3

+ 24 VDC

4
START 2

1
5

TO
MACHINE
MPCE2 CONTROL

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

SOLID STATE OUTPUT BOARD

SW2

SW1

TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SAFETY MATS
6BRN

6WHT

6BLU

6BLK

ZONE 6
5BRN

5WHT

5BLU

5BLK

ZONE 5
4BRN

4WHT

4BLU

4BLK

ZONE 4
3BRN

3WHT

3BLK

2BRN

2WHT

2BLU

2BLK

3BLU

ZONE 3

ZONE 2
1BRN

1WHT

1BLU

TB1

1BLK

ZONE 1

TB4

BLACK
BLUE
WHT
MAT 1
BOTTOM
PLATE

BRN

BLACK
BLUE

TOP
PLATE

WHITE
MAT 2

BROWN

IN MOST CASES UP TO 6 MATS MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE CONTROLLER USING THIS METHOD.
THE ABOVE EXAMPLE SHOWS TWO - 4 WIRE SAFETY MATS CONNECTED.
MATS MUST BE CONNECTED IN SEQUENCE, USING ZONE 1, ZONE 2, ZONE 3, ETC.
DIP SWITCHES MUST BE SET TO THE NUMBER OF ZONES BEING USED. IN MOST CASES
SHIELDING IS NOT REQUIRED FOR “MPCE” AND REMOTE START WIRING.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

F-23

MC Controllers

Safety Mats & Area Guarding

Ordering
Safety Standards and Precautions

MC-3
MC3
MC3 Series Safety Mat Controller
No options are available

MC-4

MC4 –

Power Input Connector
0
No power input & safety output connector
1
Power input & safety output connector
Lid Mounted Key-switch
0
No key-switch
1
Factory installed lid mounted key-switch
Power Input Voltage
0
24 VDC
1
100-240 VAC auto-selecting
Mat Input Connectors
0
No mat connectors
__
Please specify a number between 1 & 6

MC-6

MC6

–

A Safety Mat controller is a general purpose, safety mat control
device and is not designed for any specific type, model or brand
of machine. All safety-related functions of the guarded machine
controls including pneumatic, electric, logic or hydraulic controls
must be control reliable.
A Safety Mat controller when combined with a four-wire safety
mat meets ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 (R2009), ANSI B11.19-2010
and the following applicable OSHA standards. When used with
mechanical power presses, OSHA standard 1910.217(c) applies.
For other applications the requirements of section 1910.212 apply.
Only use a Safety Mat controller and four-wire safety mat
system on machinery that stops consistently and immediately anywhere in its cycle or stroke. Never use a Safety Mat controller and
four-wire safety mat system on a full-revolution clutched press or
machine. Access to the point of operation or hazardous machine
area not protected by the Safety Mat controller and four-wire
safety mat system must be guarded by fencing, barriers or other
appropriate methods.
The purchaser, installer and employer are responsible for
meeting all local state and federal government laws, rules, codes
or regulations relating to the proper use, installation, operation
and maintenance of this control and the guarded machine. See
Installation and Operation Manual for details.
All application examples described are for illustration purposes
only. Actual installations may differ from those indicated.

Input Voltage
AC AC power
DC DC power
Power Input Connector
0
No power input & safety output connector
1
Power input & safety output connector
Lid Mounted Reset Keyswitch
0
No reset keyswitch
1
Factory installed lid mounted reset keyswitch
Safety Output Module
1
Safety relay
2
Solid-state (not available with AC input)
Mat Input Connectors
0
No mat connectors
__
Please specify a number between 1 & 6

information on STI
✎ For
safety mats, see page F-2

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

F-24

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches
Contents
Selection Guide

G-2

Tongue Switches
D4GS-N G-98

Guardlocking Switches

D4NS G-99

D4JL G-6

T2008 G-107

D4NL G-15

T4012 G-112

D4SL-N G-25

T4016 G-112

TL4019 G-43

T5007 G-113

TL4024 G-51

T5009 & T5009-6

Hinge Pin Switches

Safety Selector Switch

D4NH G-52

A22TK G-120

Non-Contact Switches

Explosion-Proof Switch

EC Series

G-52

CM Series

G-53

G-114

XT5009 G-121

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS G-65

Accessories

MA Series

G-82

D4NS-SK/D4JL-SK G-121

MA-S Series

G-88

Accessories G-122

MFS G-88
Safety Limit Switches
D4B-□N G-89
D4F G-89
D4N G-90
D4N-□R G-98

G-1

Safety Interlock Switches

Selection Guide

Interlock

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Selecting the Proper Interlock Switch for Your Application
1
Selecting the Correct
Safety Interlock Switch is Easy
Our selection guide will help you with the selection
process. First, determine if your application will include the
use of mechanical guards. If not, please review the Perimeter
Access Guarding, Safety Light Curtain, Safety Mat, or TwoHand Control sections of this catalog.
The following questions will guide you to the appropriate
models. Contact OMRON Automation and Safety for
assistance.

G-2

Does it need
to operate in
an explosive
atmosphere?

yes

Do you
require a safety
selector switch?

yes

Tongue (Key) Operated

Safety Selector Switch

• XT5009 — p. G-121

• A22TK — p. G-120

Rapid delivery product

www.sti.com/info

Selection Guide

Safety Interlock Switches

Selection Guide (continued)

3
no

Do you need
an emergency
stop switch?

Do you
require guard
door locking?

yes

5
no

yes

Do you need
non-contact
operation?

(continued on
next page)

yes

Stainless Steel Housing

Emergency Stop Devices
See Section H of this
catalog for Emergency Stop
Devices.

• MA-S Series — p. G-88
(non-coded magnetic)
Rapid delivery product

• CM Series — p. G-53
(coded magnetic)
Rapid delivery product

Ferroresonant
• MFS — p. G-88
(stand-alone)
Rapid delivery product

Solenoid operating switches

Electronically Coded
Metal body switches

• EC Series — p. G-52

Plastic body switches

(Category 4)

2 Safety + 2 Auxiliary Contacts

1 Safety + 2 Auxiliary Contacts

3 Safety + 1 Auxiliary Contact

Magnetically Coded

• TL4024 — p. G-51

• D4NL — p. G-15

• D4JL — p. G-6

• CM Series — p. G-53

(slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

(square shape)
Rapid delivery product

• D4SL-N — p. G-25
(slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

2 Safety + 1 Auxiliary Contact

(square shape)

• D4NL — p. G-15
(square shape)
Rapid delivery product

• D4SL-N — p. G-25
(slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

(plastic housing)
Rapid delivery product

• D40Z/G9SX-NS — p. G-65
(Category 4/PLe)
Rapid delivery product

Magnetically Actuated

• D4NL — p. G-15

• MA Series — p. G-82

(square shape)
Rapid delivery product

Rapid delivery product

• D4SL-N — p. G-25

• MA-S Series — p. G-88

(slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

(plastic housing)

(stainless steel housing)
Rapid delivery product

2 Safety + 2 Auxiliary Contacts
• D4JL — p. G-6
(square shape)

• D4NL — p. G-15
(square shape)
Rapid delivery product

• D4SL-N — p. G-25
(slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

• TL4019 — p. G-43
(slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

www.sti.com/info

G-3

Selection Guide

Safety Interlock Switches

Selection Guide (continued)

6
(continued from
previous page)

Do you need
tongue (key)
operated?

Do you need
hinge operated?

yes

1 Safety + 1 Auxiliary Contact

2 Safety + 1 Auxiliary Contact

• D4GS-N — p. G-98

(plastic, 30 x 80 mm)
Rapid delivery product

• D4NS — p. G-99

(plastic, 30 x 50 mm)
Rapid delivery product

• T2008 — p. G-107

• D4NH — p. G-52

(plastic, 30 x 50 mm)

• T5009 — p. G-114

(plastic 30 x 80 mm)

Do you need
limit type?

yes

Plastic Body Switch,
Single Conduit Entry
• D4N — p. G-90
(plastic, 30 x 90 mm)

Plastic Body Switch,
Multiple Conduit Entry

(plastic, 50 x 90 mm)
Rapid delivery product

• D4N — p. G-90

• T4012 — p. G-112

2 Safety + 2 Auxiliary Contacts

(plastic, 40 x 80 mm)
Rapid delivery product

• D4NS — p. G-99

Metal Body Switch,
Single Conduit Entry

• T5007 — p. G-113

• T4012 — p. G-112

(plastic, 20 x 80 mm)
Rapid delivery product

(plastic 50 x 70 mm)
Rapid delivery product

2 Safety + 0 Auxiliary Contacts

(plastic, 30 x 50 mm)
(plastic, 40 x 120 mm)
Rapid delivery product

• T4016 — p. G-112

• D4GS-N — p. G-98

(metal, 40 x 160 mm)
Rapid delivery product

(plastic, 30 x 80 mm)
Rapid delivery product

• T5009-6 — p. G-114

• D4NS — p. G-99

(plastic, 50 x 90 mm)
Rapid delivery product

(plastic, 30 x 50 mm)

• T2008 — p. G-107

3 Safety + 0 Auxiliary Contacts

(plastic, 20 x 80 mm)
Rapid delivery product

• D4NS — p. G-99
(plastic, 30 x 50 mm)

• T4012 — p. G-112

(plastic, 30 x 80 mm)

• D4B-□N — p. G-89
(metal, 40 x 100 mm)

Metal Body Switch,
Multiple Conduit Entry
• D4B-□N — p. G-89
(metal, 40 x 100 mm)

Pull-Reset Safety Limit Switch
• D4N-□R — p. G-98
(metal, 40 x 100 mm)

Miniature Switch Body
• D4F — p. G-89
(30 x 70 mm)
Rapid delivery product

(plastic, 40 x 80 mm)
Rapid delivery product

• T5007 — p. G-113
(plastic 50 x 70 mm)
Rapid delivery product

G-4

www.sti.com/info

Selection Guide

Safety Interlock Switches

Optional Interlock Switch Products
Several of our safety interlocks switches can be customized to
suit specific application requirements.

Status Indication

Slide Bolt Assemblies

The following switches are available with LED status indicators.
The indicator lights provide a visual indication of whether the
switch is open or closed. LED Conduit Beacons may also be
installed as an alternative means of providing status indication
to most all switches with conduit openings.

The following switches may be installed with a slide bolt assembly.
The use of a slide bolt assembly simplifies the installation of the
switch on many machine guarding applications and provides an
integral handle for operation of the guard door.

Guard-Locking Switches

• D4JL — p. G-6

(solenoid operating, plastic, square shape)

• D4NL — p. G-15

• D4SL-N — p. G-25

(solenoid operating, plastic, square shape)
Rapid delivery product

(solenoid operating, plastic, slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

TL4019 with
Metal Slide Bolt

• D4SL-N — p. G-25
(solenoid operating, plastic, slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

• TL4019 — p. G-43
(solenoid operating, plastic, slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

• TL4019 — p. G-43

• TL4024 — p. G-51

(solenoid operating, plastic, slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

(solenoid operating, metal, slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

• TL4024 — p. G-51

Tongue Switches

(solenoid operating, metal, slim shape)
Rapid delivery product

• D4NS — p. G-99
(plastic, 30 x 50 mm)

Tongue Switches

• T2008 — p. G-107

• T4016 — p. G-112

T4016 with
LED Indication

(metal, 40 x 160 mm)
Rapid delivery product

Non-Contact Switches
• D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS — p. G-65

(plastic, 20 x 80 mm)
Rapid delivery product

For safety measures
onp.large
doors
• T4012 —
G-112
that are potentially
(plastic,dangerous
40 x 120 mm)
because theirRapid
movement
productbe
deliverycannot
immediately stopped.

• T4016 — p. G-112

(magnetically coded, plastic housing)
Rapid delivery product

(metal, 40 x 160 mm)
Rapid delivery product

• MFS — p. G-88
(stand-alone)
Rapid delivery product

D4JL-SK40

D4JL model
with rear release button (sold separately)

D4JL
Slide Bolt Assembly
with special slide key

Additional Accessories
From spare actuators to our switch locking devices, OMRON
Automation and Safety has you covered when it comes to
outfitting your safety interlocking needs.
• Slide Mounting Key for D4SL-N — p. G-25
• Slide Mounting Key for D4NS or D4JL — p. G-121
• Replacement Contact Blocks — p. G-122

Conduit LED Beacons

• Micro Style Cables — p. G-122
• Cabling Components — p. G-122
• Conduit LED Beacons — p. G-122
• Conduit Lights and Remote Indicator — p. G-122
• Security Bits/Drives — p. G-122
Switch Locking Devices

• Universal Mounting Brackets — p. G-123
• Switch Locking Devices — p. G-124
Universal Mounting Brackets

www.sti.com/info

G-5

Safety Interlock Switches

D4JL

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Guard Lock Safety-Door Switch
• Holding force of 3,000 N
• Two safety circuits and two monitor contacts provide an array of
monitoring patterns.
• Standard gold-clad contacts enable use with ordinary loads
and microloads.
• Models with trapped keys prevent workers from being locked in
hazardous work areas.
• Models with rear release buttons allow people to unlock the
Switch and escape if they are locked into hazardous areas.
• IP67 degree of protection

G
Features
Plastic Guard Lock Safety-door Switches Rank
Among the Strongest in the World
A holding force of 3,000 N makes these Switches suitable for
large, heavy doors.

Two Safety Circuits and Two Monitor Contacts
The D4JL has two safety circuits. It also has two contacts to
separately monitor the open/closed status of the door and the
status of the lock.
Lock Monitor Switch

Models with Trapped Keys
OMRON Automation and Safety also offers Trapped Key
Switches (on mechanical lock models only).
As long as a person has the trapped key when he enters a hazardous area, he does not have to worry about somebody locking
the door and trapping him inside. The door can be opened only
by supplying power to the solenoid and then turning the trapped
key to unlock the D4JL.
There are thirty different types of trapped keys available for use
in applications with adjacent hazardous areas.

33
34
Monitoring the open/
closed status of the door

63
Monitoring
the door lock

To safety circuit
To safety circuit
To control circuit

Models with
Rear Release
Buttons
A Switch with a
rear release button
allows the door to be
unlocked from inside
a hazardous area in
an emergency. STI
also offers Switches
with Special Slide
Keys. Refer to the
D4NS-SK/D4JL-SK
for details.

G-6

Door Open/Closed
Detection Switch
12

www.sti.com/info

Rear release button

Special slide key

D4JL

Safety Interlock Switches

Specifications
Standards and EC Directives

Characteristics

Conforms to the following EC Directives:
• Machinery Directive
• Low Voltage Directive
• EN 1088
• EN 60204-1
• GS-ET-19
• CCC

Degree of protection *1
Mechanical
Durability *2
Electrical

Certified Standards
Certification
body

Standard

File No.

IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
1,000,000 operations min. (trapped
key: 10,000 operations min., rear
release button: 3,000 operations min.)
500,000 operations min. (3 A resistive
load at 250 VAC) *3

Operating speed

0.05 to 0.5 m/s

Operating frequency

30 operations/minute max.

Direct opening force *4

60 N min. (EN60947-5-1)

Direct opening travel *4

15 mm min. (EN60947-5-1)

Holding force *5

3,000 N min.

Contact resistance

25 mΩ max. (per contact)

Minimum applicable load *6

1 mA resistive load at 5 VDC (N-level
reference value)

TÜV Product
Service

EN 60947-5-1
(certified direct opening)

UL *1

UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14

Consult your
representative for
details.

CQC (CCC)

GB14048.5

2005010305167533

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

300 V (EN60947-5-1)

KOSHA *2

EN60947-5-1

2005-196

Rated frequency

50/60 Hz

Protection against electric shock

Class II (double insulation)

*1. CSA C22.2 No. 14 was certified by UL.
*2. Only certain models have been certified.

Pollution degree (operating
environment)
Between
terminals of
same polarity
Between
Impulse
terminals
of different
withstand
voltage
polarity
(EN60947-5-1) Between other
terminals and
non-current
carrying
metallic parts.

Certified Standard Ratings
TÜV (EN 60947-5-1)
Item

Utilization category

AC-15

DC-13

Rated operating current (Ie)

0.27 A

Rated operating voltage (Ue)

240 V

250 V

Note: Use a 10 A fuse type gI or gG that conforms to IEC 60269 as a shortcircuit protection device. This fuse is not built into the Switch.

UL/CSA (UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14)

Insulation resistance

A300

Rated
voltage

Carry
current

120 VAC

10 A

240 VAC

Current (A)
Make

Volt-amperes (VA)

Break

Make

Break

7,200

Q300
Rated
voltage

Carry
current

125 VDC
250 VDC

2.5 A

Current (A)

Volt-amperes (VA)

Make

Break

0.55

0.27

Make

Break

0.27

Solenoid Coil Characteristics
Item

Type

24 VDC

Rated operating voltage
(100% ED)
Current consumption
Insulation Class

+10%

24 VDC -15%

Approx. 200 mA
Class F (130°C max.)

Indicator Characteristics
Item

Type

Rated voltage
Current consumption
Color (LED)

LED
24 VDC

24 VDC

Approx. 1 mA

Approx. 8 mA

Orange

Green

2.5 kV

4 kV

6 kV

100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)

Contact gap

2 x 2 mm min.

Vibration
resistance
Shock
resistance

720

3 (EN60947-5-1)

Malfunction

10 to 55 Hz, 0.75 mm single
amplitude

Destruction

1,000 m/s2 min.

Malfunction

80 m/s2 min.

Conditional short-circuit current

100 A (EN60947-5-1) *7

Conventional free air thermal
current (Ith)

10 A (between terminals 12 and 41),
3 A (between all other terminals)
(EN60947-5-1)

Ambient operating temperature

-10 to +55°C (with no icing)

Ambient operating humidity

95% max.

Weight

Approx. 650 g (D4JL-4NFA-C7-01)

Notes: The above values are initial values.
*1. The degree of protection is tested using the method specified by the
standard (EN60947-5-1). Confirm that sealing properties are sufficient for
the operating conditions and environment beforehand. Although the switch
box is protected from dust or water penetration, do not use the D4JL in
places where foreign material may enter through the key hole on the head,
otherwise Switch damage or malfunctioning may occur.
*2. The durability is for an ambient temperature of 5 to 35°C and an
ambient humidity of 40% to 70%. For further conditions, consult your sales
representative.
*3. Do not pass a 3 A, 250 VAC load through more than two circuits.
*4. These figures are minimum requirements for safe operation.
*5. This figure is based on the GS-ET-19 evaluation method.
*6. This value will vary with the switching frequency, environment, and
reliability level. Confirm that correct operation is possible with the actual
load beforehand.
*7. Use a 10 A fuse type gI or gG that conforms to IEC 60269 as a shortcircuit protection device.

www.sti.com/info

G-7

D4JL

Safety Interlock Switches

Connections
Contact Forms
Indicates conditions where the Key is inserted and the lock is applied. Terminals 42-11 and terminals 52-21 are connected internally (as per BIA GS-ET-19).

Model

Contact
(door open/closed
detection and lock
monitor)

Contact form
Door open/
closed
detection

Lock monitor

D4JL-□NF□-□

Door open/
closed detection
11
12

2NC/1NO+2NC/1NO

Operating pattern

Remarks

Lock position
41-12
51-22
33-34
63-64

Stroke
Operation Key insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion position

NC contacts 11-12 and
21-22 have a certified direct
opening mechanism ([]).
The terminals 41-12, 51-22,
33-34, and 63-64 can be
used as unlike poles.

Lock position
Lock monitor

D4JL-□PF□-□

2NC/1NO+3NC

Door open/
closed detection

41-12
51-22
33-34
61-62

Stroke
Operation Key insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion position

Lock position
Door open/
closed detection

Lock monitor

D4JL-□QF□-□

3NC+2NC/1NO

41-12
51-22
31-32
63-64

Stroke
Operation Key insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion position

Lock position
Door open/
closed detection

Lock monitor

D4JL-□RF□-□

G-8

3NC+3NC

51
61

www.sti.com/info

41-12
51-22
31-32
61-62
Stroke
Operation Key insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion position

NC contacts 11-12 and
21-22 have a certified direct
opening mechanism ([]).
The terminals 41-12, 51-22,
33-34, and 61-62 can be
used as unlike poles.
NC contacts 11-12, 21-22
and 31-32 have a certified
direct opening mechanism
([]).
The terminals 41-12,
51-22, 31-32, and 63-64
can be used as unlike
poles.
NC contacts 11-12, 21-22,
and 31-32 have a certified
direct opening mechanism
([]).
The terminals 41-12, 51-22,
31-32, and 61-62 can be
used as unlike poles.

D4JL

Safety Interlock Switches

Application Examples
G9SA-321-T□ (24 VAC/VDC) + D4JL-□□□A-□□ (Mechanical Lock Models)/Manual Reset

Lock
release
signal

Application Example
Stopping a Robot on a Conveyor Line
KM1
KM2
S2

S4
41

Door
S1
OPEN

D4NH
Safety-door Hinge Switches
S2

D4JL
Guard Lock Safety-door Switches

Door

Feedback loop
S1

KM1

OPEN

KM2

Stop signal

A1 A2 T11

T12

T31

T32

13 23 33 43 53 61

K3
a

3
4

Off Delay
Timer

K4
Control
Circuit

2 K1
5
K2

1
2
3
4
5
6

6
PE T21

T23 T22

14 24 34 44 54 62

KM1 KM2

S1:

Safety-door Switch with direct opening contact

S2:

Guard Lock Safety-door Switch

S3:

Reset switch

S4 and S5:

Lock release switches

Motor controller

KM1

KM1 and KM2: Magnetic contactors
M:

Operation
instruction

KM2

3-phase motor

Notes:

1. This circuit conforms to EN954-1 Safety Category 3.
2. When the release button is pressed on rear release models, the solenoid
contacts are turned OFF.
3. With Trapped Key Models, the door will not lock when it is closed with
the trapped key removed.

www.sti.com/info

G-9

D4JL

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics

(mm)

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics
Switches
Head cap

D4JL-□□F□-C5
D4JL-□□F□-D5
Black

7.5

0.8
(Thickness of the auxiliary mounting tool)

Operation Key
Auxiliary mounting tool

Red

3.3
Set zone

Operation Key

0.5

50±0.3
23.6
21

Four,
5.4-dia.
holes

A
Six cover mounting screws

36.5
B
5

49.5
43.5±0.3
(12.6)

2±0.3
Indicator

23.5
±0.3

81.9
76.5

(56)

Release
key

(42.5)
(46.1)
(78.7)
89±0.3
105
(114)

29
35.5

10.0±0.3 (132.9)

(5.8)

26±0.3

Cross-sectional view A-A

2 conduits

(15.3)

Cross-sectional view B-B

5
9
(3)

Operating
characteristics
Key insertion force
Key extraction force
Pre-travel distance
Movement before being
locked

Conduit cap

D4JL-□□F□-C5
D4JL-□□F□-D5
20 N max.
Approx. 6 N
14 mm max.
3.3 mm min.

12.4
(When the rear release button is pressed)
Rear release button

D4JL-□□FA-C6
D4JL-□□FA-D6

17
(When the rear
release button
is pulled out)

Red

Operation Key
Auxiliary mounting tool

Four,
5.4-dia.
holes

A
Six cover mounting screws

3.3
Set zone
50±0.3
23.6
21

36.5
B

2±0.3
Indicator

23.5
±0.3

29
35.5
Cross-sectional view A-A

44.2

18.5

10.0±0.3 (132.9)

(5.8)

81.9 26±0.3
76.5

49.5
43.5±0.3
(12.6)

19 dia.

0.8
(Thickness of the auxiliary mounting tool)

7.5

Operation Key

(56)

Release
key

(42.5)
(46.1)
(78.7)
89±0.3
105
(114)
2 conduits

5
9
(3)

Conduit cap

www.sti.com/info

(1) Cap screw

(15.3)

Cross-sectional view B-B

(15.3)

G-10

Cap screw

(1)

(15.3)

Black

Operating
characteristics
Key insertion force
Key extraction force
Pre-travel distance
Movement before being
locked

D4JL-□□FA-C6
D4JL-□□FA-D6
20 N max.
Approx. 6 N
14 mm max.
3.3 mm min.

D4JL

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)

(mm)

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics
Head cap

Switches (continued)

7.5

D4JL-□□FA-C7
D4JL-□□FA-D7
Black

0.8
(Thickness of the auxiliary mounting tool)

42
(74)

3.3
Set zone
Red

Operation Key Operation Key

A
Six cover mounting screws

49.5
43.5±0.3
(13)

Four,
5.4-dia.
holes

50±0.3
23.6
21

Auxiliary mounting tool
36.5
B
5
2±0.3

Indicator

23.5

±0.3

10.0±0.3 (132.9)

(5.8)

(56)

(42.5)
(46.1)
(78.7)
89±0.3
105
(114)

Manual release A
screw

29
35.5

81.9 26±0.3
76.5

Cross-sectional view A-A

(15.3)

Cross-sectional view B-B

5
9
(3)

(15.3)
2 conduits

Cap screw

(1)

Trapped key

Conduit cap

Operating
characteristics
Key insertion force
Key extraction force
Pre-travel distance
Movement before being
locked

D4JL-□□FA-C7
D4JL-□□FA-D7
20 N max.
Approx. 6 N
14 mm max.
3.3 mm min.

Operation Keys
D4JL-K3

D4JL-K1

33.5

36.5
28

33.5

28
18.5

16.2

Two, 5.4 dia.

Two, 5.3 dia.
mounting holes

D4JL-K2

30±0.15

(24)

(43.6)

34.6

33.5

M20-NPT Adapter

11.5

Two, 5.4 dia.

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.8 mm applies to all Switch
dimensions and a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to Operation Key dimensions.

www.sti.com/info

G-11

D4JL

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering
Front

Front and rear release button

Front

Special release key

Trapped key

Release key position
Release key type

The head can be Front
mounted in 4 directions.

Rear

Back-mounting is also possible.

Switch appearance

Operation Keys

Special Release Key

Type

Model

Horizontal mounting

D4JL-K1

Vertical mounting

D4JL-K2

Adjustable mounting (horizontal)

D4JL-K3

Two conduits
(horizontal and vertical)

Type

Model

Special Release Key
for D4GL, D4JL, D4NL,
and D4SL Switches

D4NL-RK

Special release key

Model Number Structure
Switch

Operation Key

D4JL – □ □ □ □ – □ □ – □□– □

D4JL-K □

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Operation Key Type

1 Conduit Size

1: Horizontal mounting
2: Vertical mounting
3: Adjustable mounting (horizontal)

2: G1/2
4: M20

2 Built-in Switch
N: 2NC/1NO + 2NC/1NO (slow-action contacts)
P: 2NC/1NO + 3NC (slow-action contacts)
Q: 3NC + 2NC/1NO (slow-action contacts)
R: 3NC + 3NC (slow-action contacts)

information on the D4JL-SK Slide Key,
✎ For
see page G-121.

3 Head Material
F: Plastic

4 Door Lock and Release
A: Mechanical lock/24 VDC solenoid release
G: 24 VDC Solenoid lock/Mechanical release

5 Indicator
C: 24 VDC (green LED indicator)
D: 24 VDC (orange LED indicator)

6 Release Key Type
5: Special release key. *1
6: Special release key + rear release button. *1
7: Trapped key

7 Trapped Key Type
01 to 30: 30 types *2

8 M20-to-NPT Adapter

Notes:
A 24 VDC solenoid lock cannot be combined with a trapped key.
A 24 VDC solenoid lock cannot be combined with a special release key
and rear release button.
*1. Release keys are provided.
*2. Thirty types of trapped keys can be manufactured. Specify the trapped
key type in numerical order starting from 01 when ordering.

Blank: Adapter is not included
NPT: Adapter is included

G-12

www.sti.com/info

D4JL

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
Switches (Operation keys are sold separately.)
Standard Models with certified direct opening mechanisms
Release
key type

Indicator

Lock and release types

Contact configuration
(door open/closed detection switch and
lock monitor switch contacts)
2NC/1NO+2NC/1NO

Mechanical lock
Solenoid release

2NC/1NO+3NC
3NC+2NC/1NO
3NC+3NC

Green
2NC/1NO+2NC/1NO

Solenoid lock
Mechanical release

2NC/1NO+3NC
3NC+2NC/1NO
3NC+3NC
2NC/1NO+2NC/1NO

Mechanical lock
Solenoid release

Special
release key

2NC/1NO+3NC
3NC+2NC/1NO
3NC+3NC

Orange
2NC/1NO+2NC/1NO

Solenoid lock
Mechanical release

2NC/1NO+3NC
3NC+2NC/1NO
3NC+3NC
2NC/1NO+2NC/1NO
2NC/1NO+3NC

Green
3NC+2NC/1NO

Mechanical lock
Solenoid release

3NC+3NC
2NC/1NO+2NC/1NO
2NC/1NO+3NC

Orange
3NC+2NC/1NO
3NC+3NC

Conduit opening
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20

Model
D4JL-4NFA-C5-NPT
D4JL-4NFA-C5
D4JL-4PFA-C5-NPT
D4JL-4PFA-C5
D4JL-4QFA-C5-NPT
D4JL-4QFA-C5
D4JL-4RFA-C5-NPT
D4JL-4RFA-C5
D4JL-4NFG-C5-NPT
D4JL-4NFG-C5
D4JL-4PFG-C5-NPT
D4JL-4PFG-C5
D4JL-4QFG-C5-NPT
D4JL-4QFG-C5
D4JL-4RFG-C5-NPT
D4JL-4RFG-C5
D4JL-4NFA-D5-NPT
D4JL-4NFA-D5
D4JL-4PFA-D5-NPT
D4JL-4PFA-D5
D4JL-4QFA-D5-NPT
D4JL-4QFA-D5
D4JL-4RFA-D5-NPT
D4JL-4RFA-D5
D4JL-4NFG-D5-NPT
D4JL-4NFG-D5
D4JL-4PFG-D5-NPT
D4JL-4PFG-D5
D4JL-4QFG-D5-NPT
D4JL-4QFG-D5
D4JL-4RFG-D5-NPT
D4JL-4RFG-D5
D4JL-4NFA-C6-NPT
D4JL-4NFA-C6
D4JL-4PFA-C6-NPT
D4JL-4PFA-C6
D4JL-4QFA-C6
D4JL-4QFA-C6
D4JL-4RFA-C6-NPT
D4JL-4RFA-C6
D4JL-4NFA-D6-NPT
D4JL-4NFA-D6
D4JL-4PFA-D6-NPT
D4JL-4PFA-D6
D4JL-4QFA-D6-NPT
D4JL-4QFA-D6
D4JL-4RFA-D6-NPT
D4JL-4RFA-D6

(Continued on next page)

www.sti.com/info

G-13

D4JL

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
Switches (continued) (Operation keys are sold separately.)
Models with Trapped Keys and certified direct opening mechanisms
Release
key type

Indicator

Lock and release types

Contact configuration
(door open/closed detection switch and
lock monitor switch contacts)
2NC/1NO+2NC/1NO
2NC/1NO+3NC

Green
3NC+2NC/1NO

Trapped
key *1

Mechanical lock
Solenoid release

3NC+3NC
2NC/1NO+2NC/1NO
2NC/1NO+3NC

Orange
3NC+2NC/1NO

3NC+3NC

Conduit
opening

Model

NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20
NPT

D4JL-4NFA-C7-01-NPT
D4JL-4NFA-C7-01
D4JL-4PFA-C7-01-NPT
D4JL-4PFA-C7-01
D4JL-4QFA-C7-01-NPT
D4JL-4QFA-C7-01
D4JL-4RFA-C7-01-NPT
D4JL-4RFA-C7-01
D4JL-4NFA-D7-01-NPT
D4JL-4NFA-D7-01
D4JL-4PFA-D7-01-NPT

M20
NPT
M20
NPT
M20

D4JL-4PFA-D7-01
D4JL-4QFA-D7-01-NPT
D4JL-4QFA-D7-01
D4JL-4RFA-D7-01-NPT
D4JL-4RFA-D7-01

*1. Thirty types of trapped keys can be manufactured. Specify the trapped key type in numerical order starting from 01 when ordering.

G-14

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

D4NL

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Guard Lock Safety-Door Switch
• Best-selling guard lock safety-door switch available in several
compact, multi-contact models
• Selectable Operation Key insertion direction and adjustable
mounting ensure installation flexibility
• Built-in switches with multiple-contact construction are available
• Key holding force of 1,300 N minimum
• Can be used for either standard loads or microloads
• Lineup includes models with a conduit size of M20
• IP67 degree of protection
• Variety of metallic heads available
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Standards and EC Directives

UL/CSA (UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14)
A300

Conforms to the following EC Directives:
• Machinery Directive
• Low Voltage Directive
• EN 1088
• EN 60204-1
• GS-ET-19

Rated
voltage
120 VAC

Rated
voltage

TÜV SÜD

EN 60947-5-1
(certified direct opening)

Consult your
representative for
details.

UL *1

UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14

E76675

CQC (CCC)

GB14048.5

2003010305064267

Item

2005-196

Rated operating
voltage (100% ED)

File No.

EN60947-5-1

125 VDC
250 VDC

6
3

Make

Break

7,200

720

2.5 A

Volt-amperes (VA)

Make

Break

0.55

0.27

Make

Break

Solenoid Coil Characteristics

*1. Certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 is certified by the UL mark.
*2. Only certain models have been certified.

Type

24 VDC
24 VDC

Current consumption
Insulation Class

Certified Standard Ratings

+10%
-15%

Approx.
200 mA

110 VAC

230 VAC

110 VAC
±10%

230 VAC
±10%

Approx.
50 mA

Approx.
30 mA

Class F (130°C max.)

Indicator Characteristics

TÜV (EN 60947-5-1), CCC (GB14048.5)
AC-15

DC-13

Rated operating current (Ie)

0.27 A

Rated operating voltage (Ue)

240 V

250 V

Note: Use a 10 A fuse type gI or gG that conforms to IEC 60269 as a shortcircuit protection device. This fuse is not built into the Switch.

60
30

Current (A)

Carry
current

Standard

Utilization category

Volt-amperes (VA)

Break

Q300

Certification
body

Item

Make

10 A

240 VAC

Certified Standards

KOSHA *2

Current (A)

Carry
current

Item

Type

Rated voltage
Current consumption
Color (LED)

LED
10 to 115 VAC/VDC
Approx. 1 mA
Orange

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-15

D4NL

Safety Interlock Switches

Connections
Contact Form
Indicates conditions where the Key is inserted and the lock is applied. Terminals 12 and 41 are connected internally (as per GS-ET-19).

Model

Contact
(door open/closed
detection and lock
monitor)

Contact form
Door open/
Lock
closed
monitor
detection

Operating pattern

Remarks

Lock position

Door open/
closed detection

D4NL-□AF□-□

1NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO

Lock monitor

11-42
33-34
53-54

ON
Stroke

Operation
Key insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion
position

Lock position

Door open/
closed detection

D4NL-□BF□-□

1NC/1NO + 2NC

Lock monitor

11-42
33-34
51-52

Operation
Key insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion
position

Lock position

Door open/
closed detection

D4NL-□CF□-□

2NC + 1NC/1NO

Lock monitor

11-42
31-32
53-54

ON
Stroke

Operation
Key insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion
position

Lock position

Door open/
closed detection

D4NL-□DF□-□

2NC + 2NC

Lock monitor

11-42
31-32
51-52

Extraction
completion
position

Lock position

D4NL-□EF□-□

2NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO

Door open/
closed detection

Lock monitor

11-42
21-22
33-34
53-54

Extraction
completion
position

Lock position

D4NL-□FF□-□

2NC/1NO + 2NC

Door open/
closed detection

Lock monitor

11-42
21-22
33-34
51-52

Extraction
completion
position

Lock position

Door open/
closed detection

D4NL-□GF□-□

3NC + 1NC/1NO

Lock monitor

11-42
21-22
31-32
53-54

D4NL-□HF□-□

G-16

3NC + 2NC

Lock monitor

Extraction
completion
position

Only NC contacts 11-12,
21-22, and 31-32 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.
The terminals 11-42,
21-22, 31-32, and 51-52
can be used as unlike
poles.

11-42
21-22
31-32
51-52

www.sti.com/info

Stroke
Operation
Key insertion
completion position

Only NC contacts 11-12,
21-22, and 31-32 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

Extraction
completion
position

Lock position

Door open/
closed detection

Only NC contacts 11-12
and 21-22 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

The terminals 11-42,
21-22, 31-32, and 53-54
can be used as unlike
poles.

Stroke

Operation
Key insertion
completion position

Only NC contacts 11-12
and 21-22 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

The terminals 11-42,
21-22, 33-34, and 51-52
can be used as unlike
poles.

Stroke

Operation
Key insertion
completion position

The terminals 11-42,
31-32, and 53-54 can be
used as unlike poles.
Only NC contacts 11-12
and 31-32 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

The terminals 11-42,
21-22, 33-34, and 53-54
can be used as unlike
poles.

Stroke
Operation
Key insertion
completion position

Only NC contacts 11-12
and 31-32 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

The terminals 11-42,
31-32, and 51-52 can be
used as unlike poles.

Stroke
Operation
Key insertion
completion position

Only NC contacts 11-12
have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 11-42,
33-34, and 51-52 can be
used as unlike poles.

Stroke

Only NC contacts 11-12
have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 11-42,
33-34, and 53-54 can be
used as unlike poles.

D4NL

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics

(mm)

Switches
D4NL-□□□□-B
15.5
30.5

Red

Pre-travel distance

Black

Four, head mounting screws
Operation Key

15.3

Three, 4.3-dia. holes

10.0

6.5

4
Dummy cap
Indicator

28.5 4.4

UNLOCK

6.5

32±0.2

(13.3)

(95)
(32.3)
55±0.2

LOCK

(55.8)

0.5

Five, cover
mounting screws

Operating
characteristics

D4NL-□□□□BS

Key insertion force
Key extraction
force

15 N max.
30 N max.

Pre-travel distance

9 mm max.

Movement before
being locked

3 mm min.

(3)
4

(30.7)

0.5
5

6.5

Cap screw

(57.9)
79±0.2

35.5

4.5

(15.3)
29

(88.5)
Conduit cap

Release key

(10)

UNLOCK

LOCK

Conduit opening

D4NL-□□□□-B4
15.5
30.5

Red

Pre-travel distance

Black

Four, head mounting screws
Operation Key

15.3

Three, 4.3-dia. holes

10.0

29
6.5

4
Dummy cap
Indicator

28.5 4.4

UNLOCK

6.5

(13.3)

(55.8)

0.5

Five, cover
mounting screws

35.5
5

(57.9)
79±0.2

Key insertion force
Key extraction force

15 N max.
30 N max.

Pre-travel distance

9 mm max.

Movement before
being locked

3 mm min.

4
6.5

Cap screw
4.5

(15.3)
29

(88.5)

Releasing tool
Release key
(provided)

D4NL-□□□□B4

(3)

(30.7)

0.5

M8 hexagonal material
or equivalent

(95)

(32.3)
55±0.2

LOCK

32±0.2

Operating
characteristics

Conduit cap

10.5
21

(10)

UNLOCK

LOCK

Conduit opening

Notes:
1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
2. There are fluctuations in the contact ON/OFF timing for Switches with multiple poles (2NC, 2NC/1NO, or 3NC). Confirm performance before application.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-17

D4NL

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)
D4NL-□□□□-BS

15.5
30.5

(mm)

Pre-travel distance

Red

Black

Four, head mounting screws
Operation Key
Three, 4.3-dia. holes

15.3
10.0

29
6.5

Operating
characteristics

4
Release key
Indicator

28.5 4.4

UNLOCK

6.5

(13.3)

LOCK

(31.5)
(55.8)

0.5

Five, cover
mounting screws

32±0.2

(95)
(32.3)
55±0.2
(3)

15 N max.
30 N max.

Pre-travel distance

9 mm max.

Movement before
being locked

3 mm min.

6.5

Cap screw

(57.9)
79±0.2

35.5

Key insertion force
Key extraction
force

(30.7)

0.5

D4NL-□□□□BS

(15.3)

4.5

(88.5)

Dummy cap

Conduit cap

UNLOCK

LOCK

Conduit opening

D4NL-□□□□-B4S
15.5
30.5

Pre-travel distance
Four, head mounting screws
Operation Key
Three, 4.3-dia. holes

15.3

Red

10.0

Black

29
6.5

4
Release key
Indicator

28.5 4.4

UNLOCK

6.5

LOCK

(31.5)
(55.8)
Five, cover
mounting screws

0.5

(3)
4
6.5

Cap screw

(57.9)
79±0.2

5
Releasing tool
Dummy
(provided)
cap

(95)
(32.3)
55±0.2

(30.7)

0.5
35.5

M8 hexagonal material
or equivalent

(13.3)

32±0.2

(15.3)

4.5

(88.5)
Conduit cap

Operating
characteristics

D4NL-□□□□B4S

Key insertion force
Key extraction force

15 N max.
30 N max.

Pre-travel distance

9 mm max.

Movement before
being locked

3 mm min.

Notes:
1. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance
of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
2. There are fluctuations in the contact
ON/OFF timing for Switches with multiple
poles (2NC, 2NC/1NO, or 3NC). Confirm
performance before application.

10.5
UNLOCK

LOCK

Conduit opening

Operation Keys
D4DS-K1

17.5

D4DS-K3

13
7
30

8 dia.

4.5 dia.

4.3

13
7

2 4.3

G-18

D4DS-K5

10.5
28

6.3

20°
Black

Four, 2.15R

D4DS-K2

Angle adjustment bolt

9 dia.

20.9

17
15

15°
43

7
Four, 2.15R

Mounting Holes
(Enlargement)

24.6
22.5

13
Black

www.sti.com/info

18°

55
41

6.5

(7)

4.5

D4NL

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)

(mm)

With Operating Key Inserted
D4NL + D4DS-K1
(with Front-inserted Operation Key)

D4NL + D4DS-K1
(with Top-inserted Operation Key)
Red

Red

Black

44 min 46.5 max
Key insertion position

Vertical
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200

Black

Horizontal
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200

Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

(30.5)

(8)

49.5 min 52.0 max
Key insertion position (36)

15 Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

Vertical
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200
44 min 46.5 max
Key insertion position

Horizontal
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200

(30.5)

(28.5)

Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

G
49.5 min 52.0 max
Key insertion position (36)

D4NL + D4DS-K2
(with Front-inserted Operation Key)
Red

Black 40 min 42.5 max
Key insertion position

D4NL + D4DS-K2
(with Top-inserted Operation Key)
Horizontal
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200

Red

(30.5)

Vertical
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200

Black

Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1
15 Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

(8)
(6)

45.5 min 48.0 max
Key insertion position (36)

Vertical
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200
40 min 42.5 max
Key insertion position

(30.5)

(6)

(22.5)

Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

(28.5)

Horizontal
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200
Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

45.5 min 48.0 max
Key insertion position (36)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-19

D4NL

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)
D4NL + D4DS-K3
(with Front-inserted Operation Key)
Red

(mm)

D4NL + D4DS-K3
(with Top-inserted Operation Key)

45 min 47.5 max
Key insertion position

Horizontal
insertion radius:
R ≥ 50

Black
(30.5)

Red

Vertical
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200

Black
Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

(40)

50.5 min 53.0 max
Key insertion position

(8)

(36)

Vertical
insertion radius:
R ≥ 200
45 min 47.5 max
Key insertion position

(30.5)
Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

Center
(28.5) tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

Horizontal
insertion radius:
R ≥ 50

50.5 min 53.0 max
Key insertion position (36)

D4NL + D4DS-K5
(with Front-inserted Operation Key)
Red

Black

51.9 min 54.4 max
Key insertion position
(30.5)

D4NL + D4DS-K5
(with Top-inserted Operation Key)
(41 or 43)
55
Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1
20.9
Horizontal
insertion radius:
R ≥ 50
Vertical
insertion radius:
R ≥ 50
51.9 min 54.4 max
Key insertion position

Red

Black

Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

(8)

Horizontal
insertion radius:
R ≥ 50

57.4 min 59.9 max
Key insertion position
(36)

(30.5)

Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1
(28.5)

Center
tolerance of
key hole: ± 1

M20-NPT Adapter
57.4 min 59.9 max
Key insertion position
(36)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-20

www.sti.com/info

43±0.1

Horizontal
insertion radius:
R ≥ 50

D4NL

Safety Interlock Switches

Application Examples
G9SA-321-T□ (24 VAC/VDC) + D4NL-□A□A-□, -□A□B-□, -□A□C-□
(Mechanical Lock Type) Circuit Diagram (Manual Reset)
Lock release signal

KM1
KM2
S2

S4
42

S1:

Safety Limit Switch
with direct opening mechanism
(D4B-N, D4N, D4F)
S2:
Guard Lock Safety-door Switch
S3:
Reset switch
S4:
Lock release switch
KM1 and KM2: Magnetic Contactor
M:
3-phase motor

PLC
PLC

Guard
S1

Feedback loop

OPEN
KM1
S3

KM2

Stop signal

G
A1 A2 T11

T12

T31

T32

13 23 33 43 53 61

a
K1

3
4

OffDelay
Timer

K4
Control
Circuit

2 K1
5
K2

1
2
3
4
5
6

6
PE T21

T23 T22

14 24 34 44 54 62

KM1 KM2

Guard opens

Timing Chart
Limit switch S1
Guard Lock
Safety-door
Switch S2
Lock release
signal

Operation
instruction

Motor controller

KM1

Guard can be opened
KM2

Stop signal
Reset switch
S3
K1 and K2
(NC)
K1 and K2
(NO)
K3 and K4
(NC)
K3 and K4
(NO)
KM1 and KM2
(NC)
KM1 and KM2
(NO)

Note: The above example circuit is for Category 3.

Operation
instruction
Motor rotation
OFF-delay time

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-21

D4NL

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering
Model Number Structure
Switch

Operation Key

D4NL – □ □ □ □ – □ □ □– □

D4DS-K □

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Conduit Size

1 Operation Key Type

1: Pg13.5
2: G1/2
4: M20

2 Built-in Switch (with Door Open/Closed Detection Switch and Lock Monitor
Switch Contacts)
A: 1NC/1NO (slow-action contacts) + 1NC/1NO (slow-action contacts)
B: 1NC/1NO (slow-action contacts) + 2NC (slow-action contacts)
C: 2NC (slow-action contacts) + 1NC/1NO (slow-action contacts)
D: 2NC (slow-action contacts) + 2NC (slow-action contacts)
E: 2NC/1NO (slow-action contacts) + 1NC/1NO (slow-action contacts)
F: 2NC/1NO (slow-action contacts) + 2NC (slow-action contacts)
G: 3NC (slow-action contacts) + 1NC/1NO (slow-action contacts)
H: 3NC (slow-action contacts) + 2NC (slow-action contacts)

1:
2:
3:
5:

Horizontal mounting
Vertical mounting
Adjustable mounting (horizontal)
Adjustable mounting (horizontal/vertical)

Type
Horizontal
mounting
Horizontal mounting

D4DS-K1

Vertical mounting
Vertical mounting
D4DS-K2

3 Head Mounting Direction and Material

F: Four mounting directions possible (Front-side
The headmounting
can beat shipping)/plastic
AdjustableAdjustable
mounting mounting
D: Four mounting directions possible (Front-side
at shipping)/metal
(horizontal)
mountedmounting
in 4 directions.
(Horizontal)

4 Door Lock and Release
A:
B:
G:
H:

Mechanical lock/24 VDC solenoid release
Mechanical lock/110 VAC solenoid release*
24 VDC solenoid lock/mechanical release
110 VAC solenoid lock/mechanical release*

Model

Back-mounting is also
D4DS-K3

Adjustable
mountingmounting
Adjustable
(Horizontal/Vertical)
(horizontal/vertical)
D4DS-K5

5 Indicator
B: 10 to 115 VAC/VDC (orange LED indicator)

6 Release Key Type
Blank: Standard
4: Special release key

Special Release Key
Type
Special Release Key
for D4GL, D4JL, D4NL,
and D4SL Switches

7 Release Key Position
Blank: Bottom
S: Front
Blank: Adapter is not included
NPT: Adapter is included

* 110 VAC version is not available for -4□-NPT models.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-22

Model

D4NL-RK

Special release key

8 M20-to-NPT Adapter

Two conduits
(horizontal and vertica

www.sti.com/info

D4NL

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
List of Models
Switches with direct opening mechanisms (Operation Keys are sold separately)

Head
material

Release
key
position

Release
key type

Solenoid voltage/
indicator

Lock and release
types

Contact configuration
(door open/closed
detection switch and
lock monitor switch
contacts) (slow-action)
Certified direct opening
NC contact
1NC/1NO+1NC/1NO

1NC/1NO+2NC

2NC+1NC/1NO

2NC+2NC
Mechanical lock
Solenoid release
2NC/1NO+1NC/1NO

2NC/1NO+2NC

3NC+1NC/1NO

Plastic

Bottom

Standard

3NC+2NC

Solenoid:
24 VDC
Orange LED:
10 to 115 VAC/VDC

1NC/1NO+1NC/1NO

1NC/1NO+2NC

2NC+1NC/1NO

Solenoid lock
Mechanical
release

2NC+2NC

2NC/1NO+1NC/1NO

2NC/1NO+2NC

3NC+1NC/1NO

3NC+2NC

Conduit opening

Model

M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor
M20
M20 with 1/2” NPT
adaptor

D4NL-4AFA-B
D4NL-4AFA-B-NPT
D4NL-4BFA-B
D4NL-4BFA-B-NPT
D4NL-4CFA-B
D4NL-4CFA-B-NPT
D4NL-4DFA-B
D4NL-4DFA-B-NPT
D4NL-4EFA-B
D4NL-4EFA-B-NPT

D4NL-4FFA-B
D4NL-4FFA-B-NPT
D4NL-4GFA-B
D4NL-4GFA-B-NPT
D4NL-4HFA-B
D4NL-4HFA-B-NPT
D4NL-4AFG-B
D4NL-4AFG-B-NPT
D4NL-4BFG-B
D4NL-4BFG-B-NPT
D4NL-4CFG-B
D4NL-4CFG-B-NPT
D4NL-4DFG-B
D4NL-4DFG-B-NPT
D4NL-4EFG-B
D4NL-4EFG-B-NPT
D4NL-4FFG-B
D4NL-4FFG-B-NPT
D4NL-4GFG-B
D4NL-4GFG-B-NPT
D4NL-4HFG-B
D4NL-4HFG-B-NPT
(Continued on next page)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-23

D4NL

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
List of Models (continued)
Switches with direct opening mechanisms (Operation Keys are sold separately)

Head
material

Release
key
position

Release
key type

Solenoid voltage/
indicator

Lock and release
types

Contact configuration
(door open/closed
detection switch and
lock monitor switch
contacts) (slow-action)
Certified direct opening
NC contact
1NC/1NO+1NC/1NO

1NC/1NO+2NC

2NC+1NC/1NO

2NC+2NC
Mechanical lock
Solenoid release
2NC/1NO+1NC/1NO

G
2NC/1NO+2NC

3NC+1NC/1NO

3NC+2NC
Plastic
1NC/1NO+1NC/1NO
Bottom

Special
release
key

Solenoid: 24 VDC
Orange LED:
10 to 115 VAC/VDC

1NC/1NO+2NC

2NC+1NC/1NO

2NC+2NC
Solenoid lock
Mechanical release
2NC/1NO+1NC/1NO

2NC/1NO+2NC

3NC+1NC/1NO

3NC+2NC

Mechanical lock
Solenoid release

2NC/1NO+1NC/1NO
3NC+1NC/1NO

Metal
Solenoid lock
Mechanical release

2NC/1NO+1NC/1NO
3NC+1NC/1NO

Conduit opening

Model

D4NL-4AFA-B4
D4NL-4AFA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4BFA-B4
D4NL-4BFA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4CFA-B4
D4NL-4CFA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4DFA-B4
D4NL-4DFA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4EFA-B4
D4NL-4EFA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4FFA-B4
D4NL-4FFA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4GFA-B4
D4NL-4GFA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4HFA-B4
D4NL-4HFA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4AFG-B4
D4NL-4AFG-B4-NPT
D4NL-4BFG-B4
D4NL-4BFG-B4-NPT
D4NL-4CFG-B4
D4NL-4CFG-B4-NPT
D4NL-4DFG-B4
D4NL-4DFG-B4-NPT
D4NL-4EFG-B4
D4NL-4EFG-B4-NPT
D4NL-4FFG-B4
D4NL-4FFG-B4-NPT
D4NL-4GFG-B4
D4NL-4GFG-B4-NPT
D4NL-4HFG-B4
D4NL-4HFG-B4-NPTt
D4NL-4EDA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4GDA-B4-NPT
D4NL-4EDG-B4-NPT
D4NL-4GDG-B4-NPT

Note: Consult factor for models with Korean S-mark certification.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-24

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

D4SL-N

D4SLN

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Super Small Class 6-Contact
Guard Lock Safety-Door Switch
D4SL-N Guard Lock Safety-door Switch
• Wiring time is reduced with two types of wiring methods capable
of one-touch attachment and removal.
• A wide variety of built-in switches can be used for various devices.
(4-, 5-, and 6-contact models are available)
• Key holding force of 1,300 N.
• It is possible to change the key insertion point without detaching
the head.
• Drive solenoids directly from the Controller.
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days.
D4SL-NSK10-LK□ Slide Key
• Lockout Key to prevent workers from becoming trapped inside the
hazardous area.
• The vertical D4SL Guard Lock Safety-door Switch can be easily
mounted on 40 x 40 mm aluminum frames.
• The plastic material makes the Key suitable for lightweight doors.

Slide Key
Terminal
Block Type

Connector
Type

Specifications
Standards and EC Directives

UL/CSA (UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14)
C150

Conforms to the following EC Directives:
• Machinery Directive
• Low Voltage Directive
• EMC Directive
• EN 1088
• EN 60204-1
• GS-ET-19

Certification
body

Standard

File No.

TÜV SÜD

EN 60947-5-1
(certified direct opening)

Consult your
representative for
details.

UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14

CQC (CCC)

GB14048.5

KOSHA *2

EN60947-5-1

Make

Break

Make

Break

120 VAC

2.5 A

1.5

1,800

180

Rated
voltage

Carry
current

Make

Break

Make

Break

125 VDC

1.0 A

0.22

Item
Rated operating
voltage (100% ED)

E76675
pending

Current consumption*

Insulation Class

Certified Standard Ratings

Current (A)

Volt-amperes (VA)

Solenoid Coil Characteristics

*1. Certification has been obtained for UL CSA C22.2 No. 14.

24 VDC
+10%

24 VDC -15%

Power ON:
6-contact type Approx. 6.4 W at 0.26 A
4-contact/5-contact type Approx. 4.8 W at
0.2 A
Constant: Approx. 2.6 W (average) at 0.2 A
(max.)
Class E (120°C max.)

*A starting current is applied to the solenoid for approx. 10 seconds. After
this, the internal circuit switches to constant current.

TÜV (EN 60947-5-1)
Utilization category

Volt-amperes (VA)

Carry
current

R150

Certified Standards

UL *1

Current (A)

Rated
voltage

AC-15

DC-13

Rated operating current (Ie)

1.5 A *1
1 A *2

0.22 A

Rated operating voltage (Ue)

120 V

125 V

Indicator

Note: Use a 4 A fuse that conforms to IEC 60127 as a short-circuit
protection device. This fuse is not included with the switch.
*1. 11-42, 21-42, 21-22

Item
Rated voltage
Current consumption
Color (LED)

LED Type
24 VDC
Approx. 10 mA
Orange

*2. Other terminals

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-25

D4SL-N

Specifications (continued)

Structure

Characteristics

Structure

Degree of protection *1
Durability *2

D4SL-N□□□□D-□N Connector Type

IP67 (EN60947-5-1)

Mechanical

1,000,000 operations min.

Electrical

150,000 operations min.
(1 A resistive load at 125 VAC) *3

Operating speed

0.05 to 1 m/s

Operating frequency

5 operations/minute max.

Direct opening force *4

60 N min. (EN60947-5-1)

Direct opening travel *4

15 mm min. (EN60947-5-1)

Holding force *5

1,300 N min.

Contact resistance

200 mΩ max.

Minimum applicable load *6

1 mA resistive load at 5 VDC
(N-level reference value)

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

150 V (EN60947-5-1)

Rated frequency

50/60 Hz

Protection against electric shock

Class II (double insulation)

Pollution degree
(operating environment)
Between
terminals of
same polarity
Between
Impulse
terminals
of different
withstand
voltage
polarity
(EN60947-5-1) Between other
terminals and
non-current
carrying
metallic parts.

Conventional free air thermal
current (Ith)
Ambient operating temperature

The switch has
a release key
on the back of
the switch as well.

Can be mounted
from four directions.

The switch has an
indicator on the back
of the switch as well.

3 (EN60947-5-1)
1

1.5 kV

Notched side is No. 1
1.5 kV

D4SL-N□□□□D-□ Terminal Block Type
2.5 kV

Two operation key holes

Two operation key holes
The switch has
a release key
on the back of
the switch as well.

100 A (EN60947-5-1)
The switch has an
2.5 A (11-42, 21-52,indicator
21-22) on the back
1A (Others)
of the switch as well.
-10 to +55°C (with no icing)

Ambient operating humidity

95% max.

Weight

Head: Resin
Approx. 290 g (Connector model)
Approx. 330 g (Terminal block model)
Head: Metal
Approx. 370 g (Connector model)
1
2
3
Approx. 410 g (Terminal block model)

Can be mounted
from four directions.

The switch has an
indicator on the back
of the switch as well.

Notes: 1. The above values are initial values.
Notched side is No. 1
1

2. The Switch contacts can be used with either standard loads or
2
microloads. Once the contacts have been used to switch a load,
however, they cannot be used to switch smaller loads.
The contact surfaces will become rough once they have been
Terminal Arrangement
used and contact reliability for smaller loads may be reduced.
*1 The degree of protection is tested using the method specified by the
standard (EN60947-5-1). Confirm that sealing properties are sufficient for
D4SL-N□N□□-D□
the operating conditions and environment beforehand. Although the switch
box is protected from dust, oil or water penetration, do not use the D4SL
in places where cutting chips, oil, water or chemicals may enter through
9 E1 (+)
the key hole on the head, otherwise Switch damage or malfunctioning may
occur.
10 E2 (−)
*2 The durability is for an ambient temperature of 5 to 35°C and an
11 1
41 12
2 42
ambient humidity of 40% to 70%. For more details, consult your OMRON
4 52
representative.

51 22
21 3
ORANGE
*3 Do not pass the 1 A, 125 VAC load through more than 3 circuits.
8 64
33 5
63 34
*4 These figures are minimum requirements for safe operation.
7
6
*5 This figure is based on the GS-ET-19 evaluation method.
*6 This value will vary with the switching frequency, environment, and
Note: Numbers inside the boxes are
reliability level. Confirm that correct operation is possible with the actual
terminal numbers printed on the product.
load beforehand.

G-26

Two o

Two operation key holes

Insulation resistance The switch has100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
a release key 10 to 55 Hz,
Vibration
Malfunction
on the back of 0.35 mm single amplitude
resistance
Can be mounted
the switch as well.
Malfunction
80 m/s2 min.
from four directions.
Shock
resistance
Destruction
1,000 m/s2 min.
Conditional short-circuit current

Safety Interlock Switches

www.sti.com/info

5
6

7 9
8 10

C
f

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Structure (continued)
Operating Cycle Examples for Standard Models
D4SL-N□□□A-□ (Mechanical Lock Models)
Condition 1

Condition 2

Turning the special
release key

Condition 3

Return to
condition 1
Terminal No. and
Contact No.
[9]E1-[10]E2

[2]42-[1]11 (NC)
[4]52-[3]21 (NC)

[3]21-[4]22 (NC)
[5]31-[6]32 (NC)

[5]33-[6]34 (NO)
[1]41-[2]42 (NC)
[7]61-[8]62 (NC)
[7]63-[8]64 (NO)

Function

Door open.
The door will lock
when the door closes.

Door closed.
The door is locked.

Door closed.
The door can be
opened.

Door closed.
No power is supplied to
the solenoid. The door
is unlocked manually.

Solenoid ON
Door open/
closed
detection
and lock
monitor
contacts
Door open/
closed
detection
contact
Door open/
closed
detection
contact
Lock monitor
contact
Lock monitor
contact

D4SL-N□□□G-□ (Solenoid Lock Models)

Terminal No. and
Contact No.

Function

[9]E1-[10]E2

Solenoid ON

[2]42-[1]11 (NC)
[4]52-{3]21 (NC)

[3]21-[4]22 (NC)
[5]31-[6]32 (NC)

[5]33-[6]34 (NO)
[1]41-[2]42 (NC)
[7]61-[8]62 (NC)
[7]63-[8]64 (NO)

Even when the door
is closed, it does
not lock until power
is supplied to the
solenoid.

Door closed.
The door is locked.

Door closed.
The door can be
opened.

Door open/
closed
detection
and lock
monitor
contacts
Door open/
closed
detection
contact
Door open/
closed
detection
contact
Lock monitor
contact
Lock monitor
contact

The shaded areas indicate the
contact is closed and power is
supplied to the solenoid.
Door open/closed detection
and lock monitor contacts:
Can be used in safety
circuits because of the direct
opening mechanisms.
Door open/closed detection
contact:
Can be used to confirm
whether the key is inserted
and to monitor the open/
closed status of a door.
Lock monitor contact:
Can be used to confirm
whether power is supplied to
the solenoid and to monitor
whether or not a door can be
opened or closed.

Note: The door open/closed detection and lock monitor contact configuration depends on the model.
Caution!: For solenoid-to-lock 6-contact models (contact configuration: N,P,Q,R), if a current is detected in the solenoid
before the door is closed, the door might remain unlocked. Apply power to the solenoid AFTER the door is
closed to ensure proper locking function.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-27

D4SL-N

Applicable Door Switches
D4SL-NSK10-LK

+
D4SL-NSK10-LK

=
D4SL-N

D4SL-NSK10-LKH

+
D4SL-NSK10-LKH

=
D4SL-N

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-28

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Door Switch Features
The lockout key prevents workers from becoming trapped without using a padlock.
Note: Using LEDs of D4SL-N enables confirming whether the door is open or closed and locked or unlocked.

www.sti.com/info

G-29

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Connections
Internal Circuit Diagram

Circuit Connection Example

Without Indicator

• Direct opening contacts used as safety-circuit input are indicated with
the mark.
• Do not switch circuits for three or more standard loads at the same time.
Doing so may adversely affect insulation performance.
• DC solenoids have polarity. (E1: Positive, E2: Negative)
Confirm terminal polarity before wiring.
• If a lock is required for safety, design the system so that the closing of
the NC contacts on both the door open/closed detection switch and the
lock monitor switch is detected.

24VDC
E1 (+)

Control
circuit

E2 (−)

Connection Example for D4SL-N□AF□-□

With Indicator
24VDC
E1 (+)

Contacts 12 and 41 are internally connected.
D
R
ZD
LED

Control
circuit

E1
(+)

E2
(−)

E2 (−)

Door open/
closed detection
switch
42

(Not use) 4
8

1
3

Lock monitor
switch

To safety circuit
(Not use)
To control circuit

To control circuit

Connection Example for D4SL-N□EF□-D□
Contacts 12 and 41 are internally connected.

E1
(+)

E2
(−)
2

Door open/
closed detection
switch

LED

Lock monitor
switch

11
21

To safety circuit

To control circuit

Connection Example for D4SL-N□SF□-□

There is no internal connection, so connect contacts 22 and 42 externally.

E1
(+)

E2
(-)
2

Shortcircuit

Door open/
closed detection
switch
42

Lock monitor
switch

To safety circuit

To control circuit

6
To control circuit

Connection Example for D4SL-N□NF□-D□

Contacts 12 and 41 and contacts 22 and 51 are internally connected.

E1
(+)

E2
(−)

Door open/
closed detection
switch

LED

To safety circuit

To control circuit

Lock monitor
switch

To control circuit

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-30

www.sti.com/info

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Connections (continued)
Contact Form
Indicates conditions where the Key is inserted and the lock is applied.

Model

Contact form
Door open/
Lock
closed
monitor
detection

Contact
(door open/
closed detection
and lock monitor)

D4SL-N□A□□-□

1NC/1NO+
1NC/1NO

41 12

63 34
7 6

Door open/closed
detection

Lock monitor

41 12

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

61 34
7 6

41 12

63 32
7 6

2NC+2NC

41 12

61 32
7 6

1NC/1NO+
1NC/1NO

Lock monitor

63 34
7 6

Lock monitor
42

1
41

1NC/1NO+2NC
62

Lock monitor
42

D4SL-N□U□□-□

61 34
7 6

1
41

2NC+1NC/1NO
64

2NC+2NC

21
5

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion position

The terminals 42-11, 34-33,
and 62-61 can be used as
unlike poles.
Only NC contact 11-12 and
31-32 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.

The terminals 42-11, 32-31,
and 64-63 can be used as
unlike poles.
Only NC contact 11-12 and
31-32 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 42-11, 32-31,
and 62-61 can be used as
unlike poles.
Only NC contact 21-22 has a
certified direct opening
mechanism.
The terminals 42-41, 22-21,
34-33, and 64-63 can be
used as unlike poles.
Only NC contact 21-22 has a
certified direct opening
mechanism.
The terminals 42-41, 22-21,
34-33, and 62-61 can be
used as unlike poles.
Only NC contact 21-22, and
31-32 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 42-41, 22-21,
32-31, and 64-63 can be
used as unlike poles.

Stroke

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

www.sti.com/info

Only NC contact 11-12 has a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

Only NC contact 21-22, and
31-32 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.

Lock position

42-41
22-21
32-31
62-61

61 32
7 6

Stroke

Door open/closed
detection

Extraction
completion position

Lock position

42-41
22-21
32-31
64-63

Stroke

Door open/closed
detection

4
8

Extraction
completion position

Lock position

42-41
22-21
34-33
62-61

1
41

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

Lock monitor
42

D4SL-N□V□□-□

Stroke

Extraction
completion position

Lock position

42-41
22-21
34-33
64-63

63 32
7 6

Stroke

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

Door open/closed
detection

4
22

42-11
32-31
62-61

Door open/closed
detection

4
22
64

D4SL-N□T□□-□

1
41

Extraction
completion position

Lock position

Stroke

1
42

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

Door open/closed
detection

Lock monitor

Extraction
completion position

Lock position

42-11
32-31
64-63

2NC+1NC/1NO
8

D4SL-N□S□□-□

Stroke

1
42

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

Door open/closed
detection

Lock monitor
2

D4SL-N□D□□-□

42-11
34-33
62-61

Only NC contact 11-12 has a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

The terminals 42-11, 34-33,
and 64-63 can be used as
Extraction
completion position unlike poles.

Lock position
1

5
62

On
Stroke

1NC/1NO+2NC
8

D4SL-N□C□□-□

42-11
34-33
64-63

D4SL-N□B□□-□

Remarks

Lock position

Door open/closed
detection

Lock monitor

Operating pattern

Extraction
completion position

The terminals 42-41, 22-21,
32-31, and 62-61 can be
used as unlike poles.

G-31

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Connections (continued)
Contact Form (continued)
Indicates conditions where the Key is inserted and the lock is applied.

Model

Contact form
Door open/
Lock
closed
monitor
detection

Contact
(door open/
closed detection
and lock monitor)

D4SL-N□E□□-□

2NC/1NO+
1NC/1NO

Lock monitor

Operating pattern
Lock position

Door open/closed
detection

42-11
22-21
34-33
64-63

1
42

41 12

4
22

8
64

63 34
7 6

Remarks

Stroke

33
5

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion position

Lock position
2

D4SL-N□F□□-□

Lock monitor

42-11
22-21
34-33
62-61

1
42

2NC/1NO+2NC

Door open/closed
detection

41 12
4
22

8
62

61 34
7 6

11
3
21

Stroke

33
5

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

Extraction
completion position

Lock position

D4SL-N□G□□-□

Lock monitor

42-11
22-21
32-31
64-63

1
42

3NC+1NC/1NO

Door open/closed
detection

41 12
4
22

8
64

63 32
7 6

11
3
21

Stroke

31
5

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

D4SL-N□H□□-□

41 12
4
22

8
62

D4SL-N□N□□-□

2NC/1NO+
2NC/1NO

61 32
7 6

Lock monitor

11
3
21
5

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

42-11
52-21
34-33
64-63

41 12

11
3

51 22

63 34
7 6

33
5

Stroke

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

D4SL-N□P□□-□

2NC/1NO+3NC

D4SLN□Q□□-□

51 22

61 34
7 6

Lock monitor

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

42-11
52-21
32-31
64-63

1
41 12

11
3

51 22

63 32
7 6

Lock monitor

Extraction
completion position

1
11
3
52

51 22

61 32
7 6

Stroke

Extraction
completion position

Lock position

Door open/closed
detection

41 12

Extraction
completion position

Operation Key Insertion
completion position

42-11
52-21
32-31
62-61

Stroke

5 Operation Key Insertion

completion position

www.sti.com/info

Only NC contact 11-12,
21-22, and 31-32 has a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

Lock position

Door open/closed
detection

Only NC contact 11-12,
21-22, and 31-32 has a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

Only NC contact 11-12 and
21-22 has a certified direct
opening mechanism.

Stroke

G-32

3NC+3NC

D4SL-N□R□□-□

41 12

42-11
52-21
34-33
62-61

3NC+2NC/1NO

Door open/closed
detection

The terminals 42-11, 22-21,
34-33, and 62-61 can be
used as unlike poles.

The terminals 42-11, 22-21,
32-31, and 62-61 can be
used as unlike poles.

Lock position
Lock monitor

Only NC contact 11-12 and
21-22 has a certified direct
opening mechanism.

Extraction
completion position

Lock position

Door open/closed
detection
1

Stroke

42-11
22-21
32-31
62-61

1
42

3NC+2NC

Door open/closed
detection

The terminals 42-11, 22-21,
34-33, and 64-63 can be
used as unlike poles.

The terminals 42-11, 22-21,
32-31, and 64-63 can be
Extraction
completion position used as unlike poles.

Lock position
Lock monitor

Only NC contact 11-12 and
21-22 has a certified direct
opening mechanism.

Extraction
completion position

The terminals 42-11, 52-21,
34-33, and 62-61 can be
used as unlike poles.
Only NC contact 11-12 and
21-22 has a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 42-11, 52-21,
34-33, and 62-61 can be
used as unlike poles.
Only NC contact 11-21,
21-22, and 31-32 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.
The terminals 42-11, 52-21,
32-31, and 64-63 can be
used as unlike poles.
Only NC contact 11-12,
21-22, and 31-32 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.
The terminals 42-11, 52-21,
32-31, and 62-61 can be
used as unlike poles.

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics

(mm)

Switches
D4SL-N□□□□-□N (Connector Type)
29.2
29.2

Head cap

9
Pre-travel distance

Front-side mounting
Two, 4.3 dia.
Mounting hole

26.3

Spacers

(73.5)

41.7±0.2

4.5 dia.
(depth: 1.6)

22±0.2

Release key

A-A
A

D4SL-N□□□□- □N

Operating characteristics
Key insertion force
Key extraction force

15 N max.
30 N max.

Pre-travel distance

15 mm max.

38.7±0.2

Side mounting
Three, 4.3 dia.
Mounting hole

38.5

41.7±0.2

Label
4.5 dia.
(depth: 1.6)

(10.85) (1) (8)

26 dia.

One, Conduit

Conduit cap

Two, Cover mounting screw

3 mm min.

Movement before being locked

42.9

LED indicators

(10.85)

B-B

4 31.5

(62.75)
(73.5)
112.1±0.8

4.5 dia.
(depth: 1.6)

LED indicators

Release key

41.7±0.2

(155)

39
37
22±0.2

4.5 dia.
(depth: 1.6)

41.7±0.2
(62.75)

Operation Key

D4SL-N□□□□-□ (Terminal Block Type)
Head cap

29.2
29.2
9
Pre-travel distance

26.3

Front-side mounting
Two, 4.3 dia.
Mounting hole

Spacers

(73.5)

4.5 dia.
(depth: 1.6)

41.7±0.2
(62.75)

41.7±0.2

LED indicators

41.7±0.2

31.5

(62.75)
(73.5)

A-A

D4SL-N□□□□- □N

Key insertion force
Key extraction force

15 N max.
30 N max.

Pre-travel distance

15 mm max.

38.7±0.2

B
Side mounting
Three, 4.3 dia.
Mounting hole

38.5

41.7±0.2

4.5 dia.
(depth: 1.6)

LED indicators

(10.85) (1) (8)

B-B

42.9

137±0.8
Release key

(10.85)

Movement before being locked

22±0.2

(179.9)

Release key

Operating characteristics

4.5 dia.
(depth: 1.6)

39
37
22±0.2

Operation Key

A
26 dia.
One, Conduit
Conduit cap

Two, Cover mounting screw

3 mm min.

Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

www.sti.com/info

G-33

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)

(mm)

Operation Keys
D4SL-NK1

D4SL-NK1S
28
21.5

19.5

22.7

15
7

4.3

22.7

15
7

Four, R2.15

4.3

Four, R2.15

D4SL-NK2

D4SL-NK1G
28
21.5

15.6

14.5

8
7

22.7

Two, 4.3 dia.

22.7

Two, 9 dia.

4.3

Four, R2.15

(5.2)
2

Mounting rubber

D4SL-NK2G

D4SL-NK3
17.2

14.5

22.7

Two, 4.3 dia.

17.7
Two, 9 dia.

4.5 dia.

Angle adjustment bolt

8 dia.
2
22.7
20°

Mounting rubber

Connector Cable
D4SL-CN□
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Connector pin No.

(30)

L ±40

(150)
(5)

Cable
AWG22, 10 conductors

Model
D4SL-CN1
D4SL-CN3
D4SL-CN5

Connector
* All 10 lead wires laid bare.

M20-NPT Adapter
Connector No.
1
2
3
4
6

Lead wire color
Black
Black/White
Red
Red/White
Green

Connector No.
6
7
8
9
10

Lead wire color
Green/White
Yellow
Yellow/White
Brown
Brown White

Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

G-34

www.sti.com/info

L size
1m
3m
5m

9 dia.

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics

(mm)

Slide Key
D4SL-NSK10-LK
Open door

Close door

10
40×40

12.5
Lockout key

11.5
B

(232.2)

SLIDE

LOCK

LOCK
SLIDE

SLIDE

FREE

(64)
(90.4)

Guide

38.7 (32.5)
D4SL-NK1S
Operation Key

(330)

(71.8)
19.1

Shot bolt

(56.5)

(76.2)

(81.8)

(30.2)

(112)

(147)
107
(20)

(35)

15+10
−5 (Between Slide Key)

(26.8)

(314)

(35)

Slide base

Three, M4

Four, M6
mounting holes

4
Cross-sectional view A-A
4

Guard Lock Safety-door Switch
D4SL-N

Cross-sectional view B-B

(19.5)

11.5
11.6

Two, M6
mounting holes

12.5

Switch base

D4SL-NSK10-LKH
Open door

Close door

10
Aluminum frame
40×40
12.5
Lockout key

(323)

(35)
(35)

15+10
−5 (Between Slide Key)
11.5

40
B

B
(56.5)

(81.8)

(241.2)

19.1

(39.2)

Shot bolt
SLIDE

(115)
(78)

SLIDE

LOCK

(71.8)

(26.8)

(121)

(147)
107
(20)

LOCK

50 (64)
90.4

SLIDE

FREE

SLIDE

FREE

12 dia.

(76.2)
38.7 (32.5)

Guide
D4SL-NK1S
Operation Key

330

Slide base

40 dia.

Inner Lever

Four, M6
mounting holes

Three, M4
4

Cross-sectional view B-B
4

(19.5)
Guard Lock Safety-door Switch
D4SL-N@@@@-@@

11.5
Guard Lock Safety-door Switch
D4SL-N@@@@-@@N

Cross-sectional view A-A

12.5

11.6
Two, M6
mounting holes

www.sti.com/info

Switch base

G-35

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)

(mm)

Operating Key Mounting
D4SL-N+D4SL-NK1

With Front-inserted Operation Key

59 min.
61.5 max.
Key insertion
position

(37)

Horizontal
insertion radius
R>
=180

With Top-Inserted Operation Key
Horizontal
insertion radius
R>
=180

(15)

(15)
Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

59 min.
61.5 max.
Key insertion
position

(37)

(38.5)

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

60.5 min.
63 max.
Key insertion
position

Vertical
insertion radius
R>
=200

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8
9

60.5 min.
63 max.
Key insertion
position

(38.5)

Vertical
insertion radius
>200
R=

31.5
Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

D4SL-N+D4SL-NK1S

With Front-inserted Operation Key

50.5 min.
53 max.
Key insertion
position

(37)

Horizontal
insertion radius
>180
R=

With Top-Inserted Operation Key
Horizontal
insertion radius
R>
=180

Center tolerance of
(15) key hole: ±0.8

52 min.
54.5 max.
Key insertion
position

(15)
Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

50.5 min.
53 max.
Key insertion
position

(37)

(38.5)

Vertical
insertion radius
R>
=200

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8
9

(38.5)

52 min.
54.5 max.
Key insertion
position

Vertical
insertion radius
>200
R=

31.5
Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

D4SL-N+D4SL-NK1G

With Front-inserted Operation Key

59 min.
61.5 max.
Key insertion
position

(37)

Horizontal
insertion radius
>120
Pitch 12 mm R=
>170
Pitch 20 mm R=

With Top-Inserted Operation Key
Horizontal
insertion radius
>120
Pitch 12 mm R=
Pitch 20 mm R>
=170

(Pitch 12 mm) Center tolerance of
(Pitch 20 mm) key hole: ±0.8

59 min.
61.5max.
Key insertion
position

(37)

Vertical
insertion radius
>140
R=

(28.9) 31.5
Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

G-36

www.sti.com/info

(38.5)

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8
(Pitch 12 mm)
(Pitch 20 mm)

60.5 min.
63 max.
Key insertion
position

Vertical
insertion radius
>140
R=

(38.5)

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8
9
(6.4)
60.5 min.
63 max.
Key insertion
position

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)

(mm)

Operating Key Mounting (continued)
D4SL-N+D4SL-NK2

With Front-inserted Operation Key

53.1 min.
55.6 max.
Key insertion
position

With Top-Inserted Operation Key
Horizontal
insertion radius
>180
R=

Horizontal
insertion radius
R>
=180

(37)

Vertical
insertion radius
R>
=200

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8
(17)
9

54.6 min.
57.1 max.
Key insertion
position

(38.5)

(15) Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

53.1 min.
55.6 max

Center tolerance of
(15) key hole: ±0.8

(38.5)

54.6 min.
57.1 max.
Key insertion
position

Vertical
insertion radius
R>
=200

(37)

Key insertion
position
31.5 (39.5)
Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

D4SL-N+D4SL-NK2G

With Front-inserted Operation Key
54.7 min.
57.2 max.
Key insertion
position

Horizontal
insertion radius
>120
Pitch 12 mm R=
Pitch 20 mm R>
=170

(37)

(Pitch 12 mm)
(Pitch 20 mm)

54.7 min.
57.2 max.

(37)

With Top-Inserted Operation Key
Horizontal
insertion radius
Pitch 12 mm R>
=120
Pitch 20 mm R>
=170

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8
(Pitch 12 mm)
(Pitch 20 mm)

(38.5)

56.2 min.
58.7 max.
Key insertion
position

Vertical
insertion radius
R>
=140

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8
(21.5)
9

(38.5)

56.2 min.
58.7 max.
Key insertion
position

Vertical
insertion radius
>140
R=

Key insertion
position
31.5 (39.5)
Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

D4SL-N+D4SL-NK3

With Front-inserted Operation Key
55.2 min.
55.7 max.
Key insertion
position

(37)

Horizontal
insertion radius
>50
R=

With Top-Inserted Operation Key
Horizontal
insertion radius
>50
R=

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

Vertical
insertion radius
R>
=200

Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8
(9)

(40±0.15)
Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

55.2 min.
55.7 max.
Key insertion
position

(40±0.15)

(37)

(38.5)

56.7 min.
59.2 max.
Key insertion
position

(38.5)

56.7 min.
59.2 max.
Key insertion
position

Vertical
insertion radius
R>
=200

31.5
Center tolerance of
key hole: ±0.8

www.sti.com/info

G-37

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Application Examples
D4SL-N Application Example
PL/Safety Category

Applied models

Stop category

Reset method

Equivalent to PLe/4

D4SL-N□R□A-□ Compact
Safety Door Switch with Magnetic Lock (mechanical lock)
G9SA-301 (24 VAC/DC)
Safety Relay Unit

Manual

Application Overview
• If the guard is opened, it is detected with S2 and the power supply to the motor (M) is shut OFF.
• When the guard is closed, the lock status can be detected and the power supply to the motor (M) remains shut OFF until limit switch
S3 is pressed.
Lock release signal
KM1
KM2
S4

S1: Safety Limit Switch with direct opening mechanism

(D4B-N, D4N, D4F) →
S2: D4SL-N
S3: Reset switch
S4: Lock release switch
KM1 and KM2: Magnetic Contactor
M: 3-phase motor

42
41
12
11
1

to PLC
to PLC

Guard
S1

Feedback loop

OPEN
KM1
S3

KM2

Stop signal

A1 A2 T11

T31

T12

T32

K1 K2

K2
K1

Timing Chart

a
b

Control
Circuit

2
5

1
2
3
4
5
6

Guard opens
Limit switch

13 23 33 41
3
4

PE T21

T23 T22

14 24 34 42
KM1 KM2

Guard Lock
Safety-door Switch S2
Lock release signal
S4

Guard can be opened

Stop signal
Reset switch S3
K1 and K2 (NC)

Notes: 1. The above circuit diagram is for Category 3.

2. Numbers inside the boxes are terminal
numbers printed on the product.

KM1

KM2

K1 and K2 (NO)
KM1 and KM2 (NC)
KM1 and KM2 (NO)

G-38

www.sti.com/info

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering
Model Number Structure
Switch

Operation Key

D4SL – N □ □ □ □ – □ □ □

D4SL-NK □ □

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Conduit Size
2: G1/2 (conduit)
3: 1/2-14 NPT (M20, includes M20-to-1/2-14NPT conversion adapter)
4: M20

2 Built-in Switch

1: Horizontal mounting
2: Vertical mounting
3: Adjustable mounting (horizontal)

1 Key Type

4-contact Model: Door monitor and lock monitors are connected in series
internally
A:
B:
C:
D:

1 2

1 Operation Key Type

1NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
1NC/1NO + 2NC
2NC + 1NC/1NO
2NC + 2NC

Blank: No cushion rubber
G: Cushion rubber
S: No cushion rubber, short type

4-contact Model: Door monitor and lock monitors are NOT connected in
series internally
S:
T:
U:
V:

1NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
1NC/1NO + 2NC
2NC + 1NC/1NO
2NC + 2NC

5-contact Model
E:
F:
G:
H:

2NC/1NO + 1NC/1NO
2NC/1NO + 2NC
3NC + 1NC/1NO
3NC + 2NC

6-contact Model

N:
P:
Q:
R:

2NC/1NO + 2NC/1NO
2NC/1NO + 3NC
3NC + 2NC/1NO
3NC + 3NC

3 Head Material
4-contact Model
F: Resin
5- or 6-contact Model (common)
F: Resin
D: Metal

4 Door Lock and Release
A: Mechanical lock/24 VDC solenoid release
G: 24 VDC solenoid lock/mechanical release

5 Indicator
4-contact Model
Blank: None
5- or 6-contact Model (common)
D: 24 VDC (orange LED indicator)

Note:

6 Release Key Type

*1. Connector cables are not included with the
connector type and are to be purchased
separately.

4-contact Model
Blank: Standard release key (metal)
5- or 6-contact Model (common)
Blank: Special release key (metal)
4: Special release key (resin) (Note: Release keys are provided)

7 Connection Method
Blank: Terminal block
N: Connector *1

Caution!: For solenoid-to-lock 6-contact models
(contact configuration: N,P,Q,R), if a current
is detected in the solenoid before the door
is closed, the door might remain unlocked.
Apply power to the solenoid AFTER the door
is closed to ensure proper locking function.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-39

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
List of Models
Release
Key Type

Wiring
method

Solenoid voltage/
Indicator

Lock and
release type

Contact configuration
(door open/closed detection switch
and lock monitor switch contacts)
6-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into
the blank □.

24 VDC
(Orange)

5-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (E, F, G or H) into
the blank □.

Connector

4-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (A, B, C, D, S, T, U
or V) into the blank □.

24 VDC
(without indicator)
Mechanical lock
Solenoid release

6-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into
the blank □.

24 VDC
(Orange)

Terminal
block

5-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (E, F, G or H) into
the blank □.
4-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (A, B, C, D, S, T, U
or V) into the blank □.

24 VDC
(without indicator)

Standard
(metal)

6-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into
the blank □.
24 VDC
(Orange)
5-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (E, F, G or H) into
the blank □.

Connector

24 VDC
(without indicator) Solenoid lock
Mechanical
release

4-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (A, B, C, D, S, T, U
or V) into the blank □.
6-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into
the blank □.

24 VDC
(Orange)
Terminal
block

5-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (E, F, G or H) into
the blank □.
4-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (A, B, C, D, S, T, U
or V) into the blank □.

24 VDC
(without indicator)

Note: The recommended models for equipment and machinery being exported to Europe are those with an M20
conduit sizes, and for North America, the recommended models are those with a 1/2-14NPT conduit sizes.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-40

www.sti.com/info

Conduit
size
(See Note.)

Model

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA-DN

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA-DN

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3NFA-DN

M20

D4SL-N4□FA-DN

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA-DN

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA-DN

M20

D4SL-N4□FA-DN

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA-N

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA-N

M20

D4SL-N4□FA-N

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA-D

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA-D

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3NFA-D

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3QFA-D

M20

D4SL-N4□FA-D

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA-D

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA-D

M20

D4SL-N4□FA-D

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA

M20

D4SL-N4□FA

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG-DN

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG-DN

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3NFG-DN

M20

D4SL-N4□FG-DN

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG-DN

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG-DN

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3HFG-DN

M20

D4SL-N4□FG-DN

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG-N

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG-N

M20

D4SL-N4□FG-N

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG-D

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG-D

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3NFG-D

M20

D4SL-N4□FG-D

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG-D

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG-D

M20

D4SL-N4□FG-D

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG

M20

D4SL-N4□FG

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
List of Models (continued)
Release
Key Type

Wiring
method

Solenoid voltage/ Lock and
Indicator
release type

Contact configuration
(door open/closed detection switch
and lock monitor switch contacts)
6-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into
the blank □.

Connector
5-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (E, F, G or H) into
the blank □.
Mechanical lock
Solenoid release

Terminal
block

6-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into
the blank □.
5-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (E, F, G or H) into
the blank □.

Special
(resin)

24 VDC
(Orange)

6-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into
the blank □.

Connector

Solenoid lock
Mechanical
release

Terminal
block

5-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (E, F, G or H) into
the blank □.
6-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (N, P, Q or R) into
the blank □.
5-contact Model
Insert the built-in switch (E, F, G or H) into
the blank □.

Conduit size
(See Note.)

Model

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA-D4N

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA-D4N

M20

D4SL-N4□FA-D4N

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA-D4N

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA-D4N

M20

D4SL-N4□FA-D4N

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA-D4

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA-D4

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3NFA-D4

M20

D4SL-N4□FA-D4

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FA-D4

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FA-D4

M20

D4SL-N4□FA-D4

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG-D4N

G1/2

D4SL-N2NFG-D4N

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG-D4N

M20

D4SL-N4□FG-D4N

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG-D4N

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG-D4N

M20

D4SL-N4□FG-D4N

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG-D4

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG-D4

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3NFG-D4

M20

D4SL-N4□FG-D4

G1/2

D4SL-N2□FG-D4

1/2-14NPT

D4SL-N3□FG-D4

M20

D4SL-N4□FG-D4

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-41

D4SL-N

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
Operation Keys
Type

Model
Vertical mounting
(Cushion rubber)

Horizontal mounting

D4SL-NK1

Horizontal mounting
(Short)

D4SL-NK1S

D4SL-NK2G

Adjustable (Horizontal)

D4SL-NK3

Notes:
D4SL-NK□□ actuators are compatible with both D4SL & D4SL-N switches
D4SL-K□□ actuators are also compatible with both D4SL & D4SL-N switches
Horizontal mounting
(Cushion rubber)

D4SL-NK1G

Connector Cables

Vertical mounting

Type
1m
3m
5m

D4SL-NK2

Model
D4SL-CN1
D4SL-CN3
D4SL-CN5

G
Slide Key
Type

Specifications

Contents

Weight: Approx. 0.6 kg
Mechanical durability: 20,000
operations min.

Weight: Approx. 0.1 kg

Weight: Approx. 0.7 kg
Mechanical durability:
20,000 operations min.

Applicable Door
Switch

Slide Key: 1 (not yet mounted)
D4SL-N mounting plate: 1
Door Switch special mounting screws: 3
D4SL-NK1 (operation key): 1
D4SL-NK1 special mounting screws: 2
Lockout keys: 2
Lockout key strap: 1
Caution labels (stickers): 2 sheets
(English and Japanese)

D4SL-NSK10-LK

D4SL-N

Inner Lever: 1

D4SL-SK10H *

---

Slide Key: 1 (not yet mounted)
Inner Lever: 1
D4SL-N mounting plate: 1
Door Switch special mounting screws: 3
D4SL-NK1 (operation key): 1
D4SL-NK1 special mounting screws: 2
Lockout keys: 2
Lockout key strap: 1
Caution labels (stickers): 2 sheets
(English and Japanese)

D4SL-NSK10-LKH

D4SL-N

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-42

Model

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

TL4019

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Interlock Switch with Guard Door Locking
• High locking force of 1,200 N (270 lb.) locks guard door shut until machine is safe to enter
• IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure enables the TL4019 to withstand water washdown
• Door and lock monitoring—the TL4019 has a total of 4 contacts: 2 N/C safety + 1
contact for door position monitoring + 1 contact for lock monitoring
• Rear manual release—allows unlocking of switch from inside of guarded area per
ANSI/RIA R15.06
• Narrow profile enables mounting to 2 in. square tubing or in applications with
space restrictions
• Rotatable head—the rotatable head of the TL4019 provides 8 actuator entry positions to satisfy most installation requirements
• Optional key release—this option on power-to-unlock models allows manual
unlocking of the guard door
• Optional slide bolt with integral door handle aids installation on sliding and swinging guard doors
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within
3 to 5 days

Specifications
Electrical
Safety Contacts:
Auxiliary Contacts:

All Models

Switching Ability

AC: 230 V – 4 A
DC: 24 V – 4 A
Silver alloy with gold flash
24 V 1 mA
24 VAC/DC or 110 VAC (all -15% / +10%)
8W
100% duty

Safety Contact Material:
Minimum Current:
Solenoid Supply Voltage:
Solenoid Power:
Solenoid Rating:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Mounting Hardware:
Min Operating Radius:

TL4019-1 & -2
2 N/C
2 N/O

TL4019-3 & -4
2 N/C
1 N/O + 1 N/O
1 N/O + 1 N/C
1 N/C + 1 N/O

TL4019-5
1 N/C
1 N/C + 1 N/O

Conforms to EN60947-5-1, EN1088,
EN ISO 13849-1
UL and C-UL listed
DGUV approved

Any position
4 x M5 screws (not supplied)
Approximately 100 mm (3.9 in.) with flex actuators
Approximately 1000 mm (39 in.) with flat and 90-degree actuators
1200 N (270 lb.)
20 m/min.
Reinforced thermoplastic
Stainless steel
3 x M20 conduit with 0.5 in. NPT adapter
500 g (17 oz.)
Red
1 x 106 minimum

Max Holding Force:
Max Actuation Speed:
Case Material:
Actuator Material:
Wiring Entry:
Weight:
Color:
Mechanical Life:
Environmental
Protection:
IP67 (NEMA 6)
Operating Temperature:
-20 to 55°C (-4 to 131°F)
Cleaning:
Water washdown
Compliance
Standards:
EN60947-5-1, EN1088, EN ISO 13849-1
Approvals/Listings:
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, DGUV
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C)—
i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place, and the machine able to be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-43

TL4019

Safety Interlock Switches

Operation
Optional Slide Bolts
• Allows easy installation of
switch on machine guards
• Actuator included (order
switch separately)

Metal Slide Bolt

• Integral handle included
• Metal is ideal for heavy
doors; plastic is suitable for
smaller and lighter doors
• Slotted hole in bolt permits
attaching multiple padlocks
• Yellow color for easy
recognition

Plastic
Slide Bolt

G
Alignment Guide

Flat Actuator

90-Degree Actuator

Optional Rear Release

Optional stainless steel alignment guide aids actuator entry
and is easily installed.

Available with and without
rubber bushings.

• Allows manual rear release
of a locked switch from
inside a guarded area per
ANSI/RIA R15.06
• May be installed on switch in
conjunction with or without
the use of a slide bolt
• Must use with Rear Release
Switch Models only

Optional Key Release

Flexible 1 Actuator

Flexible 2 Actuator

A key release unit is easily attached to the TL4019 to
provide emergency override of
the switch locking mechanism
by a qualified, responsible
person.

15 degree flexibility may be
adjusted with the set screw.

Rear Release Actuator
(Included with Rear
Release Switches)

Rear Release T-Handle
(Order separately)

G-44

Optional SLD Series

Optional LED Lid Kit

Optional switch locking
devices are available. See
accessories section for details.

Provides red
and green LED
indicators with
user-configured
operation.

www.sti.com/info

Optional Interior
Lever Kit
Use with
metal rear
release slide
bolts.

TL4019

Safety Interlock Switches

Operation (continued)
Contact Arrangements
With Unlock Request Contact

With Door Contact

1UR

1WD
2WD
3WD

1 positively driven N/C contact as door unlock request contact
1 positively driven N/C contact + 1 N/O (without door contact)

Actuator
Completely Inserted.
Closed

Actuator
Removed.
Unlocked

Request

2 positively driven N/C contacts + 1 N/O + 1 N/O as door contact
2 positively driven N/C contacts + 1 N/O + 1 N/C as door contact
2 positively driven N/C contacts + 1 N/C + 1 N/O as door contact

Actuator
Removed

Actuator Inserted
Locked
Unlocked
E1
E2

E1
E2

2 positively driven N/C contacts + 2 N/O
Locked

E1
E2

Actuator
Removed

Actuator Inserted
Unlocked

E1
E2

1UR

Without Door Contact
1ND

E1
E2

G
41

1ND

1WD

2WD

3WD

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-45

TL4019

Safety Interlock Switches

Applications
Typical applications are on
sliding guard doors and swinging guard doors that must
remain locked until a signal is
applied to the internal solenoid
that unlocks the guard door.

a wiring example of the TL4019 switch with a
✎ For
SR209AD delayed output safety monitoring relay see
“Common Circuit Examples” in the Expert Area Section of
this catalog on page A-31

Application Monitoring Units

SR223SMT
Timer Unit
Used with the TL4019 for
machines with constant overrun. Gives a timed delay to the
lock/release signal. Failsafe
and adjustable to a range of
times from 1.0 seconds up to
31 seconds.

SR125SMS45
Stop Motion
Sensing Unit
Used with the TL4019 for
machines with inconstant or
variable overrun. Senses back
EMF of AC or DC motors.
Failsafe and adjustable to a
range of 0.01 V to 0.10 V.

Safety Monitoring
Relay Units
Safety monitoring relays ensure a
maximum level of safety by monitoring
all wiring in the safety circuit, including
switches and contactors. Any fault and
the power to the machine is switched off.
A variety of safety monitoring relay units
are available.

information on these Safety
✎ For
Monitoring Relays, see page J-1.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

G-46

www.sti.com/info

TL4019

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions

(mm/in.)

TL4019

Optional Metal Slide Bolt for TL4019
h

31
1.22

3.5
0.14

20
0.79

Travel

18
0.71
30
For
1.18 Screw
M6

V
35 43
1.38 1.69

192
7.56

42 60
1.65 2.36
76
3

Mechanical
unlocking
screw

M20 (3x)

14
0.55

35
1.38

Adjusting screw
safeguarded
For Screw M6

171.5
6.75

Mechanical
unlocking
mechanism
(except
TL4019-5)

144
5.67

Slot provided
for rear
release model
Optional slide bolt interior
kit PN 44534-8050 must be
ordered separately

144
5.67

283
11.14

Overtravel
Flat Actuator

16
0.63

30
1.18

40
1.57

All non-overtravel
actuators
30
1.18

35
1.38 58
2.28

88
3.46

15
0.59

3
0.12

M5 (4x)

47
1.85

33 10
1.3 0.39

5.5
0.22

69
2.72
20
0.8

Min. door radius 1000
39.4

16 8
0.63 0.31

3
0.12
35
1.38

20
0.79

5.5
0.22

For Screw
M6

Overtravel
90-Degree Actuator

Guard frame
40
40
X
1.57 1.57

30
1.18

305
12

19.5
0.77
40
1.57

110
4.33
20
0.79
For Screw
M6

0.3
0.012
For M5
> 35
1.38
ISO 1207
(DIN 84)
ISO 4762
(DIN 912)

15
0.59

40
1.57

58
2.28

18
0.7

62
2.44
Door hung on right

✎

48
1.89

135
5.31

For the optional Plastic Slide
Bolt Dimensions, see www.sti.com

Min. door radius 1000
39.4

Flexible 1 Actuator
50
1.97
40
1.575

14
0.55

Flexible 2 Actuator

29
4 1.14
0.16

Min. door radius 100
3.94

50
1.97
40
1.575

R> 100
3.94

Adjustment
Screw

Ø5.5
0.216

Adjustment
Screw
40
1.57

33.2
1.31

Min. door radius 90
3.54

Adjustment
Screw
8
0.315

16
0.63
35
1.38

23
0.91
28 +7
1.1 +0.28

20
0.79
R> 90
3.54
Adjustment
Screw

26
1.02
30
1.2

35
1.38

16
0.63

54
2.13

Ø5.3
0.21
19
0.75

8
0.315

18
0.71

10
0.39

28 +7
1.1 +0.28

35
1.38

16
0.63

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-47

TL4019

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering
Model
Power to Lock (without door contact)
TL4019-20241TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-20241SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-20241F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-20241F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-21101TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-21101SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-21101F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-21101F1M (flex 1 actuator)
Power to Lock (with door contact)
TL4019-40241TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-40241SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-40241F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-40241F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-41101TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-41101SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-41101F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-41101F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-40242TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-40242SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-40242F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-40242F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-41102TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-41102SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-41102F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-41102F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-40243TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-40243SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-40243F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-40243F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-41103TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-41103SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-41103F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-41103F1M (flex 1 actuator)
Power to Unlock (without door contact)
TL4019-10241TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-10241SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-10241F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-10241F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-11101TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-11101SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-11101F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-11101F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-10241SKM w/key (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-11101SKM w/key (90-degree actuator)
Power to Unlock (with door contact)
TL4019-30241TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-30241SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-30241F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-30241F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-31101TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-31101SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-31101F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-31101F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-30242TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-30242SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-30242F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-30242F1M (flex 1 actuator)

Solenoid

Contacts

Wiring Entry

Part No.

24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC

2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O

3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter

44534-0030
44534-0130
44534-0230
44534-0330
44534-0040
44534-0140
44534-0240
44534-0340

24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC

2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O

3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter

44534-0410
44534-0510
44534-0610
44534-1710
44534-0420
44534-0520
44534-0620
44534-1720
44534-0430
44534-0530
44534-0630
44534-1730
44534-0440
44534-0540
44534-0640
44534-1740
44534-0450
44534-0550
44534-0650
44534-1750
44534-0460
44534-0560
44534-0660
44534-1760

24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC

2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O

44534-0010
44534-0110
44534-0210
44534-0310
44534-0020
44534-0120
44534-0220
44534-0320
44534-1110
44534-1120

24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC

44534-0050
44534-0150
44534-0250
44534-0350
44534-0060
44534-0160
44534-0260
44534-0360
44534-0070
44534-0170
44534-0270
44534-0370

(Continued on next page)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

G-48

www.sti.com/info

TL4019

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
Model
TL4019-31102TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-31102SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-31102F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-31102F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-30243TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-30243SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-30243F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-30243F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-31103TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-31103SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-31103F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-31103F1M (flex 1 actuator)
TL4019-30241SKM w/key (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-31101SKM w/key (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-30242SKM w/key (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-31102SKM w/key (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-30243SKM w/key (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-31103SKM w/key (90-degree actuator)
Power to Unlock (with unlock request contact) (mechanical
unlocking is not available on these switches)
TL4019-50241TM (flat actuator)
TL4019-50241SM (90-degree actuator)
TL4019-50241F2M (flex 2 actuator)
TL4019-50241F1M (flex 1 actuator)
Switch Only (no actuators or adapters included)
Power to Unlock (without door contact)
TL4019-10241
TL4019-11101
Power to Unlock (with door contact)
TL4019-30241
TL4019-31101
TL4019-30242
TL4019-31102
TL4019-30243
TL4019-31103
Power to Unlock (with unlock request contact)
TL4019-50241
Power to Lock (without door contact)
TL4019-20241
TL4019-21101
Power to Lock (with door contact)
TL4019-40241
TL4019-41101
TL4019-40242
TL4019-41102
TL4019-40243
TL4019-41103
Rear Release (no actuators or adapters included; rear release
actuator included; order T-handle separately)
Power to Unlock (without door contact)
TL4019-10241RR
Power to Unlock (with door contact)
TL4019-30241RR
TL4019-30242RR
TL4019-30243RR
Power to Lock (without door contact)
TL4019-20241RR
Power to Lock (with door contact)
TL4019-40241RR
TL4019-40242RR
TL4019-40243RR

Solenoid
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC

Contacts
2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/C + 1N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O

Wiring Entry
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter

Part No.
44534-0080
44534-0180
44534-0280
44534-0380
44534-0090
44534-0190
44534-0290
44534-0390
44534-0400
44534-0500
44534-0600
44534-1700
44534-1150
44534-1160
44534-1170
44534-1180
44534-1190
44534-1500

24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC

1 N/C + 1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/C + 1 N/O

3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter
3 x M20 with NPT adapter

44534-0470
44534-0570
44534-0670
44534-1770

24 VAC/DC
110 VAC

2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O

3 x M20
3 x M20

44534-2010
44534-2020

24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC

2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C + 1 N/O

3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20

44534-2050
44534-2060
44534-2070
44534-2080
44534-2090
44534-2100

24 VAC/DC

1 N/C + 1 N/C + 1 N/O

3 x M20

44534-2170

24 VAC/DC
110 VAC

2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O

3 x M20
3 x M20

44534-2030
44534-2040

24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC
24 VAC/DC
110 VAC

2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O

3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20

44534-2110
44534-2120
44534-2130
44534-2140
44534-2150
44534-2160

24 VAC/DC

2 N/C + 2 N/O

3 x M20

44534-3010

24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC

2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O

3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20

44534-3050
44534-3070
44534-3090

24 VAC/DC

2 N/C + 2 N/O

3 x M20

44534-3030

24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC
24 VAC/DC

2 N/C + 1 N/O + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O +1 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/C +1 N/O

3 x M20
3 x M20
3 x M20

44534-3110
44534-3130
44534-3150

(Continued on next page)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-49

TL4019

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
Accessories
Standard Actuators
Replacement flat actuator for TL4019
Replacement 90-degree actuator for TL4019
Replacement flex 2 actuator for TL4019
Replacement flex 1 actuator for TL4019
Standard Actuators with Rubber Bushing
Replacement flat actuator RB for TL4019
Replacement 90-degree actuator RB for TL4019

Part No.
44534-0700
44534-0710
44534-0720
44534-0730
44534-0740
44534-0750

Overtravel Actuators
Replacement flat actuator OT for TL4019
Replacement 90-degree actuator OT for TL4019
Replacement flex 2 actuator OT for TL4019
Replacement flex 1 actuator OT for TL4019
Overtravel Actuators with Rubber Bushing
Replacement flat actuator OTRB for TL4019
Replacement 90-degree actuator OTRB for TL4019
Slide Bolts
Bolt for right-hung door for TL4019 with/without rear release (yellow
metal)
Bolt for left-hung door for TL4019 with/without rear release (yellow
metal)
Plastic slide bolt for right or left-hung door for TL4019 (yellow) (okay
for rear release switches)
Slide bolt interior lever kit (use with rear release slide bolts only)
Rear release T-handle (use with rear release switches only)
Bracket for TL4019 (galvanized)
Handle without snap-in (use with 44534-8020 bracket) (galvanized)
Handle with snap-in (use with 44534-8020 bracket) (galvanized)
Miscellaneous
Stainless steel alignment guide for TL4019 (must use with Overtravel
Actuator)
Latch spring for TL4019 (provides greater retention force for
actuator)
Lockout bar for TL4019 (prevents insertion of actuator into switch)
Key lock release for TL4019 (2 keys included) (Do not use with
TL4019-5)
Spare keys for key lock above (44534-0802) for TL4019
Spare keys for key lock (44534-0800, no longer available)
Unique key lock release for TL4019 (2 unique keys included) (Do not
use with TL4019-5)
Replacement head for TL4019
LED lid kit (for 24 VAC/DC switches only)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-50

www.sti.com/info

44534-0701
44534-0711
44534-0721
44534-0731
44534-0741
44534-0751
44534-8130
44534-8140
44534-8070
44534-8050
44534-8060
44534-8020
44534-8000
44534-8010
44534-0780
44534-0760
44534-0770
44534-0802
44534-0812
44534-0810
44534-0820
44534-0790
44534-0761

Safety Interlock Switches

TL4024

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Interlock Switch
with Guard Door Locking
• High locking force of 1,500 N (337 lb.) locks guard door shut until machine is
safe to enter
• IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure withstands water washdown
• Door and lock monitoring—the TL4024 has a total of 4 contacts: 2 N/C safety + 1
contact for door position monitoring + 1 contact for lock monitoring
• Unlocking is possible with a back load on the door to satisfy the demands of high
cycle time applications
• Narrow profile enables mounting to 2 in. square tubing or in applications with
space restrictions
• Rotatable head—the rotatable head provides 8 actuator entry positions to satisfy
most installation requirements
• Optional key release—this option on power-to-unlock models allows manual
unlocking of the guard door
• Optional slide bolt with integral door handle aids installation on sliding and
swinging guard doors
• Two LED (red/green) status indicators on the lid may be wired to suit the
application
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Electrical
Safety Contacts:
Auxiliary Contacts:
Switching Ability
Safety Contact Material:
Minimum Current:
Solenoid Supply Voltage:
Solenoid Power:
Solenoid Rating:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Mounting Hardware:
Min Operating Radius:
Max Holding Force:
Max Actuation Speed:
Case Material:
Actuator Material:
Wiring Entry:
Weight:
Color:
Mechanical Life:
Environmental
Protection:
Operating Temperature:
Cleaning:
Compliance
Standards:
Approvals/Listings:

Conforms to EN60947-5-1, EN1088,
EN ISO 13849-1
UL and C-UL listed
DGUV approved

2 N/C
1 N/O + 1 N/C
1 N/O + 1 N/O
AC: 230 V – 4 A
DC: 24 V – 4 A
Silver alloy with gold flash
12 V 10 mA, 24 V 1 mA
24 VAC/DC or 110 VAC (all -15% / +10%)
8W
100% duty
Any position
4 x M5 screws (not supplied)
Approximately 300 mm (12 in.) with 90-degree actuator
1500 N (337 lb.)
20 m/min.
Anodized die-cast alloy
Stainless steel
3 x 0.5 in. NPT
800 g (28 oz.)
Red
1 x 106 minimum
IP67 (NEMA 6)
-20 to 80°C (-4 to 176°F)
Water washdown
EN60947-5-1, EN1088, EN ISO 13849-1
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, DGUV

Specifications are subject to
change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI
switches are described as normally
closed (N/C)—
i.e., with the guard closed, actuator
in place, and the machine able to
be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-51

Safety Interlock Switches

D4NH

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety-door Hinge Switch
• Compact, plastic-body safety-door hinge switch designed for
saving space in machines
• Lineup includes three contact models with 2NC/1NO and
3NC contact forms in addition to the previous contact forms
1NC/1NO, and 2NC. Models with MBB contacts are also
available
• M12-connector models are available, saving on labor and
simplifying replacement
• Standardized gold-clad contacts provide high contact reliability.
Can be used with both standard loads and microloads.

Safety Interlock Switches

EC Series

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Electrically Coded Interlock Switch & Control Unit
• The EC Series Control Units individually monitor one to four read heads to provide a
Category 4 system for applications with up to four guard doors
• Uniquely coded actuators are a highly tamper resistance
• Misalignment of nearly 1/2 inch allows application on machine doors with a high level of
vibration or alignment issues
• Manual or automatic start is switch selectable
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) allows the EC Series Control Unit to function as a
safety monitoring relay
• The 6 A/24 VDC switching capability of the Control Unit allows connection directly to
power contactors
• Individual guard door status may be monitored with the semiconductor outputs from the
Control Unit; an additional output gives status of the Control Unit
• Guarding applications with more than four doors may be achieved by combining two or
more Control Units in series while continuing to satisfy Category 4 according to EN954‑1

G-52

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

CM Series

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Most Diverse and Flexible Line of
Coded Magnetic Safety Interlock
Switches and Controllers
• Combine door switch monitoring and E-stop monitoring by using
the CM-S41 controller
• Monitor is single switch to CAT4 with the CM-S30 controller
• Monitor multiple switches to CAT3 using CM-S4 or CM-S30
controllers
• Monitoring multiple switches on individual channels can be
achieved by using the CM-S21 or CM-S41 controllers. Easily
expand your system by using the CM-SE expansion module.
• All CM switches are rated IP67
• Stainless steel switches are available for harsh environments
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days
R

Description
The CM series of controllers and coded magnetic switches
offers the most flexibility and widest range of options available.
The CM series is comprised of two basic technologies.

Controller Technologies
2-Wire Single Channel Controllers
The CM-S41 and CM-S21 controllers monitor the 2-wire
magnetically coded switches. The CM-S41 and CM-S21 controllers use a patented technology which allows them to monitor the
2-wire or single channel switches up to Category 3. The ability to
monitor just a single channel enables the CM-S41 and CM-S21 to
easily monitor multiple switches and provide individual status of
each channel. Both of these controllers are compatible with the
CM-SE expansion module.
Dual Channel Controllers
The CM-S4 and CM-S30 controllers are designed to monitor
conventional read-style, magnetically-coded switches with 1 N/O
+ 1 N/C contacts. The CM-S4 controller can monitor up to four
switches to category 3. The CM-S4 controller offers status indication for each individual switch. The CM-S30 controller can monitor
one switch to category 4, or two switches to category 3. The CMS30 control unit is capable of monitoring up to 30 conventional
read style switches in series, but does not conform to category 3
when used with more than two switches.

Conforms to EN292, EN60204-1, EN954-1,
EN1088, EN60947-5-3, EN947-5-3,
EN50081, EN50082, EN61000-6-2,
ISO 13849-1
UL and C-UL listed, TUV certified

Switch Categories
The CM series of switches are all magnetically coded.
The CM series of switches fall into three main categories:
1. 2-wire Coded Magnetic
2. Conventional Read Style 1 N/C + 1 N/O contacts
3. Universal Read Style 2 N/C + 1 N/O contacts
The 2-wire Coded Magnetic Switches are only compatible with
the CM-S21, CM-S41 and CM-SE control units and expansion
module. The Conventional Read Style Switches are compatible
with the CM-S4 and CM-S30 controllers. The Universal Read
Style Switches are unique in design, all three contacts are rated
for safety. This means that Universal Read Style switches can
be used with the CM-S4 or CM-S30 Controllers, or conventional
safety monitoring relays such as the G9SA, SR103 or G9SX-AD,
-BC. This allows the Universal Read Style Switches to be run in
series with E-stop switches or other mechanical door switches.
Typically a category 2 rating would be applied to a system that
incorporates multiple switches wired in series to a standard safety
monitoring relay. A risk assessment should always be performed
by properly trained and authorized personnel.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-53

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Switch Specifications
Electrical
Safety Contacts:
N/C Operating Distance:

CM-S5, CM-S6
1 N/C + 1 N/O

CM-S221, CMS521, CM-S621
2 N/C + 1 N/O

CM-S11
Current Sensing
Circuit
On = 5-7 mm; Off
= 8-12 m

CM-S31
Current Sensing
Circuit
On = 5-7 mm; Off
= 8-12 mm

On = 7 mm;
Off = 10 mm

1 mm
300 mA / 24 V

1 mm

1 mm
300 mA / 24 V

2 x M4
screws supplied
Glass filled PPS

2 x M4
screws supplied
ABS

Max Wire Size:

Pre-wired cable
to 5 m

Pre-wired cable
to 10 m

2 x M4
screws supplied
316 stainless
steel
Pre-wired cable
to 10 m

Weight:
Color:
Mechanical Life:
Environmental
Protection:
Operating Temperature:

230 g (8.1 oz.)
Red
106

207 g (8.1 oz.)
Red
106

230 g (8.1 oz.)
Red
106

207 g (7.3 oz.)
Red
106

265 g (9.3 oz.)
Stainless
106

3 x M4
screws supplied
316 stainless
steel
Pre-wired
cable to 5 m,
6-pin micro AC
connector
545 g (19.2 oz.)
Stainless
106

IP67 (NEMA 6)
-10 to 55°C
(14 to 131°F)

Humidity:
Compliance
Standards:
Approvals/Listings:

95% RH at 55°C (131°F)

Case Material:

EN292, EN60204-1, EN954-1, EN1088, EN60947-5-3, EN947-5-3, EN50081, EN50082, EN61000-6-2
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL.
TUV certified: CM-S1, CM-S2, CM-S3, CM-S11 and CM-S31.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place, and
the machine able to be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-54

CM-S321,
CM-S421
2 N/C + 1 N/O

CM-S1 —
On = 3 mm;
Off = 8 mm
CM-S2 and
CM-S3 —
On = 6 mm;
Off = 13 mm
1 mm
500 mA / 24 V

Minimum Gap:
Max Switched
Current/Voltage:
Mechanical
Mounting:

CM-S1, CM-S2,
CM-S3
1 N/C + 1 N/O

www.sti.com/info

On = 7 mm;
Off = 10 mm

IP67 (NEMA 6)
Connector
Models:
-10 to 55°C
(14 to 131°F)
Integrated
Cables:
-10 to 95°C
(14 to 203°F)

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Control Unit Specifications
Electrical
Power Supply:

CM-S4
24 VAC/DC ± 10%

CM-S30
24 VAC/DC ± 10%

Power Consumption:

2.4 VA typical, 0.25 A quick acting

120 mA

Input Fuse:
Safety Inputs:

500 mA resetable
1 N/O + 1 N/C

750 mA resetable
1 N/O + 1 N/C

Max Cable Length:
Max Input Resistance:
Relay Outputs:

—
Contact factory
1 N/O safety + 1 N/O aux.

—
Contact factory
2 N/O safety + 1 N/C aux.

Max Switched Current/Voltage:
Min Switched Current/Voltage:
Impulse Withstand Voltage:
Max Drop-Out Time:
Max Output Fuse:
Reset Mode:
External Device Monitoring:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Case Material:
Max Wire Size:
Weight:

4 A / 24 VAC/DC
4 mA / 12 V
250 V
18 ms
4 A quick acting
Automatic
N/C loop between Y1 and Y2

3 A / 24 VAC/DC
4 mA / 12 V
250 V
18 ms
4 A quick acting
Automatic/Manual, monitored
Between Y1, Y2, Y3

35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail
Polyamid PA6.6
2 x 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
240 g (8.5 oz.)

35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail
Polyamid PA6.6
1 x 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG)
230 g (8.1 oz.)

Color:
Indication:

Grey
U: Green = On
Outputs Open: Red = On
Outputs Closed: Green = On
D11, D12, D21, D22: Green = Gate closed
D31, D32, D41, D42: Red = Gate open
3 x 107

Red/Grey
Green = Power On
Green = K1 On
Green = K2 On

1 x 107

35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail
Polycarbonate
1 x 2.5 mm2 stranded, 1 x 4 mm2 solid
CM-S41 — 575 g (20.3 oz.)
CM-S21 — 183 g (6.5 oz.)
CM-SE — 135 g (4.8 oz.)
Red
Power = Red
Outputs Closed: Green = On
Outputs Open: No Light = Off
Gate Closed: Yellow = On
Gate Open: No Light = Off
1 x 106

Housing IP40, Terminals IP20
0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
95%

Housing IP40, Terminals IP20
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
93%

Housing IP40, Terminals IP20
10 to 55°C (50 to 131°F)
85%

Mechanical Life:
Environmental
Protection:
Operating Temperature:
Humidity:
Compliance
Standards:

CM-S41, CM-S21 & CM-SE
CM-S41 — 24 VAC/DC, 110/230 VAC
CM-S21 & CM-SE — 24 VAC/DC
CM-S41 — 6 VA;
CM-S21 & CM-SE — 3 VA
500 mA resetable
CM-S41 —
4 CM-S11 or CM-S31 switches
CM-S21 —
2 CM-S11 or CM-S31 switches
CM-SE — 5 CM-S11 or CM-S31 switches
100 m (328 ft.)
Contact factory
CM-S41 & CM-S21 — 2 N/O;
CM-SE — N/A
4 A / 230 VAC; 2 A / 24 VDC (resistive)
10 V / 10 mA
250 V
Deactivation by sensor 13 mS
AC = 5 A; DC = 2.5 A; quick acting
Monitored manual or automatic
N/C loop between X1 and X2

EN292, EN60204-1, EN954-1,EN1088,
EN60947-5-3, EN947-5-3, EN50081,
EN50082, EN61000-6-2
Approvals/Listings:
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, TUV (TUV pending for CM-S30)
Safety Category:
Cat 3 per EN954-1
Cat 4 per ISO 13894-1
Cat 3 per EN954-1
(internal operation)
(internal operation)
(internal operation)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place, and the machine able to
be started.

EN292, EN60204-1, ISO 13849-1, EN1088, EN60947-5-3, EN947-5-3,
EN50081, EN50082, EN61000-6-2

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-55

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Applications
2-Wire Single Channel Controllers
CM-S41 Control Unit
The CM-S41 is a combined Safety Switch and E-Stop control
unit. Along with the ability to monitor up to four, 2-wire CM Series
safety switches, it can also monitor the normally closed contacts
of emergency stop buttons or mechanical safety switches in dual
channel control circuits.
The CM-S41 has 2 normally open safety contact outputs and 1
normally closed auxiliary output, an external reset/proving circuit
and LED indication for “Power”, “Run” and the status of each
activated gate switch.
CM-S21 Control Unit
The CM-S21 control unit is a 24 VAC/DC system that can monitor up to 2 CM Series safety switches.
The CM-S21 has 2 normally open safety contact outputs and 1
normally closed auxiliary output, an external reset/proving circuit
and LED indication for “Power”, “Run” and the status of each
activated gate switch.

CM-S21 Application Diagram

24V
(+ve)

CM-SE Extender Module
The CM-SE expansion module is a 24 VAC/DC unit that can be
added to either the CM-S41 or CM-S21 to monitor an additional
5 CM Series safety switches. Connection to the main control
unit is by a simple 2-wire bus connection. The status of each
guard switch is shown by the YELLOW LED’s. Additional CMS-E
modules can be added to monitor larger systems.

GS1

A1 X1 BL DR 31 13 23

GATE 1

POWER
IND 1
IND 2

MANUAL
RE-SET

RUN

GATE 2

A2 X2 BL DR 32 14 24

GS2
0V
(-ve)

CM-S41 Application Diagram

24 V
+ve

GS1 GS2

A1 S13 S23 X1 BL DR BL DR 31 13 23

RUN 2

DE-SELECT
GATE 2

GATE 3

GATE 4

POWER

IND 2

IND 4

MANUAL
RE-SET

IND 5

GATE 4 GATE 5

ISIS-4
or ISIS-2
CM-S41
/ CM-S21
Control
CONTROL UNIT
Units:
Connect
the CM-SE
Bus
Connect
the ISIS-E
connection
to an active to
Bus connection
gate input.
A2

GS4 GS5

GS3 GS4

G-56

BUS

A2 DR BL DR BL DR BL

GATE 3 GATE 4

A2 S14 S24 X2 BL DR BL DR 32 14 24

N (-ve)

IND 1

IND 3

Control Unit

GATE 1 GATE 2 GATE 3

K2
1

Extender Module
GS1 GS2 GS3

A1 DR BL DR BL DR BL

GATE 1 GATE 2

POWER

K1
K2

CM-SE Application Diagram

L (+ve)

MECHANICAL
SAFETY
SWITCHES
or
EMERGENCY
STOP

K1
K2

www.sti.com/info

0V
-ve

2-WIRE BUS CONNECTION

BL DR

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Applications (continued)
Dual Channel Controllers
CM-S4 Control Unit
The CM-S4 controller is capable of monitoring up to four,
magnetically coded switches with 1 N/O + 1 N/C contacts up to
category 3 according to EN954-1. The CM-S4 has a dedicated
dual channel input for each switch and has LED status indicators
for each channel. The CM-S4 has 1 N/O safety contact and 1 N/O
Aux contact. External Device Monitoring (EDM) is available using
Y1,Y2 inputs.
CM-S30 Control Unit
The CM-S30 controller is capable of monitoring one magnetically coded switch with 1 N/O + 1 N/C contacts up to category
4, or two switches to category 3 according to ISO 13489-1. The
CM-S30 control unit is capable of monitoring up to 30 conventional read style switches in series, but does not conform to category
4 when used with more than two switches. The CM-S30 controller
has 2 N/O safety contacts and 1 N/C Auxiliary contact. External
Device Monitoring (EDM) is available using Y1,Y2 inputs.

CM-S4 Application Diagram

CM-S30 Application Diagram (Cat 3)

24VAC/DC

24VAC/DC
READ HEAD 1

READ HEAD 2
A1 A2

WH BN

HL1 HL2 H22

BRN

GN
GN
GN
GN

H73 H74

D42
RD

WH YE

FEEEDBACK LOOP

CM-S30 Application Diagram (Cat 4)
14

24VAC/DC

K1
K2

A1 A2

READ HEAD 3

RD
15

N (0 Volt)

OUT

CHANNEL 4

K1
K2

D41

MONITORED AUTO
RESTART

control logic

D31

D21

CHANNEL 21 START/
FEEDBACK LOOP

CM-S30
K1

D12

WH YE

CHANNEL 2

D11

CHANNEL 3

READ HEAD 4

READ HEAD 1

CHANNEL 1

CM-S4

D12

D12
RD

MONITORED AUTO RESTART

BRN

CHANNEL 1

HL1 HL2 H22

CHANNEL 1

WH
BRN

K1
UB

GN
GN

K3
CHANNEL 21 START/
FEEDBACK LOOP

CMS-S30

N (0 Volt)

H73 H74

*23-24 should not be used as safety output.

MONITORED AUTO
RESTART

N (0 Volt)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-57

CM Series

Dimensions
2-Wire Coded Magnetic Switches

(mm/in.)
CM-S11 Switch

CM-S11

52
2.04
22
0.86

28
1.1

6.4
0.25

Ø4.2
0.16
Ø8.1
0.32

3
0.11

14
0.55
SIDE

CM-S31 Switch
CM-S31

53
2.08
22
0.86

28
1.1

6.4
0.25

Ø4.2
0.16
Ø8.1
0.32

3
0.11

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-58

Safety Interlock Switches

www.sti.com/info

13.5
0.53
SIDE

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions (continued)

(mm/in.)

Conventional Read Style Switches

CM-S1 Switch

CM-S1

5
0.2

8.5
0.334

13
0.51
0.34
0.013

NOTE: Actuator is same
dimension as switch.

ca. Ø5.8
0.23

Actuator

4.5
in
Center Offset m at s = 3
0.12
2.5
2.5
0.1
0.1

Son

Active Area
19.2
0.755 26.2
1.03

42
1.65

22
0.87
36
1.42

7
0.28

CM-S2 Switch

CM-S2

67.5
2.66

87.5
3.44

6
0.24

13
0.51

Active Area
12
0.47 9.5
0.374

NOTE: Actuator is same
dimension as switch.

2.5
0.1
Center Offset m at s = 3
0.12
2.5
2.5
0.1
0.1

Son

Ø5.5
0.22

24.5
0.97 6
0.24

Actuator

0.34
0.013

ca. Ø5.8
0.23

42
1.65

78 ± 1
3.07 ± 0.04

CM-S3 Switch
CM-S3

M30 x 1.5
0.06

42
1.65

36
1.42

8
0.31

ca. Ø5.8
0.23

Son
2.5
0.1

2.5
0.1

SW15
SW40

Active Area

Actuator

Center Offset m at s = 3
0.12

0.34
0.013

20
0.79

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-59

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions (continued)

(mm/in.)

Conventional Read Style Switches (continued)
CM-S5
CM-S5 and CM-S521
52.0
2.05
22.0
0.87

14.0
0.55

3.0
0.12

28.0
1.10

SIDE VIEW

4.2
dia.
0.17
8.1
dia.
0.32
6.4
0.25

G
CM-S6

CM-S6 and CM-S621
19.0
0.75

4.9
0.19

19.0
0.75

5.0
0.20

SWITCH

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-60

www.sti.com/info

19.0
0.75

82.5
3.25

82.5 68.0
3.25 2.68

5.0
0.20

4.9
0.19

7.2
0.28

19.0
0.75

73.0
2.87

7.2
0.28

ACTUATOR

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions (continued)

(mm/in.)

Universal Read Style Switches

CM-S221 Switch

CM-S221
13.5
0.53
78.0
3.07
27.2
1.07

Switch
9.8
0.39
87.5
3.44
9.8
0.39

27.2
1.07

Actuator
6.6
0.26

78.0
3.07
13.5
0.53

G
CM-S321/CM-S421

CM-S321 and CM-S421
Note: The CM-S321 includes a backing plate (not shown).
17.8 with backing
0.70 plate
33.0
1.30
19.5
0.77

4.0
0.16

79.0
3.11

60.0
2.36

9.5
0.37

5.3
0.21

16.0
0.63
4.0
0.16

79.0
3.11

60.0
2.36

9.5
0.37

4.4
0.17
SWITCH

CM-S521

33.0
1.30
19.5
0.77

16.0
0.63

5.3
0.21

17.8 with backing
0.70 plate

4.4
0.17
ACTUATOR

CM-S621

CM-S521 dimensions, please refer to the
✎ For
CM-S5 dimensions on the previous page.
CM-S621 dimensions, please refer to the
✎ For
CM-S6 dimensions on the previous page.

www.sti.com/info

G-61

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions (continued)

(mm/in.)

Control Units
CM-S4
CM-S4

CM-S4

75
2.95
75
75
2.95
2.95

45
1.77
45
45
1.77
1.77

105
4.13
105
105
4.13114.7
4.13
4.515
114.7
114.7
4.515
4.515

For 35 DIN rail
1.38
35 DIN rail
For 35
For
1.38 DIN rail
1.38

CM-S41

CM-S41
CM-S41

75
2.95
75
75
2.95
2.95

74
2.91
74
74
2.91
2.91

75
2.95
75
75
2.95
2.95

74
2.91
74
74
2.91
2.91
119
4.68
119
119
4.68
4.68

CM-S21 & CM-SE

CM-S21/SE
CM-S21/SE
22.5
0.88
22.5
22.5
0.88
0.88

84
3.3
84
84
3.3
3.3

119
4.68
119
119
4.68
4.68

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-62

www.sti.com/info

22.5
0.88
22.5
22.5
0.88
0.88

84
3.3
84
84
3.3
3.3

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions (continued)
Control Units (continued)

(mm/in.)
CM-S30

CM-S30

114
4.5

22.5
0.885

99
3.9

35
DIN RAIL MOUNTING
1.38

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-63

CM Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering
Switch
Model
Construction
Contacts
Wiring Entry
Part No.
Control Units for 2-Wire Switches
CM-S21-24 (24 VAC/DC)
44536-0120
CM-S41-24 (24 VAC/DC)
44536-0140
CM-S41-110 (110 VAC or 230 VAC)
44536-0141
CM-SE-24 (24 VAC/DC)
44536-0170
2-Wire Switches
CM-S11-PC3
Plastic
2-wire system
3 m cable
44536-1100
CM-S11-PC5
Plastic
2-wire system
5 m cable
44536-1105
CM-S11-PC10
Plastic
2-wire system
10 m cable
44536-1110
CM-S11-PCC5
Plastic
2-wire system
connector + 5 m cable
44536-1159
CM-S31SC3
Stainless Steel
2-wire system
3 m cable
44536-3100
CM-S31SC5
Stainless Steel
2-wire system
5 m cable
44536-3105
CM-S31SCC5
Stainless Steel
2-wire system
connector + 5 m cable
44536-3159
Control Units for 1 N/C + 1 N/O Reed Style Switches
CM-S30 (24 VAC/DC)
44536-0030
CM-S4 (24 VAC/DC)
44536-0040
1 N/C + 1 N/O Reed Style Switches
CM-S1PC3
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
3 m cable
44536-0100
CM-S1PC5
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-0105
CM-S2PC3
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
3 m cable
44536-0200
CM-S2PC5
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-0205
CM-S3PC3
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
3 m cable
44536-0300
CM-S3PC5
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-0305
CM-S5PC5
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-0505
CM-S5PC10
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
10 m cable
44536-0510
CM-S6PC5
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-0605
CM-S6PC10
Plastic
1 N/C + 1 N/O
10 m cable
44536-0610
Universal Reed Style Switches
(can be used with safety monitoring relays that accept 1N/C + 1N/O or 2NC switch contacts except the SR203, SR208, SR209)
CAUTION! Universal reed switches may be operated with a coded or non-coded actuator when using 2 NC contacts with a safety monitoring relay.
CM-S221PC5
Plastic
2 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-0221
CM-S221PCC5
Plastic
2 N/C + 1 N/O connector + 5 m cable
44536-0225
CM-S221PCC
Plastic
2 N/C + 1 N/O
no cable
44536-0226
CM-S521PC5
Plastic
2 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-0521
CM-S521PC10
Plastic
2 N/C + 1 N/O
10 m cable
44536-1521
CM-S621PC5
Plastic
2 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-0621
CM-S621PC10
Plastic
2 N/C + 1 N/O
10 m cable
44536-1621
CM-S321SC5
Stainless Steel
2 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-3221
Stainless Steel,
M12 connector
CM-S321SCC5
2 N/C + 1 N/O
44536-3229
backing plate
+ 5 m cable
Stainless Steel,
M12 connector,
CM-S321SCC
2 N/C + 1 N/O
44536-3220
backing plate
no cable
Stainless Steel, No
CM-S421SC5
2 N/C + 1 N/O
5 m cable
44536-4221
backing plate
Stainless Steel, No
M12 connector
CM-S421SCC5
2 N/C + 1 N/O
44536-4229
backing plate
+ 5 m cable
Recommended Safety Monitoring Relays for Universal Reed Style Switches
CM-S4, CM-S30, G9SA series, G9SX-AD, G9SX-BC, SR series
Spare Actuators/Accessories
Replacement Actuator for CM-S1, Red ABS Plastic
44536-0710
Replacement Actuator for CM-S2, Red ABS Plastic
44536-0720
Replacement Actuator for CM-S3, Red ABS Plastic
44536-0730
Replacement Actuator for CM-S5,CM-S521 Red ABS Plastic
44536-0750
Replacement Actuator for CM-S6, CM-S621 Red ABS Plastic
44536-0760
Replacement Actuator for CM-S11, Red ABS Plastic
44536-0711
Replacement Actuator for CM-S31, Red ABS Plastic
44536-0731
Replacement Actuator for CM-S221, Red ABS Plastic
44536-0721
Replacement Actuator for CM-S321, Stainless Steel, backing plate
44536-0741
Replacement Actuator for CM-S421, Stainless Steel, No backing Plate
44536-0751
Mounting Bracket for CM-S3
44536-0800

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Mounting Brackets can be used with
✎ Universal
this product. See page G-123 for details.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-64

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

D40

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Compact Non-contact Door Switch/
Flexible Safety Unit
D40Z
• Supports ISO 13849-1 (Safety Category 4/PLe).
Can be used on higher risk level applications by connecting to
Safety Controllers.
• Supports a wide range of applications in combination with Safety
Controller G9SP or G9SX-NS□.
• Up to 30 units can be connected to a single G9SX (15 units with
G9SP) Controller and maintain Cat 4/PLe. Ideal for middle to large
scale device applications.
• Troubleshooting is made easy with the switch’s two-color diagnostic
LED display patterns.
• Photocoupler monitor output allows connection to a general-purpose
PLC (NPN type).
• Similar size as the D40A allows standardization of machine design.
• Compact non-contact door switch can be mounted from both sides.
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment
today or within 3 to 5 days
D40Z

D40A
• Stable operation reduces controller errors caused by unstable doors
• Connect up to 30 non-contact door switches with LED indicators to
one controller
• Reversible switch provides flexibility in installation
• Two-color LED indicator enables easier maintenance by identification of door status and cable disconnections
• Safety category 3 (EN13849-1)
• Both non-contact door switches and conventional key-type safetydoor switches can be input to one controller, saving space
• OFF-delay output provided for stop category 1
• Easily construct partial stop and complete stop systems with the
logical AND connection function, using G9SX as the controller
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment
today or within 3 to 5 days

D40A

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-65

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Specifications
Ratings and Characteristics (Non-Contact Door Switches)

Item

Model
Operating distance OFF ➔ ON
Operating distance ON ➔ OFF
Differential travel

D40Z-1C□
5 mm min. *1
15 mm max. *1
Refer to ”Detection Ranges”

Operating
characteristics

Influence of temperature

Refer to “Detection Ranges”

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-66

±20% of operating distance at 23°C, within
temperature range of -10 to 55°C
—
—

±10% of operating distance at 23°C
25 ms max.
100 ms max. (Distance between the switch
Operating time OFF ➔ ON *2
—
and actuator is 5 mm)
Ambient operating temperature
-10 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
-10 to 55°C (no icing or condensation)
Ambient operating humidity
25% to 85%
Insulation resistance (between charged parts and case)
50 MΩ max. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength (between charged parts and case)
1,000 VAC for 1 min
Degree of contamination
3
—
Dielectric strength (between charged parts and case)
—
1,000 VAC for 1 min
Electromagnetic compatibility
IEC/EN 60497-5-3 compliant
—
Vibration resistance
10 to 55 to 10 Hz (single amplitude: 0.75 mm, double amplitude: 1.5 mm)
Shock resistance
300 m/s2 min.
Degree of protection
IP67
Material
PBT resin
Mounting method
M4 screws
Terminal screw tightening torque
1 N·m
Power supply voltage
24 VDC +10%/-15%
Power consumption *3
0.5 W max.
0.6 W max.
Photocoupler output: 24 VDC, load current:
24 VDC,
Auxiliary monitoring output
10 mA
10 mA (PNP open-collector outputs) *4
Actuator not detected (lights in red); error
occurred (blinks in red), actuator detected
Actuator not detected (red); actuator
(lights in yellow), actuator detected and
LED indicators
detected (yellow)
Non-contact Door Switch input OFF (blinks
in yellow)
Connecting cables
2 m, 5 m
Number of connectable switches *5
30 max. (wiring length: 100 m max.)
Switch: approx. 175 g, actuator:
Switch: approx. 145 g, actuator:
Weight
approx. 20 g (D40Z-1C5)
approx. 20 g (D40A-1C2)
*1. This is the distance where the switch operates from OFF to ON when approaching and the distance
where the switch operates from ON to OFF when separating when the switch and actuator target marks
are on the same axis, and the sensing surface coincide.
*2. Indicates the value of the non-contact door switch output.
*3. Power to be provided to the load is not included.
*4. Turns ON when the actuator is approaching. The G3R series of the SSR can be driven at an auxiliary
output of 10 mA. Contact your Omron representative for details.
*5. For details, contact factory.

Repeat accuracy
Response time ON ➔ OFF *2

D40A-1C□

www.sti.com/info

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Specifications (continued)
Ratings (Non-contact Door Switch Controllers)
Power Inputs

G9SX-NS202-□

Item
Rated supply voltage
Operating voltage range
Rated power consumption *
* Power consumption of loads not included.

G9SX-NSA222-T03-□
24 V DC
-15% to 10% of rated supply voltage
4 W max.

3 W max.

G9SX-EX-□

2 W max.

Inputs

Item
G9SX-NS202-□/G9SX-NSA222-T03-□
Safety input *
Operating voltage: 20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC, internal impedance: approx. 2.8 kW
Feedback/reset input
* Only applies to the G9SX-NSA222-T03-□. Refers to input other than that from the Non-contact Door Switch.

Outputs

G9SX-NS202-□/G9SX-NSA222-T03-□
P channel MOS FET transistor output
Load current: 0.8 A DC max. *2
PNP transistor output
Auxiliary output
Load current: 100 mA max.
*1. While safety outputs are in the ON state, the following signal sequence is output continuously for diagnosis.
When using the safety outputs as input signals to control devices (i.e. Programmable Controllers), consider the OFF pulse shown below.
Item
Instantaneous safety output *1
OFF-delayed safety output *1

Approx.100 ms

ON
OFF
360 µs max.

*2. The following derating is required when Units are mounted side-by-side. G9SX-NS202-□/G9SX-NSA222-T03-□: 0.4 A max. load current

Expansion Unit

G9SX-EX-□
250 VAC, 3 A/30 VDC, 3 A
(resistive load)
3A
250 VAC, 125 VDC

Item
Rated load
Rated carry current
Maximum switching voltage

Response Time and Operating Time
G9SX-NS□

Logical AND input

Non-contact Door
Switch input

Non-contact door switch input
Logical AND input

Max. response time
(excluding Expansion Units) *1

Max. operating time
(excluding Expansion Units) *2

45 ms *3

200 ms *4

15 ms

100 ms

*1. The maximum response time is the time it takes the output to switch from ON to OFF after the input
switches from ON to OFF.
*2. The maximum operating time is the time it takes the output to switch from OFF to ON after the input
switches from OFF to ON.
*3. The value is the sum of D40Z’s response time and G9SX-NS□’s response time.
*4. The value is the sum of D40Z’s operating time and G9SX-NS□’s operating time.

G9SX-NSA□
Non-contact Door
Switch input

Logical AND input

D4NS
Safety input

Max. response time
Max. operating time
(excluding Expansion Units) *1 (excluding Expansion Units) *2
Non-contact door switch input

45 ms *3

200 ms *4

Safety inputs

15 ms

50 ms

Logical AND input

15 ms

100 ms

*1. The maximum response time is the time it takes the output to switch from ON to OFF after the input
switches from ON to OFF.
*2. The maximum operating time is the time it takes the output to switch from OFF to ON after the input
switches from OFF to ON.
*3. The value is the sum of D40Z’s response time and G9SX-NSA□’s response time.
*4. The value is the sum of D40Z’s operating time and G9SX-NSA□’s operating time.
Note: The response time and operating time on the G9SP varies depending on the cycle time. For details, contact factory.

www.sti.com/info

G-67

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Specifications (continued)
Characteristics
G9SX-NS202-□

Item

G9SX-NSA222-T03-□

Over-voltage category
(IEC/EN 60664-1)

Operating time (OFF to ON state) *1

100 ms max. (Logical AND
connection input ON and
Non-contact Door Switch input
ON)

Response time (ON to OFF state) *1

15 ms max. (Logical AND
connection input: OFF)
20 ms max. (Non-contact Door
Switch input OFF) *6

ON-state residual voltage

3.0 V max. (safety output, auxiliary output)

OFF-state leakage current

0.1 mA max. (safety output, auxiliary output)

Maximum wiring length of safety input,
logical AND connection input, and Noncontact Door Switch input
Reset input time
(Reset button pressing time)
Accuracy of OFF-delay time *5

G
Insulation
resistance

Dielectric
strength

Between logical AND
connection terminals,
and power supply input
terminals and other input
and output terminals
connected together
Between all terminals
connected together and
DIN rail
Between logical AND
connection terminals,
and power supply input
terminals and other input
and output terminals
connected together
Between all terminals
connected together and
DIN rail
Between different poles of
outputs
Between relay outputs
connected together and
other terminals connected
together

Vibration resistance
Shock
resistance

G9SX-EX-□
II (Relay outputs 13 to 43 and
14 to 44: III)

50 ms max. (Safety input: ON) *2
100 ms max. (Logical AND
connection input ON and
Non-contact Door Switch input
ON) *3
15 ms max. (Safety input OFF and
logical AND connection input OFF)
20 ms max. (Non-contact Door
Switch input: OFF) *6

30 ms max. *4

10 ms max. *4

100 m max. (External connection impedance: 100 Ω max. and 10 nF max.)
100 ms min.
---

Within ±5% of the set value

--20 MΩ min. (at 100 VDC)
100 MΩ min.
(at 500 VDC)

--500 VAC for 1 min.

1,200 VAC for 1 min

--2,200 VAC for 1 min
10 to 55 to 10 Hz, 0.375 mm single amplitude (0.75 mm double amplitude)

Destruction
Malfunction

300 m/s2
100 m/s2

Electrical

---

Mechanical

---

100,000 cycles min. rated load,
switching frequency: 1,800 cycles/
hour)
5,000,000 cycles min. (switching
frequency: 7,200 cycles/hour)

Durability

Ambient operating temperature

-10 to 55°C (no icing or condensation)

Ambient operating humidity

25% to 85%

Terminal tightening torque

0.5 N·m (For the G9SX-NS□-RT (with screw terminals) only)

Weight

Approx. 125 g

Approx. 200 g

Approx. 165 g

*1. When two or more Units are connected by logical AND, the operating time and response time are the sum total of the operating times and response
times, respectively, of all the Units connected by logical AND.
*2. Represents the operating time when the safety input turns ON with all other conditions set.
*3. Represents the operating time when the logical AND input and the Non-contact Door Switch input turn ON with all other conditions set.
*4. This does not include the operating time or response time of G9SX-NS□ that are connected.
*5. This does not include the operating time or response time of internal relays in the G9SX-EX-□.
*6. The failure detection time for 24 V short-circuit failure on the input to Non-contact Door Switches is 35 ms max.
If using the Switch for an application other than as a Door Switch, calculate the safe distance using a failure detection time of 35 ms.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-68

www.sti.com/info

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Specifications (continued)
Cable with Connector
Ratings and Characteristics
Rated current
Rated voltage

Materials and Finish

Degree of protection

3A
For DC 125 VDC, for AC 250 VAC
40 mΩ max. (20 mV max., 100 mA
max.)
1,000 mΩ min (at 500 VDC)
1,500 VAC for 1 min (leakage current
1 mA max.)
IP67 (IEC529)

Insertion tolerance

200 times min.

Contact resistance (Connector)
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength (Connector)

Item
Materials
Contacts
Finish
Materials
Thread bracket
Finish
Materials
Pin block
Finish
O-ring/rubber bushing
Cover

XS2F/H/W
Phosphor bronze
Nickel base, 0.4-µm gold plating
Brass
Nickel plated
PBT resin (UL94V-0)
For DC: light gray; for AC: dark gray
Rubber
PBT resin (UL94V-0)

Tensile: 98 N/15 s
Torsion: 0.98 N m/15 s
Cable diameter: 6 mm 98 N/15 s
Operating: -25°C to 70°C
20% to 80%

Assembled fixture strength
Cable holding strength
Ambient operating temp range
Ambient humidity range

Logical AND Connection
Item
G9SX-NSA222-T03-□
G9SX-NS202-□
Number of Units connected per logical AND output
4 Units max.
Total number of Units connected by logical AND *1
20 Units max.
Number of Units connected in series by logical AND
5 Units max.
Max. number of Expansion Units connected *2
--Maximum cable length for logical AND input
100 m max.
Note: See Logical AND Connection Combinations below for details.
*1. The number of G9SX-EX401-□ Expansion Units or G9SX-EX041-T-□ Expansion Units (OFF-delayed Model) not included.
*2. G9SX-EX401-□ Expansion Units and G9SX-EX041-T-□ Expansion Units (OFF-delayed Model) can be mixed.

G9SX-EX-□
------5 Units max.
---

Logical AND Connection Combinations
1. One logical AND connection output from a G9SX-NS□ Controller can be
logical AND connected to up to four Controllers.
G9SX-NS@

G9SX-NS@

3. The largest possible system configuration contains a total of 20 G9SXNS□ Controllers, G9SX-AD□ Advanced Units, and G9SX-BC Basic Units.
In this configuration, each Controller or Advanced Unit can have up to five
Expansion Units.

G9SX-NS@

G9SX-@

G9SX-AD@
or
G9SX-NS@

G9SX-NS@

G9SX-AD@
or
G9SX-NS@

G9SX-NS@

G9SX-AD@
or
G9SX-NS@

2. Any G9SX-NS□ Controller that receives a logical AND connection input
can be logically connected to other Controllers on up to five layers.
G9SX-NS@

G9SX-NS@

Note: The G9SX-NS□ in the above diagram can be replaced by the
G9SX-AD□ Advanced Unit.

Number of Units connected
in series by logical AND: 5
Units max.

G9SX-AD@
or
G9SX-NS@

Number of Units connected
per logical AND output: 4
Units max.

G9SX-AD@
or
G9SX-NS@

Total number of Units
connected by logical AND:
20 Units max.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-69

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Engineering Data
D40Z Detection Ranges (Typical Characteristics Data)
16

16
14

Operating distance Y (mm)

14
OFF

10
8

6
4
Side lobe

Side lobe

OFF

12
10
ON

8
6
4
2

0
–35 –30 –25 –20 –15 –10 –5

15 20

–30 –25 –20 –15 –10 –5

Distance from the target mark on the switch X (mm)

Operating distance Y (mm)

15 20

Distance from the target mark on the switch Z (mm)

OFF

Sensing surface

12
ON

*The movement of the arrow
direction indicates the positive
direction on the graph.

8
Z*

4
X=0, Z=0
2
Target marks

–10°C

23°C

65°C

Effect of ambient temperature (°C)

Notes:
1. The operating distance is the distance between the switch and actuator sensing surfaces.
2. Data in the diagram is typical data at an ambient temperature of 23°C. Actual operating values may vary. The
operating distance may be affected by ambient metal, magnet catches, and temperature.
3. Detection may occur other than on the detection surfaces of the switch and actuator. Before you use the switch
and actuator, refer to manual to set the detection surfaces of the switch and actuator face to face.

Sensing surface

14
OFF
12
10

Operating distance Y (mm)

D40A Detection Ranges (Typical Characteristics Data)
14

Sensing surface

12
OFF

Z
8
6

Target marks

2
0
−6

−4

−2

0
−15

−10

−5

Distance from the target mark on the switch Z (mm)

Distance from the target mark on the switch X (mm)

Notes: 1. The operating distance is the distance between the switch and actuator sensing surfaces.

2. Data in the diagram is typical data at an ambient temperature of 23°C. Actual operating values may vary.
The operating distance may be affected by ambient metal, magnet catches, and temperature.

G-70

Target marks

ON
4

www.sti.com/info

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Connections
Internal Connections
D40Z-1C□
Brown

Brown

Blue

Blue
Internal circuit

Internal circuit

D40A-1C□

White
Black
Yellow

White
Black

Yellow

Gray

G9SX-NS202-□ (Non-contact Door Switch Controller)
*1. Internal power supply circuit is not isolated.
*2. Logical AND input is isolated.
*3. Outputs S14 to S24 are internally redundant.
A1

D1 D2 D3 D4 T31 T32 T33

T41 T42

Non-contact Door Reset/Feedback
Input
Switch control

*2
Logical AND
input

G9SX-NSA222-T03-□
(Non-contact Door Switch Controller)

*1. Internal power supply circuit is not isolated.
*2. Logical AND input is isolated.
*3. Outputs S14 to S54 are internally redundant.
A1

Power
supply
circuit
*1

S14 S24

*2
Power
supply
circuit
*1

Auxiliary
output control

Safety output control

T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1 D1 D2 D3 D4 T41 T42

Safety
input 1

Safety
input 2

fault Non-contact Door
Reset/Feedback Cross
detection
Input
Switch control
input

Safety output control

Auxiliary
output control

Logical
AND input

Expansion Unit
output control

X2
A2

S14 S24 S44 S54 L1

G9SX-EX401-□/G9SX-EX041-T-□
(Expansion Unit/Expansion Unit OFF-delayed Model)
*1. Internal power supply circuit is not isolated.
*2. Relay outputs are isolated.

13 23 33 43

Exp.
sig.
IN

Safety
output
Power control
supply
Auxiliary
circuit
output
control

Exp.
sig.
OUT

K2
14 24 34 44

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-71

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

D40Z Troubleshooting
LED indicator

Causes and corrective actions *1
Power supply input may be improperly wired. Check and correct wiring of brown and blue lines.
Fault in power supply input
(brown/blue)

Power supply voltage to D40Z may be insufficient.
Check the power supply voltage (between brown and blue lines) of D40Z fills ratings.

OFF
The wiring length or size of the wire may not be to the specification.
Check the wiring length and size of the wire..
Noise or
D40Z failure
Red
continuously
blinking

Red blinks
once for 2s

Fault in power supply input
(brown/blue)

There may be excessive noise. Check and correct ambient noise environment.
There may be a failure in internal circuit. Replace with a new D40Z.
Power supply voltage to D40Z may be insufficient.
Check the power supply voltage (between brown and blue cables) of D40Z fills ratings..
The wiring length or size of the wire may not be to the specification.
Check the wiring length and size of the wire.

Fault in Non-contact door
switch output (black)

Black line may be shorted to other line.
Check and correct wiring of black line if the black line is shorted to other lines..

Sensing fault

Invalid actuator may be in a close range to switch.
Use the dedicated actuator.

Fault in Non-contact door
switch input (white)

Faulty signal may be input to white line.
Check and correct wiring of white line.

OFF state of another D40Z

Another D40Z may be in OFF state.
Check status of another D40Z connected to the white line and the wiring.

Fault in Non-contact door
switch input (white)

White line may be disconnected.
Check and correct wiring of white line..

Actuator fault

There may be a failure in actuator. Replace with a new D40Z.

Fault in Non-contact door
switch input (white)

White line connected to D1 terminal (test output terminal of G9SP) of G9SX-NS□ may be shorted
to other line. Check and correct wiring of white line connected to D1 terminal (test output terminal of
G9SP) of G9SX-NS□ if the white line is shorted to other lines.

Fault in Non-contact door
switch output (black)

Black line connected to D2 terminal (safety input terminal of G9SP) of G9SX-NS□ may be
disconnected. Check and correct wiring of black line connected to D2 terminal (safety input terminal of
G9SP) of G9SX-NS□.

G
Red blinks
twice for 2s

Red blinks
thrice for 2s

Yellow
blinking

Red
Solid-ON *2

Yellow
Solid-ON *3

*1. Another possible cause is a failure in internal circuit. In this case, replace with a new D40Z. Yet another possible cause is excessive noise. In this case,
check and correct ambient noise environment.
*2. The case where the guard door is closed (Switch detects actuator) is indicated.
*3. The case where the system stops though the guard door is closed (Switch detects actuator) is indicated.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-72

www.sti.com/info

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Wiring

(mm)

Non-contact Door Switch (Switch/Actuator)
D40Z-1C2
D40Z-1C5
Indicator
Cable diameter:
4.2 dia.

Target mark

Sensing surface

Target mark

1.5

2
12 17
Two 4.2 dia.

38
48

20 25

(7.2 dia.)

Two 7.2 dia.
16

Two 7.2 dia.

38
48

Two 4.2 dia.
16

5.5
10.5

(Actuator) (Switch)

Non-contact Door Switch and Non-contact Door Switch Controller or Safety Controller Wiring
Example of connection to G9SX-NS@ (Single connection)
D40Z-1C@

Blue

Brown

Black

White

D1 D2 D3 D4
G9SX-NS202
G9SX-NSA222

Example of connection to multiple switches
Connect up to 30 non-contact door switches.

Example of auxiliary outputs

Blue

Brown

White

Black

Blue

Black

Brown

White

Blue

Brown

Black

White

Yellow

24 VDC
COM
PLC etc.

Gray

Yellow

IN
PLC etc.

Gray

COM
24 VDC

Note:
1. The auxiliary output load current must be 10 mA max.
Wrong connection may lead to a failure of the auxiliary output circuit.
2. For details on other wiring, refer to Application Examples.

D1 D2 D3 D4
G9SX-NS202
G9SX-NSA222

Wiring of Inputs and Outputs
Signal name
Non-contact Door Switch
power supply input

Cable color
+

Brown

Blue

Description of operation
Supplies power to the D40Z.

Non-contact door switch input

White

To set non-contact door switch output in ON state,
non-contact door switch signal input must be in ON state.

Non-contact door switch output

Black

Output status depends on statuses of actuator and non-contact door switch signal input.

Yellow

Output status depends on status of actuator.
When a fault is detected, turns into OFF state regardless of actuator status.

Auxiliary monitoring output

Gray

www.sti.com/info

G-73

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Wiring (continued)

(mm)

Non-contact Door Switch (Switch/Actuator)
D40A-1C2
D40A-1C5
D40A-1C015-F
Indicator

(1.5)

2-4.2 dia.

9.5

7.2 dia.

7.2 dia.
12

7.2 dia.

Sensing
surface

(150)

6
13

(2)

2-4.2 dia.

20
25

Vinyl-insulated round cable:
Diameter 4 mm, 5-wire
(Conductor cross-sectional area: 0.2 mm2/
Insulator diameter: 1.0 mm)
Standard length: 2 m/5 m

(46) (15 dia.)
M12

Non-contact Door Switch and Non-contact Door Switch Controller Wiring
Example: Wiring a Single Switch

Example: Wiring Multiple Switches

D1 D2 D3 D4

Blue

Brown

Black

White

Blue

Brown

Black

White

Blue

Brown

Auxiliary output load *

Black

White

Blue

Yellow

Black

Brown

White

D40A-1C@

G9SX-NS202-@
G9SX-NSA222-T03-@
*The auxiliary output load current must be 10 mA max

D1 D2 D3 D4
G9SX-NS202-@
G9SX-NSA222-T03-@

Wiring of Inputs and Outputs
Signal name

Non-contact Door Switch
power supply input

Wire color
Brown
Blue

Pin No.
1
3

Non-contact Door Switch input

White

Non-contact Door Switch output

Black

Auxiliary output

Yellow

Description of operation
Supplies power to the D40A.
Connect to the D3 and D4 terminal of the G9SX-NS□.

Inputs signals from the G9SX-NS□.
The Non-contact Door Switch input must be ON as a required
condition for the Non-contact Door Switch output to be ON.
Turns ON and OFF according to actuator detection and the
status of the Non-contact Door Switch input.
Turns ON when actuator is detected.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-74

www.sti.com/info

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Wiring (continued)

(mm)

Non-contact Door Switch Controller
G9SX-NS202-□

(6) (See note 2.)

Terminal arrangement
T31 T32 T33 D3
D1 D2 X1 A1

T31 T32 T33 D3
D1 D2 X1 A1

G9SX-NS202
24VDC
PWR

AND

100 max.

ERR

PWR

AND

ERR

No.

T41 T42 X2
S14 S24 L1

A2
D4

T41 T42 X2 A2
S14 S24 L1 D4
23 max.

115 max.

(22.5) *

(6) (See note 2.)

Notes: 1. Above outline drawing is for models with spring-cage terminals (-RC).

2. For models with spring-cage terminals (-RC) only.
*Typical dimension

Non-contact Door Switch Controller
G9SX-NSA222-T03-□
(6) (See note 2.)

Terminal arrangement
T31 T32 T33 D1 D2 D3
T11 T12 Y1 X1 X2 A1

T31 T32 T33 D1
T11 T12 Y1 X1

D2
X2

D3
A1

G9SX-NSA222-T03
24VDC
PWR

0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2

AND

0.8 0.91.0
1.2
1.4
1.8
2.0
2.5
0 3.0

OFF-DELAY

100 max.

PWR

AND

ERR

No.

T21 T22
T41 T42
S14 S24 S44 S54 L1

A2
D4

T21 T22

T41 T42 A2

S14 S24 S44 S54 L1 D4
35.5 max.
(35) *

115 max.

(10)

(6) (See note 2.)

Notes: 1. Above outline drawing is for models with spring-cage terminals (-RC).

2. For models with spring-cage terminals (-RC) only.
*Typical dimension

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-75

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Wiring (continued)

(mm)

Expansion Unit
G9SX-EX401-□
Expansion Unit (OFF-delayed Model)
G9SX-EX041-T-□

Terminal arrangement
(6) (See note 2.)

100 max.

G
23 max.

115 max.

(22.5) *

(6) (See note 2.)

G9SX-EX401-@
(Expansion Unit)

G9SX-EX041-T-@
(Expansion Unit
with OFF Delay)

13 23 33 43

PWR

ERR

A1 X2 A2

14 24 34 44

Notes: 1. Above outline drawing is for models with spring-cage terminals (-RC).

2. For models with spring-cage terminals (-RC) only.
*Typical dimension

Accessories (sold separately)
Socket on One Cable End
(5-Pole Connectors)

M12
5 dia.

45°

Straight Connectors
6 dia.
14.9 dia.

XS2F-D521-DG0-A (L = 2 m)
XS2F-D521-GG0-A (L = 5 m)
XS2F-D521-JG0-A (L = 10 m)
XS2F-D521-KG0-A (L = 15 m)
XS2F-D521-LG0-A (L = 20 m)

40.7
L

Wiring Diagram
Cable lead
colors

Contact No.
2
4

5
50

Pin Arrangements
(Engagement Side)

Brown
White
Blue
Black
Gray

1
3
5

2
5
3

1
4

Socket and Plugs on Cable Ends
(5-Pole Connectors)

Straight/Straight Connectors
6 dia.
14.9 dia.

XS2W-D521-DG1-A (L = 2 m)
XS2W-D521-GG1-A (L = 5 m)
XS2W-D521-JG1-A (L = 10 m)
XS2W-D521-KG1-A (L = 15 m)
XS2W-D521-LG1-A (L = 20 m)

14.9 dia.
40.7

44.7
L

Wiring Diagram for 5 Cores
Contact No.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

1
2
3
4
5

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-76

www.sti.com/info

Cable lead
colors
1
Brown
2
White
3
Blue
4
Black
5
Gray

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Application Examples
G9SP-N20S (24 VDC)
(2-channel Emergency Stop Switch Inputs + Non-contact Door Switch/Manual Reset)

S1: Emergency Stop Switch
S2: Non-contact Door Switch (D40Z)
S3: Reset Switch
KM1, KM2: Contactor
M1: 3-phase motor

Notes:
1. The PL and category that correspond to this circuit example vary depending on the program configured to the G9SP-N20S.
For details, refer to the G9SP Series User’s Manual.
2. For details on terminal arrangement, refer to G9SP Series User’s Manual.
3. Wire auxiliary outputs correctly. Incorrect wiring may lead to a failure of the auxiliary output circuit.

G9SX-NSA222-T03-□ (24 VDC)
(2-channel Emergency Stop Switch Inputs + Non-contact Door Switch/Manual Reset)

Timing Chart

Emergency stop
switch operation

Emergency stop switch S1
D40Z
Reset switch S3
KM1, KM2 N.C. contact
KM1, KM2 N.O. contact

S1: Emergency Stop Switch
S2: Non-contact Door Switch (D40Z)
S3: Reset Switch
KM1, KM2: Contactor
M1: 3-phase motor

Operation command
Rotation of motor
OFF-delay time

Notes: 1. This example corresponds to category 4.

2. For details, contact factory.

www.sti.com/info

OFF-delay time

G-77

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Application Examples (continued)
G9SX-BC202 (24 VDC) (2-channel Emergency Stop Switch Inputs/Manual Reset) +
G9SX-NS202-□ (24 VDC) (Non-contact Door Switch/Auto Reset)

S1: Emergency Stop Switch
S2: Reset switch
KM1, KM2: Contactor
M1: 3-phase motor
S3: Non-contact Door Switch (D40Z)
KM3, KM4: Contactor
M2: 3-phase motor

Timing Chart

G9SX-BC202 (Upper unit)
Emergency stop switch S1
Reset switch S2
KM1, KM2 N.C. contact
KM1, KM2 N.O. contact
Logical AND output L1
Rotation of motor M1
G9SX-NS202-@(Lower unit)
Logical AND input T41
D40Z
KM3, KM4 N.C. contact
KM3, KM4 N.O. contact
Rotation of motor M2

Notes: 1. This example corresponds to category 4.

2. For details, contact factory.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-78

www.sti.com/info

Emergency stop
switch operation

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering
Model Number Structure
D40Z
Non-Contact Door Switch
(Switch/Actuator)

D40A
Non-Contact Door Switch
(Switch/Actuator)

D40Z – □ □ □

D40A – □ □ □

G9SX – □ □ □ □ – □ □

1 2 3

1 Type

1 2 3

1 Type

1: Standard model (Switch/Actuator)

2 Auxiliary Outputs
C: 1 NO (Photocoupler output)

3 Cable Length
2: 2 m
5: 5 m

1: Standard model

2 Auxiliary Outputs
C: 1NO (PNP transistor output)

3 Cable Length
2: 2 m
5: 5 m
015-F: connector (cable length 0.15 m)

G9SX
Non-Contact Door Switch
Controller

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Functions
NS/NSA: D40A Controller
Expansion Unit
EX:

2 Output Configuration (Instantaneous
Safety Outputs)
2: 2 outputs
4: 4 outputs

3 Output Configuration (OFF-delayed
Safety Outputs)
0: None
2: 2 outputs

Note: Must be used in combination with a G9SP
Safety Controller
or G9SX-NS□ Non-Contact Door Switch
Controller.

4 Output Configuration (Auxiliary
Outputs)
1: 1 output
2: 2 outputs

5 Max. OFF-delay Time
D40A Controller

T03: 3 s (variable)
Expansion Unit

Blank: No OFF delay

T: OFF delay
information on the G9SP Safety Controller,
✎ For
see page K-18.

6 Terminal Block Type
RT: Screw terminals
RC: Spring-cage terminal

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-79

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
List of Models
D40Z Non-Contact Door Switches (Switch/Actuator)*1
Classification

Appearance

Auxiliary outputs

Standard models

Cable length

Model

D40Z-1C2

D40Z-1C5

---

D40Z-1C2-S

---

D40Z-1C5-S

---

Photocoupler outputs *2

Switch only

Actuator only

D40Z-1CA

Note: Must be used in combination with a G9SP Safety Controller or a G9SX-NS□ Non-contact Door Switch Contact Controller.

G
D40A Non-Contact Door Switches (Switch/Actuator)*3
Classification

Appearance

Auxiliary outputs

Cable length

Model

D40A-1C2

D40A-1C5

Standard models *4

Semiconductor outputs *5

Connector model

0.15 m

D40A-1C015-F

Note: Must be used in combination with a G9SX-NS□ Non-contact Door Switch Controller or a G9SP safety controller.

Cable with Connector
Connector Type

Single End

Cable Length

Model

Packing
Unit

Cable Length

Model

Packing
Unit

XS2F-D521-DG0-A

XS2W-D521-DG1-A

XS2F-D521-GG0-A

XS2W-D521-GG1-A

10 m

XS2F-D521-JG0-A

10 m

XS2W-D521-JG1-A

15 m

XS2F-D521-KG0-A

15 m

XS2W-D521-KG1-A

20 m

XS2F-D521-LG0-A

20 m

XS2W-D521-LG1-A

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-80

www.sti.com/info

Connector Type

Double End

D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
List of Models (continued)
G9SX-NS□ Series
Safety outputs *6
Instantaneous

2
(Semiconductors)

OFFdelayed *7
0
2
(Semiconductors)

Logical
Logical
Auxiliary
OFF-delayed
AND
AND
monitoring
Max. OFF-delay
connection connection
output *8
time *9
input
output

2
(Semiconductors)

Rated
voltage

--1

24 VDC
3.0 s

Terminal block type

Model

Screw terminals

G9SX-NS202-RT

Spring-cage terminals

G9SX-NS202-RC

Screw terminals

G9SX-NSA222-T03-RT

Spring-cage terminals

G9SX-NSA222-T03-RC

Terminal block type

Model

G9SX-EX Expansion Units
Safety outputs
Instantaneous

OFF-delayed

4PST-NO

---

4PST-NO

Auxiliary
outputs

OFF-delay time

1
(Semiconductor)
*8

Rated
voltage

--24 VDC
*10

Screw terminals

G9SX-EX401-RT

Spring-cage terminals

G9SX-EX401-RC

Screw terminals

G9SX-EX041-T-RT

Spring-cage terminals

G9SX-EX041-T-RC

G9SP Series
No. of I/O Points
Name

Safety Controller

Safety
Inputs

Test
Outputs

Safety Outputs

Standard
Outputs

Semiconductor outputs: 4

Semiconductor outputs: 16

—

Semiconductor outputs: 8

—

*1. Must be used in combination with a G9SP Safety Controller or a
G9SX-NS□ Non-contact Door Switch Contact Controller.
*2. Photocoupler output. Load current: 10 mA
*3. Must be used in combination with a G9SX-NS□ Non-contact Door
Switch Controller.
*4. Contact factory for the connector models.

Unit
Version

Model
G9SP-N10S

Ver. 1.0

G9SP-N10D
G9SP-N20S

*5. PNP open-collector semiconductor output.
*6. P channel MOS FET transitor output.
*7. The OFF-delayed output becomes an instantaneous output by setting
the OFF-delay time to 0 s.
*8. PNP transistor output
*9. The OFF-delay time can be set in 16 steps as follows: 0/0.2/0.3/0.4/0.5/
0.6/0.7/0.8/0.9/1.0/1.2/1.4/1.8/2.0/2.5/3.0 s
*10. The OFF-delay time is synchronized to the OFF-delay time setting in the
connected Controller (G9SX-NSA222-T03-□).

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-81

Safety Interlock Switches

MA Series

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Magnetically Actuated
Safety Interlock Switches
• Large selection—choose from a large selection of contact configurations
housed in plastic to satisfy most application requirements
• NEMA 6 enclosure enables the MA Series switches to satisfy most
application requirements (MA 3, 4, 5 are NEMA 4)
• Misalignment tolerant—the non-contact actuation of the switches makes
them very tolerant to misalignment of up to 10 mm (0.39 in.)
• Variety of terminations—select various cable lengths or terminal strip
termination for easy installation. Cable connector on selected models.
• Long life—the MA Series is designed for a minimum of one million actuations
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
G

Electrical
Safety Contacts:

Conforms to EN1088, EN292, EN60204-1
UL and C-UL listed

All Models Unless Indicated
AC models
DC models

Safety Contact Operating Distance:
Auxiliary Contacts:

MA-1 thru 5, 10, 12, 13, 16 — 1 N/C
MA-13, 16, 21 — 2 N/C
MA-12, 13, 14, 16 — 1 N/C
MA-13, 15, 16, 20, 21 — 2 N/C
Make 7-12 mm (0.28-0.47in.); Break 12-25 mm (0.47-0.98 in.)
1 N/O
1 N/C
Make 8-13 mm (0.39-0.51 in.); Break 8-10 mm (0.31-0.39 in.)
Make 21 mm (0.83 in.); Break 24 mm (0.94 in.)
230 VAC
110 VAC
30 VDC
2 A, fuse externally 1.6 A quick acting
3 A, fuse externally 2.5 A quick acting
1 A, fuse externally 800 mA quick acting
0.3 A max., fuse externally 0.2 A quick acting
2 A fast acting
1 A fast acting
1.6 A fast acting
0.8 A fast acting
1 x 106
Safety
Aux.
3.0 mS
0.5 mS
2.1 mS
0.3 mS
0.7 mS
0.7 mS
10 G
10 G
10 G, 50 to 100 Hz

MA-2, 4, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21
MA-3
Aux. Contact Operating Distance:
MA-2, 4, 16, 21
MA-3
Safety Rated Voltage:
AC models: All except MA-10
AC models: MA-10
DC models
Safety Rated Current:
AC models: All except MA-3
AC model: MA-3
DC models: All except MA-15
DC model: MA-15
Internal Fuse:
AC models
DC models
External Fuse (Customer Supplied): AC models
DC models: All except MA-15
Electrical Life:
Mechanical—Special Safety Reed
Closing Time:
Drop-Out Time:
Bounce Time:
Shock:
Vibration:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Any position
Case & Actuator Material:
Molded ABS
Wiring Connection:
Various lengths or male M12 micro connector
Weight:
Approx. 384 g (14 oz.)
Color:
Red
Mechanical Life:
10 x 106
Environmental
Protection:
All models except MA-3, 4, 5
IP67 (NEMA 6)
MA-3, 4, 5
IP65 (NEMA 4)
Operating Temperature:
All models except MA-3, 4, 5
-10 to 55°C (14 to 131°F)
MA-3, 4, 5
-10 to 65°C (14 to 149°F)
Compliance
Standards:
EN1088, EN292, EN60204-1
Approvals/Listings:
CE marked for all applicable directives
All models: except MA-3, 4, 5
UL and C-UL
MA-3, 4, 5
cCSAus
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Note: The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place, and the machine able to be started.

G-82

www.sti.com/info

MA Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Basic Body Styles
MA-1, MA-2, MA-20 and MA-21

MA-10 and MA-16

MA-12 and MA-13

MA-14 and MA-15

MA-3, MA-4 and Door
MA-5Closed, Machine RUN

2mm
SLIDING DOOR

Operation
Operating Principle

2mm

Mounting Examples

Door Closed, Machine RUN

✘

✔

Door 2mm
Closed, Machine RUN
SLIDING DOOR

Min 50mm

2mm

2mmSLIDING DOOR

✔

Switch

2mm

Actuator

✔

Door 1

Switch
Actuator

Door 1

Switch
Actuator
Door 1

MA-1, 5, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14, 16

✘

Min 50mm
Door

Switch
Actuator

Encapsulated in the MA Series
is a unique high-power industrial
reed which is de-rated by a
non-resetable overload protection
circuit depending on switch type.
On presenting the actuator to the
switch, the high intensity magnetic
field from the actuator causes the
contacts to close. On removing the
actuator (opening the door), the
safety contacts open, isolating the
machine.

Contact Arrangement

Switch

Min 50mm

MA-2, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16

Actuator
Door 2

Switch
Actuator

MA-3, 11, 13, 16, 20

Door 2

It is advisable, where possible, to
mount the switch and actuator on
non-ferrous materials otherwise it
may affect the operating distances.

Door Closed, Machine RUN
Door Closed, Machine RUN

2mm
SLIDING DOOR

MA-11, 13, 15, 16, 21

Door Open, Machine STOP, Door Covering Switch
Door Open, Machine STOP, Door Covering Switch

No access to switch
Noattempts
access to switch
thus preventing
thusinterlock
preventing attempts
to defeat the
to defeat the interlock

SLIDING DOOR

Wherever possible the units should be mounted so that no access can be obtained to the switch when
Doorthus
Closed,
Machine RUN
Door
Open, Machine STOP, Door Covering Switch
the guard door is open,
preventing
attempts to defeat the safety
system.
2mm

SLIDING DOOR
Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

No access to switch
thus preventing attempts
to defeat the interlock

SLIDING DOOR

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-83

MA Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Applications
Typical Application of MA Series with a Safety Monitoring Relay

Typical applications are on
sliding guard doors or swinging guard doors.

24 VAC/DC, 110 VAC
K1 (AUX)
START

L1 L2 L3

K2 (AUX)

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

L1 L2 L3

STOP

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

S21

MA SERIES
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

K2
CONTACT PROTECTION e.g. THERMAL CUT OUT

BROWN

SR101A

EB SERIES

LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

FUSE

FUSE
K1

CONTACT PROTECTION e.g. THERMAL CUT OUT

BLUE

Relay control and
fault monitoring

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

FUSE

GUARD
CLOSED

S11

a full explanation of the circuit operating principle and fault detection,
✎ For
see “Common Circuit Examples” in the Expert Area Section of this catalog on page A-31

Pin Assignments with Connector Option
1

6-pin Micro AC 1/2”-20
3

5
6

Safety N.C.

MA 21 QD

Aux N.O.

MA 2 QD

MA 20 QD

4-pin Micro DC M12
2
MA 2, 16, 20 QD
Safety N.C.

1
3

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

G-84

MA 16 QD

Safety N.C.

www.sti.com/info

Aux
MA 2 QD N.O.
MA 20 QD N.C.

MA Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions

(mm/in.)
MA-10

MA-1, 2, 20, 21
30.3
1.19
19.5
0.77

30.3
1.19
19.5
0.77

16.0
0.63
4.0
0.16

19
0.75
7
0.28

16.0
0.63
4.0
0.16

54
2.13

84
3.31

76.3
3.00

60.0
2.36

46
1.81

76.3
3.00

60.0
2.36

6
0.24
19
0.75

8.15
0.32

4.4
0.17
SWITCH

MA-11

17
0.67

7.5
0.29

16
0.63

4
0.16

73
2.87

4
11 0.16
0.43
19
0.75

4
0.16

82
3.23

73
2.87

=
= =

4.5
0.18

ACTUATOR

52
2.05

MA-14, 15

5
0.2

4.5
0.18

7
0.28

4.5
0.18

46
0.81

SWITCH

4.4
0.17
ACTUATOR

4.5
0.18

12
0.47

19
0.75

7
0.28

22
0.87

28
1.10
63
2.48

87
3.43

78
3.07

Ø8.1
0.32

24
0.94

MA-12

24
0.94
ACTUATOR

4.5
0.18

17
0.67

14
0.55

3
0.12

SIDE VIEW

MA-13

18
0.71

24
0.94

27
1.06
80
3.15

30
1.18

36
1.42

42
1.65
18
0.71

80
3.15

MA-16
19.0
0.75

11.0
0.43

30
1.18

57
2.24

17.0
0.67

54.0
2.13

45
1.77
SWITCH

SWITCH

6.4
0.25

Ø4.2
0.165

16.5
0.65

SWITCH

4.5
0.18

ACTUATOR

SWITCH

ACTUATOR

19.0
0.75

82.5
3.25

19.0
0.75

73.0
2.87

82.5
3.25

7.2
0.28

ACTUATOR

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-85

MA Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering
Model
AC Only
MA-1APC2 (AC only)
MA-1APC4 (AC only)
MA-1APC8 (AC only)
MA-1APCC (AC only)
MA-2APC2 (AC only)
MA-2APC4 (AC only)
MA-2APC6 (AC only)
MA-2APC10 (AC only)
MA-2APC15 (AC only)
MA-2APCC (AC only)
MA-3APTC (AC only)
MA-4APTC (AC only)
MA-5APTC (AC only)
MA-10APC2 (110 VAC, 3A max)
MA-10APC4 (110 VAC, 3A max)
MA-11AP10C3
MA-11AP11C3
MA-11AP11C10
MA-11AP20C3
MA-11AP21C3
MA-12AP10C3
MA-12AP11C3
MA-13AP10C3
MA-13AP11C3
MA-13AP20C3
MA-13AP21C3
MA-16AP10C3 (AC only)
MA-16AP10C6 (AC only)
MA16AP10C10 (AC only)
MA16AP10CC
MA-16AP11C3 (AC only)
MA-16AP11C6 (AC only)
MA-16AP20C3 (AC only)
MA-16AP20C6 (AC only)
MA-16AP21C3 (AC only)
MA-16AP21C6 (AC only)
MA-20APC4 (AC only)
MA-20APCC (AC only)
MA-21APC2 (AC only)
MA-21APC4 (AC only)
MA-21APC6 (AC only)
MA-21APC10 (AC only)
MA-21APC15
MA-21APCC

Contacts

Wiring Entry

Part No.

1 N/C
1 N/C
1 N/C
1 N/C
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/C
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C
1 N/C
1 N/C
1 N/C
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C
1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C
1 N/C
1 N/C
1 N/C
1 N/C + 1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C
2 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C
2 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N//C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O

2 m cable, pre-wired
4 m cable, pre-wired
8 m cable, pre-wired
4 pin micro DC M12
2 m cable, pre-wired
4 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
10 m cable, pre-wired
15 m cable, pre-wired
4-pin micro DC M12
Terminal connections
Terminal connections
Terminal connections
2 m cable, pre-wired
4 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
10 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
10 m cable, pre-wired
4-pin micro DC M12
3 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
4 m cable, pre-wired
4-pin micro DC M12
2 m cable, pre-wired
4 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
10 m cable, pre-wired
15 m cable, pre-wired
6-pin micro DC M12

44507-0010
44507-0020
44507-0180
44507-0619
44507-0030
44507-0040
44507-0150
44507-0750
44507-0740
44507-0600
44507-0050
44507-0060
44507-0070
44507-0110
44507-0330
44507-1150
44507-1160
44507-1161
44507-1170
44507-1180
44507-1250
44507-1260
44507-1350
44507-1360
44507-1370
44507-1380
44507-1650
44507-1651
44507-1659
44507-1652
44507-1660
44507-1661
44507-1670
44507-1671
44507-1680
44507-1681
44507-0345
44507-0640
44507-0160
44507-0260
44507-0250
44507-0170
44507-0175
44507-0660
(Continued on next page)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

G-86

www.sti.com/info

MA Series

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
Model
Contacts
DC Only
MA-1DPC2
1 N/C
MA-1DPC4
1 N/C
MA-1DPC8
1 N/C
MA-1DPCC
1 N/C
MA-2DPC2
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-2DPC4
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-2DPC6
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-2DPC10
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-2DPC15
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-2DPCC
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-11DP10C3
1 N/C
MA-11DP11C3
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-11DP20C3
2 N/C
MA-11DP20C5
2 N/C
MA-11DP21C3
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-12DP10C3
1 N/C
MA-12DP11C3
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-13DP10C3
1 N/C
MA-13DP11C3
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-13DP20C3
2 N/C
MA-13DP21C3
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-13DP21C10
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-14DP10C3
1 N/C
MA-14DP11C3
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-15DP21C3*
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-15DP21C5*
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-15DP21CC*
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-16DP10C3 (DC only)
1 N/C
MA-16DP10C6 (DC only)
1 N/C
MA16DP10C10 (DC only)
1 N/C
MA16DP10CC (DC only)
1 N/C
MA-16DP11C3 (DC only)
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-16DP11C6 (DC only)
1 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-16DP20C3 (DC only)
2 N/C
MA-16DP20C6 (DC only)
2 N/C
MA-16DP21C3 (DC only)
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-16DP21C6 (DC only)
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-20DPC4 (24 VDC only)
2 N/C
MA-20DPCC (24 VDC only)
2 N/C
MA-21DPC2 (24 VDC only)
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-21DPC4 (24 VDC only)
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-21DPC6 (24 VDC only)
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-21DPC10 (24 VDC only)
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-21DPC15 (24 VDC only)
2 N/C + 1 N/O
MA-21DPCC
2 N/C + 1 N/O
Accessories
Spare Actuator (1–5 & 20, 21), Red ABS Plastic
Replacement Actuator for MA-11, Red ABS Plastic
Replacement Actuator for MA-12, Red ABS Plastic
Replacement Actuator for MA-13, Red ABS Plastic
Replacement Actuator for MA-14, Red ABS Plastic
Replacement Actuator for MA-15, Red ABS Plastic
Replacement Actuator for MA-16, -10 Red ABS Plastic
*MA-15 switches are not compatible with the following STI safety relays: SR203M,
SR203AM, SR208AD, SR209AD and all Legacy Relays.

Wiring Entry

Part No.

2 m cable, pre-wired
4 m cable, pre-wired
8 m cable, pre-wird
4p-pin micro DC M12
2 m cable, pre-wired
4 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
10 m cable, pre-wired
15 m cable, pre-wired
4-pin micro DC M12
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
5 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
10 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired (300 mA max.)
5 m cable, pre-wired (300 mA max.)
6-pin micro DC M12
3 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
10 m cable, pre-wired
4-pin micro DC M12
3 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
3 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
4 m cable, pre-wired
4-pin micro DC M12
2 m cable, pre-wired
4 m cable, pre-wired
6 m cable, pre-wired
10 m cable, pre-wired
15 m cable, pre-wired
6-pin micro DC M12

44507-0022
44507-0024
44507-0028
44507-0629
44507-0392
44507-0390
44507-0396
44507-0380
44507-0370
44507-0650
44507-1110
44507-1120
44507-1130
44507-1131
44507-1140
44507-1210
44507-1220
44507-1310
44507-1320
44507-1330
44507-1340
44507-1341
44507-1410
44507-1420
44507-1540
44507-1541
44507-1549
44507-1610
44507-1611
44507-1612
44507-1619
44507-1620
44507-1621
44507-1630
44507-1631
44507-1640
44507-1641
44507-0340
44507-0630
44507-0270
44507-0280
44507-0290
44507-0350
44507-0360
44507-0670

44507-0700
44507-0711
44507-0712
44507-0713
44507-0714
44507-0715
44507-0716

Mounting Brackets can be used with
✎ Universal
this product. See page G-123 for details.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..
details.

www.sti.com/info

G-87

Safety Interlock Switches

MA-S Series

MA-S

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Stainless Steel Magnetically Actuated
Safety Interlock Switches and Actuators
• Stainless steel cases—both switch and actuator are housed in stainless steel
for applications that require the use of this robust and corrosion resistant
material
• Large selection—choose from a variety of contact configurations housed in
stainless steel to satisfy the most demanding applications
• NEMA 6 enclosure enables the MA-S Series switches to satisfy most application requirements
• Misalignment tolerant—the non-contact actuation of the MA-S Series switches
makes them very tolerant to misalignment of up to 10 mm (0.39 in.)
• High temperature—the MA-S switches and cables are designed to operate in
temperatures up to 125°C (257°F)
• Long life—the MA-S Series safety interlock switches are designed for a
minimum of one million actuations
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

Safety Interlock Switches

MFS

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Magnetic Ferroresonant StandAlone Safety Interlock Switch
• Tamper resistant—the combination of magnetic and ferroresonant
signals required to close the safety contacts makes the MFS very
tamper resistant
• Stand-alone—use for lower risk applications as a stand-alone
safety switch allowing direct switching of relays and contactors up
to 2 A at 230 VAC
• MFS-11 provides a visible LED which illuminates green when the
actuator is in range and contacts are closed
• MFS-12 provides a dual color LED indicator. The LED illuminates
green when the actuator is in range and the contacts are closed.
The LED illuminates Red when the actuator is out of range and
contacts are open.
• Compact size—mounts easily on 1-in. square tubing
• Use with safety monitoring relays in applications requiring a higher
level of safety reliability
• NEMA 4 enclosure enables water washdown cleaning
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-88

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

D4B-□N

D4BN

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Limit Switch
• Snap-action contact with certified direct opening operation.
• Direct opening mechanism (NC contacts only) added to enable opening
contacts when faults occur, such as fused contacts.
• Safety of lever settings ensured using a mechanism that engages a gear
between the operating position indicator plate and the lever.
• Equipped with a mechanism that indicates the applicable operating zone,
as well as push-button switching to control left and right motion.
• Head seal structure strengthened to improve seal properties (TÜV: IEC IP67,
UL: NEMA 3, 4, 4X, 6P, and 13).
• Wide standard operating temperature range: –40 to 80°C.
• Models with gold-plated contacts to enable handling microloads.
• Certified standards: UL, CSA, EN (TÜV), and CCC.

Safety Interlock Switches

D4F

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Small Safety Limit Switch
• Smallest class of safety limit switches
• Extra small limit switch with a direct opening mechanism (fourcontact model)
• High-sensitivity safety limit switch
• Four contacts in either 2NC + 2NO or 4NC versions
• Degree of protection: IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
• Certified standards: UL, EN (TÜV), and CC
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-89

Safety Interlock Switches

D4N

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Limit Switch
• Upgraded safety limit switches based on the popular D4D,
providing a full lineup conforming to international standards
• Lineup includes three contact models with 2NC/1NO and
3NC contact forms in addition to the previous contact forms
1NC/1NO, and 2NC. Models with MBB contacts are also
available.
• M12-connector models are available, saving on labor and
simplifying replacement
• Standardized gold-clad contacts provide high contact reliability.
Can be used with both standard loads and microloads.
• Conforms to EN115, EN81-1, and EN81-2 (slow-action models
only)
• Lineup includes both slow-action and snap-action models with
Zb contacts
• Certified standards: UL, EN (TÜV), and CCC

Specifications
Standards and EC Directives

Certified Standard Ratings

Conforms to the following EC Directives:
• Machinery Directive
• Low Voltage Directive
• EN50047
• EN60204-1
• EN1088
• GS-ET-15

TÜV (EN 60947-5-1), CCC (GB14048.5)

Certified Standards

UL/CSA (UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14)

Item

AC-15

DC-13

Rated operating current (Ie)

Utilization category

0.27 A

Rated operating voltage (Ue)

240 V

250 V

Note: Use a 10 A fuse type gI or gG that conforms to IEC 60269 as a shortcircuit protection device. This fuse is not built into the Switch.

Certification
body

Standard

File No.

TÜV SÜD

EN 60947-5-1
(certified direct opening)

Consult your
representative for
details.

UL *1

UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14

E76675

CQC (CCC) *2

GB14048.5

2004010305105973

C300

Rated
voltage
120 VAC
240 VAC

10 A

Current (A)
Make

Break

Volt-amperes (VA)
Make

Break

7,200

720

Q300

*1. Certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 is authorized by the UL mark.
*2. Only certain models have been certified.

Rated
voltage
125 VDC
250 VDC

G-90

Carry
current

www.sti.com/info

Carry
current
2.5 A

Current (A)
Make

Break

0.55

0.27

Volt-amperes (VA)
Make

Break

D4N

Safety Interlock Switches

Connections
Contact Form
Model

D4N-□1□

Contact

1NC/1NO
(Snap-action)

Contact form

2NC
(Snap-action)

1NC/1NO
(Slow-action)

D4N-□B□

2NC
(Slow-action)

Remarks

ON
Stroke

11-12
31-32

11-12
33-34

ON
Stroke

11-12
31-32

D4N-□C□

2NC/1NO
(Slow-action)

D4N-□D□

3NC
(Slow-action)

D4N-□E□

1NC/1NO MBB*
(Slow-action)

ON
Stroke

11-12
21-22
31-32

ON
Stroke

D4N-□F□

2NC/1NO MBB*
(Slow-action)

11-12
21-22
33-34

ON
Stroke

Only NC contacts 11-12 and
31-32 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 11-12 and 31-32
can be used as unlike poles.

Only NC contacts 11-12 and
21-22 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 11-12, 21-22, and
33-34 can be used as unlike
poles.
Only NC contacts 11-12, 21-22,
and 31-32 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.

Only NC contacts 11-12 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.
The terminals 11-12 and 33-34
can be used as unlike poles.

Zb
11

Only NC contacts 11-12 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

The terminals 11-12, 21-22, and
31-32 can be used as unlike
poles.

Stroke

11-12
33-34

Only NC contacts 11-12 and
31-32 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 11-12 and 31-32
can be used as unlike poles.

The terminals 11-12 and 33-34
can be used as unlike poles.

Stroke

11-12
21-22
33-34

Only NC contacts 31-32 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.
The terminals 13-14 and 31-32
can be used as unlike poles.

Stroke

D4N-□A□

13-14
31-32

D4N-□2□

Operating pattern

Only NC contacts 11-12 and
21-22 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 11-12, 21-22 and
33-34 can be used as unlike poles.

Terminals are numbered according to EN50013 and the contact forms are according to IEC947-5-1.
*MBB (Make Before Break) contacts have an overlapping structure, so that before the normally closed contact (NC) opens, the normally open contact
(NO) closes.

www.sti.com/info

G-91

D4N

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions

(mm)

Switches
1-conduit Models

Roller Lever (Resin Lever, Resin Roller)
D4N-1 20
D4N-2 20
D4N-4 20
D4N-9 20 *
47

Roller Lever (Metal Lever, Resin Roller)
D4N-1 22
D4N-2 22
D4N-4 22
D4N-9 22 *
45±

±1

17.5 dia. × 6.8
resin roller

20±0.1
22±0.1

22±0.2
31 max.

2.5
55

20±0.1
22±0.1

11±0.2

(31.5)
11±0.2

26R

Metal lever

20.5 × 20.5
27.5

9±0.2
2.5

21.5
55

47±0.2

20±0.1
22±0.1

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

Conduit cap

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

39±1

20.5 × 20.5

22±0.2
31 max.

Plunger
D4N-1 31
D4N-4 31

(31)

27.5

47±0.2

14.2
30

Conduit cap

17 dia. × 6
Bearing roller

9±0.2
2.5

22±0.2
31 max.

45±1
39.5±1

26R

Metal lever

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

Roller Lever (Metal Lever, Bearing Roller)
D4N-1 26
D4N-2 26
D4N-4 26
D4N-9 26 *
43.6±

Roller Lever (Metal Lever, Metal Roller)
D4N-1 25
D4N-2 25
D4N-4 25
D4N-9 25 *
17.5 dia. × 7
sintered stainless
steel roller

21.5

20±0.1
22±0.1

47±0.2

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

14.2
30

Conduit cap

20.5 × 20.5

9±0.2

21.5

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

11±0.2

27.5

9±0.2

(31)

26R

Metal lever

27.5
2.5

11±0.2

20.5 × 20.5

47±0.2

39.5±1

17.5 dia. × 6.8
resin roller

(27)

26R

Resin lever

40±1

14.2
30

21.5

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

22±0.2
31 max.

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

Conduit cap

14.2
30

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

Roller Plunger
D4N-1 32
D4N-2 32
D4N-4 32
D4N-9 32 *

D4N-2 31
D4N-9 31 *

25±0.1

Two, 3±0.05 dia.
holes
12 dia.
6-dia. resin
plunger
OP

47±0.2

25.2
2.5

20±0.1
22±0.1

22±0.2
31 max.

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

Conduit cap

14.2
30

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

Note: Each dimension has a tolerance of 0.4 mm unless otherwise specified.

G-92

(31.5)
21.5
11±0.2

9±0.2

9±0.2
2.5

20.5 × 20.5
9.5 dia. × 5
resin roller

(31.5)
21.5
11±0.2

www.sti.com/info

47±0.2

20±0.1
22±0.1

22±0.2
31 max.

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

Conduit cap

14.2
30

dia. holes
Two, 4+0.15
0
Depth: 5

D4N

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions (continued)

(mm)

Switches
1-conduit Models

One-way Roller Arm Lever
(Horizontal)
D4N-1 62
D4N-2 62
D4N-4 62
D4N-9 62 *

One-way Roller Arm Lever
(Vertical)
D4N-1 72
D4N-2 72
D4N-4 72
D4N-9 72 *

Operating direction

(31.5)
21.5
11±0.2

14.8

12.5 dia. × 5
resin roller

11±0.2
13.5
OP

11±0.2

10.2

2.5

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

22±0.2
31 max.

2.5

55
47±0.2

47±0.2

Conduit cap

14.2
30

17.5 dia. × 6.8
resin roller
20 to 66R

10.2

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes
Operating
direction

22±0.2
31 max.

Conduit cap

14.2
30

+0.15
0

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

Two, 4
dia. holes
Depth: 5

Adjustable Roller Lever, Form Lock
(with Metal Lever, Rubber Roller)
D4N-1 2H
D4N-2 2H
D4N-4 2H
D4N-9 2H *

45±1
39.5±1
(31)
11±0.2

20.5 × 20.5

50 dia. × 8
rubber roller

Bearing

48.2±1
41.3±1
(29.2)

27.5
9±0.2

32 to 66R

21.5

2.5
55

20±0.1
22±0.1

Adjustable Roller Lever, Form Lock
(with Metal Lever, Resin Roller)
D4N-1 2G
D4N-2 2G
D4N-4 2G
D4N-9 2G *

(31.5)
21.5
11±0.2

19.5±0.2

9±0.2

9±0.2
20±0.1
22±0.1

12 dia. × 5
resin roller
19R 14.7

20R

23.3 19.5±0.2

OP
12

47±0.2
20±0.1
22±0.1

20.5 × 20.5

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

27.5
9±0.2

21.5

2.5
22±0.2
31 max.

Conduit cap

11±0.2

14.2
Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
30

Depth: 5

47±0.2

20±0.1
22±0.1

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes
Stainless steel
lever

22±0.2
31 max.

Conduit cap

14.2
30

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

Note: Each dimension has a tolerance of 0.4 mm unless otherwise specified.

www.sti.com/info

G-93

D4N

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions (continued)

(mm)

Switches
2-conduit Models

Roller Lever (Resin Lever, Resin Roller)
D4N-5@20
17.5 dia. × 6.8
D4N-6@20
resin roller
D4N-8@20
26R

(27)
11±0.2

Resin lever

20.5 × 20.5

5.4

2.5
20±0.1
22±0.1
40±0.1
42±0.1

25 dia.

20.5

Plunger
D4N-5@31
D4N-6@31
D4N-8@31

(3)

2.15±0.05R
mounting
holes
Conduit cap

14.2
30

(31.5)
21.5
11±0.2

Two, 3±0.05
dia. holes

6-dia. resin plunger
OP

5.4

Conduit cap

Cap

42±0.2
56 max.

(3)

14.2
30

(31.5)
21.5
11±0.2

9.5 dia. × 5
resin roller
2.5
9±0.2

39±0.2
25 dia.

42±0.2
56 max.

20.5

39±0.2
25 dia.

20.5 × 20.5

5.4

9±0.2

2.15±0.05R
mounting
holes

20±0.1
22±0.1
40±0.1
42±0.1

OP 25.2

2.5
20±0.1
22±0.1
40±0.1
42±0.1

27.5
21.5

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

Roller Plunger
D4N-5@32
D4N-6@32
D4N-8@32

25±0.1

2.5
9±0.2

Cap

12 dia.

11±0.2

20.5 × 20.5

5.4

dia. holes
Two, 4+0.15
0
Depth: 5

20.5

2.15±0.05R
mounting
holes

Cap

Conduit cap

(3)

20±0.1
22±0.1
40±0.1
42±0.1

20.5

39±0.2
25 dia.

Cap
42±0.2
56 max.

(3)

14.2
30

dia. holes
Two, 4+0.15
0
Depth: 5

+0.15
0

Two, 4
dia. holes
Depth: 5

One-way Roller Arm Lever
Operating direction
(Horizontal)
14.8
D4N-5@62
12 dia. x 5
D4N-6@62
11±0.2
resin roller
D4N-8@62
OP

13.5

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

One-way Roller Arm Lever
(Vertical)
D4N-5@72
D4N-6@72
OP
12
D4N-8@72
11±0.2

(31.5)
21.5
11±0.2

20R

23.3
5.4
19.5±0.2

10.2
2.5

25 dia.

14.2
30

Note: Each dimension has a tolerance of 0.4 mm unless otherwise specified.

www.sti.com/info

21.5
11±0.2

14.7

2.5

10.2

19.5±0.2

21.5

9±0.2

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

G-94

5.4

Cap
(3)

12 dia. × 5
resin roller

20.5

39±0.2

Conduit cap
42±0.2
56 max.

(31.5)

19R
21.5

9±0.2
20±0.1
22±0.1
40±0.1
42±0.1

(31)

27.5

39±0.2

42±0.2
56 max.

45±1
39.5±1

26R

Metal lever

21.5

9±0.2

2.15±0.05R
mounting
holes
Conduit
cap

Roller Lever (Metal Lever, Resin Roller)
D4N-5@22
D4N-6@22
17.5 dia. × 6.8
D4N-8@22
resin roller

47±1
40±1

2.15±0.05R
mounting
holes
Conduit cap

20±0.1
22±0.1
40±0.1
42±0.1

20.5

39±0.2
25 dia.

Cap
42±0.2
56 max.

(3)

Operating
direction

14.2
30

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

D4N

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions (continued)

(mm)

Switches
2-conduit Models

Adjustable Roller Lever, Form Lock
(with Metal Lever, Resin Roller)
D4N-6@2G
17.5 dia. × 6.8
resin roller
D4N-8@2G
Resin lever
2.15±0.05R
mounting holes
18

Adjustable Roller Lever, Form Lock
(with Metal Lever, Rubber Roller)
D4N-6@2H
50 dia. × 8
rubber roller
D4N-8@2H Bearing

45±1
39.5±1
(31)
11±0.2

20 to 66R

20.5 × 20.5

5.4

2.5

27.5

25 dia.

20.5

39±0.2

20±0.1
22±0.1
40±0.1
42±0.1

Conduit cap
42±0.2
56 max.

(3)

5.4

14.2
30

11±0.2

20.5 × 20.5

2.5

27.5
9±0.2

21.5
20.5

39±0.2

20±0.1
22±0.1
40±0.1
42±0.1

Cap

(29.2)

32 to 66R
Stainless
steel lever

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

21.5

9±0.2

48.2±1
41.3±1

25 dia.

Cap

Conduit cap
42±0.2
56 max.

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

(3)

14.2
30

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
Depth: 5

Note: Each dimension has a tolerance of 0.4 mm unless otherwise specified.

M20-NPT Adapter

Ordering
Model Number Structure
D4N – □ □ □ - □

1 2 3 4

1 Conduit size
1:
2:
4:
6:
8:
9:

3 Head and Actuator
20: Roller lever (resin lever, resin roller)
22: Roller lever (metal lever, resin roller)
25: Roller lever (metal lever, metal roller)
26: Roller lever (metal lever, bearing roller)
2G: Adjustable roller lever, form lock (metal lever, resin roller)
2H: Adjustable roller lever, form lock (metal lever, rubber roller)
31: Top Plunger
32: Top Roller Plunger
62: One-way roller arm lever (horizontal)
72: One-way roller arm lever (vertical)
80: Cat whisker (not available for 2-conduit models)*
87: Plastic rod (not available for 2-conduit models)*
RE: Fork lever lock (right operation) (not available for 2-conduit
models)*
LE: Fork lever lock (left operation) (not available for 2-conduit
models)*

Pg13.5 (1-conduit)
G1/2 (1-conduit)
M20 (1-conduit)
G1/2 (2-conduit)
M20 (2-conduit)
M12 connector (1-conduit)

2 Built-in Switch
1:
2:
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:

1NC/1NO (snap-action)
2NC (snap-action)
1NC/1NO (slow-action)
2NC (slow-action)
2NC/1NO (slow-action)
3NC (slow-action)
1NC/1NO (MBB contact) (slow-action)
2NC/1NO (MBB contact) (slow-action)

4 M20-to-NPT Adapter
Blank: Adapter is not included
NPT: Adapter is included*
*Not available for 2-conduit models

www.sti.com/info

G-95

D4N

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
List of Models
Switches with Two Contacts (with Direct Opening Mechanism)

Actuator

Roller lever (resin
lever, resin roller)

Roller lever (metal
lever, resin roller)

Roller lever (metal
lever, metal roller)

Roller lever (metal
lever, bearing
roller)

Conduit size

NPT

D4N-4220

D4N-4A20

D4N-4B20

D4N-9220

D4N-9A20

D4N-9B20

2-conduit

M20

D4N-8120

D4N-8220

D4N-8A20

D4N-8B20

NPT

D4N-4122-NPT

D4N-4222-NPT

D4N-4A22-NPT

D4N-4B22-NPT

1-conduit

M20

D4N-4122

D4N-4222

D4N-4A22

D4N-4B22

M12 connector

D4N-9122

D4N-9222

D4N-9A22

D4N-9B22

2-conduit

M20

D4N-8122

D4N-8222

D4N-8A22

D4N-8B22

NPT

D4N-4125-NPT

D4N-4225-NPT

D4N-4A25-NPT

D4N-4B25-NPT

1-conduit

M20

D4N-4125

D4N-4225

D4N-4A25

D4N-4B25

1-conduit

M12 connector

D4N-9125

D4N-9225

D4N-9A25

D4N-9B25

NPT

D4N-4126-NPT

D4N-4226-NPT

D4N-4A26-NPT

D4N-4B26-NPT

M20

D4N-4126

D4N-4226

D4N-4A26

D4N-4B26

M12 connector

D4N-9126

D4N-9226

D4N-9A26

D4N-9B26

NPT

D4N-4131-NPT

D4N-4231-NPT

D4N-4A31-NPT

D4N-4B31-NPT

M20

D4N-4131

D4N-4231

D4N-4A31

D4N-4B31

M12 connector

D4N-9131

D4N-9231

D4N-9A31

D4N-9B31

M20

D4N-8131

D4N-8231

D4N-8A31

D4N-8B31

NPT

D4N-4132-NPT

D4N-4232-NPT

D4N-4A32-NPT

D4N-4B32-NPT

M20

D4N-4132

D4N-4232

D4N-4A32

D4N-4B32

M12 connector

D4N-9132

D4N-9232

D4N-9A32

D4N-9B32

2-conduit

M20

D4N-8132

D4N-8232

D4N-8A32

D4N-8B32

NPT

D4N-4162-NPT

D4N-4262-NPT

D4N-4A62-NPT

D4N-4B62-NPT

1-conduit

M20

D4N-4162

D4N-4262

D4N-4A62

D4N-4B62

M12 connector

D4N-9162

D4N-9262

D4N-9A62

D4N-9B62

2-conduit

M20

D4N-8162

D4N-8262

D4N-8A62

D4N-8B62

NPT

D4N-4172-NPT

D4N-4272-NPT

D4N-4A72-NPT

D4N-4B72-NPT

1-conduit

M20

D4N-4172

D4N-4272

D4N-4A72

D4N-4B72

M12 connector

D4N-9172

D4N-9272

D4N-9A72

D4N-9B72

M20

D4N-8172

D4N-8272

D4N-8A72

D4N-8B72

NPT

D4N-412G-NPT

D4N-422GNPT

D4N-4A2G-NPT

D4N-4B2GNPT

1-conduit

2-conduit

1-conduit

M20

D4N-412G

D4N-422G

D4N-4A2G

D4N-4B2G

M12 connector

D4N-912G

D4N-922G

D4N-9A2G

D4N-9B2G

2-conduit

M20

D4N-812G

D4N-822G

D4N-8A2G

D4N-8B2G

NPT

D4N-412H-NPT

D4N-422H-NPT

D4N-4A2H-NPT

D4N-4B2H-NPT

1-conduit

M20

D4N-412H

D4N-422H

D4N-4A2H

D4N-4B2H

M12 connector

D4N-912H

D4N-922H

D4N-9A2H

D4N-9B2H

M20

D4N-812H

D4N-822H

D4N-8A2H

D4N-8B2H

2-conduit

Note: It’s is recommended that M20 be used for Switches to be exported to Europe
and NPT be used for Switches to be exported to North American countries.

G-96

D4N-4B20-NPT

D4N-4120

Roller plunger

Adjustable roller
lever, form lock
(metal lever, rubber
roller)

D4N-4A20-NPT

D4N-9120

2-conduit

Adjustable roller
lever, form lock
(metal lever, resin
roller)

D4N-4220-NPT

M20

1-conduit

One-way roller arm
lever (vertical)

D4N-4120-NPT

2NC
(Slow-action)
Direct
Model
opening

M12 connector

1-conduit

Plunger

One-way roller arm
lever (horizontal)

Built-in switch mechanism
2NC
1NC/1NO
(Snap-action)
(Slow-action)
Direct
Direct
Model
Model
opening
opening

1NC/1NO
(Snap-action)
Direct
Model
opening

www.sti.com/info

D4N

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
List of Models
Switches with Three Contacts and MBB Contacts (with Direct Opening Mechanism)

Actuator

Roller lever (resin
lever, resin roller)

Conduit size

1-conduit

2-conduit
Roller lever (metal
lever, resin roller)

1-conduit

2-conduit
Roller lever (metal
lever, metal roller)

Roller lever (metal
lever, bearing roller)

1-conduit

Plunger

D4N-4D20-NPT

D4N-4E20-NPT

D4N-4F20-NPT

M20

D4N-4C20

D4N-4D20

D4N-4E20

D4N-4F20

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E20

---

M20

D4N-8C20

D4N-8D20

D4N-8E20

D4N-8F20

NPT

D4N-4C22-NPT

D4N-4D22-NPT

D4N-4E22-NPT

D4N-4F22-NPT

M20

D4N-4C22

D4N-4D22

D4N-4E22

D4N-4F22

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E22

---

M20

D4N-8C22

D4N-8D22

D4N-8E22

D4N-8F22

NPT

D4N-4C25-NPT

D4N-4D25-NPT

D4N-4E25-NPT

D4N-4F25-NPT

M20

D4N-4C25

D4N-4D25

D4N-4E25

D4N-4F25

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E25

---

NPT

D4N-4C26-NPT

D4N-4D26-NPT

D4N-4E26-NPT

D4N-4F26-NPT

M20

D4N-4C26

D4N-4D26

D4N-4E26

D4N-4F26

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E26

---

D4N-4D31-NPT

D4N-4E31-NPT

D4N-4F31-NPT

D4N-4C31

D4N-4D31

D4N-4E31

D4N-4F31

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E31

---

2-conduit

M20

D4N-8C31

D4N-8D31

D4N-8E31

D4N-8F31

NPT

D4N-4C32-NPT

D4N-4D32-NPT

D4N-4E32-NPT

D4N-4F32-NPT

1-conduit

M20

D4N-4C32

D4N-4D32

D4N-4E32

D4N-4F32

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E32

---

2-conduit

M20

D4N-8C32

D4N-8D32

D4N-8E32

D4N-8F32

NPT

D4N-4C62-NPT

D4N-4D62-NPT

D4N-4E62-NPT

D4N-4F62-NPT

1-conduit

M20

D4N-4C62

D4N-4D62

D4N-4E62

D4N-4F62

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E62

---

M20

D4N-8C62

D4N-8D62

D4N-8E62

D4N-8F62

NPT

D4N-4C72-NPT

D4N-4D72-NPT

D4N-4E72-NPT

D4N-4F72-NPT

1-conduit

2-conduit

1-conduit

2-conduit
Adjustable roller
lever, form lock
(metal lever, rubber
roller)

D4N-4C20-NPT

D4N-4C31-NPT

2-conduit

Adjustable roller
lever, form lock
(metal lever, resin
roller)

NPT

Roller plunger

One-way roller arm
lever (vertical)

2NC/1NO MBB
(Slow-action)
Direct
Model
opening

M20

1-conduit

One-way roller arm
lever (horizontal)

Built-in switch mechanism
3NC
1NC/1NO MBB
(Slow-action)
(Slow-action)
Direct
Direct
Model
Model
opening
opening

2NC/1NO
(Slow-action)
Direct
Model
opening

1-conduit

2-conduit

M20

D4N-4C72

D4N-4D72

D4N-4E72

D4N-4F72

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E72

---

M20

D4N-8C72

D4N-8D72

D4N-8E72

D4N-8F72

NPT

D4N-4C2G-NPT

D4N-4D2G-NPT

D4N-4E2G-NPT

D4N-4F2G-NPT

M20

D4N-4C2G

D4N-4D2G

D4N-4E2G

D4N-4F2G

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E2G

---

M20

D4N-8C2G

D4N-8D2G

D4N-8E2G

D4N-8F2G

NPT

D4N-4C2H-NPT

D4N-4D2H-NPT

D4N-4E2H-NPT

D4N-4F2H-NPT

M20

D4N-4C2H

D4N-4D2H

D4N-4E2H

D4N-4F2H

M12 connector

---

D4N-9E2H

---

M20

D4N-8C2H

D4N-8D2H

D4N-8E2H

D4N-8F2H

Note: It’s is recommended that M20 be used for Switches to be exported to Europe
and NPT be used for Switches to be exported to North American countries.

www.sti.com/info

G-97

Safety Interlock Switches

D4N-□R

D4NR

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Pull-reset Safety Limit Switch
• A series of pull-reset models now available
• Lineup includes three contact models with 2NC/1NO and 3NC contact
forms in addition to the previous contact forms 1NC/1NO and 2NC.
• M12-connector models are available, saving on labor and simplifying
replacement.
• Standardized gold-clad contacts provide high contact reliability. Can
be used with both standard loads and microloads.
• Conforms to EN115, EN81-1 and EN81-2.
• Certified standards: UL, EN (TÜV), and CCC

Safety Interlock Switches

D4GS-N

D4GSN

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Slim Safety Door Switches
with IP67 Rating
• Slim design with a width of only 17 mm (three-contact models).
• Reversible design allowing either front or rear mounting.
• Built-in Switches with two- or three-terminal contact construction
are available.
• Operation Key with rubber mounting hole to absorb vibration and
shock.
• IP67 degree of protection.
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-98

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

D4NS

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety-Door Switch
• Multi-contact, labor-saving, environment-friendly, next-generation
safety-door switch
• Lineup includes three contact models with 2NC/1NO and 3NC
contact forms and MBB models in addition to the previous contact
forms 1NC/1NO, and 2NC
• M12-connector models are available, saving on labor and simplifying replacement.
• Standardized gold-clad contacts provide high contact reliability.
Applicable to both standard loads and microloads.
• Variety of metallic heads available

Specifications
Standards and EC Directives

Certified Standard Ratings

Conforms to the following EC Directives:
• Machinery Directive
• Low Voltage Directive
• EN50047
• EN 1088
• EN 60204-1
• GS-ET-15

TÜV (EN 60947-5-1), CCC (GB14048.5)

Certified Standards

UL/CSA (UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14)

Item

AC-15

DC-13

Rated operating current (Ie)

Utilization category

0.27 A

Rated operating voltage (Ue)

240 V

250 V

Note: Use a 10 A fuse type gI or gG that conforms to IEC 60269 as a shortcircuit protection device. This fuse is not built into the Switch.

Certification
body

Standard

File No.

TÜV SÜD

EN 60947-5-1
(certified direct opening)

Consult your
representative for
details.

UL *1

UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14

E76675

CQC (CCC)

GB14048.5

2003010305077330

KOSHA *2

EN60947-5-1

2005-197

A300

Rated
voltage
120 VAC
240 VAC

Carry
current
10 A

Current (A)
Make

Break

Volt-amperes (VA)
Make

Break

7,200

720

Q300

*1. Certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 is authorized by the UL mark.
*2. Only certain models have been certified.

Rated
voltage
125 VDC
250 VDC

www.sti.com/info

Carry
current
2.5 A

Current (A)
Make

Break

0.55

0.27

Volt-amperes (VA)
Make

Break

G-99

D4NS

Specifications (continued)
Characteristics
Degree of protection *1
Durability *2

IP67 (EN60947-5-1)

Mechanical

1,000,000 operations min.

Electrical

500,000 operations min. (3 A resistive load at 250 VAC) *3
300,000 operations min. (10 A resistive load at 250 VAC)

Operating speed

0.05 to 0.5 m/s

Operating frequency

30 operations/minute max.

Direct opening force *4

60 N min.

Direct opening travel *4

10 mm min.

Contact resistance

25 mΩ max.

Minimum applicable load *5

1 mA resistive load at 5 VDC (N-level reference value)

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

300 V

Rated frequency

50/60 Hz

Protection against electric shock

Class II (double insulation)

Pollution degree (operating environment)

3 (EN60947-5-1)

Impulse
withstand voltage
(EN60947-5-1)

Between terminals of
same polarity
Between terminals of
different polarity
Between each
terminals and
non-current carrying
metallic parts.

2.5 kV
4 kV

6 kV

Insulation resistance

100 MΩ min.

Contact gap

2 x 2 mm min.

Vibration resistance
Shock resistance

10 to 55 Hz, 0.75 mm single amplitude
Destruction

1,000 m/s2 min.

Malfunction

300 m/s2 min.

Conditional short-circuit current

100 A (EN60947-5-1)

Conventional free air thermal current (Ith)

10 A (EN60947-5-1)

Ambient operating temperature

-30 to +70°C (with no icing)

Ambient operating humidity

95% max.

Weight

Approx. 96 g (D4NS-1CF)

Notes: The above values are initial values.
The Switch contacts can be used with either standard loads or microloads. Once the contacts have been used to
switch a load, however, they cannot be used to switch smaller loads. The contact surfaces will become rough once
they have been used and contact reliability for smaller loads may be reduced.
*1. The degree of protection is tested using the method specified by the standard (EN60947-5-1). Confirm that
sealing properties are sufficient for the operating conditions and environment beforehand. Although the switch
box is protected from dust or water penetration, do not use the D4NS in places where foreign material may enter
through the key hole on the head, otherwise Switch damage or malfunctioning may occur.
*2. The durability is for an ambient temperature of 5 to 35°C and an ambient humidity of 40% to 70%. For further
conditions, consult your sales representative.
*3. Do not pass a 3 A, 250 VAC load through more than two circuits.
*4. These figures are minimum requirements for safe operation.
*5. This value will vary with the switching frequency, environment, and reliability level. Confirm that correct operation
is possible with the actual load beforehand.

G-100

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

D4NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Connections
Contact Form
Diagrams show state with key inserted.
Model

Contact

Contact form
Zb

D4NS-□A□

1NC/1NO

2NC

D4NS-□C□

2NC/1NO

D4NS-□D□

3NC

D4NS-□E□

1NC/1NO MBB*

D4NS-□F□

2NC/1NO MBB*

11-12
33-34

Remarks
ON

Stroke
Extraction
completion
position

Operation
Key insertion
completion
position

11-12
31-32

D4NS-□B□

Operating pattern

The terminals 11-12 and 33-34
can be used as unlike poles.

ON
Stroke

Operation
Key insertion
completion
position

Extraction
completion
position

11-12
21-22
33-34

ON
Stroke

Operation
Key insertion
completion
position

Extraction
completion
position

11-12
21-22
31-32

ON
Stroke

Operation
Key insertion
completion
position

ON
Stroke

Operation
Key insertion
completion
position

Extraction
completion
position

11-12
21-22
33-34
Operation
Key insertion
completion
position

Extraction
completion
position

NC contacts 11-12 and 21-22
have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 11-12, 21-22, and
33-34 can be used as unlike
poles.

NC contacts 11-12, 21-22, and
31-32 have a certified direct
opening mechanism.

Only NC contacts 11-12 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.
The terminals 11-12 and 33-34
can be used as unlike poles.

ON
Stroke

NC contacts 11-12 and 31-32
have a certified direct
opening mechanism.
The terminals 11-12 and 31-32
can be used as unlike poles.

The terminals 11-12, 21-22, and
31-32 can be used as unlike
poles.

Extraction
completion
position

11-12
33-34

Only NC contacts 11-12 have a
certified direct opening
mechanism.

NC contacts 11-12 and 21-22
have a certified direct opening
mechanism.
The terminals 11-12, 21-22 and
33-34 can be used as unlike poles.

*MBB (Make Before Break) contacts have an overlapping structure, so that before the normally closed contact (NC) opens, the normally open contact
(NO) closes.

www.sti.com/info

G-101

D4NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics

(mm)

1-Conduit Models
Head cap

D4NS-1 F
D4NS-2 F
D4NS-4 F

7.5

Operating
characteristics

D4NS-1@F
D4NS-2@F
D4NS-3@F
D4NS-4@F

Key insertion force
Key extraction force

15 N max.
30 N max.

Model
30.6
15.5

30.2
15.3

Red

4.4
41 33.5
2.5

Black
55

47±0.2

21.5

20±0.1
22±0.1

31.5

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
depth: 5

6±3 mm
(28 mm)

Direct opening force *
Direct opening stroke *

60 N min.
10 mm min.

* Always maintain the above operating characteristics
for safe use.

14.2
30

22±0.2
31

Pretravel (PT)
Total travel (TT)

2-Conduit Models

Head cap

D4NS-6 F
D4NS-8 F

7.5

31.5
30.6

42±0.1
40±0.1
30.2
15.3

Red

21.5
15.5

33.5 5.4

2.5

9±0.2

20.5

20±0.1

39±0.2

25 dia.

22±0.1

Cap
42±0.2
56 max.

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

14.2

D4NS-5@F
D4NS-6@F
D4NS-7@F
D4NS-8@F

Key insertion force
Key extraction force

15 N max.
30 N max.

Model

4.4

Black

Operating
characteristics

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
depth: 5

Pretravel (PT)

6±3 mm

Total travel (TT)

(28 mm)

Direct opening force *
Direct opening stroke *

60 N min.
10 mm min.

* Always maintain the above operating characteristics
for safe use.

1-Conduit Connector Models
Head cap

D4NS-9@F

7.5

Red

30.6
15.5

30.2
15.3

Operating
characteristics
Key insertion force
Key extraction force

4.4

Black

41 33.5
2.5

47±0.2

21.5

20±0.1
22±0.1

31.5

2.15±0.05R
mounting holes

M12 × 1

Two, 4+0.15
dia. holes
0
depth: 5

D4NS-9@F
15 N max.
30 N max.

Pretravel (PT)

6±3 mm

Total travel (TT)

(28 mm)

Direct opening force *
Direct opening stroke *

60 N min.
10 mm min.

* Always maintain the above operating characteristics
for safe use.

(14)
22±0.2
31

Model

14.2
30

G-102

www.sti.com/info

D4NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)

(mm)

With Operation Key Inserted (Relationship between Insertion Radius and Key Hole)
D4NS-1@F + D4DS-K1
(with Top-inserted Operation Key)

D4NS-1@F + D4DS-K1
(with Front-inserted Operation Key)
Red

44 to 46.5
Key insertion face
(30.6)

Horizontal key insertion
radius R ≥ 200

Red

Horizontal key
insertion radius
R ≥ 200

(15)

Black

(30.6)

54.5 to 57.0 Key
(41) insertion face

Black

Permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key and
key hole is ±1.

The permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key
and key hole is ±1.

Vertical key
insertion radius
R ≥ 200

44 to 46.5
Key insertion face

Vertical key insertion
radius R ≥ 200

(33.5)

(8)

Permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key and
key hole is ±1.

54.5 to 57.0 Key
(41) insertion face

The permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key
and key hole is ±1.

D4NS-1@F + D4DS-K2
(with Front-inserted Operation Key)
Red

40 to 42.5
Key insertion face
(30.6)

D4NS-1@F + D4DS-K2
(with Top-inserted Operation Key)
Horizontal key
insertion radius
R ≥ 200

Horizontal key insertion
radius R ≥ 200

Red

(15)

Black

Permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key and
key hole is ±1.

50.5 to 53.0 Key
(41) insertion face

Black

The permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key
and key hole is ±1.

(30.6)

40 to 42.5
Key insertion face

Vertical key
insertion radius
R ≥ 200
(33.5)
(27.5)

Vertical key insertion
radius R ≥ 200

Permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key and
key hole is ±1.

(6)

(8)
50.5 to 53.0 Key
(41) insertion face

The permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key
and key hole is ±1.

Note: Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.

www.sti.com/info

G-103

D4NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)

D4NS-1@F + D4DS-K3
(with Top-inserted Operation Key)

D4NS-1@F + D4DS-K3
(with Front-inserted Operation Key)
Red

(mm)

45 to 47.5
Key insertion face

Horizontal key
insertion radius
R ≥ 50

(30.6)

(40±0.15)

Black

Black
Permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key and
key hole is ±1.
(30.6)

45 to 47.5
Key insertion face

Vertical key
insertion radius
R ≥ 200

Horizontal key insertion
radius R ≥ 50

Red

55.5 to 58.0 Key
insertion face
(41)

The permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key
and key hole is ±1.
Horizontal key insertion
radius R ≥ 200
(8)

(33.5)

Permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key and
key hole is ±1.

55.5 to 58.0 Key
(41) insertion face

The permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key
and key hole is ±1.

D4NS-1@F + D4DS-K5
(with Front-inserted Operation Key)
Red

D4NS-1@F + D4DS-K5
(with Top-inserted Operation Key)

51.9 to 54.4
Key insertion face

43 ± 0.1
41 ± 0.1

Red

(30.6)
(43±0.1)
(41±0.1)

Black

Black
Horizontal key
insertion radius
R ≥ 50

(30.6)

51.9 to 54.4
Key insertion face

Permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key and
key hole is ±1.

Horizontal key insertion
radius R ≥ 50

(41)

The permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key
and key hole is ±1.

Vertical key
insertion radius
R ≥ 50
Horizontal key insertion
radius R ≥ 50

(33.5)

Permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key and
key hole is ±1.

G-104

62.4 to 64.9 Key
insertion face

www.sti.com/info

(8)

(41)

62.4 to 64.9 Key
insertion face

The permissible difference
in center lines between
the Operation Key
and key hole is ±1.

D4NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions and Operating Characteristics (continued)

(mm)

Operation Keys
D4DS-K1

17.5

D4DS-K3

8 dia.

13
7

D4DS-K5

10.5
28

2 4.3

6.3

20°
Black

Four, 2.15R

D4DS-K2

Angle adjustment bolt

9 dia.

4.5 dia.

4.3

7
30

14
4

20.9

Mounting Holes
(Enlargement)

24.6
22.5

17
15

15°
43

Four, 2.15R

55
41

18°

Black

6.5

4.5

(7)

M20-NPT Adapter

Ordering
Model Number Structure
Switch

Operation Key

D4NS – □ □ □ – □

D4DS-K □

1 2 3 4

1 Conduit Size
1:
2:
4:
6:
8:
9:

Pg13.5 (1-conduit)
G1/2 (1-conduit)
M20 (1-conduit)
G1/2 (2-conduit)
M20 (2-conduit)
M12 connector (1-conduit)
(only 4-pin is available)

F: Four mounting directions possible
(Front-side mounting at shipping)/
plastic
D: Four mounting directions possible
(Front-side mounting at shipping)/
metal

4 M20-to-NPT Adapter

2 Built-in Switch (with Door Open/Closed
Detection Switch and Lock Monitor
Switch Contacts)
A: 1NC/1NO (slow-action)
B: 2NC (slow-action)
C: 2NC/1NO (slow-action)
D: 3NC (slow-action)
E: 1NC/1NO (MBB contact)
F: 2NC/1NO (MBB contact)

✎

Blank: Adapter is not included
NPT: Adapter is included*

1 Operation Key Type

3 Head Mounting Direction

1:
2:
3:
5:

Horizontal mounting
Vertical mounting
Adjustable mounting (horizontal)
Adjustable mounting (horizontal/
vertical)

Type
Horizontal
mounting
Horizontal mounting

Model

D4DS-K1

Note: An order for the head part or the
Vertical mounting
Vertical mounting
switch part alone cannot be accepted.
(The operation key is sold separately.)

D4DS-K2

*Not available with 2-conduit models.
Adjustable mounting
Adjustable mounting
(Horizontal) (horizontal)

For information on the D4NS-SK Slide Key,
see page G-121.

D4DS-K3

Adjustable mounting
Adjustable mounting
(Horizontal/Vertical)
(horizontal/vertical)
D4DS-K5

www.sti.com/info

G-105

D4NS

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering (continued)
List of Models
Switches with certified direct opening mechanisms (Operation Keys are sold separately)
Type

Contact configuration

Conduit opening/Connector
Pg13.5

1NC/1NO

G1/2

D4NS-2AF *

NPT

D4NS-4AF-NPT

M20
Pg13.5
2NC

D4NS-4BF-NPT

D4NS-2CF *

NPT

D4NS-4CF-NPT

Pg13.5
3NC

1NC/1NO
Slow-action MBB contact
2NC/1NO

1NC/1NO
2NC
Slow-action
2NC/1NO
2-Conduit
3NC
1NC/1NO
Slow-action MBB contact
2NC/1NO
Slow-action
Slow-action MBB contact

D4NS-2DF *

NPT

D4NS-4DF-NPT

M20

D4NS-4DF

Pg13.5

D4NS-1EF

G1/2

D4NS-2EF

NPT

D4NS-4EF-NPT

M20

D4NS-4EF

Pg13.5

D4NS-1FF

G1/2

D4NS-2FF

NPT

D4NS-4FF-NPT

M20

D4NS-4FF

G1/2

D4NS-6AF

M20

D4NS-8AF

G1/2

D4NS-6BF

M20

D4NS-8BF

G1/2

D4NS-6CF

M20

D4NS-8CF

G1/2

D4NS-6DF

M20

D4NS-8DF

G1/2

D4NS-6EF

M20

D4NS-8EF

G1/2

D4NS-6FF

M20

D4NS-8FF
D4NS-9AF

M12 connector

1NC/1NO

1. The recommended models for equipment and machinery being exported to
Europe are those with an M20 or Pg13.5 conduit sizes, and for North America,
the recommended models are those with a NPT conduit sizes.
2. Resin is used as the material for the D4NS housing and head. Use the metal
D4BS Safety-door Switch for applications requiring greater mechanical strength.
*Models with Korean S-mark certification.

G-106

D4NS-4CF
D4NS-1DF *

G1/2

1NC/1NO
2NC

D4NS-4BF
D4NS-1CF *

G1/2
M20

1-Conduit

1-Conduit, with
connector

D4NS-2BF *

NPT
Pg13.5

2NC/1NO

D4NS-4AF
D4NS-1BF *

G1/2
M20

Slow-action

Model
D4NS-1AF *

www.sti.com/info

D4NS-9BF
D4NS-9EF

Safety Interlock Switches

T2008

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Small Tongue-Operated Safety
Interlock Switch
• Small size—these switches are ideal for guarding applications with
space restrictions. Fits on 1 inch square tubing.
• NEMA 6 (IP67) enclosure enables these switches to withstand water
washdown cleaning
• Rotatable head gives eight possible actuator entry points for versatile
installation. A blanking plug is supplied for the unused entry.
• Long life—these switches, with their stainless steel actuators, are
designed for a minimum of one million actuations
• Available with two contact poles. Contact configurations of 1 N/O and 1
N/C or 2 N/C are available to meet requirements of dual channel safety
monitoring
• An optional stainless steel guide is available for demanding
applications
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment
today or within 3 to 5 days
R

Specifications
Electrical
Contact Configurations:
Safety Contacts:
Switching Ability:

All Models
1 N/O + 1 N/C, 2 N/C
1 N/C positive break, 2 N/C positive break
AC: 230 V, 4 A
DC: 24 V, 4 A
Silver alloy, gold flashed
1 N/O (T2008-11 models only)
12 V at 10 mA
1 mA at 24 V

Contact Material:
Auxiliary Contacts:
Minimum Switching Voltage:
Minimum Switching Current:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Any position
Mounting Hardware:
2 x M4 screws (not supplied)
Min Operating Radius:
150 to 200 mm based upon orientation of actuator to switch
Break Contact Min Force:
6 N (0.23 lb.)
Max Actuation Speed:
20 m/min.
Max Actuation Frequency:
7000 cycles/hour
Case Material:
Glass-fibre reinforced thermoplastic
Actuator Material:
Stainless steel
Wiring Entry:
1 x M16
Weight:
55 g (1.8 oz.)
Color:
Black with red lid
Mechanical Life:
1 x 106 minimum
Environmental
Protection:
IP67 (NEMA 6)
Operating Temperature:
-20 to 80°C (-4 to 176°F)
Cleaning:
Water washdown
Compliance
Standards:
EN60947-5-1, EN1088, EN ISO 13849-1
Approvals/Listings:
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, DGUV
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C)—
i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place, and the machine able to be started.

Conforms to EN60947-5-1, EN1088,
EN ISO 13849-1
UL and C-UL listed
DGUV approved

Actual Size
25 mm
0.98 in.

82 mm
3.23 in.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-107

T2008

Safety Interlock Switches

Operation

Optional Slide Bolts
• Allows easy installation of switch on
machine guards
• Actuator included (order switch
separately)
• Integral handle included
• Metal construction is suitable for
demanding applications
• Yellow color for easy recognition

G
Head Position 1

Head Position 2

Head Position 3

Head Position 4

Top & side entry

Top & front entry

Top & back entry

Contact Arrangements

T2008

Optional Alignment Guide

Optional SLD Series

Optional stainless steel alignment guide
aids actuator entry and is easily installed.

Optional switch locking devices are available. See accessories section for details.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

G-108

www.sti.com/info

T2008

Safety Interlock Switches

Applications
Typical applications are on
sliding guard doors or swinging guard doors.

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC
K1 (AUX)
START
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

EB SERIES
LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

GUARD
CLOSED

T2008
31

S11

S21

L1 L2 L3

K2 (AUX)
STOP
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

S12

S14

RESET

Relay control and
fault monitoring

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

+
K1

SR103AM
A2

S10

S13

FUSE

FUSE
K1

a full explanation of the circuit operating principle and fault detection,
✎ For
see “Common Circuit Examples” in the Expert Area Section of this catalog on page A-31

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-109

T2008

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions

(mm/in.)
Insertion Depth

Insertion Depth

20 +1.0
0.78 +0.04

R> 150
5.91

R> 200
7.87
R> 200
7.87

36.5
1.43

31
1.22

82
3.23

1.5
0.06

20 +1.0
0.78 +0.04

17*
0.67

Ø5
0.2
Ø4.2
0.165

16.5
0.65
18
0.71

115
4.53

10
0.39

0.4 (0.016)

For M6 Screw
(also used for M5 screw)
6
0.24

* Fixed positioning
for safety-related
applications (M5)

15
15 0.59
0.59

15
0.59

Safety
Guard

60
2.36

7
0.28
A

40
1.57

30
1.18
12.5
0.49

32
1.26

25
0.98

25
0.98
Torque =
0.6 N-m
5.36 lb-in

26
1.02

M 16 x 1.5

180
7.08

D
B

2 x DIN 912-M4 x 30
0.9 (0.035)

12.5
0.49

For M6 screw

168
6.6

For M6 Screw
(also used for M5 screw)
30
Guard 30
Frame 1.18 X 1.18

A
Standard

4
0.16

3
7 0.12
0.28

Torque = 0.6 N-m
5.36 lb-in

Right-Hung Door

40
1.57

74
2.91

16
0.63

32
1.26
34
1.34

2
0.078

30
1.18

15
0.59

2
0.078

15
0.59
23.5
0.925

23.5
0.925
24
0.94

41
1.61

Ø4.5
0.18

15
0.59

24
0.94

Flat Actuator

Ø4.5
0.18

22
0.87
30
1.18

24
0.94

15
0.59

90-Degree Actuator

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

www.sti.com/info

52
2.04

15
0.59

2
8*
0.08
0.31

23.5
0.925
* Dimension 8 is related
to the fitted condition.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

G-110

31
1.22

34
1.34
11
0.43

52
2.05

80
3.15

Ø4.4
0.173

Flat Actuator w/Rubber Bushing

T2008

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering
Model
T2008 90-Degree Actuator
T2008-11SM
T2008-02SM
T2008 Flat Actuator
T2008-11TM
T2008-02TM
T2008 Flat Actuator with Rubber Bushing
T2008-11TRM
T2008-02TRM
T2008 Switch Only (no actuators and no adapters included)
T2008-11
T2008-02
Accessories
Spare Actuators
SA40-S00 90-degree actuator
SA40-T10 flat actuator
SA40-TR20 flat actuator with rubber bushings
Stainless Steel Guide
SM40-SG50 stainless steel guide
Slide Bolt
SB40-M00 slide bolt left or right hand door with bracket
Mounting Bracket
SB40-M10 right angle bracket only for mounting T2008/T2011 switches
Adapter
SC12-M16A00 M16 to 1/2 in. NPT adapter

Contacts

Wiring Entry

Part No.

1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C

1 x M16 + NPT adapter
1 x M16 + NPT adapter

44540-0010
44540-0020

1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C

1 x M16 + NPT adapter
1 x M16 + NPT adapter

44540-0110
44540-0120

1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C

1 x M16 + NPT adapter
1 x M16 + NPT adapter

44540-0210
44540-0220

1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C

1 x M16
1 x M16

44540-2010
44540-2020

44540-0700
44540-0710
44540-0720
44540-0750
44540-8000
44540-8010

44512-0300

Mounting Brackets can be used with
✎ Universal
this product. See page G-123 for details.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-111

Safety Interlock Switches

T4012

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Universal Tongue-Operated
Safety Interlock Switch

• Strong and versatile—the compact size of the strong, glassfilled thermoplastic housing allows this switch to be used in
most applications
• NEMA 6 enclosure enables these switches to withstand water
washdown cleaning
• Rotatable head gives eight possible actuator entry points for
versatile installation. A blanking plug is supplied for the unused
entry.
• Long life—these switches, with their stainless steel actuators,
are designed for a minimum of two million actuations
• Available in 2 or 4 contact pole versions. The 4 contact pole
version provides 2 poles for dual channel safety monitoring and
2 additional poles for status monitoring.
• An optional stainless steel guide is available for demanding
applications
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

Safety Interlock Switches

T4016

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Heavy-Duty Metal-Body Safety
Interlock Switch
• Rugged enclosure—the all metal housing and stainless steel
actuator of the T4016 makes it suitable for harsh environments
• NEMA 6/IP67 enclosure enables these switches to withstand
water washdown cleaning.
• Rotatable head gives eight possible actuator entry points for
versatile installation. A blanking plug is supplied for the unused
entry.
• Long life—these switches, with their stainless steel actuators,
are designed for a minimum of two million actuations
• A variety of 4 contact pole versions provides 2 poles for dual
channel safety monitoring and 2 additional poles for status
monitoring
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-112

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

T5007

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Compact Universal Tongue-Operated
Safety Interlock Switch
• Strong and versatile—the compact size of the strong, glass-filled
polyester housing can be used in many applications
• NEMA 6 enclosure enables these switches to withstand water washdown cleaning
• Rotatable head gives four possible actuator entry points for versatile
installation. A blanking plug is supplied for the unused entry.
• Small swing radius allows use on doors with a swing radius as small as
64 mm (2.5 in.) when using the optional flexible 1 actuator with alignment guide
• Vibration resistant—optional catch and retainer keeps vibrating guard
doors shut, preventing unwanted opening of guard doors on vibrating
machines
• Optional connector makes installation quick and easy
• An optional stainless steel head is available
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment
today or within 3 to 5 days
R

Specifications
Electrical
Contact Configurations:
Safety Contacts:
Switching Ability
Safety Contact Gap:
Auxiliary Contacts:
Max Switching Current/Volt/Amp:
Minimum Current:
Electrical Life:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Mounting Hardware:
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening:
Min Operating Radius:
Break Contact Min Force:
Max Actuation Speed:
Max Actuation Frequency:
Case Material:
Actuator Material:
Wiring Entry:
Weight:
Color:
Mechanical Life:
Environmental
Protection:
Operating Temperature:
Cleaning:
Compliance
Standards:
Approvals/Listings:

Conforms to EN1088, EN292,
EN60947-5-1, EN60204-1
UL and C-UL listed

All Models
2 N/C or 1 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C or 1 N/C positive break
AC: 500 V – 1 A, 250 V – 2 A, 100 V – 5 A
DC: 250 V – 0.5 A, 24 V – 2 A
> 2 mm (0.079 in.)
1 N/O (only with 1 N/C safety version)
500 V/500 VA
5 V 5 mA DC
1 x 106 minimum
Any position
2 x M5 screws
6 mm (0.236 in.)
60 mm (2.5 in.) with Flex 1 actuator; 175 mm (6.89 in.) with standard
actuator
30 N (6.7 lb.)
160 mm/sec (6.30 in./sec)
2 cycles/sec
UL listed, glass-filled polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), optional
stainless steel head
Stainless steel
3 x M20 conduit with 0.5 in. NPT adapter, or Brad Harrison connector
type BG 16881-008, 4 pole male, M12
120 g (4 oz.)
Red
1 x 106 minimum
IP67 (NEMA 6)
-20 to 80°C (-4 to 176°F)
Water washdown
EN1088, EN292, EN60947-5-1, EN60204-1
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL

Specifications are subject to
change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI
switches are described as normally
closed (N/C)—i.e., with the guard
closed, actuator in place, and the
machine able to be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-113

Safety Interlock Switches

T5009 & T5009-6

T5009

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Universal Tongue-Operated
Safety Interlock Switch

• Strong and versatile—the compact size of the strong, glassfilled polyester housing and metal reinforced cam allows this
popular switch to be used in most applications
• NEMA 6 enclosure enables these switches to withstand water
washdown cleaning.
• Rotatable head gives four possible actuator entry points for versatile installation. A blanking plug is supplied for the unused entry.
• Small swing radius allows use on doors with a swing radius as
small as 2.5 in. when using the optional flexible actuators
• Hi-Hold models reduce nuisance rips and allow the switch to
also serve as the gate catch without the need to mount any
additional hardware.
• The 4 contact poles provide 2 poles for dual channel safety
monitoring and 2 additional poles for status monitoring
• Optional connector makes installation easy
• An optional stainless steel head is available
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

HI-HOLD
MODELS
AVAILABLE
R

Specifications
Electrical
Contact Configurations:
Safety Contacts:
Switching Ability

All Models

T5009
2 N/C + 1 N/O

2 N/C positive break
AC: 500 V–1 A, 240 V–3 A, 120 V–6 A
DC: 250 V–0.5 A, 24 V–2.5 A
> 2 mm (0.079 in.)

Conforms to EN1088, EN292,
EN60947-5-1, EN60204-1
UL and C-UL listed

T5009-6
2 N/C + 2 N/O, 3 N/C + 1 N/O, 4 N/C

Safety Contact Gap:
Auxiliary Contacts:
1 N/O
1 N/C + 1 N/O, 2 N/C, 2 N/O
Max Switching Current/Volt/Amp:
500 V/500 VA
Minimum Current:
5 V 5 mA DC
Electrical Life:
1 x 106 minimum
Mechanical
Mounting:
Any position
Mounting Hardware:
2 x M5 screws
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening:
7 mm (0.275 in.)
Min Operating Radius:
60 mm (2.5 in.) with Flex 1 actuator; 175 mm (6.89 in.) with standard actuator
Break Contact Min Force:
12 N (2.7 lb.); Hi-Hold models are 50 N (11.2 lbs.)
Max Actuation Speed:
160 mm/sec (6.30 in./sec)
Max Actuation Frequency:
2 cycles/sec
Case Material:
UL listed, glass-filled polyester, optional stainless steel head
Actuator Material:
Stainless steel
Wiring Entry:
M20 with 1/2 in. NPT adapter included, 1/2 in. NPT, 6-pin micro AC connector 1/2 in.– 20
Weight:
160 g (5.6 oz.)
Color:
Red
Mechanical Life:
1 x 106 minimum
Environmental
Protection:
IP67 (NEMA 6)
Operating Temperature:
-25 to 80°C (-13 to 176°F)
Cleaning:
Water washdown
Compliance
Standards:
EN1088, EN292, EN60947-5-1, EN60204-1, UL508
Approvals/Listings:
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C)—
i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place, and the machine able to be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

G-114

www.sti.com/info

T5009 & T5009-6

Safety Interlock Switches

Operation
Removable terminal block
for field service

The head
rotates 180° to
give 4 possible
actuator entry
points.

Blanking plug
for unused entry.

Optional SLD Series

Flex 1
15° flexibility in
any direction.

Optional switch locking
devices are available. See
accessories section for details.

Optional Connector
for 3-Pole Switches

6-Pin Male, Micro AC, 1/2-20 UN2A
Safety Circuit 1 (N/C)

Flex 2
15° flexibility in
two directions.

2
22

1/2" UNF

6
3

5
4
33

Safety Circuit 2 (N/C)
Auxiliary Circuit (N/O)

Contact Arrangements

Minimum Allowable Radius for Actuator Entry

44501-0755
44501 -0785
44501-0790
44501-0765
44501-0760

T5009-6

175 mm
175 mm
175 mm
175 mm
60 mm

175 mm
175 mm
175 mm
50 mm
60 mm

175 mm
175 mm
175 mm
60 mm
60 mm

175 mm
175 mm
175 mm
175 mm
60 mm

T5009-6
Contact Block Operation at Withdrawl of Actuator
2N/C + 1 N/O Version
7
0.28

3N/C + 1N/O Version
0

11/12
21/22
33/34
7.8
0.31

Contact Open

Contact Closed

11/12
21/22
31/32
41/42

Contact Open

7
0.28

4 N/C Version
0

7.8
0.31

Contact Closed

11/12
21/22
31/32
41/42

Contact Open

2N/C + 2N/O version
7
0.28

Contact Closed

11/12
21/22
33/34
43/44

Contact Open

www.sti.com/info

7
0.28

7.8
0.31

Contact Closed

G-115

T5009 & T5009-6

Safety Interlock Switches

Applications
Typical applications are on
sliding guard doors or swinging guard doors with a 2.5 in.
minimum swing radius when
using the flexible actuators.

24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC
K1 (AUX)

GUARDS
CLOSED
11

T5009-6
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

START
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

K2 (AUX)

CONDUIT
LIGHT

G
11

T5009-6
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

S11

S21

L1 L2 L3

STOP
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

S12

S14

RESET

Relay control and
fault monitoring

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

CONDUIT
LIGHT

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

SR103AM
INPUTS

S10

S13

PLC

FUSE

FUSE
K1

a full explanation of the circuit operating principle and fault detection,
✎ For
see “Common Circuit Examples” in the Expert Area Section of this catalog on page A-31

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

G-116

www.sti.com/info

AUXILIARY CIRCUIT
(ALARM OR INDICATION)

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

T5009 & T5009-6

Dimensions

Safety Interlock Switches

(mm/in.)

T5009, T5009-6 Switch with Plastic Head

T5009, T5009-6 Switch with Plastic Head
3.78 (96.0)
3.46 (88.0)
1.83 (46.5)

M5 fixing holes

2.05 (52.0)

1.57 (40.0)

.82 (21)

2.30 (58.4)

.59 (15.0)

.20 (5.0)

.31 (8.0)

.83 (21.0)

.09 (2.4)

.98 (25.0)

.22 (5.5)

.55 (14.0)

1.32 (33.5)

1.35 (34.4)

.20 (5.0)

M20 or 1/2" NPT

3.95 (100.4)

T5009, T5009-6 Switch with Stainless Steel Head
T5009, T5009-6 with Stainless Steel Head

2.05 (52.0)

.22 (5.5)

.98 (25.0)
4.07 (103.5)

1.48 (37.5)

.83 (21.0)

.22 (5.5)

.22 (5.5)
.55 (14.0)

.20 (5.0)

.31 (8.0)

1.32 (33.5)

M5 fixing holes

1.57 (40.0)

.83 (21.0)

2.30 (58.4)

3.78 (96.0)
3.46 (88.0)
1.83 (46.5)
.59 (15.0)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

G-117

T5009 & T5009-6

Safety Interlock Switches

Dimensions (continued)

(mm/in.)

Standard & Flat Actuator
Selections:
& Flat
Actuator Selections:
Standard & Flat Standard
Actuator Selections
SA01-SSTD
SAO1-SSTD
SAO1-FSTD
SAO1-SSTD
44501-0785
(for use with stainless steel headed switches)

1.57 (40.0)

.72 (18.4)
.14 (3.5)
.28 (7.0)

2.09 (53.0)

2.87 (73.0)

.79 (20.0)

.16 (4.0)

3.15 (80.0)
1.40 (35.5)

.13 (3.4)

.30 (7.7)

.31 (8.0)

.
10

1
9(

.59 (15.0)

1.40 (35.5)
.55 (14.0)

.55 (14.0)

.37 (9.5)

.24 (6.0)

.77 (19.5)

.22 (5.5)
.43 (11.0)
.31 (8.0)

2.17 (55.0)

)

5
(5.

.26 (6.5)

.14 (3.5)

5
(5.

.22

.14 (3.5)

2.17 (55.0)

44501-0760 (for use with plastic or S.S
44501-0760 (for use with plastic or S.S
headed switches)
headedSelect
switches)
models are available for Rapid Delivery.

44501-0765 (for use with plastic or S.S headed
44501-0765 (for use with plastic or S.S headed
switches)
switches)

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

G-118

.72 (18.4)

8)
2.
(R

)
.8

.26 (6.5)

.72 (18.4)

1.57 (40.0)

2
(R

1.57 (40.0)

.14 (3.5)

1.57 (40.0)
2.03 (51.5)

11
R.

.14 (3.5)

.22

1.57 (40.0)
2.03 (51.5)

.72 (18.4)

.22 (5.5)
.43 (11.0)

1.44 (36.5)

2.20 (56.0)

1.44 (36.5)

2.20 (56.0)

.72 (18.4)

SAO1-FLX2
44501-0765
(for use with plastic or stainless steel headed switches)
SAO1-FLX2

.37 (9.5)

SAO1-FLX1

SA01-FLX2

1.40 (35.5)
.37 (9.5.)

or (for
S.Suse
headed
switches)
SAO1-FLX1
44501-0760
with plastic
or stainless steel headed switches)

.37 (9.5.)

44501-0790 (for use with plastic
SA01-FLX1

1.99 (50.5)

ith S.S

.77 (19.5)
1.99 (50.5)

)

.57 (14.5)
1.40 (35.5)

.24 (6.0)

.55 (14.0)

.28 (7.0)
2.09 (53.0)

44501-0785 (for use with S.S
44501-0790 (for use with plastic
44501-0785 (for use with S.S
44501-0790 (for use
headed switches)
or S.S headed switches)
headed switches)
or S.S headed switche

44501-0790 (for use with plastic
or stainless(for
steeluse
headed
44501-0755
withswitches)
plastic

2.87 (73.0)
.57 (14.5)
1.40 (35.5)

)

44501-0755 (for use with plastic
SAO1-FSTD
headed
switches)
headed switches)

.57 (14.5)
1.40 (35.5)

SA01-FSTD

.30 (7

1.57 (40.0)

2
1.57 (40.0)

.55 (14.0)

.14 (3.5

.79 (20.0)

.16 (4.0)
2.13
(54.0)
.55 (14.0)

.55 (14.0)

1.57 (40.0)

1.40 (35.6)

1.57 (40.0)

.16 (4.0)
2.13 (54.0)

.55 (14.0)
2.13
(54.0)

.72 (18.4)

.13 (3.4)
3.15 (80.0)
2.09
(53.0)
1.40
(35.5)

2.13 (54.0)

.72 (18.2).13 (3.4)

.13 (3.4)

.16 (4.0)

1.40 (35.5)

.72 (18.2) .13 (3.4)

.79 (20.0)

.72 (18.2)

SAO1-FSTD

.72 (18.4)

3.15 (80.0)
1.40 (35.5)
.16 (4.0)

SAO1-STD
44501-0755 (for use with plastic
headed switches)

1.40 (35.6)

SA01-STD
SAO1-STD

www.sti.com/info

T5009 & T5009-6

Safety Interlock Switches

Ordering
Model
T5009 Switch Only
T5009-021M
T5009-021MHH (High-Hold Model)
T5009-021N
T5009-021NHH (High-Hold Model)
T5009-021QD
T5009-021QDHH (High-Hold Model)
T5009-021SSM (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-021SSMHH (Stainless Steel Head, High-Hold Model)
T5009-021SSN (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-021SSNHH (Stainless Steel Head, High-Hold Model)
T5009-021SSCC (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-021SSCCHH (Stainless Steel Head, High-Hold Model)
T5009 Standard Actuator
T5009-021SM
T5009-021SMHH (High-Hold Model)
T5009-021SN
T5009-021SCC
T5009-021FSSM (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-021FSSN (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009 Flex 1 Actuator
T5009-021F1M
T5009-021F1MHH (High-Hold Model)
T5009-021F1N
T5009 Flex 2 Actuator
T5009-021F2M
T5009-021F2N
T5009-6 Switch Only
T5009-6022M
T5009-6022N
T5009-6031M
T5009-6031N
T5009-6040M
T5009-6040N
T5009-6022SSM (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-6022SSN (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-6031SSM (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-6031SSN (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-6040SSM (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-6040SSN (Stainless Steel Head)
T5009-6 Standard Actuator
T5009-6022SM
T5009-6022SN
T5009-6031SM
T5009-6031SN
T5009-6040SM
T5009-6040SN
Actuators For Plastic Headed T5009, T5009-6 Switches
SA01-STD, Standard Actuator T5009, T5009-6, Plastic Head Switches
Actuators For Stainless Steel Headed T5009, T5009-6 Switches
SA01-SSTD, Standard Actuator for T5009, T5009-6 Stainless Steel Head Switches
Actuators Compatible with both
Plastic and Stainless Steel Headed T5009, T5009-6 Switches
SA01-FLX1, Flex 1 Actuator T5009, T5009-6, Plastic or SS Headed Switches
SA01-FSTD, Flat Actuator T5009, T5009-6, Plastic or SS Headed Switches
SA01-FLX2, Flex 2 Actuator T5009, T5009-6, Plastic Head Switches
Accessories
Spare M20 to 1/2” NPT Adapter
M20 Cord Grip
BBM = Break Before Make Contacts

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Contacts

Wiring Entry

Part No.

2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM

3 x M20/NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
3 x 1/2 NPT
6-pin Micro AC Conn.
6-pin Micro AC Conn.
3 x M20/NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
3 x 1/2 NPT
6-pin Micro AC Conn.
6-pin Micro AC Conn.

44501-0010
44501-5010
44501-0020
44501-5020
44501-0030
44501-5030
44501-0040
44501-5040
44501-0050
44501-5050
44501-0060
44501-5060

2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM

3 x M20/NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
6-pin Micro AC Conn.
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT

44501-0110
44501-5110
44501-0450
44501-0410
44501-0500
44501-0520

2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO
2NC+1NO BBM

3 x M20/NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT

44501-0120
44501-5120
44501-0170

2NC+1NO BBM
2NC+1NO BBM

3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT

44501-0440
44501-0470

2NC+2NO BBM
2NC+2NO BBM
3NC+1NO BBM
3NC+1NO BBM
4NC BBM
4NC BBM
2NC+2NO BBM
2NC+2NO BBM
3NC+1NO BBM
3NC+1NO BBM
4NC BBM
4NC BBM

3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT

44501-1020
44501-1025
44501-1030
44501-1035
44501-1040
44501-1045
44501-2020
44501-2025
44501-2030
44501-2035
44501-2040
44501-2045

2NC+2NO BBM
2NC+2NO BBM
3NC+1NO BBM
3NC+1NO BBM
4NC BBM
4NC BBM

3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT
3 x M20/NPT
3 X 1/2 NPT

44501-3020
44501-3025
44501-3030
44501-3035
44501-3040
44501-3045

44501-0755
44501-0785

44501-0760
44501-0790
44501-0765
44512-0110
44512-0090

information on Accessories,
✎ For
including Conduit Lights and Cables with Mating Connectors,

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

see page G-122.

G-119

Safety Interlock Switches

A22TK

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Key Selector Switch
• Key-type selector switch with direct opening mechanism
• Selector Switch for secure equipment activation during
maintenance
• 30 types of exclusive keys make it more difficult to disable.
• The trapped key of the D4JL Guard Lock Safety-door Switch
has the same shape as the locking key of the D4SL-SK10-LK
Slide Key Unit. Units can be combined to improve safety.
(Specify the same key type.)
• Common to the switch part of Emergency Stop Switch A22E.
(Non-lighted model only)
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
G

Ratings

Characteristics

Contacts (Standard Load)
Rated
carry
current
(A)

Rated
voltage
(V)

Item
Rated current (A)

AC15
(inductive
load)

AC12
(resistive
load)

24 VAC

110 VAC

220 VAC

380 VAC

440 VAC

24 VDC
110 VDC
220 VDC

DC13
(inductive
load)

---

380 VDC

---

Dielectric strength

0.2

0.6

0.1

0.2

Shock resistance
Durability

Note:
1. Rated current values are determined according to the testing conditions.
The above ratings were obtained by conducting tests under the following
conditions.
(1) Ambient temperature: 20°±2°C
(2) Ambient humidity: 65±5%
(3) Operating frequency: 20 operations/minute
2. Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 VDC

Ordering
Model
A22TK-2LL-02-K01
A22TK-2LR-12-K01
A22TK-2RL-02-K01
A22TK-2RL-12-K01

Description
A22TK Base Model, 2 N/C, Left Key Release, Left
N/C Closed, Key Included
A22TK Base Model, 1 N/O + 2 N/C, Left Key
Release, Right N/C Closed, Key Included
A22TK Base Model, 2 N/C, RIGHT Key Release,
Left N/C Closed, Key Included
A22TK Base Model, 1 N/O +2 N/C, Right Key
Release, Left N/C Closed, Key Included

30 operations/minute max.
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)

Between
terminals of
same polarity

2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.

Between each
terminal and
ground

2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double
amplitude (within 1 ms)

Destruction

1000 m/s2

Malfunction *1

250 m/s2 max.

Mechanical

100,000 operations min.

Electrical

100,000 operations min.

Ambient operating temperature *2

-20 to +70°C

Ambient operating humidity

35% to 85%RH

Ambient storage temperature

-40 to +70°C

Degree of protection

IP65 *3

Electric shock protection class

Class II

PTI (tracking characteristic)

175

Degree of contamination

3 (EN60947-5-1)

*1. Malfunction within 1 ms.
*2. With no icing or condensation.
*3. The degree of protection from the front of the panel.
Note: 1. Do not allow the load current to exceed the rated value.

2. The contact ON/OFF timing is not synchronized. Confirm
performance before application.

3. Once the contacts have been used to switch a load, however, they
cannot be used to switch smaller loads. The contact surfaces will
become rough once they have been used and contact reliability
for smaller loads may be reduced.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G-120

Electrical

Vibration resistance *1

0.5

30 operations/minute max.

Insulation resistance

---

1.5
---

Allowable operating
frequency

DC12
(resistive
load)

A22TK
Mechanical

www.sti.com/info

Safety Interlock Switches

XT5009

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Universal Tongue-Operated Safety
Interlock Switch
• Strong and versatile—the compact size of the strong, glass-filled polyester housing allows this popular switch to be used in most applications
• NEMA 6 enclosure enables the XT5009 to withstand water washdown
cleaning
• Rotatable head gives four possible actuator entry points for versatile
installation. A blanking plug is supplied for the unused entry.
• Small swing radius allows use on doors with a swing radius as small as
2.5 in. when using the optional flexible actuator with alignment guide
• Vibration resistant—preventing unwanted opening of guard doors on
vibrating machines
• Long life—the XT5009, with its stainless steel actuator, is designed for a
minimum of two million actuations
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment
today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

Safety Interlock Switches

D4NS-SK/D4JL-SK

D4NS

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

D4NS/D4JL-mounting Slide Key
• Safety-door switch attachments fit doors on aluminum frames
as small as 20 mm2 and frames that are large enough to
enclose robotics
• Shortens the lead time for safety-door switch mounting design
• Enables applications in compliance with ANSI/RIA U.S. robot
standards (excluding the D4NS-SK01)
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Note: Safety-door switches
are sold separately.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

G-121

Safety Interlock Switches

Accessories

Interlock

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.
OMRON Automation and Safety has a complete line of accessory products for your safety interlock needs. For specific part numbers for replacement actuators or fuses, please refer to the specific
product datasheet. Contact Omron for any concerns or questions.

Replacement Contact Blocks

M20 to NPT Adapter

44512-0110

Part No.

M20 to NPT Adapter (steel)

44512-0310

BL6009, 2 N/C + 1 N/O, Rear
Mounting

44512-0400

M20 Cord Grip (4-5 mm ID)

44512-0090

ER6019, 2 N/C + 1 N/O, Side
Mounting

44512-0390

M20 Cord Grip (7-10 mm ID)

44512-0410

M20 Blanking Plug

44512-0100

ER1022, ER1032, ER5018,
ER6022, 2 N/C + 1 N/O terminals
(11/12, 21/22, 33/34)

44512-2020

M20 Plastic Nut 10-Pack

44512-0105

NPT to M20 Adapter

44512-1010

ER1022, ER1032, 2 N/C + 1 N/O
terminals (41/42, 51/52, 63/64)

44512-2021

ER5018, ER6022, 3 N/C

44512-2030

ER6022, 2 N/C + 2 N/O

44512-2221

ER6022, 3 N/C + 1 N/O

44512-2311

Conduit LED, M20, Amber, 24 VDC 44512-0500

ER6022, 4 N/C

44512-2400

Conduit LED, M20, Amber, 110 VAC 44512-0510

HP6009, 2 N/C + 1 N/O, Side
Mounting

44512-0390

Conduit LED, M20, Red, 24 VDC

44512-0520

T5009, 2 N/C + 1 N/O

44512-3210

Conduit LED, M20, Red, 110 VAC

44512-0530

T5009-6, 3 N/C + 1 N/O

44512-3310

T5009-6, 4 N/C

44512-3400

Part No.

Conduit LED, M20, Green, 24 VDC 44512-0540
Conduit LED, M20, Green, 110 VAC 44512-0550

Conduit LED Beacons

Micro Style Cables
Part No.
MA-2, 6, 9, 20, MC-S3, HP2007, T2007, T5007,
Plastic SL Series, D4NS
5 m Cable with 4-Pin Female
Connector Micro DC

44512-0600

10 m Cable with 4-Pin Female
Connector Micro DC

44512-0610

CM & MC Series
5 m Cable with 8-Pin Female
Connector

44512-0620

10 m Cable with 8-Pin Female
Connector

44512-0630

Part No.
Conduit LED, M20, Amber, 24 VDC 44512-1500
Conduit LED, M20, Red, 24 VDC

44512-1520

Conduit LED, M20, Green, 24 VDC 44512-1540

Conduit Lights and Remote
Indicator
Part No.
Conduit Light, M20, Amber, no bulb 44512-0130

HP3009, T3009, T5009, MA-21, Plastic SL
Series, MA-15, MA-35, MFS
5 m Cable with 6-Pin Female
Connector (Dual Keyway)

44512-0640

10 m Cable with 6-Pin Female
connector (Dual Keyway)

44512-0650

Conduit Light, M20, Red, no bulb

44512-0290

Conduit Light, NPT, Amber, no bulb 44512-0260
Conduit Light, NPT, Red, no bulb

44512-0420

Bulb for Conduit Light, 24 VAC/DC 44512-0200
Bulb for Conduit Light, 110 VAC

44512-0140

Bulb for Conduit Light, 220 VAC

44512-0190

Security Bits/Drives

Cabling Components
Part No.

G-122

Conduit LED Beacons
(High-Intensity)

M16 to NPT Adapter

44512-0300

M16 Cord Grip (4-7 mm ID)

44512-0080

M20 to PG11

44512-0120

Part No.
Spare Bit for Security Screw

44512-0050

Screwdriver for Security Bit

44512-0040

Lockoff Actuator for T4011, T5007, 44512-0700
T5009, TL5012, TL8012-S

www.sti.com/info

Lockoff Actuator

Accessories

Safety Interlock Switches

Universal Mounting Brackets
• Quickly and easily mounts non-contact
switches and actuators to structural
aluminum profiles
• Quickly and easily mounts tongue
actuated safety interlock switches to
structural aluminum profiles
• Quickly and easily mounts hinge
operated safety interlock switches to
structural aluminum profiles

• Use the universal mounting brackets to
mount non-contact switches to Ferrous
metals with minimal loss of range
• Designed to allow for easy
alignment of switch to actuator
• Constructed from 6060-T5 aluminum,
these brackets are resistant to harsh
environments

7.11
0.28

25.78
1.02

M4 x 8

5.31
0.21

91.25
3.59

UMB-THP30 mounting bracket kit, being used to
mount a T2008 interlock switch.

Mounting slots
are designed for
#10 orto
M5
beingsize
used
hardware

29.34
UMB-NC10
1.16

mounting bracket kit,
mount a CM-S2 switch and actuator.

G
The brackets are designed to allow for
movement along two axis.

29.64
1.17
7.11
0.28

25.78
1.02

UMB Universal
Mounting Bracket

Long bracket included with kit UMB-NC10

Bracket, Mounting
Kit #UMB-NC10

M4x8

5.31
0.21

91.25
3.59

7.11
0.28

25.78
1.02
Mounting slots
are designed for
size #10 or M5
hardware

29.34
1.16

15.24
0.60
51.56
2.03

M4x8

Mounting slots
are designed for
size #10 or M5
hardware

29.64
1.17

Short bracket included with kits UMB-NC20
and UMB-THP30

Long bracket included with kit UMB-NC10

Description
M4 x 8

29.21
UMB-NC10
1.15

sizeBracket
#10 or M5 Kit for
Universal Mounting
hardware
non-contact switches
and actuators
(Includes long bracket)

Mounting slots
are designed for

UMB-NC20
Universal
Mounting Bracket Kit for
Short
bracket included with
kits UMB-NC20
and UMB-THP30
non-contact switches and actuators
(Includes short bracket)
UMB-THP30

Non-Contact
Bracket, Mounting
Kit #UMB-NC20
Kit #UMB-THP30

5.31
0.21

Model

51.56
2.03

Switch or Actuator

7.11
0.28

25.78
1.02
15.24
0.60

Aluminum
Structural
Profile

Screw, M4, Tamper-Proof
(OSTI Supplied)

5.31
0.21

29.21
1.15

T-Nut
(User Supplied)
Bolt, M5 or #10
(User Supplied)

Universal Mounting Bracket Kit for hinge
pins and tongue-actuated switches
(Includes short bracket)

Compatible Switches & Actuators

Mounting Capability

Part No.

CM-S2, CM-S221, CM-S6, CM-S621, MA-6,
MA-9, MA-10, MA-11, MA-16, MA-S36,
MC-S2, MF-1, MFS-12

Capable of 1 switch and
1 actuator

44512-3010

CM-S1, CM-S11, CM-S31, CM-S5, CM-S521,
MA-14, MA-15, MA-S34, MA-S35, MC-S1,
MC-S31

Capable of 1 switch
and 1 actuator

44512-3020

HP2011, T2008, T2011
(switches only)

Capable of 1 switch
(no actuator)

44512-3030

Note: Tamper-proof hardware is included with each kit to mount the switch or actuator to the Universal Mounting Bracket. No hardware is supplied to
mount the Universal Mounting Bracket to the aluminum profile.

www.sti.com/info

G-123

Accessories

SLD Series — Switch Locking Devices

• Allows personnel to quickly lock a safety
interlock switch to a safe position allowing for certain types of maintenance
• Intended for use as an alternate control
method while performing tasks that
are routine, repetitive or integral to the
production process (ANSI/ASSE Z244.12003 (R2008) section 5.4)
• Robust design and construction blocks
all access points to the actuation
mechanism of the safety interlock switch

• Designed to accept locks with standard
shackle diameters of 5/16” or 7 mm;
standard expansion devices may also
be used in conjunction with the SLD
• The SLD series will work for designated
switches with or without the optional
stainless steel guide. If the optional
stainless steel guide is used on a switch
that is integrated with a slide bolt assembly, it will not be possible to attach a
Switch Locking Device

SLD dimensions,
✎ For
see www.sti.com/switches

Warning: The SLD Series is intended for use
as an alternative control method provided for
by ANSI/ASSE Z244.1-2003 (R2008) section
5.4. This device does not protect against
malicious tampering.

Model

Compatible Interlock Switches

Part No.

SLD26-01*

T4011, T5007, T5009, TL8012-S, D4SL-N

44526-0801

SLD34-01**

T2008, T2011, T4012, TL4019

44534-0801

SLD35-01***

T4016, TL4024

44535-0801

Notes:
*The SLD26-01 will not work with optional catch on T5007, or optional latch on T4011.
**The SLD34-01 is only compatible with slide bolt assemblies 44534-8130, -8140, -8070.
***The SLD35-01 is not compatible with slide bolt assemblies.

G-124

www.sti.com/info

Optional stainless
steel guide

Safety Interlock Switches

Emergency Stop Devices
Contents
Selection Guide

H-2

E-Stops
A165E H-3
A22E H-9
Trip Cords
ER1022 H-17
ER1032 H-17
ER5018 H-18
ER6022 H-21
ER6022-SS H-24
Trip Cords for Explosive Atmospheres
XER1022 H-24
XER1032 H-25
XER6022 & 6022-SS

H-25

H-1

Emergency Stop Devices

Selection Guide

ESD

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Selecting the Proper Emergency Stop Device for Your Application
1
Selecting the Correct
Emergency Stop Device is Easy

Do you need
a Trip Cord/
Rope Pull Switch?

Our selection guide will help you with the selection
process. Most applications require the use of an Emergency
Stop device. On equipment where the operator is within easy
reach of a single point, a pushbutton switch is used. When
an operator needs access over a larger area, such as on a
conveyor, a Trip Cord or Rope Pull switch is typically used.
The following questions will guide you to the appropriate
models. Contact OMRON Automation and Safety for
assistance.

G
Safety Interlocks
See Section G of this
catalog for safety
interlock products.

yes

2
H

Does it need
to operate in
an explosive
atmosphere?

E-Stop
• A165E — p. H-3
(16 mm panel mount, optional light)
Rapid delivery product

• A22E — p. H-9
yes

(22 mm panel mount, optional light)
Rapid delivery product

Trip Cord (Rope Pull; to 40 m)
Trip Cord (Rope Pull)
• XER6022— p. H-25
(to 80 m)
Rapid delivery product

• XER6022-SS — p. H-25
(to 100 m)
Rapid delivery product

• XER1022 — p. H-24
(to 125 m)

• XER1032 — p. H-25
(to 200 m)

• ER5018 — p. H-18
(with E-stop button)
Rapid delivery product

Trip Cord (Rope Pull; over 40 m)
• ER6022 — p. H-21
(to 80 m, optional LED indicator)
Rapid delivery product

• ER1022 — p. H-17
(to 125 m, with LED indicator)
Rapid delivery product

• ER1032 — p. H-17
(to 200 m, with LED indicator)
Rapid delivery product

• ER6022-SS — p. H-24
(to 100 m, optional LED indicator)

H-2

www.sti.com/info

Emergency Stop Devices

A165E

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Emergency Stop Switch
(16 mm diameter)
• Separate construction with one of the smallest class of depths
in the world
• Direct opening mechanism to open contacts in emergencies,
such as when they are welded.
• Conforms to EN418.
• Includes a safety lock to prevent misuse.
• Features separate construction that allows the switch to be
separated for easier wiring and one-piece-like construction that
allows easier handling.
• Models available with 3 contacts built into a single block
(A165E-U)
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications

Switch Ratings

Certified Standards

Models with
Separate Construction

Certification
body

Standard

File No.

UL *1

UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14

E41515

TÜV SÜD

EN 60947-5-1,
EN 60947-5-5

Consult your
representative for
details.

CQC (CCC)

GB14048.5

2003010303070678

*Certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 is authorized by the mark.

Models with
One-piece Construction

Rated Voltage

Resistive Load

Rated Voltage

125 VAC

250 VAC

0.5 A

30 VDC

Note: Minimum applicable load:
5 VDC, 150 mA

Resistive Load

Note: Minimum applicable load:
5 VDC, 1 mA

LED Ratings (Only for models with LEDs)
Certified Standard Ratings
UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14, CCC (GB14048.5)
Models with
Separate Construction

Rated Voltage

Rated Current

Operation Voltage

24 VAC/VDC

8 mA

24 VAC/DC ±5%

Models with
One-piece Construction

Rated Voltage

Resistive Load

Rated Voltage

125 VAC

Resistive Load
1A

250 VAC

0.5 A

30 VDC

TÜV (EN 60947-5-1)
Models with
Separate Construction

Models with
One-piece Construction

Rated Voltage

Resistive Load

Rated Voltage

Resistive Load

250 VAC

0.5 A

30 VDC

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

H-3

A165E

Emergency Stop Devices

Specifications (continued)
Characteristics
Emergency Stop Switch
Non-lighted
A165E-S/A165E-M

Item
Allowable operating
frequency

Mechanical

20 operations/minute max.

Electrical

10 operations/minute max.

Insulation resistance

Dielectric strength

Vibration resistance
Shock resistance

Durability

Non-lighted, One-piece
construction
A165E-U

Lighted
A165E-LS/A165E-LM

100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Between terminals of
same polarity

1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.

Between terminals of
different polarity

2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.

Between each terminal
and ground

2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.

Between lamp terminals

1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min. *1

—

Malfunction

10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude (malfunction within 1 ms)

Destruction

500 m/s2

Malfunction

300 m/s2 max.
(malfunction within 1 ms)

Mechanical

100,000 operations min.

Electrical

100,000 operations min.

150 m/s2 max.
(malfunction within 1 ms)

Degree of protection

IP65 Oil-resistant *2

Electric shock protection class

Class II

IP65 *2

PTI (tracking characteristic)

175

Degree of contamination

3 (EN60947-5-1)

Weight

Approx. 16 g (in case of DPST-NC switches)

Ambient operating temperature

-10 to +55°C (with no icing or condensation)

Ambient operating humidity

35% to 85%RH

Ambient storage temperature

-25 to +65°C (with no icing or condensation)

IP65 Oil-resistant *2

*1. LED not mounted. (Test them with the LED removed.)
*2. Degree of protection from the front of the panel.

Operating Characteristics
Characteristics of models
with separate construction

Item

H-4

Characteristics of models
with one-piece construction

Operating force

OF max.

14.7 N

Releasing force

RF min.

0.1 N-m

Pretravel

3.5±0.5 mm

www.sti.com/info

A165E

Emergency Stop Devices

Dimensions

(mm)

A165E-S

Panel cutout
dimensions
30 dia.

Mounting ring

3+0.1
0 dia.

12.3
15.8

M16 × 1

7.8+0.3
0

Non-lighted models
30 mm diameter

16+0.2
0 dia.

Lock ring
Lock

Packing (t=0.5)

1.4

12.1
18

2.8

2.6

A165E-LS
30 dia.

Panel cutout
dimensions

Mounting ring
M16 × 1

4.85

3+0.1
0 dia.

Lock ring

16+0.2
0 dia.

Lock

Packing (t=0.5)

1.4

12.1

2.8

2.6

12.3
15.8

Lighted models
30 mm diameter

7.8+0.3
0

20±0.8

10.8±5
22.0±0.8
28.5±0.8

· When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
· Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.

10.8±0.5
20±0.8

22.1±0.8
28.5±0.8

A165E-S-03U
21.5±0.5

30 dia.

M16 × 1

Panel cutout
dimensions
3+0.1
0 dia.
16+0.2
0 dia.
7.8+0.3
0

Non-lighted,
One-piece construction models
30 mm diameter

Lock
20.5±0.8

28.5±0.8

Packing (t=0.5)
Lock ring

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.
Mounting ring

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

· When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
· Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.

H-5

A165E

Emergency Stop Devices

Dimensions (continued)
A165E-M

40 dia.

Panel cutout
dimensions

Mounting ring
M16 × 1 Switch

16+0.2
0 dia.

3+0.1
0 dia.

12.3

15.8

7.8+0.3
0

0.5

Non-lighted models
40 mm diameter

(mm)

Lock ring
Lock

Packing (t=0.5)

1.4

· When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
· Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.

12.1

2.8

2.6

10.8±0.5

20±0.8

21.1±0.8
28.5±0.8

A165E-LM
40 dia.

Panel cutout
dimensions

Mounting ring

M16 × 1 Switch

15.8

0.5
12.3

Lock ring
Lock

6.05
18

2.8

Packing (t=0.5)

20±0.8

3+0.1
0 dia.

16+0.2
0 dia.

7.8+0.3
0

Lighted models
40 mm diameter

10.8±0.5
22.1±0.8
28.5±0.8

· When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
· Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.

A165E-M-03U
40 dia.

21.5±0.5

M16 × 1

Lock
20.5±0.8

Panel cutout
dimensions
16+0.2
0 dia.

3+0.1
0 dia.

7.8+0.3
0

One-piece construction models
40 mm diameter

28.5±0.8

Packing (t=0.5)
Lock ring

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

H-6

www.sti.com/info

Mounting ring

· When applying a coating such as
paint to the panel, dimensions
after the coating must satisfy the
specified dimensions.
· Recommended panel thickness:
0.5 to 3.2 mm.

A165E

Emergency Stop Devices

Ordering
Model Number Structure (Completely Assembled)
(Shipped as a set that includes the Operation Unit and light source.)

A165E – □ - □ - □

1 2 3

1 Operation Unit Shape and Function
S: Non-lighted, push-lock, turn-reset, 30 dia. pushbutton
LS: Lighted, push-lock, turn-reset, 30 dia. pushbutton
M: Non-lighted, push-lock, turn-reset, 40. dia. pushbutton
LM: Lighted, push-lock, turn-reset, 40 dia. pushbutton

2 Light Source
None: Non-lighted
24D: LED, 24 VAC/VDC ±5% operation voltage, 24 VAC/VDC rated voltage

Note: Models with separate construction (SPST-NC and DPST-NC) are for normal loads only. One-piece models
(TPST-NC) are for either normal loads or microloads.

3 Contacts
01: SPST-NC
02: DPST-NC
03U: TPST-NC*

*TPST-NC models have once-piece construction with the contact unit. Only non-lighted models are available.

List of Models
Diameter of
Operation Unit

Function

Model

Separate
construction

A165E

30 mm models
40 mm models

Shape

(30 mm model)

Push-Lock,
turn-reset
A165E-□-03U

One-piece
construction
(30 mm model)

List of Sets
Illumination
LED

Rated voltage

Pushbutton color

Pushbutton size

Terminal

24 VAC/VDC
30 dia.

Non-lighted

LED

---

24 VAC/VDC

Red

Solder terminal
40 dia.

Non-lighted

---

Contact form

Model

SPST-NC

A165E-LS-24D-01

DPST-NC

A165E-LS-24D-02

SPST-NC

A165E-S-01

DPST-NC

A165E-S-02

SPST-NC

A165E-LM-24D-01

DPST-NC

A165E-LM-24D-02

SPST-NC

A165E-M-01

DPST-NC
30 dia.

---

40 dia.

TPST-NC

A165E-M-02
A165E-S-03U
A165E-M-03U

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

H-7

A165E

Emergency Stop Devices

Ordering (continued)
Individual Parts (for Switches with Separate Construction)
Operation Units
Appearance
30 dia.

40 dia.

Switches
Illumination

Model

Non-lighted

A165E-S

Lighted

A165E-LS

Non-lighted

A165E-M

Lighted

A165E-LM

Lamps
Appearance

LED color

Red

Bright

Illumination
Non-lighted

Lighted

Contact
form

Model

SPST-NC

A165E-01

DPST-NC

A165E-02

SPST-NC

A165E-01L

DPST-NC

A165E-02L

Contact
form

Model

Switch Units

Rated
voltage

Model

5 VDC

A16-5DSR

12 VAC/
VDC
24 VAC/
VDC

Appearance

Illumination
Lighted

A16-12DSR

SPST-NC

A165E-R-24D-01

DPST-NC

A165E-R-24D-02

A16-24DSR

Accessories (Order separately)

Item

Appearance

Type

Model

Precautions

Yellow Plate

Yellow, 45 dia.

A16Z-5070

Use this as an emergency stop
nameplate.

Panel Plug

Round

A16ZT-3003

Used for covering the panel cutouts for
future panel expansion.
Degree of protection: IP40
Color: Black

Tightening Tool

---

A16Z-3004

Useful for repetitive mounting. Be careful
not to tighten excessively.

A16Z-5080

Convenient for extracting the Switch and
Lamp.

Extractor

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

H-8

www.sti.com/info

Emergency Stop Devices

A22E

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Emergency Stop Switch
(22 mm or 25 mm diameter)
• Install in 22-dia. or 25-dia. panel cutout
• Direct opening mechanism to open the circuit when the contact
welds → .
• Safety lock mechanism prevents operating errors.
• Easy mounting and removal of Switch Blocks using a lever.
• Mount three Switch Units in series to improve wiring efficiency
(with non-lighted Switch Units, three Units can be mounted for
multiple contacts).
• Finger protection mechanism on Switch Unit provided as a
standard feature.
• Install using either round, or forked crimp terminals.
• Non-lighted versions are IP65 (oil resistant).
Lighted versions are IP65.
• A lock plate is provided as a standard feature to ensure that the
control box and switch are not easily separated.
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications

Certified Standard Ratings

Ratings

• UL, cUL (File No.E41515)
6 A at 220 VAC, 10 A at 110 VAC
• TÜV (EN60947-5-1) (Low Voltage Directive)
3 A at 220 VAC
• CCC (GB14048.5)
3 A at 240 VAC, 1.5 A at 24 VDC

Contacts (Standard Load)
Rated
carry
current
(A)

Certified Standards
Certification
body

Standard

File No.

UL *1

UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14

E41515

TÜV SÜD

EN60947-5-1,
EN60947-5-5
(certified direct opening
mechanism)

Consult your
representative for
details.

CQC (CCC)

GB14048.5

2003010303070635

KOSHA *2

EN60947-5-1

2004-220, 2007-27

Note: Only models with NC contacts have a direct opening mechanism.
*1. Certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 is authorized by the UL mark.
*2. Some models have been certified. Certification has been obtained for
the Switch Unit and the Lamp Socket.

Rated
voltage
(V)

Rated current (A)
AC15
(inductive
load)

AC12
(resistive
load)

DC13
(inductive
load)

DC12
(resistive
load)

---

24 VDC

1.5

110 VDC

0.5

0.2

0.6

0.1

0.2

24 VAC

110 VAC

220 VAC

380 VAC

440 VAC

220 VDC

---

380 VDC

LED Indicators without Voltage Reduction Unit

Rated voltage

Rated current

Operating voltage

6 VDC

60 mA

6 VDC±5%

6 VAC

60 mA

6 VAC±5%

12 VAC/VDC

30 mA

12 VAC/VDC±5%

24 VAC/VDC

15 mA

24 VAC/VDC±5%

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

H-9

A22E

Emergency Stop Devices

Specifications (continued)
Characteristics
Emergency Stop Switch
Item
Allowable operating
frequency

Non-lighted model: A22E
Mechanical

30 operations/minute max. *3

Electrical

30 operations/minute max. *3

Between terminals of same polarity

2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.

Between each terminal and ground

2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.

Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength

100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)

Vibration resistance *2
Shock resistance
Durability

H-10

10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude (within 1 ms)
Destruction

1,000 m/s2

Malfunction *2

250 m/s2 max.

Mechanical

300,000 operations min. *3

Electrical

300,000 operations min. *3

Ambient operating temperature *1

-20 to 70°C

Ambient operating humidity

35% to 85%

Ambient storage temperature

-40 to 70°C

Degree of protection

IP65 Oil-resistant *4

Electric shock protection class

Class II

PTI (tracking characteristic)

175

Degree of contamination

3 (EN60947-5-1)

*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.

Lighted Model: A22EL

With no icing or condensation.
Malfunction within 1 ms.
Setting and resetting once is counted as one operation.
Degree of protection from the front of the panel.

www.sti.com/info

-20 to 55°C

IP65 *4

A22E

Emergency Stop Devices

Dimensions

(mm)

Non-lighted Models
A22E-MP

A22E-LP

Medium Push-pull (40-dia.)

Large Push-pull (60-dia.)

60 dia.

40 dia.

1.8

1.8
0.5

0.5

5.9

54.7

A22E-S

A22E-M

Small Push-lock, Turn-reset (30-dia.)

Medium Push-lock, Turn-reset (40-dia.)

30 dia.

2
2

1.5

34
34

40 dia.

1.8
0.5

6.5

5.9

1.8
18.5

54.7

0.5

5.9
41.2

54.7

A22E-L

Large Push-lock, Turn-reset (60-dia.)

60 dia.

1.8
0.5
5.9
54.7

A22E-SK

A22E-MK

Small Push-lock, Key-reset (30-dia.)

Medium Push-lock, Key-reset (40-dia.)

Lighted Models

Switch dimensions when mounted to a DPST-NO (or DPST-NC)
one-piece Switch Block.

A22EL-M

30 dia.

Medium Push-lock, Turn-reset (40-dia.)

40 dia.

1.5

1.8

1.8
0.5
5.9
25

40 dia.

54.7

0.5

24 44
25

5.9
32

54.7

57.8
6.5

72.7

1.8
18.5

0.5
32

5.9
41.2
54.7

Note: The operation unit is an example for the A22E-M.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

H-11

A22E

Emergency Stop Devices

Ordering
Model Number Structure (Completely Assembled)
Shipped as a set that includes the Operation Unit, Lamp (lighted models only), and Switch.

A22E – □ - □ - □ - □ - □

1 2 3 4 5
3 Light Source Without Voltage Reduction Unit

1 Lighted/Non-lighted

Without Voltage Reduction Unit —
(none): Non-lighted
6A: LED, 6 VAC
12A: LED, 12 VAC/VDC
24A: LED, 24 VAC, VDC
With Voltage Reduction Unit —
T1: LED, 100 VAC
T2: LED, 200 VAC

(none): Non-lighted
L: Lighted

*Lighted emergency stop switches are available only
for the medium (M) push-lock turn-reset models

2 Head Size
MP: Medium 40 dia., push-pull
S: Small, 30 dia., push-lock turn-reset
M: Medium, 40 dia., push-lock turn-reset
L: Large, 60 dia., push-lock turn-reset

4 Contacts
01: SPST-NC
11: SPST-NO + SPST-NC
02: DPST-NC
12: DPST-NC + SPST-NO
03: TPST-NC

5 Configuration
(none): Switch only
B Switch with integrated
control box

Equipped with 24 VAC/DC LED.

List of Models (Completely Assembled)
Non-lighted Models
Operating

Contact Configuration

40-dia. head
Medium Push-pull
A22E-MP

SPST-NC

A22E-MP-01

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

A22E-MP-11

DPST-NC

A22E-MP-02

30-dia. head
Small Push-lock Turn-reset
A22E-S

SPST-NC

A22E-S-01 *

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

A22E-S-11 *

DPST-NC

A22E-S-02 *

40-dia. head
Medium Push-lock Turn-reset
A22E-M

60-dia. head
Large Push-lock Turn-reset
A22E-L

DPST-NC + SPST-NO

A22E-S12 *

TPST-NC

A22E-S-03 *

SPST-NC

A22E-M-01 *

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

A22E-M-11 *

DPST-NC

A22E-M-02 *

DPST-NC + SPST-NO

A22E-M-12 *

TPST-NC

A22E-M-03 *

SPST-NC

A22E-L-01 *

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

A22E-L-11 *

DPST-NC

A22E-L-02 *

*Models with Korean S-mark certification.
Note: Yellow cap models are also available (not for emergency stop use). Contact your representative.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

H-12

Set Model

Appearance

www.sti.com/info

Color of cap

Red

A22E

Emergency Stop Devices

Ordering (continued)
List of Models (Completely Assembled) (continued)
Lighted Models
Operating

Appearance

Push-lock turn-reset system

Contact configuration

40-dia. head
Push-lock
Turn-reset without Voltage
Reduction Unit
A22E

Lighting

SPST-NC

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

DPST-NC
40-dia. head
Push-lock
Turn-reset with Voltage
Reduction Unit
A22E

LED

SPST-NC

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

DPST-NC

Rated voltage

Set Model

6 VAC

A22EL-M-6A-01 *

12 VAC/VDC

A22EL-M-12A-01 *

24 VAC/VDC

A22EL-M-24A-01 *

12 VAC/VDC

A22EL-M-12A-11 *

24 VAC/VDC

A22EL-M-24A-11 *

6 VAC

A22EL-M-6A-02 *

12 VAC/VDC

A22EL-M-12A-02 *

24 VAC/VDC

A22EL-M-24A-02 *

100 VAC

A22EL-M-T1-01

200 VAC

A22EL-M-T2-01

100 VAC

A22EL-M-T1-11

200 VAC

A22EL-M-T2-11

100 VAC

A22EL-M-T1-02

200 VAC

A22EL-M-T2-02

Color of cap

Red

*Models with Korean S-mark certification.

With EMO/EMS Indication
Operating

Set Model

Appearance

Contact Configuration

40-dia. head
Medium Push-lock
Turn reset
With EMO Indication

SPST-NC

A22E-M-01-EMO*

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

A22E-M-11-EMO*

DPST-NC

A22E-M-02-EMO*

DPST-NC + SPST-NO

A22E-M-12-EMO*

TPST-NC

A22E-M-03-EMO*

SPST-NC

A22E-M-01-EMS*

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

A22E-M-11-EMS*

DPST-NC

A22E-M-02-EMS*

DPST-NC + SPST-NO

A22E-M-12-EMS*

TPST-NC

A22E-M-03-EMS*

40-dia. head
Medium Push-lock
Turn reset
With EMS Indication

Color of cap

Red

*Models with Korean S-mark certification.
Note: “Emergency Off (EMO)” shroud sold separately.

Switch with Integrated Control Box
Appearance

Contact configuration

Model

SPST-NC

A22E-M-01B *

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

A22E-M-11B *

DPST-NC

A22E-M-02B *

DPST-NC/SPST-NO

A22E-M-12B

DPST/NC-SPST-NO

A22E-MP-12B

DPST-NC

A22E-M-24A-02B

*Models with Korean S-mark certification.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

H-13

A22E

Ordering (continued)
Subassembled
The Operation Unit, Lamp, or Switch can be ordered separately. Use them in combination for models
that are not available as assembled units. These can also be used as inventory for maintenance parts.

*Up to three Switch Units can be mounted for multiple contacts.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

H-14

www.sti.com/info

Emergency Stop Devices

A22E

Emergency Stop Devices

Ordering (continued)
Operation Units
Non-lighted
Sealing capability

IP65 oil-resistant models

Size

Function

Small (30 dia.)

Medium (40 dia.)

Large (60 dia.)

A22E-MP

Push-pull

---

A22E-S

A22E-M

A22E-L

Push-lock, turn-reset

Lighted
Sealing capability
Function

Size

IP65
Medium (40 dia.)
A22EL-M

Push-lock, turn-reset

Switch (Standard Load)
Without Voltage Reduction Unit

Non-lighted

Classification

Lighted

Appearance

Switch Action

Momentary

Contacts
For standard loads

Momentary

Model

SPST-NC

A22-01M

A22L-01M

SPST-NO + SPST-NC

A22-11M

A22L-11M

DPST-NC

A22-02M

A22L-02M

With Voltage Reduction Unit
Classification

Lighted (110 VAC)

Appearance

Switch Action

Momentary

Contacts
For standard loads

Lighted (220 VAC)

Momentary

Model

SPST-NC

A22L-01M-T1

A22L-01M-T2

SPST-NO + SPST-NC

A22L-11M-T1

A22L-11M-T2

DPST-NC

A22L-02M-T1

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

A22L-02M-T2
Note: When using with a Voltage Reduction Unit, use the A22-24AR.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

H-15

A22E

Emergency Stop Devices

Ordering (continued)
Lamp
LED
Appearance

LED light

Red

Standard

Rated voltage

Model

6 VAC

A22-6AR

12 VAC/VDC

A22-12AR

24 VAC/VDC

A22-24AR

Note: For voltage-reduction lighting, use the A22-24AR.

Incandescent
Appearance

Rated voltage

Model

6 VDC

A22-5

14 VAC

A22-12

28 VAC

A22-24

130 VAC

A22-H1

Accessories (Order Separately)
Item

Appearance

H
Legend Plates for
Emergency Stop

Control Boxes
(Enclosures)

Model

60-dia. black letters on yellow
back-ground

A22Z-3466-1

90-dia. black letters on yellow
back-ground

A22Z-3476-1

60-dia. black letters on yellow
back-ground

A22Z-3466-2

“EMERGENCY OFF” is indicated on the
plate.

One hole, yellow box
(for emergency stop)

A22Z-B101Y

Material: Polycarbonate resin

E-stop Shroud for EMO,
Yellow

---

A22Z-EG1

E-stop Shroud for EMS,
White

---

A22Z-EG1-W

E-stop Shroud, Yellow

Remarks

Classification

---

A22Z-EG2

“EMERGENCY STOP” is indicated on the
plate.

Provides SEMI-S2/SEMATECH
Application Guide for SEMI-S2
compatibility. The SEMI-S2-compatible
Shroud and legend plate for
EMERGENCY OFF come as a set. Use
with an A22E Emergency Stop Switch. (for
emergency shutoff) *
Provides SEMI-S2/SEMATECH
Application Guide for SEMI-S2
compatibility. The SEMI-S2-compatible
Shroud and legend plate for
EMERGENCY STOP come as a set. Use
with an A22E Emergency Stop Switch. (for
emergency stop) *
SEMI-S2/SEMATECH Application Guide
for SEMI S2-compatible Shroud. (for
emergency shutoff) *
Use together with an A22E Emergency
Stop Switch.

*These Shrouds are for use with semiconductor manufacturing equipment only. Do not use them for any other applications (e.g. emergency stop switches
for machines or devices such as Machine tools, Printing presses, Industrial machinery, etc).

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

H-16

www.sti.com/info

Emergency Stop Devices

ER1022

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Rope Pull Emergency Stop Switch
• Rope spans up to 125 m (410 ft.) makes this switch ideal for applications
where long rope spans are required
• IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure enables the ER1022 switch to withstand water
washdown cleaning
• Integral E-stop—the E-stop button provides emergency stopping
capability at the extreme end of the installation and is field serviceable
• Tension indicator makes system setup and rope tension maintenance
easy
• 4 N/C safety contacts and 2 N/O auxiliary contacts satisfy the most demanding
applications
• Vibration tolerant—the snap-acting switch contacts protect against nuisance tripping due
to vibration
• Indicator beacon—the indicator beacon, available in 24 VDC or 120 VAC, can be wired to flash
red to indicate a tripped switch or glow a constant green to indicate a properly reset switch
• Rubber bellows contain UV inhibitor making the switches suitable for outdoor
applications
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5
days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

Emergency Stop Devices

ER1032

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Rope Pull Emergency Stop Switch
• Rope spans up to 200 m (656 ft.) makes this switch ideal for
applications where long rope spans are required
• IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure enables the ER1032 switch to withstand
water washdown cleaning
• Integral E-stop—the E-stop button provides emergency stopping capability at the extreme end of the installation and is field
serviceable
• Tension indicator makes system setup and rope tension maintenance easy
• 4 N/C safety contacts and 2 N/O auxiliary contacts satisfy the
most demanding applications
• Vibration tolerant—the snap-acting switch contacts protect
against nuisance tripping due to vibration
• Indicator beacon—the indicator beacon, available in 24 VDC or 120 VAC can
be wired to flash red to indicate a tripped switch or glow a constant green to
indicate a properly reset switch
• Rubber bellows contain UV inhibitor making the switches suitable for outdoor
applications
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

H-17

Emergency Stop Devices

ER5018

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Compact Rope Pull Emergency Stop Switch
• Compact size allows this switch to be used on smaller machines with a mounting width of 40 mm
(1.57 in.) and covering rope spans up to 40 m (131 ft.)
• Tension indicator makes system setup and rope tension maintenance easy
• Contact arrangements of 2 N/C + 1 N/O or 3 N/C
• IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure enables the ER5018 switch to withstand water
washdown cleaning
• Heavy-duty housing—the die-cast housing and stainless steel eye nut
makes the ER5018 suitable for demanding industrial applications
• Integral E-Stop—the optional E‑stop provides emergency stopping at the
extreme end of the installation
• Reset button—the blue reset button must be pushed in order to return to
“machine run” condition following switch actuation by a pulled or slacked
rope
• Vibration tolerant—the snap-acting switch contacts protect against
nuisance tripping due to vibration
• Rubber bellows contain UV inhibitor making the switches suitable for outdoor applications
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days
R

Specifications
Electrical
Contact Configurations:
Safety Contacts:
Switching Ability

All Models
2 N/C + 1 N/O, 3 N/C
2 N/C, 3 N/C
AC: 120 V–6 A, 240 V–3 A, Inductive
DC: 24 V–2.5 A, Inductive
1 N/O
240 V/720 VA
5 V 5 mA DC
1 x 106 minimum

Auxiliary Contacts:
Max Switching Current/Volt/Amp:
Minimum Current:
Electrical Life:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Any position
Mounting Hardware:
2 x M5 screws
Max Rope Span:
40 m (131 ft.)
Operation Force:
< 125 N (28 lb.)
Tensioning Force to Run Position:
130 N (23 lb.) typical
Case Material:
Die-cast aluminum alloy
Eye Nut Material:
Stainless Steel
Stainless Accessory Items:
304 Stainless Steel
Wiring Entry:
3 x M20 or 3 x 0.5 in. NPT
Weight:
675 g (23.8 oz.)
Color:
Yellow
Mechanical Life:
1 x 106 minimum
Environmental
Protection:
IP67 (NEMA 6)
Operating Temperature:
-25 to 80°C (-13 to 176°F)
Cleaning:
Water washdown
Compliance
Standards:
IEC947-5-1, IEC947-5-5, EN418, UL508, BS5304
Approvals/Listings:
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, TUV
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C)—
i.e., with the rope properly tensioned and the machine able to be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

H-18

Conforms to IEC947-5-1, IEC947-5-5,
EN418, UL508, BS5304
UL and C-UL listed, TUV certified

www.sti.com/info

ER5018

Emergency Stop Devices

Operation
Installation Hardware Available
Tension/Gripper
Spring
Turnbuckle
Eyebolt

Blue Reset Knob

A blue reset button is provided
to easily return the unit back to
its machine-run position after
actuation.

Double Loop Clip

Thimble

Rope Pulley

Installation Hardware

RK Rope Tension Kit

Individual hardware items may be purchased for
specific installation requirements.

The RK Rope Tension Kit comes with all of the required
hardware for most installations. A spring is required as
shown in the installation example below.
For up to 50 m rope span, one rope end is terminated
with a thimble, permanent clamp, and quick link
attached.
For over 50 m rope span, 2 Tension/Gripper
assemblies are supplied (no quick link.)

Contact Arrangements

Emergency Push Button

The emergency push button may
be installed or repositioned in
the field. The ER5018 has two
possible mounting positions for the
emergency stop button.

0 mm
0 in
2NC + 1NO Versions
11/12 ER5018
21/22
33/34
3NC Versions
11/12
21/22
31/32
Contact Open

3.5
0.14

14.5
0.57

17.0
0.67

Rope Slack

Tension Range

Rope Pulled

Rope Slack

Tension Range

Rope Pulled

Every 3m
9.84 ft

500mm
19.7 in

Contact Closed

Mounting Specification

ER5018

500mm
19.7 in

Tensioner Gripper

ER5018

500mm
19.7 in

Every 3m
9.84 ft

Eyebolt Support

Safety Spring

Wall

Up to 30 m

Every 3m
9.84 ft

500mm
19.7 in

Up to 50 m

a guide to installing, see “Proper Installation of Rope or Wire Pull Emergen✎ For
cy Stop Devices” in the Expert Area Section of this catalog on page A-78.

www.sti.com/info

H-19

ER5018

Dimensions

(mm/in.)

40
1.57
2 MTG HOLES CLEARANCE
FOR M5 SCREWS

25
0.98

74
2.9

10
0.39

25
0.98

139
5.47

Applications
Typical applications are on
conveyor systems and across
rotating machinery, and around
hazardous areas.

46
1.81
57
2.24

Emergency Stop Devices

57
2.24

23
0.91

90
3.54

188
205
MIN MAX
7.40
8.07

Ordering
Model
ER5018-021M
ER5018-021N
ER5018-030M
ER5018-030N
ER5018-021ME
ER5018-021NE
ER5018-030ME
ER5018-030NE

E-Stop
Not included
Not included
Not included
Not included
Included
Included
Included
Included

Accessories
Stainless Steel Rope
Kits

RK5, 5 m Kit
RK10, 10 m Kit
RK15, 15 m Kit
RK20, 20 m Kit
RK30, 30 m Kit
RK50, 50 m Kit
RK80, 80 m Kit
RK100, 100 m Kit
RK126, 126 m Kit

Part No.
Quick
Link

Eyebolts

Tension/
Gripper
Assembly

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No

3
5
7
9
12
20
30
37
45

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2

Allen
Wrench

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2

44506-2705
44506-2710
44506-2715
44506-2720
44506-2730
44506-2750
44506-2780
44506-2711
44505-2726

Rope Only

R5M, 5 m Rope Only
R10M, 10 m Rope Only
R20M, 20 m Rope Only
R30M, 30 m Rope Only
R50M, 50 m Rope Only
R80M, 80 m Rope Only
R100M, 100 m Rope Only
R126M, 126 m Rope Only

44506-3705
44506-3710
44506-3720
44506-3730
44506-3750
44506-3780
44506-3711
44506-3726

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

H-20

www.sti.com/info

Contacts
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
3 N/C
3 N/C
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
3 N/C
3 N/C

Wiring Entry
3 x M20
3 x 1/2 in. NPT
3 x M20
3 x 1/2 in. NPT
3 x M20
3 x 1/2 in. NPT
3 x M20
3 x 1/2 in. NPT

Part No.
44506-4010
44506-4020
44506-4030
44506-4040
44506-4110
44506-4120
44506-4130
44506-4140

Accessories
SM06-SL400, Replacement Lid
SMO6-TK00, Tensioner Kit (Turnbuckle, 8 Rope Grips &
4 Thimbles)
SM06-TG00, Tensioner Gripper, Stainless Steel
SM06-EB10, Eye Bolt, Stainless Steel, 8 per pack
SM06-EB20, Eye Bolt, Galvanized
SM06-DL20, Double Loop Clip, Stainless Steel, 4 per pack
SM06-DL21, Double Loop Clip, Galvanized, 4 per pack
SM06-THSS, Thimble, Stainless Steel, 4 per pack
SM06-THGV, Thimble, Galvanized, 4 per pack
SM06-TB30, Turnbuckle, Stainless Steel
SM06-TB31, Turnbuckle, Galvanized
SM06-SP30, Spring, Galvanized
SM06-SP50, Spring, Stainless Steel
SM06-RPSS, Rope Pulley, Stainless Steel
SM06-ES60, E-Stop Mechanism

Part No.
44506-3700
44506-0700
44506-4700
44506-4710
44506-0720
44506-4720
44506-4721
44506-4770
44506-4771
44506-4730
44506-4731
44506-0730
44506-4750
44506-4780
44506-4760

Emergency Stop Devices

ER6022

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Rope Pull Emergency Stop Switch
• Rope spans up to 80 m (262 ft.) means fewer number of switches required per
application
• Tension indicator makes system setup and rope tension maintenance easy
• Contact arrangements of 2 N/C + 1 N/O, 3 N/C + 1 N/O or 2 N/C + 2 N/O
• IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure enables the ER6022 switch to withstand water
washdown cleaning
• Reset button—the blue reset button must be pushed in order to return to
“machine run” condition following switch actuation by a pulled or slacked rope
• Indicator beacon—the optional dual indicator beacon, available in 24 VDC
or 120 VAC, can be wired to flash red to indicate a tripped switch or glow a
constant green to indicate a properly reset switch
• E-stop button—the ER6022 has two mounting positions where the optional
E-stop button may be installed; the E-stop button may be added or replaced in
the field
• Rubber bellows contain UV inhibitor making the switches suitable for outdoor
applications
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days
R

Conforms to IEC947-5-1, IEC947-5-5,
EN418, UL508, BS5304
UL and C-UL listed, TUV certified

Specifications

Electrical
All Models
Contact Configurations:
2 N/C + 1 N/O, 3 N/C + 1 N/O, 2 N/C + 2 N/O
Safety Contacts:
2 N/C, 3 N/C
Switching Ability
AC: 240 V–3 A, 120 V–6 A, Inductive, DC: 24 V–2.5 A, Inductive
Auxiliary Contacts:
1 N/O, 2 N/O
Max Switching Current/Volt/Amp:
240 V/720 VA
Minimum Current:
5 V 5 mA DC
Electrical Life:
1 x 106 minimum
Mechanical
LED Indicator Beacon:
24 VDC, 120 VAC
Mechanical
1 million minimum
Mounting:
Any position
Mounting Hardware:
4 x M5 screws
Max Rope Span:
80 m (262 ft.)
Operation Force:
< 125 N (28 lb.)
Tensioning Force to Run Position:
130 N (23 lb.) typical
Case Material:
Die-cast aluminum alloy
Eye Nut Material:
Stainless Steel
Stainless Accessory Items:
304 Stainless Steel
Wiring Entry:
3 x M20 or 3 x 0.5 in. NPT
Weight:
880 g (31 oz.)
Color:
Yellow
Mechanical Life:
1 x 106 minimum
Environmental
Protection:
IP67 (NEMA 6)
Operating Temperature:
-25 to 80°C (-13 to 176°F)
Cleaning:
Water washdown
Compliance
Standards:
IEC947-5-1, IEC947-5-5, EN418, UL508, BS5304
Approvals/Listings:
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, TUV
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C)—
i.e., with the rope properly tensioned and the machine able to be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

H-21

ER6022

Emergency Stop Devices

Operation
Installation Hardware Available
Tension/Gripper
Spring
Turnbuckle

Blue Reset Knob

A blue reset button is provided
to easily return the unit back to
its machine-run position after
actuation.

Eyebolt
Double Loop Clip

Thimble

Rope Pulley

Installation Hardware

Individual hardware items may be purchased for
specific installation requirements.

RK Rope Tension Kit

Contact Arrangements
Emergency Push Button

The emergency push button may
be installed or repositioned in
the field. The ER6022 has two
possible mounting positions for the
emergency stop button.

0 mm
0 in

3.5
0.14

14.5
0.57

17.0
0.67

2NC + 1NO Versions
11/12
21/22
33/34

Rope Slack

ER6022
Tension Range

3NC + 1NO Versions
11/12
21/22
33/34
43/44

Rope Slack

Tension Range

Rope Pulled

2NC + 2NO Versions
11/12
21/22
33/34
43/44

Rope Slack

Tension Range

Rope Pulled

Contact Open

Rope Pulled

Contact Closed

Mounting Specification

a guide to installing, see “Proper Installation of Rope or Wire Pull Emergen✎ For
cy Stop Devices” in the Expert Area Section of this catalog on page A-78.

ER6022

500mm
19.7 in

Tensioner Gripper

Every 3m
9.84 ft

500mm
19.7 in

Safety Spring

Eyebolt Support

Wall

Up to 60 m

ER6022

500mm
19.7 in

Every 3m
9.84 ft

Up to 80 m

H-22

www.sti.com/info

500mm
19.7 in

ER6022

Dimensions

63
2.48

4 MTG HOLES CLEARANCE
FOR M5 SCREWS

89
3.5

86
3.39

10
0.39

32
1.26

23
54 0.91
2.13
96
3.78

222
239
MIN MAX
8.74
9.41

Ordering
E-stop

Indicator Beacon

Contacts

Wiring Entry

Part No.

Not included
Not included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included

Not included
Not included
Not included
Not included
Included
Included
Included, 120 VAC

2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 1 N/O

3 x M20
3 x 1/2 in. NPT
3 x M20
3 x 1/2 in. NPT
3 x M20
3 x 1/2 in. NPT
1/2” NPT

44506-5010
44506-5020
44506-5210
44506-5220
44506-5410
44506-5420
44506-5423

Not included
Not included
Not included
Not included
Not included
Not included
Not included
Not included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included

Not included
Not included
Not included
Not included
Included, 24 VDC
Included, 24 VDC
Included, 24 VDC
Included, 24 VDC
Not included
Not included
Not included
Not included
Included, 24 VDC
Included, 24 VDC
Included, 24 VDC
Included, 24 VDC
Included, 120 VAC
Included, 120 VAC

3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
3 N/C + 1 N/O
3 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O
3 N/C + 1 N/O
2 N/C + 2 N/O

M20
1/2 in. NPT
M20
1/2 in. NPT
M20
1/2 in. NPT
M20
1/2 in. NPT
M20
1/2 in. NPT
M20
1/2 in. NPT
M20
1/2 in. NPT
M20
1/2 in. NPT
1/2 in. NPT
1/2 in. NPT

44506-5050
44506-5060
44506-5070
44506-5080
44506-5150
44506-5160
44506-5170
44506-5180
44506-5250
44506-5260
44506-5270
44506-5280
44506-5450
44506-5460
44506-5470
44506-5480
44506-5463
44506-5483

Accessories

RK5, 5 m Kit
RK10, 10 m Kit
RK15, 15 m Kit
RK20, 20 m Kit
RK30, 30 m Kit
RK50, 50 m Kit
RK80, 80 m Kit
RK100, 100 m Kit
RK126, 126 m Kit

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

Model
ER Switches with 3 pole contact blocks
ER6022-021M
ER6022-021N
ER6022-021ME
ER6022-021NE
ER6022-021MEL
ER6022-021NEL
ER6022-021NELAC
ER Switches with 4 pole contact blocks
ER6022-031M
ER6022-031N
ER6022-022M
ER6022-022N
ER6022-031ML
ER6022-031NL
ER6022-022ML
ER6022-022NL
ER6022-031ME
ER6022-031NE
ER6022-022ME
ER6022-022NE
ER6022-031MEL
ER6022-031NEL
ER6022-022MEL
ER6022-022NEL
ER6022-031NELAC
ER6022-022NELAC

Stainless Steel Rope
Kits

Applications
Typical applications are on
conveyor systems and across
rotating machinery, and around
hazardous areas.

49
40
1.93 1.57

7
0.28

23
0.91

(mm/in.)

Safety Interlock Switches

Part No.
Quick
Link

Eyebolts

Tension/
Gripper
Assembly

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No

3
5
7
9
12
20
30
37
45

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2

Allen
Wrench

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2

44506-2705
44506-2710
44506-2715
44506-2720
44506-2730
44506-2750
44506-2780
44506-2711
44505-2726

Rope Only

R5M, 5 m Rope Only
R10M, 10 m Rope Only
R20M, 20 m Rope Only
R30M, 30 m Rope Only
R50M, 50 m Rope Only
R80M, 80 m Rope Only
R100M, 100 m Rope Only
R126M, 126 m Rope Only

44506-3705
44506-3710
44506-3720
44506-3730
44506-3750
44506-3780
44506-3711
44506-3726

www.sti.com/info

Accessories
SM06-SL500, Replacement Lid 24 VDC
SM06-SL510, Replacement Lid/LED 24 VDC
SM06-SL510AC, Replacement Lid/LED 120 VAC
(consult factory for complete switch with 120 VAC beacon)
SM06-TK00, Tensioner Kit (Turnbuckle, 8 Rope Grips &
4 Thimbles)
SM06-TG00, Tensioner Gripper, Stainless Steel
SM06-EB10, Eye Bolt, Stainless Steel, 8 per pack
SM06-EB20, Eye Bolt, Galvanized
SM06-DL20, Double Loop Clip, Stainless Steel, 4 per pack
SM06-DL21, Double Loop Clip, Galvanized, 4 per pack
SM06-THSS, Thimble, Stainless Steel, 4 per pack
SM06-THGV, Thimble, Galvanized, 4 per pack
SM06-QLSS, Quick Link, Stainless Steel
SM06-TB30, Turnbuckle, Stainless Steel
SM06-TB31, Turnbuckle, Galvanized
SM06-SP30, Spring, Galvanized
SM06-SP50, Spring, Stainless Steel
SM06-RPSS, Rope Pulley, Stainless Steel
SM06-ES60, E-Stop Mechanism
SM06-LF40, Replacement LED Indicator Beacon, 24 VDC
SM06-LF41, Replacement LED Indicator Beacon, 120 VAC

Part No.
44506-5700
44506-5710
44506-5711
44506-0700
44506-4700
44506-4710
44506-0720
44506-4720
44506-4721
44506-4770
44506-4771
44506-4772
44506-4730
44506-4731
44506-0730
44506-4750
44506-4780
44506-4760
44506-4740
44506-4741

H-23

Emergency Stop Devices

ER6022-SS

ER6022SS

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Stainless Steel Rope Pull Emergency Stop Switch
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Rope spans up to 100 m (328 ft.) means fewer number of switches required per application
Tension indicator maintains the proper rope tension
Contact arrangements of 3 N/C + 1 N/O or 2 N/C + 2 N/O
IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure withstands water washdown cleaning
316 stainless steel cast housing and stainless steel hardware
Reset button—the blue reset button must be pushed in order to return
to “machine run” condition following switch actuation by a pulled or
slacked rope
Vibration tolerant—the snap-acting switch contacts protect against
nuisance tripping due to vibration
Indicator beacon—the dual indicator beacon is optional on the ER6022SS; the indicator beacon can be wired to flash red to indicate a tripped
switch or glow a constant green to indicate a properly reset switch
Optional E-stop button—may be added or replaced in the field
Rubber bellows contain UV inhibitor making the switches suitable for
outdoor applications
Extreme Cold Version—for applications down to -40°C

Emergency Stop Devices

XER1022

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Rope Pull Emergency Stop Switch
• Rope spans up to 125 m (410 ft.) makes this switch ideal for
applications where long rope spans are required
• Heavy-duty housing—the die-cast housing and stainless
steel eye nut make the XER1022 suitable for demanding
industrial applications
• IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure enables the XER1022 switch to withstand
water washdown cleaning
• Integral E-stop—the optional E-stop button provides emergency
stopping capability at the extreme end of the installation and is field
serviceable
• Tension indicator makes system setup and rope tension maintenance
easy
• Contact arrangement of 1 N/C + 1 N/O
• Vibration tolerant—the snap-acting switch contacts protect against
nuisance tripping due to vibration
• Long life—the XER1022 switch is designed for a minimum of one
million actuations
• Reset button—the blue reset button must be pushed in order to
return to “machine run” condition following switch actuation by a
pulled or slacked rope
• Rubber bellows contain UV inhibitor making the switches suitable for
outdoor applications

H-24

www.sti.com/info

Emergency Stop Devices

XER1032

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Rope Pull Emergency Stop Switch
• Rope spans up to 200 m (656 ft.) makes this switch ideal for
applications where long rope spans are required
• Heavy-duty housing—the die-cast housing and stainless steel
eye nut make the XER1032 suitable for demanding industrial
applications
• IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure enables the XER1032 switch to withstand water washdown cleaning
• Integral E-stop—the optional E-stop button provides emergency
stopping capability at the extreme end of the installation and is
field serviceable
• Tension indicator makes system setup and rope tension maintenance easy
• Contact arrangement of 1 N/C + 1 N/O
• Vibration tolerant—the snap-acting switch contacts protect
against nuisance tripping due to vibration
• Long life—the XER1032 switch is designed for a minimum of one
million actuations
• Reset button—the blue reset button must be pushed in order to
return to “machine run” condition following switch actuation by a
pulled or slacked rope
• Rubber bellows contain UV inhibitor making the switches suitable
for outdoor applications

Emergency Stop Devices

XER6022 & 6022-SS

XER6022

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Explosion-Proof
Rope Pull Emergency Stop Switch
• Long Rope spans mean fewer number of switches required per
application (80 m spans for XER6022; 100 m spans for XER6022-SS)
• Tension indicator makes system setup and rope tension maintenance
easy
• Contact arrangements of 1 N/C + 1 N/O for XER6022
Contact arrangements of 2 N/C or 1 N/C + 1 N/O for XER6022-SS
• IP67 (NEMA 6) enclosure withstands water washdown cleaning
• Heavy-duty housing is suitable for demanding industrial applications
• Reset button—the blue reset button must be pushed in order to
return to “machine run” condition following switch actuation by a
pulled or slacked rope
• Vibration tolerant—the snap-acting switch contacts protect against
nuisance tripping due to vibration
• Optional E-stop button—may be added or replaced in the field
• Rubber bellows contain UV inhibitor making the switches suitable for
outdoor applications
• Long life—designed for a minimum of one million actuations
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment
today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

H-25

Emergency Stop Devices

H-26

www.sti.com/info

Force-Guided Relays
Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts
Contents
Selection Guide

I-2

Force-Guided Relays
G7SA I-3
G7S-□-E I-9
Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts
J7KNA-AR* I-12
G7Z* I-16
*Note: Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts are
Industrial Control products.

I-1

Force-Guided Relays & Power Contactors

Selection Guide

FGR

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Selecting the Best Device for Your Application

How much current
does your application
require?

10 A or more
• G7Z* — p. I-16

10 A or less

Do you prefer twopiece construction
with separate
module and socket?

yes
• G7SA — p. I-3
Rapid delivery product

• G7S-□-E — p. I-9
no

I
• J7KNA-AR* — p. I-12

*These are Industrial Control products.

Force-Guided Relays
Construction

Mounting

Poles

Rated Carry
Current

Solenoid
Voltage

Built in Coil
Suppression

LED Indicator

Catalog
Page Number

G7SA

Socket &
Module

DIN Rail/PCB

4-6

24 VDC

—

Optional

I-3

G7S-□-E

Socket &
Module

DIN Rail/PCB

4-6

10 A

24 VDC

—

I-9

LED Indicator

Catalog
Page Number

Relay Series

Power Relays with Mirror Contacts
Mirror contacts are approved for monitoring of Safety Circuits.
Construction

Mounting

Poles

Rated Carry
Current

Solenoid
Voltage

Built in Coil
Suppression

J7KNA-AR

Modules

DIN Rail

5-8

10 A

24 VDC,
110 VAC,
230 VAC

24 VDC
models only

—

I-12

G7Z

Modules

DIN Rail

40 A

12 - 24 VDC

—

I-16

Relay Series

I-2

www.sti.com/info

Force-Guided Relays

G7SA

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Compact, Slim Relays
Conforming to EN Standards
• Relays with forcibly guided contacts (EN50205 Class A,
certified by VDE)
• Supports the CE marking of machinery (Machinery Directive)
• Helps avoid hazardous machine status when used as part of an
interlocking circuit
• Four-pole and six-pole Relays are available
• The relay’s terminal arrangement simplifies PWB pattern design
• Reinforced insulation between inputs and outputs. Reinforced
insulation between some poles of different polarity.
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Ratings
Coil
Rated Voltage
24 VDC

Rated Current
(mA)

Coil Resistance
(Ω)

Must Operate
Voltage (V)

Must Release
Voltage (V)

Max.
Voltage (V)

Power Consumption
(mW)

4 poles: 15
6 poles: 20.8

4 poles: 1,600
6 poles: 1,152

75% max.

10% min.

110%

4 poles: Approx. 360
6 poles: Approx. 500

Notes:
1. The rated current and coil resistance are measured at a coil temperature of 23°C with tolerances of ±15%.
2. Performance characteristics are based on a coil temperature of 23°C.
3. The maximum voltage is based on an ambient operating temperature of 23°C maximum.

Certified Standards

Contacts

• EN Standards, VDE Certified
EN61810-1 (Electromechanical non-specified time all-or-nothing relays)
EN50205 (Relays with forcibly guided (linked) contacts)
• UL standard UL508 Industrial Control Devices
• CSA standard CSA C22.2 No. 14 Industrial Control Devices

Resistive Load
Rated load

6 A at 250 VAC, 6 A at 30 VDC

Rated carry current

Max. switching voltage

250 VAC, 125 VDC

Max. switching current

Forcibly-Guided Contacts (from EN50205)

Max. drop-out time*

10 ms

If an NO contact becomes welded, all NC contacts will maintain a minimum
distance of 0.5 mm when the coil is not energized. Likewise if an NC
contact becomes welded, all NO contacts will maintain a minimum distance
of 0.5 mm when the coil is energized.

*The drop-out time is the time it takes for the N/O contacts to open after
the coil voltage is turned OFF.

Characteristics of Sockets
Model
P7SA-1□

Continuous Current

Dielectric Strength

Insulation Resistance

6 A *1

2,500 VAC for 1 min. between poles

1,000 MΩ min. *2

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

Notes:
Use the P7SA-1□F-ND in the ambient temperature range of -20 to 70°C.
Use the P7SA-1□F and P7SA-1□F-ND in the ambient humidity range of 45 to 85%.
*1. When operating the P7SA-1□F at a temperature between 55 and 85°C, reduce the
continuous current (6 A at 55°C or less) by 0.1 A for each degree above 55°C.
When operating the P7SA-1□F-ND at a temperature between 50 and 70°C, reduce
the continuous current (6 A at 50°C or less) by 0.3 A for each degree above 50°C.
*2. Measurement conditions: Measurement of the same points as for the dielectric
strength at 500 VDC.

www.sti.com/info

I-3

G7SA

Specifications (continued)
Contact resistance *1

100 mΩ max.

Operating time *2

20 ms max.

Response time *3

10 ms max.

Release time *2

20 ms max.

Must operate voltage

75% max.

Must release voltage
Maximum operating
frequency

10% min.
Mechanical

36,000 operation/h

Rated load

1,800 operation/h

Insulation resistance *4

1,000 MΩ min.

Dielectric strength *5 *6

Between coil contacts/different poles (except for poles 3-4 in 4-pole relays
and poles 3-5, 4-6, and 5-6 in 6-pole relays): 4,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1
min.
Between different poles (poles 3-4 in 4-pole relays and poles 3-5, 4-6, and
5-6 in 6-pole relays): 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.
Between contacts of same polarity: 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min.

Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Durability *7

10 to 55 to 10 Hz, 0.75 mm single amplitude (1.5 mm double amplitude)
Destruction

1,000 m/s2

Malfunction

100 m/s2

Mechanical

10,000,000 operations min. (at approx. 36,000 operations/h)

Electrical

100,000 operations min. (at the rated load and approx. 1,800
operations/h)

Inductive load switching capability
*8 (IEC60947-5-1)

AC15 AC250V 2A
DC13 DC24V 1A

Failure rate (P level) (reference
value *9)

5 VDC, 1 mA

Ambient operating temperature *10

12 to 48 VDC: -40 to 85°C (with no icing or condensation)

Ambient operating humidity

5% to 85%

Weight

4 poles: Approx. 22 g
6 poles: Approx. 25 g

Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Notes: 1. The above values are initial values.

2. Performance characteristics are based on coil temperature of 23°C.
*1. The contact resistance was measured with 1 A at 5 VDC using the voltage-drop method.
*2. These times were measured at the rated voltage and an ambient temperature of 23°C. Contact bounce time is
not included.
*3. The response time is the time it takes for the normally open contacts to open after the coil voltage is
turned OFF. Contact bounce time is included. Measurement conditions: Rated voltage operation, Ambient
temperature: 23°C.
*4. The insulation resistance was measured with a 500 VDC megohmmeter at the same locations as the dielectric
strength was measured.
*5. Pole 3 refers to terminals 31-32 or 33-34, pole 4 refers to terminals 43-44, pole 5 refers to terminals 53-54, and
pole 6 refers to terminals 63-64.
*6. When using a P7SA Socket, the dielectric strength between coil contacts/different poles is 2,500 VAC, 50/60
Hz for 1 min.
*7 The durability is for an ambient temperature of 15 to 35°C and an ambient humidity of 25% to 75%. For the
durability performance to the load refere to the Durability Curve.
*8. AC15: cosø = 0.3, DC14: L/R = 48 ms.
*9. The failure rate is based on an operating frequency of 300 operations/min.
*10. 12 to 48 VDC: When operating between 70 to 85°C, reduce the rated current of 6 A by 0.1 A for each degree
above 70°C.

I-4

www.sti.com/info

Force-Guided Relays

G7SA

Force-Guided Relays

Engineering Data
No. of operations (× 104 operations)

Durability Curve
1,000
700
500

DC1, 24 VDC

300
AC1, 240 VAC
100
70
50
30

DC13, 24 VDC
AC15, 240 VAC

10
7
5
3
1
0.1

0.3

0.5 0.7 1

7 10

Contact current (A)

Dimensions

(mm)

G7SA-3A1B
G7SA-2A2B

Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connection Diagram
(Bottom View)

Printed Circuit Board
Design Diagram
(Bottom View)
(±0.1 tolerance)

G7SA-3A1B

13 max.

40 max.

Ten, 1.4 dia.
24 max.

0.5

3.5

G7SA-5A1B
G7SA-4A2B
G7SA-3A3B

G7SA-2A2B

Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connection Diagram
(Bottom View)

Notes:
1. Terminals 23-24, 33-34, and
43-44 are normally open. Terminals
11-12 and 21-22 are normally
closed.
2. The colors of the cards inside
the Relays are as follows: G7SA3A1B: Blue and G7SA-2A2B: White.

Printed Circuit Board
Design Diagram
(Bottom View)
(±0.1 tolerance)

G7SA-5A1B
Fourteen, 1.4 dia.
13 max.

50 max.

24 max.

0.5

0.5 1

G7SA-4A2B

3.5

Notes:
1. Terminals 23-24, 33-34, 43-44,
53-54, and 63-64 are normally
open. Terminals 11-12, 21-22, and
31-32 are normally closed.
2. The colors of the cards inside
the Relays are as follows: G7SA5A1B: Blue, G7SA-4A2B: White,
and G7SA-3A3B: Yellow.

G7SA-3A3B

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

I-5

G7SA

Force-Guided Relays

Dimensions (continued)

(mm)

Track-mounting Socket

Terminal Arrangement/Internal Connection Diagram
(Top View)

P7SA-10F, P7SA-10F-ND

G7SA-3A1B
Mounted

G7SA-2A2B
Mounted
44

* This display circuit is
available only for
"-ND" models.
Note: Terminals 23-24,
33-34, and 43-44
are normally
open. Terminals
Diagram
11-12 and 21-22
are normally
closed.

60.5 max.
Ten,
M3 × 8

9 max.

2R 22.5 max.

Mounting Hole Placement
(Top View)
Two, 4 dia. or M3.5

72 max.
LED
indicator

9 max.
4 dia.
Note 1: The socket is shown with the finger cover removed.
2: Only the -ND Sockets have LED indicators (orange)

Track-mounting Socket

Terminal Arrangement/Internal Connection Diagram
(Top View)

P7SA-14F, P7SA-14F-ND

G7SA-5A1B
Mounted

G7SA-4A2B
Mounted

9 max.

30 max.

Fourteen,
M3 × 8

60.5 max.

31
12
1

Two, 4 dia. or M3.5
72 max.
LED
indicator

9 max.
4 dia.
Note 1: The socket is shown with the finger cover removed.
2: Only the -ND Sockets have LED indicators (orange).

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

I-6

Mounting Hole Placement Diagram
(Top View)

G7SA-3A3B
Mounted

www.sti.com/info

* This display circuit is
available only for
"-ND" models.
Note: Terminals 23-24,
33-34, 43-44,
53-54, and 63-64
are normally open.
Terminals 11-12,
21-22, and 31-32
are normally
closed.

G7SA

Force-Guided Relays

Dimensions (continued)

(mm)

Back-mounting Socket (for PCB)
P7SA-10P

50 max.

0.5

Terminal Arrangement/Internal
Connection Diagram
(Bottom View)

15 max.

Mounting Hole Placement
(Bottom View)
(±0.1 tolerance)

G7SA-3A1B Mounted

41.5 max.

11 12

33 34

23 24

43 44

Three, 3.2 dia.
(for M3 tapping screws)

G7SA-2A2B Mounted
(11.1)

0.4

(11.1)

11 12

33 34

21 22

43 44

3.5

Ten, 1.1 dia.

Three, 2.6 dia.
(for M3 tapping screws)

Note: Terminals 23-24, 33-34, and 43-44
are normally open. Terminals 11-12
and 21-22 are normally closed.

24.8
39.9

4.1

Back-mounting Socket (for PCB)
P7SA-14P

0.5

60 max.

Terminal Arrangement/Internal
Connection Diagram
(Bottom View)

0.5

Mounting Hole Placement
(Bottom View)
(±0.1 tolerance)

15 max.

G7SA-5A1B Mounted
0

41.5 max.

11 12

23 24

33 34 53 54

43 44 63 64

Fourteen,
1.1 dia.

Three, 3.2 dia.
(for M3 tapping
screws)

G7SA-4A2B Mounted
0.4

(11.1)

33 34 53 54

21 22

43 44 63 64

G7SA-3A3B Mounted
0

11 12

31 32 53 54

21 22

43 44 63 64

24.8
49.9

11 12

3.5

Three, 2.6 dia.
(for M3 tapping screws)

4.1

Note: Terminals 23-24, 33-34, 43-44,
53-54, and 63-64 are normally
open. Terminals 11-12, 21-22,
and 31-32 are normally closed.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

I-7

G7SA

Force-Guided Relays

Ordering
Model Number Legend
G7SA – □ A □ B

1 2

1 NO Contact Poles
2: DPST-NO
3: 3PST-NO
4: 4PST-NO
5: 5PST-NO

2 NC Contact Poles
1: SPST-NC
2: DPST-NC
3: 3PST-NC

Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts
Type

Sealing

Poles

Contact Configuration

4 poles
Standard

Rated Voltage*

3PST-NO, SPST-NC
DPST-NO, DPST-NC

G7SA-2A2B DC24

5PST-NO, SPST-NC

Flux-tight
6 poles

Model
G7SA-3A1B DC24

24 VDC

G7SA-5A1B DC24

4PST-NO, DPST-NC

G7SA-4A2B DC24

3PST-NO, 3PST-NC

G7SA-3A3B DC24

*Consult your Omron representative for details on rated voltages of 12 VDC, 18 VDC, 21 VDC and 48 VDC.

Sockets
Type

LED Indicator
No

Track-mounting

PCB terminals

Rated Voltage
---

6 poles

Track mounting and screw mounting possible

4 poles

Yes
Back-mounting

Poles
4 poles

24 VDC

6 poles
4 poles

---

6 poles

Model
P7SA-10F
P7SA-14F
P7SA-10F-ND DC24
P7SA-14F-ND DC24
P7SA-10P
P7SA-14P

Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts and Track Mounting Sockets (assemblies)
Relay Specifications
Rated Coil
Voltage

Type

LED
Indicator

4 poles

DPST-NO, DPST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

FGRMS22-24

4 poles

3PST-NO, SPST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

FGRMS31-24

6 poles

3PST-NO, 3PST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

FGRMS33-24

6 poles

4PST-NO, 2PST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

FGRMS42-24

6 poles

5PST-NO, SPST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

4 poles

DPST-NO, DPST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

Yes

24 VDC

FGRMS22-24-LED

4 poles

3PST-NO, SPST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

Yes

24 VDC

FGRMS31-24-LED

6 poles

3PST-NO, 3PST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

Yes

24 VDC

FGRMS33-24-LED

6 poles

4PST-NO, 2PST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

Yes

24 VDC

FGRMS42-24-LED

6 poles

5PST-NO, SPST-NC

24 VDC

Track Mounting and screw mounting possible

Yes

24 VDC

FGRMS51-24-LED

Poles

Socket Specifications

Contact
Configuration

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

I-8

www.sti.com/info

LED Rated
Voltage

Assembly Model

FGRMS51-24

Force-Guided Relays

G7S-□-E

G7SE

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Lineup Now Includes 10 A Models
• Relays with forcibly guided contacts (EN50205 Class A, certified
by VDE).
• Supports the CE marking of machinery (Machinery Directive).
• Helps avoid hazardous machine status when used as part of an
interlocking circuit.
• Track-mounting and Back-mounting Sockets are available.

Specifications
Ratings
Coil
Rated Voltage

Rated Current
(mA)

Coil Resistance
(Ω)

Must Operate
Voltage (V)

Must Release
Voltage (V)

Max.
Voltage (V)

Power Consumption
(W)

24 VDC

800

80% max.

10% min.

110%

Approx. 0.8

Certified Standards

Contacts
Resistive load

Inductive load *

NO contact

10 A at 250 VAC
10 A at 30 VDC

AC-15: 5 A at 240 VAC
DC-13: 2 A at 24 VDC

NC contact

6 A at 250 VAC
6 A at 30 VDC

AC-15: 3 A at 240 VAC
DC-13: 2 A at 24 VDC

NO contact

10 A

NC contact

Rated load

Rated carry current

Maximum switching voltage
Maximum switching
current

Forcibly-Guided Contacts
(from EN50205)

250 VAC, 30 VDC

NO contact

10 A

NC contact

• EN Standards, VDE Certified
EN61810-1 (Electromechanical non-specified time all-ornothing relays)
EN60255-23 (Contact performance)
EN50205 (Relays with forcibly guided (linked) contacts)
• UL standard UL508 Industrial Control Devices
• CSA standard CSA C22.2 No. 14 (Industrial Control Equipment)

*In the above table, cosø = 0.3 for AC-15 inductive loads and L/R = 96 ms for DC-13
inductive loads.

If an NO contact becomes welded, all NC contacts will maintain
a minimum distance of 0.5 mm when the coil is not energized.
Likewise if an NC contact becomes welded, all NO contacts will
maintain a minimum distance of 0.5 mm when the coil is energized.

Characteristics of Sockets
Model
P7S-14□

Continuous Current

Dielectric Strength

Insulation Resistance

10 A

2,000 VAC for 1 min. between poles

1,000 MΩ min. *

Notes:
Use the P7SA-14F-END in the ambient temperature range of 35 to 85%
*Measurement conditions: Measurement of the same points as for the dielectric strength at 500 VDC.

www.sti.com/info

I-9

G7S-□-E

Force-Guided Relays

Dimensions

(mm)

G7S-4A2B-E
G7S-3A3B-E
62 max.
58

Terminal Arrangement/Internal
Connection Diagram
(Bottom View)
G7S-4A2B-E

22.5 max.

24 VDC

6
10.8

37 max.

13 14 33 34 51 52
23 24 43 44 61 62

Mounting Hole Dimensions

1.5

0.6

−

0.5
5 min.

G7S-3A3B-E

14.5±0.1

8±0.1

8
14.5

24 VDC

−

Track-mounting Socket
P7S-14F-END
Indicator

Fourteen,
1.8 dia.

13 14 33 34 51 52
23 24 41 42 61 62

7±0.1
7

21±0.1
6

35±0.1

Terminal Arrangement/Internal
Connection Diagram
(Top View)

Fourteen, M3.0 × 8

41
43

40 max.
33±0.1

42
44

14
13

61
0

7.5

Mounting Hole Dimensions

80 max.
Two, M3.5- or
4.0-dia. holes
37
17
3.1

33±0.1

5.9

90.5 max.
(5)

Back-mounting Socket (PCB Terminals)
P7S-14P-E

Terminal Arrangement/Internal
Connection Diagram
(Bottom View)
With G7S-4A2B-E mounted

70.5 max.
28±0.2

23.5 max.

Mounting Hole Dimensions
28±0.2
Two, 6.5 dia. × 8 depth

2.8

With G7S-3A3B-E mounted
57 max.

I-10

5×7=35

16.9

(15)

4.1

14.5
23.5 max.

www.sti.com/info

(16.9)

14.5 8

Fourteen, 2.5 dia.

6
5×7=35

13.2

(21)

4.2

Two, 3.6 dia.

G7S-□-E

Force-Guided Relay

Ordering
Model Number Legend
G7S – □ A □ B – E

1 2

1 NO Contact Poles
3: 3PST-NO
4: 4PST-NO

2 NC Contact Poles
2: DPST-NC
3: 3PST-NC

Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts
Type
Standard

Poles
6 poles

Contact
Configuration
4PST-NO, DPST-NC
3PST-NO, 3PST-NC

Rated Voltage*
24 VDC

Model
G7S-4A2B-E
G7S-3A3B-E

Sockets
Type
Track-mounting Common for track mounting and screw mounting
Back-mounting

Rated Voltage

Model

24 VDC

P7S-14F-END

---

P7S-14P-E

PCB terminals

www.sti.com/info

I-11

Power Contactor with Mirrored Contacts

J7KNA-AR

J7KNA

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Mini Contactor Relays 4-Pole
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

AC and DC operated
4-, 6- and 8-pole versions in different configurations
Mirrored contacts
Screw fixing and snap fitting (35 mm DIN rail)
Rated current = 10 A (Ith)
Suitable for electronic devices (DIN 19240)
Finger proof (VBG 4)
A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Accessories
• 2- and 4-pole additional auxiliary contacts in different
configurations

Specifications
Approved Standards

Electrical

Operating Coil

Standard

Guide No. (US,C)

Supply Power:

24 VDC, 110 VAC or 230 VAC

NKCR, NKCR7

Inrush:

25 VA for AC versions
3 W for DC versions

ICE 947-5-1

Power Usage:

4.5 VA for AC versions
2.5 W for DC versions

EN 60947-5-1

Rated Carry Current:

10 A @ 40C

VDE 0660

Switching Capability Inductive
Loads (AC-15, DC-13)
AC:

Break 120 V - 6 A, 240 V - 3 A (continuous 10 A)

DC:

24 V - 3 A

Max. Switching Frequency:

10,000 per hour

Min. Switching Current:

5 mA

Max. Drop-Out Time*:

8-25 ms for AC versions
8-25 ms for DC versions

Mechanical
Mechanical Life:

1 x 107 operations min.

Mounting:

35 mm DIN rail or 4 screw holes for panel mounting

Wire Size:

Screw terminals accept two 14 AWG solid or stranded wires

Weight:

AC versions: 160 g (5 oz.)
DC versions: 190 g (6 oz.)

Vibration:

5 to 300 Hz

Environmental
Vibration Resistance:

2 g with control relay open; 4 g with control relay closed

Operating Temperature:

-40 to 60°C (-40 to 140·F)

Approvals:

IEC947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN60947-5-1, UL508

*The Drop-Out Time is the time it takes for the N/O contacts to open after the coil voltage is turned OFF.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

I-12

www.sti.com/info

J7KNA-AR

Power Contactor with Mirrored Contacts

Dimensions

(mm)

AC and DC Operated with Screw Terminals

Auxiliary Contact Blocks

J7KNA-AR

J73KN-A

Contact Diagrams
Mini Contactor Relays, 4-Pole
J7KNA-AR-40 J7KNA-AR-31 J7KNA-AR-22

Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Contactor Relays J7KNA-AR
J73KN-A-11 J73KN-A-02 J73KN-A-40 J73KN-A-22

www.sti.com/info

I-13

J7KNA-AR

Power Contactor with Mirrored Contacts

Mirror Contacts
Safety Function with Mirror Contacts
EN 60947-4-1 certification for mirror contact mechanisms has
been obtained by using a combination of a relay and auxiliary
contact blocks (5 VDC, 1 mA), enabling application in feedback
circuits of safety circuits.
Application Example: General Safety Circuit
G9SA-301 (24 VAC/DC) (two limit switch input channels with
manual reset)

Feedback Circuit

Feedback loop

Open

TH
SA

Control
circuit

Mirror Contact Mechanism
By combining a Relay with an auxiliary contact block, all NC
contacts of the auxiliary contact block will satisfy an impulse
withstand voltage of 2.5 kV or higher or maintain a gap of 0.5 mm
or greater when the coil is de-energized even if at least one NO
contact (main contact) of the Relay is welded.

Impulse withstand voltage: 2.5 kV min. or
contact separation (a + b): 0.5 mm min.
a

Auxiliary contact block

Relay
NC

Contact welding

I-14

www.sti.com/info

J7KNA-AR

Power Contactor with Mirrored Contacts

Ordering
Model Number Legend
Mini Contactor Relays

Auxiliary Contact Modules for Mini Motor Contactor Relays

J7KNA – AR – □ – □

J73KN – A – □

1 2

1 Combination of NO/NC Contacts

22: 2 NO/2 NC
31: 3 NO/1 NC
40: 4 NO

11:
02:
22:
40:

2 Coil Voltage (AC operated)

1 NO/1 NC
2 NC
2 NO/2NC
4 NO

24: AC 24 V 50/60 Hz
110: AC 110-115 V 50 Hz, AC 120-125 V 60 Hz
230: AC 220-230 V 50 Hz, AC 240 V 60 Hz
Coil Voltage (DC operated)
24VS: 24 VDC with suppression
Model

Coil Voltage

Contacts

Part No.

AC Operated Relays
J7KNA-AR-40 24

24 VAC

4 N/O

12010-4140

J7KNA-AR-31 24

24 VAC

3 N/O + 1 N/C

12010-4131

J7KNA-AR-22 24

24 VAC

2 N/O + 2 N/C

12010-4122

J7KNA-AR-40 110

110 VAC

4 N/O

12010-4240

J7KNA-AR-31 110

110 VAC

3 N/O + 1 N/C

12010-4231

J7KNA-AR-22 110

110 VAC

2 N/O + 2 N/C

12010-4222

J7KNA-AR-40 230

230 VAC

4 N/O

12010-4340

J7KNA-AR-31 230

230 VAC

3 N/O + 1 N/C

12010-4331

J7KNA-AR-22 230

230 VAC

2 N/O + 2 N/C

12010-4322

DC Operated Relays (coil suppression built -in)
J7KNA-AR-40 24VS

24 VDC

4 N/O

12010-4040

J7KNA-AR-31 24VS

24 VDC

3 N/O + 1 N/C

12010-4031

J7KNA-AR-22 24VS

24 VDC

2 N/O + 2 N/C

12010-4022

J73KN-A-11

1 N/C + 1 N/O

12010-4411

J73KN-A-02

2 N/C

12010-4402

J73KN-A-40

4 N/O

12010-4440

J73KN-A-22

2 N/O + 2 N/C

12010-4422

Auxilary Contact Modules

www.sti.com/info

I-15

Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts

G7Z

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Multi-pole Power Relay for Contactor
Current Range Capable of Carrying
and Switching 40 A at 440 VAC
• One pole, 40 A can be carried and switched.
• The maximum load capacity of 160 A when using 4-pole parallel
connections.
• All materials used are compliant with the RoHS Directive
• EN 60947-4-1 certification for mirror contact mechanisms has been
obtained by using a combination of the relay and auxiliary contact blocks.
• A design with a small number of openings makes it difficult for dust or
foreign matter to enter.
• Ideal for supply power to industrial inverters, servo drivers, and other
devices, and switching power to motors and other equipment.

Specifications
Approved Standards

CSA Standard: CSA Certification: CSA C22.2 No. 14

UL Standard: UL508, UL840 (File No. E41643)

Model

Coil
Ratings

Contact Ratings

NO
contact
G7Z

Number of
Test
Operations

12, 24
VDC

40 A, 480 VAC, 60 Hz
(Resistive)

80,000

5 A, 120 VDC (Resistive)

100,000

22 A, 480 VAC, 60 Hz
(General Use)

100,000

D300* (1-A current applied)

NC
contact

25 A, 480 VAC, 60 Hz
(Resistive)
5 A, 120 VDC (Resistive)
10 A, 480 VAC, 60 Hz
(General Use)

G73Z

I-16

G73Z

---

Contact Ratings
NO
contact

AC-1: 40 A, 440 V, 50/60 Hz
AC-3: 16 A, 440 V, 50/60 Hz
DC-1: 5 A, 110 V
*AC-15: 0.5 A, 440 V, 50/60 Hz
*DC-13: 0.5 A, 110 V

NC
contact

AC-1: 25 A, 440 V, 50/60 Hz
DC-1: 5 A, 110 V
*AC-15: 0.5 A, 440 V, 50/60 Hz
*DC-13: 0.5 A, 110 V

12, 24 VDC

---

NO
contact
NC
contact

AC-15: 0.5 A, 440 V , 50/60 Hz
DC-13: 0.5 A, 110 V

*Auxiliary contact ratings
Contact Ratings

NC contact

G7Z

Coil Ratings

100,000

*Auxiliary contact ratings

NO contact

Model

---

D300* (1-A current applied)

Model

EN Standard/TÜV Certification: EN 60947-4-1
(Certification No. R50079155)

D300 (1-A current applied)

Reference Information
UL 508:
Industrial control devices
Insulation coordination including clearance and
UL 840:
creepage distance for electrical devices
CSA C22.2 No. 14: Industrial control devices
Contactors
EN 60947-4-1:

www.sti.com/info

G7Z

Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts

Specifications (continued)
Ratings
Coil

Rated Voltage

Rated
Current
(mA)

Coil
Resistance
(Ω)

12 VDC

308

24 VDC

154

156

Must operate
Voltage

Must release
Voltage

Power
Consumption
(W)

Maximum Voltage

Percentage of Rated Voltage
75% max.

10% min.

110%

Approx. 3.7

Notes:
1. The rated current and coil resistance are measured at a coil temperature of 23°C with tolerances of ±15%.
2. Operating characteristics were measured at a coil temperature of 23°C.
3. The maximum allowable voltage is the maximum value of the fluctuation range from the relay coil operating power
supply and was measured at an ambient temperature of 23°C. There is, however, no continuous allowance.

Contacts
Relay

Auxiliary Contact Block
G7Z-4A-□Z, G7Z-3A1B-□Z,
G7Z-2A2B-□Z
Resistive
load

Inductive
load cosø
= 0.3

Resistive
load L/R =
1 ms

Contact structure

Double break

Contact material

Ag alloy

Rated carry current

40 A at
440 VAC

22 A at
440 VAC

5 A at
110 VDC

25 A at
440 VAC

10 A at
440 VAC

5 A at
110 VDC

40 A

25 A

Maximum contact voltage

125 VDC

Maximum contact
current

NO
NC

25 A

10 A

Maximum switching
capacity

17,600 VA

9,680 VA

550 W

11,000 VA

4,400 VA

550 W

Failure rate P value
(reference value)

Contact structure

Rated load

22 A

Inductive
load cosø
= 0.3
Au clad + Ag

1 A at
440 VAC

0.5 A at
440 VAC

Failure rate P value
(reference value)

0.5 A at
110 VDC

Maximum contact voltage
Maximum contact current

Resistive
load L/R =
1 ms

Double break

Rated carry current

Maximum switching capacity

480 VAC
40 A

Resistive
load
Contact material

NO
Rated load

G73Z-20Z, G73Z-11Z, G73Z-02Z

480 VAC
1A
440 VA

125 VDC
0.5 A

220 VA

55 W

1 mA at 5 VDC

2 A at 24 VDC

Note: The ratings for the auxiliary contact block mounted on the G7Z are
the same as those for the G73Z auxiliary contact block.

www.sti.com/info

I-17

Mirror Contacts
Safety Function with Mirror Contacts
EN 60947-4-1 certification for mirror contact mechanisms has
been obtained by using a combination of a relay and auxiliary
contact blocks (5 VDC, 1 mA), enabling application in feedback
circuits of safety circuits.
Application Example: General Safety Circuit
G9SA-301 (24-VAC/DC) (two limit switch input channels with
manual reset)

Feedback Circuit

Feedback loop

Open

TH
SA

Control
circuit

Impulse withstand voltage: 2.5 kV min. or
contact separation (a + b): 0.5 mm min.
a

Auxiliary contact block

Relay
NC

Contact welding

I-18

www.sti.com/info

G7Z

Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts

Dimensions

(mm)

Relay (12 VDC, 24 VDC) with Auxiliary Contact Block

Mounting Hole Dimensions

4 Poles

Two, M4

39±0.2

15
Four, M3.5

Eight, M5

75.7

Two, M3.5

70.7

51.5

Auxiliary Contact Block
13
47
32.2

24.2

Four, M3.5

I
15.7

11
15

DIN Track Mounting Height
(when using PFP-100N or PFP-50N mounting rail)
15

96.3

88.3
75.0

64.3

Note: The dimensions are typical values.

www.sti.com/info

I-19

G7Z

Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts

Ordering
Model Number Legend
Relay with Auxiliary Contact Block

Auxiliary Contact Block

G7Z – □ – □ □

G73Z – □ □

1 2 3

1 Relay Contact Configuration

1 2

1 Contact Configuration of Auxiliary Contacts

4A: 4PST-NO
3A1B: 3PST-NO/SPST-NC
2A2B: DPST-NO/DPST-NC

20: DPST-NO
11: SPST-NO/SPST-NC
02: DPST-NC

2 Contact Configuration of Auxiliary Contacts

2 Contact Mechanism of Auxiliary Contacts

20: DPST-NO
11: SPST-NO/SPST-NC
02: DPST-NC

Z: Bifurcated crossbar contact

3 Contact Mechanism of Auxiliary Contacts
Z: Bifurcated crossbar contact

Relay with Auxiliary Contact Block
Relay with Auxiliary Contact Block (for Screw Terminals)
Contact configuration
Classification

4 poles +
2 poles

DPST-NO

G7Z-4A-20Z

4PST-NO

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

G7Z-4A-11Z

3PST-NO/SPST-NC

DPST-NO/DPST-NC

DPST-NC

G7Z-4A-02Z

DPST-NO

G7Z-3A1B-20Z

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

G7Z-3A1B-02Z
G7Z-2A2B-20Z

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

G7Z-2A2B-11Z

DPST-NC

G7Z-2A2B-02Z

Auxiliary Contact Block

I-20

2 poles

G7Z-3A1B-11Z

DPST-NO

Accessories (Order Separately)

Auxiliary
Contact Block

12, 24 VDC

DPST-NC

Notes:
1. Relay contact terminals are M5, and the coil terminals are M3.5.
2. Auxiliary contact block terminals are M3.5

Classification

Model

Auxiliary Contact Block

I
Relay with Auxiliary
Contact Block

Rated Voltage

Relay

Contact Configuration

Model

DPST-NO

G73Z-20Z

SPST-NO/SPST-NC

G73Z-11Z

DPST-NC

G73Z-02Z

www.sti.com/info

Safety Monitoring Relays
Contents
Selection Guide

J-2

G9SX Modular Safety Systems
G9SX J-5
G9SX-GS J-15
G9SX-SM J-25
Fixed Terminal Relays
G9SA J-26
SR101A J-32
SR103AM J-33
SR104P J-37
SR105E J-37
SR106ED J-41
SR108AD & SR109AD

J-38

SR120MP J-41
SR125SMS45 J-42
SR131A J-45
Removable Terminal Relays
SR201A J-45
SR203M & SR203AM

J-46

SR208AD & SR209AD

J-46

SR223SMT J-47
SR231A J-47

J-1

Safety Monitoring Relays

Selection Guide

Relay

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Selecting a Monitoring Relay for Your Application
Choosing the Proper Model in a Few Selection Steps
Safety monitoring relays range in function from two-hand palm button control to dual
channel input units with time-delayed outputs that provide conformity to ANSI B11.192010, Section 6 for Performance of the Safety Related Function(s).
The following questions and charts will guide you from the various capabilities and
features to the proper model number.

Yes: See Chart Below
No: Go to Question 2

Does the application require two dual channel inputs?

Outputs
Rapid
Delivery
Relay Model Product Terminals

Inputs †

Safety
N/O

Aux.
N/C

Solid
State
Aux.

Safety Delayed

Operating Voltage

N/O

N/C

24
DC

24
AC

120
AC

200
AC

230
AC

Catalog
Page

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR131A

Fixed

(2) 1 N/C + 1 N/O

–

●

–

J-45

SR231A

Yes

Removable (2) 1 N/C + 1 N/O

–

●

–

J-47

Yes: See Chart Below
No: Go to Question 3

Does the application require one single channel or one dual channel input?

Outputs
Rapid
Delivery
Relay Model Product Terminals

Inputs †

Safety
N/O

Aux.
N/C

Solid
State
Aux.

Safety Delayed

Operating Voltage

N/O

N/C

24
DC

24
AC

120
AC

200
AC

230
AC

Catalog
Page

Safety Monitoring Relays
SR101A

Yes

Fixed

1 N/C, Supply Voltage

–

●

–

J-32

G9SA-301

Yes

Fixed

1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

●

J-26

G9SA-5011

Yes

Fixed

1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

●

J-26

SR103AM

Yes

Fixed

1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

J-33

SR201A

Yes

Removable 1 N/C, Supply Voltage

–

●

–

J-45

SR203M/AM

Yes

Removable 1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

J-46

Notes:
† Codes: PNP = light curtain, 2H = two-hand control
1
Dedicated expansion module available
● = Available ■ = Available on special order

J-2

www.sti.com/info

Selection Guide

Safety Monitoring Relays

Selection Guide (continued)

Yes: See Chart Below
No: Go to Question 4

Does the application require the ability to accept input from a variety of
safety devices such as E-stops, interlocks or light curtains?

Outputs
Rapid
Delivery
Relay Model Product Terminals

Inputs †

Safety
N/O

Aux.
N/C

Solid
State
Aux.

Safety Delayed

Operating Voltage

N/O

N/C

24
DC

–

●

24
AC

120
AC

200
AC

230
AC

Catalog
Page

●

–

■

J-41

Multi-Input Safety Monitoring Relays
SR120MP

Fixed

1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

Yes: See Chart Below
No: Go to Question 5

Does the application require single or dual channel inputs
with 2 or 3 delayed safety outputs?

Outputs
Rapid
Delivery
Relay Model Product Terminals

Inputs †

Safety
N/O

Aux.
N/C

Solid
State
Aux.

Safety Delayed

Operating Voltage

N/O

N/C

24
DC

24
AC

120
AC

200
AC

230
AC

Catalog
Page

Safety Monitoring Relays with Delayed Outputs
G9SA-3211

Yes

Fixed

1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

■

J-26

SR108AD

Yes

Fixed

1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

J-38

SR109AD

Fixed

1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

J-38

SR208AD

Yes

Removable 1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

■

J-46

SR209AD

Yes

Removable 1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

■

J-46

Yes: See Chart Below
No: Go to Question 6

Does the application require the monitoring of two-hand palm buttons?

Outputs
Rapid
Delivery
Relay Model Product Terminals

Inputs †

Safety
N/O

Aux.
N/C

Solid
State
Aux.

Safety Delayed
N/O

N/C

Operating Voltage
24
DC

24
AC

120
AC

200
AC

230
AC

Catalog
Page

Two Hand Controls
G9SA-TH3011 Yes

Fixed

1 N/C + 1 N/O

–

●

–

●

J-26

SR104P

Fixed

1 N/C + 1 N/O

–

●

–

J-37

Yes

(Continued on next page)

Notes:
† Codes: PNP = light curtain, 2H = two-hand control
1
Dedicated expansion module available
● = Available ■ = Available on special order

www.sti.com/info

J-3

Selection Guide

Safety Monitoring Relays

Selection Guide (continued)

Yes: See Chart Below
No: Go to Question 7

Does the application require an expansion module?

Outputs

Inputs †

G9SA-EX031

Yes

Fixed

Dedicated

–

G9SA-EX301

Yes

Fixed

Dedicated

–

SR105E

Fixed

1 N/C, PNP

–

SR106ED

Fixed

1 N/C, PNP

–

G9SX-EX041

Yes

Removable Dedicated

–

G9SX-EX401

Yes

Removable Dedicated

–

Relay Model

Safety
Delayed

Solid State

Rapid
Delivery
Product Terminals

Safety
Safety Aux.
N/O
N/C Safety Aux. Delayed

Operating Voltage
24 24 120 230 Catalog
DC AC AC AC
Page

N/O

N/C

–

J-26

–

J-26

–

●

–

J-37

–

●

–

J-41

–

●

–

J-5

–

●

–

J-5

Expansion Units

Does the application require stop motion sensing or
time “on-delay” after initiation of stop command?

Yes: See Chart Below
No: Go to Question 8

Outputs

Relay Model

Rapid
Delivery
Product Terminals

Safety
Delayed

Solid State
Safety
Safety Aux.
N/O
N/C Safety Aux. Delayed

Inputs †

N/O

N/C

Operating Voltage
24 24 120 230 Catalog
DC AC AC AC
Page

Stop Motion Sensing Units
1 N/O
1 N/C

–

Removable Time Delay

–

Removable Back EMF

–

SR125SMS45

Yes

Fixed

SR223SMT

Yes

G9SX-SM

Yes

Back EMF

–

●

–

●

■

J-42

–

●

■

J-47

–

●

–

J-25

Yes: See Chart Below
No: Please contact Omron.

Does the application require a modular safety system?

Outputs

Relay Model

Rapid
Delivery
Product Terminals

Safety
Delayed

Solid State
Safety
Safety Aux.
N/O
N/C Safety Aux. Delayed

Inputs †

N/O

N/C

Operating Voltage
24 24 120 230 Catalog
DC AC AC AC
Page

Modular Safety Relays
G9SX-ADA2221

Yes

Removable 1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

J-5

G9SX-AD3221

Yes

Removable 1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

J-5

G9SX-BC202

Yes

Removable 1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

J-5

G9SX-GS1

Yes

Removable 1 N/C, 2 N/C, PNP

–

●

–

J-15

Notes:
† Codes: PNP = light curtain, 2H = two-hand control
1
Dedicated expansion module available
● = Available ■ = Available on special order

J-4

www.sti.com/info

Safety Monitoring Relays

G9SX

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Flexible Safety Unit
•
•
•
•
•

Logical AND functions adds flexibility to I/O expansion
Facilitates partial or complete control system setup.
Solid-state outputs (excluding Expansion Units).
Detailed LED indications enable easy diagnosis.
TÜV Product Service certification for compliance with IEC/
EN61508 (SIL3) and EN954-1 (Cat. 4).
• Approved by UL and CSA.
• New unit joins the Series with the following two additional
features:
- OFF-delay time of up to 150 seconds
(The OFF-delay output also complies with Cat. 4.)
- Two logical AND connection inputs
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Ratings
Power Input
G9SX-AD322-□/ADA222-□
Rated supply voltage

24 VDC

Operating voltage range

-15% to 10% of rated supply voltage

Rated power consumption*

4 W max.

G9SX-BC202-□

G9SX-EX-□

3 W max.

2 W max.

*Power consumption of loads not included.

Inputs
G9SX-AD322-□/ADA222-□
Safety input
Feedback/reset input

G9SX-BC202-□

Operating voltage: 20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC, internal impedance: approx. 2.8 kW

Outputs
G9SX-AD322-□/ADA222-□

G9SX-BC202-□

Instantaneous safety output *1
OFF-delayed safety output *1

P channel MOS FET transistor output
Load current:
Using 2 outputs or less: 1 A DC max. *2
Using 3 outputs or more: 0.8 A DC max.

P channel MOS FET transistor output
Load current:
Using 1 output: 1 A DC max. *2
Using 2 outputs: 0.8 A DC max.

Auxiliary output

PNP transistor output
Load current: 100 mA max.

*1. While safety outputs are in the ON state, the following signal sequence is output continuously for diagnosis. When using the safety outputs as input
signals to control devices (i.e. Programmable Controllers), consider the OFF pulse shown below.
*2. The following derating is required when Units are mounted side-by-side.
G9SX-AD322-□/G9SX-ADA222-□/G9SX-BC202-□: 0.4 A max. load current

Approx. 100 ms
ON
OFF
360 µs max.

Expansion Unit Ratings
G9SX-EX-□

Rated load

250 VAC, 3A/30 VDC, 3A (resistive load)

Rated carry current

Maximum switching voltage

250 VAC, 125 VDC

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-5

G9SX

Safety Monitoring Relays

Specifications (continued)
Characteristics
Overvoltage category (IEC/EN 60664-1)
Operating time (OFF to ON state) (See note 1.)

Response Time (ON to OFF state) (See note 1.)
ON-state residual voltage
OFF-state leakage current
Maximum wiring length of safety input and logic AND
input
Reset input time (Reset button pressing time)
Accuracy of OFF-delay time (See note 5.)
Insulation
Between logical AND connection
resistance terminals, and power supply input
terminals and other input and output
terminals connected together
Between all terminals connected
together and DIN track
Dielectric
Between logical AND connection
strength
terminals, and power supply input
terminals and other input and output
terminals connected together
Between all terminals connected
together and DIN track
Between different poles of outputs
Between safety relay outputs connected
together and other terminals connected
together
Vibration resistance
Shock
Destruction
resistance Malfunction
Durability
Electrical

Mechanical

G9SX-AD322-□/ADA222-□
II

G9SX-BC202-□

G9SX-EX-□
II (Safety relay outputs 13 to
43 and 14 to 44: III)
30 ms max. (See note 4.)

50 ms max. (Safety input: ON) 50 ms max. (Safety input: ON)
(See note 2.)
100 ms max. (Logical AND
connection input: ON)
(See note 3.)
15 ms
10 ms max. (See note 4.)
3.0 V max. (safety output, auxiliary output)
0.1 mA max. (safety output, auxiliary output)
100 m max. (External connection impedance: 100 Ω max. and 10 nF max.)
100 ms min.
Within ±5% of the set value
20 MΩ min. (by 100 VDC)

500 VAC for 1 min.

—

—
—

Within ±5% of the set value
—

20 mΩ min. (at 100 VDC)

100 mΩ min. (at 500 VDC)

—

500 VAC for 1 min.

1,200 VAC for 1 min.

—
2,200 VAC for 1 min.

Frequency: 10 to 55 Hz, 0.375-mm single amplitude (0.75-mm double amplitude)
300 m/s 2
100 m/s 2
—
100,000 cycles min.
(rated load, switching
frequency: 1,800 cycles/hour)
—
5,000,000 cycles min.
(switching frequency: 7,200
cycles/hour)
-10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
25% to 85%
0.5 N·m
Approx. 200 g
Approx. 125 g
Approx. 165 g

Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Terminal tightening torque (See note 6.)
Weight
Notes:
1. When two or more Units are connected by logical AND, the operating time and response time are the sum total of the operating times and response
times, respectively, of all the Units connected by logical AND.
2. Represents the operating time when the safety input turns ON with all other conditions set.
3. Represents the operating time when the logical AND input turns ON with all other conditions set.
4. This does not include the operating time or response time of Advanced Units that are connected.
5. This does not include the operating time or response time of internal relays in the G9SX-EX-□.
6. For the G9SX-□-RT (with screw terminals) only.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-6

www.sti.com/info

G9SX

Safety Monitoring Relays

Specifications (continued)
Logical AND Connection
G9SX-AD322-□/ADA222-□

G9SX-BC202-□

G9SX-EX-□

Number of Units connected per logical AND output

4 Units max.

---

Total number of Units connected by logical AND *1

20 Units max.

---

Number of Units connected in series by logical AND

5 Units max.

---

Max. number of Expansion Units connected *2

---

5 Units max.

Maximum cable length for logical AND input

100 m max.

---

Note: See Logical AND Connection Combinations below for details.
*1. The number of G9SX-EX401-□ Expansion Units or G9SX-EX041-T-□ Expansion Units (OFF-delayed Model) not included.
*2. G9SX-EX401-□ Expansion Units and G9SX-EX041-T-□ Expansion Units (OFF-delayed Model) can be mixed.

Logical AND Connection Combinations
1. One logical AND connection output from an Advanced Unit G9SX-AD
can be logical AND connected to up to four Advanced Units.

5. Two logical AND connection outputs, each from different Advanced/
Basic Units, can be logical AND connected to a single G9SX-ADA Unit.

G9SX-AD

G9SX-BC

G9SX-AD

G9SX-BC

G9SX-AD
G9SX-ADA

2. Two logical AND outputs from a Basic Unit G9SX-BC can be logical AND
connected to up to eight Advanced Units.
G9SX-BC

G9SX-AD

6. The largest possible system configuration contains a total of 20
Advanced and Basic Units. In this configuration, each Advanced Unit
can have up to five Expansion Units.

G9SX-AD

Advanced Unit
or Basic Unit

Note 1: Basic Unit = G9SX-BC
Advanced Unit = G9SX-AD or G9SX-ADA
Note 2: The G9SX-AD322-T-@ has only one logical AND
output.

Advanced Unit

3. Two logical AND outputs from an Advanced Unit G9SX-ADA can be
logical AND connected to up to eight Advanced Units.
Advanced Unit

Advanced Unit

G9SX-ADA

G9SX-AD

Advanced Unit

Number of Units connected
per logical AND output:
4 Units max.

G9SX-AD

4. Any Advanced Unit with logical AND input can be logical AND
connected to Advanced Units on up to five tiers.
G9SX-BC or
G9SX-AD or
G9SX-ADA

Number of Units connected
in series by logical AND:
5 Units max.

Advanced Unit

Total number of Units
connected by logical AND:
20 Units max.

G9SX-AD

www.sti.com/info

J-7

G9SX

Safety Monitoring Relays

Wiring
Internal Connection
G9SX-ADA222-□ (Advanced Unit)

G9SX-AD322-□ (Advanced Unit)
A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

Power
supply
circuit

Safety
Input 1

Safety
Input 2

Reset/Feedback
Input

Safety output control

Cross
fault
detection
input

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1 T41 T42 T51 T52

T41 T42

Logical AND input

Power
supply
circuit

Expansion Unit
Auxiliary
output control output control

S14 S24 S34 S44 S54 L1 X1 X2

Safety
Input 1

Reset/Feedback
Input

Cross
fault
detection
input

Logical
Logical
AND input AND input 2

Auxiliary
Expansion Unit
output control output control

Safety output control

S14 S24 S44 S54 L1 L2 X1 X2
*3

*1. Internal power supply circuit is not isolated.
*2. Logical AND input is isolated.
*3. Outputs S14 to S54 are internally redundant.

*1. Internal power supply circuit is not isolated.
*2. Logical AND inputs are isolated.
*3. Outputs S14 to S54 are internally redundant.

G9SX-BC202-□ (Basic Unit)

G9SX-EX401-□/G9SX-EX041-T-□ (Expansion Unit /
Expansion Unit OFF-delayed model)

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1
*1

Power
supply
circuit

*1
Safety
Input 1

Safety
Input 2

Reset/Feedback
Input

Safety outputs control

S14 S24

L1 L2

Cross
fault
detection
input

Auxiliary
outputs control

Exp.
sig.
IN

X1 X2

13 23 33 43

Safety
output
Power control
supply
circuit Auxiliary
output
control

Exp.
sig.
OUT

K2
14 24 34 44

*1. Internal power supply circuit is not isolated.
*2. Outputs S14 and S24 are internally redundant.

*1. Internal power supply circuit is not isolated.
*2. Relay outputs are isolated.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-8

Safety
Input 2

www.sti.com/info

G9SX

Safety Monitoring Relays

Dimensions

(mm)

Advanced Unit
G9SX-AD322-□
(6) (See note 2.)

Terminal arrangement
T31 T32 T33
T31 T32 T33
T11 T12 Y1

T11 T12 Y1 X1 X2 A1
X1

G9SX-AD322-T15
24VDC
PWR

FB
T2

100 max.

AND
EI

1 1.5 2

0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2

0 15

3
4
5
7
10

PWR

AND

ERR

No.

OFF-DELAY

T21 T22
T41 T42
S14 S24 S34 S44 S54

ED
ERR

A2
L1

T21 T22
35.5 max.
(35)*

(10)

115 max.

T41 T42 A2

S14 S24 S34 S44 S54 L1
(6) (See note 2.)

* Typical dimension

Advanced Unit
G9SX-ADA222-□
(6) (See note 2.)

Terminal arrangement
T31 T32 T33 T51 T52
T31 T32 T33 T51 T52
T11 T12 Y1 X1 X2

T11 T12 Y1 X1 X2 A1
A1

G9SX-ADA222-T150
24VDC
PWR

PWR

FB
T2

100 max.

AND1 AND2
ED

EI
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2

1 1.5 2

0 15

3
4
5
7
10

T2
AND2

AND1

ERR

No.

OFF-DELAY

T21 T22
T41 T42
S14 S24 S44 S54 L1

ED
ERR

A2
L2

T21 T22

35.5 max.
(35)*

(10)

115 max.

T41 T42 A2

S14 S24 S44 S54 L1 L2
(6) (See note 2.)

* Typical dimension

Basic Unit
G9SX-BC202-□
(6) (See note 2.)

Terminal arrangement
T31 T32 T33 Y1
T11 T12 X1 A1
T31 T32 T33 Y1
T11 T12 X1 A1

G9SX-BC202
24VDC
PWR

ERR

100 max.

No.

T21 T22 X2
S14 S24 L1

PWR

ERR

A2
L2

T21 T22 X2 A2
23 max.
(22.5)*

115 max.

S14 S24 L1 L2
(6) (See note 2.)

* Typical dimension

Notes:
1. Above outline drawing is for -RC terminal type.
2. For -RC terminal type only.

www.sti.com/info

J-9

G9SX

Safety Monitoring Relays

Dimensions (continued)

(mm)

Expansion Unit
G9SX-EX401-□

Expansion Unit (OFF-delayed Model)
G9SX-EX041-T-□

Terminal arrangement

(6) (See note 2.)

G9SX-EX401-@
(Expansion Unit)

G9SX-EX041-T-@
(Expansion Unit
with OFF Delay)

13 23 33 43

G9SX-EX401
24VDC

100 max.

A1
24

X2
34

A2
44

23 max.
(22.5)*

115 max.

(6) (See note 2.)

PWR

ERR

A1 X2 A2

14 24 34 44

* Typical dimension

Notes:
1. Above outline drawing is for -RC terminal type.
2. For -RC terminal type only.

Applications
G9SX-AD322-T15
(24 VDC) (2-channel Safety Sensor / Auto Reset)

Emitter

F3SJ-A

Feedback Loop

Receiver

KM1

Timing chart

KM2
Motor controller

S34

GND

+24 V

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

G9SX-AD322-T15
+24 V

T41 T42

Safety sensor outputs

KM1

KM3

Unit S14, S24, S34

KM2

KM4

Unit S44, S54

KM4

OSSD2

OSSD1

KM3

AND
OFF

KM1, KM2 N.C. contact
KM3, KM4 N.C. contact

Control circuit

KM1, KM2 N.O. contact
KM3, KM4 N.O. contact

KM1 KM2

GND

Operation command

S14 S24 S34 S44 S54 L1 X1 X2
KM3 KM4

Rotation of motor
PLC etc.

F3SJ-A:
Safety sensor
KM1 to KM4: Contactor
M1, M2:
3-phase motor

Motor controller
(Operation command)

Notes:
1. This example corresponds to category 4.
2. For further information of settings and wiring, refer to the catalog or instruction manual of the connected sensor.
3. Use safety sensors with PNP outputs.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-10

www.sti.com/info

Off-delay time

G9SX

Safety Monitoring Relays

Applications (continued)
G9SX-AD322-T15 (24 VDC) + G9SX-EX041-T
(24 VDC) (Guard Lock Safety Door Switch (Mechanical Lock), (2-channel Safety Limit Switch Inputs / Manual Reset)

Lock release signal
KM1

(See note 2.)
KM2

KM6
S2

S4
31
32
11
12

Guard
S1

Motor controller

S34

OPEN

Stop signal

KM1

KM3

KM5

KM2

KM4

KM6

Feedback Loop

KM1

(See note 2.)

S3
KM2

KM6
+24 V

+24 V
NC

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

T41 T42

G9SX-AD322-T15

AND
OFF

13 23 33 43

G9SX-EX041-T
Control
circuit

+24 V

Control circuit

K1
K2

S14 S24 S34 S44 S54 L1 X1 X2
KM1 KM2

KM3 KM4

14 24 34 44
KM5

PLC etc.

Motor controller
(Operation command)

GND

Timing chart

KM6

Guard closed → opened

Limit switch S1
Guard lock safety door switch S2

S1:
S2:
S3:
S4:
KM1 to KM6:
M1 to M3:

Lock release signal

Safety limit switch
Guard lock safety door switch
Reset switch
Lock release switch
Contactor
3-phase motor

S4
Guard can be opened.
Stop signal
Reset switch S3
Unit S14, S24, S34

Notes:
1. This example corresponds to category 4.
2. Connect the N.C. contacts of contactors KM1, KM2,
KM3, KM4, KM5, and KM6 in series.

Unit S44, S54
KM1, KM2 N.C. contact
KM1, KM2 N.O. contact
KM3 to KM6 N.C. contact
KM3 to KM6 N.O. contact
Operation command

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Rotation of motor
OFF-delay time

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-11

G9SX

Safety Monitoring Relays

Applications (continued)
G9SX-BC202 (24 VDC) (2-channel Emergency Stop Switch Input/Manual Reset)
+ G9SX-AD322-T15 (24 VDC) (2-channel Safety Limit Switch Input/Auto Reset)
+ G9SX-AD322-T15 (24 VDC) (2-channel Safety Limit Switch Input/Auto Reset)
+ G9SX-ADA222-T150 (24 VDC) (2-channel Safety Limit Switch Input/Auto Reset)
Feedback Loop

KM1
KM2

S1
KM 1
S2
+24 V

KM2

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

G9SX-BC202 (Unit 1)
+24 V

Control circuit

S14 S24

L1 L2

X1 X2

KM1 KM2

PLC etc.

GND

23
S6

S4
24

Feedback Loop

Guard 1

KM3

S3
12

M3
+24 V

T41 T42

G9SX-AD322-T15 (Unit 2)

+24 V
NC

AND

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

OFF

T41 T42

G9SX-AD322-T15 (Unit 3)

AND
OFF

Control circuit

S14 S24 S34 S44 S54 L1 X1 X2
KM3 KM4

KM 6

open

+24 V
NC

KM5

KM6

KM 4

KM5

KM4

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

11
S5

KM3

open
+24 V

Feedback Loop

Guard 2

S14 S24 S34 S44 S54 L1 X1 X2
KM5 KM6

PLC etc.

GND

23
S8
24

Feedback Loop

Guard 3

KM7

S7
12

KM8

open
+24 V

+24 V

T41 T51

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

T41 T42

G9SX-ADA222-T150 (Unit 4)

T51 T52

AND
OFF

Motor controller
KM7

Control circuit

S14 S24

S44 S54 L1 L2 X1 X2
KM7 KM8

GND

PLC etc.

Motor controller
(Operation command)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-12

www.sti.com/info

Emergency stop switch
Reset switch
Safety limit switch
Limit switch
Contactor
3-phase motor

Note: This example corresponds to category 4.

KM8

M4
A2

S14
4

S1:
S2:
S3, S5, S7:
S4, S6, S8:
KM1 to KM8:
M1 to M4:

G9SX

Safety Monitoring Relays

Ordering
Model Number Legend
G9SX – □ □ □ □ – □ – □

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Functions

4 Output Configuration (Auxiliary Outputs)

AD/ADA: Advanced Unit
BC: Basic Unit
EX: Expansion Unit

1: 1 output
2: 2 outputs

5 Max. OFF-delay Time

2 Output Configuration (Instantaneous Safety Outputs)

Advanced Unit

T15: 15 s

T150: 150 s
Basic Unit

No indicator: No OFF delay
Expansion Unit

No indicator: No OFF delay

T: OFF delay

0: None
2: 2 outputs
3: 3 outputs
4: 4 outputs

3 Output Configuration (OFF-delayed Safety Outputs)
0: None
2: 2 outputs
4: 4 outputs

6 Terminal Block Type
RT: Screw terminals
RC: Spring-cage terminals

Note: See List of Models below for the actual models that can be ordered.

List of Models
Advanced Unit
Logical AND
connection

Safety outputs *3
Instantaneous

OFF-delayed
*2

Auxiliary
outputs *4

Inputs

Outputs

No. of
input
channels

Max.
OFFdelay
time *1

Rated
voltage

Terminal block
type

Model

Screw terminals G9SX-AD322-T15-RT
3
(Semiconductor)

1
(Semiconductor)
2
(Semiconductor)

2
(Semiconductor)

Spring-cage
terminals

G9SX-AD322-T15-RC

Screw terminals G9SX-AD322-T150-RT
150 s
1 or 2
channels

2
(Semiconductor)

15 s

1
(Semiconductor)

2
(Semiconductor)

24 VDC
15 s

Spring-cage
terminals

G9SX-AD322-T150-RC

Screw terminals G9SX-ADA222-T15-RT
Spring-cage
terminals

G9SX-ADA222-T15-RC

Screw terminals G9SX-ADA222-T150-RT
150 s

Spring-cage
terminals

G9SX-ADA222-T150-RC

*1. The OFF-delay time can be set in 16 steps as follows:
T15: 0/0.2/0.3/0.4/0.5/0.6/0.7/1/1.5/2/3/4/5/7/10/15 s
T150: 0/10/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100/110/120/130/140/150 s
*2. The OFF-delayed output becomes an instantaneous output by setting the OFF-delay time to 0 s.
*3. P channel MOS FET transistor output
*4. PNP transistor output

Basic Unit
Safety outputs *1
Instantaneous
2

OFF-delayed
---

Auxiliary outputs
*2
2 (Semiconductor)

No. of input
channels
1 or 2
channels

Rated voltage
24 VDC

Terminal block
type

Model

Screw terminals

G9SX-BC202-RT

Spring-cage
terminals

G9SX-BC202-RC

*1. P channel MOS FET transistor output
*2. PNP transistor output

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-13

G9SX

Safety Monitoring Relays

Ordering (continued)
Expansion Unit
Safety outputs
Instantaneous
4 PST-NO

OFF-delayed

Auxiliary outputs
*1

OFF-delay time

---

Rated voltage

--1 (Semiconductor)

---

4 PST-NO

24 VDC
*2

Terminal block
type

Model

Screw terminals

G9SX-EX401-RT

Spring-cage
terminals

G9SX-EX401-RC

Screw terminals

G9SX-EX041-T-RT

Spring-cage
terminals

G9SX-EX041-T-RC

*1. PNP transistor output
*2. The OFF-delay time is synchronized to the OFF-delay time setting in the connected Advanced Unit (G9SX-AD-□/G9SX-ADA-□).

Accessories
Terminal Block
Appearance *

Specifications

Applicable units

Model

Remarks

Terminal Block with screw
terminals (3-pin)

G9SX-AD-□
G9SX-ADA-□

Y9S-03T1B-02A

Two Terminal Blocks (black) with screw
terminals, and a set of six code marks to
prevent erroneous insertion.

Terminal Block with screw
terminals (4-pin)

G9SX-BC-□
G9SX-EX-□

Y9S-04T1B-02A

Two Terminal Blocks (black) with screw
terminals, and a set of six code marks to
prevent erroneous insertion.

Terminal Block with springcage terminals (3-pin)

G9SX-AD-□
G9SX-ADA-□

Y9S-03C1B-02A

Two Terminal Blocks (black) with spring-cage
terminals, and a set of six code marks to
prevent erroneous insertion.

Terminal Block with springcage terminals (4-pin)

G9SX-BC-□
G9SX-EX-□

Y9S-04C1B-02A

Two Terminal Blocks (black) with spring-cage
terminals, and a set of six code marks to
prevent erroneous insertion.

Note: The G9SX main unit comes with a terminal block as standard equipment. The accessories shown here can be ordered as a replacement.
*The illustrations show 3-pin types

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-14

www.sti.com/info

Safety Monitoring Relays

G9SX-GS

G9SXGS

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Guard Switching Unit
• A safety measure for hazardous operations that does not lower
productivity
• Two functions support two types of application:
– Auto switching: For applications where operators work together
with machines
– Manual switching: For applications with limited operations
• External indicator outputs enable indicating the switching status of
two safety input devices.
• Auxiliary outputs enable monitoring of safety inputs, safety outputs,
and errors.
• Detailed LED indications enable easy diagnosis.
• Logical AND connection allows complicated applications in combination with other G9SX-series Units.
• Certification for compliance with IEC/EN 61508 (SIL3), IEC/EN 62061
(SIL3), and EN 954-1 (category 4).
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment
today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Ratings
Power Input
G9SX-GS226-T15-□
Rated supply voltage

24 VDC

Operating voltage range

-15% to 10% of rated supply voltage

Rated power consumption*

5 W max.

G9SX-EX-□

2 W max.

*Power consumption of loads not included.

Inputs
G9SX-GS226-T15-□
Safety inputs
Mode selector input
Feedback/reset input

Operating voltage: 20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC
Internal impedance: Approx. 2.8 kΩ*

*Provide a current equal to or higher than that of the minimum applicable load of the connected input control device.

Outputs
G9SX-GS226-T15-□
Instantaneous safety outputs *1
OFF-delayed safety outputs *1

P channel MOS FET transistor outputs
Load current: 0.8 A DC max. *2

Auxiliary outputs
(for input, output and error monitoring)

PNP transistor outputs
Load current: 100 mA max.

External indicator outputs

P channel MOS FET transistor outputs
Connectable indicators
• Incandescent lamp: 24 VDC, 3 to 7 W
• LED lamp: 10 to 300 mA DC

*1. While safety standstill detection outputs are in the ON state, the following
signal sequence is output continuously for diagnosis. When using these
ON
safety outputs as input signals to control devices (i.e. Programmable
OFF
Controllers), consider the OFF pulse signal shown at right.
*2. The following derating is required when Units are mounted side-by-side.
G9SX-GS226-T15-□: 0.4 A max. load current

Approx. 100 ms

360 µs max.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-15

G9SX-GS

Safety Monitoring Relays

Specifications (continued)
Expansion Unit
G9SX-EX-□
Rated load

250 VAC, 3 A/30 VDC, 3 A (resistive load)

Rated carry current

Maximum switching voltage

250 VAC, 125 VDC

Logical AND Connection
G9SX-GS226-T15-□

G9SX-EX-□

Number of Units connected per logical AND output

4 Units max.

---

Total number of Units connected by logical AND *1

20 Units max.

---

Number of Units connected in series by logical AND

5 Units max.

---

Max. number of Expansion Units connected *2

---

5 Units max.

Maximum cable length for logical AND input

100 m max.

---

Wiring
Internal Connection
G9SX-GS226-T15□
(Safety Guard Switching Unit)
T11 T12 T21 T22 Y1

M1 M2

T61 T62 T71 T72 Y2

Y3 Y4

T31 T32 T33

T41 T42

External
indicator
diagnosis
switching input

Reset/
feedback input

*2
Logical
AND input

J
Cross

Power Safety input A Safety input A fault Mode selector Safety input B Safety input B
detection
supply
Ch. 1
Ch. 2
input
Ch. 1
Ch. 2
input A
circuit
*1
Safety output control
Auxiliary output control

S14 S24 S44 S54 L1

Cross
fault
detection
input B

External indicator
output control

X1 X2 X3 X4

Expansion Unit
output control

*1. Internal power supply circuit is not isolated.
*2. Logical AND input is isolated.
*3. Outputs S14 to S54 and L1 are internally redundant.

UA UB

G9SX-EX401-□ / G9SX-EX401-T-□
(Expansion Unit/Expansion Unit with OFF Delay)
*1

Exp.
sig.
IN

A1
Safety
output
Power control
supply
circuit Auxiliary
output
control

13 23 33 43

Exp.
sig.
OUT

*1. Internal power supply circuit is not isolated.
*2. Relay outputs are isolated.

14 24 34 44

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-16

www.sti.com/info

G9SX-GS

Safety Monitoring Relays

System Configuration Examples
Auto Switching Function

2. Safety Light Curtain A

2. Safety
Light Curtain A

3. Safety Light
Curtain B

1. Emergency
Stop Switch
A22E

3. Safety Light Curtain B

Safety Light
Curtain
F3SJ

Basic Unit
G9SX-BC
Safety Guard
Switching Unit
G9SX-GS

Logical AND
connection

Safety Light
Curtain
F3SJ

Auxiliary Output
The auxiliary output
can be used to
notify operators of
the input, output, or
error status.

Safety Output

Programmable
Controllers
CS/CJ Series

1. Emergency
Stop Switch

The external indicator
output can be used to
notify operators of Safety
Light Curtains that may
safely be interrupted.

External
External
indicator A indicator B
Note: External indicator output may be used as necessary.

Robot

Working condition
Welding robot

External
indicator

Conveying robot

G9SX-GS
Safety input

Safety output

Monitor output

Indicator A

Safety input B
Safety output

Normal operation

Emergency
Stop Switch

Input B
monitor

OK to work

1
Welding robot

Conveying robot

Monitoring

Indicator B

Input A
monitor

Safety Light
Curtain A

Indicator A

Safety input B
Safety output

OFF

Emergency
Stop Switch

Safety Light Curtain B

OFF

Input B
monitor

OK to work

Welding robot

Indicator B
Safety input A

Conveying robot

OFF

Input A
monitor

Input B
monitor

Safety Light
Curtain A

Indicator A

Safety input B

Monitoring
Safety Light Curtain B

Safety output

Emergency
Stop Switch

Indicator B

Not OK
to work

Welding robot Conveying robot

Safety input A

OFF

OFF
Safety Light
Curtain A

Safety input B
Safety Light Curtain B

Safety input A

Hazardous condition

Input A
monitor

Safety Light
Curtain A

Safety Light Curtain B

External indicator

Safety input A

External Indicator
Output

Contactor

OFF

Emergency
Stop Switch

OFF
Safety output

OFF

Input A
monitor
Indicator A

OFF

Input B
monitor
Indicator B

Not OK
to work

www.sti.com/info

J-17

G9SX-GS

Safety Monitoring Relays

System Configuration Examples (continued)
Manual Switching Function
2. Safety Door Switch

2. Cover

3. Safety
Limit Switch

1. Emergency
Stop Switch
A22E

3. Conveyor cart

Safety Door
Switch
D4NS

Basic Unit
G9SX-BC

Safety
Limit Switch
D4F

Safety output

1. Emergency
Stop Switch

The auxiliary output
can be used to
notify operators of
the input, output, or
error status.
Programmable
Controllers
CS/CJ Series

Normal operation

External
indicator

Mode
selector

Safety output Mode selector

Normal
operating mode

Monitor output

External indicator

OFF
ON

Emergency
Stop Switch

Input A
monitor
Indicator A

Safety output

Door Switch

Input B
monitor
Indicator B

Not OK
to open

Safety input A

ON
ON

Mode
selector

Disabled
Door Switch

Maintenance

Note: External indicator output may be used as necessary.

Safety input B

Monitoring

Limit
Switch

OK
to open

Maintenance
mode

Input A
monitor

OFF

Input B
monitor

Safety input B

Emergency
Stop Switch

Disabled

Safety output

Indicator A

Indicator B
Safety input A

Monitoring
Limit
Switch

ON
ON

Mode
selector

Door Switch

Emergency
Stop Switch

OK
to open

Limit
Switch

Disabled

Safety output

Input A
monitor

OFF

Input B
monitor

Indicator A

Indicator B

OFF
Mode
selector

Safety input B

Disabled
Door Switch

Safety input A

OFF

Monitoring

Maintenance
mode

Safety input B

Disabled

Hazardous condition

The external indicator
output can be used to
notify operators that the
cover may be opened.

G9SX-GS
Safety input

Disabled

Limit
Switch

Monitoring

J-18

External
External
indicator A indicator B

Safety input A

Disabled

External Indicator
Output

Contactor

Conveyor cart

Working condition

Key-type
Selector Switch
A22K

Auxiliary Output

Safety Guard
Switching Unit
G9SX-GS

Logical AND
connection

4. Mode selector

Emergency
Stop Switch

OK
to open

Disabled

OFF
Safety output

Maintenance
mode

OFF

Input A
monitor

OFF

Input B
monitor

Indicator A

Indicator B

www.sti.com/info

G9SX-GS

Safety Monitoring Relays

Functions
Auto Switching Function

External Indicator Outputs

The following table shows the relationship between the safety inputs and
safety outputs of the G9SX-GS□ when auto switching is selected.

The operator can be notified of two safety input states (enabled/disabled)
by connecting external indicator outputs UA and UB to indicators.
External indicator outputs UA and UB turn ON when safety inputs A and
B, respectively, are disabled, and turn OFF when safety inputs A and B,
respectively, are enabled.
If error monitor output X2 turns ON, UA and UB will both turn OFF.

Safety input A

OFF

Safety input B

OFF

Safety output

OFF

Notes:
1. If the logical AND connection input is enabled, it must be ON as a
necessary condition for the above table.
2. Select either auto reset or manual reset for the reset mode, depending on
the operation of the application.

Auto Switching Selected

Manual Switching Function
As shown in the following table, the relationship between the safety inputs
and safety outputs of the G9SX-GS□ depends on the setting of the
connected mode selector when manual switching is selected.

OFF

Safety input B

OFF

Safety output

OFF

Description of operation

Output ON condition

Safety input A is disabled.

Safety input B is ON.

Safety input B is disabled.

Safety input A is ON.

Manual Switching Selected

Mode Selector = Normal Operating Mode
(M1 = ON, M2 = OFF)
Safety input A

External
indicator output

Description of operation

Output ON condition

Safety input A is disabled.

Mode selector switch
must be set to normal
operating mode.

Safety input B is disabled.

Mode selector
switch must be set to
maintenance mode.

Note: Fault of external indicators can be detected.

Mode Selector = Maintenance Mode (M1 = OFF, M2 = ON)
Safety input A

OFF

Safety input B

OFF

Safety output

OFF

Auxiliary Outputs
Auxiliary outputs X1 to X4 can be used to notify the operator of input,
output, and error states, as shown in the following table.

Logical AND Connection
The logical AND connection means that one Unit (Unit A) outputs a safety
signal “a” to a subsequent Unit (Unit B) and Unit B calculates the logical
AND between safety signal “a” and safety signal “b.” In the example shown
below, the logical AND connection results in a safety output of “a AND b”
for Unit B

Terminal name

Signal name

Output ON condition

Auxiliary
monitor output

X1 is ON when the instantaneous
safety output is ON.

Auxiliary
error output

X2 is ON when the error LED is lit or
flashing.

Input A
monitor

X3 is ON when safety input A is ON.

Input B
monitor

X4 is ON when safety input B is ON.

Connecting Expansion Units
a

Unit A

Unit B

a (AND) b

Note: For details on the logical AND connection, refer to the
G9SX-series Flexible Safety Unit catalog (Cat. No. J150).

• The G9SX-EX and G9SX-EX-T Expansion Units can be connected to the
G9SX-GS226-T15-□ to increase the number of safety outputs.
• A maximum of five Expansion Units can be connected to one G9SXGS226-T15-□. This may be a combination of the G9SX-EX Instantaneous
Expansion Unit and the G9SX-EX-T OFF-delayed Expansion Unit.
• Remove the terminating connector from the receptacle on the G9SXGS226-T15-□ and insert the Expansion Unit cable connector into the
receptacle. Insert the terminating connector into the receptacle on the
Expansion Unit at the very end (rightmost).
• When Expansion Units are connected to the G9SX-GS226-T15-□,
make sure that power is supplied to every Expansion Unit. (Refer to the
following diagram for actual Expansion Unit connections.)

T31
T11

T32
T12

T33
Y1

PWR

G9SX-EX
24VDC

PWR

G9SX-AD322-T15

Terminating
connector

AND
EI
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2

1 1.5 2

0 15

ED
3
4
5
7
10

ERR

OFF-DELAY

T21
S14

T22
S24

S34

No.

T41
S44

T42
S54

A2
L1

A1
24

X2
34

No.

A2
44

A1
24

X2
34

No.

A2
44

A1
24

X2
34

No.

A2
44

A1
24

X2
34

No.

A2
44

A1
24

X2
34

A2
44

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

G9SX-GS226-T15-@

www.sti.com/info

Expansion Units

J-19

G9SX-GS

Safety Monitoring Relays

Dimensions and Terminal Arrangements

(mm)

Safety Guard Switching Unit
G9SX-GS226-T15-□
(6) (See note 2.)

Terminal arrangement
T31 T32 T33 Y1 M1 M2 UA UB
T11 T12 T61 T62 Y2 Y3 Y4 A1

T31 T32 T33 Y1 M1 M2 UA UB
T11 T12 T61 T62 Y2 Y3 Y4 A1

G9SX-GS226-T15
24VDC

PWR

AND

1.5 2
3
0.7 1
4
0.6
5
0.5
7
0.4
10
0.3
0.2 0 15

100 max.

ERR

OFF-DELAY

PWR

AND

No.

ERR

T21 T22 T71 T72 T41 T42 L1 A2
X1 X2 X3 X4 S14 S24 S44 S54

T21 T22 T71 T72 T41 T42 L1 A2
X1 X2 X3 X4 S14 S24 S44 S54
45.5 max.
(45)*

115 max.

(10)

(6) (See note 2.)

* Typical dimension

Notes:
1. Above outline drawing is for -RC terminal type.
2. For -RC terminal type only.

Expansion Unit
G9SX-EX401-□

Expansion Unit (OFF-delayed Model)

G9SX-EX041-T-□

Terminal arrangement
(6) (See note 2.)

G9SX-EX401-@
(Expansion Unit)

G9SX-EX041-T-@
(Expansion Unit
with OFF Delay)

13 23 33 43

G9SX-EX401
24VDC

100 max.

A1
24

X2
34

115 max.

(6) (See note 2.)

* Typical dimension

Notes:
1. Above outline drawing is for -RC terminal type.
2. For -RC terminal type only.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-20

PWR

ERR

A2
44

23 max.
(22.5)*

PWR

www.sti.com/info

A1 X2 A2

14 24 34 44

G9SX-GS

Safety Monitoring Relays

Application Examples
G9SX-BC202 (24 VDC) (Guard Lock Safety Door Switch (Mechanical Lock),
(2-channel Emergency Stop Switch Input/Manual Reset)

+ G9SX-GS226-T15 (24 VDC) (Two 2-channel Safety Sensor Inputs/Auto Reset/Auto Switching)
Notes:
1. This example corresponds to category 4.
For details, refer to Safety Categories (EN 954-1).
2. Diagnostic checks of the external indicators connected to
external indicator outputs UA and UB can be switched with
Y3 and Y4, respectively.
3. Use safety sensors with PNP outputs.

Feedback loop

Emergency
stop switch
11

Application Examples

21
KM1

Safety Sensor 1

22
KM2

Safety Sensor 2

KM1

+24 V
NC

KM2

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

G9SX-BC202 (Unit 1)
+24 V

Control circuit

L1 L2

S14 S24
KM1 KM2

PLC etc.

Safety Sensor A
Emitter

Emergency
Stop Switch

X1 X2

Safety Sensor B
Receiver

Emitter

Receiver

(See
+24 V +24 V note 2.)
NC

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 Y1

Control output 2

GND

Control output 1

Control output 2

GND

Control output 1

Feedback Loop

KM3
KM4
(See
note 2.)
NC

+24 V

T61 T62 T71 T72 Y2

+24 V

T31 T32 T33

T41 T42

AND
OFF

G9SX-GS226-T15 (Unit 2)

KM3
Manual

+24 V

Control circuit

Auto

KM4

M2
A2

S14 S24 S44 S54

KM3 KM4

X1 X2 X3 X4

PLC etc.

Indicator
Indicator
(Diagnostic
(Diagnostic
check disabled) check enabled)

GND

S1: Emergency stop switch
S2: Reset switch
KM1 to KM4: Contactors
M1 and M2: 3-phase motors

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-21

G9SX-GS

Safety Monitoring Relays

Application Examples (continued)
G9SX-BC202 (24 VDC) (2-channel Emergency Stop Switch Input/Manual Reset),
+ G9SX-GS226-T15 (24 VDC) (Safety Limit Switch, 2-channel Safety Door Switch Inputs/Manual Reset/Manual Switching)

Notes:
1. This example corresponds to category 4.
For details, refer to Safety Categories (EN 954-1).
2. Diagnostic checks for the external indicators connected to external
indicator outputs UA and UB can be switched with Y3 and Y4, respectively.

Feedback loop

Emergency
stop switch

Application Examples

21
KM1

Safety Limit Switch

22
KM2

S1
S2

KM1
+24 V
NC

KM2

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

G9SX-BC202 (Unit 1)
+24 V

Control circuit
Mode selector

Safety
Door Switch

S14 S24

L1 L2

KM1 KM2

X1 X2
Emergency
Stop Switch

PLC etc.

23
S3

Conveyor cart

24
S4

Feedback loop

Cover
12

+24 V

S7
Mode selector
S6

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 Y1

KM4

(See
note 2.)
NC

KM3

+24 V (See
note
2.)

T61 T62 T71 T72 Y2

+24 V

T31 T32 T33

T41 T42

AND
OFF

G9SX-GS226-T15 (Unit 2)

KM3
Manual

+24 V

Control circuit

Auto

KM4

M2
A2

S14 S24 S44 S54

KM3 KM4

X1 X2 X3 X4

Indicator
Indicator
(Diagnostic
(Diagnostic
check enabled) check disabled)

S1: Emergency Stop Switch
S2, S7: Reset Switches
S3, S4: Safety Limit Switches
S5: Safety Door Switch
S6: Selector Switch
KM1 to KM4: Contactors
M1 and M2: 3-phase motors

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-22

PLC etc.

GND

www.sti.com/info

G9SX-GS

Safety Monitoring Relays

Emergency
stop switch

KM1
KM2

S1
S2

Safety Limit Switch
Mode selector

Application Examples

KM1
+24 V
NC

KM2

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

G9SX-BC202 (Unit 1)
+24 V

Cover 1

Control circuit
Emergency
Stop Switch
S14 S24

L1 L2

KM1 KM2

X1 X2
PLC etc.

Cover 2
23
S3

Conveyor
cart

24
S4

Feedback Loop

Cover 1
12

+24 V

S7
Mode selector
S6

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 Y1

KM3
KM4

(See
note 2.)
NC

+24 V (See
note
2.)

T61 T62 T71 T72 Y2

+24 V

T31 T32 T33

T41 T42

AND
OFF

G9SX-GS226-T15 (Unit 2)

KM3
Manual

+24 V

Control circuit

Auto

KM4

M2
A2

S14 S24 S44 S54

X1 X2 X3 X4

KM3 KM4

PLC etc.

Indicator
Indicator
(Diagnostic
(Diagnostic
check enabled) check disabled)

GND
S8

Feedback loop
KM5

Cover 2

KM6
+24 V
NC

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

G9SX-AD322-T15 (Unit 3)
+24 V

Control circuit

T41 T42

AND
OFF
KM5
KM6

M3
A2

S14 S24 S34 S44 S54 L1 X1 X2
KM5 KM6

PLC etc.

S1: Emergency Stop Switch
S2, S7, S9: Reset Switches
S3, S4: Safety Limit Switches
S5, S8: Safety Door Switches
S6: Selector Switch
KM1 to KM6: Contactors
M1 to M3: 3-phase motors

GND

www.sti.com/info

J-23

G9SX-GS

Safety Monitoring Relays

Ordering
Model Number Legend
G9SX – □ □ □ □ – □ – □

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Functions

4 Output Configuration (Auxiliary Outputs)

GS: Safety Guard Switching Unit
EX: Expansion Unit

1: 1 output
6: 6 outputs

2 Output Configuration (Instantaneous Safety Outputs)

5 Max. OFF-delay Time

0: None
2: 2 outputs
4: 4 outputs

Safety Guard Switching Unit

T15: 15 s
Expansion Unit

No indicator: No OFF delay

T: OFF dleay

3 Output Configuration (OFF-delayed Safety Outputs)
0: None
2: 2 outputs
4: 4 outputs

6 Terminal Block Type
RT: Screw terminals
RC: Spring-cage terminals

Note: See List of Models below for the actual models that can be ordered.

List of Models
Safety Guard Switching Unit
Logical AND
connection

Safety outputs *3

Instantaneous

OFF-delayed
*2

Auxiliary
outputs *4

Inputs

Outputs

2
(Semiconductor)

6
(Semiconductor)

1
(Semiconductor)

Max.
OFF-delay
time *1
15 s

Rated
voltage
24 VDC

Terminal block type

Model

Screw terminals

G9SX-GS226-T15-RT

Spring-cage terminals

G9SX-GS226-T15-RC

*1. The OFF-delay time can be set in 16 steps as follows:
T15: 0/0.2/0.3/0.4/0.5/0.6/0.7/1/1.5/2/3/4/5/7/10/15 s
*2. The OFF-delayed output becomes an instantaneous output by setting the OFF-delay time to 0 s.
*3. P channel MOS FET transistor output
*4. PNP transistor output (except for the external indicator outputs, which are P channel MOS FET transistor outputs)

Expansion Unit
Safety outputs
Instantaneous

OFF-delayed

4 PST-NO

---

4 PST-NO

Auxiliary outputs
*1

OFF-delay time

Rated
voltage

--1 (Semiconductor)

24 VDC
*2

Terminal block type

G9SX-EX401-RT

Spring-cage terminals

G9SX-EX401-RC

Screw terminals

G9SX-EX041-T-RT

Spring-cage terminals

G9SX-EX041-T-RC

*1. PNP transistor output
*2. The OFF-delay time is synchronized to the OFF-delay time setting in the connected Unit (G9SX-GS226-T15-□).

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-24

www.sti.com/info

Model

Screw terminals

Safety Monitoring Relays

G9SX-SM

G9SXSM

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Standstill Monitoring Unit
• Sensor-less monitoring of standstill for machines with long
inertia
• Standstill is monitored by the motor’s back electromotive force
(BEMF) signal
• Features a “Standard Configuration”, allowing immediate use
without sensitivity adjustment
• “User Configuration” also available for fine-tuning of sensitivity
• Detailed LED indications enable easy fault diagnosis
• Safety Category 4 (EN954-1), PLe(ISO13849-1),
SIL 3 (IEC/EN 62061) certified
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Ratings
Power Input
G9SX-SM032-□
Rated supply voltage

24 VDC

Operating voltage range

-15% to 10% of rated supply voltage

Rated power consumption*

4 W max.

*Power consumption of loads not included.

Inputs
G9SX-SM032-□
Rated input voltage

Standstill detection input (between Z1 and Z2 and between Z3 and Z4)*1
480 VAC max. (120 Hz max.) *2 Will not accept DC voltage input.

Internal impedance

Standstill detection input: Approx. 660 kΩ*3
EDM input: Approx. 2.8 kΩ*3

*1. Input the motor phase-to-phase voltage between Z1 and Z2 and between Z3 and Z4.
*2. When a motor with AC240V or more is used, connect neutral point of the power supply to earth.
*3. Use a contact that is applicable to microloads (24 VDC, 5 mA) for connection to the EDM input.

Outputs
G9SX-SM032-□
Safety standstill detection output *1

Source output (PNP), load current: 0.3 A DC max.*2

Auxiliary output
(output monitor/error)

Source output (PNP), load current: 100 mA max.

*1. While safety standstill detection outputs are in the ON state, the following pulse signal is output continuously for output circuit diagnosis. When using
the safety standstill detection outputs as input signals to control devices (i.e. Programmable Controllers), consider the pulse signal shown below.
Approx. 100 ms
ON
OFF
360 µs max.

*2. The following derating is required when Units are mounted side-by-side.
G9SX-SM032-□: 0.2 A max. load current

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-25

Safety Monitoring Relays

G9SA

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Relay Unit
• Four kinds of 45-mm wide units are available:
A 3-pole model, a 5-pole model, and models with 3 poles and
2 OFF-delay poles, as well as a two-hand controller.
Also available are 17.5 mm wide expansion units with 3 poles
and 3 OFF-delay poles.
• Simple expansion connection
• OFF-delay models have 15-step OFF-delay settings
• Conforms to EN standards (BG approval)
• Both DIN track mounting and screw mounting are possible
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Ratings
Power Input
G9SA-301/TH301
G9SA-501
G9SA-321-T□
24 VAC/VDC:24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, or 24 VDC
100 to 240 VAC:100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Operating voltage range
85% to 110% of rated power supply voltage
Power consumption *
24 VAC/VDC: 1.8 VA/
24 VAC/VDC: 2.8 VA/
24 VAC/VDC: 3.5 VA/
1.7 W max.
2.6 W max.
3.3 W max.
100 to 240 VAC:
100 to 240 VAC:
100 to 240 VAC:
9 VA max.
11 VA max.
12.5 VA max.
*When an Expansion Unit is connected, the power consumption is increased by 2 VA/2 W max.
Power supply voltage

Inputs
G9SA-301/321-T□/TH301
G9SA-501
Input current *
40 mA max.
60 mA max.
* When an Expansion Unit is connected, the input current is increased by 30 mA max.

Contacts

Rated load
Rated carry current

G9SA-301/501/321-T□/TH301/EX301/EX031-T□
Resistive load
250 VAC, 5 A
30 VDC, 5 A
5A

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-26

www.sti.com/info

G9SA

Safety Monitoring Relays

Specifications (continued)
Characteristics
G9SA-301/TH301
G9SA-501/321-T□
G9SA-EX301/EX031-T□
Contact resistance *1
100 mΩW
Operating time *2
30 ms max.
Response time *3
10 ms max.
Insulation resistance *4
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric
Between different outputs
strength
Between inputs and outputs
2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Between power inputs and outputs
Between power inputs and other inputs
(only for 100 to 240-V models)
Vibration resistance
10 to 55 to 10 Hz, 0.375 mm single amplitude (0.75 mm double amplitude)
Shock
Destruction
300 m/s 2
resistance
Malfunction
100 m/s 2
Durability *5 Mechanical
5,000,000 operations min. (at approx. 7,200 operations/hr)
Electrical
100,000 operations min. (at approx. 1,800 operations/hr)
Failure rate (P Level) (reference value)
5 VDC, 1 mA
Ambient operating temperature
-25 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient operating humidity
35% to 85%
Terminal tightening torque
0.98 N·m
Weight *6
Approx. 210 g
Approx. 270 g
Approx. 130 g
*1. The contact resistance was measured with 1 A at 5 VDC using the voltage-drop method.
*2. Not including bounce time.
*3. The response time is the time it takes for the main contact to open after the input is turned OFF. Includes bounce time.
*4. The insulation resistance was measured with 500 VDC at the same places that the dielectric strength was checked.
*5. The durability is for an ambient temperature of 15 to 35°C and an ambient humidity of 25% to 75%.
*6. Weight shown is for 24-VAC/VDC type. For 100 to 240 VAC type, add approximately 20 g.

Applications
G9SA-TH301 (24 VDC) with 2-hand Inputs

Timing Chart
S11 (NC)
S11 (NO)
S12 (NC)
Feedback loop

S12 (NO)
KM1 and KM2
(NC)
KM1 and KM2
(NO)

0.5 s max.

Input time difference operates only
when the difference is 0.5 s max.

TH
SA

Control circuit

S11, S12:
Two-hand pushbutton switches
KM1 and KM2: Magnetic Contactor
Note: 1. Use a 1NC+1NO switch for S11
and S12.
2. This circuit achieves Safety
Category 4.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-27

G9SA

Safety Monitoring Relays

Applications (continued)
G9SA-301 (24 VAC/VDC) with 2-channel Safety Sensor/Manual Reset
Timing Chart
F3SJ-A Incident
Interrupted
Reset switch S1
Emitter

K1 and K2
(NC)
K1 and K2
(NO)
KM1 and KM2
(NC)

Receiver

KM1 and KM2
(NO)
PLC input

F3SJ-A

PLC output
KM3
F3SJ-A:
S1:
KM1 and KM2:
KM3:
M:
E1:

Shield

0V (Blue)

OSSD2 (White)

Auxiliary (Yellow)
*

OSSD1 (Green)

+24V (Brown)

Open
+24V (Brown)

EDM input (Red)

RS-485(B) (Pink)
Interlock selection
input (White)

Reset input (Yellow)

Test input (Green)

Open

0V (Blue)

Shield

(Red)

RS-485(A) (Gray)

Note: This circuit achieves Safety Category 4.
* The F3SJ-A auxiliary output wiring is shown for dark-ON operation.

Feedback loop

J
E1

TH
SA

Control
circuit

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-28

www.sti.com/info

Safety sensor
Reset switch
Magnetic Contactor
G3J Solid-state Contactor (G3J)
3-phase motor
24-VDC Power Supply (S82K)

KM3

G9SA

Safety Monitoring Relays

Applications (continued)
G9SA-501 (24 VAC/VDC) and G9SA-EX301 with 2-channel Limit Switch Input/Manual Reset

Feedback loop

Open

TH
SA

Control
circuit

S1:

Safety Limit Switch
with direct opening mechanism (NC)
(D4B-N, D4N, D4F)
S2:
Limit switch (NO)
S3:
Reset switch
KM1 and KM2: Magnetic Contactor
M:
3-phase motor

Timing Chart
Limit switches S1
and S2
Reset switch
S3
G9SA-501
K1, K2, K3 and
K4 (NC)
G9SA-501
K1, K2, K3, and
K4 (NO)
G9SA-EX301
K1 and K2 (NC)
G9SA-EX301
K1 and K2 (NO)
KM1 and KM2
(NC)

Note: This circuit achieves Safety Category 4.

KM1 and KM2
(NO)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-29

G9SA

Safety Monitoring Relays

Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement

(mm)

G9SA-301
G9SA-501
G9SA-321-T@
G9SA-TH301

Terminal Arrangement
G9SA-301
13 23 33

G9SA-501
G9SA-321-T@
41

13 23 33 43 53 61

T11 T12 T31 T32 T23 A1

PWR (green)
K1 (green)
K2 (green)
K3 (green)
K4 (green)

PWR (green)
K1 (green)
K2 (green)

10.5

G9SA-301:
G9SA-501:
G9SA-321-T@:
G9SA-TH301:

5.9

4.6 dia.

7 × 5=35

G9SA-TH301
13 23 33

(See note 1.)

T11 T12 T13 T31 T32 A1

PWR (green)
K1 (green)
K2 (green)

T21 T22 A B PE A2

T21 T22 T23 C PE A2

14 24 34

14 24 34 44 54 62

14 24 34 D

Twenty, M3
Twenty-four, M3
Twenty-four, M3
Twenty-one, M3

Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4

(See note 1)
76 max. 63

84±0.3

Connector cover *
5.6
9
35±0.3

45 max.

Note 1: The OFF-delay time setting switch is
found on the G9SA-321-T@ only.
2: The K1 to K4 indicators light when the NO contacts of
internal relays K1 to K4 close.
* Do not remove unless an Expansion Unit is being used.

R2.3

111 max.

G9SA-EX301
G9SA-EX031-T@

Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4

Terminal Arrangement
G9SA-EX301
G9SA-EX031-T@

87±0.3

33 41
13 23

PWR (green)
K1 (green)
K2 (green)

10.5

14 24

Eight, M3

34 42

OFF-delay time
setting switch
(See note 1)

5.9

4.6 dia.

76 max. 63

Note 1: The OFF-delay time setting switch is
found on the G9SA-EX031-T@ only.
2: The K1 and K2 indicators light when
the NO contacts of internal relays K1
and K2 close.

J-30

OFF-delay time
setting switch
(See note 1)
5.6
13.2

17.5 max.

R2.3

www.sti.com/info

5
70

111 max.

G9SA

Safety Monitoring Relays

Ordering
Model Number Legend
G9SA – □ □ □ □ □ – □□□□

1 2 3 4 5

1 Function

4 Contact Configuration (Auxiliary Output)

None: Emergency stop
EX: Expansion Unit
TH: Two-hand Controller

0:
1:

5 Input Configuration

2 Contact Configuration (Safety Output)
0:
3:
5:

None: 1-channel or 2-channel input possible

None
3PST-NO
5PST-NO

6 OFF-delay Time (Max. setting time)
None: No OFF-delay
T075: 7.5 seconds
T15: 15 seconds
T30: 30 seconds
Note: Call the factory for G9SA models designed for positive
ground system. These are available for 24 VDC only.

3 Contact Configuration (OFF-delay Output)
0:
2:
3:

None
SPST-NC

None
DPST-NO
3PST-NO

Specific Models
Emergency-stop Units
Main contacts

Auxiliary contact

Number of input channels

SPST-NC

1 channel or 2 channels possible

Rated voltage
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC

3PST-NO
5PST-NO

Model
G9SA-301
G9SA-501

Emergency-stop OFF-delay Units
OFF-delay
contacts

Main contacts

Auxiliary
contact

Number of
input
channels

OFF-delay time

Rated voltage
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC

7.5 s
3PST-NO

DPST-NO

SPST-NC

1 channel or
2 channels
possible

15 s
30 s

Model
G9SA-321-T075

G9SA-321-T15
G9SA-321-T30

Note: Set to maximum values in the factory.
* The following 15-step OFF-delay time settings are available:
T075: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, and 7.5 s
T15: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15 s
T30: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, and 30 s

Two-hand Controller
Main contacts

Auxiliary contact

Number of input channels

3PST-NO

SPST-NC

2 channels

Rated voltage
24 VAC/VDC
100 to 240 VAC

Model
G9SA-TH301

Expansion Unit

The Expansion Unit connects to a G9SA-301, G9SA-501, G9SA-321, or G9SA-TH301.
Main contacts
3PST-NO

Auxiliary contact
SPST-NC

Model
G9SA-EX301

Expansion Units with OFF-delay Outputs

The Expansion Unit connects to a G9SA-301, G9SA-501, G9SA-321, or G9SA-TH301.

Main contact form

Auxiliary contact

3PST-NO

SPST-NC

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

OFF-delay time
7.5 s
15 s
30 s

Model
G9SA-EX031-T075
G9SA-EX031-T15
G9SA-EX031-T30

www.sti.com/info

J-31

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR101A

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Single-Channel Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR101A will accept 24 VAC/DC or 115 VAC
• Inputs—a single N/C input channel, not monitored, is provided
• Outputs—the SR101A has two N/O outputs to route power to the coils of power
contactors
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop between S11
and S21 on the SR101A
• Reset mode—an automatic reset mode is provided with the SR101A
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Electrical
Power Supply:
Power Consumption:
Safety Inputs:
Outputs:
Output Rating AC:
Output Rating DC:
Min Switched Current/Voltage:
Impulse Withstand Voltage:
Max Drop-Out Time:
Max Output Fuse:
Reset Mode:
Contactor Monitoring:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Case Material:
Max Wire Size:
Weight:
Color:
External Switches:
Indication:
Mechanical Life:
Environmental
Enclosure Protection:
Operating Temperature:

All Models
SR101A01
±10%, 50-60 Hz
24 VAC/DC
Approx. 1 VA
1 N/C (not monitored)
2 N/O
Inductive AC-15, 4 A/230 V
Inductive DC-13, 2 A/24 V
20 mA/24 V
2500 V
75 ms
6 A quick-acting fuse or 4 A slow-acting
Automatic (S11-S21)
N/C loop S11-S21

SR101A02
115 VAC

35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail
Fiber-filled Polyamide PA6.6
1 x 2.5 mm (14 AWG) stranded
230 g (8.1 oz.)
Red
None
Green = K1 Closed, Green = K2 Closed
1 x 10 7 operations
IP20 terminals, IP40 (NEMA 1) housing
24 VAC/DC: -15 to 60°C (5 to 140°F)
115 VAC: -15 to 40°C (-5 to 104°F)
93% RH at 104°C (219°F)

Humidity:
Compliance
Standards:
EN60439-1, EN60947-1/5/7, EN61000-6, EN62061, EN ISO 13849-1
Approvals/Listings:
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, TÜV Rheinland
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note:
The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C)—i.e., with the guard closed,
actuator in place, and the machine able to be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

J-32

www.sti.com/info

Conforms to EN60439-1, EN60947-1/5/7,
EN61000-6, EN62061, EN ISO 13849-1
UL and C-UL listed
TÜV Rheinland approved

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR103AM

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Dual-Channel Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR103AM will accept 24 VAC/DC or 115 VAC
• Inputs—the SR103AM will accept single or dual N/C inputs or dual inputs from
a light curtain
• Outputs—the SR103AM has 3 N/O outputs to route power to the coils of power
contactors, plus 1 N/C auxiliary output for signaling purposes
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop between S11/S12
and S21 on the SR103AM
• Monitored manual or automatic/manual reset modes are available on the
SR103AM. Monitored manual reset requires closure of the reset circuit followed
by opening of the circuit. Reset occurs when circuit is opened. Auto reset
requires only closure of the reset circuit as reset occurs when circuit is closed.
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Electrical
Power Supply:
Power Consumption:
Safety Inputs:
Max Input Resistance:
Outputs:
Output Rating AC:
Output Rating DC:
Min Switched Current/Voltage:
Impulse Withstand Voltage:
Max Drop-Out Time:
Max Output Fuse:
Reset Mode:
Contactor Monitoring:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Case Material:
Max Wire Size:
Weight:
Color:
External Switches:
Indication:
Mechanical Life:
Environmental
Enclosure Protection:
Operating Temperature:

All Models
SR103AM01
SR103AM02
±10%, 50-60 Hz
24 VAC/DC
115 VAC
Approx. 1 VA
1 N/C or 2 N/C or 2 solid state (light curtain)
800 Ohms per channel
3 N/O + 1 N/C auxiliary
Inductive AC-15, 3 A/230 VAC
Inductive DC-13, 2 A/24 V
10 mA/10 V
2500 V
12 ms (75 ms by removing supply voltage)
6 A quick-acting or 4 A slow-acting
Monitored manual (S11-S21) or automatic/manual (S12-S21)
N/C loop S11/S12-S21

Conforms to EN60439-1, EN60947-1/5/7,
EN61000-6, EN62061, EN ISO 13849-1
UL and C-UL listed
TÜV Rheinland approved

35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail
Fiber-filled Polyamide PA6.6
1 x 2.5 mm 2 (14 AWG) stranded
230 g (8.1 oz.)
Red
None
Green = K1 Closed, Green = K2 Closed
1 x 10 7 operations
IP20 terminals, IP40 (NEMA 1) housing
24 VAC/DC: -15 to 40°C (5 to 104°F)
115 VAC: -15 to 40°C (5 to 104°F)
-25° to 70°C (-13 to 158°F)
93% RH at 104°C (219°F)

Storage Temperature:
Humidity:
Compliance
Standards:
EN60439-1, EN60947-1/5/7, EN61000-6, EN62061, EN ISO 13849-1
Approvals/Listings:
CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, TÜV Rheinland
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note:
The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C)—i.e., with the guard closed,
actuator in place, and the machine able to be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

www.sti.com/info

J-33

SR103AM

Safety Monitoring Relays

Application
Output Contact Arrangements

Terminal Pin Assignments
14

S12

S13

S11

S10

S14

S21

SR103AM

Terminal Connections
13
A1

S13
SAFETY
OUTPUT 1
N/O

SUPPLY

S11
SAFETY
OUTPUT 2
N/O

INPUT #1
N/C

S21
SAFETY
OUTPUT 3
N/O

INPUT #2
N/C

S10

S12

EDM AND
RESET

AUXILIARY
SIGNALING
N/C

S12
34

24VAC/DC, 110VAC
K1 (AUX)
START
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

EB SERIES
LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

GUARD
CLOSED

S11

S21

L1 L2 L3

K2 (AUX)
STOP
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

S12

S14

RESET

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

Relay control and
fault monitoring

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

+
K1

T5009
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

SR103AM
A2

S10

S13

FUSE

FUSE
K1

a full explanation of the circuit operating principle and fault detection,
✎ For
see “Common Circuit Examples” in the Expert Area Section of this catalog on page A-31.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-34

www.sti.com/info

SR103AM

Safety Monitoring Relays

Application (continued)
MS4600 Connected to SR103AM
(MPCE monitoring disabled)

OSSD1

Start

MS4600 Receiver

Power
Supply
24 VDC

MS4600 Transmitter

OSSD2

S11

S21
SR103AM

S10

S13

MCPE
Input to 0 V
MCPE
off

S12

S14

MPCE Monitoring “Disabled”
The start switch shown connected between S11 and S21 provides a monitored
manual start function. Switch must be
closed and then opened to activate a start.
For auto-start, connect a wire between S21
and S12 and no connection between S11
and S21.
If the MPCE function is not being used on
the MS4600 light curtain, the function must
be “disabled”, and the MPCE input wire
must be connected to 0 V (GND).
MPCE Monitoring “Enabled”
When using an SR103AM with an MS4600
light curtain, MPCE monitoring may be
performed through the safety monitoring relay using terminals S12, S21. This
method of MPCE monitoring only allows
for Auto Restart/Manual Restart Mode of
the safety monitoring relay. If Monitored
Manual Restart Mode with MPCE Monitoring is desired, the MPCE Monitoring must
be enabled and performed through the
MS4600 light curtain. Place wire jumper
between terminals S12, S21of the safety
monitoring relay. Configure the MS4600
for Start/Restart Interlock Mode. The
Monitored Manual Reset is now controlled
through the MS4600 light curtain. (See
MS4600 Manual for configuration and
wiring details of MS4600 light curtain.)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-35

SR103AM

Safety Monitoring Relays

Block Diagram
A1

S11

S21

S10

DC +U B 0V
AC

Pin assignment
A1

Relay control and
fault monitoring

Power supply
(S11=24V)

S14

S12

S13

Dimensions

(mm/in.)

SR103AM
114
4.5

22.5
0.885

99
3.9

35
DIN RAIL MOUNTING
1.38

Ordering
Model

Supply

Inputs

Auxiliary

Part No.

SR103AM01

24 VAC/DC

2 N/C

3 N/O

1 N/C

44510-1031

SR103AM02

115 VAC

2 N/C

3 N/O

1 N/C

44510-1032

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-36

Outputs

www.sti.com/info

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR104P

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Two-Hand Control Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR104P will accept 24 VAC/DC and 115 VAC
• Inputs—controls and monitors two-hand control switches to ensure that both
switches are operated within 0.5 seconds of each other
• Outputs—the SR104P has 2 N/O outputs to route power to the coils of power
contactors
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop between X1 and X2
on the SR104P
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3
to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR105E

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Expansion Unit
• Power requirements—the SR105E will accept 24 VAC/DC
• Outputs—the SR105E has 3 N/O outputs to route power to the coils of
power contactors plus 1 N/C auxiliary output for monitoring by the safety
monitoring relay
• Expander capability—the SR105E may be used with any other SR Series
relay to expand the total available number of N/O outputs to power
contactors

www.sti.com/info

J-37

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR108AD & SR109AD

SR108AD

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Dual-Channel Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR108AD and SR109AD will accept 24 VAC/DC
• Inputs—the SR108AD and SR109AD will accept single or dual N/C inputs
or dual PNP solid-state inputs from a light curtain
• Outputs—the SR108AD and SR109AD have a total of 4 N/O outputs with
3, 2 or 1 of the outputs with a time delay of 1-30 sec.
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop between
S12 and S21 on the SR108AD and SR109AD
• Reset mode—a monitored manual start or an auto/manual start may be
configured with the SR108AD and SR109AD. Monitored manual reset
requires closure of the reset circuit followed by opening of the circuit.
Reset occurs when circuit is opened. Auto reset requires only closure of
the reset circuit as reset occurs when circuit is closed.
• PLC Compatible—The N/O off delayed outputs make it possible to use the
SR108AD and SR109AD on machines with Programmable Logic Controllers that require some time to execute an orderly shutdown
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today
or within 3 to 5 days
R

Specifications
Electrical
Power Supply:
Power Consumption:
Safety Inputs:
Max Input Resistance:
Outputs:

Auxiliary Outputs:
Max Switched AC:
Max Switched DC:
Min Switched Current/Voltage:
Impulse Withstand Voltage:
Max Drop-Out Time:
Max Output Fuse:
Start Mode:
External Device Monitoring (EDM):
Mechanical
Mounting:
Case Material:
Max Wire Size:
Weight:
Color:
External Switches:
Indication:
Mechanical Life:
Environmental
Enclosure Protection:
Operating Temperature:
Humidity:
Compliance
Standards:
Approvals/Listings:

All Models
SR108AD
SR109AD
±10%, 50-60 Hz, 24 VAC/DC
4.6 W
1 N/C or 2 N/C
800 Ohms per channel
3 N/O + 1 N/O
2 N/O + 2 N/O
delayed
delayed
None
Inductive AC-15, 3 A/250 VAC; Resistive AC-12, 8 A/250 V
Inductive DC-13, 3 A/24 VDC; Resistive DC-12, 8 A/50 V
10 mA/24 V
2500 V
10 ms (75 ms by removing supply voltage)
8 A quick-acting fuse or 6 A slow-acting fuse
Monitored manual (S11-S21) or auto/manual (S12-S21)
N/C loop between S12 and S21
35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail
Polyamide PA6.6
1 x 2.5 mm 2 (14 AWG) stranded
250 g (8.8 oz.)
Red
Output delay adjustment (1 to 30 sec.)
4, status displays for relays K1 to K4
1 x 10 6 operations
IP20 terminals, IP40 (NEMA 1) housing
-15 to 40°C (-5 to 140°F)
93% RH at 104°C (219°F)
EN62061, EN60947-5-1, EN ISO 13849-1, EN ISO 13849-2
CE-marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, TÜV Rheinland

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

J-38

Conforms to EN62061, EN60947-5-1,
EN ISO 13849-1, EN ISO 13849-2
UL and C-UL listed
TÜV Rheinland approved

www.sti.com/info

Specifications are subject to
change without notice.
Note: The safety contacts of the STI
switches are described as normally
closed (N/C)—i.e., with the guard
closed, actuator in place, and the
machine able to be started.

SR108AD & SR109AD

Safety Monitoring Relays

Application
24VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC
K1 (AUX)
START
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

EB SERIES
LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

GUARD
CLOSED

S11

SR108

Pin Assignment
U B A1 A2

STOP
MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

S12

S14

RESET

MOMENTARY
PUSH
BUTTON

Relay control and
fault monitoring

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

S21

L1 L2 L3

K2 (AUX)

Timer

DC +U B 0V
AC

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G. THERMAL
CUT OUT

K1
K3

T5009
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

K2
K4

S10

S13

FUSE

FUSE
K1

a full explanation of the circuit operating principle and fault detection,
✎ For
see “Common Circuit Examples” in the Expert Area Section of this catalog on page A-31

Terminal Connections and Output Contact Arrangements

A1
S11
S14
S21
14
24
34
48

S12
S13
S10
A2

A1
S11
S14
S21
S12
S13
S10
A2
14
24
38
48

38
48

S10
A2

S14
S21

13
23
33
47

SR109AD

13
23
37
47

SR108AD

37
47

07AD

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-39

SR108AD & SR109AD

Safety Monitoring Relays

Block Diagram
A1

S11

S21

S12

S14

Relay control and
fault monitoring
Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

SR108

Pin Assignment
UB

+U B

Timer

K1
K3
K2
K4

S10

S13

Dimensions

(mm/in.)
Suitable for 35mm DIN rail
acc. to DIN EN 50022-35

99
3.9

114
4.49

22.5
0.885

Ordering
Model

Supply

Inputs

Immediate Outputs

Delayed Outputs

Part No.

SR108AD01

24 VAC/DC

2 N/C

2 N/O

44510-1081

SR109AD01

24 VAC/DC

2 N/C

3 N/O

1 N/O

44510-1091

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-40

www.sti.com/info

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR106ED

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Expansion Unit
• Power requirements—the SR106ED will accept 24 VAC/DC
• Outputs—the SR106ED has 3 N/O delayed outputs to route power to
the coils of power contactors (delay selectable from 1 to 30 sec.)
• Auxiliary Output—the SR106ED has 1 N/C auxiliary for monitoring by
the safety monitoring relay
• PLC Compatible—The N/O off delayed output makes it possible to use
the SR106ED on machines with Programmable Logic Controllers that
require some time to execute an orderly shutdown.

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR120MP

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Dual-Channel Multi-Purpose
Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR120MP will accept 24 VAC/DC or 110 VAC
• Inputs—the SR120MP provides dual-channel input from a variety of
safety devices. The safety devices may be E-stops, interlock switches,
or light curtains.
• Outputs—the SR120MP has 3 N/O outputs to route power to the coils of
power contactors plus 1 N/C auxiliary output and 4 solid-state outputs
for signaling purposes
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop between
S33 and S34 on the SR120MP
• Selectable start modes—monitored manual or automatic start mode is
selectable on the SR120MP

www.sti.com/info

J-41

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR125SMS45

SR125SMS

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Stop Motion Sensing Unit
• Power requirements—the SR125SMS45 will accept 24 VDC or 110 VAC
• Motion detection input—the SR125SMS45 detects the stop condition of all
types of AC or DC motors by sensing the motor’s back EMF across terminals
Z1, Z2 and Z3
• Drive compatible—the SR125SMS45 will function with electronic motor control
devices such as variable speed controllers, DC injection brakes, etc.
• Selectable speed limit—the SR125SMS45 has 1 N/O and 1 N/C outputs that
are switched when motor speed reaches the adjustable preset limit (0.01 to
0.10 V) for the particular output
• Auxiliary output—the SR125SMS45 has 2 solid state auxiliary signaling outputs
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Electrical
Power Supply:
Power Consumption:
Internal Fuse:
Safety Inputs:
Maximum Voltage Between
Terminal Z1, Z2, Z3:
Detection Threshold:
Relay Outputs:
Auxiliary Outputs:
Max Switched AC:
Max Switched DC:
Min Switched Current/Voltage:
Impulse Withstand Voltage:
Max Drop-Out Time:
Max Output Fuse:
Reset Mode:
Mechanical
Mounting:
Case Material:
Max Wire Size:
Weight:
Color:
External Adjustment:
Indication:

Environmental
Enclosure Protection:
Operating Temperature:
Compliance
Standards:

All Models
±10%

SR125SMS4501
24 VDC
≤3.0 W

SR125SMS4502
110 VAC
≤5.2 VA

Electronic
Back EMF sensing between Z1 and Z2 and Z3
500 V (RMS)
0.01 V
1 N/O + 1 N/C switched at preset detection threshold
2 solid state for signaling
Inductive AC-15, 1800 VA inrush, 180 VA maintained
Inductive DC-13, 1.2-1.5 A/24 V
10 mA/17 V (provided that the contact has never been used with higher loads)
4000 V
n/a
4 A slow-acting or 6 A fast-acting
n/a
35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail
Polyamide PA6.6
2 x 2.5 mm (14 AWG) stranded
AC: 0.33 kg (11.6 oz.); DC: 0.23 kg (8.1 oz.)
Red with black body
Motor speed preset via potentiometer
Green = Power On, Green = Channel 1 activated,
Green = Channel 2 activated, Green = CH1 + CH2 activated
IP20 terminals, IP40 (NEMA 1) housing
-10 to 55°C (14 to 131°F)

EN60947-1/5, EN61000-6, EN62061, EN62061, EN ISO 12100-2,
EN ISO 13849-1/2
Approvals/Listings:
CE-marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL, CSA, TÜV
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Note:
The safety contacts of the STI switches are described as normally closed (N/C)—i.e., with the guard closed,
actuator in place, and the machine able to be started.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details..

J-42

www.sti.com/info

Conforms to EN60947-1/5, EN61000-6,
EN62061, EN62061, EN ISO 12100-2,
EN ISO 13849-1/2
UL listed
CSA and TÜV Rheinland approved

SR125SMS45

Safety Monitoring Relays

Application
24VDC, 110VAC

START

L1 L2 L3

FUSE

(AUX)

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

(AUX)

K1(a)

(AUX)

K2(a)

(AUX)

RESET

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

STOP

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

(AUX)

FUSE
LOCK RELEASE

MOMENTARY
PUSH BUTTON

S21

S14

S12

CONTACT
PROTECTION
E.G.
THERMAL
CUT OUT

Relay control and
fault monitoring
+

Power supply
(S11 = 24 V)

TL8018-5

GUARD
CLOSED

S11

+24V

K2
+

10 21

SR103AM

S10 S13

Logic
2

Zero
Speed
Y34

Y44

SR125SMS45

FUSES

LATCHING
E-STOP
BUTTON

Y33/43

A1/A2

EB Series

Logic
1

8
A2

a full explanation of the circuit operating principle and fault detection,
✎ For
see “Common Circuit Examples” in the Expert Area Section of this catalog on page A-31

to PLC
INDICATION BULB
Shows Stopped Motion

Operation

A1 N

SUPPLY BROWN BLACK

N A1
Y1 N
13 P
23 N
31 Y1 13 23 31

BLUESUPPLY BROWN BLACK

BLUE

MADE IN THE EC MADE IN THE EC

POWER

SMD03

POWER

SMD03
OUTPUT

OUTPUT

Stop Motion Detection
Stop Motion Detection
EN 60204
EN 60204
BS EN 292
BS EN 292
SUPPLY BROWN BLACK

A2 P

Stop signal
to motor

BLUESUPPLY BROWN BLACK

BLUE

P A2
Y2 P
14 N
24 P
32 Y2 14 24 32

Guard locking switch unlocks guard
allowing safe access to machine

SM125SMS45 detects back EMF of
motor and senses when hazardous
motion has ceased, then signals
guard locking switch to unlock

Terminal Connections
A1

Y33/43

POWER

BACK EMF
SENSING

SAFETY
OUTPUT 1
N/O

SAFETY
OUTPUT 2
N/C

AUXILIARY
SIGNALING
SOLID STATE

Y34

Y44

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-43

SR125SMS45

Safety Monitoring Relays

Block Diagram
A1

Y33/43

SR125SMS45
K1

LOGIC
1

A1/A2
LOGIC
2

Zero
Speed

Y34

Y44

Dimensions

(mm/in.)

99
3.89

35
1.38

45
1.77

114
4.48

Ordering

Model

Supply

Inputs

Outputs

Auxiliary

Part No.

SR125SMS4501

24 VDC

Back EMF Sensing

1 N/O + 1 N/C

2 Solid State

44510-1271

SR125SMS4502

110 VAC

Back EMF Sensing

1 N/O + 1 N/C

2 Solid State

44510-1272

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-44

www.sti.com/info

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR131A

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Dual-Channel Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR131A will accept 24 VDC
• Inputs—The SR131A is designed to monitor two magnetically encoded
non-contact switches with 1 N/C and 1 N/O contacts
• Outputs—the SR131A has 2 N/O outputs to route power to the coils of
external device power contactors plus 2 N/C auxiliary solid state outputs
for signaling purposes
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop between
Y1 and Y2 on the SR131A
• Selectable reset modes—automatic/manual reset mode is available on
the SR131A

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR201A

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Single-Channel Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR201A will accept 24 VAC/DC or 110 VAC
• Inputs—a single N/C input channel, not monitored, is provided
• Outputs—the SR201A has 3 N/O outputs to route power to the coils of power
contactors plus 1 N/C auxiliary solid state output for signaling purposes
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop between Y1
and Y2 on the SR201A
• Selectable reset modes—automatic/manual reset mode is selectable on the
SR201A
• The SR201A has removable terminals
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or
within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-45

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR203M & SR203AM

SR203

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Dual-Channel Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR203M/A will accept 24 VAC/DC or 115 VAC
• Inputs—the SR203M/A will accept single or dual N/C inputs or dual PNP
inputs from a light curtain
• Outputs—the SR203M/A has 3 N/O outputs to route power to the coils of
power contactors, plus 1 N/C auxiliary output for signaling purposes
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop between
S12 and S34 on the SR203M/A
• Monitored manual or automatic/manual reset modes are available on the
SR203M/A
• The SR203M/A have removable terminal blocks

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR208AD & SR209AD
For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Dual-Channel
Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR208AD/209AD will accept 24
VAC/DC or 115 VAC,
• Inputs—the SR208AD/209AD will accept single or dual N/C
inputs or dual PNP inputs from a light curtain
• Outputs—the SR208AD has 2 N/O immediate outputs plus
3 N/O delayed outputs. The SR209AD has 2 N/O immediate
outputs plus 2 N/O and 1 N/C delayed outputs to route power
to the coils of power contactors (selectable from 0.5 to 10 sec).
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop
between Y1 and Y2 on the SR208AD/209AD
• Reset mode—monitored manual or automatic/manual reset
modes are available on the SR208/209AD
• PLC Compatible—The N/O off delayed outputs make it possible
to use the SR208AD/209AD on machines with Programmable
Logic Controllers that require some time to execute an orderly
shutdown. The N/C on delayed output of the SR209AD may be
used to apply power for unlocking a solenoid locking switch.
• The SR208AD/209AD have removable terminal blocks

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

J-46

www.sti.com/info

SR208AD

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR223SMT

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Module Timer Unit
• Power requirements—the SR223SMT will accept 24 VAC/DC or
115 VAC
• Delayed outputs—the SR223SMT has 1 N/O on-delay output,
plus 2 N/C off-delay outputs (selectable from 1 second to 31
seconds) to provide delayed unlocking of solenoid locking
switches; the delay time begins when power is applied to the
SR223SMT
• Monitoring outputs—the SR223SMT has 2 solid-state signaling
outputs
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop
between Y1 and Y2 on the SR223SMT
• Diagnostic LEDs provide status inducation of supply power,
safety outputs, feedback loop, and time delay

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

Safety Monitoring Relays

SR231A

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Dual-Channel Safety Monitoring Relay
• Power requirements—the SR231A will accept 24 VDC
• Inputs—The SR231A is designed to monitor two magnetically encoded noncontact switches with 1 N/C and 1 N/O contacts
• Outputs—the SR231A has 2 N/O outputs to route power to the coils of
external device power contactors plus 2 N/C auxiliary solid state outputs for
signaling purposes
• External Device Monitoring (EDM) is provided with a N/C loop between Y1
and Y2 on the SR231A
• Selectable reset modes—automatic/manual reset mode is available on the
SR231A
• The SR231A has removable terminal blocks

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

J-47

Safety Applications

OMRON Automation and Safety offers ...

Application Solutions

Machine Guarding
Here, a combination of the F3SJ
safety light curtain and accessory
mirrors provide four sided guarding
of an automated machine used to
manufacture computer disk drives.

Mirror

PA4400B

PA4600

Perimeter Guarding

Process Systems Involving
Non-Electrical Hazards
Processes often involve energy
sources that cannot be isolated by
opening an electrical circuit. Many
times pressure, chemical, or thermal
hazards can be isolated by means of a
valve lock. Closing the valve allows the
master key to be released. The master
key is inserted into a key exchange
unit that then releases the door access
keys.

J-48

www.sti.com/info

Programmable Safety Controllers
Contents
Selection Guide

K-2

Safety Over EtherCAT Safety Controller
NX-S K-4
Stand-Alone Safety Controller
G9SP K-18
H-T40M-P K-28
DeviceNet Safety
NE1A K-29
NE1A-EIP K-33
DST1 K-33
NE1A-EDR01 K-34
WS02-CFSC1-E K-34
Accessories K-35

K-1

Programmable Safety Controllers

Selection Guide

Program

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Controller and Hardware Selection
Do you need
a stand-alone
controller or a
networkable
controller with or
without remote
I/O?

The G9SP Programmable Controller

Stand-Alone

• G9SP — p. K-18 • Direct connection to non-contact switches and safety mats

• Easily monitored by PLCs via Ethernet (FINS), Ethernet I/P, or serial
connection
• Programmable via PC
or removable memory
cassette
• Ideal for small to mid-size
applications
• EN ISO 13849-1 (PL e)
• Rapid delivery product

Networkable controller
with or without remote I/O

Do you require an
integrated safety
and control solution
over EtherCAT?

Up to 256 I/O
Up to 1024 I/O

NX-S Integrated Safety Controller:
Safety over EtherCAT

• NX-SL3300 — p. K-4

• EtherCAT™ single communication system
for control and safety information
• Mixed standard and safety I/O on the same
backplane
• Status information readily accessible
• One Software: Sysmac Studio
• Auto configuration restart
• Rapid delivery product

• NX-SL3500 — p. K-4

no, DeviceNet is needed

Do you need to
monitor the safety
network over
Ethernet/IP?

Up to 16
yes

How many
inputs do you
need?

Up to 40
More than 40

• NE1A-SCPU01-EIP — p. K-33
• NE1A-SCPU02-EIP — p. K-33
• Select a NE1A-SCPU0□-EIP
plus any additional hardware
needed from the table below.
Model

How many
inputs do you
need?

Up to 16
Up to 40
More than 40

Up to 12

Does your
application require
muting or 2-hand
control?

yes

• NE1A-SCPU01-V1 — p. K-29
• NE1A-SCPU02 — p. K-29
• Select a NE1A (required)
plus any additional hardware
needed from the table to
the right

NE1A-SCPU01-V1

110610004

16 Inputs
8 outputs

NE1A-SCPU02

110610005

40 Inputs,
8 outputs

K-29

NE0A Safety Network Controller
110750001

12 Inputs,
6 outputs

sti.com

DST1 Safety I/O Terminals
Rapid delivery product

DST1-ID12SL-1

110620001

Slave I/O unit,
12 inputs

DST1-MD16SL-1

110620002

Slave I/O unit,
8 inputs,
8 outputs

DST1-MRD08SL-1

110620003

Slave I/O unit,
4 inputs,
4 relay
outputs

DST1-XD0808SL-1

110620014

DST1 with
simple logic,
8 inputs,
8 outputs

• NE0A — www.sti.com

K-2

Page

Rapid delivery product

NE0A-SCPU01
• NE1A-SCPU01-V1 — p. K-29

Part No. Description

NE1A Safety Network Controller

www.sti.com/info

K-33

Selection Guide

Programmable Safety Controllers

NX-S Integrated Safety Controller: Safety Over EtherCAT

NJ Controller

Sysmac Studio

NX Safety Controller
• The safety controller variables are part of the NJ controller project
• Flexible and reusability of the programming code

• Up to 8 safety input points per unit
• Flexible connectivity to a wide selection of safety devices
• I/O data monitoring in the NJ controller project

Network Layout if using the NE1A
K
NE1A Safety
DeviceNet Controller
• Eliminates long runs of
complicated wiring
• Compatible with the
DeviceNet Open Network
• Provides individual I/O status
and error indicators
• Minimizes the need to rewire
when making machine
modifications
• Conforms to Global Safety
Standards
• Meets IEC 61508 SIL3
• Rapid delivery product

DCN1-3NC 3 Branch Tap

Used for multiple branches.
See accessories section for additional models.

Trunk line (100 m, 250 m, 500 m)
Ethernet/IP
DeviceNet Router — see p.J12
121

Terminating
Resistor

Tap

Multi-drop
Tap

Tap

Communications Power
Supply 24 VDC

Tap

Power
Supply Tap

Ground the network
at only one point
Tap

121 Terminating
Resistor

Tap

T-Junction

Branch
Star Configuration
DCN1-1NC Single Branch Tap

Used for single branches.
See accessories section for additional models.

www.sti.com/info

Daisy Chain
Maximum Branch Line
Length: 19.6 ft. (6 m)

K-3

Programmable Safety Controllers

NX-S

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Integration of Safety Into
Machine Automation Enables
Simple, Flexible System
Configuration
• EN ISO 13849-1 (PLe/Safety Category 4), IEC 61508 (SIL3)
certified.
• One connection using Safety over EtherCAT (FSoE)* protocol
enables flexible configuration by mixing the Safety Units with
standard NX I/O.
• Hardware and safety circuits can be configured using the
Sysmac Studio (Ver. 1.07)
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days
Safety over EtherCAT (FSoE): The open protocol Safety over EtherCAT
(abbreviated with FSoE “FailSafe over EtherCAT”) defines a safety related
communication layer for EtherCAT. Safety over EtherCAT meets the
requirements of IEC 61508 SIL 3 and enables the transfer of safe and
standard information on the same communication system without limitations
with regard to transfer speed and cycle times.

Features

• Integrated safety into machine automation possible by connecting with the NX-series EtherCAT
coupler.
• The Safety CPU Unit controls up to 128 Safety I/O Units.
• 4 or 8 points per Safety Input Unit. The 4-Point Safety Input Unit can be directly connected with
OMRON Non-contact Switches and Singlebeam Sensors.
• 2 or 4 points per Safety Output Unit. The 2-point Safety Output Unit is characterized by large
output breaking current of 2.0 A.
• Compliant with IEC61131-3.
• Safety programs can be standardized and reused efficiently by using POUs for design and
operation.

Sysmac is a trademark or registered trademark of OMRON Corporation in Japan and other countries for OMRON
factory automation products.EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff
Automation Gmbh, Germany.Safety over EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed
by Beckhoff Automation Gmbh, Germany. Other company names and product names in this document are the
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-4

www.sti.com/info

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

System Configuration
Sysmac Studio
Support Software

EtherCAT master*
NJ-series CPU Unit

Connection to peripheral USB port
or built-in EtherNet/IP port on
NJ-series CPU Unit
Built-in EtherCAT port
Sysmac Studio
Support Software

EtherCAT Slave Terminal
Communications cable
Ethernet cables
Peripheral USB port.

NX Series
EtherCAT Coupler Unit
NX-ECC201/ECC202

Safety CPU Unit
NX-SL3300
NX-SL3500
Safety Input Unit
NX-SID800

Connection to peripheral USB
port on EtherCAT Coupler Unit

NX Units

End Cover

NX Series
EtherCAT Coupler Unit
NX-ECC201

Safety Output Unit
NX-SOD400
Safety Input Unit
NX-SIH400
Safety Output Unit
NX-SOH200

NX Units

End Cover

*OMRON CJ1W-NC□81/□82 Position Control Units cannot be connected to the EtherCAT Slave Terminal even though they support EtherCAT.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-5

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

Specifications
Regulations and Standards
Certification body

Standard

TÜV
Rheinland

• EN ISO 13849-1: 2008 + AC: 2009
• EN ISO 13849-2: 2012
• IEC 61508 parts 1-7: 2010
• EN 62061: 2005
• EN 61131-2: 2007
• EN ISO 13850: 2008
• EN 60204-1: 2006 + A1: 2009 + AC: 2010

cULus: Listed (UL508) and ANSI/ISA 12.12.01

• EN 61000-6-2: 2005
• EN 61000-6-4: 2007
• NFPA 79: 2012
• ANSI RIA 15.06-1999
• ANSI B11.19-2010
• UL1998
• IEC 61326-3-1: 2008

*Certification was received for applications in which OMRON FSoE devices are connected to each other.
The NX-series Safety Control Units allow you to build a safety control system that meets the following standards.
• Requirements for SIL 3 (Safety Integrity Level 3) in IEC 61508, EN 62061, Safety Standard for Safety Instrumented
Systems (Functional Safety of Electrical/Electronic/Programmable Electronic Safety-related Systems)
• Requirements for PLe (Performance Level e) and for safety category 4 in EN ISO13849-1
The NX-series Safety Control Units are also registered for C-Tick and KC compliance.

General Specifications
Enclosure

Mounted in a panel (open)

Grounding method

Operating
environment

Ground to 100 Ω or less.

Ambient operating
temperature

0 to 55°C (The upper limit of the ambient operating temperature is restricted by the installation orientation.)

Ambient operating
humidity

10% to 95% (with no condensation or icing)

Atmosphere

Must be free from corrosive gases.

Ambient storage
temperature

−25 to 70°C (with no condensation or icing)

Altitude

2,000 m max.

Pollution degree

2 or less: Conforms to JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2.

Number of cascadeconnectable units

No limit when a switching hub is used.

Noise immunity

Conforms to IEC 61131-2.2 kV on power supply line (Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4.)

Insulation class

Class III (SELV)

Overvoltage category

Category II: Conforms to JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2.

EMC immunity level

Zone B

Vibration resistance

Conforms to IEC 60068-2-6.
5 to 8.4 Hz with 3.5-mm amplitude, 8.4 to 150 Hz, acceleration of 9.8 m/s2, 100 minutes each in X, Y, and Z
directions (10 sweeps of 10 min each = 100 min total)

Shock resistance

Conforms to IEC 60068-2-27.147 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions

Insulation resistance

20 MΩ between isolated circuits (at 100 VDC)

Dielectric strength

510 VAC for 1 min between isolated circuits, leakage current: 5 mA max.

Installation method

DIN Track (IEC 60715 TH35-7.5/TH35-15)

Applicable standards

IEC 61508: 2010 SIL 3, EN 62061: 2005 SIL CL3
EN ISO 13849-1, 13849-2: 2008 PL e/Safety Category 4
UL 1998c
ULus: Listed UL508, ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
EN 61131-2, C-Tick, KC: KC Registration

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-6

www.sti.com/info

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

Specifications of Individual Units
Safety CPU Unit NX-SL3300/SL3500
Unit name

Safety CPU Unit

Model

NX-SL3300

NX-SL3500

Maximum number of safety I/O points

256 points

1024 points

Program capacity

512 KB

2048 KB

Number of safety master connections

128

I/O refreshing method

Free-Run refreshing

External connection terminals

None
FS indicator, VALID indicator, DEBUG indicator,
TS indicator, and RUN indicator

FS indicator, VALID indicator, DEBUG indicator,
TS indicator, and RUN indicator

Indicators

Dimensions

30 × 100 × 71 mm (W × H × D)

I/O power supply method

Not supplied.

Current capacity of I/O power supply
terminals

No I/O power supply terminals

NX Unit power consumption

0.90 W max.

Current consumption from I/O power
supply

No consumption

Weight

75 g max.

Installation orientation and restrictions

Installation orientation: 6 possible orientations
Restrictions: None

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-7

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

Specifications of Individual Units (continued)
Safety Input Units NX-SIH400/SID800
Unit name

Safety Input Unit

Model

NNX-SIH400

NX-SIH800

Number of safety input points

4 points

8 points
2 points

Number of test output points

2 points

Internal I/O common

PNP (sinking inputs)

Rated input voltage

24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)

I/O refreshing method

Free-Run refreshing

OMRON special safety input devices

Can be connected.

Number of safety slave connections

I/O refreshing method

Free-Run refreshing

External connection terminals

Indicators

Cannot be connected.

Screwless clamping terminal block (8 terminals)

Screwless clamping terminal block (16 terminals)

TS indicator, FS indicator,
input indicators (yellow), and
input error indicators (red)

TS indicator, FS indicator,
input indicators (yellow), and
tinput error indicators (red)

Safety input current

4.5 mA typical

3.0 mA typical

Safety input ON voltage

11 VDC min.

15 VDC min.

Safety input OFF voltage/OFF current

5 VDC max., 1 mA max.

Test output type

Sourcing outputs (PNP).

Test output load current

25 mA max.

Test output leakage current

0.1 mA max.

50 mA max.

Dimensions

12 × 100 × 71 mm (W × H × D)

Isolation method

Photocoupler isolation

Insulation resistance

20 MΩ min. between isolated circuits (at 100 VDC)

Dielectric strength

510 VAC for 1 min between isolated circuits, leakage current: 5 mA max.

I/O power supply method

Power supplied from the NX bus

Current capacity of I/O power supply terminals No applicable terminals

Weight

70 g max.

0.75 W max

T0 and T1

Internal circuits

T0 and T1
Terminal block

Circuit layout

Si0 to Si3

Si0 to Si3
Terminal block

Si0 to Si3

Left-side NX
bus connector

Si0 to Si3: Safety input terminals
T0 and T1: Test output terminals
NX-SIH400
Safety
Input Unit
Si0

Terminal connection diagram

I/O power supply −

NX-SIH400
Safety
Input Unit
A1

Si0

Si1

Si0

Si1

Si2

Si3

Si2

Si3

Si2

I/O power supply −

Si3

I/O power supply +
I/O power supply −

NX-SID800
Safety

Si0 to Si7

Left-side NX
bus connector

Right-side NX
bus connector

I/O power supply +

I/O p

I/O power supply −

I/O p

I/O power supply +
Left-side
I/O powerNX
supply +
bus connector
Right-side NX
I/O power supply −
bus connector
I/O power supply −

NX-SID800
Safety
Input Unit
NX-SID800
Safety switch
B1
Safety
Si0
Si1 Input Unit
Safety switch
A1
B1

Si0

Si1

Si2

Si3

Si2

Si3

Si4

Si5

Si1

Right-side NX
bus connector

Si0 to Si7
Terminal block

Safety switch

Si4

Si5

Si6

Si7

Si6

Si7

Si0

Si1

Si2

Si3

Si4

Si5

Si6

Si7

T0
T1
Refer to
User’s
manual (Z930-E1) for details.

Installation orientation and restrictions

Installation orientation: 6 possible orientations.
Restrictions: Maximum ambient temperature is 50ºC for any orientation other than upright installation.

Protective functions

Overvoltage protection circuit and short detection (test outputs)

Weight

75 g max.

Installation orientation and restrictions

Installation orientation: 6 possible orientations; Restrictions: None

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-8

I/O power supply +

Safety switchInput Unit

Refer to User’s manual (Z930-E1) for details.

I/O power supply +

Si0 to Si7: Safety input terminals
T0 and T1: Test output terminals

Left-side NX
bus connector

NX-SIH400
Safety switch
Safety
Input Unit

Safety switch

T0 and T1

I/O power supply −

NX +
I/OLeft-side
power supply
Right-side NX
bus connector
I/O power supply −
bus connector
I/O power supply −

I/O power supply −

Si0 to Si7

I/O power supply +

T0 and T1
Terminal block

Terminal block

Internal circuits

T0 and T1

Internal circuits

T0 and T1

Terminal block

www.sti.com/info

Internal circuits

0.70 W max.
20 mA max.

Internal circuits

NX Unit power consumption
Current consumption from I/O power supply

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

Specifications of Individual Units (continued)
Safety Output Units NX-SOH200/SOD400
Safety Input Unit

Model

NNX-SOH200

NX-SOD400

Number of safety output points

2 points

4 points

Internal I/O common

PNP (sourcing outputs)

Maximum load current

2.0 A/point
4.0 A/Unit at 40°C
2.5 A/Unit at 55°C
The maximum load current depends on the
installation orientation and ambient temperature

Rated voltage

24 VDC (20.4 to 28.8 VDC)

Rated number of safety slave connections

I/O refreshing method

Free-Run refreshing

External connection terminals

Screwless clamping terminal block (8 terminals)

0.5 A/point and 2.0 A/Unit

TS indicator, FS indicator,
output indicators (yellow), and
output error indicators (red)

Safety output ON residual voltage

1.2 V max. (Between IOV and all output terminals)

Safety output OFF residual voltage

2 V max. (Between IOG and all output terminals)

Safety output leakage current

0.1 mA max.

Dimensions

12 × 100 × 71 mm (W × H × D)

Isolation method

Photocoupler isolation

Insulation resistance

20 MΩ min. between isolated circuits (at 100 VDC)

Dielectric strength

510 VAC for 1 min between isolated circuits, leakage current: 5 mA max.

I/O power supply method

Power supplied from the NX bus

Current capacity of I/O power supply
terminals.

IOG: 2 A max./terminal
0.70 W max.

0.75 W max

40 mA max.

60 mA max.

Weight

65 g max.

Circuit layout

Left-side NX
bus connector

Terminal block

I/O power supply −

Left-side NX
bus connector

So0 and So1: Safety output terminals
IOG: I/O power supply 0 V
NX-SOH200
NX-SOH200
So0

IOG

So1 So0

IOG

NC
A8

Refer to User’s manual (Z930-E1) for details.

Terminal block

IOG

So2

So3

IOG

I/O po

So0

So0
So1

So1

IOG

IOG
IOG

IOG

So2

So2
So3

So3

IOG

IOG
IOG

IOG

L
L

I/O po

NX-SOD400
NX-SOD400
SafetySafety
OutputOutput
Unit Unit
A1

Refer to User’s manual (Z930-E1) for details.
A8

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

So0

IOG

I/O power
power
I/O power supply
+ supply +
I/O powerI/O
supply
+ supply +
NX
Right-sideRight-side
NX
Left-side
NX
Left-side
NX
bus connector
bus connector
bus connector
bus connector
I/O power
I/O power supply
− supply −
I/O power
+ power
I/O supply
powerI/O
supply
− supply −
Right-side NX
bus connector
I/O power supply −

So1

IOG

So0

IOG

L
L

I/O power supply −

So0 to So3

IOG

NX-SOD400
Safety
Output Unit

So1

So1
L

Terminal connection diagram

So0

I/O power supply +

Terminal Terminal
block
block

So0 to So3: Safety output terminals
IOG: I/O power supply 0 V

Safety Safety
Output Unit
Output Unit

NX-SOH200
Safety
Output Unit
A1

IOG

I/O power
supply +
I/O power supply
+
Left-side NXLeft-side NX
bus connector
bus connector
I/O power
supply
+ power
I/O
supply −
I/O power
supply
−Right-side
NX
bus connector
I/O power supply −

I/O power supply +

So0 and So1
So0 and So1

Internal circuits

So0 and So1

Internal circuits

NX Unit power consumption.
Current consumption from I/O power supply

Internal circuits

IOG (A3 and B3): 2 A max./terminal
IOG (A7 and B7): 0.5 A max./terminal

Internal circuits

Indicators

TS indicator, FS indicator,
output indicators (yellow), and
output error indicators (red)

Internal circuits

Unit name

K-9

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

Specifications of Individual Units (continued)
Safety Input Units NX-SOH200/SOD400 (continued)
Unit name

Safety Input Unit

Model

NNX-SOH200

NX-SOD400

Installation orientation: 6 possible orientations
Restrictions: For upright installation, the ambient
temperature is restricted as shown below
depending on the total Unit load current.

Installation orientation: 6 possible orientations
Restrictions: None

Load current [A]

3
2.5A
2

Installation orientation and restrictions

10
20
30
40
50 55
Ambient temperature [°C]

For all installation orientations other than upright
installation, the ambient temperature is restricted
as shown below according to the total Unit load
current.

Load current [A]

Protective functions

10
20
30
40
50
Ambient temperature [°C]

Overvoltage protection circuit and short detection

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-10

www.sti.com/info

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

Version Information
The combinations that can be used of the unit versions of the Safety Control Units,
NJ-series CPU Units, and NX-series EtherCAT Coupler Unit, and the version of the Sysmac Studio
NX Unit

Corresponding unit versions/version

Model number

Unit version

EtherCAT Coupler Unit
NX-ECC201/ECC202 *

NJ-series CPU
Units(NJ501-□□□□)
(NJ301-□□□□)

Sysmac Studio

1.0 or later

1.1 or later

1.60 or later

1.07 or later

1.0

1.2 or later

1.07 or later

1.08 or later

NX-SL3300
NX-SIH400
NX-SID800
NX-SOD400
NX-SOH200
NX-SL3500

*For the NX-ECC202, there is no unit version of 1.1 or earlier.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-11

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

External Interface
Safety CPU Unit
NX-SL3300/SL3500

(C)

(D)

(A)

(E)

(B)

(E)

(D)

(B)

(G)
(E)
Letter

Item

Specification

(A)

Marker attachment locations

The locations where markers are attached. The markers made by OMRON are installed for
the factory setting. Commercially available markers can also be installed. For details, refer
to User’s Manual (Z930-E1).

(B)

Protrusions for removing
the Unit

The protrusions to hold when removing the Unit.

(C)

DIN Track mounting hooks

These hooks are used to mount the NX Unit to a DIN Track.

(D)

NX bus connector

This is the NX-series bus connector. It is used to connect an NX-series Safety I/O Unit or
other NX Unit.

(E)

Unit hookup guides

These guides are used to connect two Units.

(F)

Indicators

The indicators show the current operating status of the NX Unit or signal I/O status. Refer to
User’s Manual (Z930-E1).

(G)

Unit specifications

The specifications of the NX Unit are given here.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-12

(E)

www.sti.com/info

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

External Interface (continued)
Safety Input Unit

(B)

(C)

NX-SIH400/SID800

Safety Output Unit

(F)

(A)

NX-SOH200/SOD400

(G)

(H)

Letter

(C)

(E)

(C)

Item

Specification

(A)

Marker attachment locations

(B)

NX bus connector

This is the NX-series bus connector. Connect this connector to another Unit, such as the
NX-series Safety CPU Unit or a Safety I/O Unit.

(C)

Unit hookup guides

These guides are used to connect two Units.

(D)

DIN Track mounting hooks

These hooks are used to mount the NX Unit to a DIN Track.

(E)

Protrusions for removing
the Unit

The protrusions to hold when removing the Unit.

(F)

Indicators

The indicators show the current operating status of the NX Unit or signal I/O status. Refer to
User’s Manual (Z930-E1).

(G)

Terminal block

The terminal block is used to connect to external devices. It connects the safety outputs.
The number of terminals depends on the NX Unit.

(H)

Unit specifications

The specifications of the NX Unit are given here.

Terminal Blocks
Letter

(A)

Item

Specification

Terminal
number
indications

The terminal numbers are given by column letters A and
B, and row numbers 1 to 8. The combination of the column
and row gives the terminal numbers from A1 to A8 and
B1 to B8. The terminal number indicators are the same
regardless of the number of terminals on the terminal block,
as shown above.

(A)

(B)
A1

(B)

Release holes

Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into these holes to connect
and remove the wires.

(C)

Terminal holes

The wires are inserted into these holes.

8-terminal type

(C)

16-terminal type

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-13

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

External Interface (continued)
Applicable Terminal Blocks for Each Unit Model
Terminal Blocks
Unit model number

Model

No. of terminals

Terminal number
indications

Ground terminal mark

Terminal current
capacity

NX-SIH400

NX-TBA082

A/B

None

10 A

NX-SID800

NX-TBA162

A/B

None

10 A

NX-SOH200

NX-TBA082s

A/B

None

10 A

NX-SOD400

NX-TBA082

A/B

None

10 A

Applicable Wires
Using Ferrules
If you use ferrules, attach the twisted wires to them.
Observe the application instructions for your ferrules for the wire stripping length when attaching ferrules.
Always use one-pin ferrules. Do not use two-pin ferrules.
The applicable ferrules, wires, and crimping tool are given in the following table.
Terminal types

Manufacturer

Ferrule model number

Applicable wire
(mm2 (AWG))

AI0,34-8

0.34 (#22)

AI0,5-8
AI0,5-10
Terminals other than ground
terminals

AI0,75-8
AI0,75-10

Phoenix Contact

AI1,0-8
AI1,0-10
AI1,5-8
AI1,5-10

Ground terminals

AI2,5-10

K
Terminals other than ground
terminals

0.75 (#18)
1.0 (#18)

2.0*
0.14 (#26)
0.25 (#24)

H0.34/12

0.34 (#22)

H0.75/14
H0.75/16
H1.0/14
H1.0/16
H1.5/14
H1.5/16

Phoenix Contact (The figure in
parentheses is the applicable wire
size.)
CRIMPFOX 6 (0.25 to 6 mm2, AWG24
to 10)

1.5 (#16)

H0.25/12

H0.5/16
Weidmuller

0.5 (#20)

H0.14/12

H0.5/14

Crimping tool

0.5 (#20)
0.75 (#18)

Weidmuller (The figure in parentheses
is the applicable wire size.)
PZ6 Roto (0.14 to 6 mm2, AWG 26 to
10)

1.0 (#18)
1.5 (#16)

* Some AWG 14 wires exceed 2.0 mm2 and cannot be used in the screwless clamping terminal block.
When you use any ferrules other than those in the above table, crimp them to the twisted wires so that the following processed dimensions are achieved.
Finished Dimensions of Ferrules

8 to 10 mm

1.6 mm max. (except ground terminals)
2.0 mm max. (ground terminals)

2.4 mm max. (except ground terminals)
2.7 mm max. (ground terminals)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-14

www.sti.com/info

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

External Interface (continued)
Applicable Wires (continued)
Using Twisted Wires/Solid Wires
If you use the twisted wires or the solid wires, the applicable wire range and conductor length (stripping length)
are as follows.
Use the twisted wires to connect the ground wire to a ground of 100 Ω or less. Do not use the solid wires.
Terminal types

Applicable wires

Conductor length (stripping length)

Ground terminals

2.0 mm2

9 to 10 mm

Terminals other than ground terminals

0.08 to 1.5 mm2
AWG28 to 16

8 to 10 mm

Conductor length (stripping length)

Dimensions
Safety CPU Unit
NX-SL3300/SL3500

100

K
Safety Input Unit
NX-SIH400/SID800

Safety Output Unit

14.1
12.0
1.5

NX-SOH200/SOD400

104.5

100

1.5
65.2
71

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

80.1

K-15

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

Related Manuals
Cat. No.

Model number

Z930

NX-SL□□□□
NX-SI □□□□
NX-SO □□□□

Z931

NX-SL □□□□

Manual name
NX-series Safety Control Unit User’s
Manual

NX-series Safety Control Unit
Instructions Reference Manual

Application

Description

Learning how to use NX-series Safety
Control Units

Describes the hardware, setup
methods, and functions of the NXseries Safety Control Units.

Learning about the specifications of
instructions for the Safety CPU Unit.

Describes the instructions for the
Safety CPU Unit. When programming,
use this manual together with the
NX-series Safety Control Units User’s
Manual (Cat. No. Z930).

Ordering
Safety CPU Units
Specifications
Unit type

Appearance

Model

Maximum number of
safety I/O points

Program capacity

Number of safety
master connections

I/O refreshing method

256 points

512 KB

Free-Run refreshing

NX-SL3300

1024 points

2048 KB

128

Free-Run refreshing

NX-SL3500

Safety
CPU Units

Safety Input Units
Specifications

Unit type

Appearance

Maximum
Number of
number of
test output
safety input
points
points

Internal I/O
common

4 points

2 points

Sinking
24 VDC
inputs (PNP)

Can be
connected*

Free-Run
refreshing

NX-SIH400

8 points

2 points

Sinking
24 VDC
inputs (PNP)

Can be
connected*

Free-Run
refreshing

NX-SID800

Rated input
voltage

OMRON
Number of
I/O
special
safety slave refreshing
safety input
connections method
devices

Model

Safety
Input Units

The following OMRON special safety input devices can be connected directly without a special controller.
For detail of connectable OMRON special safety input devices,refer to NX-series Safety Control Units User’s Manual(No.Z930-E1).

Type

Model and corresponding
PL and safety category

OMRON Single-beam Safety Sensors

E3ZS and E3FS

OMRON Non-contact Door Switches

D40Z and D40A

OMRON Safety Mats

OMRON Safety Edges

SGE (4-wire connection)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-16

www.sti.com/info

NX-S

Programmable Safety Controllers

Ordering (continued)
Safety Output Units
Specifications
Unit type

Appearance

Maximum
number
of safety
output
points

Internal I/O
common

Rated
voltage

Number of
I/O
safety slave refreshing
connections method

2 points

2.0 A/point, 4.0 A/Unit at
40°C, and 2.5 A/Unit at 55°C
Sourcing
The maximum load current
outputs (PNP) depends on the installation
orientation and ambient
temperature.

24 VDC

Free-Run
refreshing

NX-SOH200

4 points

Sourcing
0.5 A/point and 2.0 A/Unit
outputs (PNP)

24 VDC

Free-Run
refreshing

NX-SOD400

Safety
Output Units

Maximum load current

Model

Options
Product Name
Unit/Terminal Block Coding Pins

Specifications

Model

For 10 Units (Terminal Block: 30 pins, Unit: 30 pins)

NX-AUX02

Specifications
Product Name

Terminal Block

Terminal number
indications

Number of terminals

Ground terminal mark

Terminal current
capacity

Model

A/B

None

10 A

NX-TBA082

A/B

None

10 A

NX-TBA162

Accessories
Not included.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-17

Programmable Safety Controllers

G9SP

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Compact Stand-Alone
Programmable Safety Controllers
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Stand-alone safety controller for small and mid-sized machinery
Easy programming for complex safety control
Three types of CPU with different I/O size to suit the application
Four types of Expansion I/O Units for hard-wired diagnosis or
standard non-safety signals
Clear diagnosis and monitoring via Ethernet (Omron FINS
protocol), Ethernet/IP, or serial (RS-232) connection
Supports direct connection with non-contact switches and
safety mats
Easy design, verification, standardization and reusage of safety
control by unique programming software
ISO 13849-1(PLe), IEC61508(SIL3) certified
A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Example of System Configuration

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-18

www.sti.com/info

G9SP

Programmable Safety Controllers

Specifications
G9SP Series
General Specifications
Power supply voltage

24 VDC (20.4 to 26.4 VDC -15% +10%)

Current consumption*

G9SP-N10S: 400 mA (V1: 300 mA, V2: 100 mA)
G9SP-N10D: 500 mA (V1: 300 mA, V2: 200 mA)
G9SP-N20S: 500 mA (V1: 400 mA, V2: 100 mA)

Isolation class

Class III (SELV)

Overvoltage category

Noise immunity

Conforms to IEC61131-2

Vibration resistance

5 to 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm, 8.4 to 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2

Shock resistance

147 m/s2: 11 ms

Mounting

DIN track mounting (IEC60715 TH35-7.5/TH35-15) or M4 screws

Ambient operating temperature

0 to +55°C

Ambient operating humidity

10% to 90% (with no condensation)

Ambient storage temperature

-20°C to +75°C

Atmosphere

No corrosive gas

Degree of protection

IP20 except terminal blocks

Terminal screws

M3 self-rising screws

*Not including the current consumption of external devices.
G9SP-N10S

G9SP-N10D

G9SP-N20S

Safety inputs

Safety outputs

Test outputs

Standard outputs
Weight

—

290 g max.

440 g max.

430 g max.

Safety Input Specifications

Safety Output Specifications

Input type

Sinking inputs (PNP)

Input current

6 mA

ON voltage

11 VDC min. (between each input terminal and G1)

OFF voltage

5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and G1)

OFF current

1 mA max.

Test Output Specifications
Output type

Sourcing outputs (PNP)
G9SP-N10S
T0, T1

: 60 mA max.

: 30 mA max. *1

: 300 mA max. *2

T0-2 total

: 60 mA max.

0.8 A max./output
1.6 A max./4 outputs (G9SP-N10S/-N20) *1
1.2 A max./4 outputs (G9SP-N10D) *2

ON residual
voltage

1.2 V max. (between each output terminal and V2)

OFF residual
voltage

2 V max.

Leakage current

0.1 mA max.

*1. Total current for So0 to So3 and So4 to So7
*2. Total current for So0 to So3, So4 to So7, So8 to So11 and So12 to So15
Note: When a safety output is set as a pulse output, make sure that the
connected devices do not malfunction due to the OFF pulse (pulse width:
640 µs).

T0, T1, T2

: 60 mA max.

: 300 mA max. *2

Output type

Sourcing outputs (PNP)

T4, T5

: 30 mA max. *1

1.5 V max. (between each output terminal and V2)

Total of T0-2 and T4-5

: 60 mA max.

ON residual
voltage
Rated output
current

100 mA max.

G9SP-N20S

Sourcing outputs (PNP)

Rated output
current

Standard Output Specifications (G9SP-N10S)

G9SP-N10D
Rated Output
Current

Output type

T0, T1, T2

: 100 mA max.

: 300 mA max. *2

T4, T5

: 30 mA max. *1

Total of T0-2 and T4-5

: 120 mA max.

*1 Connection to OMRON D40A Non-contact Door Switch is possible.
*2 With the Muting Lamp Output (open circuit detection)

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-19

G9SP

Specifications (continued)
Configurator
General Specifications
Applicable PC

DOS/V PC (Refer to the attached file for the operating environment of G9SP
tool.)

CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive

One or more

Applicable OS

Windows 2000 (Service Pack 3 or later), Windows Vista (32-bit & 64-bit),
Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later)
Windows 7 (32-bit & 64-bit)

CPU processing speed

Pentium II 333 MHz or faster (Pentium
III 1GHz or faster is recommended.)

Pentium III 1GHz or faster is
recommended.

Memory (RAM)

256 MB min. (512 MB or more is
recommended.)

512 MB min. (1 Gbyte or more is
recommended.)

Hard disk

200 MB or more

Monitor

High-intensity display of SVGA (800 x 600) or more
Required min. 256 colors display

Communication port to connect
with G9SP Series

USB 1.1

Certified Standards
Certification body

Standard

TÜV
Rheinland

EN ISO 13849-1: 2008
EN ISO 13849-2: 2008
IEC 61508 parts 1-7: 2010
IEC/EN 62061: 2005
IEC 61131-2: 2007
EN ISO 13850: 2008 (EN418: 1992)
EN 60204-1: 2006
EN 61000-6-2: 2005
EN 61000-6-4: 2007
NFPA 79-2007
ANSI RIA 15.06-1999 (R2009)
ANSI B11.19-2010
UL1998

UL508
CSA22.2 No.142

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-20

www.sti.com/info

Programmable Safety Controllers

G9SP

Programmable Safety Controllers

Specifications (continued)
Expansion I/O Unit
Input Specifications (CP1W-20EDT/20EDT1)
Input voltage

24 VDC, -15% +10%

Input impedance

4.7 kΩ

Input current

5 mA TYP

ON voltage

14.4 VDC min.

OFF voltage

5.0 VDC max.

ON delay

1 ms max. *

OFF delay

1 ms max. *

Circuit configuration

*ON/OFF delay represents the hardware delay time.

Output Specifications (Transistor outputs: sinking/sourcing type))
CP1W-20EDT/EDT1

CP1W-32ET/32ET1

24 VDC
-5% +10%
0.3 A/output

4.5 to 30 VDC
0.3 A/output

0.9 A/common
1.8 A/unit

0.9 A/common
7.2 A/unit

Leakage current

0.1 mA max.

Residual voltage

1.5 V max.

ON delay

0.1 ms max.

OFF delay

1 ms max.
24 VDC, -5% +10%, when 5 to 300 mA

Maximum number of outputs for
simultaneous ON

8 outputs (100% load)

24 outputs (75% load)

Fuse *2

1/common

Sinking type (CP1W-20EDT, CP1W-32ET)

Sourcing type (CP1W-20EDT1, CP1W-32ET1)

Maximum switching capacity *1

Output display LED

Output display LED
OUT
L

Circuit configuration

COM (+)

Internal
circuits

24 VDC/
4.5 to 30
VDC

OUT

Internal
circuits
OUT
L

COM(-)

24 VDC/
4.5 to 30
VDC

L
OUT

*1. A maximum of 0.9 A per common can be switched at an ambient temperature of 50°C.
(A)
0.9
Common total current

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

0.8

50 55 (°C)

Ambient temperature

*2. User cannot replace fuses. Replace the unit if a fuse blows due to short circuit, etc.

www.sti.com/info

K-21

G9SP

Programmable Safety Controllers

Specifications (continued)
Option Unit
RS-232C Option Board (CP1W-CIF01)
Communication Specifications
Connection method

D-SUB 9P (female)

Maximum transmission distance

15 m

Communication protocol

Non-procedural

Maximum data length

Refer to the Users Manual for details.

Ethernet Option Board (CP1W-CIF41 unit ver. 2.0 or later)
Ethernet Communication Specifications
Name

CP Series Ethernet Option Board

Model

CP1W-CIF41

Type

100 BASE-TX (applicable as a 10 BASE-T)
Media access method

CSMA/CD

Modulation method

Baseband

Transmission path type

Star form

Baud rate
Transmission
specifications

100 Mbps (100 BASE-TX)

10 Mbps (10 BASE-T)

Internal transmission speed between G9SP and Ethernet Option Board is of 115.2 kbps.

Transmission media

Unshielded twisted-pair (UDP) cable
Categories: 5, 5e
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Categories: 100 Ω at 5, 5e

Transmission distance

100 m (distance between hub and node)

Number of cascadeconnectable units

No limit when a switching hub is used.

Weight

23 g max.

Dimensions

36.4 (W) x 36.4 (H) x 28.2 (D) mm

Unshielded twisted-pair (UDP) cable
Categories: 3, 4, 5, 5e
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Categories: 100 Ω at 3, 4, 5, 5e

Ethernet/IP Option Board (CM-EIP-1)
Communication Specifications
Communications protocol
Type

Ethernet/IP
100 BASE-TX (See note)

Transmission
specifications

Media access method

CSMA/CD

Modulation method

Baseband

Transmission path type

Star form

Baud rate

100 Mbps (100 BASE-TX)

Transmission media

Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Categories: 100 Ω at 5, 5e or higher

Transmission distance

100 m (distance between hub and node)

Number of cascadeconnectable units

No limit when a switching hub is used.

Note: If tag data links are being used, use 100 BASE-TX.
*Please note when communicating with the H-T40M-P Status Display Touchscreen, network communication over Ethernet is not possible.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-22

www.sti.com/info

G9SP

Programmable Safety Controllers

Functions
Function Blocks
Logic Functions
Function Block Name

Notation on Function List

Icon

Details

NOT

Outputs the logical complement of the input condition.

AND

Outputs the logical AND of the input conditions.

Outputs the logical OR of the input conditions.

NAND

Outputs the logical NAND of the input conditions.

NOR

Outputs the logical NOR of the input conditions.

Exclusive OR

EXOR

Outputs the exclusive OR of the input conditions.

Exclusive NOR

EXNOR

Outputs the exclusive NOR of the input conditions.

RS-FF
(Reset Set Flip-Flop)

RS-FF

When the input signal turns ON, RS-FF holds the ON status in the function
block and continuously connects to the output.

Comparator

Compares the input signals to the set value and turns ON the output if
they match.

Comparator 2

Comparator2

Compares the input signals to the set value and outputs the comparison
result.

K
Timer/Counter Functions

Function Block Name

Notation on Function List

Icon

Details

Off-Delay Timer

Operates an OFF-delay timer.

On-Delay Timer

Operates an ON-delay timer.

Pulse Generator

Cyclically outputs ON/OFF pulses on the Output Enable while the input
signal is ON.

Counter

Counts the number of input signals and turns ON the output when the
count reaches the specified number.

Up-Down Counter

Increments the counter on the leading edge of an up count input and
decrements the counter on the leading edge of a down count input.

Serial-Parallel Converter

Counts the number of input signals and outputs the count value.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-23

G9SP

Programmable Safety Controllers

Functions (continued)
Safety Device Function Blocks

Function Block Name

Notation on Function List

Icon

Details

External Device Monitoring

EDM

Evaluates the input signal and external device status and sends a safety output to the
external device. This function block is used to detect fused contacts or external wiring
problems (disconnected lines) for safety relays, contactors, and other safety devices.

Enable Switch Monitoring

Enable Switch

Monitors the status of an Enable Switch device.

Emergency Stop Switch
Monitoring

E-Stop

Monitors the status of an Emergency Stop Switch.

Light Curtain Monitoring

Light Curtain
Monitoring

Monitors the input signal from a Safety Light Curtain.

Muting

Temporarily disables the input signals for a Light Curtain when the muting
signal is detected.

Safety Gate Monitoring

Monitors the status of a safety door (Safety-door Switch or Safety Limit
Switch). This function block can be used to set function tests for Safety
Category 2.

Two Hand Controller

Monitors the status of a Two-hand Switch.

User Mode Switch
Monitoring

User Mode Switch

Monitors the operating mode switch for a user system or device.

Redundant Input
Monitoring

Redundant Input

Monitors for discrepancies in two input signals.

Single Beam Safety Sensor

Single Beam
Safety Sensor

Monitors the input signal of an OMRON E3ZS/E3FS Single-beam Safety
Sensor.

Non-Contact Door Switch
Monitoring

Non-Contact
Door Switch

Monitors a STI D40A Non-contact Door Switch.

Safety Mat Monitoring

Safety Mat

Monitors a STI UM Safety Mat.

Reset and Restart Function Blocks
Function Block Name

Notation on Function List

Icon

Details

Reset

Outputs ON if the reset signal is correctly input while the input condition is
ON. This function block can be used to prevent equipment from starting
automatically.

Restart

Performs the same operation as a Reset function block. The icon is
different.

Connector Function Blocks

Function Block Name

Notation on Function List

Icon

Multi Connector

Outputs the status of the input signals.

Routing

Distributes an input signal to multiple signals.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-24

www.sti.com/info

Details

G9SP

Programmable Safety Controllers

Wiring
Terminal Arrangement
G9SP-N10S

Top
(17 pin)

V1 G1 Si1 Si3 Si5 Si7 Si9 T1 T3
NC Si0 Si2 Si4 Si6 Si8 T0 T2

Terminals

Function

V1/G1

Power supply terminals for Internal/Input
circuits (24 VDC)

V2/G2

Power supply terminals for output circuits
(24 VDC)

Bottom

NC So0 So2 O0 O2 NC NC
(14 pin) V2 G2 So1 So3 O1 O3 NC

G9SP-N10D

Not used (Do not connect.)

V1 G1 Si1 Si3 Si5 Si7 Si9 NC NC T1 T3 T5
NC Si0 Si2 Si4 Si6 Si8 NC NC T0 T2 T4 NC
(24 pin)

Si0 - Si19

Safety input terminals

T0 - T5

Test output terminals

Bottom

So0 - So15

Safety output terminals

O0 - O3

Standard output terminals

Top

NC So0 So2 So4 So6 So8 So10 So12 So14
(19 pin) V2 G2 So1 So3 So5 So7 So9 So11 So13 So15

G9SP-N20S

Top
(24 pin)

V1 G1 Si1 Si3 Si5 Si7 Si9 Si11 Si13 Si15 Si17 Si19
NC Si0 Si2 Si4 Si6 Si8 Si10 Si12 Si14 Si16 Si18 NC

Bottom

NC So0 So2 So4 So6 NC T0 T2 T4
(19 pin) V2 G2 So1 So3 So5 So7 NC T1 T3 T5

Internal Circuits and Wiring Example

24 VDC

V1
USB

D+
D-

Si0

Safety
input
circuit
Test
output
circuit

Internal
circuits

Si19
T0
T5
V2
G2

Safety
output
circuit
Standard
output
circuit

I/O Wiring Example: Emergency Stop
(Dual Channel) with Manual Reset

So0

So7

Estop

Reset
KM1

KM1-NC
KM2

Si0

Si1

So0

So1

KM1

KM2

Si2

Si3

KM2-NC

G9SP

V2
24 VDC

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-25

G9SP

Programmable Safety Controllers

Dimensions

(mm)

Safety Controller
G9SP-N10S
85
81

86
76

110 100

2-4.5 dia.

Safety Controller
G9SP-N10D
G9SP-N20S
85
81

130
120

110 100

4-4.5 dia.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-26

www.sti.com/info

G9SP

Programmable Safety Controllers

Ordering
G9SP Series
Number of I/O
Name

Safety
inputs

Test
outputs

Safety outputs

Standard
outputs

Solid-state outputs: 4

Safety Controller
Safety Controller Kit
with EIP Communication Module
(includes controller and CM-EIP-1)
Safety Controller Kit with Status
Display Touchscreen
(includes controller, CP1W-CIF01,
H-T40M-P, 2m/6 ft. RS232C cable)

Unit
version

Model
G9SP-N10S

Solid-state outputs: 16

—

Solid-state outputs: 8

—

Ver.1.0

G9SP-N20S

Solid-state outputs: 4

G9SP-N10S-EIP (KIT)

Solid-state outputs: 16

—

Solid-state outputs: 8

—

G9SP-N20S-EIP (KIT)

Solid-state outputs: 4

G9SP-N10S-SDK (KIT)

Solid-state outputs: 16

—

Solid-state outputs: 8

—

Ver.1.0

G9SP-N10D

G9SP-N10D-EIP (KIT)

G9SP-N10D-SDK (KIT)
G9SP-N20S-SDK (KIT)

Expansion I/O Unit (for standard non-safety machine control)
Number of I/O
Name

Type

Inputs

Sinking type
Sourcing type

Expansion I/O Unit

Sinking type
Sourcing type

Outputs

Solid-state outputs: 8

—

Solid-state outputs: 32

Model
CP1W-20EDT
CP1W-20EDT1
CP1W-32ET
CP1W-32ET1

Note:CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable is available.
Refer to the Catalog of CP1H/CP1L Programmable Controller (Cat. No. P057-E1) for details.

I/O Connecting Cable
Name
I/O Connecting Cable

Specifications

Model

80 cm
(for the distantly-positioned units connection)

CP1W-CN811

Note: An I/O Connecting Cable (approx. 6 cm) for alongside setting is included in the Expansion I/O Unit package.

Option Unit

Name

Model

RS-232C Option Board

CP1W-CIF01

Ethernet/IP (EIP) Option Board

CM-EIP-1

Ethernet Option Board (Unit Ver. 2.0 or later) (FINS protocol)

CP1W-CIF41

Memory Cassette

CP1W-ME05M

Status Display Touchscreen for G9SP

H-T40M-P

Note: Refer to the Catalog of CP1H/CP1L Programmable Controller (Cat. No. P057-E1) for details.

information on the H-T40M-P,
✎ For
see page K-28.

Configurator
Name

G9SP Configurator

Media

Applicable OS

Model

Setup Disk (CD-ROM: 1 license)

Windows 2000
(Service Pack 3 or advanced)
Windows XP
Windows Vista
Windows 7

WS02-G9SP01-V1

Setup Disk (CD-ROM: 10 licenses)
Setup Disk (CD-ROM: 50 licenses)
Setup Disk (CD-ROM: Site license)

WS02-G9SP10-V1
WS02-G9SP50-V1
WS02-G9SPXX-V1

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-27

Programmable Safety Controllers

H-T40M-P

G9SP

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Status Display Touchscreen for
G9SP Programmable Controller
• Simple plug-n-play touchscreen for the G9SP to easily view the
status of safety inputs and outputs
• Safety I/O error codes are displayed
• Up to four zones can be reset directly from the touchscreen
• Lower cost than installing and wiring indicator lights
• Available as complete turnkey kits

Specifications
H-T40M-P

Front panel W x H x D

96.0 x 96.0 x 7.0 mm

Mounting Depth

40.6 mm

Cut out dimensions

89.3 x 89.3 mm

Front panel seal

IP65 / NEMA 4X (indoor use only)

Weight

0.21 kg

COM 1

9-pin female connector: RS232

Screen Size

3.3 in. diagonal

Display

Mono FSTN LCD, 16 shades of gray

Pixels

240 x 240 pixels

Back light type

LED

Back light lifetime

10,000 hours

Touch screen operations

> 1,000,000

Active area of display W x H

58.5 x 58.5 mm

Brightness (cd/m2)

110

Processor

32 – bit RISC

Status LED

PWR, COM1

Storage temperature

-10 to +60°C

Relative operating humidity

20 - 90% RH

Vibration

0.5 displacement, 10-55 Hz, 2 hours X-, Y-, Z-axis

Shock resistance

10G, 11ms 3 times in each direction of X-, Y-, Z-axis

Cooling

Natural cooling

Electrostatic discharge

IEC 61000-4-2

RF susceptibility

IEC 61000-4-3

High frequency transients

IEC 61000-4-4

CE approvals

EN 6100-6-4, EN 6100-6-2

RF emissions

CISPR 22, Class A

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

K-28

www.sti.com/info

Programmable Safety Controllers

NE1A

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Compact Safety Network
Controllers
• STI NE1A Series helps to reduce wiring within a safety network
and delivers a high degree of flexibility.
• NE1A-SCPU01-V1 provides 16 built-in safety inputs and 8 builtin safety outputs.
• NE1A-SCPU02 provides 40 built-in safety inputs and 8 built-in
safety outputs.
• For lines with various levels of distributed safety devices up to
64 controllers can be connected to the network.
• Complicated safety systems are greatly simplified with 23
safety-certified function blocks and easy Drag and drop
hardware configuration.
• Monitor the safety system from standard controllers across the
network.
• EN 954-1/ISO13849-1 CAT4 and IEC 61508 SIL3 certification.
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Specifications
Certified Standards

Specifications

Certification body

Standard

Item

Communications power supply 11 to 25 VDC supplied via
voltage
communications connector

TÜV Rheinland

NFPA 79-2002
ISO13849-1: 1999
IEC61508 part1-7/12.98-05.00
IEC61131-2: 2003
EN ISO13849-2: 2003
EN954-1: 1996
EN61000-6-4: 2007
EN61000-6-2: 2005
EN60204-1: 2006
EN418: 1992
ANSI RIA15.06-1999 (R2009)
ANSI B11.19-2010

NE1A-SCPU01-V1

Internal circuit power supply
voltage (V0) *
I/O power supply voltage
(V1, V2) *
Current
con
sumption

UL508
UL1604
UL1998
NFPA79
IEC61508
CSA22.2 No.142
CSA22.2 No.213

NE1A-SCPU02

20.4 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC -15%/+10%)

Communications
power supply

24 VDC, 15 mA

Internal circuit
power supply

24 VDC, 230 mA

K
24 VDC, 280 mA

Overvoltage category

Noise immunity

Conforms to IEC61131-2.

Vibration resistance

10 to 57 Hz: 0.35 mm, 57 to 150 Hz:
50 m/s2

Shock resistance

150 m/s2: 11 ms

Mounting method

DIN Track (IEC 60715
TH35-7.5/TH35-15)

Ambient operating temperature -10 to 55°C
Ambient operating humidity

10% to 95% (with no condensation)

Ambient storage temperature

-40 to 70°C

Degree of protection

IP20

Serial interface

USB version 1.1

Weight

460 g max.

690 g max.

* V0-G0: Internal control circuit
V1-G1 (G): For external input device, test output
V2-G2 (G): For external output device
The two ground terminals on the NE1A-SCPU02 are internally connected.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-29

NE1A

Programmable Safety Controllers

Specifications (continued)
Safety Input Specifications

Function Blocks

Input type

Sinking inputs (PNP)

ON voltage

11 VDC min. between each terminal and ground

OFF voltage

5 VDC min. between each terminal and ground

OFF current

1 mA max.

Input current

4.5 mA

NE1A-SCPU-series Controller support the following logic functions and
function blocks. Support depends on the unit version.

Logic Functions

Safety Output Specifications

Name

Function list entry

NOT

AND

Exclusive OR

EXOR

Supporting unit
versions

All

Output type

Sourcing outputs (PNP)

Exclusive NOR

EXNOR

Rated output current

0.5 A max./output

RS Flip-flop

RS-FF

ON residual voltage

1.2 V max. between each output terminal and V2

Comparator

Leakage current

0.1 mA max.

1.0 or later

Function Blocks

Test Output Specifications

Name

Function list entry

Supporting unit
versions

Reset

Output type

Sourcing outputs (PNP)

Restart

Rated output current

0.7 A max./output *

ON residual voltage

1.2 V max. between each output terminal and V1

Emergency Stop
Monitoring

E-STOP

Leakage current

0.1 mA max.

Light Curtain Monitoring

*The maximum current for simultaneously ON outputs is 1.4 A.
(T0 to T3: NE1A-SCPU01-V1, T0 to T7: NE1A-SCPU02)
A 15 to 400 mA, 24 VDC external indicator can be connected to T3 and T7.

Safety Gate Monitoring

Two-hand Controller

Two Hand Controller

Off-Delay Timer

On-Delay Timer

User Mode Switch
Monitoring

User Mode Switch

External Device
Monitoring

EDM

Routing

Muting

All

Enable Switch Monitoring Enable Switch

DeviceNet Communications Specifications

Pulse Generator

Counter

Multiconnector

Multi Connector

Communications protocol

DeviceNet compliant

Connection form

Multi-drop system and T-branch system can be combined (for trunk line and branch lines)

Communications speed

500/250/125 kbps

Communications media

Special cable, 5 conductors (2 for communications, 2 for power supply, 1 for shielding)

Communications distance

Communications speed

Max. network length

500 kbps

100 m max. (100 m max.)

250 kbps

250 m max. (100 m max.)

125 kbps

500 m max. (100 m max.)

Branch length

Communications power supply

11 to 25 VDC

No. of connectable nodes

Safety I/O communications
(unit version 1.0 or later)

Safety Master function
• Max. no. of connections: 32
• Max. data size: Input 16 bytes or output 16 bytes (per connection)
• Connection type: Single-cast, multi-cast
Safety Slave function
• Max. no. of connections: 4
• Max. data size: Input 16 bytes or output 16 bytes (per connection)
• Connection type: Single-cast, multi-cast

Standard I/O communications
(all unit versions)

Standard Slave function
• Max. no. of connections: 2
• Max. data size: Input 16 bytes or output 16 bytes (per connection)
• Connection type: Poll, bit-strobe, COS, cyclic

Message communications

Max. message length: 552 bytes

www.sti.com/info

Total branch length
39 m max.

6 m max.

Note: Figures in parentheses ( ) indicate values when a thin cable is used.

K-30

1.0 or later

78 m max.
156 m max.

NE1A

Programmable Safety Controllers

Wiring
NE1A-SCPU01-V1
V0
DC-DC Converter
(Insulated)

24 VDC

Safety Input Circuit
Test Output Circuit
Internal Circuit

USB

Terminal name Description
V0

Power supply terminal for internal circuit
The two V0 terminals are internally connected.

Power supply terminal for internal circuit
The two G0 terminals are internally connected.

Power supply terminal for external input device
and test output

IN0

Power supply terminal for external output device

24 VDC

IN15

IN0 to IN15

Safety input terminal

T0 to T3

Test output terminal
Connected to IN0 to IN15 safety inputs.
Each test output terminal outputs a different test
pulse pattern.
Terminal T3 also supports a current monitoring
function for the output signal.
Example: Muting lamp

OUT0 to OUT7

Safety output terminals

V2
24 VDC

Safety Output Circuit

D+
D−

DeviceNet
Physical Layer
DC-DC Converter
(Non-insulated)

V+
CAN H
Shield
CAN L
V−

OUT0
OUT7

L
L

DC-DC Converter
(Insulated)

NE1A-SCPU02

Safety Input Circuit
Test Output Circuit
Internal Circuit

USB

Power supply terminal for internal circuit
The two V0 terminals are internally connected.

Power supply terminal for internal circuit
The two G0 terminals are internally connected.

Power supply terminal for external input device
and test output

IN0

Power supply terminal for external output device

24 VDC

IN39

IN0 to IN39

Safety input terminal

T0 to T3

Test output terminal
Connected to IN0 to IN19 safety inputs.
Each test output terminal outputs a different test
pulse pattern.
Terminal T3 also supports a current monitoring
function for the output signal.
Example: Muting lamp

T4 to T7

Test output terminal
Connected to IN20 to IN39 safety inputs.
Each test output terminal outputs a different test
pulse pattern.
Terminal T7 also supports a current monitoring
function for the output signal.
Example: Muting lamp

OUT0 to OUT7

Safety output terminals

V2
24 VDC

OUT0
OUT7

Terminal name Description
V0

Safety Output Circuit

D+
D−

24 VDC

DeviceNet
Physical Layer
DC-DC Converter
(Non-insulated)

V+
CAN H
Shield
CAN L
V−

L
L

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-31

NE1A

Programmable Safety Controllers

Dimensions

(mm)

NE1A-SCPU01-V1
MS
NS
LOCK
COMM

NE1A-SCPU01-V1

SAFETY NETWORK CONTROLLER
USB
NODE ADR
0

×10
1
2
3
4

10 12 14

11 13 15

×1

O
N

ON
BAUD RATE

V1 G1 T0 T2

10 12 14

11 13 15

V1 G2 T1 T3
24VDC

(99) 111.1

OUT

V1 G1 T0 T2

V1 G2 T1 T3

24VDC
V0 G0 V0 G0

90.4

(114.1)
131.4

NE1A-SCPU02
MS
NS
LOCK
COMM

NE1A-SCPU02

SAFETY NETWORK CONTROLLER
USB
NODE ADR
0

×10
1
2
3
4

10 12 14

20 22 24 26

28 30 32 34

11 13 15

21 23 25 27

29 31 33 35

×1

O
N

ON
BAUD RATE

24VDC

10 12 14

11 13 15

16 18

17 19

OUT

(99) 111.1

OUT

V1 G

16 18

T0 T2

NC NC 36 38

V2 G

17 19

NC NC 37 39

24VDC
V0 G0 V0 G0

135.6

(114.1)
131.4

Ordering
K
No. of I/O points
Name

Safety inputs

Test outputs

Safety outputs

Model

Unit version

NE1A-SCPU01-V1

2.0

NE1A-SCPU02

2.0

Safety Network Controllers

Note: The standard NE1A Controllers are equipped with spring-cage terminal blocks, but screw terminal blocks are available if desired, e.g., to replace
previous terminals.

information on accessories,
✎ For
see page K-35.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-32

www.sti.com/info

Programmable Safety Controllers

NE1A-EIP

EIP

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety Network Controllers
with Built-in Ethernet/IP
• Enables monitoring of DeviceNet safety system via
Ethernet from a machine controller or monitor computer
that does not support a DeviceNet interface.
• Can be used to easily add a DeviceNet Safety control
system to an existing system.
• Powerful combination with Omron Ethernet/IP compatible
PLCs (SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP Series)
• Functions as a DeviceNet Safety master
• No additional devices required for Ethernet/IP connection

Programmable Safety Controllers

DST1

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Safety I/O Terminals
• Distributed safety terminals that reduce wiring
• Lineup includes four models to accommodate various I/O types
and number of I/O points
• Monitor the safety system from Standard Controllers across the
network
• EN 954-1/ISO13849-1 CAT4 and IEC 61508 SIL3 certification
• The DST1-XD0808SL-1 supports logic operation functions for
high-speed processing in applications requiring partial stopping of the safety system.
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

K-33

Programmable Safety Controllers

NE1A-EDR01

EDR01

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Ethernet/IP-DeviceNet Router
• Allows a safety system to be monitored via Ethernet
• The safety system can be remotely programmed and monitored using a
personal computer
• The safety system can also be monitored by an Ethernet-compatible PLC
• UDP packet messages are supported

Programmable Safety Controllers

WS02-CFSC1-E
K

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Network Configurator
• Programming software for creating safety circuits
• Used to configure Safety Network Controllers and
Safety I/O Terminals
• Provides safety circuit programming functions
• Provides monitoring functions for safety circuits
• Includes DeviceNet Configurator functions
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available
for shipment today or within 3 to 5 days

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

K-34

www.sti.com/info

WS02

Programmable Safety Controllers

Accessories

Program

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Accessories and Peripheral Devices
for DeviceNet Communications
Accessories
Terminal Blocks for the NE1A
Appearance

Applicable
Controllers

Specification

Screw terminal blocks
(4 pins)

Model

Remarks

Y9S-04T1B-02A

A set including two screw terminal blocks
(black) and six code marks to prevent
incorrect insertion

Y9S-04C1B-02A

A set including two spring-cage terminal
blocks (black) and six code marks to
prevent incorrect insertion

NE1A-SCPU01
NE1A-SCPU01-V1
NE1A-SCPU02
NE1A-EDR01
Spring-cage terminal blocks
(4 pins)

Note: The standard NE1A Controllers are equipped with spring-cage terminal blocks. Screw terminal blocks can be
ordered if desired, e.g., to replace previous terminals.

Terminal Blocks for the DST1
Appearance

Applicable Safety I/O
Terminals

Specification

Screw terminal blocks
(10 pins)

Model

Remarks

Y9S-10T1B-04B

A set including four screw terminal
blocks (black), six code marks to prevent
incorrect insertion, one set of terminal
labels.*, and code mark instructions

Y9S-10C1B-04B

A set including four spring-cage terminal
blocks (black), six code marks to prevent
incorrect insertion, one set of terminal
labels*, and code mark instructions

DST1-ID12SL-1
DST1-MD16SL-1
DST1-XD0808SL-1
DST1-MRD08SL-1
Spring-cage terminal blocks
(10 pins)

*The set of terminal labels is one sheet containing four sets of labels required for one Terminal Block, i.e., [1, 2 ...
10], [11, 12 ... 20], [21, 22 ... 30] and [31, 32 ... 40].
Note: The standard DS1T Safety I/O Terminals are equipped with spring-cage terminal blocks. Screw terminal
blocks can be ordered if desired, e.g., to replace previous terminals.

www.sti.com/info

K-35

Accessories

Programmable Safety Controllers

Peripheral Devices for DeviceNet Communications
Product

Appearance

Model

Specification

DCN1-1NC

Cable wiring direction: Toward top
Cable lock direction: From top
Connector screw direction: From top

DCN1-1C

Cable wiring direction: Toward side
Cable screw direction: From top
Connector screw direction: From side

T-branch Tap for 1
branch line

Provided with 3 parallel connectors with
screws (XW4B-05C1-H1-D), standard
terminating resistor

DCN1-2C

Cable wiring direction: Toward top
Cable screw direction: From side
Connector screw direction: From top

DCN1-2R

Cable wiring direction: Toward side
Cable screw direction: From top
Connector screw direction: From top

Provided with 3 orthogonal connectors
with screws (XW4B-05C1-VIR-D),
standard terminating resistor

DCN1-3NC

Cable wiring direction: Toward top
Cable lock direction: From top
Connector screw direction: From top

Provided with 5 parallel clamp
connectors with screws (XW4G-05C1H1-D), standard terminating resistor

DCN1-3C

Cable wiring direction: Toward side
Cable screw direction: From top
Connector screw direction: From side

T-branch Tap for 3
branch lines

Power Supply Tap

Provided with 3 parallel connectors with
clamps (XW4G-05C1-H1-D), standard
terminating resistor

Provided with 5 parallel connectors with
screws (XW4B-05C1-H1-D), standard
terminating resistor

DCN1-4C

Cable wiring direction: Toward top
Cable screw direction: From side
Connector screw direction: From top

DCN1-4R

Cable wiring direction: Toward side
Cable screw direction: From top
Connector screw direction: From top

DCN1-1P

One-branch tap provided with 2 connectors, standard terminating resistor, and fuse

XW4G-05C1-H1-D

Parallel clamp connector with screws
Connector insertion and wiring both performed horizontally.

XW4G-05C4-TF-D

Parallel multi-branching clamp connector with screws
Connector insertion and wiring performed in same direction.

XW4B-05C1-H1-D

Parallel connector with screws
Connector insertion and wiring performed in same direction.

XW4B-05C4-T-D

Parallel, screw-less, multi-branching connector
Connector insertion and wiring performed in same direction.

XW4B-05C4-TF-D

Parallel, multi-branching connector with screws
Connector insertion and wiring performed in same direction.

XW4B-05C1-VIR-D

Orthogonal connector with screws
Connector insertion and wiring performed at a right angle.

DCA1-5C10 (-B)

Thin cable length: 100 m
DCA1-5C10-B: Cable color: Blue
DCA1-5C10: Cable color: Gray

DCA2-5C10 (-B)

Thick cable length: 100 m
DCA2-5C10-B: Cable color: Blue
DCA2-5C10: Cable color: Gray

DRS1-T

Resistance of 121 Ω

Provided with 5 orthogonal clamp
connectors with screws (XW4B-05C1VIR-D), standard terminating resistor

Connectors

DeviceNet Cables

Terminal-block
Terminator

K-36

www.sti.com/info

Two-Hand Control
Contents
TouchStart™

L-2

L-1

Two-Hand Control

TouchStart™

Touchstart

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Capacitive Palm Button
• No physical pressure required to actuate switch—reduces the
likelihood of wrist injury caused by repetitive motion.
• Excellent sensitivity—sensor is designed to operate even if
operator is wearing gloves.
• RFI Immunity—special circuitry inhibits output in the presence
of RFI that would otherwise cause false triggering of output.
• AC version is UL Recognized—meets the applicable
requirements in the proposed first edition of UL 491.
• Saves time and money.
– Easy mounting in a single hole.
– Wiring is simplified because terminals are clearly identified
and easily accessible.
– No special power supplies are required because switch is
available in either 120 VAC or 24 VDC versions.

Specifications
TS-10 for 120 VAC; TS-20 for 24 VDC

Max Wiring Size:

14 AWG (1)

Housing Material:

Nory lN190

Weight:

313 g (11 oz.)

Actuation:

Hand sensitive requiring no pressure to initiate, operates with or without gloves

Power Supply
TS-10:
TS-20:

120 VAC ±10%, 45 to 60 Hz
24 VDC ±10%

Power Consumption:

≤1 W

Indicator:

Red LED, illuminates when relays are energized

Output:

Two relays provide 1 set of normally open contacts, 1 set of normally closed contacts.
Force-guided contacts are used.

Contact Ratings:

1 A at 250 VAC max resistive; 1 A @ 90 VDC max resistive

Mechanical Life:

Greater than 50 million operations

Electrical Life:

Greater than 5 million operations at loads less than 50 VA

Mechanical Shock:

45 g for 2 ms

Vibration:

4 g at f ≤60 Hz and amplitude ≤ 1 mm

Relative Humidity:

≤ 99%

Noise Protection:

Bursts to 2 kV, spikes of 500 V, electrostatic fields to 8 kV*

Weldfield Immunity:

Resistor welding up to 50 kA AC/DC (in suitable enclosure)*

RFI:

≤ 8 V/m

Protection:

IP64

Temperature Range:

-18 to 50°C (0 to 122°F)

Max Response Times:

On = 60 ms; Off = 80 ms

Approvals:

CE marked for all applicable directives, UL and C-UL

Specifications are subject to change without notice.
* If any of these values are exceeded, the TouchStart will default to a safe state (output relays de-energized). The
TouchStart automatically resets when conditions fall below the limit.

L-2

www.sti.com/info

Enabling Switch Devices
Contents
A4E M-2
A4EG M-3

M-1

Enabling Switch Devices

A4E

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

3-position Enabling Switch
for Safer Robot Operation
• Clicking feel
• Conforms to U.S. standards (ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999
(R2009)) for 3-position switches
• Can be mounted in two directions

Specifications
Certified Standards

Ratings

Certification body

Standard

File No.

Rated insulation voltage

250 V

UL*

UL508

E76675

Rated ON current

2.5 A

Rated load

TÜV SÜD

EN60947 5-1
(certified direct
opening)
EN60947-5-8

Inquire

24 VDC, 300 mA (inductive load)
125 VAC, 1 A (resistive load)

Minimum applicable load

24 VDC, 4 mA

CQC (CCC)

GB14048.5

2003010305070634

Impulse withstand voltage

4.0 kV between terminals of different
polarity, 2.5 kV between terminals of
same polarity

*Certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 by UL is indicated by the registration
mark.

Ambient operating temperature

-10 to 55°C (with no icing)

Ambient operating humidity

35% to 85% (with no condensation)

Certified Standard Ratings

Ambient storage temperature

-25 to 65°C

TÜV (EN60947-5-1)

Utilization
category

Characteristics
AC-15

DC-13

Rated operating current (Ie)

0.75 A

0.55 A

Rated operating voltage (Ue)

240 V

125 V

UL/CSA (UL508, CSA C22.2 No.14), CCC (GB 14048.5)
300 mA at 24 VDC (Inductive load)
1 A at 125 VAC (Resistive load)

M-2

www.sti.com/info

Insulation resistance

100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)

Contact resistance

100 mΩ max. (initial value)

Vibration resistance
Shock resistance

10 to 55 Hz, 0.75 mm single amplitude
min.
150 m/s2

Mechanical durability

OFF-ON: 1,000,000 operations min.
OFF-ON-OFF (direct opening):
100,000 operations min.

Electrical durability

100,000 operations min.

Degree of protection

IP65 (rubber seal type only)

Enabling Switch Devices

A4EG

For full product information, visit www.sti.com. Use the SpeedSPEC Code for quick access to the specific web page.

Enabling Grip Switch with
Distinct Feel for Three Easily
Discernible Positions
• The difficult task of configuring safety circuits is now easily
achieved by combining the A4EG with the G9SX-GS.
• In addition to the standard models, the lineup also includes
models with an emergency stop switch and models with a
momentary operation switch.
• An optional Holding Key (sold separately) provides a versatile
method for selecting modes.
• Equipped with conduit connector.
• A Rapid Delivery Product: Select models are available for
shipment today or within 3 to 5 days.

Specifications
Certified Standard Ratings
(Enabling Switch Section)

Standards and EC Directives
Compliance with EC Directives and International Standards
• Low Voltage Directive
• GS-ET-22

TÜV (EN 60947-5-1)
Utilization category

Certified Standards
Certifying body

Standard

File No.

TÜV SÜD

EN 60947-5-1
(certified direct opening)

Ask your Omron
representative.

UL *

UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14 E76675

CQC (CCC)

GB 14048.5

AC-15

DC-13

Rated operating current (Ie)

0.75 A

0.55 A

Rated operating voltage (Ue)

240 V

125 V

Note: Use a 10 A fuse type gI or gG that conforms to IEC 60269 as the
short-circuit protection device. The fuse is not built into the Switch

UL/CSA (UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14), CCC (GB 14048.5)
• 24 VDC, 0.3 A (inductive load)
• 125 VAC, 1 A (resistive load)

Pending approval

Certification for CSA C22.2 No. 14 by UL is indicated by the registration
mark.

Ratings
Emergency stop switch
(A4EG-BE2R041 only)

Enabling switch
Rated insulation voltage

250 V

Rated ON current

2.5 A

--5A
General rating:
125 VAC, 5 A (resistive load)
250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load)
30 VDC, 3 A (resistive load)

24 VDC, 0.3 A (inductive load)
125 VAC, 1 A (resistive load)
Rated load

EN certification rating:
AC-15 0.75 A/240 V
DC-13 0.55 A/125 V

UL and cUL rating:
125 VAC, 5 A
(inductive load, power factor: 0.75 to 0.8)
250 VAC, 3 A
(inductive load, power factor: 0.75 to 0.8)
30 VDC, 3 A (resistive load)
EN certification rating:
AC-12 3 A/250 V
DC-12 3 A/30 V

Minimum applicable load

Pushbutton
(A4EG-BM2B041 only)

24 VDC, 4 mA

0.1 A
General rating:
125 VAC, 0.1 A (resistive load)
8 VDC, 0.1 A (resistive load)
14 VDC, 0.1 A (resistive load)
30 VDC, 0.1 A (resistive load)
UL and cUL rating:
125 VAC, 0.1 A (resistive load)
30 VDC, 0.1 A (resistive load)
EN certification rating:
AC-12 0.1 A/125 V
DC-12 0.1 A/30 V
5 VDC, 1 mA

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

M-3

A4EG

Enabling Switch Devices

Specifications
Characteristics
Enabling Switch

Emergency Stop Switch
(A4EG-BE2R041 only)

Pushbutton
(A4EG-BM2B041 only)

Degree of Protection:

IP66

IP65

Operating Section Strength:

Operating direction: 200 N, 1 min.

Operating direction: 367 N, 1 min.
Operating direction: 50 N, 1 min.
Rotating direction: 0.49 N-m, 1 min.

Cable Pull Strength:

30 N, 1 min.

Electrical:

20 operations/min. max.

10 operations/min. max.
(set/reset for one operation)

60 operations/min. max.

Mechanical:

20 operations/min. max.

10 operations/min. max.
(set/reset for one operation)

120 operations/min. max.

Electrical Durability (rated load):

100,000 operations min.

100,000 operations min.
(set/reset for one operation)

100,000 operations min.

Mechanical Durability:

OFF-ON-OFF (direct opening):
100,000 operations min.
OFF-ON: 1,000,000 operations min.

100,000 operations min.
(set/reset for one operation)

2,000,000 operations min.

2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min.
(impulse voltage)

1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min.

Between terminals of different polarities 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min.
(impulse voltage)

2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min.

Between each terminal and non-current 2,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min.
carrying metallic parts
(impulse voltage)

2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 min.

Allowable Operating Frequency

Dielectric Strength:
Between terminals of the same polarity

Insulation Resistance:

100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)

Vibration Resistance:

Malfunction: 1.5 mm double amplitude, 10 to 55 Hz

Shock Resistance:

Malfunction: 150 m/s² max.

Ambient Operating Temperature:

-10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)

Ambient Operating Humidity:

35% to 85%

Ambient Storage Temperature:

-25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)

Protection Against Electric Shock:

Class II (double insulation)

Pollution Degree (Operating
Environment):

3 (EN 60947-5-1)

Conditional Short-Circuit Current:

100 A (EN 60947-5-1)

Note: The timing of contact outputs for two or more circuits is not synchronized. Confirm performance before application.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

M-4

www.sti.com/info

A4EG

Enabling Switch Devices

Structure and Nomenclature
Structure
Three Positions: OFF – ON – OFF

A4EG-BE2R041
A4EG-BM2B041

A4EG-C000041

Position 1

Position 2

Not Gripped

Emergency Stop
Switch Section/
Pushbutton Switch
Section

Enabling Switch
Section

Gripped past
Middle
Position

Gripped lightly

Terminal 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 2

Terminal 3

Terminal 1

Terminal 4

Terminal 1

Terminal 4

Terminal 5

Terminal 8

Terminal 6

Terminal 7

Terminal 5

Position 3

Gripped to
Middle
Position

OFF

Released

Contact Configurations
Enabling Switch

Terminal 6

Terminal No.

(2)

(4)

Emergency Stop Switch

Pushbutton Switch

(6) *

(5)
Terminal No.

Contact Forms

Grip output

Position 1
t

Position 2
t

Position 3
t
□
□
□

Enable output

Terminal
Number
1 to 2
3 to 4

Pushbutton
Switch

Terminal
Number

Emergency
stop switch
output

5 to 6
7 to 8

Position 1
t

Position 2
t

Position 3
t
□
□

Enable output
Pushbutton
Switch

Pushbutton
switch output

Terminal
Number
1 to 2
3 to 4
Terminal
Number
5 to 6
(pushbutton
switch A)*
7 to 8
(pushbutton
switch B)*

Operation

Contact

Operation (push)

ON ➝ OFF

Reset (turn reset)

OFF ➝ ON

Position 1
t

Position 2
t

Position 3
t
□
□

Operation

Contact

Push

OFF ➝ ON

Push

OFF ➝ ON

*Refer to Dimensions for information on the positions of pushbutton
switches A and B.

Open

ON: Closed

Closed

OFF: Open

(8)
Terminal No.

Notes: 1. The contact ON/OFF
timing is not synchronized.
Confirm performance before
application.

2. Direct opening only during
grip.

OF2

OF1
HF

PT1

PT2

TT1 PT3 PT4 TT2
Operating stroke

Enable output
(1-2, 3-4)

Grip output
(5-6)

Operating Stroke (Enabling Switch Section)
Operating Characteristics
Enable output (ON)
Max. enable holding position
Enable direct opening position
Max. stroke

A4EG-BM2B041
Operation

(8)
Terminal No.

Chart (Enabling Switch Section)

A4EG-BE2R041
Operation

(7)

(5) *

Terminal No.

(6)

Operating Characteristics

Operating force

Enable output

(3)

(7)

*Terminal No. (5), (6): A4EG-C000041 only.

A4EG-C000041
Terminal
Number
1 to 2
3 to 4
5 to 6

(1)

(6)

Terminal No.

Operating Patterns

Operation

OFF

Gripped Farther

PT2 max.
TT1
PT3 max.
TT2

Specified Value
3.6 mm
Approx. 4.2 mm
6.0 mm
Approx. 6.7 mm

Operating Force (Enabling Switch Section: Reference Values)
Operating Characteristics
Enable operating force
Enable holding force
Grip operating force
*HF: Holding force

OF1 max.
HF *
OF2 max.

Specified Value
14 N
Approx. 8 N
40 N

Operating Force
(Emergency Stop Switch Section: Reference Values)
Operating Characteristics
Operating force
Reset force

OF max.
RF max.

Specified Value
14.7 N
0.1 N·m

Operating Force
(Pushbutton Switch Section: Reference Value)

www.sti.com/info

Operating Characteristics
Operating force

OF max.

Specified Value
4N

M-5

A4EG

Enabling Switch Devices

Dimensions

(mm)

Structure (continued)
A4EG-BM2B041
A4EG-C000041: Dimensions are similar to A4EG-BM2B041 without Pushbutton Switch.
A4EG-BE2R041: Dimensions are similar to A4EG-BM2B041. The A4EG-BE2R041 has an Emergency Stop Switch instead of a Pushbutton Switch.
See “Installation Manual” for A4EG-C000041 and A4EG-BE2R041 dimensions.
Holding Key Mounted
Pushbutton
switch B

Pushbutton
switch A

60
(50)

(34)

(50)

Enabling switch

48
(34)

Enabling switch

(34)

174

(189)

(189)
174
(292)
(277)

47.6
102.6

A4EG-OP3 Holding Key
(order separately)
44

54.2
76.2

38
Conduit connector
MG20A-P-13B Flexible Super Gland
Manufactured by AVC Corporation of Japan (included)

44
D4NS (order separately)

Accessories (Order Separately)
Rubber Cover (Replacement Part)
A4EG-OP1

Mounting Bracket (for Securing the A4EG)
A4EG-OP2
Enabling Grip Switch Mounted
83.2

43.3
50

Two, 5.3-dia. holes

(44)

(88)
t3
(82)

Mounting surface
235.9

Holding Key
A4EG-OP3

Note: The screws are not included.

M-6

www.sti.com/info

A4EG

Enabling Switch Devices

Application Example
Wiring Example
Settings

(For details, refer to section 3 of the G9SX User’s Guide (Cat. No. Z255).)
G9SX-BC: Manual reset, cross fault detection: ON (category 4 wiring)
G9SX-GS: Manual reset, cross fault detection: ON (category 4 wiring),
logical AND connection setting: AND

ON-delay time setting: Time is set.

Switching mode: Manual

External indicator diagnosis: Enabled

Wiring Example
Feedback loop

KM1
KM2

+24 V
Open

KM2

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 T31 T32 T33 Y1

G9SX-BC202
+24 V

S1:
Emergency Stop Switch
S2,
S7: Reset switches
S3:
Enabling Grip Switch
S4:
Guard lock Safety-door Switch
S5:
Lock release switch
S6:
Safety limit switch
KM1 to KM4: Contactors
M1 to M2: 3-phase motors

KM1

Control circuit

S14 S24

L1 L2

X1 X2

KM1 KM2

PLC etc.

GND

Lock release signal
KM3
KM4
S4

S5
42

33
To PLC
To PLC

Door
S6

Feedback loop

OPEN

KM3
Enabling
Grip Switch

Stop signal
+24 V

KM4

Mode selector

+24 V
Open Open

A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 Y1

M1 M2

Open

T61 T62 T71 T72 Y2

T31 T32 T33

T41 T42

AND
OFF

G9SX-GS226-T15
Manual

+24 V

Control circuit

KM3

Auto

KM4

S14 S24 S44 S54
KM3 KM4

L1 X1 X2 X3 X4

PLC etc.

Note: For this circuit example, the category is equivalent to 4.
GND

Indicator
Indicator
(Diagnostic check enabled) (Diagnostic check enabled)

www.sti.com/info

M-7

A4EG

Ordering
Enabling Grip Switches
Contact Form
Appearance

Enabling Switch

Monitor Switch

Pushbutton Switch

Model

Two contacts

1 NC (grip output)

None

A4EG-C000041

Two contacts

None

Emergency stop
switch (2 NC)

A4EG-BE2R041

Two contacts

None

Momentary operation
switch (2 NO)

A4EG-BM2B041

Accessories (Order Separately)
Appearance

Item

Model

Rubber Cover

A4EG-OP1

Mounting Bracket (for
securing the A4EG)

A4EG-OP2

Holding Key

A4EG-OP3

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

M-8

www.sti.com/info

Enabling Switch Devices

A4EG

Enabling Switch Devices

Ordering (continued)
Cabling Accessories (Order Separately)
Appearance

Cables

Model

SC09-9M340, cable, 4-pin Micro Male, 10 m

44509-0340

SC09-9M330, cable, 4-pin Mini Male, 10 m

44509-0330

SC09-9M320, cable, 8-pin Mini Male, 9 m

44509-0320

SC09-9M310, cable, 10-pin Mini Male, 9 m

44509-0310

Extension Cables
SC09-10M140, Extension cord, 4-pin male mini / 4-pin female mini, 10 m

44509-0140

SC09-10M142, Extension cord, 4-pin male micro / 4-pin female micro, 10 m

44509-0142

SC09-10M180, Extension cord, 8-pin male mini / 8-pin female mini, 10 m

44509-0180

SC09-10M110, Extension cord, 10-pin male mini / 10-pin female mini, 10 m

44509-0110

Cable Receptacles
SC09-10M540, 4-pin Female Mini, 1/2” NPT, 18 AWG, 24 in. leads

44509-0540

SC09-10M542, 4-pin Female Micro, 1/2” NPT, 18 AWG, 24 in. leads

44509-0542

SC09-10M580, 8-pin Female Mini, 1/2” NPT, 18 AWG, 24 in. leads

44509-0580

SC09-10M510, 10-pin Female Mini, 1/2” NPT, 18 AWG, 24 in. leads

44509-0510

Couplings

MIN1-AC, Adapter Coupling (for use with 4-pin mini cables and extension cables)

44509-0210

MIN2-AC, Adapter Coupling (for use with 8-pin mini cables and extension cables)

44509-0220

MIN3-AC, Adapter Coupling (for use with 10-pin mini cables and extension cables)

44509-0230

A
SECTION A-A

Shorting Plugs

SC09-SP40, 4-pin male mini style shorting plug (pins 1-2 and 3-4 are shorted)

44509-0640

SC09-SP42, 4-pin male micro style shorting plug (pins 1-2 and 3-4 are shorted)

44509-0642

SC09-SP80, 8-pin male mini style shorting plug (pins 1-2 and 3-4 are shorted)

44509-0680

SC09-SP10, 10-pin male mini style shorting plug (pins 1-2 and 3-4 are shorted)

44509-0610

Select models are available for Rapid Delivery.

Visit this product on www.sti.com for details.

www.sti.com/info

M-9

Safety Applications

OMRON Automation and Safety offers ...

Application Solutions

Hot

Plastic Molding Machine
This plastic molding process presents both heat and pinch-point hazards. In order to keep personnel away from hot equipment used to melt
plastic pellets, hinged hard guards are held in place by solenoid-locking
safety switches which hold the guards closed until the machine control
system determines that the temperature has cooled to a safe point. Additionally, personnel are protected from a point of operation hazard using
a STI safety light curtain.

Air Bag Assembly Station
In this application, an F3SJ light curtain is the ideal
guarding solution. It’s small cross-section along with
the rigid 90-degree angular design allows for threesided guarding of the machine.

M-10

www.sti.com/info

Safeguard Integration Services
Contents
Omron Qualifications
to be Your Safety Expert

N-2

Educating Your Organization

N-3

Machine Safeguarding Skill Builder Seminar

N-4

Assessing the Machine or Process:
The Most Critical Step Toward Safety

N-6

Engineering and Design:
Implementing Integrated Safety

N-8

Relocation of Existing Equipment

N-10

Supporting Each of Your Plant Locations

N-12

Service and Repair Options

N-14

The Cost of Safety

N-16

N-1

Safeguard Integration Services

Omron Qualifications
to be Your Safety Expert
Who is Omron?
With over 30 years of experience in
industrial machine safety we are a leading
resource for machine and process
safeguarding services.
Omron provides all necessary machine
safeguarding services, including:
u employee education
u machine guarding assessment
u risk level identification
u risk reduction planning and
documentation
u review of safety system and circuit
designs
u safety product sourcing
u placement and installation
u complete safety system integration
u user training

Why You Should Partner
with Omron?

u your machines or process lines are
safeguarded correctly to the current
standards.

The expertise required in all phases of
the safeguarding process is not a core
competency of most manufacturers. Their
engineering and maintenance personnel
are too busy to get involved with required
details of guarding systems and safety
interfaces.

u you are 100% compliant –– nothing less.

Omron employees serve as active
members or chairmen on more than 20
domestic and international standards
committees relating to machine
safeguarding issues. This level of
involvement and investment of time
assures we keep current on all the latest
updates to these standards. And we pass
our knowledge on to you!
The best part of partnering with Omron is
your peace of mind knowing that…

u you have documented risk level
identification and a risk reduction
strategy.
u your machine operators are fully and
professionally trained on the safety
systems installed.
u you are saving money because machine
safety improvements only need to be
done once.

Machine Safeguarding Services are available
in North America, Europe, South America and
South East Asia.

What our customers think…
“Creating Safe Workplaces” by Jim Wille, excerpted from EHS Today
Most companies in the United States are
extremely sensitive about maintaining the
safest possible working environment in
their plants or mills, and managers are
serious about enforcing rules and policies that protect the health and safety of
all employees.
In fact, comments made by spokespersons of prominent companies such as
Alcoa, indicate that safety comes before
productivity and quality. They believe that
without a safe workplace, production,
quality and financial performance goals
are not likely met or sustained.

“Alcoa wants its employees and contractors to be able to work safely in a manner
that protects and promotes the health
and well-being of the individual and the
environment,” says Jeff Shockey, Alcoa’s
director of safety and regional services.
According to Shockey, the following are
the four main activities undertaken in support of Alcoa’s safety system:
Assessing the risks, aspects and impacts associated with our products,
services and operations.
Developing and implementing operational controls with built-in layers of
protection.
Monitoring and maintaining the risk
assessment, controls and implementation to ensure they are current and
effective.

N-2

Reacting to correct gaps in our protective systems and continuously improve
system stability.

Outside Expertise
The EHS professionals often need to look
outside their own organization when peaks
in the EHS-related workload exceed internal capacity, or the technical expertise is
so complex that it is difficult to maintain inhouse proficiency. In order to service plants
quickly and efficiently, Alcoa complements
the efforts of their full-time health and safety
professionals with the expertise of highly
specialized external providers.

Finding a Machine Guarding Solution
Such was the case when Alcoa went looking for a machine guarding provider. Alcoa
Global Business Services evaluated 10 to 15
companies, giving each a standard package of five or six machines to quote during
an online bidding event that also included
ranking the prospective providers’ capabilities in risk assessment, design, engineering,
materials and hardware, fabrication, installation and guarding methodology.
The field was narrowed to three prospective
providers for a final interview. The providers
were pre-qualified based on their safety performance, customer feedback, staff capabilities
and preliminary interviews and discussions.
As a result, Omron was selected as one of
Alcoa’s machine guarding providers. According to Shockey, Omron offered:

www.sti.com/info

Standardized work methods for conducting the gap assessment. He cited
the overall quality of the risk assessment and the clarity of the report as
well.
The ability to provide cost-effective
and practical solutions by listening to
and involving machine operators and
maintenance personnel as needed.
Competitive pricing and quality of
workmanship.
A willingness to be a full-service partner by supporting training and other
needs.
Quick response time by upper management in the rare case when an
issue arises.

Provider versus Partner
Omron is more than a provider, it is a
partner. Alcoa Safety and Health Services
and Omron jointly teach a course on machine safeguarding.
Omron’s philosophy is that as a provider/
partner, it should develop a close working relationship with the Alcoa personnel
who operate and service the equipment.
Communicating with the employees on
the production floor at the beginning of
the program and securing their input
and participation was a key factor when
implementing machine safeguarding and
countermeasures.

Safeguard Integration Services

Educating
Your Organization
Are you looking for support
to help you improve
machine safety? Omron
has a number of machine
safeguarding resources
to help you create a safer,
more productive plant,
including:
OSHA Walkthrough
OSHA Walkthrough is a safety and health
training software program. Omron has
joined forces with eMedia Solutions to
sponsor their Safety Animated Machine
(S.A.M.™) — an interactive CD produced
by a team of experts that makes learning
about OSHA regulations efficient and
memorable. More than ten hours of safety
and health training will help manufacturers
reduce workplace injuries, lower training
costs, improve safety systems, and
prepare for an inspection.

Gotcha Stick
Based on regulatory data, Omron
developed the
Gotcha Stick
safe distance
measurement tool.
This free tool is a
quick and easy way
to verify the safe
mounting distance
of fixed guards with gaps or openings.
It includes both metric and English
measurements, and its folding design
makes it easy to carry.

Safety and Sandwiches

Skill Builder Training

Omron offers free, on-site safety product
and application training. We call the
program “Safety and Sandwiches”
because the sessions are scheduled
during the lunch break at your facility.
The sessions are tailored for plant safety,
maintenance and engineering personnel
and provide a better understanding of
available machine guarding technology,
requirements, and proper application.

A complete description of this in-depth
program is presented on page N-4.

Your Area Safety Sales Engineer (ASE) will
conduct the training. The ASE is trained
on the operation, and application of many
safety devices and the interpretation of
the applicable regulatory and industry
standards.

Guest Speaker Program
Need a guest speaker at your upcoming
safety conference?
Omron has experienced personnel
specifically-trained as guest speakers
for regional, national and global safety
conferences. These guest speaker
appearances are aimed at compliance
issues and not products. Omron
understands that this is a training venue
and not a sales presentation. The only cost
to you is our travel expenses.

u Applications and Proper Use of Safety
Light Curtains

Omron guest presentations range from 45
to 90 minutes, depending on the subject.
Some of the topics that Omron has
recently presented at conferences of 20 to
200 attendees include:

u Proper Use and Selection of Monitoring
Safety Relays

u Understanding the Requirements of the
Latest Global Robot Safety Standards

u Application of Safety Interlocks

u Control Reliability and Safety Circuit
Performance

The following is a sample of Safety and
Sandwiches topics:

u Overview of the Safety PLC
u Selection and use of Safety Mats and
Mat Controllers

u Category 1, 2, 3, and 4 (performance
levels a-e) of ISO 13849 Safety Circuit
Requirements

u Applications for Safety Contact Strips,
Bumpers and Edges

u Requirements and Benefits of
Performing a Risk Assessment

u Requirements and Uses for E-stops and
Rope-Pulls

u Requirements of the Machine Safety
Related Control System Based on Risk
Level

u Use of Safety Area Laser Scanners
u Safety Circuit Requirements Based on
Risk Level

u The Importance of Risk Assessment in
Determining the Proper Safety Related
Control System
u The Primary Challenges of Machine
Safeguarding

Machine Safeguarding Services are available in North America, Europe, South America and South East Asia.

www.sti.com/info

N-3

Safeguard Integration Services

Machine Safeguarding
Skill Builder Seminar
Are you confident your machines are
guarded to the relevant standards?

Who Should Attend?

Have all steps been taken to prevent
injuries from process equipment?

u Plant Maintenance

Has a documented machine guarding
assessment been done to verify
compliance?

Are you confident your
machines are guarded to
the relevant standards?

If you’re not sure, or the answer is no to
any of these questions, then your facility
can benefit from an Omron Machine
Safeguarding Skill Builder Seminar.

What is a Skill Builder?
Skill Builders are 1 or 2-day training
seminars that educate your personnel
on the requirements and methods of
machine and process safeguarding. This
helps plant personnel to identify, and
sometimes correct, machine safeguarding
discrepancies. Two Omron professionals
will conduct the training at your
manufacturing plant.

u EH&S Personnel
u Plant Engineering
u Production Managers
u All Managers concerned with the safety
of plant personnel
The Machine Safeguarding Skill Builder
program has the most impact when the
corporate EH&S Manager along with the
plant-level safety people meet at one plant
location. Classes are small with no more
than 20 in attendance.

How Do They Benefit?
Attendees will walk away with a greater
understanding of methods for machine
safeguarding and the correct applications
of guarding devices.
Your plant personnel are trained on:
u Identifying machine hazards
u Machine hazard risk assessment
u Machine guarding techniques and the
latest safeguarding technologies
u Machine guarding requirements as set
by regulatory and consensus standards
u Safety circuit design requirements
based on risk level
u Practical application

Machine Safeguarding Services are available in North America, Europe, South America and South East Asia.

N-4

www.sti.com/info

Safeguard Integration Services
Machine Safeguarding
Skill Builders are
1 or 2-day training
seminars that educate

Is it Practical?

your personnel on

After the Skill Builder Training is complete,
the group goes to the plant floor to
participate in a Machine Guarding
Inspection. The purpose of this inspection
is to raise awareness of obvious guarding
shortcomings so that you can act to
prevent injuries to personnel. Attendees
will apply skills learned by working
side-by-side with a machine guarding
specialist to evaluate several machines
and their current guarding. Many of these
discrepancies may be corrected by plant
maintenance personnel; however, some
may require additional expertise. After the
evaluation, there is a group discussion
for a better understanding of the findings.
After that, the only thing we ask is that you
commit to correcting your safeguarding
discrepancies.

the requirements and
methods of machine and
process safeguarding.

Six Steps to a Safe Plant
The proven process for successfully
safeguarding a plant is as follows:
1. Educate responsible corporate
and plant level personnel through
training seminars on machine
guarding,
2. Conduct a plant machine guarding
evaluation to identify obvious
concerns or imminent danger to
employees,
3. Conduct a risk level assessment and
create a risk reduction plan,
4. Implement the risk reduction plan,
5. Train operators and maintenance
personnel on the care and use of the
new safeguarding systems, and

6. Periodic machine safety audits to
ensure safe mounting distances and
proper application of safeguards
that may have changed due to
a change in the process or the
machine’s uses.

www.sti.com/info

N-5

Safeguard Integration Services

Assessing the Machine or Process:
The Most Critical Step Toward Safety
Five questions to ask:
Why should I have a formal
assessment?
In our experience over 90% of machines
on the factory floor are not guarded in
accordance with relevant regulations
and standards. To safeguard a machine
correctly and ensure the existing
safeguards are adequate requires a
documented machine safeguarding
assessment.
A proper assessment helps ensure that
your machine remains productive after the
guarding is installed.

What is the assessment
process?
The assessment process has two
parts: Risk Level Identification and Risk
Reduction.
Risk Level Identification – The process
of interacting with your operators and
maintenance personnel to understand the
intended use of the machine, the required
tasks and related hazards, and the level
of risk associated with the operation of the
equipment.
Risk Reduction – The application of
protective measures appropriate for the
identified level of risk in a manner that
both reduces the risk to a tolerable level
and achieves compliance with applicable
regulations and standards. The goal is
to have a machine that is both safe and
productive.

What is the advantage
of documented machine
safeguarding assessment
and risk reduction plan?
A documented machine safeguarding
assessment provides a clear plan to
reduce risk and bring machines into
compliance. The report contains a high
level overview and machine-specific risk
reduction recommendations based on
the identified risk level of the equipment
as used in your facility. The report helps
communicate the current status of your
machine safeguarding program to all
levels of your organization.
A documented assessment helps create
priorities for safeguarding while taking
into account measures that are currently
working. This helps target funds where
the most benefit will be realized while
also planning for future upgrades. The
assessment document can also be used
to ensure machines remain in compliance
by comparing the existing guarding
system with the detailed guarding
recommendations and drawings. This
allows any deviations to be identified and
addressed.
The assessment/risk reduction report
can show government regulators, your
insurance company and corporate
headquarters what your plan is to achieve
compliance.

What information is derived
from the assessment report?
Assessment is a two part
process and you will
want to make sure that
the report addresses
both. The assessment
company should provide
you with a written report
that contains usable
information and includes
a specific and detailed
strategy on how to guard
the machine correctly to
achieve maximum safety

and productivity. At a minimum, the report
should contain the following information
and always consider the risk level of a
given machine:
u Applicable safety standards or regulations
considered
u Overview of the process used to
determine the risk level for each machine
u Explanation of the risk reduction
requirements that apply
u Detailed identification information for each
machine
u Types and descriptions of hazards
associated with each machine
u Factors and model used to determine the
risk level for the machine
u Safety-related control system
performance requirements for compliance
u Estimated risk level after guarding using
the assessor’s detailed recommendations
u Detailed, written, risk reduction
recommendations covering the type and
location of the safeguarding measures
and a description of how they will be
applied to reduce the risk to a tolerable
level
u A drawing showing the guarding concept
and approximate location of the guards
and safety devices on the machine

Are there different types of
assessments?
Absolutely! And it is important to
understand the type of assessment that
you will be getting. There are basically four
types of assessments:
u Compliance Assessment
u Compliance Assessment with
Generalized Recommendations
u Risk Reduction (Product Oriented
Solution)
u Machine & Process Safeguarding
Assessment and Risk Reduction
Solution (Best Value and Most Usable)
These four types of assessments are
detailed on the following page.

Machine Safeguarding Services are available in North America, Europe, South America and South East Asia.

N-6

www.sti.com/info

Safeguard Integration Services
The best way to safeguard
a machine correctly is by
conducting a documented
machine safeguarding
Risk Reduction:
u Identifies a possible solution (which
typically revolves around product
offering of the party conducting
assessment)

assessment.

u Provides no risk assessment
Performed by:

Compliance Assessment:
u Identifies compliance issues (typically
comprised of intensive documentation)
u Sometimes includes risk level
identification
u Provides no solution (risk reduction)
Performed by:
u Safety ‘consultants’ (typically with
regulatory experience or some form
of ‘safety’ certification, not necessarily
with a specialization in machine
safeguarding)
u Software packages (assign levels of
risk/compliance based on static list of
questions)
Cost: Relatively high
Value: Low (only identifies mostly obvious
deficiencies)

Compliance Assessment
with Generalized
Recommendations:
In addition to the information supplied by
a Compliance Assessment, this report
includes:
u General solutions for risk reduction, but
not specific enough to be used as a
comprehensive guideline for budgeting
Performed by:
u Safety ‘consultants’
Cost: Relatively high
Value: Moderate (identifies mostly obvious
deficiencies with general solutions, but not
enough information to identify an accurate
cost of implementation)

u Safety component manufacturers/
representatives/distributors (typically
based on fitting products immediately
available to all applications — a
“square peg in a round hole.”)
Cost: Relatively low (‘disguised quote’)
- sometimes free!
Value: Low (only identifies partial
solutions based on capabilities of 3rd
party)

How do I qualify a vendor to
perform my assessments?
The vendor should:

Machine & Process
Safeguarding Assessment
and Risk Reduction
Solution:
u Identifies existing risk level
based on application and use of
equipment
u Determines performance
requirements of safeguarding
system based on level of identified
risk
u Evaluates existing safeguards to
performance requirements identified
u Provides solution to achieve
required performance level while
maintaining productivity
u Prioritizes action list based on
combination of risk level and
compliant safeguards already in
place
Performed by:
u Qualified safety experts specializing
in safeguarding industrial machinery

u Have extensive experience conducting
machine safeguarding risk level
assessments in accordance with all
applicable standards.
u Be willing to provide you with a sample
assessment report.
u Provide a reference list of companies
and contacts where machine
safeguarding assessments were
conducted in the last 2 years
and equivalent in scope to your
requirements.
u Be able to provide proof of Professional
Liability or Errors & Omissions
insurance.
u Provide a written report of the
assessment findings to include
identified risk levels that validate the
detailed risk reduction strategies.
u Be an active member of various trade
organizations and participate on
various industry consensus standard
committees.

u Experts on applicable regulations,
directives, and standards
u True solution providers capable of
offering turn-key integration
Cost: Moderate
Value: High (provides required document (risk level assessment) that justifies performance requirements and
finds solutions based on achieving
high safety and productivity)

www.sti.com/info

N-7

Safeguard Integration Services

Engineering and Design:
Implementing Integrated Safety
Select from the following services to tailor a solution that meets your needs
Turn-Key Safeguard
Integration
Omron specializes in the installation of
safeguarding systems in a wide variety
of industries and applications including
industrial fabrication equipment,
manufacturing systems and robot cells
for compliance with applicable safety
standards. Our service includes an on-site
project manager to monitor quality and
ensure that the safety measures are
applied properly. Expert installers fabricate
custom guards and our trained electricians
ensure that the requirements for safety
circuitry are met. The integration team will
train plant personnel on the care and use
of the safeguarding systems.
u Integration services are quoted based
on findings and recommendations in an
Omron safeguarding assessment and
risk reduction report.

Machine Safeguarding
Evaluation / Risk Level
Identification / Risk
Reduction
Omron performs detailed risk level
identification services including risk
reduction recommendations in accordance
with recognized standards to bring
machines or process lines into compliance
with applicable regulatory requirements
and specific ANSI, RIA, NFPA, NEC, CSA,
EN, IEC, and ISO standards. During the
process, our professionals will inspect
perimeter, point-of-operation, and power
transmission guarding in addition to power
isolation, including pneumatic, hydraulic
and electrical lockout.
Our detailed report will provide you with:
u the initial risk level
u written recommendations for
compliance
u safeguarding and safety circuit
requirements based on risk level
u emergency stop requirements
(if applicable)
u a plan view drawing of the equipment
identifying recommended protective
measures
u the estimated risk level achieved after
all recommended safeguards are
properly installed
u an estimated cost to properly safeguard
the machine(s) or process line(s) on a
turn-key basis

Machine Safeguarding Services are available in North America, Europe, South America and South East Asia.

N-8

www.sti.com/info

Safeguard Integration Services
Omron specializes in the
installation of safeguarding
systems in a wide
variety of industries and
applications.
Safety System Interface
Engineering and Design

Safety Project
Engineering/Design

Omron will engineer the required
safeguarding system based on our
assessment. Our engineers will design
control circuitry and a guarding strategy
appropriate to the identified risk level.
This will include applicable interface
schematics and a bill of materials. This
offering works best when a facility has
trained maintenance personnel that will be
installing the safeguards.

After complete risk level identification, any
gaps in compliance need to be filled. We
can engineer and design the required
safeguards and provide you with the
materials and components necessary
to complete the project yourself. Our
engineers will design safety-rated
control circuits as required and provide
engineering documentation to meet your
needs.

Machine or Process Safety
Consulting
These services can include several
machine safety consulting functions.
Examples include:
u a review of current safety system and
interface drawings for compliance
u perform safe mounting distance
calculations for presence sensing
safeguard devices
u writing or reviewing of company safety
standards for compliance with current
safeguarding standards

www.sti.com/info

N-9

Safeguard Integration Services

Relocation of
Existing Equipment
Omron creates a new service to help
companies through changing and challenging times.

Due to economic
conditions, many
companies are downsizing
and consolidating. They
are getting lean and keen.
This can mean plant or
facility consolidation and
asset relocation.

There are a few key questions that need to be asked and
answered before relocating production equipment:
u

How many machines should be relocated?

What are the decision criteria to select one machine over another? Typically, the
following are considered:
1. Machine production rates
2. Machine uses – how versatile is the machine
3. Reliability and maintainability of the machine
4. Machine compliance with the federal and local safety requirements. If the
machines are not compliant, what is needed?
5. Cost to bring machines into compliance
Plant production and maintenance personnel can provide answers and rating
scores for the first three criteria. The remainder are best left for machine safety experts
to answer.

Machine Safeguarding Services are available in North America, Europe, South America and South East Asia.

N-10

www.sti.com/info

Safeguard Integration Services
Machine safeguards are
designed to protect a
company’s most important

Are your machines compliant?

assets — its employees.

Following a defined process, a machine safety expert
would provide answers to these questions by:
1.

Assessing all machines that may qualify for relocation based on
the company’s scores to the first 3 questions.

Assessing all qualified machines relative to the regulations of
the destination country.

Creating an assessment report that will aid the company in the
decision process. The report should include the following:
u

List of applicable safety standards or regulations
reviewed and considered during the assessment.

Overview of the assessment process and method
used to determine the risk level for each machine.

Explanation of the risk reduction requirements that
should be applied based on risk level.

Machine identification (manufacturer, type, model
number, serial number, asset number, location, etc).

Description of the hazards associated with the machine.

Risk reduction performance requirements to achieve
compliance.

Safety-related control system (safety circuits) performance
requirements to achieve compliance based on the risk level for
the machine.

Residual risk level for the machine if the recommended safeguarding
measures are installed in accordance with all applicable regulations
and standards (estimated risk level after guarding using the assessor’s
detailed recommendations).

Risk reduction (safeguarding) recommendations with detailed written
information covering the type and location of the safeguarding measures
recommended and a description of how they will be applied to reduce the risk
to a tolerable level of risk.

A drawing of the guarding concept and approximate location of the guards and
safety devices on the machine.

Corrective action prioritization score for each machine assessed to establish
relocation priorities. Typically, a lower corrective action prioritization score is
comparable to a lower cost to bring the machine into compliance. If six like
machines are qualified for the relocation, but only two are actually going to be
relocated, selecting the two with the lowest corrective action score will most
likely be the least costly to bring into compliance.

And finally, the estimated cost to bring each machine into compliance.

While all components in the report are important, two are key for making the decision on
which machines should stay or go — the corrective action score and corrective action
costs. Remember, selecting the machines with the lowest corrective action score will
save you money. With this information, management can make a well informed decision
in minutes instead of weeks or even months. They are ensured of selecting the most cost
effective solution every time.
The cost for this type of machine safeguarding relocation assessment should average $250.00 to
350.00 per machine being assessed, not including travel and related expenses.

www.sti.com/info

N-11

Safeguard Integration Services

Supporting Each
of Your Plant Locations
Omron has the breadth and depth of organization
that you can depend on — Always

Global Solutions,
Local Support:

Area Safety Sales Engineers
(ASE) and Area Managers

Omron has a network of local support
personnel ready to assist with your
machine safety needs. This network
consists of Territory Area Managers,
Area Safety Sales Engineers and our A
distribution network.

These employees are trained on Omron’s
STI safety products and their applications.
They understand the operation, use, and
application of safety devices and the
interpretation of the regulatory and industry
consensus standards for machine safety.
The ASE is assigned a small geographical
territory to provide product sales, service,
training, and support to the Omron Major
Account Customer.

Distributors
An Omron distributor is authorized to
sell safety products. The distributor has
demonstrated a commitment to machine
safety training and customer service. All
Omron distributors are required to have a
machine safety specialist on staff for local
customer support. These specialists are
required to complete Basic and Advanced
machine safety device training at the
Omron factory. This training includes proper
selection and application of safety devices.

Machine Safeguarding Services are available in North America, Europe, South America and South East Asia.

N-12

www.sti.com/info

Safeguard Integration Services
Omron has a network of local
support personnel ready to
assist with your machine
safety needs.

By phone, by email, by internet or in person
— however, wherever, whenever you need it —

Omron has the answers
Omron offers a comprehensive array of machine and process safeguarding resources:
Account Team

Monthly eNews Safety Briefs

Custom Websites

Omron Major Account Managers work
with Corporate EH&S Directors in the
coordination and implementation of
machine process safeguarding risk
reduction strategies. They will help to
create and facilitate a process for success
in bringing machines into compliance with
applicable standards.

Sign up to receive our free eNews email.
Every month, you’ll receive a quick-toread news briefing covering four to six
safety-related topics pulled from leading
publications, safety conferences, and
other qualified sources. Time is more
precious than ever, so we’ve summarized
the most important and most interesting
articles regarding pending regulatory
changes, good safety tips, and more.

Omron will create a custom safety website
tailored to your machine safety needs. The
typical site will include:

STI.com

u local, regional, national and international
contact information

Risk Assessment Team
Trained and experienced at conducting
machine safeguarding assessments,
the Omron team of assessors know the
applicable guarding standards, safety
devices, safety device applications,
safety-related control system requirements
as well as the machines. They will assess
the machine and its uses to determine
the risk level, then create a risk reduction
strategy for compliance and productivity.

u safety training presentations
u safety device application information
u safety standards information
u safety device CAD drawings
u safety services information

Our website is a complete repository of
machine guarding information covering
products, applications, engineering issues
and much more.

On-Call Application
Engineers
Omron has factory application engineers
stationed on the east and west coasts
to provide no charge technical and
application support for its safety products.

www.sti.com/info

N-13

Safeguard Integration Services

Service and Repair Options

Omron Machine Services
has been a leader of
service and repair of
metal forming and
fabrication equipment
in southern California
for over 28 years. Our
reputation has been
developed and nurtured
by offering fast, courteous
and professional service.
We understand the cost of
down time and that it’s our
responsibility to provide
fast efficient service.

Services Offered
We offer an incredibly wide range of
services — by far one of the best in the
industry. Working on all types of metal
forming equipment, we service presses
(OBI, gap frame, straightside, high
speed, double/triple action, and forging);
press brakes (mechanical, hydraulic,
down acting, and up acting); shears
(moving, swing beam, hydraulic and
mechanical); and automation equipment
(back gauges, straighteners, feeders,
coil reels, etc.).

Engineering of:

Electrical control troubleshooting,
installation and repair of:

Preventative maintenance programs:

u PLC/logic relays

u Monitored by computer

u Electrical controls

u OSHA required maintenance records

u Motor rewinding

u Wichita air clutch retrofitting
Hydraulic repair on:
u Valves
u Pumps
u Cylinders

u Custom tailored to your needs

Plant moves-turn key

u Machine controls
Complete shop layout
Mechanical repair:

u Minor repairs to complete rebuilds
Welding repairs on:
u Steel, cast iron and aluminum
u Shear blade service:
u Sharpening
u Installation
u Turning
Safety devices installed:
u Light curtains
u Barrier guards
u Safety signs
u Safety mats
u Warning devices
u Safety classes

Note: Our Service and Repair Options are only available
in Southern California, Las Vegas, Arizona, and the border cities of Mexico.

N-14

u Material flow and shop layout

u Motor control

u Troubleshooting and repair of
fabricating equipment

u Feeder systems

www.sti.com/info

Safeguard Integration Services
Our dedication to
service has enabled us
to grow and expand to
Blade Turns

Put Us To Work For You!

We offer one of the most complete blade
turn services in the industry by providing
a mini preventative maintenance service
with our turns. This includes topping off
oils, checking and adjusting drive belts,
adjustment of brakes, inspection and
recommendations for major repairs, repair
of hold downs and more. We also provide
a grinding service with 24-hour turn around
in most cases. Omron Machine Services is
happy to store and maintain blades at our
facility as well, at no additional cost to you.

We pride ourselves on providing our
customers with the most skilled and
experienced field personnel in the
industry. Our employees cover all the
required trades... mechanics, hydraulics,
and electrical. We have a superior
support staff providing professional and
courteous inside and outside sales,
customer service, engineering, and project
management.

serve you better.

Field Service
Troubleshooting and repair of equipment
is available at your facility or ours. We’ll
repair or replace components, drawing
from the industry’s best sources. Our
capabilities include complete rebuilding of
existing equipment incorporating the latest
technology.

Project Management
Omron Machine Services will provide
single-sourcing management on both
small and large projects. We will provide
outlines and schedules throughout the
project and will manage outside vendors,
project cost, and changes in the scope
of work while in process. This allows you
to have a controlled, trouble-free, and
on-time project.

Electrical Controls
We are experts when it comes to customdesigned controls and integration for
industrial applications. We work with the
latest technology in PLC control and are
skilled in building systems that comply with
current OSHA, ANSI, and UL standards.

New and Used Equipment

Omron Machine Services can provide
you with new presses (gap frame,
straightside, high speed); press brakes
(mechanical, hydraulic, up acting and
down acting); press automation; and back
gauges. We can also provide all types
and styles of used equipment based
upon your requirements. In addition,
we offer an inspection service for used
equipment to determine if the equipment is
mechanically, hydraulically, pneumatically,
and electrically sound before you
purchase it.

Put our expertise to work for you.

www.sti.com/info

N-15

Safeguard Integration Services

The Cost
of Safety
Estimating the financial costs in advance
of an injury is difficult. Fortunately, OSHA’s
interactive $afety Pays website offers
assistance.
Using insurance company claims data, the
tool calculates the estimated direct and
indirect costs of an injury. Also, if you enter
your profit margin information, $afety Pays
will project the additional sales required to
recover the costs of the injury.
Consider a simple example: Assume that
a company has annual sales of $10 million
with an 8% pre-tax profit margin. For a
single accident resulting in an amputation,
$afety Pays estimates the costs of the
injury as follows:
Average Direct Cost:

$21,718

Average Indirect Cost:

$23,890

Estimated Total Cost:

$45,608

Who thinks investing in safety equipment
and programs impacts the bottom line?
u

61% of executives claim that for every dollar
spent on investments in workplace safety $3
are saved (according to a poll by the Liberty
Mutual Group).

95% of the executives in the poll indicate
workplace safety has a positive impact on a
company’s financial performance.

OSHA’s Office of Regulatory Affairs reports an
even more dramatic result; suggesting $4 to
$6 are saved for every $1 invested.

The additional sales revenue necessary to
cover these costs are:
Total Cost:

$570,100

In other words, the next 5.7% of sales
growth will go solely to pay for the
total cost of the accident. If your pre-tax
margins are less, the sales impact is
even greater.

Indirect costs account for the
majority of accident expenses
but are not typically covered by
insurance.

One final note - the answers returned by
$afety Pays may be conservative with
regard to the ratio of indirect-to-direct
costs which is almost 1:1. A poll by Liberty
Mutual Group estimates the actual figure
may be 5:1 while an American Society
of Safety Engineers study suggests
a ratio of 8:1.

Machine and Process Safety Education,
Assessment and Risk Identification,
Engineering and Design,
Integration, and Implementation...

All From a Single Source.
Please call us with any questions or comments.
We welcome the opportunity to partner with you
for a safer, more productive, and profitable future.

Machine Safeguarding Services are available in North America, Europe, South America and South East Asia.

N-16

www.sti.com/info

Security Trade Control
Purpose, Contents and Request

Security Trade Control

(as of May 2006)

Purpose of the Export Controls
To preserve free trade and global security, it is necessary to
prevent the proliferation, development, and production of weapons
of mass destruction such as nuclear weapons, biological/chemical
weapons, and missile systems. It is also necessary to prevent the
accumulation of large amounts of conventional weapons or weaponsrelated materials to prevent regional disputes.

Contents of the Export Controls
The following chart provides a simple summary of export controls.

The 3 Export Controls
Type of Control

Controlled Products/Technologies (List)

Non-Proliferation
Control

Weapons of mass destruction or
manufacturing equipment (including
missiles and nuclear, biological, and
chemical weapons).

Wassener
Arrangement

Conventional weapons and related
materials (including advanced
materials, electronics, computers, and
communications equipment).

All regions
Strict controls are enforced on exports
to the 4 special-case countries (Iran,
Iraq, Libya, and North Korea).

Catch-All
Controls

General purpose products related
weapons of mass destruction (in
principle, including all products).

All regions
(Except those in Attached Table 4-2
(26 countries)).

Countries Controlled

All regions

Development of nuclear weapons

Request to Customers
When exporting a controlled product, check the final application and end user to verify
that the product will not be used in a weapon-related application such as a weapon itself
or weapon research.
Furthermore, always verify that the Omron STI safety product will not be used in any
case in a nuclear weapon, missile, chemical weapons, other weapon, or equipment used
to manufacture these weapons.
The limitations described above will be submitted to Omron or an Omron sales
representative as an approval form or contract, so please fully understand and comply
with these procedures.
If you have any questions, please contact your Omron representative for further details.
These security procedures are based on domestic United States laws and apply to
exports from U.S.A.

www.sti.com/info

Terms & Conditions
OMRON Automation and Safety

Terms & Conditions
Terms & Conditions of Sale
1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these “Terms”) are deemed part of all quotes,
agreements, purchase orders, acknowledgments,
price lists, catalogs, manuals, brochures and other
documents, whether electronic or in writing, relating
to the sale of products or services (collectively, the
“Products”) by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies (“Omron”). Omron objects to any
terms or conditions proposed in Buyer’s purchase
order or other documents which are inconsistent
with, or in addition to, these Terms.

9. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to
rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses.

2. Prices; Payment Terms. All prices stated are
current, subject to change without notice by Omron.
Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease
prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding
orders. Payments for Products are due net 30 days
unless otherwise stated in the invoice.

11. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron:
a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by
Omron; Omron will not drop ship except in “break
down” situations.
b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer
and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery
to Buyer;
c. All sales and shipments of Products shall be
FOB shipping point (unless otherwise stated in writing by Omron), at which point title and risk of loss
shall pass from Omron to Buyer; provided that Omron shall retain a security interest in the Products
until the full purchase price is paid;
d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates
only; and
e. Omron will package Products as it deems
proper for protection against normal handling and
extra charges apply to special conditions.

3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply
only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer
after deducting transportation charges, taxes and
duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is
paid according to Omron’s payment terms and (ii)
Buyer has no past due amounts.
4. Interest. Omron, at its option, may charge
Buyer 1-1/2% interest per month or the maximum
legal rate, whichever is less, on any balance not
paid within the stated terms.
5. Orders. Omron will accept no order less than
$200 net billing.
6. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all costs involved in,
obtaining any government approvals required for
the importation or sale of the Products.
7. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general real property and
income taxes), including any interest or penalties
thereon, imposed directly or indirectly on Omron
or required to be collected directly or indirectly by
Omron for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder (including customs duties and
sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall
be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron.
8. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at
any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron, Omron
reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance. If Buyer
fails to make payment or otherwise comply with
these Terms or any related agreement, Omron may
(without liability and in addition to other remedies)
cancel any unshipped portion of Products sold
hereunder and stop any Products in transit until
Buyer pays all amounts, including amounts payable
hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain
liable for all unpaid accounts.

10. Force Majeure. Omron shall not be liable for
any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes
beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires,
floods, strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of
labor or materials, accidents to machinery, acts of
sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or
the requirements of any government authority.

12. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Omron
for shortage or damage to the Products occurring
before delivery to the carrier must be presented in
writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transportation bill
signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received
the Products from Omron in the condition claimed.
13. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron’s
exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free
from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing by
Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied. (b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES
NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. BUYER
ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY
MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED
USE. Omron further disclaims all warranties and
responsibility of any type for claims or expenses
based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer
Remedy. Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall
be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form
originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor
charges for removal or replacement thereof) the
non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-comply-

www.sti.com/info

ing Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount
equal to the purchase price of the non-complying
Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be
responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any
other claims or expenses regarding the Products
unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products
were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse,
misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any
Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by
Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall
not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the
results from the use of Products in combination with
any electrical or electronic components, circuits,
system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are
not to be construed as an amendment or addition to
the above warranty. See http://www.omron247.com
or contact your Omron representative for published
information.
14. Limitation on Liability; Etc. OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR
COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED
WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM
IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY. Further, in no event
shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is
asserted.
15. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold
harmless Omron Companies and their employees
from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs
and expenses (including attorney’s fees and expenses) related to any claim, investigation, litigation
or proceeding (whether or not Omron is a party)
which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer’s
acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way
with respect to the Products. Without limiting the
foregoing, Buyer (at its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or settle
any action brought against such Companies to the
extent based on a claim that any Product made to
Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property
rights of another party.
16. Property; Confidentiality. Any intellectual
property in the Products is the exclusive property
of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt
to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron. Notwithstanding any charges
to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering
and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of
Omron. All information and materials supplied by
Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly
prevent disclosure to any third party.

Terms & Conditions

Important
Safety Notice

17. Export Controls. Buyer shall comply with all
applicable laws, regulations and licenses regarding
(i) export of products or information; (ii) sale of products to “forbidden” or other proscribed persons;
and (iii) disclosure to non-citizens of regulated technology or information.
18. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course
of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate
as a waiver of rights by Omron. (b) Assignment.
Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without
Omron’s written consent. (c) Law. These Terms
are governed by the law of the jurisdiction of the
home office of the Omron company from which
Buyer is purchasing the Products (without regard
to conflict of law principles). (d) Amendment. These

Terms constitute the entire agreement between
Buyer and Omron relating to the Products, and no
provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. (e) Severability. If any
provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid,
such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (f) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off
any amounts against the amount owing in respect
of this invoice. (g) Definitions. As used herein, “including” means “including without limitation”; and
“Omron Companies” (or similar words) mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof.

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use
1. Suitability of Use. Omron Companies shall not
be responsible for conformity with any standards,
codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use
of the Product. At Buyer’s request, Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents
identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not
sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end
product, machine, system, or other application or
use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product
with respect to Buyer’s application, product or
system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases. NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR
AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO
LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES
WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A
WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE
RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS
PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT
OR SYSTEM.

4. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any
time based on improvements and other reasons.
It is our practice to change part numbers when
published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be
changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application. Please
consult with your Omron’s representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased
Product.
5. Errors and Omissions. Information presented
by Omron Companies has been checked and is
believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.

2. Programmable Products. Omron Companies
shall not be responsible for the user’s programming
of a programmable Product, or any consequence
thereof.

Warning! The products described in
this publication (hereinafter referred to as
“Products”) are intended for use in machine
and process safeguarding systems. Despite
the inclusion of safety design measures,
safeguarding and the practice of complementary protective measures by the installer,
inherent risks exist in the installation, use,
and maintenance of any of these Products.
By purchasing Products described in
this publication, the purchaser agrees to
assume the risks associated with the use,
installation, use and maintenance of such
devices and that such risks may include
severe injury or death.
Ensuring the proper use of these
Products is beyond the control of OMRON
Automation and Safety and it is the
responsibility of the purchaser, installer
and employer, to meet all local, state and
federal government laws, rules, codes and
regulations relating to the proper installation,
use, and maintenance of these Products
and the guarded machine. Please see the
specific Installation and Operation Manual
for each of these Products for additional
information. Manuals are shipped with the
Products and can also be found on our web
site at www.sti.com.
The purchaser is also responsible for the
selection and training of qualified personnel*
necessary to properly install, operate and
maintain the Products and the associated
guarded machines.
All application examples described within
this publication are for illustration purposes
only. Actual installations will differ from those
indicated.
Call OMRON Automation and Safety for
assistance.
*Qualified personnel is defined as “an
individual who, as a result of training and
experience, understands and demonstrates
competence with the design, construction,
operation or maintenance of the machine
and the associated hazards.” (ANSI
B11.19-2010 - Performance Criteria for
Safeguarding)

This document contains proprietary information
protected by copyright. No part of this document
may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system or translated into any
language, in any form or by any means without
prior written permission from OMRON Automation and Safety. OMRON Automation and Safety
reserves the right to make changes to the specifications, product and software described within this
catalog at any time without obligation of OMRON
Automation and Safety to notify any person of such
revisions or changes. OMRON Automation and
Safety also reserves the right to make changes or
revisions to the material contained in this catalog
and cannot be held liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the furnishing,
performance, or use of this material.
© Copyright, 2014 by OMRON Electronics LLC.
All rights reserved.

3. Performance Data. Data presented in Omron
Company websites, catalogs and other materials is
provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may
represent the result of Omron’s test conditions, and
the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the
Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

www.sti.com/info

iii

Index by Name

Product Selection Guide

Index by Name
A4E..................................................... M-2
A4EG.................................................. M-3
A22E.................................................... H-9
A22TK............................................. G-120
A165E.................................................. H-3
Access Guarding, Perimeter............... C-1
Accessories, Light Curtains.............. D-68
Accessories, Programmable Controllers. K-35
Accessories, Safety Interlock............. G-1
Area Guarding and Safety Mats.......... F-1
Bumpers & Edges............................... E-1
Capacitive Palm Button....................... L-2
CM Series......................................... G-53
Controllers, Programmable Safety...... K-1
Controllers, Safety Edges.................. E-10
Curtains, Safety Light.......................... D-1
D4B-□N........................................... G-89
D4F................................................... G-89
D4GS-N............................................ G-98
D4JL................................................... G-6
D4JL-SK/D4NS-SK......................... G-121
D4N.................................................. G-90
D4NH................................................ G-52
D4NL................................................ G-15
D4N-□R........................................... G-98
D4NS................................................ G-99
D4NS-SK/D4JL-SK......................... G-121
D4SL-N............................................. G-25
D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS....................... G-65
DeviceNet Safety................................. K-1
DST1.................................................. K-33
EC Series.......................................... G-52
Edges & Bumpers............................... E-1
Emergency Stop Devices.................... H-1
Enabling Switch Devices.................... M-1
ER1022.............................................. H-17
ER1032.............................................. H-17
ER5018.............................................. H-18
ER6022.............................................. H-21
ER6022-SS........................................ H-24
E-Stops................................................ H-1
Ethernet/IP-DeviceNet Router........... K-34
Explosion-Proof Switch....................... G-1
F3SJ-A............................................... D-37
F3SJ-B............................................... D-27
F3SJ-E............................................... D-20
Fixed Terminal Relays......................... J-1
Floor Stands...................................... D-73
Force-Guided Relays........................... I-1
G7SA.................................................... I-3
G7S-□-E.............................................. I-9
G7Z..................................................... I-16
G9SA................................................. J-26
G9SP................................................. K-18
G9SP Display, H-T40M-P.................. K-28
G9SX................................................... J-5

G9SX-GS........................................... J-15
G9SX Modular Safety Systems............ J-1
G9SX-NS/D40Z/D40A....................... G-65
G9SX-SM........................................... J-25
Guarding, Area & Mats........................ F-1
Guarding, Perimeter Access............... C-1
Guardlocking Switches...................... G-1
Hinge Pin Switches............................. G-1
H-T40M-P Display for G9SP.............. K-28
Interlock Switches.............................. G-1
I/O Terminals..................................... K-33
IP67 Enclosures................................. D-75
IP-DeviceNet/Ethernet Router........... K-34
J7KNA-AR.......................................... I-12
Laser Alignment Tool......................... D-68
Laser Scanners................................... B-1
Light Curtain Accessories................. D-68
Light Curtains...................................... D-1
Limit Switches..................................... G-1
MA Series......................................... G-82
MA-S Series...................................... G-88
Mat Controller, MC............................. F-12
Mats & Area Guarding......................... F-1
MC Safety Mat Controllers................. F-12
MFS.................................................. G-88
Mirrors, Light Curtains....................... D-69
Modular Safety Systems, G9SX........... J-1
Monitoring Relays................................ J-1
MS4800............................................. D-46
Multi-Beam Devices............................ C-1
NE1A................................................. K-29
NE1A-EDR01..................................... K-34
NE1A-EIP........................................... K-33
Non-Contact Switches........................ G-1
NX-S.................................................... K-4
OS32C................................................. B-6
OS32C Overview................................. B-3
PA4600................................................ C-3
PA4600-BB.......................................... C-7
Palm Button......................................... L-2
Perimeter Access Guarding................ C-1
Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts.. I-1
Power Supplies.................................. D-68
Programmable Safety Controllers....... K-1
Protective Shields, Weld Slag........... D-74
Relays, Force-Guided.......................... I-1
Relays, Safety Monitoring.................... J-1
Removable Terminal Relays................ J-1
Reset Switches.................................. D-68
Resource Modules Overview............ D-63
RM-1.................................................. D-65
RM-2.................................................. D-65
RM-2AC & RM-2AC-IP....................... D-65
RM-3.................................................. D-66
RM-4.................................................. D-66
RM-6.................................................. D-67

www.sti.com/info

RM-X.................................................. D-67
Safety Bumpers................................... E-9
Safety Controllers, Programmable...... K-1
Safety Edge Controllers..................... E-10
Safety Edges....................................... E-2
Safety Edges, Bumpers & Controllers. E-1
Safety Interlock Switches................... G-1
Safety I/O Terminals.......................... K-33
Safety Laser Scanners........................ B-1
Safety Light Curtains........................... D-1
Safety Limit Switches.......................... G-1
Safety Mats & Area Guarding.............. F-1
Safety Monitoring Relays..................... J-1
Safety Over EtherCAT Safety Controller. K-1
Safety Selector Switch........................ G-1
Scanners, Safety Laser....................... B-1
Selector Switch................................... G-1
Shock Mount Kits............................... D-68
Single-Beam Devices.......................... C-1
SR101A.............................................. J-32
SR103AM........................................... J-33
SR104P.............................................. J-37
SR105E.............................................. J-37
SR106ED........................................... J-41
SR108AD & SR109AD....................... J-38
SR120MP........................................... J-41
SR125SMS45..................................... J-42
SR131A.............................................. J-45
SR201A.............................................. J-45
SR203M & SR203AM......................... J-46
SR208AD & SR209AD....................... J-46
SR223SMT......................................... J-47
SR231A.............................................. J-47
Stand-Alone Safety Controller............. K-1
Stop Devices, Emergency................... H-1
Switches, Safety Interlock.................. G-1
T2008............................................. G-107
T4012............................................. G-112
T4016............................................. G-112
T5007............................................. G-113
T5009 & T5009-6............................ G-114
Test Objects....................................... D-68
TL4019............................................. G-43
TL4024............................................. G-51
Tongue Switches................................ G-1
TouchStart™ Palm Button.................... L-2
Trip Cords............................................ H-1
Two-Hand Control................................ L-1
UMQ Series Safety Mat System.......... F-2
Weld Slag Protective Shields............ D-74
WS02-CFSC1-E................................. K-34
XER1022............................................ H-24
XER1032............................................ H-25
XER6022 & 6022-SS.......................... H-25
XT5009........................................... G-121

Index by Product

Product Selection Guide

Index by Product
Safety Laser Scanners
Selection Guide.....................................B-2
OS32C Overview...................................B-3
OS32C...................................................B-6
Perimeter Access Guarding
Selection Guide.....................................C-2
Single-Beam Devices
PA46-1-000............................................C-3
Multi-Beam Devices
PA4600..................................................C-3
PA4600-BB............................................C-7
Safety Light Curtains
Selection Guide.....................................D-2
Type 4 Light Curtains
F3SJ Overview.......................................D-5
F3SJ-E.................................................D-20
F3SJ-B.................................................D-27
F3SJ-A.................................................D-37
MS4800...............................................D-46
Light Curtain Resource Modules
Resource Modules Overview..............D-63
RM-1....................................................D-65
RM-2, RM-2AC & RM-2AC-IP..............D-65
RM-3....................................................D-66
RM-4....................................................D-66
RM-6....................................................D-67
RM-X....................................................D-67
Accessories.......................................D-68
Safety Edges and Bumpers
Safety Edges......................................... E-2
Safety Bumpers..................................... E-9
Safety Edge Controllers....................... E-10
Safety Mats and Area Guarding
UMQ Series........................................... F-2
MC Controllers..................................... F-12
Safety Interlock Switches
Selection Guide.................................... G-2
Guardlocking Switches
D4JL..................................................... G-6
D4NL.................................................. G-15
D4SL-N............................................... G-25
TL4019............................................... G-43
TL4024............................................... G-51
Hinge Pin Switches
D4NH.................................................. G-52

Non-Contact Switches
EC Series............................................ G-52
CM Series........................................... G-53
D40Z/D40A/G9SX-NS......................... G-65
MA Series........................................... G-82
MA-S Series........................................ G-88
MFS.................................................... G-88
Safety Limit Switches
D4B-□N............................................. G-89
D4F..................................................... G-89
D4N.................................................... G-90
D4N-□R............................................. G-98
Tongue Switches
D4GS-N.............................................. G-98
D4NS.................................................. G-99
T2008............................................... G-107
T4012............................................... G-112
T4016............................................... G-112
T5007............................................... G-113
T5009 & T5009-6.............................. G-114
Safety Selector Switch
A22TK............................................... G-120
Explosion-Proof Switch
XT5009............................................. G-121
Accessories
D4NS-SK/D4JL-SK........................... G-121
Accessories...................................... G-122
Emergency Stop Devices
Selection Guide.....................................H-2
E-Stops
A165E....................................................H-3
A22E......................................................H-9
Trip Cords
ER1022................................................H-17
ER1032................................................H-17
ER5018................................................H-18
ER6022................................................H-21
ER6022-SS..........................................H-24
Trip Cords for Explosive Atmospheres
XER1022..............................................H-24
XER1032..............................................H-25
XER6022 & 6022-SS............................H-25
Force-Guided Relays/
Power Contact with Mirror Contacts

Safety Monitoring Relays
Selection Guide..................................... J-2
G9SX Modular Safety Systems
G9SX..................................................... J-5
G9SX-GS............................................. J-15
G9SX-SM............................................. J-25
Fixed Terminal Relays
G9SA................................................... J-26
SR101A................................................ J-32
SR103AM............................................. J-33
SR104P................................................ J-37
SR105E................................................ J-37
SR106ED............................................. J-41
SR108AD & SR109AD......................... J-38
SR120MP............................................. J-41
SR125SMS45....................................... J-42
SR131A................................................ J-45
Removable Terminal Relays
SR201A................................................ J-45
SR203M & SR203AM........................... J-46
SR208AD & SR209AD......................... J-46
SR223SMT........................................... J-47
SR231A................................................ J-47
Programmable Safety Controllers
Selection Guide.....................................K-2
Safety Over EtherCAT Safety Controller
NX-S......................................................K-4
Stand-Alone Safety Controller
G9SP...................................................K-18
H-T40M-P............................................K-28
DeviceNet Safety
NE1A...................................................K-29
NE1A-EIP.............................................K-33
DST1....................................................K-33
NE1A-EDR01.......................................K-34
WS02-CFSC1-E...................................K-34
Accessories.........................................K-35
Two-Hand Control
TouchStart™ ......................................... L-2
Enabling Switch Devices
A4E....................................................... M-2
A4EG.................................................... M-3

Selection Guide...................................... I-2
Force-Guided Relays
G7SA...................................................... I-3
G7S-□-E................................................ I-9
Power Contactor with Mirror Contacts
J7KNA-AR............................................ I-12
G7Z....................................................... I-16

www.sti.com/info

OMRON AUTOMATION AND SAFETY • THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS • Chicago, IL USA • 847.843.7900 • 800.556.6766 • www.omron247.com
OMRON CANADA, INC. • HEAD OFFICE
Toronto, ON, Canada • 416.286.6465 • 866.986.6766 • www.omron247.com

OMRON ARGENTINA • SALES OFFICE
Cono Sur • 54.11.4783.5300

OMRON ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO • HEAD OFFICE
México DF • 52.55.59.01.43.00 • 01-800-226-6766 • mela@omron.com

OMRON CHILE • SALES OFFICE
Santiago • 56.9.9917.3920

OMRON ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO • SALES OFFICE
Apodaca, N.L. • 52.81.11.56.99.20 • 01-800-226-6766 • mela@omron.com

OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES
54.11.4783.5300

OMRON ELETRÔNICA DO BRASIL LTDA • HEAD OFFICE
São Paulo, SP, Brasil • 55.11.2101.6300 • www.omron.com.br

OMRON EUROPE B.V. • Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD, Hoofddorp, The Netherlands. • +31 (0) 23 568 13 00 • www.industrial.omron.eu

Authorized Distributor:

Automation Control Systems
• Machine Automation Controllers (MAC) • Programmable Controllers (PLC)
• Operator interfaces (HMI) • Distributed I/O • Software
Drives & Motion Controls
• Servo & AC Drives • Motion Controllers & Encoders
Temperature & Process Controllers
• Single and Multi-loop Controllers
Sensors & Vision
• Proximity Sensors • Photoelectric Sensors • Fiber-Optic Sensors
• Amplified Photomicrosensors • Measurement Sensors
• Ultrasonic Sensors • Vision Sensors
Industrial Components
• RFID/Code Readers • Relays • Pushbuttons & Indicators
• Limit and Basic Switches • Timers • Counters • Metering Devices
• Power Supplies
Safety
• Laser Scanners • Safety Mats • Edges and Bumpers • Programmable Safety
Controllers • Light Curtains • Safety Relays • Safety Interlock Switches

Printed on recycled paper.

Y25I-E-02

Note: Specifications are subject to change

Printed in U.S.A.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : Omron
Create Date                     : 2014:04:08 14:25:21-05:00
Keywords                        : STI, Machine and Process Safeguarding, Expert Area, Safety Laser Scanners, Perimeter Access Guarding, Safety Light Curtains, Safety Edges and Bumpers, Safety Mats and Area Guarding, Safety Interlock Switches, Emergency Stop Devices, Force-Guided Relays/Power Contactors with Mirror Contacts.Safety Monitoring Relays, Programmable Safety Controllers, Two-Hand Control, Enabling Switch Devices, Safeguard Integration Services
Modify Date                     : 2014:04:10 16:20:20-05:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Metadata Date                   : 2014:04:10 16:20:20-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Macintosh)
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Omron Machine and Process Safeguarding 2014_2015_Safety_Catalog
Creator                         : Omron
Description                     : Omron Machine and Process Safeguarding 2014_2015_Safety_Catalog
Subject                         : STI, Machine and Process Safeguarding, Expert Area, Safety Laser Scanners, Perimeter Access Guarding, Safety Light Curtains, Safety Edges and Bumpers, Safety Mats and Area Guarding, Safety Interlock Switches, Emergency Stop Devices, Force-Guided Relays/Power Contactors with Mirror Contacts, Safety Monitoring Relays, Programmable Safety Controllers, Two-Hand Control, Enabling Switch Devices, Safeguard Integration Services
Document ID                     : uuid:3e36b4b2-7a21-554b-a93b-bfc63c5216e1
Instance ID                     : uuid:c4f3f20c-d479-114e-8c1d-2e7dc4a5b3d8
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 10.0.1
Page Count                      : 533
Warning                         : [Minor] Ignored duplicate Info dictionary

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Omron Machine And Process Safeguarding 2014_2015_Safety_Catalog 104608 Catalog

100584-Attachment 100584-Attachment 100584-Attachment 006085 Batch8 unilog cesco-content

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation